ee aad

= ; Ee ea eT ieee —
SS SS ee =
Soe Se RES ROSES IOS : : Te

LEE : ~
= a hn eg ee Ms = . bs , =
Se CA aes = = Sore = . :
es 7 : — ————— - — —— 7 ~
x Sa a - = :
PReS > ae -
aes * eee a . ~~ z = 2
: ‘ ———* accel ’ :
be ase ~ ¥ -
- > 3 w - ~ ‘ ~ ~ by
= cox “~~ Sa ied ~ *
aw sents —o= = :
en SY
: pea, aaa
ert

pa cas SE

SEES a ere ToS SE ae Sooo

——

Ot at pen Pe en Saye, pK pike Sire se RASA GRAS

; rs > eae “

on.) ie f
:
ye

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

OF

PHILADELPHIA.

1898.

COMMITTEE ON PUBLICATION:
Tuomas MEEHAN, CHARLES E, Smirn,
Epwarp J. Nouan, M. D., Henry SKINNER, M. D.,

Henry A. PItspry.

Epiror: EDWARD. J. NOLAN, M. D.

0 4
MS
“nA \- -
) ey Vv

PHILADELPHIA:
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES,
LOGAN SQUARE.
1899.

ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA,
January 31, 1899.

I hereby certify that printed copies of the ProceEp1ncs for 1898 have been
presented to the meetings of the Academy and mailed as follows :—

Pages 9 to 152 mailed April 5, 1898, presented April 5, 1898.
“* 153 to 200 ‘* May 3, 1898, . May 3, 1898.
“« 201 to 248 4=‘* June 13, 1898, i June 14, 1898.
“¢ 249t0328 “ July 12, 1898, sé July 12, 1898.
‘¢ 329to344 “ August 2, 1898, ts August 2, 1898.
© 345 to 360 ‘ October 4, 1898, es October 4, 1898.
*« 361 to424 ‘* October 15, 1898, October 18, 1898.

*« 425to456 “ October 29, 1898, A November 1, 1898.

** 457 to 472 ‘* December 12, 1898, « —. December 13, 1898.

‘“* 473to488 ‘* January 13, 1899, a January 17, 1899.

“© 489to504 ‘* January 26, 1899, A: January 31, 1899.
EDWARD J. NOLAN,

Recording Secretary.

DOCKER-FOSTER CO., PRINTERS, PHILA.

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS.

With reference to the several articles contributed by each.

For Verbal Se at Announcements, etc., see General Index.

BaxBeER, C. M. and T. D. ie CocKERELL: A new Wessel.

from New Mexico :

Boyer, CHARLES S. New Species of Diatoms (Plate XXIV)

CaLveERT, Puitie P. Odonata (Dragonflies) from the Indian
Ocean, and from Kashmir, collected by Dr. W. L,
Abbott E

CocKERELL, T. D. A. New and little-known Bees from Wash-
ington State ‘

ConkLin, Epwin G., Pu. D. Environmental nae Sexual
Dimorphism in Crepidula (Plate XXI, XXII,
XXITL)

Corr, Francis R. The Summer Birds of Susequehanna
County, Pennsylvania

Coves, Dr. Extiorr. Notes on Mr. Thomas Meehan’ s Paper
on the Plants of Lewis and Clark’s Expedition across
the Continent, 1804506

Dati, WittiAM H. Synopsis of the Recent and Tertiz ary
Psammobiide of North America F .

On the Genus Halia of Risso :

Fox, Witi1am J. Contributions to a Knowledge of the
eee of Brazil, No. 4—Thynninzw ‘and addi-
tions .

Contributions to a Knowledge of the Hy menoptera of
Brazil, No. 5.—Vespide

HAMILTON, S.Harsert. The Occurrence of Marcasite in
the Raritan Formation

HARSHBERGER, JouHn W., M.D. Botanical ‘Observations on
the Mexican Flora, especially on the Flora of the Valley
of Mexico .

Hoveu, Garry DE N., ‘M.D. The Muscide collected by
Dr. A. Donaldson Smith in Somaliland

GotpsmitH, Epwarp. Volcanic Rocks of Mesozoic Age i in
Pennsylvania (Plates II, I1I, IV, V)

The Petrifaction of Fossil Bones .

Von Ineninc, H. Contributions to the Herpetology of Sao
Paulo, Brazil.—I

JOHNSON, Cras. W. Diptera collected by Dr. A. Donaldson
Smith in Somalil: and, Eastern Africa .

New Cretaceous Fossils from an Artesian Well- -boring at
Mount Laurel, N. J. ‘

JoRDAN, Davip Starr and JAmMEs ALEXANDER GuNN, JR.
List of Fishes collected at the Canary Islands by Mr.
O. F. Cook, with descriptions of four new Species

Keer, Ina A. The Growth of Viburnum lantanoides
Miehx. (Plate XXV)

NETO TT) Description of a new Tethys (Aply sia) (Plate

MEEHAN, Tomas. The Plants of Lewis and Clark’s Expedi-
tion across the Continent, 1804-1806 . ,

Merriam, C. Harr. Descriptions of three new Rodents from
the Olympic Mountains, Washington

Mitter, GerritsS., Jr. List of Bats collected by Dr. W. i
Abbott in Siam . :

Descriptions of five new Phyllostome Bats

A new Chipmunk from Northeastern China

Notes on the Arctic Red-backed Mice ;

Description of a new Genus and Species of Microtine
Rodent from Siberia .

Moors, J. Percy. Hyalodendron navalium, a new Genus
and Species of Euplectellid Sponge (Plates XIX, XX)

PALMER, T. CHALKLEY, Observations on Errant Frustules
of Eunotia major (Plates VI, VII) .

Pirsspry, H. A. Chitons collected by Dr. Harold Heath at
Pacific Grove, near Monterey, California :

A new Land Shell from Clarion Island

New Species of Odontostomus from Brazil aud Argentina.

Margarita Sharpii, a new Alaskan Gastropod 4

PILSBRY, H. A. and E.G. Vanarra. Anatomical Notes on
certain West American Helices (Plate I)

Revision of the North American Slugs: Binneya, Hem-
phillia, Hesperarion, Prophysaon and Anadenulus.
(Plate [X, X, XT-XIT, XU XIV, XV, AVI). :

Materials toward a Natural Classification of the Cylin-
drelloid Snails (Plates X VII, X VIII) ,

Some Cuban Species of Cerion :

Ruoaps, SamueL N. A small Collection of Mammals from
North Eastern China ; ’

A new Grasshopper Mouse from New Mexico. :

Notes on the Fossil Walrus of Eastern North America .

Seaver, Atyry. Notes on Alaskan Water Birds .

SHurELDT, R. W., M. D. Observations on the Classification
of Birds.

Van DeENBURGH, Joun. The Gherrhonotus of the San Lucan
Fauna, Lower California, with Diagnosis of other West
American Species

Birds observed in Central California in the Summer of
1893 .

Woorman, Lewis and Guartes 8.Boyer. Fossil Mollusks
and Diatoms from the Dismal Swamp, Virginia and
North Carolina; Indication of the Geological Age of
the Deposit. With Notes on the Diatoms .

339
482
193

12
352
316
326
348
358
368
430
110
287
354
471
486

67

219

264
475
120
194
196
126

489

63
206

414

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

OF

PHILADELPHIA.

1898.

JANUARY 4.
Mr. Cuar_es Morris in the Chair.
Twenty-five persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :-—

“Contributions to a Knowledge of the Hymenoptera of Brazil,
No. 4, Thynninae and additions,” by William J. Fox.

“ The Summer Birds of Susquehanna Co., Penna.,” by Francis R.

Cope, Jr.

The Council reported that the following Standing Committees
had been appointed to serve during the ensuing year :—

On Liprary.—Charles P. Perot, Arthur Erwin Brown, Thomas
A. Robinson, Henry C. Chapman, M. D., Dr. C. Newlin Peirce.

Ow Pustications.—Thomas Meehan, Charles E. Smith, Henry
“1 A. Pilsbry, Henry Skinner, M. D., Edward J. Nolan, M. D,
2

10 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898,

Ow Instruction AND Lecrurrs.—Uselma C. Smith, Benjamin
“Smith Lyman, Samuel G. Dixon, M. D., Philip P Calvert and
Samuel N. Rhoads.

STANDING COMMITTEE OF CouNCIL oN By-Laws.—Isaac J.
Wistar, Theodore D. Rand, Arthur Erwin Brown, Benjamin
Sharp, M. D.

The Birdsboro Trap Quarries.—Mr. Turopore D. RAnp re-
marked that the increasing demand for good roads has caused search
to be made for the best material conveniently available. Not long
ago Mr. John T. Dyer who has long wrought the extensive lime-
stone quarries near Howellville, Chester Co., undertook the quarry-
ing of trap rock on Hay Creek, a little over a mile southwest of
Birdsboro, near Reading, Pa. The trap, probably a diabase, has
come up through the Red Rocks, forming high hills on both sides of
the creek, the valley of which has enabled the Wilmington and
Northern R. R. to descend into the Schuylkill Valley. The re-
markable feature of this trap is the evidence of intense dynamic ac-
tion more recent than the rock itself. There are three quarries,
two on the right and one on the left bank of the creek.

The lower quarries show breasts of about a hundred feet in height,
increasing as the quarrying proceeds further into the steep and high
hills. Everywhere, except some portions of the upper quarry, the
rock is very full of joints, the major striking N. 65° E., the others
seemingly in almost every direction, as if the rock had been crushed
by a very sudden pressure. The joints show, usually, slickensides
on their surfaces, but there is strong cohesion through the joints,
but much less than through the rock itself. These joints, of course,
greatly facilitate the quarrying and crushing, though sometimes in-
terfering with the drilling. At the upper quarry some rock was
seen much resembling that of French Creek, and capable, like it, of
being quarried in large and regular masses. in this quarry, also,
were found some specimens of heulandite and probably laumontite,
giving promise of fine specimens.

The present output of the quarries is eleven hundred tons of crushed
stone per day. The consumption of this large amount shows the
remarkable increase in the use of this material.

A striking feature was the cleanliness of these quarries. The
blasting is done usually twice a day, but after each blast some of
the quarrymen are detailed to fork up the fragments, so that the
horses and carts travel over a smooth and level surface. The horses
were of a quality rarely seen in quarry work, and evidently were
well cared for and well treated, while the men worked industriously,
without the vigorous language too often heard in quarrying opera-
tions.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 11

JANUARY 11.
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-seven persons present.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—

“Proceedings of a Meeting held in Commemoration of Doctor
Harrison Allen and Doctor George Henry Horn.”?

“Fossil Mollusks and Diatoms beneath the Dismal Swamp,
Virginia and North Carolina,” by Louis Woolman, with Notes on
the Diatoms, by Charles S. Boyer.

JANUARY 18.
The President, Samuet G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair.
One hundred and thirty-five persons present.
The deaths of Crawford Arnold and John K. Valentine, mem-
bers, were announced.

Dr. Persifor Frazer made a communication, illustrated with
lantern slides, on “Glimpses of Russia in Europe, Asia, and Asia
Minor.” (No abstract. See Proceedings, 1897, p. 405.)

JANUARY 25.
CHARLES ScHAEFFER, M. D., in the Chair.
‘Fourteen persons present.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—

“On a small Collection of Mammals from Northeastern China,”
by Samuel N. Rhoads.

“Notes on Alaskan Water Birds,” by Alvin Seale.

Israel W. Morris, Charles G. Sower, D. M. Castle and Caroline
A. Burgin were elected members.

The following was ordered to be printed :—

———_ — ——_— — —

' Ordered to be printed in the Proceedings for 1897. See page 505 et seq..

12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

THE PLANTS OF LEWIS AND CLARK’S EXPEDITION ACROSS THE CON-
TINENT, 1804-1806.

BY THOMAS MEEHAN,

The expedition of Captains Merewether Lewis and William
Clark, from what was then the village of St. Louis, to the sources
of the Mississippi and across to the Pacific Coast, was one of the
marvels in the early history of the American Republic. The inte-
rior of the continent was utterly unknown. That it was surely in-
habited by wild races of men, and that wild beasts roamed through
its trackless forests, comprised almost all that could be told about
it. <A little band of some half hundred men was detailed to explore
these dark corners of our recently acquired territory in face of the
fact that they would be lost to home and civilization for several
years. Captain Lewis started from Washington to take charge of
the party on the 5th of July, 1803. They crossed the continent,
reaching the mouth of the Columbia River, and with the loss of but
one man, returned and arrived at St. Louis on the 23d of Septem-
ber, 1806. ‘To carry a band of men such as he commanded safely
through a journey of so many miles, over a period of three years,
and in a strange country inhabited by wild people whose habits and
character were wholly unknown, and where the subsistence for his
men must have been a continual source of anxiety, called for cool-
ness, good judgment, and executive ability of no mean order. It is
a question whether the services of these great men—Lewis, and his
able coadjutor, Clark—have ever been fully appreciated by the
country they served. To aid somewhat in doing full justice to the
memories of these great explorers has been one of the inducements
to prepare the present paper, which it is hoped may also be regarded
as a contribution to botanical history.

The idea of exploration originated with Jefferson. In 1792 he
tried to interest the American Philosophical Society in the plan.
It was approved, and it was decided to place the expedition in
charge of André Michaux. Reasons of State policy arising out of
our relation with Michaux’s country, caused its abandonment.
Lewis was Jeflerson’s private Secretary, and under him the expedi-

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 13

tion finally started. Among his other instructions from Jefferson,
they were to note the food plants of the Indians and the “ dates at
which particular plants put forth flowers and leaves.” If only they
had been authorized to make complete botanical collections, and a
competent collector made part of the expedition, bow great a boon
would it not have been to botanical science! From the few they
did collect, Pursh in his “Flora Americ Septentrionalis,” pub-
lished in London in 1814, refers to 119, many of which he de-
scribed as wholly new.

What became of the complete collection has never been defi-
nitely ascertained up to this time. Pursh says in his preface to the
work cited, that after his return from his expedition to the Great
Lakes in 1806, Captain Lewis gave him the collection in order to
describe and figure those he thought to be new. ‘The collection
was made during the rapid return from the Pacific. A much more
extensive one made on their slow ascent toward the Rocky Mount-
ains and the chains of the northern Andes, had unfortunately been
lost, by being deposited among other things at the foot of these
mountains. The loss of this fine collection is the more to be regret-
ted, when I consider that the small collection communicated to me,
consisting of about 150 specimens, contained but about a dozen
plants well known to be natives of North America.” It was under-
stood that Pursh took these plants to England, and that they were
left by him to Mr. A. B. Lambert, Vice-President of the Linnzan
Society, under whose roof, and by whose uid, Pursh’s great work was
completed. Lambert's herbarium was finally distributed, and, in
some way not known to the writer, a number of Lewis’ plants,
forming Pursh’s types, and marked “from Lambert’s Herbarium ”
became part of the Herbarium of the Academy of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia.

Two years ago Professor C. 8. Sargent suggested to the writer
the possibility of some of the material being yet in the custody of
the American Philosophical Society. The special attention to nat-
ural history of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia
—the leading members of this and the American Philosophical
Society being the same—has not warranted the formation of natural
history collections by the latter. After long and diligent search,
packages of plants were found which could only be these, as the
localities on the label slips were about the same as those given in
Pursh’s work. But the hand-writing was that of a German, and

‘

14 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

occasionally there would be a reference to a genus or family of
plants exhibiting more botanical knowledge than Captain Lewis or
any one in his command was known to possess. The plants are
in the original packages as presented many years ago. The paper
on which the specimens were placed had been in botanical use
before. On one of these was written the following expense bill :—

May 26. Books and paper. ...-..... «te 200

Stagefare. .. . SR sak ae OK sey

Expenses that sits 5 stg cS ead |) Ce 37

May 27. Expenses on the road to Easton. .... 1 00
May 28, 29, 30. Easton, including breakfast 31, and

Rappers 2s. bs tae By ee ee eee 4 37

May31. Richmond dinner, supper, folgint anddrinks 1 00

It so happened that I had the pleasure of giving to the public in
the Gardener’s Monthly of 1869, what was believed to be Pursh’s
diary of his trip to the Great Lakes. It commences by saying May
26th, ‘‘prepared myself for the journey,” and 27th, “at 4
o’clock this morning we left Philadelphia, the stage being remarka-
ble full of passengers”—“ arrived at 10 o’clock at Easton.” On
another sheet was found written, as if trying the virtue of a new
quill pen, “ Frederick Pursh, his hand.” There could be no doubt
about these being Lewis’ plants, and that they had been through
Pursh’s hands. It was still a mystery how Pursh came to make all
the memoranda incident to the collecting of each specimen, on each
of these labels. -

With the freedom of three-quarters of a century the museum
beetles had made sad work in the bundles. In a few cases the speci-
imens had been wholly reduced to dust, and only fragments were left
in other cases. Generally, however, they were in fair condition.
The Philosophical Society wisely accepted a proposition to deposit
these and other collections with the Academy of Natural Sciences,
where they would be properly cared for.

The collection was, as Pursh stated, made for the most part on the
return trip. Many specimens, as the labels show, were collected
and saved between the Rocky Mountains and Fort Clatsop, their
winter quarters near the Columbia River.

While in doubt as to the authorship of the labels attached to
the specimens, note was made of an entry in the minutes of the
American Philosophical Society under date of Noy. 15, 1805, that
a box of plants was received from Captain Merewether Lewis.. The

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15

seeds were sent to Mr. William Hamilton, and the “ Hortus Siccus
referred to Dr. Barton to examine and report.” <A full examina-
tion of the collection, revealed this package also. It contained the
plants collected in 1804 between St. Louis and Fort Mandan.
Pursh had evidently been over this, as in many instances the labels
were similar to those in the other package; but a number had the
original memoranda in the hand-writing of Captain Lewis. These
were written wholly across the sheet containing the specimens.
Pursh had evidently copied them in order to have small compact
labels for the specimens, and while doing so, had occasionally added
the more technical botanical points already adverted to. He
evidently studied these collections before starting to Europe with
them, leaving the duplicates, where there were any, and those which
were too imperfect to be easily recognized. A comparison of
Lewis’s own labels and Pursh’s copies shows that the latter were
not always strictly copied—differences can be seen in the compari-
sons made in the Catalogue. Pursh’s notes were probably made
from Lewis’s original memoranda carried away with the speci-
mens, and are, therefore the more likely to be the exact statements
of the collectors, than the copies left with these.

After determining the plants in the collection as far as I could,
considering the fragmentary condition of many of them, I handed
them over for correction to Dr. B. L. Robinson of the Gray
Herbarium. With their return, I received the following letter.

“ The identification of the Lewis and Clark plants has now been
completed and I am happy to be able to send you a list, as Mr.
Greenman and I understand them. We have worked over the
plants together for greater accuracy, discussing almost every
specimen. In any reference to work done here upon the plants,
kindly associate the name of Mr. Greenman with my own. The
plan of the list is to show in double columns :—1st, what the plant
actually is, according to present ideas of classification, then the
actual locality and date which the accompanying label bears;
2nd, in the other column, is shown what Pursh appears to have
called the plant in his Flora, provided he mentioned it clearly ; also
the locality and date which he there ascribed to it. I think that
the advantage of this parallel column presentation of this impor-
tant collection will be readily evident to you.

Perbaps the most interesting find in the collection is the unlabelled
Clematis. Now as thisis the only Clematis represented, and the only

16 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898,

one mentioned by Pursh as having been collected by Lewis and Clark
was his C. hirsutissima, there is every reason to believe that this is
the real type (or portion of type) of C. hirsutissima Pursh. But
the specimen is certainly C. Douglasii Hook., a later species, and
not Anemone patens, as it has been traditionally interpreted. On
reading the description of (. hirsulissima in Pursh’s Flora it is
impossible to doubt that it refers to C. Douglasii with its 4 sepals,
not Anemone patens with its 5 to 8 sepals. This fact was, I think,
guessed by Mr. Coville, some years ago, but I fail to find any pub-
lication of it. Certainly Prof. Britton in his Flora does not challenge
the identity of Anemone patens, var. Nutlalliana with Clematis hir-
sutissima, for he still keeps up his Anemone hirsutissima (Pursh)
Britton. '

It seems only right that C. Douglasii Hook. should give place to
the older and well described (although long misunderstood) C. hir-
sutissima Pursh. This is certainly an interesting point. Perhaps
before publishing it, it might be courteous to Mr. Coville to inquire
whether he had already published or had in press anything on the
subject, which is unlikely. Some reference also might be made
to the fact that he had’ independently and without a knowledge of
Lewis’s type discovered from the description the probable identity
of C. hirsutissima Pursh.

In the list, Anemone quinquefolia is used to mean all N. American
“ A. nemorosa,” not in the sense in which Pursh understood it,
namely as covering only the quinquefoliolate form.

The type of Cleome serrulata Pursh (at least one of the specimens)
shows slight serrulation of the leaves, so that the name ought not to
give place to the later C. integrifolia Torr. & Gray, although the
latter is, in general, more appropriate, or would be if the authors had
only written integrifoliolata.

The specimen of Lewisia triphylla ( Claytonia triphylla Wats.) ex-
tends the known range of the species to Idaho.

Pursh’s Oxytropis argentata is evidently larger thau O. nana Nutt.
to which it has traditionally been referred, and also has longer, more
slender calyx lobes. Perhaps these are only varietal differences.
Their value can be told only by some one with a monographic
knowledge of the genus.

Strangely enough Pursh’s Pedicularis elata looks exceedingly like
P. scopulorum Gray from a very different range. It is certainly
not P. bracteosa Benth. to which it is traditionally referred.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 17

There are two species of Festuca upon which we cannot give any
definite opinion; might they not be referred to Prof. Scribner at
Washington ?

The alga (Egregia Menziesii) was identified by Dr. Farlow.

Various other points will be apparent to you from the list. Pos-
sibly you will be able to identify still more of the plants (as now
named) with the descriptions of Pursh’s Flora.

I wish once more to express my gratitude to you for the great
privilege of examining this remarkably valuable and interesting
collection. The plants, carefully packed, are to-day returned.”

The work by Messrs Robinson and Greenman is so carefully and
thoroughly done, that I have used their manuscript. I have added
by way of notes, such matters as may not have been covered by the
work of these good friends.

LEWIS AND CLARK PLANTS AS DETERMINED BY B. L. ROBINSON
AND J. M. GREENMAN AT THE HERBARIUM OF HARVARD
UNIVERSITY, OCTOBER, 1897.

Present name of plant, followed Treatment of plant in Pursh’s

by data on accompanying labels.
Bracketed notes added during
identification.

Anemone Canadensis L.

(A. Pennsylvanica L.). Prai-
ries; in the camp near the old
Maha village, August 17, 1804.’
Anemone quinquefolia L.

On the waters of the Koos-
kooskee, June 15, 1806. [Flow-
ering stem with involucre].

Clematis Douglasii Hook.

{No label; a single flower, but
well identifiable].

Flora, whenever specifically men-
tioned. Bracketed notes added
during identification.

[== with searcely adoubt (. hir-
sutissima Pursh, Fl. 385, being
the only species ascribed to
Lewis’ herbarium ]. On the plains
of the Columbia River. Y%. May,
v. s. in Herb. Lewis.

1 Pursh describes Anemone tenella F1., 386, “from the banks of the Missouri,

Mr. Lewis,—May.”’

men is the typ of his tenella.

[ A tenella is regarded by Hooker as synonymous with A.
dichotoma L., which Dr. Robinson refers to A. Canadensis L. ” A.
is not noted in the //ora as being from “ Lewis.”’

dichotoma
It is possible this speci-

18 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Delphinium Menziesii DC.

On the Columbia, April 14,
1806. <A sort of Larkspur with
3 styles. [Poor specimen].
Dentaria tenella Pursh.

Columbia near quicksands,
April 1, 1806. [Complete, very
slender plant.’

Erysimum asperum DC,

On the Kooskooskee, June 1,
1806. [Whole plant, in flower ].*
Cleome integrifolia Torr. & Gray.

Cleome serrulata var. roseus,
Nova species. Specimens from
White River, August 29, 1806.
Cleome. A new species. [Poor
specimen ].

Cleome integrifolia Torr. & Gray.

No. 43, August 25th, growth
of the open prairies. Open prai-
ries, August 25, 1804.

Cerastium sous L.
Plains of Columbia, April 22,
1806. [Good specimen].

[1898,

Pursh, F].439. On the banks
of theColumbia. Y%. Apr.v.s.
in Herb. Lewis.

E. lanceolatum Pursh, FI. 436
(not R. Br.). On the banks of
the Missouri. ¢. June, v.38.

CO. serrulata Pursh, Fl. 441.
On the banks of the Missouri.
©. Aug. v.s.in Herb. Lewis.
[Leaves are slightly serrulate
and name should stand].

CO. serrulata Pursh, Fl. 441.
On the banks of the Missouri.
©. Aug. v.s. in Herb. Lewis.

[Pursh says of it: glabra,
which is certainly true of the
stem, and it may, therefore, be
safely separated from the very
pubescent plant Polanisia trachy-
sperma T. & G. (?) with which
the specimen is mixed }.

C. elongatum Pursh, Fl. 321.
On the plains of Columbia River,
M. Lewis. 2%. April, v. s. in
Herb. Lewis.*

*The specimen from which the description was evidently taken, in the
herbarium of the Academy, has not the tuberous root as this has.

3 Erysimum asperum DC.

Pursh has overlooked this specimen from ‘ Rockford Camp, April 17,
1806,” and describes E. lanceolatum, which is not distinct, from the collection

of Bradbury on the Missouri.
* Cerastium arvense L.

Cerastium elongatum Pursh, I, 321, ‘‘ on the plains of the Columbia River,

Mr. Lewis, April.”
April 22, 1806.”

The label with specimen reads * Plains of Columbia,
Modern collators give it asa synonym of C. arvense, but
with the excellent specimen now in hand, it seems to be a good species.
not merely hirsute, but glandular viscid in all its parts.

It is
Its remarkably long

uarrow leaves, very leafy nodes with short internodes, are characters which it
does not share with any forms of C. arvense in our herbarium.

1898.]

Malvastrum coccineum (Gray.

A small malvaceous plant,
probably a species of Malope.
Plains of Missouri, July 20, 1806.
[Good specimen ].

Linum Lewisii Pursh.

Perennial Flax. Valleys of
the Rocky Mountains, July 9,
1806. [Excellent specimen].

Claytonia lanceotata Pursh.

Headwaters of the Kooskoos-
kee, June 27, 1806. [Good spec-
imen].

Lewisia triphylla Rob.

On the waters of the Koos-
kooskee within the Rocky Mount-
ains, June 27, 1806. (Claytonia
triphylla Wats.). [Extends
range to Idaho].

Lewisia rediviva Pursh.

The Indians eat the root of
this. Near Clark’s River, July,
1, 1806. The calyx consists of
6 or 7 leaves, the corolla many
petals and stamens... . capsule.
[Several flowers only ].

5 Linum Lewisii Pursh.
“ Perennial flax.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 19

Cristaria coccinea Pursh, FI.
453. On dry prairies and ex-
tensive plains of Missouri. 2%.
Aug. v. v., v. s. in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh. Fl. 210. In the val-
leys of the Rocky Mountains and
on the banks of the Missouri, M.
Lewis, 2%. July, v.v.°

Pursh, Fl. 175, t. 3. On the
Rocky Mountains, M. Lewis. 2.
July, v. s. in Herb. Lewis.®

Pursh, Fl. 368. On the banks
of Clark’s River. %. July, v.
s. in Herb. Lewis.

Valleys of the Rocky Mountains, July 19, 1806.”

Pursh I, 210, adds to the above, ‘‘and on the Banks of the Missouri, July,

Mr. Lewis.

Flowers large, blue, a very good perennial, and it might proba-

bly become a useful plant if cultivated.”

® Ulaytonia perfoliata Don.

“On the Columbia, moist ground, March 26, 1806.”
been in some confusion with his Claytonias.
Rocky Mountains. April and May,”

** Rocky Camp, April 17, 1806,”
Claytonia lanceolata Pursh

‘*On the headwaters of the Kooskooskee, June 27,
“On the Rocky Mountains, Mr. Lewis, June.”

Pursh seems to have
He quotes ‘ Mr. Lewis, on the
There is another specimen labelled

1806." Pursh says:
Hooker, noting the flowers,

which do not correspond with the present specimens, refers the whole asa
synonym of ©. Caroliniana, which the flowers on the picture at p. 175 of
Pursh’s Flora certainly resemble. The flowers are, however, subumbellate,
and the species is certainly a good one.
Claytonia Siberica L.

‘*Columbia River, April 8, 1806.” Pursh, describing his C. lanceolata,
says, ‘‘in the collection of A. B. Lambert, Esq., | found a specimen collected

20 _ PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Montia parviflora Howell, form.

On the Columbia, in moist
ground, March 26, 1806. [A
very poor and indefinite speci-
men].

Montia parviflora Howell.
Rocky camp, April 17, 180s.
[Good specimen ].

Montia Sibirica Howell.
Columbia River, April 8, 1806.
[Fair specimen ].

Pachystima Myrsinites Raf.

Rocky Mountains, June 16,
1806. 4

Pachystima Myrsinites Raf.

A small shrub about 4 feet
high with a small purple berry,
evergreen. Near the Pacific
Ocean, November 16,1805. [Sec-
ond specimen ].

Ceanothus velutinus Dougl.

An evergreen ; a shrub about
8 or 9 feet high. On the Rocky
Mountains ; waters of the Koos-
kooskee. [Probably not C.
sanguineus Pursh, although that
species collected by Lewis on the
upper Missouri does not appear
in collection. |

(1898,

Claytonia perfoliata Pursh
(not Don.), Fl. 176. On the
Rocky Mountains, M. Lewis. ©.
April, May, v. v. in Hort.

Claytonia alsinoides Pursh, Fl.
175. On the Columbia River,
M. Lewis. ©. May, June, v.
v.in Hort.

Ilex? myrsinites Pursh, FI.
119. On the Rocky Mountains
and near the Pacific Ocean, M.
Lewis. kh. July, August, v. s.
in Herb. Lewis.’

Paresh, Fi; Le;

in the eastern parts of Siberia perfectly agreeing with the present species.”
He evidently had this in mind when writing of C. lanceolata.

Claytonia linearis Doug.

“ On the waters of the Kooskooskee within the Rocky Mountains, June 27,
1806,” another wholly overlooked by Pursh.

’ Pursh described it as an Ilex doubtfully, and named Ilex ? myrsinites, and

uotes it as ‘fon the Rocky Mountains, and near the Pacific Ocean, Mr.

ewis, July and August.
Pachystima for it.
name.
crassum,
should be corrected accordingly.

Rafinesque subsequently constructed the genus
No one has been able to explain the derivation of this
In the description of Lewis’ plant, Pursh writes: “Stigma 4-lobum,

Rafinesque, no doubt, wrote Pachystigma, and the orthography

1898.]

Rhamnus Purshiana DC.

A shrub apparently a species
of Rhamnus. About 12 feet high
in clumps; fruit a 5-valved pur-
ple berry, which the natives eat
and esteem highly. The berry
depressed,globous. On the waters
of the Kooskooskee, May 29,
1806.

Rhus Canadensis var. trilobata Gray.

No. 57, October 1, 1804. First
discovered in the neighborhood
of the Kancez River, now very
common. The growth of the lit-
tle copses which appear on the
steep declivities of the hills where
they are sheltered from the rava-
ges of the fire. Common on the
declivity of hills; October 1,
1804.

Cissus Ampelopsis Pers.

Near Council Bluffs, Missouri,
September 14, 1806. [Leaves,
stem, peduncles and_ pedicels.
Lewis’ specimen not mentioned
by Pursh, who gives range of
species as Allegheny Mountains,
Pennsylvania to Carolina].

Acer circinatum Pursh.

A very handsome species of
maple. On the great rapids of
Columbia, October, 1805. [Ster-
ile, but highly characteristic and
unmistakable ].

8 Acer circinatum Pursh.

“A very handsome species of Maple.

bia, October, 1805.”
Columbia River, M. Lewis.
of Acer rubrum.”

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 21

R. alnifolia Pursh (Mot
Michx.), Fl. 166. On the banks
of the Kooskooskee, M. Lewis.
h. May,v.s. in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, Fl. 267. On the great
rapids of Columbia River, M.
Lewis. h. v.s.s. fi.*

On the Grand Rapids of the Colum-

Pursh, Vol. 1, 267, says: “ on the Grand Rapids of the
This beautiful species has the leaves of the size

22 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Acer macrophyllum Pursh,

A large timber tree from the
grand rapids of the Columbia,
April 10, 1806. [A single leaf,
but readily recognizable].

Polygala alba Nutt.

A kind of Seneca snake root.
On the Missouri River, August
10, 1806. [Fairly complete spec-
imen ].

Amorpha fruticosa var. angustifolia

Pursh.

On the great bend of the Mis-
souri, August 27, 1806. [Good
specimen in fruit].

Astragalus Missouriensis Nutt.

No. 36, 18th September.
growth of the high prairies.

The

Astragalus Mortoni Nutt.

No. 46. The growth of the
open prairies, taken 15th of Sep-
tember, 1804. Astragalus nov.

spec. Open prairies, September
5, 1804. May be A. Uralensis ?
L?

Lupinus argenteus Pursh.

On the Cokahlaishkit, July 7,
1806. Flowers yellowish- white.
[Good specimen ].

(1998.

Pursh, Fl. 267. On the great
rapids of the Columbia River, M.
Lewis. kh. April, v.s.

Polygala Seneca var. tenuifolia
Pursh, Fl. 750. On the Missouri,
Lewis and Bradbury, v. s.

Pursh, Fl]. 466, var. y v. s. in
Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, FI. 468. On the banks
of the Kooskooskee, M. Lewis.
y%. June, July, v.s.in Herb.
Lambert. Flowers small, cream
coloured.

9 Astragalus Mortoni Nuttall.

“The growth of the open prairie 15th September, 1804.”
Astralagus tenellus ‘* on the banks of the Missouri, M. Lewis, August.”

Pursh describes
From

the difference in these two observations it is not clear that this specimen is
the one Pursh had in view. Pursh’s 4. teve//us is referred to A. multiflorus
by modern authors, but Pursh’s description of A. fene//us does not accord with
A, multiforus. Thespecimens are badly eaten, but are sufficient to make it
probable 4. /enc//us Pursh, should be referred to 4, AMortoni Nuttall and,
perhaps, the name have priority.

1898.]

Lupinus sericeus Pursh.
cies.

Flowers cream colored with a
small tinge of blue. On the
Kooskooskee, June 5, 1800.
[Tolerable specimen ].

New

spe-

(The labels of these two speci-
mens of Lupinus were confused.)

Oxytropis nana Nutt. var.

Near the head of Clark’s Riv-
er, July, 1806. [Differs from
type in having calyx teeth longer
also plant larger, leaflets longer].

Petalostemon violaceus Michx.

Onthe Missouri, July 22,1806.
[Stem, leaves and spike of flow-
ers].

Petalostemon violaceus Michx.

Found September 2d ; the In-
dians use it as an application to
fresh wounds, they bruise the
leaves adding a little water and
apply it. [Sterile specimen only,
and accordingly doubtful].
Psoralea argophylla Pursh.

No. 48, No. 103, October 17,
1804. A decoction of the plant
used by the Indians to wash their
wounds, [Sterile, but character-
istic specimen ].

Psoralea tenuiflora Pursh.

Big bend of Missouri, Septem-
ber 21, 1804. [Stem and
leaves].

1 Orytropis nana Nutt.

‘* Near the headwaters of Clark’s River, July, 1806.”

Fl. p. 473, as Oxytropis argentata,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 23

Pursh, Fl.468. Onthe banks
of the Kooskooskee, M. Lewis.
y%. July, v.s. in Herb. Lewis.
Flowers pale purple or rose col-
ored.

O. argentata Pursh, Fl. 473.
On the banks of Clark’s River,
M. Lewis. 3%. July, v. s. in
Herb. Lewis."

Pursh, Fl. 461. In Tennessee,
Illinois, and on the banks of the
Missouri. Y%. July, September,
v. Vv.

Pursh, FI. J. ¢.

Pursh, Fl.475. On the banks
of the Missouri. 2%. v.s.

Pursh, F1.475. On the banks
of the Missouri, M. Lewis. Y%.
September, v. s. in Herb. Lewis.

Described by Pursh,

24 PROCEEDINGS OF 'THE ACADEMY OF

Trifolium megacephalum Nutt.

A species of clover near Rock-
ford Camp, on high hills, April
17,1806. [Specimen consists of
a head on peduncle and several
detached leaves].

Trifolium microcephalum Pursh.

Valley of Clark’s River, July
1, 1806. [Good specimen cor-
responds well with later plants
placed in species].

Amelanchier alnifolia Nutt.

Service berry. A small bush,
the narrows of Columbia River,
April 15, 1806.

Crategus Douglasii Lindl.

Deep purple Haw. Columbia

River, April 29, 1806.

Geum triflorum Pursh.

On open ground, common on
the waters of the Kooskooskee,
June 12,1806. No. 2.

Pyrus sambucifolia Cham. & Schlecht ?

On the tops of the highest
peaks and mountains, June 27,

[1898

Lupinaster macrocephalus
Pursh, Fl. 479, t. 23. At the
headwaters of the Missouri, M.
Lewis. 2%. April, May, v.s.
in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, FJ. 478. Onthe banks
of Clark’s River, M. Lewis. 2.
July, v..s. in Herb, Lewis.

Pyrus sanguinea Pursh, FI.
340, in part. In Canada and on
the banks of the Columbia. kh.
April, May, v. v.”

C. glandulosus Pursh, F1. 337,
in part, not Willd. M. Lewis,
Esq., collected it on the Rocky
Mountains.”

Geum ciliatum Pursh, F1. 352.

Onthe banks of the Kooskooskee.
y%. June, v.s.in Herb. Lewis.”

U Amelanchier alnifolia Nutt.

“Service berry; a small bush. The narrows of the Columbia, April 15,

1806 ”
looked this specimen.
Columbia, April, May.”
” Crategus Douglasti Lindley.
** Deep purple Haw.

Columbia River, April 19, 1806.”

Pursh describes this, I, 340, as Pyrus sanguinea, and must have over-
He quotes “in Canada and on the banks of the

A mate to this

specimen is in the Herb. Ac. Nat. Sciences, labelled by Pursh ‘“ Crategus

glandulosa,’ and described as such in flora, I, 337. ‘i
The ‘‘ brown haws berries growing 18 or 20
ina clump” must refer to this species.

Fort Clatsop, January 20, 1806.

3 Geum triforum Pursh.

In the journal dated

‘‘On open ground, common on the waters of the Kooskooskee, June 12,

1806.”

The flowers are scarcely open.

Pursh did not evidently recognize

it in this condition, but drew his description from a Bradbury Missouri

specimen.
ctlialum.

He probably had this specimen in mind when describing his Geumne

1898. ]

1806, in the Rocky Mountains.
[Specimen very poor, sterile, not
precisely determinable].
Potentilia Anserina L.

‘The roots are eaten by the na-
tives, and taste like sweet pota-

toes; grows in marshy ground.
Fort Clatsop, March 13, 1806.

Potentilla fruticosa L.

Prairie of the Knobs; July 5,
1806. [Small but characteristic
specimen J.

Prunus demissa Nutt.

Prunus, a cherry found near
the beaver bents on the Missouri,
August 10, 1806. [Specimen
poor and sterile ].

Prunus Virginiana L.

Prunus, Choak or Pidgeon
Cherry. On the waters of the
Kooskooskee, 29th May, 1806.
[Specimen poor and sterile].
Prunus?

Near the base of the Rocky
mounts on the west side near Col-
lins’s Creek. Theshrub about 6
or 7 feet high; June 27, 1806.
[ Unrecognizable].

Prunus?

A shrub about 6 feet high from
the Kooskooskee, May 7, 1806.
[Unrecognizable; dark purple
stem, elliptic serrulate leaves].
Prunus «p.

A smaller shrub than the
Choak berry, the natives count
it a good fruit. On the Koos-

3

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 25

Pursh, F).355. Onthe banks
of rivers in Canada and on the
waters of the Rocky Mountains,
June, August, Lewis, v. v. in
Hortis, v. s. in Herb. Lewis.

26 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

kooskee, 29th May, 1806. [Too

poor for identification ]."

Purshia tridentata DC.

A shrub common to the open
prairie of the knobs, July 6, 1806.
[Good specimen ].

Rosa Woodsii Lindl.

No. 50. October 18th. The
small rose of the prairies, it rises
from 12 to 14 inches high ; does
not vine. Rosa, open prairies,
September 5, 1804."

Rubus Nutkanus var. velutinus Brew.

A shrub of which the natives
eat the young sprout without
cooking. On the Columbia,
April 15, 1806.

Rubus spectabilis Pursh.

Fruit like a raspberry. Colum-
bia, March 27, 1806. [A fairly
good specimen showing stem,
leaves and flowers].

Spirea discolor Pursh.
A shrub growing much in the
manner of Nine bark. On the

waters of the Kooskooskee, May
29, 1806.

[1898.

Tigarea tridentata Pursh, Fi.
333, t. 15. Inthe prairies of the
Rocky Mountains and on the
Columbia River. kh. July, v.
s. in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, FI. 348, t. 16. Onthe
banks of the Columbia, M. Lewis,
on the northwest coast, Menzies,
kh. April, May, v. s. in Herb.
Lewis nec non Banks.'®

Pursh, Flora, 342. On the
banks of the Kooskooskee. h.
June, July, v. s. in Herb. Lewis. -

M Prunus pumila L.

Though but a single leaf is left with the branch, it is evidently the one

referred to as ‘‘a smalier shrub than the ‘choak’ cherry.

count it good fruit.”
1 Rosa Woodsii Lindley.

The natives ac-

“October 18, 1804. The small rose of the prairies; it rises from 12 to 14
inches, and does not vine.”” Only asmall branch without flower. At this
date they were at or near Fort Mandan. May 18th, at Chopunnish camp,
they ‘ saw the wild roses in bloom,’ but this is probably one of the forms
more closely related to 2. cinnamomea,

16 Rubus spectabilis Pursh.

“Fruit likea raspberry. Columbia, March 27, 1806.” Pursh described and
figured I, p. 348, ‘on the banks of the Columbia.”’ The /ourna/ of June 10th,
at Chopunnish camp, notes that “ purple raspberries were ripe and abundant.”’

1398.]

Philadelphus Lewisii Pursh ?

Ashrub fromthe K ooskooskee,
May 6, 1806. A Philadelphus ?
[Sterile and too poor for certain
identification ].

Philadelphus Lewisii Pursh.

On the waters of Clark’s River,
July 4, 1806. [Fairly good
flowering specimen ].

Ribes aureum Pursb.

Yellow flowering currant.
Near the narrows of the Colum-
bia River, April 16, 1806. [ Very
poor specimen ].

Ribes aureum Pursh.

Yellow currant of the Mis-
souri, July 29,1805. [The thing,
but from date not the type].

Ribes Menziesii Pursh?
Deep Purple Gooseberry.
Columbia River, April 8, 1806.

Ribes sanguineum Pursh.

Columbia, March 27, 1806.

Ribes viscosissimum Pursh.

Fruit indifferent and gummy.
The heights of the Rocky Mount-
ains, June 16, 1806.

" Ribes Menziesit Pursh.
“ Deep purple Gooseberry.
now wholly leafless.

Columbia River, April 8, 1806.”’
Pursh described his species from a specimen collected

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. WT

Pursh, Fl. 329.

Pursh, FI. 329. On the waters
of Clark’s River. kh. July, v.s.
in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, Fl.164. On the banks
of the rivers Missouri and Co-
lumbia, M. Lewis. kh. April, v.
s. in Herb. Lewis, v. v. in Hort.

Pursh, Fl. 164.

Pursh, Fl. 372. [Pursh does
not mention Lewis’ specimen or
its range ].””

Pursh, Fl. 164. On the Co-
lumbia River, M. Lewis. h.
March, v. s. in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, F'1.163. On the Rocky
Mountains in the interior of
North America, M. Lewis. h.

June, v. 8s. in Herb. Lewis."®

Specimens

by Menzies, not perceiving, apparently, the specimen in this collection.
1

Ribes sp.

In the ALetorological Journal, under date of March 27, 1806—‘ The red

flowering currant is in bloom.
in the Rocky Mountains.

This I take to be the same species I first saw
The fruit is a deep purple berry, covered with a
gummy substance, and not agreeably flavored.

There is another species not

covered with gum, which | first found on the headwaters of the Columbia,

about 12th of August last.”

The former is evidently 2. sanguineum.

28 _ PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Clarkia pulchella Pursh.

A beautiful herbaceous plant
from the Kooskooskee and
Clark’s River, June 1, 1806.
[Fair specimen ].

Cnothera cespitosa Nutt.

Near the falls of the Missouri,
17th July, 1806. [Good speci-
men j.

Cnothera heterantha Nutt.

In moist ground on the Squa-
mash flats, June 14, 1806. [Good
specimen ].

Sedum stenopetalum Pursh.

Valley of Clark’s River, July
1, 1806. On the naked rocks of
the Kooskooskee, June 15, 1806.

Angelica, within the Rocky
Mountains in moist places, June
25, 1806. The flowering one
taken on September 3, 1805.
[ Label only ].

[Probably a Peucedanum, poor
specimen, no fruit]. A large,
fusiform root which the natives
prepare by baking; near the
Sepulchre Rock. On the Colum-
bia River, April 14, 1806.
Peucedanum leiocarpum Nutt.

Supposed to be a Smyrnium.
The natives eat the tops and boil

it sometimes with their soup. On
the Columbia, April 15, 1806.

(1898.

Pursh, F). 260, t. 11. On the
Kooskooskee and Clark’s Riy-
ers, M. Lewis. ¢. June,v.s,

O. scapigera Pursh, Fl. 263.
On the falls of the Missouri, M.
Lewis. 2. July, v.s.

O. cespitosa Pursh, Fl. 785.
On the banks of the Missouri, M.
Lewis. %. June, July, v.s. spee-
imen imperfectum in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, Fl. 324. On rocks on
the banks of Clark’s River and
Kooskooskee. 2. June, July, v.
s. in Herb. Lewis.

Smyrnium nudicaule. Pursh,
Fl. 196. On the Columbia
River, M. Lewis. 2%. April,
May, v. s. in Herb. Lewis. The
natives eat the tops of this plant
and boil it in their soups, the
same as we use celery. [Erro-
neously placed under Ferula and
Peucedanum nudicaule Nutt.)

1898. ]
Peucedanum simplex Nutt. (or P. tri-
ternatum Pursh.)

A root 5 or 6 inches long eaten
raw or boiled by the natives. On
the Kooskooskee, May 6, 1806.
[Leaves only, and species very
doubtful. P. triternatum is said
to grow on the waters of the
Columbia].

Peucedanum utriculatum Nutt. ?

A great horse medicine among
the natives. On the Kooskoos-
kee, June 10, 1806. Grows on
rich upland. [Specimen poor
and not certainly identifiable].

An umbelliferous plant of the
root of which the Wallowallows
make a kind of bread. The na-
tives call it Shappalell. April
29, 1806. [Sterile and not
placed ; leaves and root].

[Label only].

A species of Fennel root eaten
by the Indians, of an annis-seed
taste; flowers white. Columbia
River, April 25, 1806.

[ Unidentifiable].

An umbelliferous plant with
large fusiform root which the
natives bake and eat. On the
Columbia, April 15, 1806.
[Unidentifiable, stems only].

An umbelliferous plant, of
which the natives don’t eat the
root. On the Columbia, April
14, 1806.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 29

Phellandrium aquaticum Pursh
(not L.), Fl.195. On the waters
of the Rocky Mountains, M.
Lewis. ¥. July, v. s. in Herb.
Lewis. The Indians of that
country use it as a medicine in
the diseases of horses.

"I suggested no name for this when sending the collection to Dr. Robin-
son, but am now inclined to regard it as Cymopterus campestris Nutt.

There is

no specimen in our herbarium to compare it with.

30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Cornus Canadensis L.
Root horizontal.
1806, Collins Creek.
Lonicera ciliosa Poir.
On the Kooskooskee, June 5,
1806.

June 16,

Lonicera ciliosa Poir.

Rocky Mountains, June 16,
1806. [Poor and sterile, but
characteristic ].”

Lonicera involucrata Banks.

Shrub within the Rocky
Mountains,found in moistground
near branches of rivulets, July
7, 1806. No. 5 found on the
waters of the Columbia, Septem-
ber 2, 1805. The growth of a
moist situation seldom rises
higher than 6 or 8 feet; puts up
a number of succulent sprouts,
forming a thick bush. [Stems
only].

Achillea Millefolium L.

Camp on the Kooskooskee,

May 20, 1806.

Aplopappus spinulosus DC.
Prairies, September 15, 1804.

~Caprifolium ciliosum Pursh.
21 Lonicera ciliosa Poir.

“On the Kooskooskee, June 5, 1806”

[1898,

Caprifolium ciliosum Pursh,
Fl. 160. On the banks of the
Kooskooskee, M. Lewis. kh . June
v. s.in Herb. Lewis.”

Caprifolium ciliosum Pursh,
[but not the type specimen].

A. tomentosa Pursh, (not
Willd.), Fl. 568. On the banks
of the Kooskooskee, M. Lewis. 2.
June, v. s. in Herb. Lewis.”

Amellus spinulosus Pursh, FI.
564. In open prairies on the
Missouri, M. Lewis. 2. August,
September, v. s. in Herb. Lewis

A flowerless branch. Pursh says:

‘©on the banks of the Kooskooskee, M. Lewis, June ; flowers of a deep yel-

low.”’

In the /ourna/, reference is made to ‘‘ the honeysuckle first found on

the Kooskooskee, near the Chopunnish Nation, and again below the Grand
Rapids,” as among the plants of the Pacific coast.

2 Achillea Millefolium L.

‘‘Camp on the Kooskouskee, May 20, 1806.”

Described by Pursh as A.

tomentosa Willd, “on the banks of the Kooskooskee, M. Lewis, June; flowers

Soe

The specimens were evidently white, but turned yellow in drying.

ursh, Fl. II, 563, not 319, as quoted in Gray’s Synoptical Flora.

1898.]

Aplopappus sp.
On the Columbia, October,
1805.

Artemisia cana Pursh.
No. 55. October 2,
Growth of the high bluffs.

1804.

Artemisia cana Pursh.

On the bluffs, October 2, 1804.

Artemisia cana Pursh.

On the bluffs, October 1, 1804.
No. 60. 1804, October Ist.
Another variety of wild sage
growth of high and bottom prai-
ries.

Artemisia dracunculoides Pursh.

No. 52. September 15, 1804.
Growth of the open plains. On
the bluffs, September 15, 1804.
[Good specimen ].

Artemisia frigida Willd.

No. 41 found on the bluffs the
2d of September, 1804, is the
growth of open high situations.
On the bluffs, September 2, 1804.
[Good specimen }.

Artemisia frigida Willd.

No. 51. 1804, October 3d.
Radix perennial; 3 to 8 stalks
as high as the specimen; growth
of the high sides of the bluffs.

Artemisia longifolia Nutt.

Wild sage on the bluffs, Octo-
ber 1, 1804. No. 53. October 3d.
Flavor like the camomile, radix
perennial; growth of the high
bluffs.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 31

Pursh, F]. 521. On the Mis-
souril, M. Lewis. 2%. September,
November, v. s. in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, FI. 1. ¢.

Pursh, FI. 1. ¢.

A.Dracunculus Pursh(not L.),
Fl. 521. On the Missouri, M.
Lewis. 2%. August, October, v.
s. in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, F1.521. On the plains
of the Missouri, M. Lewis. 2.
October, November, v. s. in
Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, FI. |. ¢.

A. integrifolia Pursh (not
Willd.), Fl. 520. On the cliffs
and dry savannahs of the Mis-
souri, M. Lewis. 2s. October, v.
s.in Herb. Lewis. About three
feet high.

32

Artemisia Ludoviciana Nutt. ?
Artemisia species. Columbia

River, April 10, 1806. Artemisia.

Rockford Camp.

Aster oblongifolius Nutt.

Big bend of the Missouri, Sep-
tember 21, 1804.

Aster Oreganus Nutt.

On Lewis River, October,
1805.
Balsamorrhiza sagittata Nutt.

Rocky Mountains, dry hills,
July 7, 1806.

Balsamorrhiza sagittata Nutt.
The stem is eaten by the na-
tives without any preparation.

On the Columbia, April 14, 1806.

[Bidens-like composite, too
poor to identify]. On Lewis’s
River, October, 1805.

Bigelowia graveolens Gray.
A low shrub growing in the

rocky, dry hills on the Koos-
kooskee. May 6, 1806.
Bigelowia graveolens Gray.

No. 54, Oct. 2. Grows from
18 inches to 23 feet, many stalks
from the same root, from which
they issue near the ground; the
radix perennial. The goat or
antelope feed on it in the winter,
it is the growth of the high bluffs.
High bluffs; goats feed upon;
18 inches high. Oct. 2, 1804.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

(1898.

Buphthalmum sagittatum
Pursh, Fl. 564. On dry barren
hills in the Rocky Mountains,
M. Lewis. 2%. June, July, v. s.
in Herb. Lewis. The natives eat
the young stems as they spring
up, raw.

Buphthalmum sagittatum
Pursh, 1. ¢.

Chrysocoma dracunculoides
Pursh (not Lam.), Fl. 517. On
high cliffs on the banks of the
Missouri. M. Lewis. %. Oct.
v.s, in Herb. Lewis.

1898. ]

Bigelowia graveolens var. albicaulis
Gray.
15 Oct. 1805, on the Colum-
bia River.

Cnicus edulis Gray.

Carduus or Thistle-Roots, eat-
able. Fort Clatsop, March 13,
1806.”

Eriophyllum cespitosum Dougl.

On the uplands on the Koos-
kooskee River. June 6, 1806.

Gaillardia aristata Pursh.

Rocky Mountains, dry hills.
July 7, 1806.

Grindelia squarrosa Dunal.

No. 40, taken on the 17th of
August, 1804, at our camp near
the old Maha village, and is the
growth of the prairies. Anony-
mous balsamifera, new genus,
Prairies; in the camp near the
old Maha village. Aug. 17, 1804.
[Good specimen ].

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 33

Chrysocoma nauseosa Pall. in
herb. Pursh, Fl. 517. On the
banks of the Missouri. M. Lewis.
y. Oct.v.s. in Herb. Lewis.

Actinella lanata Pursh, F1.560.
On the high lands of the Koos-
kooskee. M. Lewis. 24. June,
July, v.s.in Herb. Lewis.”

Pursh, Fl. 573. On dry hills
on the Rocky Mountains. M.
Lewis. ¢. v.s. in Herb. Lewis.

Donia squarrosa Pursh, FI.
559. In open prairies on the
banks of the Missouri. M. Lewis,
y. Aug., Sept., v. s.in Herb.
Lewis; v. v. cult.

33 Cnicus edulis Gray.

Only a single leaf, overlooked by Pursh.
Fort Clatsop, March 13, 1806.
It is nine to fifteen inches long—the size of a

ble.
‘* The root is the part used.

“ Leaves of a thistle; roots edi-
The Journal of January 20th says:

man’s thumb, perpendicular, fusiform; when first taken from the earth, the

root is white, and nearly as crisp as a carrot.

In this state it is sometimes

eaten without any preparation, but after it is prepared after the same process
used for the pashemo-quamash, which is the most usual and best method, it
becomes black, but is much improved in flavor. Its taste is exactly that of
sugar, and it is indeed the sweetest vegetable employed by the Indians.”
% Lriophyllum caespitosum Douglas

Described by Pursh as Actinella lanata, II, 56", “on the uplands on the
Kooskooskee, Jane 6 186.’ Pursh says: “on the highlands of the Kooskoos-
kee, M. Lewis, June and July.”’ It resembles in habit Pursh’s Actinea. A
mate to this specimen isin the herbarium of the Academy as ‘* Actinea /anata.””
From a number of specimens from different localities, those of Lewis differ in
having the flower stalks thicken upwardly.

34 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Gutierrezia Euthamie Torr. & Gray.

No. 32. Specimens of aro-
matic plants on which the ante-
lope feeds; these were obtained
2ist of Sept. 1805, at the upper
part of the big bend of the Mis-
souri. Upper part of the big
bend of the Missouri, Sept. 21,
1804.

Gutierrezia Euthamie Torr. & Gray.

No. 59, 1804, 19th September,
the growth of high and bare prai-
ries which produced little grass,
generally mineral earth. High,
bare prairies, mineral earth, with
very little grass. Sept. 19, 1804.
Liatris pycnostachya Michx.

No. 35, Sept. 15th growth of
the prairies. Prairies, Sept. 15,
1804.

Liatris scariosa Willd.

No. 53, 12th September,growth
of high and dry prairies. High
and dry prairies, Sept. 12, 1804.
Matricaria discoidea DC.

An agreeable smell. On the
Kooskooskee, June 9, 1806.

Microseris macrocheta Gray.

Rock Camp. April 17, 1806.

Solidago rigida L.

High dry prairies.
1804.

Sept. 13,

[Composite ? Poor, sterile and
not placed; leaves opposite, much
divided into narrow segments,
very pubescent]. One of the

(1898.

Solidago Sarothre Pursh, Fl.
540. On the plains of the Mis-
souri. M. Lewis, Y%. Sept. v.
s. in Herb. Lewis.

Solidago Sarothre Pursh, FI.
Lt.

[Lewis’ specimen not men-
tioned by Pursh].

Santolina suaveolens Pursh, F.
520. On the banks of the Koos-
kooskee. M. Lewis. ©. June—
Aug. v.v.; v.s. in Herb. Lewis.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 35

most common plants of the plains
of Columbia. May 27, 1806.

Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi Spreng. Arbutus Uva-ursi Pursh (not
No. 33. An evergreen plant Willd.), Fl. 283. On the plains

which grows on the open plains, of the Mississippi; the Indians

usually; the natives smoke its smoke the leaves under the name

leaves mixed with tobacco; called of Sacacommis,and considerthem

by the French Engages (?) saca- of great medicinal virtue.”

commis; obtained at Fort Man-

dan. Fort Mandan, open plains.

Evergreen called Sacacommis,

natives smoke its leaves.

aeeeee Meeeients Vorsh. Pursh, Fl. 282 [but does not
A middle-sized tree with a re- mention Lewis’ specimen].

markable smooth bark, which
scales off in the manner of the
birch, and red berries in clusters.
Columbia River, Nov. 1, 1805.

Gaultheria Shallon Pursh. Pursh, F]. 283. On the falls

The shallon, supposed to be a of Columbia and near the west-
species of Vaccinium. On the ern ocean. M. Lewis. kh. May,
coast of the Pacific Ocean. June June, vy. s.in Herb. Lewis nec
20, 1806. non Banks.”

% Arctostaphylos Uva-ursi Sprengel.
“An evergreen plant which grows in the open plains usually ; the natives
smoke its leaves mixed with tobacco. It is called by the French Lngagees .
sacacommis, obtained at Fort Mandan.” Pursh, Fi. 1, 283, says : “on the
plains of the Mississippi the Indians smoke the leaves under the name of
sacacommis, and consider them of great medicinal value,’ but does not credit
Lewis. It is not clear whom he refers to as ‘‘ Engages,” but the name may
have been given by the French and not by the Indians. The /ourna/ speaks
of a plant * known by the traders as sacacommis,’’ Professor Knowlton in
the notes to Coues’ edition of the travels, suggests the Arctostaphylos pungens
for this, but Lewis’ label as above, settles the question. The /ourna/ further
says: ‘* The natives eat the berries without any preparation. They are some-
times gathered and hung in the lodges in bags.” :
% Gaultheria Shallon Pursh.

Described and figured by Pursh, I, 284. “The sha//on, supposed to be a
species of Vaccintum, on the coast of the Pacific Ocean, January 10. 1806 ;"
Jeaves and branches only. Pursh says: ‘‘on the Falls of the Columbia and
near the western Ocean, M. Lewis.” He further notes that he described
from the more perfect specimens of Menzies. The /ourna/ says: “Shallum
isa favorite food of the elk It has a dark purple berry of pleasant flavor.
The natives eat the berry when ripe, but seldom collect it in quantities to dry
for winter use.’’ It is generally known in these times as the Salal berry.

36 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Vaccinium Myrtillus L..
New species. With a purple,
small berry, eatable—an ever-
green. Fort Clatsop, June 20,
1806.”
Vaccinium ovatum Pursh. Pursh, Fl. 290. On the Co-

A shrub of 7 or 8 feet high, lumbia River. M. Lewis, kh.
supposed to be a species of Vac- May.”
cinium ; the berries are eaten by
the natives On the Pacific
Ocean. Fort Clatsop, June 27,
1806.

Dodecatheon Meadia L.
Near the narrows of the Co-
lumbia River. April 16, 1806.”

Frasera thyrsiflora Hook. Swertia fastigiata Pursh, Fl.
In moist wet places, on the 101. On the Missouri Flats near

Squamash flats. June 14,1806. the Rocky Mountains. M. Lewis.

[ Leaf only]. y%. July, v.s. in Herb. Lewis.

Collomia linearis Nutt.

Rockford Camp. April 17,
1806.

7 Vaccinium myrtilloides I.

This specimen is not in flower or fruit, but is so nearly a fac-simile of
some forms of Gaz/theria Myrsinites, which Pursh’s Vaccinium obtusum has been
supposed to be, that itis in all probability the type of V. odtwsum, F., p. 290,
though the description refers only to a specimen collected by Menzies.

2 Vaccinium ovatum Pursh.

“A shrub 7 or 8 feet high, supposed to be a species of Vaccinium. The
berries are eaten by the natives. On the Pacific Ocean. Fort Clatsop, June
27, 1806.” Pursh simply says I, p. 290, ‘“‘on the Columbia River, M. Lewis.”’
The Journal notes among the berry plants esteemed by the natives “a species
of huckleberry,”’ and. referring to the huckleberry, ‘there are two species of
shrubs. first seen at the Grand Rapids of the Columbia, and since seen else-
where. They grow in rich, dry ground.” The Columbia River specimen
not now in the collection was probably the one from which the description
was made.

29 Dodecatheon Meadia \:

‘Near the narrows of the Columbia River, April 16, 1806.” Pursh over-
looks this; it was probably the first finding of it so far west. There might
have been a specimen collected on the march up the Missouri in 1804. as in
the /ourna/ under date April 17th, it is noted that “ violets, doves foot and
cowslips are in bloom.” the Dvdecatheon being probably referred to as cow-
slips. If to the return from the Pacific, April 9, 1806, when they found “‘ cow-
slips’? again in bloom, would refer to the Columbia specimen.

1898.]

Gilia aggregata Spreng.
On Hungry Creek, June 26,
1806. [Flowering stem].

Polemonium ceruleum L.
Headwaters of the Kooskoos-

kee. June 27, 1806.
Phacelia circinata Jacq.

Root fibrous, plant from 3-4
feet high; dry situation. On the
Kooskooskee, June 9, 1806.
[Poor specimen].

Phacelia Menziesii Torr.!

Rocky Camp. April 17, 1806.

Plagiobothrys tenellus (ray,

Rocky Camp. April 17,1806.
Krynitskia sp.?

Rocky Camp. April 17, 1806.
Nicotiana quadrivalvis Pursh.

No. 45. Specimen of the Ri-
cara’s tobacco, taken 12th of Oc-
tober, 1804. 12th of October, at
the Ricara’s town. This is the
tobacco which they cultivate.

” Phacelia circinata Jaca. f.

Described by Pursh Fl., 1, 140, as Phacelia heterophylla,

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 37

Cantua aggregata Pursh, FI.
147. On the banks of the Mis-
sissippi. M. Lewis. ¢. June, v.
s .in Herb. Lewis.

Phacelia heterophylla Pursh,
Fl. 140. On dry hills on the
banks of the Kooskooskee. M.
Lewis. . June, July, v. s. in
Herb. Lewis.”.

Hydrophyllum lineare Pursh,
Fl. 134. On the banks of the
Missouri. M. Lewis. 2%. April,
v. s.in Herb. Lewis. [Specimen
in Hb. Philada. Acad. showing
flowers and leaves, root annual,
not perennial.

Pursh, Fl. 141. Cultivated
and spontaneous on the Missouri,
principally among the Mandan
and Ricara nations. ©. July, v.
v.; v.s. in Herb. Lewis nee non
Nuttall. The tobaceo prepared
from it is excellent.
delicate tobacco is prepared by
the Indians from the dried flow-
ers.

The most

**On the Koos-

kooskee, August 9, 1806; roo! fibrous, plant3 to 4 feet high; dry situations.”
Pursh says: “on dry hills on the banks of the Kooskooskee, July, August.”
Only a few leaves and a portion of the flower branch have escaped the rava
ges of the beetles. The specimen from which Pursh took his description,
evidently, is in the herbarium of the Academy of Natural Sciences, under the
provisional name of P/hacelia scabiosafolta.

38 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Collinsia parviflora Doug).

Rockford Camp. April 17,
1806. [From size of corolla ap-
parently C. parviflora rather than
C. violacea as placed by Gray,
yet identity is not certain].
Mimulus luteus L.

On the waters of Clark’s River,
July 4,1806. [Indifferent speci-
mens but showing stem, leaves
and flowers ; upper portion of the
plant is not glabrous as described
by Pursh, l.c., but finely and
densely glandular-puberulent.

Orthocarpus tenuifolius Benth.

Valley of Clark’s River, July
1, 1806. [A good specimen,
showing, the root to be distincet-
ly annual, not perennial, as de-
scribed. The color of the flow-
ers is not shown. |
Pedicularis Grenlandica Retz.

On the low plains on the heath
of Clark’s River, July 6, 1806.

P. uneinata Willd.

[Pursh named this P. uncinata
Willd.,(Siberian)on his label, but
evidently discovered his error be-
fore publication, as in his Flora
he gives P. Grenlandica].
Pedicularis scopulorum (iray. ?

On the low plains on the heath
of Clark’s River. July 6, 1806.

[1398.

Antirrhinum tenellum Pursh,
Fl. 421. On the banks of the
Missouri. M. Lewis. ©. July,
v. v.; v.s. in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, Fl. 426. On the banks
of Clark’s River. M. Lewis. On
the northwest coast, Pallas. 2.
July, Aug., v.s. in Herb, Lewis,
nec non Lambert.

Bartsia tenwifolia Pursh, FI.
429. On the banks of Clark’s
River. M. Lewis. 2%. July, v.s.
in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, FI. 426. In low plains
of the Columbia. M. Lewis. %.
July, v.s. in Herb. Lewis nec
non Lambert.

P. elata Pursh (not Willd.),
FI. 425. In the low plains, on
the waters of Clark’s River. M.
Lewis. 2%. July, v. s.in Herb.
Lewis.

[ P. elata Pursh, not Willd., has
been doubtfully referred to P.
bracteosa Benth., but it is cer-
tainly different. It has purple

1399]

Pentstemon diffusus Doug!

Camp on the Kooskooskee,
May 20, 1806.

Synthyris reniformis var.

Hook.

On Hungry Creek, June 26,
1806. [Does not well agree with
Veronica reniformizs Pursh (ex.
char.), F}. 10, for that is said to
have a creeping stem, opposite
leaves and alternate peduncles,
and to have been collected in
boggy soil on the banks of the
Missouri. }

Salvia lanceolata Willd.

Big bend of Missouri, Sept. 21,

1804. [Good specimen].

major

Scutellaria angustifolia Pursh.
On the Kooskooskee, June 5,
1806.

Oxybaphus nyctagineus Sweet.
Open plains, Sept. 1, 1804.
[Fairly complete. ]

Atriplex canescens James.
Sept. 21. Big bend of the
Missouri, Sept. 21, 1804.

Atriplex Nuttallii Wats.
A half shrub from the high
plains of Missouri, July 20, 1806.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

39

flowers as described, but the calyx
is not glabrous but pubescent.
In all characters shown it agrees
well with P. scopulorum Gray,
notwithstanding difference in dis-
tribution and altitude.]

S. trichostemmoides Pursh, FI.
19. In open plains on the Mis-
souri River. M. Lewis. ©. v. s.
in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, Fl. 412. On the river
Kooskooskee. M. Lewis. 2 , June,
y.s. in Herb. Lewis.

Allionia ovata Pursh, FI. 97.
On the plains of the Missouri.
M. Lewis. ©. Aug. v. s. in Herb.
Lewis.

Calligonum canescens Pursh,
Fl. 370. In the plains of the
Missouri, near the big bend. h.
July, Aug. v. s.in Herb. Lewis.

40 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Sarcobatus maculatus Torr.

A small branchy shrub from
the plains of Missouri, July 20,
1806.

Polygonum bistortioides Pursh.
Polygonum near to bistorte.

In moist grounds on Quamash

flats, June 12, 1806. [Leaves

and inflorescence ].

Eleagnus argentea Pursh.

Silver tree of the Missouri.
From the prairie of the Knobs.
July 6, 1806.

Shepherdia argentea Nutt.

A. No. 39. Obtained at the
mouth of the river Quicourre
from which place upwards it is
_ abundant; in the Missouri bot-
toms it is a pleasant twig to eat.
It has much the flavor of the

cranberry, and continues on the.

bush through the winter. This is
an evergreen shrub; some plants
are sent down by the barge to
the care of Capt. Stoddard at St.
Louis. From the mouth of the
river Quicourre and from there
upwards in all the Missouri bot-
toms. The berry pleasant, acid
like cranberry, and hang on all
winter ; evergreen.

Euphorbia heterophylla L.

No. 38. 1804, Oct. 4. The
growth of the high prairies or
plains. High prairies and plains,
Oct. 4, 1804.

Euphorbia marginata Pursh.
On the Yellowstone River,
July 28, 1806,

[1898.

Pursh, Fl. 271. [n low
grounds on the banks of the
Missouri, called Quamash-flats.
M. Lewis. 2%. June, v.s.

Pursh, Fl. 114. In the ex-
tensive plains on the banks of the
Missouri. M. Lewis and T. Nut-
tall. kh. July, v.s. in Herb.
Lewis. Missouri silver tree.

Hippophe argentea Pursh, Fl.
115. On the banks of the Mis-
souri. M. Lewis. h v.s. in Herb.
Lewis.

E. cyathophora Pursh (not
Willd.), Fl. 605. On the banks
of the Mississippi. h. ©. June,
July, v. v.

Pursh, Fl. 607. On the Yel-
lowstone River. M. Lewis. ©.
July, v.s.in Herb. Lewis.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 41

Maclura aurantiaca Nutt.
[No label. Sterile specimen. ]

Betula?

Black alder of the Pacific
Ocean; grows to a large size.
March 26, 1806. [Specimens
consist only of fragmentary ster-
ile catkins. ]"

Quercus Garryana Dougl.

A sort of White Oak. Colum-
bia, March 26, 1806.

Quercus macrocarpa Michx.

No. 34. The leaf of oak which
is common to the prairies. 5th
Sept., 1804. Common to the
prairies, Sept. 5, 1804.”

3 Alnus rubra Bongard.
“ Black Alder of the Pacific Ocean, grows toa large size: March 26, 1806.’%
The leaves and catkins have been wholly destroyed, except a portion of one
male ament and the naked branch. But there is little doubt of the accuracy
of the determination. The /ourna/ says of it: ‘‘ The Black Alder arrives to
a great size Itis simple branching and diffuse —the bark is smooth and of a
light color, with white spreading shoots resembling those of the beech, the
leaf and fructification resemble precisely the common alder of our country.
The shrubs grow separately from different roots, not in clusters like those of
the United States. The Black Alder does not cast its leaves till December
Ist. It is sometimes growing to the height of 60 or 70 feet. and from two to
four feet in diameter.”’
32 Quercus macrocarfa var. depressa Engel.

“The leaf of oak, which is common to the prairies, September 5, 1804.”
The /ourna/ says: ‘‘ September 5th, when 44 miles from White Point Creek,
the Rapid River (now Niobrara) a beautiful plain on the upper side where
the Pawnees once had a village, we seripedl just above it (now in South
Dakota in the Pinca Reservation). The place where we halted is a fine low
ground with much timber, such as Red Cedar, Honey Locust, Oak, Arrow-
head, Elm and Coffee Nut." On September 15th is again recorded, “ our
camp is in a beautiful plain (opposite what is now Brulé City) with timber
seattered thinly for } mile, consisting chiefly of Elm, Cottonwood, some Ash
of indifferent quality, and a considerable quantity of a species of White Oak.
This tree seldom rises higher than 30 feet, and branches very much. The
bark is thick and of a lightcolor, The leaves are small, deeply indented and
of a light green. The cup which contains the acorn is fringed on the edges,
and embraces it about one half. The acorn itself, which grows in great pro-
fusion, is of excellent flavor, and has none of the roughness which most acorns
possess These acorns are now falling, and have probably attracted the large
number of deer which we saw in this place, as all the animals we have seen
are fond of that food.’ The travellers were not botanists, but a specialist
could not have drawna better description of Quercus macrocarfa var. depressa.
The specimen in the collection has come through in excellent condition.

t

42 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Populus monilifera Ait.
Cotton tree of the Mississippi
and Missouri. Aug., 1806.

Populus trichocarpa Torr. & Gray.
Cotton tree of the Columbia
River. June, 1806.

Calypso borealis Salish.
Waters of Hungry Creek,
Rocky Mountains. June16,1806.

Iris Missouriensis Nutt.

[So far as fragmentary speci-
men shows.] A pale blue spe-
cies of Flag. Prairie of the
Knobs, July 5, 1806.

Allium, sp.
On the waters of the Koos-
kooskee, Apr. 30, 1806. [Very

poor sterile specimen. ]*

Brodiea Douglasii Wats.

Hyacinth of the Columbia
plains, Apr. 20, 1806. [Good spe-
cimen. Watson’s synon. wrong,
Proc. Am. Acad. xiv, 238.
Where Pursh’s grandiflora is

[1898.

P.angulata Pursh(not Willd.),
Fl. 619. It is known by the
name of Mississippi Cotton Tree.
[ Lewis’specimen not mentioned. }

Pursh, Fl. 593. On the Col-
umbia River. M. Lewis. 2.
May, June, v.s. in Herb. Lewis.

Tris Sibirica Pursh (not Willd.),
FI. 30. On the banks of the Mis-
souri. M. Lewis. 2%. July, v.v.;
y.s. in Herb. Lewis.

[Perhaps a part of] A. angu-
losum Willd. of Pursh, Fl. 228.
On the banks of the Missouri.
M. Lewis and Nuttall. 2%. July,
v.s.in Herb. Lewis.

B. grandiflora Pursh (not
Smith), Fl. 223. On the plains
of the Columbia and Missouri
Rivers. M. Lewis. 2. Apr., May,

Po a

placed under /aeta].

33 Allium sp.

Pursh describes A//ium angulosum 1, p. 223, as “ on the banks of the Mis-
souri, M. Lewis, July.” The specimen in this collection is so eaten that
neither flowers nor roots are left. As these remains are ticketed ‘‘ on the
waters of the Kooskooskee, April 30, 1806,” it is probably of another species
overlooked by Pursh, and not axgulosum. So far as the leaves indicate, it
may be A. reticulatum.

% Described by Pursh as Brodiza grandifiora F\. 1, p. 223. “‘ Hyacinth of
Colorado Plains, April 20, 1806.” Pursh says: ‘‘ on the plains of the Colum-
bia and Missouri Rivers, M. Lewis, April and May. This elegant bulbous
plant was called by M. Lewis rightly, Missouri Hyacinth.” In the Journal of
the expedition it is noted under date of April 16th, then at Rockfort camp,
“a species of Hyacinth, a native of this place, bloomed to-day. It was not in
bloom yesterday.”

1898.]
Calochortus elegans Pursh,

A small bulb of a pleasant
flavor; eat by the natives. On
the Kooskooskee, May 17, 1806.
[Small specimen, 1 leaf and 1
flower. Specimen depauperate
in manner of var. nanus, Wood,
but petals obtusish and not cili-
ate. |

Camassia esculenta Lindl.

Near the foot of the Rocky
Mouutains on the Quamash flats.
June 23, 1806. [Good specimen ].

Erythronium grandiflorum Pursh.

A squamose bulb. On the
waters of the Kooskooskee, June
5, 1806. [Indifferent specimen
with one good flower and a poor

leaf. ]

Erythronium grandiflorum var. parvi-
florum Wats.

From the plains of the Col-
umbia near Kooskooskee River,
May 8, 1806. The natives reck-
on the root unfit for food. [Three
flowers and one leaf bearingstem.
Probably the Missouri River
specimen of E./anceolatum Pursh,

FI. 230.)

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 43

Pursh, Fl. 240. On the head-
waters of the Kooskooskee. M.
Lewis. 2%. May, v.s.in Herb.
Lewis. The roots are eaten by
the natives.

Phalangium Quamash Pursh,
Fl. 226. On the upper part of
the Missouri, near the Rocky
Mountains. M. Lewis. 2. June
v. s. in Herb. Lewis.”.

Pursh, Fl. 231. On the Koos-
kooskee. M. Lewis. 4%; May

June, v.s.

* Pursh says: “on the Upper Missouri near the Rocky Mountains, M.
Lewis, June. The plant is known among the natives as Quamash, and the
bulbs are carefully collected by them and baked between hot stones, when
they assume the appearance of baked pears, and are of an agreeable sweet
taste ; they form a great part of their winter stores. Though an agreeable
* food to Captain Lewis’ party, they occasion baneful complaints if eaten in
quantity.” Under June 29, 1806, the /ouwrnal says: “the Quamash and
strawberries are just beginning to bloom at the flats at the head of the Koos-
kooskee,””

44 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Fritillaria lanceolata Pursh.

Specimen of a liliaceous plant
obtained on Brant Island, 10th
of April, 1806, the root of this
plant is a squamous bulb and is
eaten by the natives. The Clak-
clel-lar, opposite this island, call
it Tel-lak-thil-pah. [Complete
specimen ].

Fritillaria pudica Spreng.

Plains of Columbia near the
Kooskooskee, May 8, 1806. The
bulb in the shape of a biscuit
which the natives eat. [Com-
plete specimen corresponding
with Pursh’s figure ].

Trillium ovatum Pursh.

Columbia River near the rap-
ids, April 10, 1806. [Upper por-
tion of plant].

Trillium petiolatum Pursh.

Folium. The flowers brown
with a fruit of brick-red. On the
waters of the Kooskooskee. June
15, 1806. [Excellent specimen].

Veratrum viride Ait. or V. Californi-
cum Dur.

A plant growing in wet places
with a single stem and leaves
clasping round one another, no
flowers observed. On the Koos-
kooskee, June_25, 1806. [Single
leaf only. ]

Xerophyllum tenax Nutt.

The leaves are made use of by
the natives to make baskets and
other ornaments. On high land,
Rocky Mountains, June 15, 1806.

[1898.

Pursh, F]. 230. On the head-
waters of the Missouri and Col-
umbia. M. Lewis. Y. July, v.s.

Lilium? pudicwm Pursh, FI.
228, t. 8. On the headwaters of
the Missouri. M. Lewis. 4. May,
v. s. in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, Fl. 245. On the rap-
ids of the Columbia River. M.
Lewis. 2. April, v.s.

Pursh, Fl. 244. On the waters
of the Kooskooskee. M. Lewis.
Y%. June, v.s.

Helonias tenax Pursh, F 1. 2438.
On high lands near the Rocky
Mountains. M. Lewis. 2%. June, °
Vill:

1898.]

Zygadenus elegans Pursh.
On the Cokalaishkit River,
July 7, 1806.

Aira brevifolia Pursh.

The most common grass
through the plains of Columbia
and near the Kooskooskee River,
June 10,1806. Poa trivialis L.,
var. [Fair specimen].

Hordeum jubatum L.

Called the golden or silken
rye. On the White Bear Islands
on the Missouri, July 12, 1806.

Hordeum jubatum L.

Grass common to the open
grounds near Fort Clatsop.
March 13, 1806.

Festuca ovina L. var.
On the plains of Columbia.
June 10, 1806.

Agropyron divergens Nees.

On the plains of the Columbia,
June 10,1806. (Determined by
Prof. Scribner).

Koeleria cristata Pers.
On the plains of the Columbia,
etc., June 10, 1806.

Stipa spartea Trin.

Valleys of the Missouri on the
Rocky Mountain, July 8, 1806.
(Stipa comata Trin, according to
Prof. Scribner).

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 45

Pursh, Fl]. 241. On the waters
of the Cokalaishkit River, near
the Rocky Mountains. M. Lewis.
y. July, v.s.in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, F1.76. In the plains of
the Missouri. M. Lewis. 2.
June, July, v.s. in Herb. Lewis.
This grass is the most common in
those plains.”

Pursh, FI.89. On the islands
of the Missouri River. M. Lewis.
$. July, v.s. in Herb. Lewis and
Lambert.

Pursh, FI. 1. e.

Festuca duriuscula Pursh, FI.
853? [but Lewis’ specimen not
mentioned }.

Festuca spicata Pursh, Fl. 83.
On the waters of the Missouri
and Columbia Rivers, June, v.s.
in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, Fl. 85. On the plains
of the Columbia River, M. Lew-
is. Y. July, v.s. in Herb. Lewis.

Stipa juncea Pursh, (not L.),
Fl. 72. On the banks of the Mis-
souri. M. Lewis. Y%. Aug. v.s,
in Herb. Lewis.

*This seems to be the plant described by Pursh as Aira brevifolia. as

worked out by both Dr. Robinson and myself.

But Professor Scribner, whose

authority on grasses cannot be disputed, decides these specimens to be oa

tenuifolia Nutt., ?. Buckleyana Nash.

46 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Zizania aquatica L.

No. 59. 8th September, the
growth of moist and very wet
prairies.

[Sterile specimen of a coarse
grass. No label.] (Prof. Scrib-
ner writes probably Spartina
gracilis Trin.).

Pinus ponderosa Doug].

On the Kooskooskee. On river
bottoms in rich land, west of the
mountains. Oct. 1, 1805. [Leaves
only].

Juniperus communis L.

No. 47. A species of Juniper
common to the bluffs. Oct. 17.
Common to the bluffs. Oct. 17,
1804.

Juniperus communis L. var. alpina
Gaud.
Dwarf Juniper, Rocky Mount-
ains, July 7, 1806.

Juniperus occidentalis Hook.

No. 58. Found 2d Oct. 1804.
A species of cedar found on the
bluffs, the trees of which are
large, some of them 6 feet in the
girth. On the bluffs, some trees
6 feet in girth. Oct. 2, 1804.

Juniperus Sabina var. 7, procumbens
Pursh.

Dwarf cedar, never more than
6 inches high, open prairies.
Oct. 16, 1804. [Small sterile spe-
cimen ].

[1898,

Juniperus communis L. var.
depressa Pursh, Fl. 646. [Lewis’
specimen not mentioned ].

Juniperus excelsa Pursh (not
Marshall von Bieb.), Fl. 647.
On the banks of the waters of
the Rocky Mountains. M.Lewis.
kh. May, v.s. in Herb. Lewis.

Pursh, Fl. 647. Within the
Rocky Mountains. M. Lewis. h.
v.s. in Herb. Lewis. Not above
6 inches high.

1898.]

Equisetum arvense L.

No. 31. Growth of the sand
bank near the banks of the river,
taken the 10th of Aug., 1804.
Sand banks of the Missouri.
Aug. 10, 1804.

Aspidium spinulosum Sw.
Polypodium species. Fort Clat-
sop. June 20, 1806.

Lomaria Spicant Desy.

Fort Clatsop, June 20, 1806.

Hypnum Oreganum Sull.

A species of moss from Fort
Clatsop. June 20, 1806. (Iden-
tified by Mrs. Britton).

Bazzania trilobata (L.) 8. F. Gray.

A moss used by the natives as
a yellow dye; grows on the pines
of the Rocky Mountains. July
1, 1806. (Identified by Mrs,
Britton).

Egregia Menziesii (Turn.) Aresch.
(Phyllospora Menziesii).
Fucus. From the mouth of
the Columbia River on the Pa-

cific Ocean, Noy. 17, 1805.

[Loose label with Pyrus sam-
bucifolius? but date different].
No. 24. Found the 4th day of
Sept., 1805. A small growth
only, rising to the height of 15
feet. Moist situations it seems to
prefer; it isa handsome growth.”

3 Sorbus microcarpa Pursh.

“On the tops of the highest peaks and mountains, June 27, 1806.”
y insects, except the stem, pedicels and 2 leaflets.

pletely eaten

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 47

Blechnum boreale Pursh (not
Willd.), Fl. 669. On the north-
west coast. M. Lewis. 2. Aug.
y.s. in Herb. Lewis.

Com-
A label in

the same sheet, in Captain Lewis’ handwriting says, “ found on the 4th day of

September, 1805.
situations it seems to prefer.

A small growth, only rising to the height of 15 feet ; moist
It is a handsome growth.”

48 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

[Label only]. The root not
eaten by the natives. On the
Columbia, April 14, 1806.

[Sterile and unidentified.
Stem lignescent, leaves opposite,
narrow, linear, fascicled in axils].
A shrub about 4 feet high. On
the plains of the Columbia.
May 7, 1806. Identified while the
mss. was going through the press,
by Prof. Heller of the University
of Minnesota, as Phlox speciosa
Pursh. See Flora, P. 149.

To the above detail by Dr. Robinson and Mr. Greenman, it
may now be noted that this collection contains specimens of
all but sixteen of Lewis’s plants as described by Pursh in his
Flora. Of these sixteen, seven, as marked with an asterisk, are
represented already in the specimens from Lambert’s herbarium,
leaving but nine of the plants missing from the collection as described
by Pursh. Only a few of these nine missing ones are of material
importance. For all practical purposes, all the plants of Lewis
and Clark’s expedition are now deposited in the Academy.

*Berberis Aquifolium Pursh.
*Berberis nervosa Pursh.
*Ceanothus sanguineus Pursh.
Under the provisional name of “ C. atropurpureus.”

*Psoralea esculenta Pursh.

In the Journal of the expedition, under date of August 10th, it
is noted “at the confluence of the Yellowstone with the Missouri,
Captain Clark found today * * the men also dug up large
quantities of a large and very insipid root called by the Indians
Hankee, and by the ‘engagés’ ‘ white apple.’ It is used by them
in a dry and powdered state, but our men boiled it and ate it with
their meat.”

On the same sheet with Psoralea esculenta Pursh has fastened down
a specimen of P. hypogea Nutt., not noting its distinction. The ini-
tials of Professor Britton are under it with this correction: It was
evidently collected on the headwaters of the Platte, where Nuttall
subsequently found it.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 49

Spireza capitata, Fl. 342.

Described from a specimen of Menzies from the northwest coast,
but of which he had said “an imperfect specimen gathered on the
Columbia River” by Lewis is not in the collection, por in the her-
barium of the Academy, but is referred by Hooker to Nei/lia
thyrsiflora, and frequently noted in the Journal of the explorers as
“ one of the Nine barks.”

Jussiea subacaulis. FI., p. 304.

Torrey and Gray, and Hooker refer this to Gnothera heterantha
Nutt. A specimen in the collection of the Academy, simply
marked “ from Pursh’s herbarium,” is J. repens. As Pursh was
evidently well acquainted with all our Jussiseas, it seems incredible
that he should have mistaken an Qnothera for one of this genus.

Symphoricarpos racemosus Mx.
Menziesia empetriformis Pursh.

No specimen here or in the herbarium of the Academy. Hooker
supposes it to have been Cassiope Stelleriana, but Lewis reports his
plant from the Rocky Mountains, and near the mouth of the Colum-
bia River.

Menziesia ferruginea Sm.

“On the Columbia River, Lewis.” June says Pursh.

*Erigeron compositus, Fl. 535.
Pentstemon frutescens Lamb., Fl. 428.
*Gerardia fruticosa Pursh.

In the herbarium cf the Academy his specimen is marked “ G.
suffruticosa n. sp.,” and has been placed by Dr. Gray on the sheet
with Pentstemon Menziesii Hooker.

Mimulus Lewisii Pursh, 427.
Bartsia Gymnandra Pursh, 450.

Dr. Gray suggests that Pursh’s description indicates Synthyris

rubra.
*Diotis lanata, Fl. 602,

Is in herbarium of the Academy under Eurotia lanata.
Lilium umbellatum F)., 229.

Hooker (Jndex Kewensis) suggests this may have been L. Phil-
adelphicum.

Pinus taxifolia Lamb. Fl., 640.

Pseudo-Tsuga Douglasii.

50 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

NEW AND LITTLE-KNOWN BEES FROM WASHINGTON STATE.
BY T. D. A. COCKERELL.

Halictus pacificus n. sp.

@ .—Length 10 mm., black, with ochreous pubescence, inclining
to fulvous in very fresh examples, whitish in very faded ones;
second, third and fourth segments of abdomen with interrupted basal
bands, ochreous in color, of dense appressed hair, broad laterally,
tapering to a point mesad; in very worn examples these bands are
practically obliterated. Head ordinary, cheeks unarmed, antennsze
wholly dark, tegulee reddish-piceous ; wings with more or less of a
yellowish tint, faintly dusky toward the apex; subcostal nervure
black, other nervures, and stigma, honey color; enclosure of meta-
thorax semilunar, strongly radiately wrinkled, bounded by a tolerably
distinct rim; legs black, small joints of tarsi ferruginous; abdomen
with numerous very minute punctures, hair bands interrupted, apex
with pale fuscous hair.

é .—Differs in the usual manner from the @. Apical portion of
clypeus yellow. Antenne long, flagellum, except the last two joints,
ferruginous beneath. Pubescence paler; nervures darker ; anterior
tibiz in front, middle tibize at apex, hind tibis at both ends, and all
the tarsi, yellow.

Hab.—Olympia, Wash., March 23 to July 9, numerous speci-
mens. (T. Kincaid). Also taken by Mr. Kincaid at Seattle, May
14th, on Rubus ursinus.

The following table separates the females of various large Halicti
allied to pacificus :

A. Enclosure of metathorax granular.
a. Large, with a broad face ....... . . lerouxw Lep.
b. Smaller, with a narrower face . . . . . . . coriaceus Sm.

B. Enclosure of methathorax plicate.
a. Wings clear, stigma piceous, teguls testaceous, sisymbrii Ckll.
b. Wings yellowish, stigma honey-color, rather larger species .
pacificus Ckll.

The above four were all taken at Olympia. Three other species
are allied to coriaceus :

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 51

1. H. bardus Cr., known by the clear wings and fuscous nervures.

2. H. politus Sm., from Mexico, with the face broader above,
wings strongly yellowish.

3. H. forbesii Rob., having the clypeus less produced. I have
examined a great number of coriaceus from Wash., and various
specimens from New Mexico and Illinois, considered to be forbesii ;
also an Illinois coriaceus from Mr. Robertson. The result of this
study is that I believe all belong to one somewhat variable species.
The characters given by Robertson to separate the females seem not
to be constant, but I have not been able to compare the males. It
is to be remarked, however, that Robertson’s description of the
metathoracic enclosure of forbesii, “ bearing irregular radiating
ruge, which reach the posterior margin,” will hardly apply to what
I have (Tr. Am. Ent. Soc., 1897, p. 163) regarded as that species,
so it may be that the real forbesii is a valid species near pacificus,
which I have not seen. In that case it will be separated from paci-
ficus by the continuous abdominal bands, which are whitish instead
of ochraceous.

The following table separates some males which are more or less
similar to pacificus :

a RECO MOU GOP i. 6, cn san bs feb) him g mle, 9.0. SUGMOER,
B. Clypeus partly yellow.
a. Legs all dark, sizesmall ......... .. . angustior.

b. Legs partly yellow.
i. Hind tibie black except ends, enclosure of metathorax
plicate sy celica biel) bea es 9) hak pacificus.
ii. Hind tibize yellow with only a suffused dark patch.
a. Size large, flagellum all dark, enclosure of metathorax

irregularly wrinkled ....... 2... Jlerouzii.
b. Size smaller, flagellum ferruginous beneath.

1. Size larger, head and thorax black. . . . ligatus.

2. Size smaller, head and thorax greenish . . fasciatus.

Colletes pascoensis n. #p.

é.—Length 10 mm. or slightly over, black, with dull white
pubescence having only a faint yellow or ochreous tinge. Face and
thorax densely covered with long hair, cheeks with black hair, vertex
shining but well punctured ; clypeus shining, with large close sub-
lanceolate punctures; distance between eye and base of mandible
short, the space twice as broad as long; mandibles dark; antennee
wholly dark, reaching to tegule; mesothorax and scutellum shin-

52 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

ing, with large well-separated punctures; postscutellum rough and
dull; base of metathorax pitted, shining, lateral faces tolerably
shiny ; tegulx piceous; wings dull hyaline, noticeably pubescent,
nervures and stigma piceous ; stigma small, marginal cell appendi-
culate; legs black, first two joints of. hind tarsus rather broad;
pubescence of femora yellowish-white, of tibiw black, of tarsi black
without and pale reddish-brown within ; abdomen shining, strongly
but not very elosely punctured, the hind-margins of the segments with
rather thin yellowish-white hair-bands, the surface of the first two
segments with long erect thin yellowish-white pubescence, that of
the remaining s¢qments with shorter black pubescence.

2.—Much like that of armata in general appearance, but the
pubescence of the head, pleura and legs is entirely black, contrasting
with that of the thoracic dorsum, which is yellowish-white, not at all
mixed with black. The abdomen has no bands, but is thinly clothed
with rather short and inconspicuous hair, yellowish-white on the
first segment, black on all the rest. ‘The first segment bas its lateral
hind margins narrowly fringed with short dense white hair; the
punctures on the second segment are of two sizes, large and small.
Antenne dark, the flagellum with only the faintest chocolate tinge
beneath, first joint of flagellum not quite as long as the second and
third together. The second recurrent nervure is less bent than
usual in the genus.

Fab.—Pasco, Wash., 3 9,4 2, May 25, 1896 (T. Kincaid). The
females might be mistaken for some Andrena allied to vicina. C.
pascoensis approaches nearest to the descriptions of C. californica and
C. consors. | From consors Cress., it differs in the pallid pubescence
and the black hair as described; this relates to the 3, the 9 of
consors being unknown. From californica Prov., it differs by the
entirely black hair of the head and legsin the 9. It may be added,
that pascoensis is also decidedly larger than consors or californica.

Colletes kincaidii n. sp.

2 —Length about13 mm., black, with clear fulvous pubescence on
head and thorax, tolerably dense, nowhere mixed with black, becom-
ing whitish on the ventral surface. Head rather broad, vertex with
irregularly-placed punctures of various sizes, clypeus with the
punctures running into striz, labrum with conspicuous grooves
alternating with ridges, mandibles dark, space between eye and
base of mandible broader than long, antennz very short, wholly
black ; prothoracic spire short, hidden by the pubescence; meso-

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. D3

thorax with very large and close punctures, except a large area in
the middle, which is shining and impunctate; scutellum with large
punctures, except the anterior border, which is impunctate; post-
scutellum roughened ; basal enclosure of metathorax bounded by a
distinct rim, shining, with about sixteen strong ridges ; lateral faces
dullish, the triangle shining; tegule dark brown; wings hyaline,
nervures and stigma black, stigma small, marginal cell appendicu-
late, second recurrent nervure considerably bent; second submar-
ginal cell extremely broad, larger than the third; legs black, with
yellowish-white, almost silvery, pubescence ; pubescence on inner
side of hind tarsi yellowish-white, except that the first-three joints
are tipped with shining orange fulvous ; abdomen lanceolate, shining ;
first two segments very strongly punctured, the punctures on the second
smaller and closer than on the first; remaining segments with minute
inconspicuous punctures, and a more sericeous surface; hind margins
of the segments with broad appressed white hair-bands, all very con-
spicuous, that on the first more or less interrupted in the middle;
some inconspicuous short black hair on the dorsum of the third to
fifth segments, and on the apex.

$.—10} mm. long. Similar to the 9, but more slender. Face
much more narrowed below; antenne long, wholly black; space
between eye and base of mandible somewhat larger, but still broader
than long ; thoracic pubescence rather more highly colored ; hair-
band on first abdominal segment entire.

Hab.—Olympia, Wash., July 5, 1896, at flowers of Potentilla
palustris; also June 30th, at flowers of lupine. A large and hand-
some species, but closely similar to several others.

C. inequalis differs at once in the 9, but the ¢ is quite like our
insect, being however larger, with a longer stigma, and the face less
narrowed below.

C. simulans (known only in the ¢@ ) is smaller than kincaidii, and
has the abdomen uniformily punctured.

C. gilensis has black hair on the thoracic dorsum, C. compacta
has quite a different metathorax. C. estivalis differs by the brown
stigma, the much narrower second submarginal cell, the more
parallel orbits, the much smaller punctures of the mesothorax, the
very dark tegule. the stronger punctuation of the third abdominal
segment, and the pale fulyous hair on the apical segment. The
estivalis compared is an Illinois example from Mr. Robertson.

54 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

I am surprised to find, on re-examining the specimens, that the
species found by Prof. Wooton on Ruidoso Creek in New Mexico,
and recorded by me (An. Mag. Nat. Hist., Jan., 1897, p. 49) as
estivalis, is in reality C. kineaidii.

Habropoda floridana (Smith) var. n. pascoensis.

@ .—Length about 16 mm., differs from Smith’s description in that
the pubescence of the head is pale, mixed, however with black on
the face and vertex, the wings are little darkened, and the pubes-
cence at the sides of the end of the abdomen is shining white. The
pubescence of the thorax and of the first abdominal segment is very
bright orange fulvous, not at all mixed with black. The short
pubescence immediately surrounding the pygidial plate is black.
Tegule black. Pubescence of legs black; that on inner side of
front tarsi orange-rufous, the brushes at the ends of the segments
tipped with brilliant coppery-red. Hair on lower part of pleura
black.

Hab.—Pasco, Wash., May 25, 1896, (T. Kincaid). It is just pos-
sible that this is the unknown 9 of H. morrisoni Cresson. It hasa
superficial resemblance to Podalirius ursinus.

Podalirius crotchii (Cresson).

$.—From Pasco, Wash., May 25, 1896 (T. Kincaid) agrees with
Cresson’s description. Hitherto the species has only been reported
from California. The pubescence on the hind tarsi within is brilliant
fulvous.

Podalirius syring@ n. sp.

.—Length about 12 mm., black, pubescence long and erect, not
very dense, mouse-color; strongly mixed with black on hind two-
thirds of mesothorax, and anterior margin of scutellum; black also
on vertex and upper part of cheeks, mixed with black on front and
more or less on sides of face; pubescence of abdomen long, thin and
pale at base of first and sides of first-three segments, dorsally from
the third segment onward scanty and black, some pale hairs at the
extreme apex; no hair-bands. Clypeus except the black anterior
edge, a supraclypeal band, irregularly v-shaped lateral marks, and
labrum except the anterior margin and upper lateral corners, all
lemon-yellow. Mandibles and the quite long antennz wholly black.
Mesothorax dull, with numerous shallow punctures, two small im-
punctate central areas. Metathorax shining. Legs slender, ante-
rior and middle trochanters, and upper half of anterior femora be-

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 55

hind, with shining white hair; otherwise the pubescence of the
femora, as of the tibize, is black. Tarsi with partly black and partly
pale hair, that on the inner side of the first four tarsi shining ferru-
ginous; small joints of tarsi a lively ferruginous. Tegule black or
piceous. Wings dusky hyaline. Apex of abdomen bidentate.

Hab.—Olympia, Wash., July 3rd, at flowers of Syringa; also
June 27th, (T. Kincaid). Nearest to P. simillimus (Cress.), but
differs by the wholly black scape and the distribution of the pubes-
cence.
Megachile calogaster n. sp.

$.—Length 11-124 mm., stoutly built, black, with pubescence
varying from pale ochraceous to whitish, not dense enough on thorax
to conceal the surface, some short black hair on cheeks just behind
eyes, and a good deal on the middle of the mesothorax. Head
ordinary ; « conspicuous patch of white hair on lower part of cheek ;
face quite densely clothed with yellowish-white hair; vertex strongly
punctured, as also the clypeus ; antennz wholly dark, last joint oval
and flattened ; mandibles black, elbowed without, tridentate ; thorax
strongly and closely punctured ; anterior coxe with a large rather
broad and blunt spire, above which is a transverse patch of the most
brilliant orange-rufous pubescence; anterior femora stout, sub-
trigonal, ferruginous with a black patch at base and apex within,
the latter connecting with a broad black external stripe extending
the whole length of the femur; under side of anterior femur with
long snow-white pubescence; anterior tibia short and thick, black
without, mostly ferruginous within, a large apical triangular patch
without pale yellow, apex with a blunt pale yellowish tooth extend-
ing at right angles to the axis; anterior tarsi pale yellow, tinged with
ferruginous toward the end ; first joint hollowed, produced at the end,
but not extending as far as tip of second joint; second and third
joints broadened, and elongated at one side; anterior tarsi behind
fringed with long white hair; middle and hind legs entirely black,
their femora and tibix with scanty whitish pubescence, partly black
on hind legs, their tarsi with shining orange-fulvous hair; claws
with the basal half ferruginous, the apical half black ; tegul« black,
punctured ; wings tinged with fuliginous, nervures black, marginal
cell quite long and narrow; abdomen short and convex, without any
hair-bands, but having rather long thin pubescence, nowhere con-
cealing the surface, grayish-white or pale ochreous on the first two

56 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

segments, nearly all black on the rest ; apex with a broad semicir-
cular emargination ; three large subapical ventral teeth.

@ .—About 14 mm. long; similar to the ¢, except in the usual
sexual characters. Legs black, with black pubescence; that on the
inner side of the front and hind tarsi, and both sides of the middle
tarsi, lively ferruginous; pubescence of cheeks all black; ventral
seopa dense, black only to a slight extent at base, otherwise very bril-
liant orange-fulvous.

Hab.—Olympia, Wash., June 30th, at flowers of lupine; also
June 19th to July 4th (T. Kineaid). A distinct and handsome
species.

Sphecodes kincaidii n. sp.

9 .—Length 12 mm., the abdomen quite elongated with approxim-
ately parallel sides. Head and thorax black, abdomen entirely bright
ferruginous; head transversely oval, front dull and very coarsely
rugose, clypeus subcancellate with strong punctures; pubescence of
face dirty whitish; antenne wholly dark; first joint of flagellum
very short, broader than long; mandibles dark, only rufescent at
the extreme tip, inner tooth short and blunt ; labrum not emargin-
ate; mesothorax nearly bare, shining, with large strong punctures ;
base of metathorax coarsely cancellate, enclosed by a rim; tegule
brown; wings rather pale fulginous, nervures and stigma piceous,
stigma considerably larger than in S. dichrous, first recurrent nervure
joining second submarginal cell before its end ; legs black, hind tarsi
entirely ferruginous ; abdomen smooth and shining, with small sparse
punctures, first two segments appearing nearly impunctate, with a
very few large punctures and more numerous very minute ones.
The third segment is much more punctate than the second. Apex
with some dark hair.

Hab.—Olympia, Wash., June 19, 1895 (T. Kincaid). Easily
known by the large size, and the narrow elongate sparsely punctured
abdomen. It is not likely, I think, that it is the unknown 9? of
S. davisii Rob. 8S. dichrous Sm., also occurs at Olympia.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 57

SYNOPSIS OF THE RECENT AND TERTIARY PSAMMOBIIDE OF
NORTH AMERICA.

BY W. H. DALL.
Family PSAMMOBIIDA.

Genus PSAMMOBIA Lamarck.

(=Psammobia (Lam., 1818) Bowdich, 1822; + Gari (pars)
Schumacher, 1817; -++ Haplomochlia Gistel, 1848 (fide Morch,
1852). Not Psammobia Cossman, 1886).

Type P. (Tellina) feroénsis Gmelin, 1792, = T. gari Lin., 1762,
not of Lin., 1758. North European Seas.

Section Psammobia s. s.
1. Psammobia (sp. indet.).

880 fms. east of Tobago; U.S, Fish Commission. A worn frag-
ment of undeterminable species.

Section Grammatomya Dall, 1897,

Wholly obliquely grooved, with no dorsal posterior area.

2. Psammobia squamosa Lam.

Virgin Islands (Krebs).

Subgenus GOBREUS Leach.
== Solen Megerle, 1811, not Lin. 1758; + Psammobia Blainy.,
1825, not (Lam., 1818) Bowdich, 1822; + Sanguinolaria Blain-
ville, 1825, not Lamarck, 1799; +- Azor Gray, 1851 (Brit. An., p.
51, not p.62); + Gobreus (Leach MS.) Gray, 1852; + Psammo-
cola sp., Blainy., 1825. Type Psammobia vespertina Lam, Eu-
ropean Seas.
3. Gobreus vaginatus Reeve.
Charlotte Harbor, Florida (?).
4. Gobreus circe Mérch.
Tortola and St. Thomas, West Indies.
*K ok K
5. Gobrwus maximus Deshayes.
Panama to the Gulf of California.

6. Gobreus regularis Carpenter.
Gulf of California.
5

58 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

7. Gobreus californicus Conrad.
Sitka to San Diego, California, also Kamtchatka (Dall) and
Japan.

8. Gobreus fucatus Hinds.
Magdalena Bay, Lower California.
9. Gobreeus edentulus Gabb.

60 fms., San Pedro, California.

Genus SANGUINOLARIA Lamarck.
(= Sanguinolaria Lam., 1799, not Blainv., 1825, nor Desh.,

1835; + Aulus (sp.) Oken, 1815, not Oken, 1821; + Lobaria
Schum., 1817, not Muller, 1776; + Hiatula sp. Modeer, 1793).
Type S. (Solen) sanguinolentus Gmelin, Antilles.
Section Sanguinolaria s. s.
1. Sanguinolaria sanguinolenta Gmelin.

Antilles to Brazil ; Ceylon.

2. Sanguinolaria tellinoides A. Adams.
Gulf of California to Panama.

Section Psammotella Blainville.

(Psammotelle Blainy., 1826; + Psammotella Herrm., 1852).
3. Sanguinolaria operculata Gmelin.

Texas to Brazil. (Type species).
4. Sanguinolaria hanleyi Bertin.

Lower California to Panama.
5. Sanguinolaria vitrea Deshayes.

Texas to Colon.

Section Nuttallia Dall, 1897.

Inequivalve, suborbicular.
6. Sanguinolaria nuttallii Conrad.
Southern California and Japan. (Type species).
Genus AMPHICHENA Philippi.

(= Amphichena Phil., 1847, not H. & A. Ads., 1856 ; + Am-
phidona Mérch, 1858). Sole species known.

1. Amphichena kindermannii Phil.
Mazatlan.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 59
Genus HETERODONAX Morch.

®@(— Heterodonax Morch, 1853; + Arcopagia Orb., 18638, not
Brown ex Leach MS., 1827). -

1. Heterodonax bimaculata Lin.

Florida to Brazil on the Atlantic ; San Diego, California, to Pan-
ama, on the Pacitic Cuast.

Genus ASAPHIS Modeer.
== Asaphis Modeer, 1793; + Capsa Lam., 1801, not Lam.,
1799; + Capsula Schum., 1817, not Sby., 1857; + Psammocola
(pars) Blainv., 1825; + Isareha Gistel, 1848, fide Morch, 1852 ;
+ Sanguinolaria Desh., 1835, not Lam., 1799; + Pliorhytis Con-
rad, 1863).
Type Asaphis (Venus) deflorata Linn. Indo-Pacific.

1. Asaphis coccinea Martyn, 1784.

Charlotte Harbor, Florida, to Brazil.

( Heteroglypta von Martens, 1880, will form a section of Asaphis,
characterized by divaricate sculpture. Type Psammobia contraria
Desh., Isle Bourbon).

Genus TAGELUS Gray.

(= Tagelus Gray, 1847; + Siliquaria Schum., 1817, not Lam.,
1801; + Soleeurtus Orb., 1853, not of Blainv., 1825; + Cultellus
sp., Conrad, 1845 ; + Mesopleura Conrad, 1867 ; + Tagelus Fischer,
1887; + Psammosolen Hupé, 1848, not Bronn, 1831).

Type 7. (Solen) gibbus Spengler, 1794.

Section Tagelus ss.

~

. Tagelus gibbus Spengler.
Cape Cod to Brazil, and coast of West Africa.

ge

Tagelus violascens Carpenter.
Gulf of California to Nicaragua.

. Tagelus californianus Conrad.
San Pedro, California, to Lower California.

-

Tagelus affinis ©. B. Adams.
Sta. Barbara to Panama.

Section Mesopleura Conrad.

an

. Tagelus divisus Spengler.
Cape Cod to Venezuela.

Tagelus politus Carpenter.
San Pedro to Panama.

60 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

7. Tagelus subteres Conrad.
Southern California to Lower California.

FOSSIL SPECIES OF THE TERTIARY.

Eocene.

Psammobia (Gobreus) ozarkana Harris. Chickasawan.

Psammobia (Garum) filosa Conrad. Claibornian.

Psammobia (Garum) claibornensis Dall. Claibornian.

Psammobia ( Gobreus) blainvillet (Lea). Claibornian.

Psammobia (Gobreus) hornii (Gabb). Tejon.

Psammobia (Gobreus) papyria Conrad. Jacksonian, Vicksburg-
ian and Chipolan.

Psammobia (Gobreus) lintea Conrad. Vicksburgian.

Miocene,
Asaphis eentenaria Conrad. Chesapeake.
Pliocene.

Psammobia (Gobreus) wagneri Dall. Caloosahatchie and Wac-
camaw beds.

Psammobia ( Gobreus) edentula (Gabb). Californian.

Tagelus gibbus Spengler. Caloosahatchie beds, and also Pleisto-
cene of South Carolina.

Tagelus divisus Spengler. Caloosahatchie beds, and also Pleisto-
cene of South Carolina.

The other North American fossil species referred to Psammobia,
Psammocola, Sanguinolaria, Solecurtus, Siliquaria, ete., belong in
other genera or are synonyms of the cited species.

SYNONYMS AND CORRECTIONS.

Capsa deflorata Orb. == Asaphis coccinea (Mart.) Mérch.
Cultellus californianus Conrad, = Tagelus californianus.
Cultellus caribeus Conrad, 1845, == Macha sp.

Cultellus subteres Conrad, = Tagelus subteres.

Leguminaria floridana Conrad, = Tagelus divisus Spgl.
Mesopleura bidentata Conrad, = Tagelus divisus.

Petricola centenaria Conrad, = Asaphis centenaria.

Psammobia affinis C. B. Adams, = Heterodonax bimaculata.
FPsammobia biradiata C. B. Adams, = Heterodonaxz bimaculata.
Psammobia casta (Desh.) Reeve, = Macoma cognata C. B. Ads.
Psammobia cayennensis Lam., = Macoma constricta.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 61

Psammobia cerina C. B. Adams, = Macoma cerina.

Psammobia constricta Lam., —= Macoma constricta.

Psammobia declivis Turton, = Tagelus gibbus Spengler.

Psammobia decora Hinds, = Sanguinolaria nuttallii Conrad.

Psammobia lusoria Say, = Macoma lusoria. ©

Psammobia pacifica Conrad, = Heterodonax bimaculata.

Psammobia purpureo-maculata C. B. Adams, = Heterodonaz bi-
maculata.

Psammobia rosea Deshayes, = Sanguinolaria sanguinolenta.

Psammobia rugosa Sby.. = Asaphis coccinea.

Psammobia rubroradiata Cpr., (1863), = P. californica Conrad,
(Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1848, p. 121).

Psammobia teniata Turton, = Tagelus divisus.

Psammocola lucinoides H. C. Lea, = ? Diplodonta sp.

Psammocola pleiocena T. & H., = Asaphis centenaria.

Psammocola regia H. C. Lea, = Asaphis centenaria.

Psammocola rugosa Blainy., = Asaphis coccinea.

Sanguinolaria californiana Conrad, = Macoma sp.

Sanguinolaria fusca Say, = Macoma fusca.

Sanguinolaria miniata Gould, = S. tellinoides A. Ads.

Sanguinolaria ovalis (Desh.) Reeve, = S. tellinoides junior.

Sanguinolaria purpurea (Desh.) Reeve, = S. tellinoides.

Sanguinolaria rufescens Chemn., = S. operculata Gmel.

Siliquaria caribaea Holmes, = Tagelus gibbus.

Siliquaria carolinensis Conrad, = Tagelus sp. indet.

Siliquaria edentula Gabb, = Psammobia edentula.

Siliquaria equalis Conrad, = Tagelus sp.

Siliquaria gibba A. Adams, = Tagelus gibbus.

Siliquaria notata Schumacher, = Tugelus gibbus.

Solecurtus angulatus Sby., = Tagelus gibbus.

Solecurtus bidens Forbes & Hanley, = Tagelus divisus.

Solecurtus californianus Carpenter, = Tagelus californianus.

Solecurtus caribeus Blainville, = Tagelus gibbus.

Solecurtus centralis Sowerby, = Tagelus gibbus.

Solecurtus cylindricus Sowerby, = Tagelus affinis.

Solecurtus fragilis Conrad, = Tagelus divisus.

Solecurtus subteres Emmons, = Siliquaria equalis Conrad.

Solecurtus subteres Conrad, = Tagelus subteres.

Solecurtus violascens Sowerby, == Tagelus violascens Cpr.

Solen adansonii Bosc, == Tagelus quineensis.

62. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898. :
o

Solen bidens Chemnitz, = Tagelus divisus.

Solen carpenteri Dunker, = Tagelus divisus.

Solen centralis Say, = Tagelus divisus.

Solen fragilis Pulteney, = Tagelus divisus.

Tellina fucata Hinds, = Psammobia fucata.

Tellina fueata Gould, = Strigilla fucata.

Tellina rufescens Chemnitz, = Sanguinolaria operculata Gmel.
Tellina rufescens Roemer, = Sanguinolaria hanleyi Bertin.
Tellina semiplanata Spengler, = Sanguinolaria operculata Gme-
lin.

Tellina vicina C. B. Adams, = Heterodonax bimaculata.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 63

THE GERRHONOTUS OF THE SAN LUCAN FAUNA, LOWER CALIFORNIA,
WITH DIAGNOSIS OF OTHER WEST AMERICAN SPECIES. —

BY JOHN VAN DENBURGH.

A little more than two years ago, in a consideration of the rep-
tiles of Lower California,’ I said that “ Without larger series of the
other species than are at hand, the status of the Gerrhonoti from the
‘Cape Region’ ot Lower California cannot be satisfactorily deter-
mined. It seems probable, however, that they are distinct from the
more northern G. scincicauda, and are referable to the name G.
multicartnatus Blainv.” More recently? I have been able to ex-
amine large numbers of specimens of the four species of this genus
which are known to occur in California, Oregon and Washington,
and to discover more or less definite limits to their variation. I
wish now to consider the status of the Lower Californian form.’

At first glance the lower Californian lizard bears a resemblance
to Gerrhonotus principis of the Puget Fauna. This, however, is
merely a superficial resemblance due to the comparative smoothness
of these two forms, and in a less degree to their similar size and the
occasional absence of complete dorsal color bands in the San Lucan
species. In the number of the longitudinal rows of its dorsal scales
this Gerrhonotus is similar to G. palmeri and G. burnettii. In
other characters, however, it approaches Gerrhonotus scincicauda,
to which I believe it is most closely related.

The following table shows the variation in the several species of
those characters which seem to be of value in classification. The
figures indicate the number of specimens examined.

From this table we may formulate a key which will serve to
identify most specimens :

1 Proc. Cal Acad. Sci. (2), V, 1895, p. 119.

? Occasional Papers, Cal. Acad. Sci., V, 1897, pp. 102-115.

*In making this comparison | have had twenty six specimens from San
ni del Cabo, Sierra El Taste, Sierra San Lazaro, Sierra Laguna and Mira-

ores,

64 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

eee | oa
princi- | burn- multica- | acinei-
pis. ettii. |? almert | -inatus.| cauda.
: —s — winalideamieaiced lite | iene es
Dark lines along middle of ven- 26 91
tral scales, .
Dark lines between ventral) 17 60. | 2
scales, |
Ventral dark lines absent, 10 yg | 14 | 2
Azygous prefontal large, . 1 7 17 26 89
Azygous prefrontal moderate, 10 26 | 1 4
Azygous prefontal small, . 16 41
- — | =e —— ae
A single interoccipital, . 4 8 15 26 84
Two to four ro ii Seca | 28 71 1 8
No interoccipital, d 1 ik
|

Scale rows, 123, . : : | 3
Scale rows, 14, . ‘ . 19 3 87
Seale rows, 14$,. , . 8 1 2 3
Scale rows, 154,. ; : 5
Scale rows, 16, . ; ; ysl 17 20
Scale rows, 18, . , : 1

KEY TO SPECIES.

a.—Dark ventral lines between the longitudinal rows of scales or
absent,
b.—Dorsal scales weakly keeled, in fourteen (rarely 143) lon-
_ gitudinal rows.
G. principis.
b’,—Dorsal scales strongly keeled, in sixteen (rarely 142 or 18)
longitudinal rows.

c.—Temporal scales smooth.
G. burnettii.

c’,—Lower temporal scales keeled.
G. palmeri.
a’,—Dark ventral lines along middle of longitudinal scale rows.
d.—Dorsal scales weekly keeled, in sixteen (rarely 14
or 142) longitudinal rows.

G. multicarinatus.
d’.—Dorsal scales strongly keeled, in fourteen (rarely

122 or 142) longitudinal rows.
G', scincicauda.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 65

Brief characterizations of these five species may prove useful :—

Gerrhonotus principis.

Lower temporal scales smooth; dorsal and caudal scales weakly
keeled ; dorsals in fourteen (or 143) longitudinal rows; dark ventral
lines between the longitudinal rows of scales, or absent; azygous
prefontal of moderate size or small; interoccipitals two or three
(or 1); back without complete dark cross-bands.

Gerrhonotus burnettii.

Lower temporal scales smooth ; dorsal and caudal scales strongly
keeled ; dorsals in sixteen (rarely 154 or 18) longitudinal rows;
dark ventral lines between the longitudinal rows of scales, or
absent ; azygous prefontal usually small or of moderate size ; inter-
occipitals two to four (rarely 1); dorsal color bands usually broken
and closer than in G. scincicauda.

Gerrhonotus palmeri.

Temporal scales keeled ; dorsal and caudal scales strongly keeled ;
dorsals in sixteen longitudinal rows; dark ventral lines absent (or
between the longitudinal rows of scales) ; azygous prefrontal large ;
interoccipital normally single; back without complete dark cross-

bands.

Gerrhonotus multicarinatus.

Lower temporal scales smooth ; dorsal and caudal scales weakly
keeled ; dorsals in sixteen (rarely 14 or 142) longitudinal rows ;
dark lines along the middle of each of the longitudinal rows of
ventral scales; azygous prefrontal large; interoccipital normally
single; back with or without complete dark cross-bars.

Gerrhonotus soincicauda.

Lower temporal scales smooth ; dorsal and caudal scales strongly
keeled; dorsals in fourteen (rarely 123 or 143) longitudinal rows ;
dark lines along the middle of each of the longitudinal rows of
ventral scales (very rarely absent) ; azygous prefrontal large (rarely
moderate-sized ); interoccipital usually single; back usually with
complete dark cross-bands,

Principis (B. & G.) finds its home in the Puget Fauna of western
Washington and Oregon, and perhaps occurs in the mountains
of northern California. G. burnettii Gray occupies a narrow strip
along the coast of California from Monterey to Mendocino County,
G. palmeri (Stejneger) is native to the western slope of the Sierra |,

66 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Nevada of El] Dorado, Tuolumne, Mariposa, Fresno and Tulare
Counties, California, between the altitudes of 3,700 and 9,000 feet.
G. multicarinatus (Blainville) appears to be confined to the San
Lucan Fauna of Lower California. G. scincicauda (Skilton) has.
been found in northwestern Lower California, in the San Diegan,
Californian and Pacific Faune of California, in western Oregon and
in Washington, its range overlapping those of G. burnettii, G. pal-
meri and, probably, G. principis. ;

The probable relationship of these species may be indicated
thus :—

palmeri

ee ee 4 *.
—— ee

« ayinatus —_
ae

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 67

ANATOMICAL NOTES ON CERTAIN WEST AMERICAN HELICES.
BY H. A. PILSBRY AND E, G. VANATTA.’

THE GENUS GLYPTOSTOMA.

This genus has very distinct conchological features, the shell re-
calling the typical Zonites in form. The jaw, radula and genitalia
have been investigated and figured by W. G. Binney. From
these data the senior writer placed Glyptostoma in the group Belo-
gona Euadenia of the arrangement of Helices given in volume IX ot
the Manual of Conchology, near the genus Epiphragmophora. We
have now examined two specimens of G'. Newberryanum. The genital
system of one is figured on PI. I, fig. 1. The two examples dis-
sected agree perfectly in all details, but in several points do not
correspond with Binney’s figures. The right eye is retracted be-
tween ¢ and 9 branches of the genitalia. The penis is continued a
short distance beyond the insertion of the vas deferens, and may be
regarded as having a rudimentary epiphallus, the long retractor
inserted thereon distally. There is no trace ofa flagellum. Vagina
long, at its apex the very long duct of the spermatheca enters. This
duct is of the length of the uterus and terminates in a large globular
spermatheca. No diverticulum. At the point where the sp. d.
enters, an ovate sessile body is placed. This has the shining, fleshy
muscular substance commonly seen in dart sacks; and we do not
doubt that the organ is of that nature, although no dart was found in
either of the two individuals dissected. The lumen presented
several broad folds, and no distinct apical papilla. There is no trace
of mucus glands. The talon is unusually long.

From these characters it appears that the genus, while probably
belonging with the series of American dart-bearing Helices, is
extremely isolated. The other American genera, Epiphragmoph-

' The dissections and drawings of all species noticed in this paper are by
Mr. Vanatta, who is also responsible for all anatomical details of the several
forms. The more general discussions relating to the systematic bearings of
the facts developed are by Mr. Pilsbry.

We would here acknowledge our indebtedness to Professor W. H. Dall for
alcoholic specimens of several of the forms discussed below.

68 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

ora, Lysinoe, Leptarionta, Cepolis, and Polymita are all more nearly
allied to each other than to G/yptostoma.’

The lack of mucus glands is a degenerative feature unique in Be-
logona Euadenia, though it occurs in the Belogona Siphonadenia.

The high insertion of the dart sack is very unusual.

The talon is longer than in any other Helix known to us.

The loss of a flagellum on the penis is unique among American
Euadenice, but occurs in certain Chinese forms of Eudota and in
many other Old World groups. It is not usually a character of
generic importance in Helices.

Tue MICRARIONTA GROUP OF EPIPHRAGMOPHORA.

Micrarionta was proposed by Mr. C. F. Ancey as a subgenus of
Helix, based mainly, it would seem, upon the small size of the shell
and reflexed lip of its type, H. facta. In the ‘‘ Guide to the Study
of Helices” the group was expanded to include the larger, simple-
lipped Lower Californian Helices which Binney (following von
Martens) referred to Kuparypha; and it was shown to have well
marked anatomical features unlike any other known group of
Helices.

The three subgeneric groups into which our West Coast Epiphr-
agmophoras were divided in the “ Guide,”—Micrarionta, Helmintho-
glypta and Monadenia,—differ trenchantly in the forms of their
mucus glands. In the first they are inserted by two separate ducts
at the base of, rather than upon, the dart sack. In the second a
single duct enters the dart sack, and splits into two bulbiferous
branches aboye. In the third there is a single club-shaped gland.
The other characters of the soft anatomy, as well as the shells, are
not very unlike in the three groups.

Of the eleven species of Micrarionta, E. intercisa and E. levis are
unknown anatomically. £. Gabbi, ruficincta, intercisa, Kelletti and
Tryoni are known to us by W. G. Binney’s figures, but several char-
acters being unnoticed by Binney, a reéxamination of these is desir-
able. We have dissected FE. areolata, Pandore, Veitchii, Stearnsiana
and Guadalupiana.

E. Guadalupiana Dall, Pl. I, fig. 11 (genitalia) differs consider-
ably from the other species examined. The flagellum is but little

* Leptarionta is hardly sufficiently known to be included in this statement.
It should be stated that the shell characters of Glyptostoma are also notably
different from any of the other genera named.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 69

longer than the penis and epiphallus taken together. The sperma-
theca duct bears no diverticulum. The dart sack is degenerate,
reduced to a small wide bud, one mucus gland arising at its right
side, descending, club shaped, the other at left side, ascending and
slightly sacculated ; both entirely free, not bound to the vagina. The
right eye-retractor passes to the left of the genital system, not between
its branches.

The last characters may be expected to occur in E. facta and
ruficincta. It is a very unusual feature. The subobsolete condition
of the dart sack is unlike any allied species. The measurements
are: length of penis+epiphallus 9 mm.; of flagellum 10; of sper-
matheca duct 15 mm.

The other forms examined have the flagellum very long, dart sack
well developed, one of the mucus glands descending, spread upon
the base of vagina, the other upon the dart sack, both bound down.
Diverticulum developed and long except in Stearnsiana. In all, the
spermatheca arises high, near the distal end of the vagina. The
dimensions of the parts are as follows:

Pandore. Veitehii. Areolata. Stearnsiana.

Length of penis+epiphallus 15 35 28 22 28 mm.
Length of flagellum 21 67 50 26 27 mm.
Length of spermatheca duct 173 54 49 43 35 mm.
Length of diverticulum 13 43 25 0 1mm.

Thrown into the form of an analytical key, the genital characters
give these results:

a. Right eye retractor passing between ¢ and 9 branches of geni-
talia; diverticulum presents one mucus gland spread upon and
firmly bound to vagina below dart sack.

b. Flagellum and spermatheca duct of about equal length,
areolata,
bb. Flagellum longer than spermatheca duct; diverticulum }
to # length of spermatheca duct, much longer than the
other branch.
c. Penis+-epiphallus j length of flagellum . . . Pandora.
ec. Penis+epiphallus about } length of flagellum . VeiteAii.
bbb. Flagellum shorter than spermatheca duct; diverticulum
very shortor wanting. — . . + + « « « Stearnsiana,
1. Right eye retractor not passing bevwemn branches of genitalia ;
mucus glands free; no diverticulum ; flagellum about the same
length as penis-+-epiphallus.
b. Dart suck degenerate, very small . .°. . . @uadalupiana. '

70 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

No further details of the genitalia are needed except such as are
clearly shown in the figures; and of course some variation in the
absolute dimensions of various organs is to be expected.

Details are lacking to intercalate the other species of the sub-
genus in the above synopsis, but from Binney’s figures it seems that
E. Kelletti and Tryoni fall into § bb. of the first division (a.) of this
dichotomous table, and it is likely that E. rujficineta and facta group
in the second division, aa. ‘They differ from E. Guadalupiana Dall
in having the dart sack well developed. The position of the eye
retractor muscle is unknown. Neither of them has a diverticulum
on the spermatheca duct.

E.Stearnsiana differs considerably from areolata, Pandora, Veitchii
and,according to Binney’s figures, Ke//etti, in having the diverticulum
short or obsolete. Two specimens were dissected, both from Coro-
nado Islands. In one (66,091 A. N.S. P. Mus., coll. by A. W.
Anthony) there is no trace of a diverticulum. In the other (69,014,
from Prof. W. H. Dall) there is a very short diverticulum, about
1 mm. long, arising slightly beyond the lower fourth of the length
of spermatheca duet. In this specimen the duct is 8 mm. shorter
than in the other. Binney’s figure shows a somewhat longer diver-
ticulum than our No. 69,014, but it is still very short. This variation
in the diverticulum is exactly paralleled in the European Helix
pomatia.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE I.

Nore.—The shells of the specimens furnishing the genitalia
figured, as well as the dissections, may be found in the collection of
the Academy bearing numbers corresponding to those given below.

(Div., diverticulum of the spermatheca duct. d.s., dart sack.
fi., flagellum. m. g/l. as., ascending mucous gland. m. gl. des., de-
scending ditto. p., penis. r.p., penis retractor muscle. «p., sper-
matheca. sp. d., duct of the spermatheca. ¢., talon. vag., vagina).

Fig. 1. Glyplostoma Newberryanum (W. G. B.). Pasadena, Cal.
No. 68,997.

Fig. 2. Epiphragmophora Veitchii (Newe.). Cerros Is., of Lower
Cal. No. 69,647.

Fig. 3. The same individual, other side of the dart sac and adjacent
organs.

Fig. 4,5. Epiphragmophora Pandore Bonitosensis Pils. Las
Bonitos Is., off Lower California. No. 66,092.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 71

Fig. 6,7. Epiphragmophora areolata (Sowb.). Natividad Is. No.
69,646. In fig. 6 the opposite side of dart sack and associ-
ated organs is seen, and the spermatheca duct with its
diverticulum torn free from the uterus.

Fig. 8. Epiphragmophora Stearnsiana (Gabb). Coronado Is. No.
69,014.

Fig. 9,10. Another specimen from the same locality, No. 66,091,
showing no trace of the diverticulum upon spermatheca
duct.

Fig. 11. Epiphragmophora Guadalupiana Dall. Guadalupe I, off
Lower Cal. No. 69,648 (Drawn to double the scale of
other figures of this plate).

72 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

CONTRIBUTIONS TO A KNOWLEDGE OF THE HYMENOPTERA OF
BRAZIL, NO. 4.-THYNNINZE AND ADDITIONS.

BY WILLIAM J. FOX.

The author has withheld the publication of the present paper for
some time in the hope that an opportunity would present itself for
the classification of the true Mutillide in the collection of Mr. H. H.
Smith, and thereby avoid the inconvenience of listing the Mutillidee
in more than one paper. Circumstances, however, will not permit
the carrying out of such a plan, so he feels obliged to present this
paper for publication, even though it deals with but a part of one
family.’
2#lurus carbonarius Sm. (—LZlaphroptera carbonaria Sm.)

Four specimens. Rio de Janeiro (November).

Elurus aethiops Klug. (=Thynnus aethiops Klug).

The description of this species as given by Klug will fit what I
have determined as Smith’s Elaphroptera carbonaria, as will also
Klug’s description of Thynnus anthracinus. The specimen I refer
to aethiops is larger and heavier than carbonarius, and is more
coarsely punctured. It is probable that carbonarius is the same as
anthracinus, but the descriptions of both are so poor that nothing
conclusive can be determined from them, except their faultiness.
The specimen in question comes from Rio de Janeiro (November).

#Elurus nasutus Klug.
Two specimens. Rio de Janeiro (November).

Elaphroptera sp.

Two specimens (9) of a species apparently close to Thynnus
intermedius Klug. They are smaller than that species. Collected
in September at Chapa la.

Elaphroptera decora Sm. (= hynnus decorus Sm.)
One specimen,

1See Entomological News, 1X, 1, Jan., 1897, p. 14.

1 _#lurus carbonarius and 42, aethiops differ from typical “/urus (A. nasu-
tus) in the bidentate mandibles, in the third submarginal being longer than
second, in the emarginate or bidentate clypeus and comparatively shorter
maxillary palpi, in which joints 4-6, while much longer than the preceding
ones, are still not as long as in A. masutus,

SS

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 73

Elaphroptera plagiata Sm. (—T7hynnus plagiatus Sm.)

One specimen. Both this and decora were collected at Chapada
(October).
Elaphroptera cribraria n. sp.

?.—Black; legs reddish-testaceous, a curved yellow line over
the base of each antenna; head large, twice as wide as broadest
part of mesothorax, covered with deep, regularly separated punc-
tures (the punctuation is almost sieve-like), covered with a rather
long, pale, erect pubescence; cheeks behind eyes almost impunctate ;
scape shining, strongly punctured, bearing some stiff, golden hairs
beneath, as do also the mandibles; mandibles faleate, when closed
apparently not dentate ; mesothorax above with large, sparse punc-
tures, emarginate and depressed anteriorly in the middle, pleurse
polished ; scutellum punetured; middle segment finely punctured,
subconvex, not excavated or depressed; hind femora beneath, be-
fore apex, with a long tooth or spine; tibize and tarsi very strongly
spinose; tarsal claws cleft; abdomen large, with strong, sparse
punctures and long, pale pubescence beneath; second dorsal seg-.
ment bearing four sharp, transverse carinze, the first dorsal trans-
versely sulcate at apex ; sixth segment in the form of a narrow, lon~
gitudinal carina. Length 13 mm.

Rio de Janeiro (November). One specimen.

Elaphroptera brunnea n. sp.

2 .—Brown, the head in front, thorax and legs in part, and two first
abdominal segments, palest, the remainder castaneous or blackish-
brown; mandibles basally, a spot before and behind the eyes, sides of
elypeus, fore femora internally, spot at apex of medial femora, stripe
on fore tibiz externally, and on medial tibiz internally, yellow.
Head medium, wider than thorax, finely though distinetly punctured,
with sparse long hairs; occiput high and sharply margined, sparsely
punctured ; scape strongly punctured with some golden bristles be-
neath ; mandibles slender, falcate, without teeth; mesothorax above
with two concavities, the portion dividing them formed into a tooth-
like process posteriorly ; middle segment rather squarely cut off be-
hind, the upper surface in the middle posteriorly with a tubercle or
prominence; thorax is not distinetly punctured; tibise and tarsi
strongly spinose ; hind femora scarcely dentate at apex beneath ;
first dorsal segment of abdomen sharply truncate anteriorly, the
truncation bounded posteriorly by a carina, behind which in the

6

74 PROCEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

middle stands a small tubercle; second dorsal with three strong,
transversely-parallel caring: ; remaining dorsal sparsely punctured ;
ventrals flat, more distinetly punctured, especially the fifth which is
also rugose-striate on apical portion. Length 9 mm.

Chapada. Two specimens.

Elaphroptera pallida n. sp.

? .—Yellowish-testaceous ; spot surrounding the eye and a line
extending up to the occiput on each side of front, whitish-yellow ;
head closely and finely punctured, sparsely so on occiput; the lat-
ter rather prominent posteriorly and subemarginate medially ; scape
triangular, greatly broadened apically ; mesothorax bearing a longi-
tudinal, medial fold, which is furrowed on posterior portion, and on
each side of which, posteriorly, stands a horn or tooth-like process;
a median fold on scutellum ; middle segment indistinctly punctured,
the upper surface prominent, slightly tuberculate medially and at
postero lateral angles; hind femora but slightly dentate beneath at
apex ; tarsal claws cleft; abdomen above with sparse punctures,
which become closer posteriorly, those of ventral surface stronger
and closer, especially on fifth segment; first dorsal sharply truncate
anteriorly, the truncated portion divided by a slender raised line
and bearing some stiff, pale hairs above; second dorsal with three
transverse carins, the first rather feeble and short, the other two
very sharp; body with long, sparse, pale hairs. Length 63 mm.

Chapada (November). One specimen.

Elaphroptera clitellata Klug. (—=Thynnus clitellatus Klug).

A specimen from Chapada (October). The claws are cleft and
the second dorsal abdominal segment bears an acute transverse car-
ina before its apex, anterior to which the segment is rugose. The
legs in the specimen before me are not yellow, but rufo-testaceous.
It agrees well with Klug’s figure of the species, except that the yellow
of mesothorax is restricted to a small dot on each side anteriorly.

Telephoromyia punicea n. sp.

3 .—Reddish-brown, flagellum, spot enclosing ocelli, dorsulum
and pleura more or less, thorax beneath, and legs, except tibise and
tarsi, blackish; clypeus and mandibles except apex, yellowish;
head closely punctured, clothed with pale, glittering pubescence;
clypeus concave in middle with two strong teeth or prongs, ante-
riorly; mandibles rather large, terminating in a sharp point, ante-
rior to which the inner margin is broadly enlarged and bidentate ;

a

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 75

antenne slightly longer than head and thorax united ; joints of fla-
gellum rounded beneath, the first two about equal in length ; pune-
tuation of thorax coarser than that of head, that of dorsulum cvars-
est, that on mesopleurze closest ; scutellum strongly convex; tarsal
claws cleft; tibial spurs small as compared to Al/urus carbonarius ;
abdomen depressed, with distinct separated punctures and pale pube-
scence; pygidium large, convex, obtusely rounded at apex, coarsely
rugose; last ventral segment bearing two flap-like carinz, one on
each side, between which is the subgenital plate which is sub-acute
at apex; wings fuscous, with purplish reflection, stigma and costa
reddish, other veins black. Length 21 mm.
One specimen. Chapada (October).

The following species of Pepsis have been identified by Herr Dr.
R. Lucas, of Berlin, and were not included in the paper on Pom-
pilidee :

Pepsis aspasia Luc.

One specimen. Corumba (April).
Pepsis Foxi Luc.

A large series of both sexes. Chapada (March, April, October).
Pepsis smaragdinula Luc.

Rio de Janeiro (November) ; Chapada (January, March, April).
Nine 9, five 3 specimens.

Pepsis Schlenki Luc.

Five specimens. Chapada (January, March).
Pepsis defecta Tasch.

Several specimens.

Pepsis Pertyi var. ruficornis Luc.
Chapada (April). One specimen.
Pepsis centaurus Luc.
Chapada (April). One specimen.

76 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1898.

THE SUMMER BIRDS OF SUSQUEHANNA COUNTY, PENNSYLVANIA.
BY FRANCIS R. COPE, JR.’

Since the publication of Dr. Dwight’s paper on the “Summer
Birds of the Crest of the Pennsylvania Alleghenies,” (Auk, LX,
April, 1892), and Mr. Stone’s on the “ Summer Birds of Harvey’s
Lake, Luzerne County, Pennsylvania,” (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Phila., 1891, pp. 451-458)’ no detailed account has appeared of the
summer birds of the northeastern part of the State, although it has
generally been supposed that the fauna of this region partook
largely of the nature of the North Mountain district, with perhaps
a slightly stronger tinge of the Canadian element. Indeed, on the
faunal map attached to Mr. Stone’s volume on the “ Birds of
eastern Pennsylvania and New Jersey’” almost the whole of Sus-
quehanna County is included in what is known as the Canadian
fauna.

The present paper, based on several years study of the birds of
the county, and including only such species as have been observed
during the breeding season, suy from June 15th to the second week
in July, shows, I think, that the fauna of Susquehanna County, al-
though it has a strong tinge of this Canadian element, possesses it.
to a less marked degree than the mountainous region further south.
This fact may doubtless be accounted for by the absence of any very
extensive hemlock forests, such as those found around Harvey’s.
Lake and on North Mountain.

Reference to a map will show that Susquehanna County is sit-
uated in the northeastern part of Pennsylvania, between latitude
41° 40’ and 42°. It is part of the Allegheny and Pocono plateaux,
and may be described as a hilly, rocky country, interspersed with
innumerable small valleys. With the exception of many small

' Read before the Delaware Valley Ornithological Club at the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.

2 Since the above was written, a paper has been published bearing on this
subject, entitled “Summer Birds of northern Elk County, Pennsylvania,” by
William L. Baily, (Auk, XIII, October, 1896).

’« Birds of eastern Pennsylvania and New Jersey,” by Witmer Stone, pub-
lished by the D. V. O. Club, Philadelphia, 1894.

——

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 77

lakes and ponds, the land is poorly watered, there being but few
streams of any size. A spur of the Alleghenies extends through
the southeastern corner, terminating in Elk Mountain, which last
rises to an altitude of about 3,000 feet and is almost the only emi-
nence in the county worthy of the name of mountain, the other hills
not rising much above 2,000 feet. The vast tracts of forest, which
fifty years ago covered the greater part of the county, now every-
where bear witness to the ravages of axe and fire, and are broken
up into isolated patches. Among the principal forest trees may be
mentioned the Beech, Maple, Hemlock, Chestnut, Birch, and Pine,
the last mentioned being, perhaps, the least plentiful of the six. Of
these species the Hemlock has doubtless suffered the most, being
particularly prized for its bark ; nevertheless it is still found in con-
siderable numbers interspersed among the other trees.

It is in these small, but numerous tracts of primeval forest which
yet remain uncut, that we find most of the truly Canadian species.
Here such northern birds as Black-throated, Blue, Canadian, Mag-
nolia and Blackburnian Warblers, Water Thrushes, Solitary Vireos
and Hermit Thrushes are all more or less common, some being abun-
dant, but they are almost entirely confined to the deep woods, espe-
cially where there is'a thick growth of hemlock. Of other Cana-
dian species, the Junco seems to be generally confined to the open
clearings and pastures bordering on woodland, and is decidedly
rare, Elk Mountain being the only locality where it has been found
breeding in any numbers. Jiven here, however, where during the
latter part of June, 1894, I found upward of a dozen pairs breed-
ing at an altitude of 2,600 feet, not a single bird was observed on a
second visit, July 2, 1897. Winter Wrens are conspicuous by their
absence, although there seems to be no good reason why this spe-
cies should not occur plentifully, unless it be owing to the absence
of any very extensive hemlock forests, as before remarked. My
only reason for mentioning them in this paper is that during the
first week in July, 1497, I twice heard a song in the depths of a
hemlock forest near Dimock, which, although ] am not familiar
with the bird, I felt almost sure was the note of a Winter Wren.
This would seem to point at least to the possibility of its breeding.

In the open land throughout the greater part of the county, es-
pecially in moist upland meadows, Savannah Sparrows are very
common, generally breeding in small colonies; while at Dundaff, in
the southeastern portion, in open fields at an altitude of some 2,000

78 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

feet, the Bobolink is an abundant breeder, also occurring locally at
many points in the central and eastern part of the county.

As to the occurrence of several species of water birds during the
breeding season in Susquehanna County, I can state nothing posi-
tive, not having visited several of the more retired lakes and streams
in the northwestern portion of the county, where they would be
most likely to be found.

To sum up, I think it may be said that the fauna of Susquehanna
County is largely Alleghenian, with astrong tinge of the Canadian,
but with practically nothing of what may be regarded as belonging
exclusively to the Carolinian element. To be sure, Dr. Warren
(Birds of Pennsylvania, p. 300) mentions having taken a Hooded.
Warbier in the county during the summer months, while on August
10, 1895. I shot a pair of adult Prothonotary Warblers near Dim-
ock, but these species can hardly be regarded as more than strag-
glers.

In the following list I have made no mention of the birds breed-
ing, as with few exceptions all the individuals noted during the last
of June and early part of July may reasonably be assumed to be
summer residents and to be breeding in the locality where seen.

Such species as have not come under my personal observation or
whose status as breeders may be doubtful, have been placed in
brackets.

Before concluding, I desire to express my thanks to Mr. Witmer
Stone, of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, who
visited the county in June 1896 and 1897, and who has rendered
valuable assistance in many ways.

{l. Aix sponsa. Wood Duck.

Formerly a common breeder in the more retired lakes and
streams, but now decidedly rare. A pair seen during the early part
of August, 1895, near a wild overgrown pond in the vicinity of
Dimock only points to the probability of its breeding].

2. Ardea herodias. Great Blue Heron.

Rare. Scattered pairs occasionally seen along the larger streams
throughout the county.

3. Ardea virescens. (Green Heron.

Tolerably common, but like the last never found breeding in col-

onies, there being generally but a single pair in one locality. The —

birds, however, show great partiality for the old breeding grounds,
and generally return to the same spot year after year.

qigers ere ve t5 8

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 79
4. Nycticorax nycticorax naevius. Black-crowned Night Heron.

This species has been observed but rarely during the breeding
season, though there seems to be no reason why it should not be
plentiful.

5. Philohela minor. American Woodcock.
Rather common, but yearly becoming scarcer as a breeder.
6. Bartramia longicauda. Bartramian Sandpiper.

One bird observed in an upland pasture near Dimock, June
19, 1897, and evidently breeding from its actions, is my only record
for the county.

7. Actitis macularia. Spotted Sandpiper.
Common in all suitable localities.
8. Colinus virginianus. Bob-white.

Much less common now than formerly, but solitary individuals
and an occasional covey are still frequently met with. During the
last two years, however, there has been a noticeable increase in the
numbers of this bird throughout the county.

9. Bonasa umbellus. Ruffled Grouse.

More plentiful than C. virginianus, but fast becoming rarer as
the forests are cut away, thus depriving it of suitable breeding
grounds and hiding places.

(10. Ectopistes migratorius. Passenger Pigeon.

A flock of four was seen July 19, 1897, in a dead chestnut tree
on the edge of a strip of woodland near Dimock. Although I had
a good look at the birds through my glass and feel no reasonable
doubt as to the identity, I was unfortunately unable to secure any
of them. ‘This species isknown to have formerly been an abundant
breeder in Susquehanna. County, but these are the first individuals
seen for many years. This occurrence at this season of the year
may possibly indicate that they still nest occasionally in the wilder
parts of the county J.

11. Zenaidura macroura. Mourning Dove.

This species, which may be regarded as common to the Alleghe-
nian and Carolinian zones, though perhaps more typical of the lat-
ter, is not uncommon in some localities, although decidedly rare in ‘
others.

80 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

12. Circus hudsonius. Marsh Hawk.

The county is seemingly far too hilly and mountainous to suit the
habits of this hawk, but nevertheless a pair has been seen regularly
during June and July for several years past on a small marshy
meadow surrounding Elk Lake, and doubtless breeds there.

13. Accipiter velox. Sharp-shinned Hawk.

Rather common, being frequently met with during the breeding

season,
14. Accipiter cooperi. Cooper’s Hawk.
Rare and much less common than the preceding.

15. Buteo borealis. Red-tailed Hawk.

Decidedly the most abundant hawk in the county, a few being
seen almost daily.

16. Buteo lineatus. Red-shouldered Hawk.

Probably ranks next to B. borealis in abundance.

17. Falco sparverius. Sparrow Hawk.

Rather common.

{18. Syrnium nebulosum. Barred Owl.

The only record which I have of the occurrence of this owl in
summer time is an adult male shot by a friend during the latter part
of August, 1897. It may doubtless be regarded as a rare perma-
nent resident].

19. Megascops asio. Screech Owl.
Common resident.

20. Bubo virginianus. (reat-horned Owl.
Tolerably common resident in the deeper forests throughout the
county.
21. Coccyzus erythrophthalmus. Black-billed Cuckoo.
Not uncommon, during the breeding season.
22. Ceryle alcyon. Belted Kingfisher.

Tolerably common along the banks of ponds and streams, being
especially abundant at Silver Lake in the northwestern part of the
county.

23. Dryobates villosus. Hairy Woodpecker.
Common throughout the wooded portions.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 81

24. Dryobates pubescens. Downy Woodpecker.
Abundant and generally distributed, both in the woodland and
in the open country.

(25. Ceophleus pileatus. Pileated Woodpecker.

Personally I have never observed this species during the breed-
ing season, but as several specimens have been taken during the
early part of August, it doubtless breeds sparingly ].

26. Melanerpes erythrocephalus. Red-headed Woodpecker.
Rare. A pair was observed at Dundaff, June, 1895, and a single
bird near Montrose in June, 1896.

27. Colaptes auratus. Flicker.
Abundant everywhere.

28. Antrostomus vociferus. Whip-poor-will.
Very rare, having been only once or twice noted in low, secluded
spots.

29. Chordeiles virginianus. Night Hawk.
Very common, collecting in large flocks during August.

30. Chetura pelagica. Chimney Swift.

Abundant, breeding throughout the county. It has, however,
adapted itself to the ways of civilization and has never been ob-
served nesting in hollow trees.

$1. Trochilus colubris. Ruby-throated Humming-bird.

Common, both about houses and in the deep woods.

32. Tyrannus tyrannus. Kingbird.
Abundant and generally distributed.
$3. Myiarchus crinitus. Great-crested Flycatcher.
Tolerably common throughout the county.
34. Sayornis phoebe. Phoche.
Abundant everywhere in the open country.
35. Contopus virens. Wood Pewee.
Fully as abundant as the preceding species, but confined to or-
chards and woodlands.
36. Empidonax minimus. Least Flycatcher.

Very common and universally distributed during the breeding
season,

82 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

37. Otocoris alpestris praticola. Prairie Horned Lark.

Although this species has been recorded during the breeding sea-
son by Messrs. Dwight and Parke at Athens, Bradford County, at
Williamsport (Koch), and in Elk County (Baily), it has never, to
my knowledge, been observed in this county until the summer of
1896, when a bird was noted July 6, in a grassy meadow near
Dimock.

38. Cyanocitta cristata. Blue Jay.
Abundant, especially in woody situations.

39. Corvus americanus. American Crow.

Abundant.

40. Dolichonyx oryzivorus. Bobolink.

A common breeder, but decidedly local in its distribution, al-
though isolated pairs may be found in all suitable localities through-
out the county. At Dundaff, a small village in the southeastern
part, at an elevation of 1,620 feet, upward of two dozen pairs were
found breeding in June, 1895, while a small colony generally nests
in some upland meadows near Dimock.

It may also be of interest to note that two pairs of this species
were observed at Waymart, Wayne County, Pennsylvania, June
22, 1895, and four pairs near Sugarloaf Mountain on the western
border of the same county, June 23, 1897.

41. Molothrus ater. Cowbird.
Rather common.

42. Agelaius phoeniceus. Red-winged Blackbird.

Locally common, breeding plentifully on the marshes of several
lakes near Dimock, where I have taken fresh eggs as late as the first
of July.

43. Sturnella magna. Meadow Lark.

Very common and generally distributed.

44. Icterus galbula. Baltimore Oriole.

Common about houses and generally distributed, apparently in-
creasing in abundance.

45. Quiscalus quiscula aeneus. Bronzed (7) Grackle.

While on a collecting trip with Mr. Witmer Stone in the north-
western part of the county, June 22, 1897, a single Grackle was ob-
served, presumably Q. g. aeneus. Unfortunately neither of us was

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 83

able to secure the bird; but from its actions it was undoubtedly
nesting in theneighborhood. This record seems interesting as being
the first evidence, to my knowledge, of the occurrence of any species
of Grackle in Susquehanna County.

46. Carpodacus purpureus. Purple Finch.

Not uncommon, both in the woodland and in the open country
about houses, where its pretty song may be heard from April to the
middle of July.

47. Passer domesticus. English Sperrow.

This pest, everywhere rapidly increasing in numbers, and now
_ resident in almost every town and village of any size throughout the
county, bids fair to soon drive away all the old feathered songsters
from our gardens and orchards.

48. Spinus tristis. American Goldfinch.

Abundant everywhere.

49. Poocetes gramineus. Vesper Sparrow.

The most abundant and generally distributed of the sparrows
during the breeding season; in fact, one of the characteristic birds
of the open country.

50. Ammodramus sandwichensis savanna. Sayannah Sparrow.

Very common and widely distributed in all suitable localities,
especially in the northern and eastern portions of the county.
51. Ammodramus savannarum passerinus. Grasshopper Sparrow.

Common in dry uplands,

52. Spizella socialis. Chipping Sparrow.
Abundant.

53. Spizella pusilla. Field Sparrow.

Abundant in open fields and overgrown pastures.
54. Junco hyemalis. Slate-colored Junco.

Formerly common at Elk Mountain, from 2,000 feet up, and gen-
erally confined to open fields, but now quite rare. Its occurrence in
the rest of the county is limited to two records: First, a single pair
shot June 26, 1896, near Dimock, and secondly, another pair
engaged in constructing a nest near the same locality, April 24,
1897. One would expect to find this species in the elevated plateau
land of Ararat township, on the eastern border of the county, a |
locality well suited to its habits; but on a visit to this region in

84 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

June, 1897, I did not meet with a single individual, although it was
found three miles to the eastward, on Sugarloaf Mountain, in Wayne
County.
55. Melospiza fasciata. Song Sparrow.
Abundant everywhere, except in the deep woods.
56. Melospiza georgiana. Swamp Sparrow.
Rather common in low swampy situations.
57. Pipilo erythrophthalmus. Towhee.
Tolerably common in scrubby fields and clearings.
58. Zamelodia ludoviciana. Rose-breasted Grosbeak.

This species seems to be very rare, having only been observed
once during the breeding season, when a fine male was shot June 22,
1896, in an old clearing near Dimock.

59. Passerina cyanea. Indigo Bird.

Abundant, especially in briar patches and clearings, where the
males may be heard singing all day long.
60. Piranga erythromelas. Scarlet Tanager.

Very common throughout the deep woods.
61. Petrochelidon lunifrons. Cliff Swallow.

Common, but rather local in its distribution, and generally found
breeding in colonies. It has of late years been gradually decreasing
in abundance.

62. Chelidon erythrogaster. Barn Swallow.

More abundant and generally distributed throughout the county
than the preceding species. ,
63. Tachycineta bicolor. Tree Swallow.

Rare. Scattered pairs occasionally seen in suitable localities.

64. Ampelis cedrorum. Cedar Bird.

Common summer resident, occurring in large flocks during June
and again in September.

65. Vireo olivaceus. Red-eyed Vireo.

Very abundant, both in the shade trees about houses and in the
deep woods.

66. Vireo gilvus. Warbling Vireo.

A nest with three young, collected by Mr. Stone and myself near
Milford, June 22,1897, is the only record which I have of its
occurrence in Susquehanna County.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 85

67. Vireo flavifrons. Yellow-throated Vireo.

Not uncommon, being frequently met with during the breeding
season, especially in the deep woods.
68. Vireo solitarius. Blue-headed Vireo.

Common in the deep forests throughout the greater portion of
the county, one or more pairs being usually met with in all
the larger pieces of woodland. Two adults with young just out
of the nest and nut yet able to fly were observed July 8, 1896,
about two miles south of Springville.

69. Mniotilta varia. Black and White Warbler.

Tolerably common in second growth woods and clearings.
70. Compsothlypis americana. Parula Warbler.

Not uncommon, and several times met with in woods where there
is apparently no usnea moss. It would be interesting to know what
the bird constructs its nest of in such localities.

71. Dendroica aestiva. Yellow Warbler.

Common throughout the open country.

72. Dendroica caerulescens. Black-throated Blue Warbler.

Abundant and generally distributed in the deep hemlock woods,
being, perhaps, the commonest representative of its genus.
73. Dendroica maculosa. Magnolia Warbler.

Another very common species, almost as plentiful as the preced-
ing, but like it confined to the deep hemlock woods.
74. Dendroica pennsylvanica. Chestnut-sided Warbler.

Common, but confined to the clearings and tracts of ‘scrub. A
nest together with the brood of young birds was discovered June 27,
1896, in a small orchard within a few yards of the house.

75. Dendroica blackburnie. Blackburnian Warbler.

Abundaut wherever there is a thick growth of hemlock. It
would be hard to say whether this species or D. caerulescens is the
more plentiful, for as Dr. Dwight remarks, there are “ places where
both might almost be said to swarm.”

76. Dendroica virens. [Black-throated Green Warbler.

Also abundant in the deep hemlock forests, but hardly as plenti-
ful as the preceding species.

77. Seiurus aurocapillus. Oven-bird.

Abundant everywhere.

86 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

78. Seiurus noveboracensis. Water Thrush.

This typical Canadian species seems to be decidedly rare, the only
record for the county being one immature female shot June 26, 1896.
This bird was secured in a dense swamp containing asparse growth
of rhododendron, and had evidently been out of the nest but a short
time.

79. Geothlypis trichas. Maryland Yellow-throat.

Very common, but confined to clearings and open grounds, and
seldom noted in the deep woods.

80. Sylvania canadensis. Canadian Warbler.

Another species belonging to the Canadian fauna, and one almost
as abundant as D. caerulescens. It is found throughout the county,
in the lower and damper portions of the deep forests, generally, but
not always, where there is a thick growth of hemlock.

Personally I have never detected the Redstart (Setophaga ruticilla)
during the breeding season in this county, but during the latter part
of June, 1895, I found it to be very common in portions of Wayne
County and at Lake Teedyuskung, Pike County.

81. Galeoscoptes carolinensis. Catbird.

A common species in the open country.

.

82. Harporhynchus rufus. Brown Thrasher.
Rather rare in the central and northern parts of the county, in-
creasing in abundance toward the southern border. Observed only
in scrubby fields and clearings. 7
83. Troglodytes aedon. House Wren.
Tolerably comnion about houses.

(84. Troglodytes hyemalis. Winter Wren.

Very rare. As previously remarked, the song has been detected
several times during the early summer in the deep hemlock woods
near Dimock, and leads me to think that it probably breeds spa-
ringly in the wildest portions of the county ],

The Brown Creeper, Certhia familiaris americana, although re-
corded by Messrs. Dwight, Baily and Stone from Sullivan, Elk and
Luzerne Counties respectively, has never been observed by me in
Susquehanna County during the breeding season, and if it does
occur, must be regarded as a very rare summer resident.

85. Sitta carolinensis. White-breasted Nuthatch,
Very common, both in the woods and in the open country.

a

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 87

86. Parus atricapillus. Black-capped Chickadee.
Abundant in the woodland.

87. Turdus mustelinus. Wood Thrush.

A common species and generally confined to the deep woods. A
nest containing young nearly ready to fly was discovered, however,
June 18, 1895, situated in a young maple tree on the border of
the woods within a few rods of the house. The female bird was ex-
ceedingly tame, allowing approach within a foot of the nest, but
usually this species lacks much of the tameness and confidence
which so characterizes it in the more densely populated portions of
the country.

88. Turdus fuscescens. Wilson’s Thrush. e

Very abundant in dense, swampy woodland throughout the
county. Owing to its shyness and the inaccessibility of the locali-
ties which it generally inhabits, the bird is very difficult to
approach, but its presence is always betrayed by its wild bell-like
notes, which may be heard at all hours of the day, but which sound
the sweetest in the early morning and about sunset. It is almost
impossible to imitate the song on paper, but the syllables “ ta-weel’ah,
ta-weel’ah, twil’ah, twil’ah,”’ mentioned in Baird, Brewer and
Ridgway’s North American Birds (Vol. I, p. 9), convey to my ear
the most accurate description of it which I have seen. After careful
observation and study, I am prepared to say that this is one of the
most plentiful of the Turdide in Susquehanna County, surpassing
in abundance both 7. mustelinus and pallasii.

89. Turdus aonalaschke pallasii. Hermit Thrush.

Tolerably common wherever the hemlock remains uncut, but
hardly as plentiful as 7. mustelinus, being absent in many of the
localities where the latter is comparatively common. I have, on
many occasions, however, observed the two species singing almost
side by side, and fully agree with other observers that the song of
the Hermit is considerably superior to that of the Wood Thrush,
possessing as Dr. Dwight remarks, “a ringing sweetness that is only
matched in part by the latter.”

90. Merula migratoria. American Robin.

Common everywhere throughout the county, except in the deep
woods,

88 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

91. Sialia sialis. Bluebird.

Rather common, but gradually becoming less plentiful as a sum-
mer resident. During the spring, summer and autumn of 1895, not
a single individual was observed anywhere in the county, but during
June and July, 1896, several broods were noted, while in 1897 the
species was quite common again.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 89

FEBRUARY |.
The President, Samuet G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair.

Twenty-two persons present.

Fesruary 8.
The President, Samuet G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair.

Twenty-nine persons present.

FEBRUARY 10.
J. Cheston Morris, M. D., in the Chair.
- Twenty-six persons present.

A paper entitled “Errant Frustules of Eunotia major,” by T.
Chalkley Palmer, was presented for publication.

FEBRUARY 22.
The President, Samuget G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair.
Eighty persons present.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—

“A New Weasel from New Mexico,” by C. M. Barker and
T. D. A. Cockerell.

“On the Genus Halia of Risso,” by W. H. Dall.

“ Description of a new Tethys (Aplysia),” by E. J. Letson.

Under the auspices of the Anthropological Section the subject of
Idiocy was discussed as follows :—

Anatomically, by William G, Spiller, M. D.

Physiologically, by Charles IK. Mills, M. D.

Psychologically, by Prof. Lightner Witmer.

Educationally, by Martin W. Barr, M. D. (No abstract).

James Lane Pennypacker was elected a member.

The following were ordered to be printed :—

90 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

VOLCANIC ROCKS OF MESOZOIC AGE IN PENNSYLVANIA.
BY E. GOLDSMITH.

My petrographical and geological observations have convinced
me that nearly all so-called “trap” is of voleanie origin. Sup-
porting proofs may be found in many localities near Philadelphia,
such as the Haycock Mountain, New Hope and the railroad cuts
north and south of Quakertown in Bucks County, Pa. The richest
field of observation, however, is the hill four miles north of Potts-
town, Montgomery County. The various outcrops of the volcanic
rocks may there be studied to greater advantage than in the other
localities.

One hundred and fifty acres of the top and side of the hill now
form a public park, much of the rubbish and underbrush being,
therefore, removed. A series of volcanic terraces of Mesozoic age
has been thus uncovered and is, I think, worth recording. These
terraces were formed by four distinct outflows of lava. The four,
five or six sided columns of greenstone-basalt can be seen on the
edge of each step from the first outpour. The first outflow had a
range wider in extent than the others; the second was less, to all
present appearances; the third eruption was decidedly less great,
whilst the fourth, the top of the hill, exceeded the second and
third in mass of material. The greatest difference between the
levels of the various outpours is seen between the third and the
fourth flow. The whole extent of these terraces is overshadowed
by a grove of trees and carpeted with grass and other small plants,
an illustration would, therefore, be indistinct.

A strictly scientific examination of the terraces would involve a
survey, the removal of rubbish and sod down to the lava and the
determination of the various levels with instruments of precision.

The terraces are situated on the western side of the park. The
level forms a plateau on which a fine iron structure has been built
to a height of some twenty or more feet above the trees, an obser-
vation tower, from the upper platform of which a grand view of
part of the Schuylkill valley can be obtained, Near this point, in
a pile of débris, the first indications of a devitrified obsidian or tach-

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 91

ilyte were found. On a later visit I observed a slab of about three
feet in length and about six inches thick imbedded in a bank of
débris of similar material; many indications of the volcanic rock
being scattered about. The rock is jet black, dull, very fine grained,
with distinct conchoidal fracture, the edges becoming very sharp;
the hardness is a little less than quartz. The per centage of silica
was 57.1. Under the microscope was observed a microperlitic
structure. All attempts to secure a photograph of this structure
failed.

A second variety of tachilyte was found, but not so abundantly as
the first. It is also deep black and very fine grained, very thin
white streaks or lines being irregularly distributed through the
mass. Under the microscope, the thin section showed again that
the essential material consists of devitrified glass darkened by an
extremely fine powder of what seemed to be magnetite. The white
lines, suggestive of crystals, appeared when magnified as elongated
globular forms filled with a partially crystalline substance of indis-
tinct crystalline forms. The globules consist of subcrystalline mate-
rial, filling what was originally gas pores. A section showed also
the fluid structure. With very strong, light, numerous crystallites
were observed.

A third variety of devitrified glass has a yellow-gray color. This
tachilyte is very hard and so peculiarly splintery, sharp edged and
curved, that no fragment could be secured with the hammer from
which to grind a section, the lapidary having to cut the plates for
the purpose. ‘The mineral is very fine grained and even, some
specimens having a yellow edge apparently of the same hardness as
the general mass. Where water had affected the material there is
a thin rusty coating.

With ordinary light, a thin section shows beneath the microscope,
that the mass of rock is made up of largely predominating fine
ash-like granules interspersed with minute fragments of crystalline
material, the whole cemented together by devitrified glass.’
~ 1 About six years ago, I found a specimen of rock near Rockhill Station, in
Bucks County, and determined it under the name of Felsite. It seems to me,
that Felsite, Eurite, Petrosilex and Tachilyte are all the same in composition
structure and origin. All these rocks seem to belong to the glassy lavas, and
are, therefore, inall probability, of volcanic origin. Since the inner structure
and mineral composition should decide the name of a rock, it is thought best
to call this, and all three varieties, Tachilyte, because the principal mass is
devitrified obsidian, as has already been suggested by several British petro-

op oxme and, since Breithaupt’s name seems to have the priority, it should,
think, be retained by geologists.

-

92 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Eastward from the upper plateau of the terrace is an open area
devoid of plant life. It is called by the people the “ Great Ringers,”
Plate II, in contradistinction to the “ Little Ringers,” which are
situated on east side of the park. The outcrop consists of rocks of
various sizes, from a hand specimen to those weighing thirty tons or
more. ‘They are essentially gabbro-phonolite, as I stated in a com-
munication made several years ago to the Academy. I then an-
nounced the mineralogical composition of these rocks to be:
plagioclastic-feldspar, sanidine, diallage, augite, magnetite; ferrite
also was occasionally present. These rocks are very tough and
close-grained. Even a thin section has a considerable cohesion and
does not break in boiling in spirits of turpentine, unless the outer
weathered gray crust be taken. This is brittle when thus tested.

Plate I illustrates a small section of this singular rock formation.
The outcrop has precisely the appearance of what has been called an
Einsturzkrater’ or collapsed crater. The crater in its present condi-
tion is but a fraction of what it was formerly. Its former horizon can
still be traced ; vegetation has gradually encroached upon it and, if
not prevented, will cover the entire tract which is now bare. The
outlines of volcanic craters are extremely irregular everywhere,
whether the walls are still standing or have fallen in. The contour
may be traced, however, in either case, the rocks themselves being
the guides. It can be shown that in the building up of the eleva-
tion, various phases of voleanic action must have taken place to ac-
complish that which ultimately resulted. It seems probable, as has
been suggested, I think by Geike, and even observed by him and
others, that the phonolites are formed on the upper neck of the vol-
eano, and that the basalts are liquid Java poured out from some
point along the side of the crater. Similar relations appear to have
existed in the building up of the Pottstown Hill. The metallic
sounds emitted from the rocks, when struck with a hammer, are of
great interest to visitors, and both superstition and poetry are in-
cited thereby. The phonolites of this locality however, lose their
ringing property when broken. It seems probable that this effect is
due to the production of innumerable cracks through the whole
mass, just as a metallic bell or a glass jar loses the property of
ringing when cracked. There are, however, some phonolites, as
those occurring north of Wilmington, Delaware, and on Haycock

? Carl Vogt’s Geologie, Band II, page 330.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 93

Mountain, in Bucks County, Pennsylvania, which retain the metal-
lic sound when broken.

The Little Ringers, as they are termed, are essentially the same
as those described above. The outcrop, thickly covered by trees, is
situated about a quarter of a mile east of the others, and may be an
indication of a separate neck of a crater. The outcrop appears
small because the trees have taken possession of the surroundings.

There is probably more
of it than can be seen
at present. If not pre-
vented, the trees will
cover the Little Ringers
in the course of time as
certainly as nine-tenths
of the whole area of the
hill is now covered.

Not far from the Rail-
way Station on the hill,
borings for water were
made without result.
Some of the rock frag-
ments brought to the
surface indicated a bed
of amygdaloid of a pale
grayish color; the thick-
ness of the bed was not
ascertained and is at
present unknown.
Specimens of amygda-
loid are found on the
surface, one of which
had the almond shaped
nodules of more than an
inch in length and protruding from the rock nearly half an inch,

An interesting specimen of amygdaloid with an uncommon fluidal
texture is represented by the figure 1. It gives a fair idea of the
specimen, the lighter shade above and the darker below being
sharply defined. The fluidal texture is usually observable only in
thin sections under the microscope, but in this case, we have it ma-
croscopically. When magnified the thin section showed a great

Fic. 1,
Amygdaloid showing fluidal texture.

94 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

many small blisters or former cavities filled with a still whiter ma-
terial than the honeycombed mass in general. The lighter part of
the mass contained but little magnetite, while the dark portion was
filled with this iron ore. As plutonic rocks do not possess any
amygdaloid texture, I have concluded that those found in the Potts-
town park are of volcanic origin, that they were once a fluid lava
and that the rock masses as they appear are the remnants of a col-
lapsed crater.

Microscopic examination of thin sections gave the following re-
sult :-—

The infiltrated material in the former gas cavities appeared by
reflected light as white, opaque, granular masses, which could not
be resolved even when magnified to about three hundred diameters
into any distinct crystalline form. Nevertheless, that it possessed
crystalline structure is indicated by its aspect in polarized light.
I diagnose the material as feldspatic. With ordinary light and with
the aid of an Abbé condenser the rock mass showed a faint green
augite; the particles, very finely divided, often appeared together
in groups, and these small greenish individuals having a greater
refractive index than the feldspar, were, in consequence, more con-
spicuous than the greater mass of the rock. In polarized light the
feldspar appeared to be essentially orthoclase, some sanidine being
also present. This voleanic rock may be compared with the amyg-
daloidal basalt of Schlachenwerth, near Carlsbad, Bohemia.

A general description of the rocks on the eastern side of the hill
is also of’special interest. The enormous size of some of the sections
of basaltic columns found there, some undoubtedly in situ, others
removed to a lower level, is such as to cause surprise. These basalts
are mostly six-sided, and as the result of weathering, somewhat
rounded on their edges ; some are perfectly flat and level, others are
found with a concavity varying in depth, while some have been seen
with a wavy surface. Some of the columns do not seem to split
transversely, but stretch their bulky length some twenty feet or more
along the ground. One has been named the Bullfrog by the natives.
The diameters of the six-sided sections of the basalt vary. I meas-
ured some which were ten, eleven or fifteen feet across. These
gigantic illustrations of mountain-making may indicate a peculiar
geologic condition wherein a long continued internal heat, or possi-
bly a slow cooling dependent upon external causes, prevented the
contraction of the general mass into smaller columns such as are so

Sore *

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 95

often found occurring in the Tertiary and more recent periods. I
confess that nowhere in my travels, either in this country or in
Europe, did I observe such colossi of basaltic columns. When
in their entirety they must have been giant structures in the strict-
est sense of the phrase. An interesting and very suggestive rock
received the name of the Haystack from the owner of the place.
Plate III represents the same as viewed from the southern side.
As the illustration indicates, the side to the right is convex, and if
one stands where he can see the convexity only, a similiarity to a
haystack or the section of one may suggest itself.

On close examination I found that the inclined position of the
rock was due to tilting, and that formerly it must have stood erect ;
it can also be shown that the rocks to the left were parts of the
same, and, if the losses through erosion are also taken into account,
the Haystack had, in all probability, another outline than the one
which it now presents. It seems clear to me that this tall object
was originally triangular in form, that it is the last remnant of a
crater wall standing there almost separated from the other parts of
the crater which lie to the north, northwest and west, while the
southern side has entirely collapsed.

Whoever has closely observed the structure of recent volcanoes,
is aware that if it were possible to make a vertical section of the
crater wall, that section would necessarily be triangular in form.
If it were possible to obtain it, a birds eye view would render the
significance of the aspect more convincing. A photograph of the
crater wall-section from the west side, Plate IV, represents it fairly
well. The camera stood about half way up on the opposite slope,
&@ position which accounts for the depression shown in the central
fore ground of the picture. The part from the standing rock to the
left, above, is corroded away, plant life here, as everywhere, having
doubtless contributed its share toward the destruction of these rocks.
The huge blocks seen in front of the tall section, are those which I
believe to have been formerly united with the so-called Haystack to
form the triangular part of the crater wall. Everybody who has
paid the least attention to the study of rocks is acquainted with
their continual disintegration, effected by heat and moisture work-
ing inward from the exposed surfaces of even the hardest and tough-
est rocks. ‘The tall crater wall-section shows even now a great.
many cracks, especially on its convex side, and it seems evident
that it will not require many years to complete its destruction. Its

96 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

present inclined position will probably cause the fall of the upper
part first, thus obliterating another proof of what the structure was
in former times. Professor Oscar Carter said, when I showed him
the object in question and pointed out its significance: ‘“ A very
suggestive specimen, what else could it represent? It appears to be
a last remnant of the wall of a crater.” Of course, it requires some
little imagination to see such a connection, but the principal empha-
sis is laid on the surroundings and upon the cumulative proofs of
the volcanic rocks themselves.

From the Haystack a narrow winding path in a general north-
easterly direction leads to an immense platform of basalt known as
Table Rock. Of this no photograph was taken, in order to spare
the remaining plate for the picture of the entrance to the cave. In
Plate V the entrance of what the people call the cave, is plainly
noticeable among the huge and partly broken rocks. The large
block lying on the left shows the triangular contour of the cross cut
of a crater wall in a manner sufficiently characteristic. The col-
lapsing process and the gradual breaking up of the great masses of
rock are at least partially recognizable in the illustration. To ob-
tain a general idea of what that cave really is, however, one must
ascend the debris surrounding the great wall of massive blocks,
climb upward along a rustic step-walk, mount upon the top of the
wall and gaze down into the cavity. The deep kettle-shaped cavity
is formed by the rock masses which are more or less split in various
directions, but the greater number are vertically cleft. That this is
an ancient crater I have not the slightest doubt; that the formation
has never been a cave in the geological sense of the word is clear
from the fact that voleanic rocks never form hollow domes. It is,
however, possible to creep into the cauldron from the side entrance,
and boys are occasionally seen sliding or climbing down into the
hollow space from above.

Volcanic craters vary a great deal in diameter; this one is small,
its inside measure amounts, I think, to not much more than forty
feet, and in its depth somewhat less. Since the wall rocks of this
crater are cracked vertically and in the inner parts moved toward
the centre, it is self-evident that the inner diameter must have been
greater in the past. Here, as in other parts of the hill, the trees are
doing their work steadily, breaking the larger blocks into smaller
ones ; the decay is continually going on, and although the entire
sleeping crater is still standing where it was built by the ancient

=

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 97

fluid lavas of the Mesozoic era, it is only a question of time when
this one also will have been disrupted and obliterated like its an-
cient colleagues of the vicinity.

Ancient craters necessarily decay and crumble away just as any
other exposure of rock will do. It is well-known to those versed in
the special literature of the subject, that collapsed craters have been
found and recognized in Europe, and it might reasonably be ex-
pected that in time the discovery of similar phenomena existing here
would result from careful observation.

In the literature of the Second Geological Survey of Pennsylva-
nia nothing is mentioned of the Pottstown Hill, except that Trap
occurs there. But that an entire crater of Mesozoic age is still in-
tact at that spot nobody seems to have even guessed; at least no
geologist appears to have looked at it, much less to have explored
or described it. That the deep cauldron is an ancient crater, | am
fully convinced.

98 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

THE PETRIFACTION OF FOSSIL BONES.
BY E. GOLDSMITH.

The Port Kennedy limestone quarry, situated on the Schuylkill
River, in Montgomery Co., Pa., became noted some twenty-five years
ago for a deposit of fossil bones which were studied, in part, by Pro-
fessors Joseph Leidy and Edw. D. Cope. Recently a fresh interest
in the subject was awakened, and Mr. Mercer, the well-known archs-
ologist, superintended some further diggings, especially in the hope
of finding human remains in the fissure, the receptacle of the fossils,
in the Silurian limestone.

Mr. Mercer’s statement that a considerable part of those fossil
bones crumbled, or, as he expressed it, “ fell to a mealy powder”
when touched, attracted my attention. In order to ascertain into
what form and composition the bone-phosphate had been changed,
I visited the locality and saw the peculiar position of the fissure
filled with the moist débris derived from the overlying Mesozoic red
sandstone. The mealy matter above referred to was easily found
because there was more of it than solid fossil bones; although it is
astonishing how many fragments of bones were in view, a sight de-
lightful to the paleontologist.

I selected for my investigation a curved bone, apparently a trans-
verse section of a scapula of perhaps one of the larger cats, about §
of an inch thick in the middle and tapering toward both ends.
Clean material could easily be dug out with a knife. On drying
the sample it appears as a yellowish, fine sand of even grain: Mr.
Mercer’s fossil bone meal. This fine grained mealy material was
certainly at one time, a portion of a bone; but its composition is no
longer calcium phosphate, a chemical analysis proving that phos-
phoric acid was almost or entirely absent. The reaction for phos-
phoric acid with the ammonium molybdate solution was very slight,
there seemed to be but a small fraction of one per cent. of the cal-
cium phosphate left in the specimen. It was further ascertained
that this so-called bone-meal is now essentially calcium carbonate
containing some magnesia. Is this material really amorphous as it
appears under ordinary conditions? A slide, prepared in the ordi-

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 99

nary way with balsam indicated beneath the microscope that nearly
every particle had crystallized into a mineral. Groups of three or
six crystals were recognized with a low power objective. In polar-
ized light some of the crystals showed extinction parallel to the
longer axis.

A pile of rubbish, which had been dug out of the bone-bed-fissure
from which Professors Mercer and Cope had selected all that was
worth having, contained some bone fragments in which the cellular
structure of bone could be observed and also the gradual transition
into the mealy condition or complete metamorphosis of bone phos-
phate into a mineral. I think a better proof could hardly be given
of the gradual metamorphic change that has taken place in that
locality. It seems to me that this fissure, which is V-shaped, had
no outlet for the water which soaked the mixture of bones, ferrugi-
nous clay, twigs, fragments of sandstone, etc. and that the oppor-
tunity for mutual chemical dissociation was favorable to that effect.
That carbon dioxide along with the water effected the change from
the organic to the mineral in this case as in many others, scarcely
requires demonstration. The phosphoric acid seemed to have been
transposed and reunited with ferric oxide and with alumina to form
vivianite and similar minerals, as indications of the presence of these
species were noticed in the pile of débris uear the bone deposit. In
order to give some further proof of the almost complete change of
the bone substance from the chemical standpoint, I endeavored to
find the quantity of the carbonic acid gas volumetrically. I ob-
tained by two measurements the average of 24.045 cubic centimeters
at 0° C. temperature and 760 millimeters pressure of carbonic acid
gas from 100 milligrammes of the mineral. This reduced to mass
equals 47.23 per cent. It is evident that this rather high result must
have acause. Either there is another gas, or there is another oxide
beside the lime. On determining the bases a large quantity of
magnesia was found. The following is the result of the analysis:

SP ease Pets na ee Ae ee.) GU.O0 Per COnt.
SF eae See a oe ko % DOO POR Gane
Sl eae 47.23 per cent.
PORGOIO so: s Se eaten ans es .< bel & DOP CODE.
100.24 1

The insoluble part consisted mostly of sand, a trace of lime phos-
phate and oxide of iron. If these small quantities of phosphoric

a0 Ct PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

acid, lime and oxide of iron would have been determined quantita-
tively, the general approximate result would not have differed much
from the general result obtained. However, the differences appear
when we recompute the oxides into salts such as they really are.
We obtain about:

Calcium carbonate. . . . .. . . 54.27 per cent.

Magnesium carbonate ... . . . 48.74 per cent.

Insoluble residue . ...... . 41.79 per cent.
99.80

From these numerical results it is plainly seen that the material
is the mineral dolomite. Since bone phosphate contains generally
but little magnesia, it may be assumed that this latter oxide must
have been added when the transformation of the bone into the min-
eral took place.

Whether such a metamorphoses had ever been observed before is
unknown to the writer at the present time. It was unknown to a
number of chemists consulted, and, consequently, the conclusion was
reached that all the possible metamorphic changes from the organic
to the mineral kingdom may not have been observed.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 101

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE HERPETOLOGY OF SAO PAULO, BRAZIL.—I.
BY DR. H. VON IHERING.

In the State Museum under my administration, I have recently
arranged and studied collections of great scientific value illustra-
tive of the fauna of the State of Sao Paulo.

Of the collections made in Brazil by T. Natterer, the mammals
and birds have been studied by the naturalist Pelzeln, of the Vienna
Museum, forming an important contribution to our knowledge of
the fauna of Sao Pauio. Of the other groups of vertebrates but
little is known. For example, our largest fresh water fish, the jahu,
has not been described.’

Concerning the reptiles and amphibians of Sao Paulo very little
is known. Boettger’ has mentioned a few species.

In the present paper I offer a list of the reptiles of Sao Paulo, ex-
cluding snakes, of which, as well as of frogs, I have lately received
many species not yet determined. Of the following list two species
only, Prionodactylus and Heterodactylus, are not represented in the
collection of the Museum Paulista,

CROCODILIDE.,
1. Caiman latirostris Daud.
CHELYDIDZA.

2. Hydromedusa maximiliani (Gray.
3. Platemys spixii D. & B.
4. Platemys wagleri D. & B.
This species was found at Piracicaba. The plastronisred. The
species seems tu be a Platemys and not a Hydraspis.

TESTUDINIDE.
5. Testudo tabulata Walb.
Called “Taboti.” I have had a living example, found in the
woods of this country.

BD oh for this fish the name Paulicea jahu. A description may be
found appended to this paper.

2 0. Boettger, Ueber eine neue Eidechse aus Brasilien, Bericht d. Senkenb.‘

“nat. Gesellsch,, Frankfurt a. M. 1875-’76, pag. 140-143 and PI. ; also Boettger,

Katalog der Reptilien Sammlung im Museum zu Frankfurt a. M., 1893.

102 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

GECKONIDA.
6. Hemidactylus mabouia Mor.

Common at Santos, and also in the interior, as for instance at
Santa Rita and Piracicaba. It is found in houses and also in the
forests. It does not seem that this distribution has been effected by
man’s agency. In the large city of Sao Paulo I have never seen
this Gecko.

IGUANIDSE.
7. Tropidurus hispidus Spix.
Common at Sorocaba.

8. Enyalius catenatus Wied.

There are two forms in Sao Paulo. One of them may be the true
catenatus or a closely allied species, having the disposition of the
spots and yellow marks somewhat irregular, not existing in all
forms as seen in the figures of Spix (Plates XI and XIII). The
second form, which I call variety paulista, has more affinity with E.
iheringi, but the position of the nostril is nearer to the end of the
snout than to the orbit, quite as in catenatus, to which the tibia shows
analogy. A dark spot passes from the superciliary region to the
upper lip. A series of alternating black spots is contained in the
obscure vertebral band. Two large yellow lateral bands exist as
well as in E. tiheringi. This may be, therefore, a local variety of
iheringi, but differs in some characters. Moreover, the dark spots of
the face and of the extremities, especially of the lower legs, seem to
be characteristic of paulista, and wanting in iheringi. As I had
already doubts of the specific validity of theringi, and as the new
variety is intermediate between iheringi and catenatus, I believe
that both are mere varieties of the latter.

The description above given refers to the female, the male being
green without marks or spots, and not purplish as Boulenger says.

Enyalius is not at all common and it will, therefore, be impossible
to obtain a sufficient representation for more conclusive studies
for some time.

9. Anisolepis grilli Blgr.
Sao Paulo, St. Rita.
10. Urostrophus vautieri D. & B.

Sao Paulo, St. Rita.

‘LT have Tr. torquatus Wied. from Rio de Janeiro, but that species seems to’
be wanting in Sao Paulo.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 103

11. Polychrus acutirostris Spix.

ANGUIDZ.
12. Ophiodes striatus Spix.
Sao Paulo.
13. Ophiodes intermedius Bler.
Santos.
14. Diploglossus fasciatus (ray.

Santos.

TEIIDZ.

15. Tupinambis teguixin L.

This is the common “lagarto.” It was by error that Boettger
mentioned 7’. nigropunctatus, from Sao Paulo, as this seems to be
the Amazonian form, as Boettger himself corrected.

16. Tupinambis rufescens Giinth.

I do not know the exact habitat of ourexample of this species, which
seems proper to the western parts of the interior. The number of
ventral scales is somewhat less than in Argentine examples. The
unicolored under side of the tail distinguishes this species very well
from the two others.

17. Centropyx paulensis Bttg.

Taubaté.

18. Ameiva surinamensis Laur. (Ameiva ameiva L.).

Santa Rita,

19. Pantodactylus schreibersii Wiegm.

20, Prionodactylus quadrilineatus Bttg.
21. Cercosaura ocellata Wugl.

Also from the State Parana.
22, Placosoma cordylinum Tesch.
Santos, Raiz da Serra, Parana.
23. Heterodactylus imbricatus Spix.
Serra da Mantiqueira.
AMPHISBAINIDA.
24. Amphisbena alba L.
25. Amphisbwna vermicularis Wagl.

The number of the annuli of the body in the examples examined
is: 217, 223, 224, 247. The suture of the frontals in one is longer,

‘

104 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

in two shorter than the suture between the preefrontals, and in one
subequal. There are only three upper labials, only one example
having four. Of course there is no reason for separating as species
the southern examples distinguished by the smaller number of
annuli and which only form a variety (darwini D. & B.) of the
well known species.

It seems not at all justifiable to separate as “ species ” each example
with a somewhat aberrant conformation of the head plates. As is
the case with the anal pores (2 or 4), and the upper labials (3 or 4),
the ocular also may occasionally be divided. Amphisbena angusti-
frons Cope, and mildei Peters, are abnormalities of this kind of Amph.
darwini, and not species. In one of my examples a suture in the
third upper labial forms on the one side an infra-ocular.

26. Lipidosternon microcephalum Wag.
Santos, Cubatad.

SCINCIDA.

27. Mabuia dorsivittata Cope.
Sao Paulo.

28. Mabuia agilis Raddi.
Santos.

29. Mabuia frenata Cope.

Piracicaba, St. Rita.

This is the provisional list of the 8. Paulo species. Hoplocercus
spinosus Fitz., mentioned by Boulenger from St. Paul, may have
come from another South American St. Paulo, not of this State, as
species of Crocodilurus and Neusticurus, do not occur here.

I believe it necessary to make some observations on the distribu-
tion of the Lacertilians. Our list contains 24 species of which 2
(Centropyx and Prionodactylus) as hitherto known only from Sao
Paulo, may be left out of the discussion. ‘Three of these species :—
Tupinambis teguixin, Ophiodes striatus, Amphisbena vermicularis,
with var. darwini are of very broad distribution, extending from
north to south Brazil and to Paraguay ; eight of the species also occur
in Rio Grande do Sul including Enyulius catenatus with its varieties,
and Anisolepis grilli with its southern representative A. undulatus.
The genera Enyalius, Anisolepis, Urostrophus and Pantodactylus
represented in Rio Grande do Sul as well as in Sao Paulo, are not
known at this time from Paraguay. It seems to be the same with

eS ee eee ee Se

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 105

Hemidactylus, Mabuia* and the species of Placosoma, Heterodactylus,
etc.

As future studies may modify these results it is sufficient here
merely to touch on the problems of distribution. In general we
have besides the more widely distributed forms to distinguish (1)
forms of the littoral of Brazil, and (2) forms of the Paraguay valley,
extending to Brazil.

I have already mentioned the former group. We can subdivide
it into species developed principally to the north or to the south of
the tropic of Capricorn. Pantodactylus schreibersi has not hitherto
been found north of Sao Paulo; Diploglossus fasciatus is a Bahia
form, which I have received from Rio Janeiro and Santos. There
are many other species not represented in the interior of Sao Paulo,
which extend in the coast end of Santos and further southward.
Santos is situated on the ocean, 8. Paulo 40 miles higher; the
annual temperature of Santos, [guape, being 21,5°, of S. Paulo 18,3°
centigrade.

Thus it is quite natural that in the lowland between the ocear
and the coast range, the Bahia fauna extends much farther south
than in the interior. It seems probable that Amphishena alba, Placo-
soma cordylinum, ete. are governed by the same condition, and this:
will be much more evident from the numerous north Brazilian types
represented in our collections from Santos and RaizdaSerra. But
I can refer to another instructive instance: One of the character-
istic families of the subtropical zone is that of the Boida, represented
in Bahia by four species of which only Epicrates cenchris does not
seem to reach Rio. ELunectes murinus is common in the interior of
S. Paulo and extends to the south of St. Catharina as I have ex-
amined a skin from Laguna. It is gradually disappearing, and was
once represented also in Rio Grande do Sul, as I believe Boa con-
strictor, not rare in the interior of Sao Paulo, does not occur in Rio
Grande do Sul. I very much doubt the record “ Buenos Ayres” in
Boulenger’s Catalogue. Species of Boa and Eunectes also oceur in
Paraguay but they are perhaps not exactly determined, and may
be mere varieties of the eastern species.

I have received specimens of Carol/us caninus L. from Rio and
from Santos.

* This exists in St. Catharina and perhaps the north of Rio Grande do Sul,
but has not hitherto been found in Rio Grande.

8

‘

106 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Another fact on which I insist is the distribution of certain forms
from northern Brazil to the La Plata River, with the exclusion of
the Brazilian littoral. The genus boa isan example of this. Ameiva
surinamensis does not exist in Rio Grande do Sul, but is said to live
in the La Plata region, also in Bahia and in Paraguay. In Sao
Paulo, however, this species is rare, and represented in the western
zone only. Here we have also Tupinambis rufescens, extending from
Mendoza to western Sao Paulo and Mabuia frenata, a Paraguayan
species, which we have received from St. Rita and Paracicaba.

The species of Mabuia have an interesting distribution. As we
mentioned above, the Paraguayan species M. frenata exists in the
western parts of Sao Paulo. From Santos I have M. agilis Raddi,
known hitherto only from Rio and north of Rio, but on the central
highland we have M. dorsivittata Cope, extending from Rio Grande
do Sul to Paraguay and to Sao Paulo. Tropidurus torquatus and
Polychrus acutirostris are Brazilian species, distributed from Bahia
to Sao Paulo and extending to Paraguay. It should be possible by
this time, to determine analytically the various regional compo-
nents of the diverse faunas.

I have elsewhere discussed these problems in distribution, having
been the first to direct attention to them. In a paper on the distri-
bution of Ampullaria I have mentioned, that of the species common
to the Amazonian and San Francisco region, A. canaliculata does not
occur in St. Catharina, A. sordida being substituted for it. Also at
Rio Janeiro and in Sao Paulo there are other species of Ampullaria.
This is only one example from a great list of species. G@labaris
riograndensis, etc. are not represented in the River Parana system,
but are common in Rio Grande do Sul. Besides the species common
to the Parana system and to Rio Grande do Sul, there are others
which reached Rio Grande and the La Plata States by the Paraguay
system. ‘This is now separated from the Amazonian system, but the
faunal identity demonstrates this separation to be of very recent
date.

The distribution of neither the fresh-water nor of the land faunas
of Brazil can be at all understood without reference to these facts.
For instance there is Bulimus (Borus) oblongus Mill., a form
common in Rio Grande do Sul and the La Plata region, but also in
Bolivia, Guiana and Venezuela. From St. Catharina to Sao Paulo
and Rio where this species does not occur, B. ovatus Miill. is sub-
stituted for it, and north of Rio B. cantagallanus Rang takes its

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 107

place. From Sorocaba, Ypanema, ete. I have received B. ovatus,
but in Piracicaba and St. Rita in the western zone we have B.
oblongus, which is evidently an immigrant from Paraguay, Bolivia,
ete. with many of our other Bulimus and Heliz. ;

The same conditions are noticed in other land shells. We find
identity of species from Bahia with those of the La Plata and Rio
Grande do Sul, which are absent from St. Catharina northward on
the littoral.

I believe finally it is time for European naturalists to take notice of
these studies. It is quite an unscientific method, to continue to con-
sider the neotropical region as a natural unity zoologically. This
region in later secondary and early tertiary time was formed by
coalescence of an Antarctic and a tropical element, the latter having
been in mesozoic time connected with Africa. It was only with
the pliocene period’ a connection with North and Central America
was formed. The ancient West Indian bridge being only during
pleistocene time replaced by the present Isthmus of Panama.

We know to-day the history of the South American mammals,
being able to separate the ancient endemic element from the pliocene

5 My various papers referring to the distribution of the Brazilian fauna and
to the history of the neotropical region are as follows. The last three treat
of the subject more fully:

Revision der von Spix in Brasilien gesammelten Najaden. Arch. f. Naturg.
1890, p. 117-170. Taf. IX.

On the ancient relations between New Zealand and South America. Trans.
of the New Zealand Instit., Vol. XXIV, 1891, p. 431-445, (cf. Ausland,
1891, No. 18).

Die geographische Verbreitung der Flussmuscheln. “ Ausland,’’ Stuttgart,
1890, No. 48 and 49 cf. The New Zealand Journal of Science, 1891, p. 151.

Die geographische Verbreitung der Ampullarien in siidlichen Brasilien.
Nachrbl. d. Deutch. Malak. Ges., No. 5 and 6, 1891.

Anodonta und Glabaris. Zoolog. Anzeiger, No. 380-381, 1891-'92.

Ueber die Beziehungen der chilenischen und siidbrasilianischen Siisswas-
serfauna. Verhandl. d. deutschen wissensch. Vereines zu Santiago, 1891, II.
Bd., p. 143-149.

Morphologie und Systematik des Genitalapparates von Helix. Zeitschr. f.
wissensch. Zool., Bd. 54, 1892, p. 886-520, Taf. 18-19 (cf. p. 489, Geograph.
Verbreitung).

Das neotropisch Florengebiet und seine Geschichte. Botan. Jahrbiicher.
Engler. Bd. 17, 1893, p. 1-54.

Najaden von Sao Paulo und die geographische Verbreitung der Siisswasser-
— von Siidamerika. Archiv. f. Naturgesch., 1893, p. 45-140, Taf. ILI and

Vv

Die Ameisen von Rio Grande do Sul. Berliner Entomolog. Zeitschr. Bd.

39, 1894, p. 321-446.

® And ifin contrast to my opinion Ameghino is right, there was a connection
also in the beginning of the tertiary period, followed without doubt by a long
time of separation of both Americas.

108 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

immigrants. In herpetology this is not the case, nor may we expect
fossil material so abundant. Here zoogeographical data may help.
Thus, I believe, no one could understand the geographical distri-
bution of Hyla without supposing it a pliocene immigrant to
Brazil from the north. We may be sure that Hyla or its allied
forms will never be found in South America in the older tertiary
formation. Taking Hyla as a northern intrusive element which
passed by way of Central America to the Amazonian region and
southward, we may easily understand the complete absence of these
tree frogs from the Chilian forests. The Andean barrier of Chili
and Peru is a very old one, and that of Ecuador a very recent one.
This explains the fact hitherto not observed, that the Cordilleras
are a zoological dividing line in Chile and Peru, but not in Eeuador.
It seems to me quite probable that the American Teiid@ and Jguan-
ide are originally from South America, and the Solenoglyphe,
Boide, ete. from North America.

It is not my intention to fully discuss these questions here; I
would only call attention to them as new problems which we have
to solve.

DESCRIPTION OF A NEW FISH FROM SAO PAULO.
PAULICEA gen. nov.

Head broader then deep, flattened, with the upper jaw little pro-
jecting beyond the lower, covered with skin, granulated behind.
Occipital process reaching the dorsal plate. Dorsal spine nearly
equidistant from snout and adipose fin.
Pectoral spine long, broader than the dorsal
spine, serrate behind. D.I-6. Caudal not
deeply forked. Villiform teeth on upper
jaw, palate and vomer. Palatine teeth
forming with the vomerine patches a shal-

WiNdiiscy” youtline low band immediately behind the inter-
and palatine teeth of P. Maxillary band of teeth, which is broad and
jahu. scarcely or not at all narrowed in the middle.

P. jahu sp. n.

A large species reaching{a,weight of 100 Kilo. and a length of
1.5-1.8 M. Width of head at the mouth two-thirds of its greatest
width. D. I-6. <A. I-10. Adipose fin equal to the anal fin,
Maxillary barbel short, somewhat flattened, not longer than the
head. Dirty gray with indistinct dark spots on back and sides.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 109

There is in Sao Paulo in the rivers of the Rio Paranda system,
especially in the system of the Rio Tieti, only one other fish which
attains the dimensions of the Jahu; this is the Pseudoplatystoma
coruscans Ag., called Piracampacti. I got both at Piracicaba. The
genus Paulicea is identical with the nameless genus No. XXXII, of
C. H. and R. Eigenmann,' a genus which contains besides the new
species here described, one Amazonian species P. lutkeni Steind.,
described as Platystoma.

‘A review of the South American Nematognathi, San Francisco, 1890, p.
201.

110 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

OBSERVATIONS ON ERRANT FRUSTULES OF EUNOTIA MAJOR.
BY T. CHALKLEY PALMER.

The diatom Eunotia major Rab. occurs in some abundance in the
uplands of Delaware Co., Pa., though appearing to flourish only in
the basins of such springs as are well-shaded at all seasons. In these
springs it is often present in profusion, forming masses of clean,
brownish filaments attached to the sides of the pools, and by prefer-
ence to submerged wood. ‘The filaments grow to a length of ten
centimeters, and vary in breadth from 0.036 mm. to 0.200 mm.
in accordance with the length of their constituent cells. These fila-
ments intertangle in such manner as to afford cover for numerous
protozoa, and for such diatoms as Surirella, Niteschia, Pinnularia
and Navicula, Eunotia lunaris Grun. also frequently occurs in pro-
fusion in the same company.

In making a gathering of the filaments for study, it is well to be-
gin by washing them free from all loosely adherent matters, such as
sand, mica and clayey flocculence. They are then placed in a clean
bottle which has been filled with water from the spring. A short
exposure to diffused daylight will cause the diatoms to rise to the
top, buoyed up by a multitude of oxygen bubbles entangled among
them, and to free themselves from a further portion of mineral mat-
ter, which will at once subside, and may be rejected by decantation.

An examination of the gathering under the microscope will usu-
ally reveal, besides the filaments, a certain number of frustules,
either isolated or in groups of two or three, moving about in a slow
and erratic manner. In the course of two or three days, if all goes
well, the proportion of moving cells will have increased ; and from
day to day, conditions permitting, the long filaments will progres-
sively separate, until frequently the whole gathering ends by resolv-
ing itself entirely into isolated cells and short sections composed of
two, four or even six cells, all in a state of lively locomotion.

Conditions favoring production of errant frustules—The prime
requisite for any extended study of the gathering is the preserva-
tion of the diatoms in a healthy condition. The best results have
followed with Eunotia major when the clean filaments were kept in a

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 111

semi-dark room, in a narrow-necked bottle filled with water from
the native spring. Evaporation is slow and distilled water only is
to be used in compensation. Any addition of town water is apt to
be followed by a sudden and enormous increase of bacteria and a
rapid decay of the diatoms. Bacteria do, in any case, gradually
invade the culture and ultimately destroy it; but, with the above
very simple precautions, it is quite possible to keep the gathering in
good condition for a month—long enough to observe a variety of
changes.

Free access of oxygen promotes the production of the motile frus-
tules. Two approximately equal quantities of healthy filaments were
selected, one of which was placed in a little vial with a narrow neck,
the other in a flat glass dish ; and, other conditions, as temperature,
light and amount of water, being identical, at the end of a week the
filaments in the dish had entirely disappeared, and the glass was
found to be coated with single cells and small motile segments of the
original filaments, while the bulk of those in the vial remained un-
separated.

A second experiment was as follows :—Two quantities of the un-
separated filaments, as nearly equal as may be, were put into pre-
cisely similar bottles. The first was at once placed in a dark corner
of a poorly lighted room, the second beside it, after having been ex-
posed to bright daylight until a mass of oxygen bubbles had formed.
In the course of twenty-four hours, during nine of which all light
was absent, the exposed bottle contained quantities of active motile
cells, while the other afforded only a very few.. This experiment,
twice repeated with the same result, taken in convection with that
which precedes, would indicate that we have here to do with a pro-
cess the reverse of the endothermic chlorophy] reaction :—

co, + H,O =CH,O + ,O

and that the chemical side of the phenomenon is that which accom-
panies protoplasmic motile activity in general.

This conclusion is reénforced by the observed fact that filaments
of Eunotia in process of separation, and the resultant motile cells,
give a strong carbon dioxide color-reaction in thoroughly aerated
water tinted with hematoxylin; it is in accord with the important
observation of O. Miiller' as to the stimulating action of oxygen upon.
Pinnularia ; and, finally, it is diametrically opposed to that view of

ES

' Berichte der Deutsch. Botan. Gesellsch., Bd. XI, p. 571.

112 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

the nature of diatom movements held by the proponents of the “ os-
motic hypothesis,” especially as this is set forth quite recently by
W. M. Kozlowski.’

The stimulating action of light upon the motile activity of the
errant frustules of Ewnotia is not to be doubted, and has been ob-
served a number of times; but, up to the present, notwithstanding
that I have paid some attention to the matter, the phenomena ob-
served are not such as are incapable of classification under the head
of oxygen stimulation. No fact whatever has clearly indicated any
special tendency to motion in the direction of greatest illumination,
and after observing, under various conditions, the movements of
thousands of these frustules, I have strong doubt as to the existence
of any such tendency in Eunotia.

Characteristics of movements.—Students of diatom movements
have, almost without exception, confined themselves to Pinnularia
and other naviculoid forms wherein the phenomena are most strik-
ing. H.L.Smith,® and, more recently, O. Biitsehli* and R. Lauter-
born,® have been in practical agreement as to the phenomena, and to
a certain extent they agree in the conclusion that motion is the re-
sult of an expulsion of a more or less fluid filament from the central
nodule. O. Miiller,® agreeing with the others as to the phenomena,
looks rather, for their explanation, to currents of protoplasm which
circulate along the raphe within the eoleoderm, entering into and
departing from the inner cell by way of the central and terminal
nodules. Hauptfleisch’ has studied forms of Amphiprora and Bre-
bissonia; and by staining methods has apparently demonstrated in
these the existence of a protoplasmic canal penetrating the raphe,
through the delicate walls of which protrude exceedingly fine threads
of protoplasm which act like similar organs in the rhizopods.

? Botanical Gazette, Vol. XXIV, p. 39. Kozlowski presents in an ingenious
manner considerations supposed to point to the conclusion that in Pinnularia
motion is due to unequal photosyntax in the two ends of the frustule, causing
stronger inward currents of assimilable liquid and gas in one or the other
end, this diflerence depending upon the unequal illumination of the two ends,

5 Proceedings Amer. Soc. Micros., 1886.

* Mittheilung tiber die Bewegung der Diatomeen, Heidelberg, 1892.

° Untersuchungen iiber Bau, Kerntheilung und Bewegung der Diatomeen,
Leipsic, 1896.

® Berichte der Deutsch. Botan. Gesellsch.: Bd. VII, pp. 169-180: Bd. XI,
p- 571.

7 Mittheilungen des naturwiss. Vereins fiir Neu-vorpommern und Riigen,
Jahrg., XX VII.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 113

Little attention having been paid to the slower movements of
forms outside the Raphidiez, it is not unusual to meet with state-
ments implying that definite and positive motion, requiring expla-
nation, is not observable in the case of these forms. ‘This is a curi-
ouserror. Splendid exhibitions of motile activity have long been
familiar in the case of various species of Nitzschia, and the exceed-
ingly striking movements of Bacillaria paradoxa are known to ob-
servers the world over. Certain species of Diatoma and Fragilaria
exhibit motile phenomena of no doubtful kind; and of Eunotia
major, which may stand as a type of the Fragilariez, the follow-
ing are the observed facts :—

When a drop of water containing errant frustules is observed
under an enlargement of about 200 diameters, the first movement
detected will probably be that illustrated in fig. 2, Pl. VI. Certain
frustules rise slowly on their ends, rotating smoothly through 180°,
and fall flat upon the slide. During this manoeuvre an end remains
in contact with the glass and serves as a hinge whereon the frustule
turns. Occasionally, but not often, a similar revolution is ac-
complished at right-angles to this—in which ease the long valve,
instead of the narrow end, functions as a hinge. This particular
movement only occurs immediately after the deposition of the di-
atoms upon the slide, unless at this time the cells are not in a state
of activity, in which case it may be somewhat delayed. A long
series of observations, extending over three years, has shown both
the conditions under which this odd movement occurs, and the
manifold purpose of it. It is, first, significant that only those cells
that have chanced to fall upon the slide with ventral or concave
girdle uppermost, as in A, fig. 2, Plate VI perform this movement.
Such as have been deposited with ventral side down, as in C, begin
without delay to move endwise in the direction indicated in the figure.
Careful focussing shows that in most cases the frustule is, during
this forward movement, tilted a trifle, so that while the anterior end
remains in contact with the glass, the posterior end is free from it.
This position is undoubtedly a condition precedent to successful
locomotion, and there is no doubt that the attaining of this position
is the purpose of the rotation, That the anterior end is in contact
with the slide will be proven conclusively as we proceed ; and it is,
therefore, to the end of the frustule, and more especially to the
ventral side of the rounded end, that search must be directed for
the mechanism of this diatom’s movement.

114 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

The forward movement of Eunotia resembles very little the
smooth gliding of Pinnularia and Nitzschia. If these seem to swim,
the other would appear to crawl. One corner is advanced a trifle,
then the other corner, then both move forward at once. Occasion-
ally the frustule will sidle for a moment; but generally the pro-
gression consists of a succession of impulsive jerks. The movement
is accompanied by indications of very considerable stress. Compar-
atively large bodies, such as short filaments of Eunotia or small
particles of sand, are pushed resolutely aside. Larger bodies, espe-
cially such as have considerable thickness, arrest the frustule for a
time; but after a short interval, it is apt to turn upon its edge, with
ventral girdle in contact with the obstruction, to move past in this
position, and once more to resume its normal relations with the
slide. At the moment of the passage of the anterior, and sometimes
the posterior end of the frustule, the obstruction may be seen to
move backward, as if from an impulse resembling a kick. These
curious features I have observed numberless times.

If by chance the moving cell pass, as in fig. 1, Pl. VI, with a
corner over the circumference of a thin piece of mica, the latter is,
in many cases, caused to revolve backward in the direction indicated
in the figure. This also was seen so often that the existence of some-
thing resembling pseudopodia at the corners of the frustule came to
be anticipated with confidence.

Many species of motile diatoms, among them Pinnularia and Nit-
zschia, exhibit a sort of pendulum movement. The frustule proceeds
in a straight line a certain time, comes to rest, and returns upon its
path without changing the direction of its longer axis. This swing
to and fro is repeated any number of times, so that anterior and pos-
terior ends continually change places. There is little of this in the
movement of Eunotia. I have frequently followed a frustule for
half an hour without seeing it return upon its path, and on one oc-
casion | observed a particularly active individual for two and a half
hours, in which period its devious way was into all portions of the
hollowed slide, and in all that time it kept one and the same end
foremost. Yet there seems to be no universal necessity for this
habit, since frustules are frequently observed to exhibit propulsive
efforts upon solid bodies from both ends, and oceasionally they do
reverse their direction.

Movements in the hanging drop.—In order to study somewhat
further the relations between moving Eunotia and the glass of the

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 115

support, drops of water containing many frustules were suspended on
cover-glasses and observed. The diatoms were found to separate into
two portions. The first remained attached to the glass; such of
them as had their dorsal or convex girdles next the glass performed
the revolution before described; and these, with the others in con-
tact with the cover, proceeded in characteristic ways, with the curi-
ous and significant difference, that as viewed from above the ventral
side was now uppermost. The second portion fell to the surface of
the suspended drop, where they moved as if upon a solid substratum.
Midway of the drop there were none. Undoubtedly the surface of
the drop possessed sufficient tension for the purposes of a crawling
diatom. I have seen, in an aquarium, small snails crawling freely
along the plane of contact between water and air, with broad, flat
foot uppermost, applied to the surface of the liquid as if to a piece
of glass.

Phenomena in carbon emulsion.—All preceding observations seem-
ing to point to the existence of invisible organs functioning as pseu-
dopodia, the endeavor was made to outline these by the well-known
method of putting the diatoms in an emulsion of colored particles
finely divided. ‘To this end, since available India ink was found to
be toxic owing to its content of camphor, a portion of carbon-black
water-color was rubbed up in a drop of water until a very dark color
was obtained. The emulsion showed, under medium powers, a mul-
titude of particles exhibiting the Brownian movement. When placed
in this, the errant Lunotia cells revealed quite clearly the existence
at the corners of rounded masses of coleoderm, ‘These were espe-
cially clear at the anterior corners. ‘lhe particles of carbon ap-
proached the frustules quite closely everywhere except about the
corners, and a little U-shaped line, composed of somewhat compacted
particles, preceded the moving diatom. There was nowhere observa-
ble any streaming away of the particles, such as that seen by H.
L. Smith and others in Pinnularia. Owing to the tenacity of the
emulsion, and partly perhaps to the relatively raised position of the
posterior end of the frustule, the clear spaces are less evident at the
posterior corners,

Results of staining.—Numerous attempts were made with a va-
riety of stains to render the coleoderm visible, the presence of which
seemed to be so strongly indicated. All efforts to stain the still
living coleoderm failed entirely. There was little better success in
fixing with osmic acid and staining with methylene blue, methyl

116 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF 1898.

blue, fuchsin, ete., for the osmic acid seemed to produce, as it were,
a certain shrinking of the very delicate organs. A measure of sue-
cess followed the use of gentian violet followed by tannic acid, both
in minute quantity. By this means the coleoderm was outlined ;
and especially in the case of frustules that had passed the period of
their activity, and were nearly or quite dead, as shown by their con-
tracted nucleus and bacteria-infested outline, the surface staining of
the gelatinous external layer was clear. An extreme case of this is
roughly shown in fig. 7, Pl. VI. Here the contents of the inner cell
were apparently normal, with the exception of the nucleus, but the
coleoderm was quite flaccid, loosely adherent to the frustule, and
abnormally enlarged, as well as fringed with colonies of bacteria.

The stain which most quickly and surely shows the healthy coleo-
derm, at the same time instantly killing the diatom, is made as fol-
lows :—0°5 gram of Bismarck brown and 1.0 gram tannic acid are
dissolved separately and added to a liter of distilled water. ‘The
solution remains perfectly clear, and is of a reddish-brown color.
Two or three drops of this are added to a drop of water, under the
cover glass, containing errant frustules of Eunotia. Almost before
a change of tint is visible in the thin layer of water under the mi-
croscope, motion ceases, and, at the same time, at each corner of
the frustules appears a little rounded mass of substance, gelatinous
in appearance, and dotted with coppery or bronzy specks of most
minute size. The shape of these masses, and their relation to the
frustule, are indicated in figures 4 and 5, Pl. VI. The results of
somewhat heavier staining with the same mixture are shown photo-
graphically by Mr. F. J. Keeley in figures 4, 5, and 6, Pl. VII.

Pursuant to the further study of these coleoderm masses, a large
number of errant frustules were stained as follows: About two drops
of water, containing the diatoms, were put on a cover glass and
allowed some minutes to bring themselves into normal relations with
the glass. Three drops of the described stain solution were added
and staining was allowed to proceed half an hour. The excess of
color was then removed by careful washing, dipping the cover re-
peatedly into a cup of water with as little friction as possible.
Griibler’s aqueous eosin, diluted with an equal quantity of water,
was now added and allowed to act half an hour to an hour. Finally,
the glass was washed and mounted in very weak formalin. The di-
atoms, under these circumstances, remain attached to the cover glass,
as a rule with ventral side uppermost, and with coleoderm processes
in the position best suited for study.

ee eee eee

—_ CU

eS ee

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 117

Prepared in this manner, the isolated cells and short segments of
filaments present the appearance indicated by figures 3 to 5, Pl. VI.
The gradual development of the foot-like organs from an intercellu-
lar plasm is shown in figure 3; and in figure 6 is shown the deteri-
oration of these organs, which takes the form of an overproduction
and liquefaction of gelatinous substance, and ends by gradually
bringing to rest all the moving cells of a gathering, and entangling
them in masses and threads of jelly. During this degeneration
many of the cells die, but some survive with every appearance of
health, though necessarily devoid of motion.

In figures 8 and 9 is shown the appearance, under 1,000 diame-
ters, of the stained processes from the valve view and from the ven-
tral girdle view. The outer and larger process, mainly gelatinous,
shows a general mass slightly tinted only, outlined by more heavily
stained grains within the substance. These grains take the eosin
as do the protoplasmic granules of the inner cell. The smaller pro-
cess, which seems to be somewhat shrunken by the staining with
eosin (compare figures 4, 5 and 6, Pl. VII) are of a deep and nearly
uniform red, and are in close apparent contact with aggregations of
protoplasm within the frustule.

The small and apparently constant bead-like bodies around the
circumference of the curving gelatinous masses have no perceptible
thread-like connection with the more richly protoplasmic processes
at the corners, and their significance is somewhat doubtful. They
probably have some relation toa current of protoplasm which-would
seem to issue from the cell and return to it.

Structure of the frustule—The existence of a “ pseudo-nodule”
on the ventral side of the valve, near the end, has long been known ;
but that there is a raphe at the end of the frustule has not, I be-
lieve, been stated. The photographsin Plate VII, which I owe to the
kindness of Mr. F. J. Keeley, show clearly both the existence of
this raphe and the presence, especially on the ventral girdle, of
several channels in the silica which seem adapted to lead currents
to and from this raphe and the pseudo-nodule.

The exact shape of the raphe itself, and its extent, remain to be
determined; and indeed the problem presents difficulties, for the
position of the raphe on the end of the frustule would necessitate
sections for its study.

When a very dilute aqueous solution of gentian violet is dropped
upon living and moving Lunotia major, and afterward washed off,

118 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

certain deeply stained lines are seen in immediate contact with the
silica of the ventral surface, and running down from the pseudo-
nodule and the end nodule. ‘These dark lines follow the course of
the channels in the silica shown by the photographs, and would be
explained by the existence of richly protoplasmic fluid. In asingle
case one of these lines was seen to issue, to all appearance, through
the raphe and enter the coleoderm.

The above results of observation and experiment would seem to
me to be conclusive proof that Ewnotia major, and by inference
other nearly related species and genera of the Fragilariew, move
by the action of organs that may be called coleopodia. This con-
clusion, however, is far from touching the question of the means of
locomotion in Pinnularia and its allies, and I have endeavored to
indicate some of the differences of the phenomena to be explained
in the two cases. It may be added in this connection that while a
large Pinnularia in rapid motion not infrequently gives evidence of
brisk internal currents such as O. Miiller has described, such cur-
rents have not been observed by mein moving Eunotia. Under
rather high powers one only sees, near the corners of the frustule,
in the vicinity of the raphe, a certain internal commotion among
the very small protoplasmic granules, a spasmodic movement back
and forth, a weaving about. This movement differs alike from the
streaming of cyclosis and the Brownian trembling, and it is trace-
able with difficulty, if at all, far from the corners. Nevertheless,
the channelling of the frustule is of a character to indicate the exist-
ence of currents, and further observation may yet reveal them.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
PLATE VI. DIAGRAMMATIC.

. |.—Representation of Eunotia major moving across a piece of
mica and revolving it in the opposite direction.

Fig. 2.—A frustule, valve view, in A resting upon its dorsal girdle,
B revolving, and C reaching its normal motile position and
moving in the direction of the arrow. .

Fig. 3.—A short filament showing stages in the development of the
coleopodia, and a free motile cell with development com-
plete. Stained with Bismarck brown and eosin.

Fig. 4.—Valve view of motile cell, stained with Bismarck brown
and eosin.

Fig. 5.—Stained cells, including a group of two.

Fi

gg

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 119

Fig. 6.—Degeneration of the coleopodia, from overproduction of
gelatinous substance, resulting in adherence. Stained as
before.

Fig. 7—Degeneration of the whole coleoderm, which is infested
with bactaria in colonies. Gentian violet.

Figs. 8 and 9.—Coleopodia under higher magnification, showing
differential staining by Bismarck brown and eosin.

PLATE VII.

Fig. 1.—Ventral girdle view of cleaned frustule of Eunotia major X
925.

Fig. 2.—Optical section of the same frustule, showing the end raphe
and channels leading to raphe and pseudo-nodule, & 925.

Fig. 3.—Dorsal girdle of the same frustule, * 925.

Figs. 4 and 5.—Motile frustules of Ewnotia major, stained with Bis-
marck brown and tannic acid, & 315.

Fig. 6.—An enlargement of 4 ( 435).

120 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

A SMALL COLLECTION OF MAMMALS FROM NORTH.
EASTERN CHINA.

BY SAMUEL N. RHOADS,

These notes are based on a collection of seventeen mammals
brought to Philadelphia by Messrs. George and J. Edward Farnum,
the product of a hunting trip in the Chinese and Mongolian terri-
tories northeast of Pekin with Dr. A. Donaldson Smith during May,
June, July and August, 1897. By the generosity of these three
gentlemen the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia comes
into possession of the greater part of the collection, thus adding
seven species new to its museum. An account of their trip is being
prepared for the Geographical Journal of London.

1. Microtus (Microtus) mongolicus (Radde).! Mongolian Vole.

Seven specimens, Nos. 4,590 to 4,596, from along the shores of the
Sungari River in Mongolia north of Petun, come near MM. arvalis
Pallas as defined by Poliakoff, Lataste and G.§S. Miller, Jr. From
their greater size and resemblance to Radde’s plate of mongolicus,
both as regards external and cranial characters, as well as from their
geographic position, it appears best to consider them as mongolicus.
Externally the adult specimens resemble closely in size and color
very large M. pennsylvanicus taken at the same season (July 16th)
in the vicinity of Philadelphia. The pelage of mongolicus, however,
is more thin and coarse, indicating a habitat in a hot climate. In
the skull of an old male specimen the interorbital ridges have
coalesced on the frontal suture in a sharp elevated median ridge.
Comparing it with M. pennsylvanicus of same age and sex their
greatest zygomatic width is about the same, but the length of the
mongolicus skull is about 4 millimeters greater and its interorbital
elevation above the alveolus of m-1 is 2 mm. greater, showing a
relative length and depth of cranium quite remarkable in the genus
and nowhere approached in any American species known to me.
The molar series are correspondingly long and narrow. It isa true
member of the subgenus Microtus as defined by Miller.” The hind

1 Reis. im Ost-Sibir., I, p. 194, pl. VII.

2N. Amer. Fauna, No. 12, 1896.

a)

ee ee

1898. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 121

foot is 24 mm. from end of heel to end of claws; the tail 45 mm.
long, these dimensions being taken from the dry specimen. No
measurements for any of the specimens in the collection were recorded
by the collectors.

2. Mus humiliatus M. Edwards. Pekin River Rat.

An adult female, No. 4,598, from the steep banks of a stream at
Shiao Ho Tzu undoubtedly represents Milne Edwards’ species de-
scribed’ from the environs of Pekin, and with whose measurements
and plate it closely agrees. Edwards states that it represents Mus
rattus in China, an unaccountable statement, perhaps a slip of the
pen for Mus decumanus, as its external and cranial characters are
very close to the short-eared, brown-backed, gray-bellied short-whisk-
ered Norway Rat. Its short tail and small cranium, however, easily
distinguish it from decumanus. Theskull of the specimen is 37.5 mm.
in occipito-nasal length and 18.5 mm. in its greatest zygomatic ex-
panse. The nasals are relatively short, not reaching so near to the
superior termini of the premaxillaries as in decumanus or rattus.
The relations of this species to Mus caraco Pallas are seemingly close
and it may yet prove that Aumiliatus is only a subspecies of earaco.

3. Mus sp.?

The sealp and skull of an adult, long-whiskered, long-eared and
long-nosed rat, No. 4,599, taken southeast of Dolonnor apparently
represent a species of slender and elegant proportions, with a skull
nearly as long as in the specimen of humiliatus above recorded, but
with a greatly diminished zygomatic width and cranial depth.
These characters and the great relative length of rostrum put it in
the Mus ratius group. Itscranium is much smaller and more slender
than M. rattus alexandrinus and the mandibles are unusually nar-
row and weak for a Mus. The upper head is yellowish-brown,
heavily lined with black, darkest around eyes. Ears brown-gray ;
lips white ; throat yellowish-white; gray of cheeks broadly bordered
inferiorly by ochraceous buff which probably extended increasingly
along neck and sides of body.

4. Alactaga annulata (M. Edwards). Subsp.? Jerboa, Khin Gan,

A young female Jerboa, No. 4,597, about two-thirds grown, from
all appearances should be classed under the above name. As would
be expected, its immaturity is evinced by the darker pelage over the

— - $$$

* Recher. Mam., 1868-’74, p. 137.
9

122 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

entire upper parts as contrasted with M. Edward’s figure‘ of an adult
specimen. This dark coloration results from the black tips of the
upper pelage being more strongly developed and the buff ground
colors less intense than in the adult stage. The peculiar markings
of the tail fit M. Edward’s figure so well that its specific affinity to
annulatus is very probable. On the other hand our specimen was
not taken in the Mongolian desert but at an elevation of 3,550 feet
in a high fertile valley, on the border of the desert in the Khin Gan
Mountains. It is probably a dark race of annulata, as yet un-
named.°

5. Tamias (Eutamias) asiaticus (Gmelin), Asiatic Chipmunk.

Two adult specimens, No. 4,601 from Tung Ching Tzu and No.
4,602 from Sian Lang Kou, the first taken in May, the latterin June,
both from the Province of Pechili along the foothills of the Khin
Gan Range south and east of Dolonnor, are of interest when com-
pared with American species of the subgenus Eutamias. Founded
in 1880 by Trouessart as a subgenus, Eutamias has lately been con-
sidered by Dr. Merriam® as of full generic value, with T. asiaticus
as its type, and including several species of West American chip-
munks of the townsendi, speciosus and pictus groups.

As contrasted with typical ZYamias of Illiger, with our eastern
striatus as its type, Hutamias presents invariably a persistent second
upper premolar, never found in striatus and its east American con-
geners. This feature is the only one given by Trouessart to char-
acterize Eutamias, and it is worthy of mention that in his recent
Catalogus Mammalium that author does not recognize his Hutamias
even asa subgenus. It is, however, worthy of that rank and no
more, as its generic recognition necessitates a like subdivision of
Spermophilus into genera which, as such, are meaningless in nomen-
clature and only confuse where intended to elucidate the affinities of
distinct but closely related groups.

The cranial characters of 7. asiaticus do not seem to have been
made the basis of comparisons by any other writer than Trouessart
between the species of Tamias of the Old and New World.

* Recher. Mam., pl. X.

> Radde’s name, Dipus jaculus var. mongolica, in Mél. Biol. Acad. St. Pet.
ITI, 1861, p. 680, cited by Trouessart, may be applicable to M. Edwards
species. If so it has priority over A. annulata.

6 Proc. Biol. Soc. Washn., July, 1897, p. 189.

;

ae

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 125

Dr. J. A. Allen makes no mention of them in his publications on
the subject. The skulls of the two adult specimens secured by the
Messrs. Farnum present several characters of interest. First, as to
their subgeneric status, it is noteworthy that asiaticus not only has
the well developed and persistent second premolar found in our west
American species but also exhibits 6 to 8 strongly developed sulci
on the pigmented face of the upper incisors, analogous to those often
exhibited by Arctomys from the Cascade Mountains. An examina-
tion of several of our Cascade Mountain, Sierra Madre and British
Columbia species of Eutamias exhibits the same character, and in
some species, as 7. merriami, T. quadrivittatus and T. townsendi it is
very marked. J. striatus and its allies of the subgenus Tamias have
normally smooth incisors as in Spermophilus and its subgenera Am-
mospermophilus and Callospermophilus. Dr. Allen’s final separa-
tion of all American species of Tamias from T. asiaticus® was based
solely on an examination of the external characters of Siberian spec-
imens, considered in connection with the wide geographic separation
of the habitats of the most boreal forms known in Eastern Asia and
Western America. An English mammalogist of great note has
taken occasion to deplore Dr. Allen’s change of arrangement of
American species as an illustration of the species-splitting which
characterizes present day methods of American mammalogists. Had
our critic been at the pains to inquire into the subject by personal
examination of specimens he would certainly have avoided choosing
such an illustration ; for the specific differences between 7. asiaticus
and its nearest ally in America are, in respect of the cranium, very
marked. The skull of asiaticus is much larger than that of the
largest American Eutamias. Itis also relatively much wider than
the skull of any American species of the genus Tamias and the great
width of the nasal bones contrasted with their shortness immediately
separates asiaticus from any other Tamias. ‘There is a distinct supra-
orbital process or spine in asiaticus caused by the more posterior
reach of the normal supraorbital notch found in all other species of
the genus, The skull of No. 4,602 is 40.5 mm. long; its greatest
width 22.5 mm.; nasal length, 12.3 mm. ; posterior breadth of nasals,
5 mm.; interorbital constriction 10.2 mm, Unfortunately no
measurements of the Mongolian specimens were taken before skin-
ning. The hind foot, measured dry, is 38 mm. in one specimen and
40 mm. in the other, indicating a species larger than striatus.

Bull, Amer. Mus. N. H., III, p. 45.

‘

124 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.
6. Lepus sp. Hare.

A hare, No. 4,600, whose characters indicate a near approach to
maturity, evidently belongs to a species about the size of Lepus
americanus. It was taken on the east slope of the Khin Gan Mts.,
in Mongolia, at an elevation of about 4,000 feet. It is much smaller
than any hare described from this region by Radde, Schrenck,
Pallas and others, the hind foot measuring only 105 mm. in length.
The tail and ears are relatively long, the former black above and
white below. The ears are blackish-gray and ochraceous, like upper
head and body, and bordered at tips with black. The belly, breast,
vent and chin are pure white to bases of hairs; the lower neck, fore
legs, and space between shoulders are tawny ochraceous. The skull
characters show close affinity to Lepus americanus. It was taken
July 15th, and is in full summer pelage.

7. Gazella gutturosa mongolica(Heude). Mongolian Gazelle.

An adult male and a yearling of the same sex, of the “ Imperial
Sheep ” or “ Houang Yang-tze” are represented by two heads in the
collection. On the supposition that Heude’s species mongolica’
is separable from the Siberian gutturosa of Pallas, I adopt the above
trinomial. Its separability from what Heude figures as hillieriana
on the next plate I am inclined to doubt. In the yearling the horns
are about 3 inches long and curve inward, their points touching
and slightly overlapping above the occiput. The specimens were
taken in the Imperial Hunting Park northeast of Dolonnor. A
female of the same species, shot June 6th, contained a nearly mature
footus.

8. Capreolus pygargus (Pallas), subsp.? Mongolian Roe Deer.

The skull and scalp of a fine male specimen of this animal were
secured in the Imperial Hunting Park. It is placed in the above
category on the authority of Sir V. Brooke*® who considers the Man-
churian Roe to be at least a small race of pygargus.

It is remarkable that this specimen, shot in the middle of June, is
possessed of a fine set of antlers from which the velvet has not wholly
disappeared around the bur.

9. Lynx isabellinus (Blyth). Thibetan Lynx.

A fine adult specimen of Lynx, No. 4,603, also taken in the Im-
perial Hunting Park, agrees with Blyth’s description of isabellinus

™Mem. Hist. Nat. Chinois., 1894, p. 245. Pl. XX XVII.
Pp. Z.S., 1878, pp. 917-918.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 125

as compared with the characters of the L. /ynz (L.) of Europe. I
am unable to state an opinion as to the specific value of isabellinus
but the fact of specific identity among the several forms of Lynx
ruffus found across the northern continent of America, and their
close resemblance to L. /ynz of Eurasia, suggests that isabellinus is
only an eastern race of that species, characterized by fewer and
weaker spots, more naked foot pads and paler color. The specimen
was killed June 17th.

126 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

NOTES ON ALASKAN WATER BIRDS.
BY ALVIN SEALE.

During the summer of 1896, it was the writer’s privilege, in com-
pany with Norman B. Scofield, a fellow student at Stanford Uni-
versity, to make a trip into the Arctic Seas for the purpose of col-
lecting specimens of natural history for the Leland Stanford Junior
University of California.

The expedition was under the patronage of Mr. Timothy Hopkins
of Menlo Park, California, to whom great credit is due for the splen-
did scientific equipment to which the success of the expedition is
largely due.

We desire also to express our appreciation of the favors extended
to us by the Pacific Steam Whaling Company of San Francisco, who
furnished free transportation for the expedition, and spared no pains
or expense to make our voyage pleasant as well as successful. Val-
uable aid was also given us by the commanders and officers of the
various whaling vessels of the above company. Special service was
rendered us by Captain Townsend of the bark “ J. D. Peters,” Cap-
tain Mason of the §.S. “Jeanie,” Captain Cogan of the 8.8.
“ Thrasher,” Captain Smith of the S. 8. ‘‘ Narwhal,” and also many.
others.

Our voyage extended north to Point Barrow, Alaska, thence east
to the Mackenzie River. Collections were made at various points
along the coast.

URINATORIDZ.
8. Urinator adamsii. Yellow-billed Loon.

This Loon occurs in abundance at Point Barrow during the early
part of September. Weare under obligations to Captain Akin of the
Rescue Station for a fine specimen, a male in full breeding plumage,
taken September 12th. Length 33.75 in.; bill along culmen 3.5;
along gape 5; height at nostrils 1.2; width .50; tarsus 3.7; wing
14.3. Hab., western Arctic America and northeastern Asia.

11. Urinator lumme. Red-throated Loon.

The great abundance of divers forms a striking feature of bird

life in Alaskan waters. The Red-throated Loon is one of the most

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 127

common forms. Large bands of this species were observed at Point
Barrow during the month of September. For the most part these
birds were making their way to the south, usually flying were and
announcing their passage by hoarse, grating cries.

In regard tothis Loon, Nelson writes: “ The Red-throated Loon
is one of the very few birds which raises its voice in the quiet of the
long Arctic night. It isabundant at Point Barrow where it is sup-
posed to breed. It also breeds upon the Commander Islands.”
Hab., (Ridg.), northern portions of the northern hemisphere, breed-
ing in Arctic regions; in North America, south in winter, nearly
across the United States. One specimen, (No. 3,374, Stanford
University), a male in full breeding plumage taken July 19th at
Orca, Alaska, S. W.

ALCIDSA.
12. Lunda cirrhata. Tufted Puffin.

A single individual of this species came flying past our vessel
May 27th, in longitude 126° W., latitude 47° N.; this was the first
specimen seen. It circled around us twice and was off again lke a
shot. The following day three more were observed, and from this
time they became more and more abundant as we advanced to the
north until about June 16th, longitude 159° 50’ W., latitude 51°
56’ N. From this date and position there was a rapid decrease in
the number observed ; in fact, Tufted Puffins were not met with in
any great abundance north of the Aleutian Islands, their place being
taken by the Horned Puffin (F’ratercula corniculat«).

In their flight past our vessel these birds would usually circle
around us two or three times, turning their heads to one side and
looking down at us in a comical and knowing manner, and in many
ways manifesting a high degree of curiosity. Seven adult speci-
mens of Lunda cirrhata are in the Stanford University collection,
four of which are from Nutchuk, Alaska, July 5th ; three from the
Pribyloff Islands. Hab., coasts’and islands of the North Pacific,
from southern California to Alaska, and from Bering Strait to
Japan; accidental in the Bay of Fundy and Kennebec River.

14. Fratercula corniculata. Horned Puffin.

We first observed Horned Puffins June 20th in longitude 165°
53’ W., latitude 51° 30’ N. From this position until we reached
Point Hope north of Kotzebue Sound they were common. At
King’s Island near Port Clarence, Alaska, these birds nest in great

- 128 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

abundance; this rookery was visited July 4th. The nests for
the most part seemed to be quite high on the cliffs, and at this season
were occupied by the immature birds, many of which were able to
fly. The discharge of a gun caused hundreds of the adult birds to
take wing and circle about us. In a very short time, however, they
settled upon the cliff again, crowding upon each other and keeping
up a curious guttural sound. ‘This species is represented in the
Stanford University collection by five fine specimens in breeding
plumage taken on the Pribyloff Islands July, 1896. A specimen
taken early in the season (June 14th) has the head and neck a deep
glossy black so nearly like the coloring of the back that it was diffi-
cult to make out the usual sharp line of demarcation. Hab., coasts
and islands of the North Pacific, from British Columbia to the
Kurile Islands. “ Abundant on all the shore line of Alaska south
of the Arctic cirele”’ (Turner).

17. Cyclorrhynchus psittaculus. Paroquet Auklet.

One specimen of this species was shot at Point Barrow, September
12th. But few of these Auklets were seen. Three specimens were
taken on St. George Island, July 26th, by Messrs. Greely and
Snodgrass. Hab., coasts of the North Pacific from Sitka to the
Kurile Islands.

18. Simorhynchus cristatellus. Crested Auklet.

These were very abundant on the water near King’s Island dur-
ing the early part of July. The natives brought large numbers of
these birds on board our vessel to barter. I noticed, however, that
they always removed the small crest of the bird before disposing of
it. Whether they retained the crest as an object of ornamentation
or for some superstitious reason I was unable to learn. Three speci-
mens’ from the Pribyloff Islands taken in July show an interesting
variation in the size of thesexes. Male: wing, 5:‘; ins; tarsus, 174;
middle toe and claw, 1}%; exposed culmen, xs; depth of bill at
nostrils, :°5; greatest width of bill at gape, ti; head, 11%. Female:
wing, 5ys; tarsus, 1; middle toe and claw, 1,5; exposed culmen,
rs; depth of bill at nostrils, 15; greatest width of bill at gape, 14 ;
head, 11%. Hab., coasts of the North Pacific from Kadiak and the
Pribyloff Islands to Kamtschatka and northern Japan. Nelson
found this bird breeding in abundance on the Diomede Islands in
Bering Strait. They were not seen by us north of King’s Island.

' Nos. 3,522, 3,523, 3,553, Stanford University, Greely and Snodgrass.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 129

20. Simorhynchus pusillus. Least Auklet.

From latitude about 60° north until we reached Bering Strait,
these little birds were quite common, usually seen in pairs on the
water. ‘They were very tame and our vessel would almost run them
down before they would dive or fly. A number were shot near
King’s Island. Three specimens, one male and two females, were
taken at St. George Island July, 1897, by Messrs. Greely and
Snodgrass. The male bird of this species shows a very decided in-
crease in size over the female on the measurement of bill, tarsus and
wing. Hab., coasts of the North Pacific, from Japan and southern
Alaska to the Aleutian and Pribyloff Islands. Nelson found these
birds abundant on the Diomede Islands in Bering Strait.

29. Cepphus columba. Pigeon Guillemot.

With the exception of a few specimens seen near King’s Island,
the Pigeon Guillemots were not observed until we entered the Arc-
tic Ocean. At Icy Cape they were common on the water August
4th, their bright red legs, white wing bars and black bill making
them quite conspicuous. Few were met north of this point. Hab.,
coast of the North Pacific, from southern California to Icy Cape,
Alaska, Aleutian Islands, Kamtschatka, and northern Japan.

30. Uria troile californica. California Murre.

June 16th a solitary California Murre was observed on the water,
longitude 150° W., latitude 51° 56’ N.; this was the first specimen
seen. Three days later eight more of this species were observed.
These birds, like the Tufted Puffin, were very curious about our
vessel and would usually circle around us a number of times before
going on their way. One even flew through our rigging four times,
acting very much as if trying to alight on the yards. Murres were
again met with June 20th, when a band of twenty-two passed us,
June 22d they were quite common in longitude 164° 55’ W.,
latitude 52° 9’ N. Hab., Pacific coast of North America, south to
Southern California. Nelson found this bird abundant on Wrangel
and Herald Islands,

31. Uria lomvia arra. Pallas’ Murre, “ Ice Duck.’

These birds were met with in great abundance after entering
Bering Sea. The sailors call this murre the “Ice Duck,” and its
appearance in large numbers is regarded as an indication of a near-
ness to ice. And indeed in the present case at least, this proved to
be true, for on the following day, June 27th, longitude 170° W.,

130 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

latitude 60° 20’ N., a large ice floe was encountered upon which
these birds were very abundant ; in fact, one might easily have mis-
taken parts of the floe fora rookery. Not only were they abun-
dant on the floe itself, but each detached block of ice seemed to have
its crew of “ Ice Ducks.” Off St. Lawrence Island July 1st, murres
were far more abundant than any other species of bird. At East
Cape, Siberia, July 26th, these birds were quite common. They
were met with constantly on the American side as far north as ley
Cape. From this point on, very few were seen ; none were observed
to the east of Point Barrow. This species is easily distinguished by
the strong heavy bill. Four specimens from Nutehuk, Alaska, have
the culmen measuring 2.26 ins., 2.1,2.2, respectively.? Hab., coasts
and islands of Bering sea and Aleutian chain, from Kadiak to Kamt-
schatka. Nelson found this bird abundant on Harold and Wran-
gel Islands.

STERCORARIIDE.

36. Stercorarius pomarinus. Pomarine Jaeger.

Four of this species were seen June 20th, longitude 164° 56’, lati-
tude 50° 56’ N. They were common at Port Clarence during the
latter part of July. A fine male was taken at Iey Cape July 31st.
At no time, however, were the birds in question so abundant as S.
longicaudus. Hab., northern portions of the northern hemisphere,
along sea coasts and larger inland waters, breeding far northward
in America, south in winter to California, New Jersey and the
Great Lakes.

37. Stercorarius parasiticus. Parasitie Jaeger.

Parasitic Jaegers were not abundant at any time. One solitary
individual was seen June 28th in latitude 60° 40’ N.; two more
were observed the following day. On July Ist three Parasitic Jae-
gers were seen off St. Lawrence Island One specimen was shot at
Port Clarence July 23d. These birds were fairly common at Iey
Cape. On August 3d at this place two fine adults,a male and
female in black plumage, were taken (see Nos. 3,564 and 3,566 L.
8S. J.U.). Hab, northern portion of northern hemisphere, breed-
ing toward Arctic regions; south in winter to New York, southern
California, and even the coast of Brazil.

?See Nos. 3,376, 3,422, 3,423, 3,424, L. S.J. U. Nutchuk, Alaska, July
11, 1896, A. W. Greely.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 131

38. Sterocrarius longicaudus. Long-tailed Jaeger.

This species could be seen at almost any time from July to Sep-
tember. They were abundant all along the coast from Icey Cape to
Herschel Island, N. W. T. They were abundant at Point Barrow
and seemed to be engaged chiefly in making life sorrowful for the
gulls. I noticed, however, that the big Glaucous Gull turned the
tables, and was frequently seen to chase the Jaegers. One adult
male was taken at [ey Cape, August 3d (No. 3,560 Stanford Uni-
versity). This specimen gives the following measurements: Wing,
13.5 ins.; culmen, 1.27; cere, .75; tarsus, 1.75; mid-toe and claw,
1.65. Hab., northern parts of northern hemisphere, breeding in
Arctic regions, south in winter to California.

LARID Z.
40. Rissa tridactyla pollicaris. Pacific Kittiwake.

This beautiful bird was frequently observed in Bering Sea as far
north as Icy Cape, Alaska. Like the genus Larus, they have the
habit of following the vessel and watching for any food that may
be thrown over the side. ‘They were most abundant off St. Law-
rence Island, July Ist. Two were shot at Icy Cape August 3d,
(see Nos, 3,563, 3,564 L.S8.J.U.). Hab., coasts and islands of
Bering Sea north to Icey Cape.
40a. Rissa brevirostris. Red-legged Kittiwake.

This species was more abundant than the preceding, especially in
the vicinity of the Aunamak Pass. ‘Two specimens taken on St.
George Island July 26, 1897, giye the following measurements: No.
3,530 Stanford University ; wing, 12.25 ins.; culmen, 1.12; depth of
bill at nostrils, .45; tarsus, 1.12; mid-toeand claw, 1.76; No.3,518
Stanford University: wing, 11.75: culmen, 1.05: depth of bill at
nostrils, .45; tarsus, 1.10; mid-toe and claw, 1.70. Feet and legs,
bright red, bill, greenish-yellow. Hab., coasts and islands of Ber-
ing Sea.

42. Larus glaucus. (ilaucous Gull,

The big Glaucous Gulls were first observed June 29th, latitude
61° 32’ N. They were not common, however, until we reached
Port Clarence, Alaska. Unlike most Gulls, this species is extremely
suspicious and rarely comes within gun shot of the vessel. We
found this Gull abundant from Port Clarence all along the Arctic
coast to Mackenzie Bay. A southern migration of these birds was
observed at Point Barrow, Alaska, September 15th; it was a cold

132 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

rainy day with a strong wind blowing from the northwest. All the
day, band after band of these Gulls passed the point following the
coast line to the south; in one of these bands I counted forty-eight
individuals, most of them adults. Hab., coasts of Arctic seas;
south in winter to Long Island and California.

44. Larus glaucescens. Glaucous-winged Gull.

The Glaucous-winged Gulls were fairly common from the Aleu-
tian Islands to the Bering Strait. They were seen to associate freely
with the smaller Gulls, and at times would come quite near the ves-
sel, differing in this respect from the LZ. glaucus, which so far as we
could see did not associate much with the other species.

Two specimens taken at Orca Station,S. W. Alaska, give the fol-
lowing measurements: No. 3,425 (L. 8. J. U.); wing, 17; culmen,
2.56; depth of bill through angle, .84; depth of bill through nos-
trils, .80; tarsus, 2.86; mid-toe with claw, 3.20; tail, 7.18: No.
3,426 (L. S. J. U.): wing, 17.5; culmen, 2.36; depth of bill at
angle, .90; depth of bill at nostrils, .80; tarsus, 2.86; mid-toe and
claw, 3.28; tail, 7.8. Hab., coasts of the north Pacific and Bering
Sea, from Japan northwest, across through Aleutian chain, and south
in winter to California.

5la. Larus argentatus smithsonianus. American Herring Gull.

Birds ascribed to this species came flying about our vessel near
Unalaska and also near Aunamak Island. No specimens were
secured. Hab., whole of North America, south in winter to Cuba
and Lower California.

53. Larus californicus. California Gull.
No specimens were taken, but birds ascribed to this species were

met with quite frequently near Aunamak Pass. Hab., western
North America, chiefly in the interior, from Mexico to Alaska,
55. Larus brachyrhynchus. American Mew Gull.

Birds of this species were frequently observed along the Alaskan
coast as far north as Icy Cape, one specimen being shot at this place
July 30th. Hab., northwestern North America breeding far north ;
south in winter along the Pacific coast to Southern California.

62. Xema sabinii. Sabine’s Gull.

These Gulls were first observed about ten miles off Icy Cape,
Alaska, where a company of five came flying over the ice and passed
our vessel. On August 8th these gulls were extremely abundant at

ee

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 133

Point Barrow, congregating in thousands along the shore to feed
upon small Ceelenterates and Crustaceans that were washed up on
the sands. When we again reached Point Barrow, September 8th,
these birds were in the height of their southern migration, and
bands composed of from fifty to one hundred individuals were con-
stantly passing, but this time paying little attention to the food that
was still abundant along the shore. Xema Gulls were not seen at
Herschel Island until August 28th. The absence of immature
birds was a striking fact; almost all of these Gulls that we observed
were adults. Two young, however, were shot at Point Barrow Sep-
tember 12th. Hab., Pacific coast of North America from Monterey,
California, N. to Point Barrow, east, New York, Great Lakes,
(casually to Bermudas and Peru).

71. Sterna paradise#a. Arctic Tern.

The first representative of this species was seen June 6th, longi-
tude 141° W., latitude 52° 37’ N. The poor bird seemed to have
been battling with the storm for some time and to be completely
tired out ; it alighted in our rigging and remained with us all day.
By June 20th Terns were very common, and eight or ten could be
counted from the deck of the vessel at one time. Two specimens
were shot at Port Clarence, Alaska, July 8th. Terns were quite
abundant at Point Barrow August 12th and at Herschel Island
August 27th. Hab., cireumpolar regions, south in winter to Cali-
fornia. Another species of Tern supposed to have been Sterna aleu-
tica was observed quite frequently in the Bering Sea. We were un-
able to obtain a specimen however.

DIOMEDEIDZ.
82. Diomedea albatrus. Short-tailed Albatross,

The first Short-tailed Albatross was observed May 26th, about
eighteen miles off Cape Flattery. Two were seen June Ist in longi-
tude 134° 16’ W., latitude 51° 6’ N.; the day following another was
observed. This completes the record of all seen during our entire
voyage. These birds, unlike the Black-footed Albatross, do not fol-
low after a vessel. Hab., North Pacific from California to Alaska.

81. Diomedea nigripes. Black-footed Albatross, “ Goonie.”

On May 27th, about one hundred miles northwest of Cape Flat-
tery, these birds of the open sea were firstsighted. From that time
until June 21st they were always in evidence about our vessel. The
last “ Goonie,” however, deserted us when we came in sight of the

134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898

snowy mountains of the Aleutian Islands. These birds offer a never
failing source of interest and instruction to the ocean traveller when
the sails flap idly against the mast and the voyage stretches out toa
wearisome length. As a matter of curiosity I made it a point at a
certain time each day to count and note down the number of Black-
footed Albatrosses that could be seen from the deck of the vessel,
the position of our vessel and any peculiar hydrographic conditions.
I copy the resulting table from my note book.

| Number
Date. Longitude W.) Latitude N. Hydrographic Conditions. of
| Albatrosses.

May 27 | 126° 40% | 47° 32/ Light breeze 6
May 28 | ———— - Fresh breeze 8
May 29 | 122° 12/ 47° 10’ | Rough sea i"
May 30| 131° 20’ | 47° 55/ Gale 5
May 31 | 133° 34 49° 7 Heavy sea; little wind 11
June 1} 134° 16/ 50° 16 | Calm 19
June 2| 134° 45” | 50° 44” | Becalmed 8
June 3 — - | Fog; strong breeze a
June 4 139° 54/ 525497 | Calm 17
June 5| 140° 11% | 52°37’ | Fresh breeze 7
June 6; — - Rain 7
June 7 143° 51° 40/7 Cold rain ; strong wind 6
June 8 - Rain; heavy wind i
June 9} 148° 16/ 51° 28/ Warm and pleasant 8
June 10 | —— - Strong breeze 8
June 11 — —. 51° 30/ Slight breeze 12
June 12 - Cold ; calm 8
June 13.| 154° 417 50° 467 Calm 3
June l4 | 154° 41” | 50° 46% ‘Slight breeze 4
June15 | 158° 43’ | 51° 107 Fair breeze 3
June 16 | 159° 587 51° 56 | Calm; cold 3
June 17 | —— -———— High fog; warm 3
June 18 — | 60° 42% | Fog 4
Junel9 | 164° 567 50° 56’ | ‘Fresh breeze 3
June 20 | - _ Fog; good breeze 2
June 21 — Fog; cold 2
June 22 | 164° 55’ 62° 8” Becalmed 1
June 23 | —— - | Becalmed 0

From the above table it would seem that in this case, at least, the
Black-footed Albatross during the early month of June is found
most abundant in latitudes between 50° and 52° north, and that
they are seen in greater numbers about a vessel un calm days. A
fine specimen of this species was taken May 11th by letting a
baited hook over the side of the vessel, the hook catching merely in

1898. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 135

the horny part of the beak and dropping out when we got the bird
on deck. It was utterly helpless on deck, being unable to fly
unless from the water. This bird, after having his beak tied so as to
restrain his vicious tendency to bite, was given the freedom of: the
vessel.

On one or two occasions among the birds that followed close to the
stern of our vessel I noticed specimens that were marked slightly
differently from the one taken. I suspect these belong to one of the
other species reported from the North Pacific, but as no specimens
could be taken, nothing was definitely established. Hab., North
Pacific.

PROCELLARIID.
86b. Fulmarus glacialis glupischa. Pacific Fulmar.

A large flock of dark-bodied birds, in appearance very much like
Pacific Fulmars, was observed some distance from the ship June
20th, latitude about 51° N. A heavy fog closing in, however, pre-
vented us from getting a more satisfactory observation of the birds.
The next day Pacific Fulmars were frequently seen quite near the
vessel. On June 24th, great rafts of these birds were seen on the
water in the Aunamak Pass; among these were quite a number of
the white ones. Just after entering the Bering Sea we passed a
great flight of Pacific Fulmarsall making their way to the westward
against a heavy gale of wind. They would fly a short distance,
then settle upon the water and rest a moment, and then try it again.
They always arose facing the wind and also sat on the water in the
same position. The dark Pacific Fulmar was not seen north of
Bering Strait. When in the North Pacific on our return voyage,
September 25th, a large number of these Fulmars, (“ bousins ” they
are called by the sailors), came flying about our vessel in the man-
ner of the Black-footed Albatross, except that the Fulmars flew
quite high, most of the time making a peculiar sharp ery. They
followed the ship, circling around and over us almost the entire day.
Hab., North Pacific to Mexico.
86c. Fulmarus glacialis rodgersii. Rodger’s Fulmar,

A Rodger’s Fulmar was shot June 29th latitude 61° 3’ N. Very
few were seen, however, until we reached East Cape, Siberia, where
they were common. On September 19th when about sixty miles
west of Point Barrow, Rodger’s Fulmars could be seen almost any
time during the day following after our vessel, as if expecting food

136 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

to be thrown over to them. They had probably learned to expect.
food from ships by being near the whaling vessels while they were
“cutting in” or “trying out” a whale, at which time large quanti-
ties of fat and refuse are thrown over the side. Hab., Bering Sea,
Arctic Ocean north to Point Barrow.

91. Puffinus creatopus. Pink-footed Shearwater.

A great flight of Pink-footed Shearwaters was observed May
26th about fifteen miles off Cape Flattery. They were passing to
the north in a continuous stream. I watched from the deck of our
vessel for over an hour, during which time many hundreds passed,
frequently flying quite near us. Their large size, white breasts and
wheeling flight were unmistakable. Our vessel interrupted their
line of flight, but they simply divided, part of the stream going by
on one side, and part on the other. Never for a moment did they
stop the steady flow to the north. The Pink-footed Shearwaters
were not met with again during our entire trip. Hab., Eastern
Pacific Ocean, Cape Flattery to Chili.

95. Puffinus griseus. Dark-bodied Shearwater.

A few Dark-bodied Shearwaters were observed May 26th off
Cape Flattery. They were flying north in company with the Puf-
finus creatopus. Dark-bodied Shearwaters were again observed
June 22d in longitude 164° 55’ W., latitude 52° 9’ N., about sixty
miles south of the Aleutian Islands. At this point we encountered
and for several hours sailed parallel to a great flight of these birds.
During this time thousands of individuals passed us in steady flight,
all going to the westward.

Oceanodroma (?). Petrels.

Concerning Petrels I have the following entry in my note book:
June 16th, longitude 159° 58’ W,, latitude 51° 56’ N. For the
past two or three nights there has been a number of small bat-like
birds flying about our vessel keeping up an almost constant sound
of low musical notes. The sailors call them ‘“ Mother Carey’s
Chickens.” I was not able to secure a specimen for identification.
They may have been O. furcata.

Birds well answering the description of O. furcata were observed
May 28th. They were flying about in the wake of our vessel,
skimming gracefully over the waves and occasionally dashing
through the spray as if they enjoyed the rough sea.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15

=

PHALACROCORACID.
123a. Phalacrocorax. Cormorants.

Probaby not more than two dozen Cormorants were seen during
our entire voyage. No specimens were shot. Three small individ-
uals of this genus were seen on a small island in the Aunamak Pass,
which is our first northern record for “Shags.” These were a
small species (possibly P. p. robustus). Seven Cormorants of a
larger species (possibly P. urile) were observed off Aunamak
Island. A few were also seen in the vicinity of Point Hope. All
the Cormorants met with seemed extremely wild, keeping well out
of range of ashot gun. This is rather surprising when one consid-
ers how tame and fearless the Shags are near Monterey, California,
where they are being shot at constantly.

ANATIDSA.

154. Clangula hyemalis. Old-squaw.

Along the Arctic coast from Point Barrow eastward to the Mac-
kenzie River, the scarcity of bird-life as compared with that of
Bering Sea is quite striking. In fact, were we to disregard Old-
squaws, Glaucous Gulls, and an occasional straggling band of Eider
Ducks, our records for this part of the voyage would be chiefly a
blank. With the exception of Eider Ducks, Old-squaws were the
most abundant water fowl met with in the Arctic. At Point Bar-
row, September 12th, a great migration of Old-squaws was going
ou, thousands were passing to the south; many were shot. Their
meat, however, is not considered good eating, except by the natives.
Hab., northern portions of northern hemisphere, south in winter
nearly across the United States,

158. Arctonetta fischeri. Spectacled Hider.

A young Spectacled Eider was taken about fifty miles off Icy
Cape, Alaska, August 2d. This was the only one of the species
seen,

A few skins from the heads of the adult ducks were seen in the
possession of the natives at Point Barrow, where they are highly
prized as articles of ornamentation, The Spectacled Eider is re-
ported as being rarely seen on the American side, although abundant
on the Siberian coast. Hab., coast of Alaska from Northern Sound
to Point Barrow.

10

138 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

161. Somateria v-nigra. Pacific Hider.

This is the most abundant wild fowl at Point Barrow. During
their spring and fall migration the very sky is clouded with their
flight. They form an important article of diet for the natives and
other persons stationed at Point Barrow. Hab., northeastern
America, south to Great Lakes.

162. Somateria speoctabilis. King Hider.

Very few King Eider were seen. One specimen was taken Aug.
7th at Point Barrow, while flying in company with the Pacific
Eiders. Hab., northern portions of northern hemisphere, south in
winter to Great Lakes.

164. Oidemia deglandi. White-winged Scoter.
One flock of about sixteen W hite-winged Scoters observed about 60

miles east of Point Barrow is our only record for this species. Hab.,
northern North America, south in winter to the Great Lakes.
166. Oidemia perspicillata. Surf Scoter.

A few straggling companies of Surf Scoters were seen in longi-
tude 159° 58’ W., latitude 51° 56’ N. A great flock of these Ducks
passed us June 22d when a few milesoff Unalaska. They were
abundant at King’s Island. Hab., North America in general.

169. Chen hyperboreus. Snow Goose.

This Goose was fairly common at Herschel Island during the
latter part of August, when several flocks were seen flying south.
The native hunters brought in a number killed at the mouth of the

Mackenzie River August 23d. Hab., western North America,
breeding in Alaska.

174. Branta nigricans. Black Brant.

A number of Black Brant were brought in by the natives at Her-
schel Island; they do not seem to be very abundant near the
island however. No live individuals of this species were seen.
Hab., western Arctic America, south in winter to Lower California.

A LIST OF LAND AND SHORE BIRDS COLLECTED IN ALASKA OR
ADJACENT ISLANDS IN THE SUMMER OF 1897 By
MESSRS. ARTHUR W. GREELY AND
ROBERT E. SNODGRASS.®

222. Crymophilus fulicarius. Red Phalarope.
Four specimens from St. Paul Island, August 31st.

~ 3 All the above specimens. are now in the museum of Natural History at
Stanford University, California.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

223. Phalaropus lobatus. Northern Phalarope.

Five specimens from St. Paul Island, August 17th.

236. Tringa couesi. Aleutian Sandpiper.

Five specimens, St. Paul Island, August 17th.
237. Tringa ptilocnemis. Pribyloff Sandpiper.

Six specimens, St. Paul Island, August 22d.
238. Tringa acuminata. Sharp-tailed Sandpiper.

One specimen, St. Paul Island, August 19th.
242. Tringa minutilla. Least Sandpiper.

Two specimens from Bellovski Bay, July 27th.
254. Totanus melanoleucus. Greater Yellow-legs.

One specimen from St. Paul Island, August 23d.
259. Heteractites incanus. Wandering Tattler.

Four specimens, St. Paul Island, August 22d.
302. Lagopus rupestris. Rock Ptarmigan.

One specimen.

523. Leucosticte griseonucha. Aleutian Leucosticte.

Four specimens from St. George Island, July 25th.

534a. Plectrophenax nivalis townsendi. Pribyloff Snowflake.

Four specimens, St. George Island, July 25th.

536. Calcarius lapponicus. Lapland Longspur.

Eight specimens, St. George Island, July 25th.

542. Ammodramus sandwichensis. Sandwich Sparrow.

Fourteen specimens from Amagak Island, September 15th.

557. Zonotrichia coronata. (olden-crowned Sparrow.
One specimen from Unga Island, July 22d.

582. Melospizacinerea. Aleutian Song Sparrow.

Four specimens from Amagak Island, September 17th.

585. Passerella iliaca unalaschcensis. Fox Sparrow.
Ten specimens from Unga Island, July 21st.

723. Troglodytes alascensis. Alaskan Wren.

One specimen from Amagak Island, September 17th.

765. Saxicola oenanthe. Wheatear.
One specimen from St. Paul Island, August 29th.

139

140 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1898,

LIST OF BIRDS COLLECTED AT KADIAK, ALASKA, IN 1896 BY

MR. CLOUDSLEY RUTTER.

12. Lundacirrhata. Tufted Puffin.

80a. Uria troile californica. California Murre.
129. Merganseramericanus. American Merganser.
146. Aytha americana. Redhead.

801. Lagopus lagopus. Willow Ptarmigan,

302. Lagopusrupestris. Rock Ptarmigan.

$52. Haliaeetus leucocephalus. Bald Eagle.

475. Pica pica hudsonica. American Magpie.
486a. Corvus corax principalis. Northern Raven,

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 141

ODONATA (DRAGONFLIES) FROM THE INDIAN OCEAN, AND FROM
KASHMIR, COLLECTED BY DR. W. L. ABBOTT.!

BY PHILIP P. CALVERT, PH. D.

Dr. W. L. Abbott, of Philadelphia, made collections of Odonata
in the Aldabra (Lat. 9° 25’S., Long. 46° E.), and the Glorioso (Lat.
11° 40’ S., Long. 47° 33’ E.), and the Seychelle Islands in the Indian
Ocean, and in Kashmir, which he sent to the U. S. National
Museum. These, by the direction of the late Dr. C. V. Riley, were
sent to me for study. Their consideration is here grouped under two
heads.

I. From THE INDIAN OCEAN.

A number of papers treating of the Odonata of some of these islands
lying near Madagascar already exist. As far as they are known to
me they are given below, in chronological order.’

1 Based on collections of the U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C.
Researches made in the laboratories of the Academy of Natural Sciences of
Philadelphia, and of the University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia.

*de Selys-Longchamps, E. Névroptéres. Annexe K. pp. 32-35, in Notes
sur I’ Ile de la Reunion par L. Maillard. Seconde Partie. Paris, Dentu, Edit-
eur, 1862. 6spp. Reunion (Bourbon). 19 spp. Mauritius alee a

Brauer, F. Neue exotische Odonaten. Verhl. k. k. Zool.-bot. Gesell.
Wien., xvii, pp. 811-816, 1867. 1n.sp. Mauritius. See on this Karsch.
Ent. Nach., xx, p. 382, 1894.

Wright, E. P. Notes on the Dragonflies of the Seychelles. Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist. (4), iii, pp. 270-272. April, 1869.

de Selys Longchamps, E. List of Species and Description of a new
Genus and five new species of Dragonflies (Odonata) from the Seychelles.
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (4) iii, pp. 272-277. April, 1869. 9 spp.

de Selys-Longchamps. E. Odonates des iles Seychelles. Ann. Soc. Ent.
Belg , xii, p. 95-99. Read March 6, 1869 (see /. «, p. lii). Essentially
the same as the preceding.

de Selys Longchamps, E. Enumeration des Odonates de Madagascar et des
Iles Comores et Mascareignes. in Recherches sur la Faune de Madagascar et de
ses Dépendances d’aprés les découvertes de Francois P. L. Pollen et D. C.
Van Dam., 5 me Partie. 1 re livraison. Leyde, J. K. Steenhoff, editeur.,
1869. 31 (?) spp. Madagascar. 7 spp. Nossi-Bé, 3 spp. Comoro Is., 21 (?) spp.
Mauritius, 9 spp. Bourbon, 1 sp. Rodriguez.

de Selys-Longchamps, Ek. Note sur plusieurs Odonates de Madagascar et
des ils Mascareignes. Revue et Mag. Zool (2) xxiii, pp. 175-183. April,
1872. Supplementary to the preceding; suppresses 1 sp. Madagascar, 1 sp.
Mauritius as synonyms.

McLachlan, R. A new dragonfly of the genus 4nax from Madagascar. Ent.
Mo. Mag., xxi, pp. 250-251, 1885. 1 n. sp.

142 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

No previously published records for the Odonata of the Aldabra
and Glorioso Islands appear to exist. Brief accounts of their recent
visits to the former are given by Mr. T. Risely Griffith and Dr.
Abbott in the Bulletin of Miscellaneous Information, Royal Gar-
dens, Kew, 1893, p. 152 et seq., but these contain nothing as regards
insects. A list of the plants collected by Dr. Abbott in the Aldabras
is given in the same Bulletin, 1894, pp. 146-150. Dr. Abbott’s own
“ Notes on the Natural History of Aldabra, Assumption and Glor-
ioso Islands, Indian Ocean,” in Pruceedings U. 8. National Museum,
XVI, pp. 759-764, 1894, mention the Pantala flavescens referred to
in this paper.®

In the present paper seven species are mentioned. Five, from the
Seychelles, were already known to exist there, but some additional
details on their structure or relationships are given. Two species
are from the Glorioso Islands, one from Aldabra.

Subfamily AGRIONIN ZA.

1. Leptocnemis bilineata Selys.

Hemicnemis bilineata Selys Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., xii, p. 28, 1869. Martin,
Mem. Soc. Zool. France, 1896, p. 108.

Two males, Mahé Is., Seychelles.

Kirby, W. F. <A Revision of the Subfamily Libelluline, ete. Trans. Zool.
Soc. Lond., xii, pp. 249-348. Pls. li-lvii, 1889. 1n. sp., Madagascar, p.
317.

Karsch, F. Beschreibung einer neuen Libelluline Madagaskar’s. Ent.
Nach., xv, pp. 276-277, 1889. Berl. Ent. Zeit., xxxiii, p. 352, 1890. A
synonym.

Karseh, F. Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Libellulinen mit vierseitiger cellula
cardinalis (Mannofhya Rambur). Ent. Nach., xv, pp. 245-263, 1889. 1n.
sp. Madagascar, p. 252.

Karsch, F. Ueber Gomphiden. Ent. Nach., xvi, pp. 370-382, 1890.
Adds 1 n. sp. of Gomphine for Madagascar.

de Selys-Longchamps, E. Causeries Odonatologiques no. 6. Les Gom-
phines d’Afrique. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., xxxvi, pp. 86-107, 1892. Adds 2
n.spp- Madagascar, 2n. spp. Nossi-Bé.

Calvert, P. P. Preliminary notes on some African Odonata. Trans. Am.
Ent. Soc., xix, pp- 161-164, 1892 Notes on 2 spp. Seychelles.

de Selys Longchamps, E. Causeries Odonatologiques no. 7. Ann. Soc.
Ent. Belg., xxxviii, pp. 163-181, 1894. Adds 1 n. sp. Gomphinze Madagas-
car.

Calvert, P. P. East African Odonata. collected by Dr. W. L. Abbott.
Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. xviii, pp. 121-142, 1895 [1896]. Notes on 4 spp.
Seychelles. See also Calvert. P. P. Ent. Nach., xxii, p. 215, 1896.

Martin, R. Odonates des Iles Seychelles. Mem. Soc. Zool. France, 1896,
pp- 101-112. 20spp.,5 new. Adds also 3 spp. for Madagascar.

’Since the above was written, Dr. A. Voeltzkow has given an account of
his recent visit to Aldabra, with references to the literature of previous visits
by other travellers, in Abhandlungen von der Senckenbergischen Naturforsch-
enden Gesellschaft, xxi, ]. Frankfurt, 1897.

‘
}

i
«

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 143

Subfamily LIBELLULINZ.
2. Pantala flavescens Fabricius.
Four males Glorioso Is., one of them dated Jan. 28, 1893. Four
males, eight females, Aldabra Is. .

3. Tramea basilaris Beauvois.

Libellula basilaris Beauvois Ins. rec. Afrique et Amer. p. 171, pl. ii, f. 1, 1805"
Synonym? 7ramea Burmeisteri Kirby, Trans. Zool. Soc. London, xii, p. 316,
1889.

One male, four females, Glorioso Is., the male and one female
dated Jan. 29, 1893.

Mr. Kirby states (/. c.) that his Burmeisteri is “ nearly allied to
the African T. basilaris Beauy., in which, however (judging from
the single broken specimen before me), the yellow area on the hind
wings is much less extended, and the opaque spaces (of which the
upper one is much more extended) is nearly black.”

In all these Glorioso individuals, the yellow area on the hind
wings extends from the base outward as far as the external angle
of the triangle; in the male it reaches backward (caudad) to the
anal ‘ angle,’ in the females back to three-fourths of the width of the
wing-base ; as regards the extent of the yellow area, therefore, these
individuals have, in Mr. Kirby’s view, a character of Burmeistert
rather than of basilaris.

On the other hand, the upper basal band of the hind wings of
Burmeisteri fills up “ more or less of the lower basal cell and part
of the wing below [the italics are mine] adjacent as far as the base
of the triangle” (Kirby, /.¢.). In these Glorioso females, but not
in the male, the blackish-brown fills up the basilar [médian of Selys,
1896] space (upper basal cell of Kirby), the subcostal space to
the first (1 9 ) or second (39 ) antecubital, and parts of the supra-
triangular space and of the triangle as well as the “ lower basal cell
and part of the wing below adjacent”; this distribution of the
dark color is a character of basilaris. In the Glorioso male the
brown on the hind wings is reddish-brown and therefore paler than
in the females; it fills the “lower basal cell and part of the wing
below adjacent” and extends into the triangle, and is separated from
a second, wider reddish-brown band extending from the inner mar-
gin to the distal subbasal sector although not actually touching
either margin or sector; this second band therefore does not “run
from the base of the sector of the triangle ” as in Burmeisteri.

‘

144 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

I have before me also two males from Madagascar, similar to the
one described above, sent to me by M. Martin as basilaris.

Altogether I think that the probability is that basilaris and Bur-
meisteri are color extremes of one and the same species.

It may be recorded here that in these Glorioso individuals the
first pair of legs are blackish like the others, that the genital ham-
ule of the male projects beyond the genital lobe, that the inferior
appendage of the male is half as long as the superiors and reaches to
the last denticle thereof, the superiors being longer than 9+-10 but
shorter than 8+9-+-10, and that the vulvar lamina of the female is
three-fourths as long as 9, bilobed in its own apical three-fourths,
and her appendages as long as 9+-10.

This species has not been recorded from the Seychelles.

4. Tramea continentalis Selys.

Selys, Mitth. Dresdner Mus., iii, p. 299, 1878. Martin, Mem. Soc. Zool.
France, 1896, p. 102.

One male, one female, Mahé Is., Seychelles.

The male is the same form so identified by M. Martin as he has
sent me one of his Seychelle specimens. The female is like those
he mentions in his last sentence (/. ¢.) “Certaines femelles n’ont
meme qu’une petite tache marron trés courte, le long de la mem-
branule et le surplus de la tache normale est indiqué par une teinte
jaune brulé trés clair, presque limpide.”” A male in my collection
from West Madagascar by Hildebrandt, formerly in the Museum
fiir Naturkunde, Berlin, where it stood as 7. limbata is of the same
species and Mr. Kirby’s description of Tramea madagascarensis
(Trans. Zool. Soc., London, XII, p. 317, 1889) also applies here.
Unfortunately even M. Martin does not give a sufficiently full state-
ment of the distinctions between limbata Desjardins and continentalis
Selys, and it is not certain that the insect I have described as 7.
limbata (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. xviii, p. 121; Ent. Nachr. xxii, p.
217, 1896) really is such.

In these two continentalis—the male has the hamule projecting
considerably beyond the genital lobe, the superior appendages are
almost as long as 8+9-+-10, the inferior appendage is almost half as
long as the superiors and reaches slightly beyond their denticles ;
the female has the vulvar lamina seven-eighths as long as 9, bilobed
in its apical three-fourths, the appendages as long as 94-10.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 145

5, Orthetrum wrightii Selys.

Libellula wrightii Selys, Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg, xii, p. 96, 1869; Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist. (4), iii, p. 272, 1869. O. W. Calvert, Trans. Amer. Ent.Soc., xix,
Ri 163, 1892; Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xviii, p. 134, fig. 12, 1896. Martin,

fem. Zool. Soc., France, 1896, p. 102.

Ten males, two females, Mahé Is., Seychelles.

The pale spot on the upper surface of the frons, enclosed by blue-
black, is yellow in some individuals instead of olive. The front
wings with 12-14 antenodals, 9-10 postnodals, the internal triangle
4-celled in one male only. Inner side of the triangle of the hind
wings in the prolongation of the arculus in all.

Having recently studied the type of O. stemmale Burm. from
Mauritius, now in the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Cam-
bridge, Massachusetts, I have reached the conclusion that wrightti
is but a race thereof, as the only differences I can find are the
following :

stemmale, 3 wrightii, $ 9
Rhinarium darker than nasus concolorous with nasus.

Black at the mid- half-way to the tothe freemargin (except

dle of the base free margin in one young é where
of the labrum it reaches hardly half-
reaching way.)

Superior surfaces luteous black (or reddish-brown
of second and in some immature
and third fem- males. )

ora and of first
and second tibize

Inferior append- one-fifth one-fourth to one-third
age of the male shorter shorter.
compared to the
superiors
Total length 50 mm. 46-39 3, 44-419
Abdomen (length) 34. mm. 31.5-27 3, 31-28.59
Front wing (length) 36.5 mm. 34-29 3 9
Hind wing (length) 34.5 mm, 32-28 3 9
Pterostigma
front wing 3.6 mm.)
hind wing 4. mm. pone os

146 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

The data here given for Wrightii are based on the twelve individ-
uals above cited and on eight males and three females sent me by
M. Martin.

Among Dr. Abbott’s specimens of this species are one male and
one female, not in the least pruinose on thorax and base of abdomen,
which have the frons and the labrum luteous without black except
at the base of the frons.

6. Schizonyx luctifera Selys.

Zygonyx ? luctifera Selys, Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg, xii, p. 96, 1869. Martin,
Mem. Soc. Zool. France, 1896, p. 103. S. 2. Calvert. Trans. Am. Ent. Soe.
xix, p. 163, 1892; Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xviii, p. 122, fig. 3. 1896 (Addi-
tional bibliography in this last ).

Two males, Mahé Is., Seychelles. The internal triangle of the
front wings is of three cells.

7. Diplacodes trivialis Rambur.

Libellula trivialis Ramb. Ins. Névr., p. 115, 1842.
Trithemis t, Martin, Mem. Soc. Zool., France, 1896, p. 102.

One male, two females, Mahé Is., Seychelles.
This species has been referred to Trithemis by recent authors, but
is surely a Diplacodes.

II. From Kasumir.

There does not appear to be anything in print treating especially
of the Odonata of Kashmir, although a number of species from this
and neighboring regions have been described, chiefly by Baron de
Selys, in systematic papers. The following faunal articles are use-
ful for comparison‘.

The collection made by Dr. Abbott comprises 82 specimens of
fifteen species. These are merely labelled “ Kashmir” with the

*McLachlan, R. Scientific results of the Second Yarkand Expedition, etc.
Calcutta, 1878.

Brauer, F. Verzeichniss der von Fedtschenko in Turkestan gesammelten
Odonaten. Verhdl. K. K. Zool. bot. Gesell. Wien, xxx, pp. 229-232, 1880.

Kirby, W. F. On asmall collection of Dragonflies from Murree and Camp-
bellpore (N. W. India), ete. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1886, pp. 325-329.

de Selys-Longchamps, E. Odonates de |’Asie Mineure et Revision de
ceux des autres parties de la Faune dite Européenne. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg.
xxXi, pp. 2-85, 1887.

de Selys-Longchamps, E. Insecta in itinere Cl. N. Przewalskii in Asia
Centrali novissime lecta, XI. Hors Soc. Ent. Ross., xxi, pp 441-447, 1887.

McLachlan, R. On two small collections of Neuroptera from Ta-chien-lu,
in the Province of Szechuen, Western China, on the frontier of Thibet. Ann.
Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), xii, pp. 421-436, 1894.

McLachlan, R. On Odonata from the Province of Szechuen in Western
China, and from Moupin, in Eastern Thibet. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (6),
xvii, pp. 364-374, 1896.

ae

ae ee ee oie 2 ™ =

—
_

—

eee

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 147

elevation above or below which they were collected. The U.S. Na-
tional Museum does not possess any more precise data, which is the
more unfortunate as such exist for the mammals and birds collected
in this region by Dr. Abbott, and may be found in the papers by
Messrs. True and Richmond respectively, in the Proceedings of the
U.S. National Museum, volumes XVII and XVIII.

Of the fifteen species ten are well-known as occurring in Europe
and a large part of Northern and western Asia, three (Ischnura in-
armata n. sp., Orthetrum hyalinum, O. triangulare) are Indian in
their relationships, one is the cosmopolitan Pantala flavescens and
one ( Ophiogomphus reductus n. sp.) is allied to Palearctic species of
a Holarctic genus.

Subfamily AGRIONINZ.

1. Lestes barbarus Fabr.

One female “below 5,000 f.” It differs from European examples
only by its slightly shorter pterostigma.

This species has previously been recorded from Persia and Turk-
estan.
2. Ischnura inarmata n. sp. Figs. 1, 2.

Two males, three females, “ below 5,000 f.”

Abdomen ¢ 23-22, 9 22. Hind wing % 16-15, 9? 16-18.

Agree in many respects with de Selys’ description of J. delicata

Fig. 1. Fig. 2.

Fig. 1. Profile view, right side of tenth abdominal segment and the term-
inal appendages of /icinura inarmata n, sp. ¢ Fig. 2. The same, viewed
obliquely from above and behind. RS right superior appendage, LS left super-
ior appendage, RI right inferior appendage, LI left inferior appendage, P in-
ferior process of the superior appendage. The irregular, curved line on the
side of the tenth segment in figure 1 indicates the boundary between black

above and blue below.® x 20.

6 All the drawings which illustrate this paper have been made with the aid
of Leitz or Zeiss lenses and the camera lucida.

148 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1898.

(=aurora Brauer), (Bull. Acad. Roy. Belg. [2] xli, p. 281, 1876)
but differ therefrom as follows:

$ .—Pterostigma of the front wings entirely reddish, not whitish
at the outer end. Antenne (except the first joint which is green)
black. Pale postocular spots rather large, elongate. No spine near
the “echancrure mesothoracique.” . Sides of the thorax pale green, a
very fine black line on the second lateral suture. Abdominal seg-
ment 2 with a dorsal black band from base to apex ; articulations
between 3 and 4, 4 and 5, and 5 and 6 black, 5 with a small dorsal
anteapical black spot. Dorsum of 6 orange in the basal third to
fifth, dark metallic green for the remainder; of 7 entirely dark
metallic green; 8 and 9 blue, unspotted, dorsum of 10 black which
may be invaded by the blue of the sides at the middle of each side.
The appendages blackish ; superiors as described for delicata, infer-
iors pale at base, twice as long as the superiors and nearly as long
as 10. Figs. | and 2.

° —Inferior side of the pterostigma as long as the costal side.
Head colored as in the above described males. Dorsum of abdom-
inal segments 1-10 dark metallic green, the articulations with nar-
row, yellow, transverse rings.

Subfamily ZSCHNINZ.

3. Anax parthenope Selys. Figs. 3 A-E.

Selys, Bull. Acad. Belg., vi (2), p. 389, 1839. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg,, xxvii,
p. 116, 1883.

Anax bacchus Hagen, Verhdl. k. k. zool. bot. Gesell. Wien, xvii, p. 48,
1867. ,

One male, three fem-
ales “below 5,000 f.”,one

male “5—10,000 f.”
Abdomen ¢ 9? 46-49

mm., hind wing @ 46-
49, 9 49-51.

Hagen described A.
bacchus from a single
female in his collection,
from the Himalayas, of
which he says that it
“is throughout so close
to parthenope in size,
Fig. B. form, color and mark-

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 149

Fig. E.
Fig. 3 A-E x 25.

Hind margin of the occiput of Anax parthen-
ope, ° showing variations in the two processes or
“horns.’’? A. Individual from Kashmir ( éacchus
Hagen), B from Kashmir, C from Indre, France,
D from Yokohama showing asymmetry, E from
Yokohama. ME hind margins of the eyes.

ings that I long held it
for the same species.”
Hethen gives a number
of differences which, he
believes, distinguish the
two forms.

With the more abun-
dant material above
cited before me, I find
that these differences
are not constant, but
vary individually. Even
what is apparently
the most important of
these, the possession by
bacchus of a backward-
ly-directed,conical tooth
on each side of the occi-
put of the female, is of
this varying nature. Of
the three females here
quoted, one has these

teeth less developed than in a female of parthenope from France, as

figs. 3 B and C show.

The close relationship existing between the Odonate fauna of
Kashmir and that of Europe, referred to in the introduction of this
paper, is clearly seen from the results of a comparison of individuals
of this species from France, Kashmir and Japan, as follows :

2239 Kashmir
1329 France

Humeral and _~ witha narrow black
second lateral line for their entire
thoracicsutures length.

Sides of the first with a quadrate
abdominal seg- dark brown spot
ment inferiorly reaching from the

base to the middle
of the segment.

32 $49 Yokohoma

with some discontinuous
black marks.

with a small round,
blackish dot near the
middle of the segment.

150 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Membranule on uniformly pale white at base, cinereous
all four wings gray. in apical half (front
wings) or three-fourths
(hind wings.)
Hind margin of with two acute, or with two blunt, rounded
the occiput of moderately acute, tubercles (figs. 3 p, E.)
the female processes (figs. 34-c.)

That is, in the only constant characters which I could find distin-
guishing the Kashmir from Japanese individuals, the former agreed
in all cases with French examples. I have not been able to find
any constant characters to separate the French from the Kashmir
examples,

Mr. McLachlan (1878) has recorded this species from Srinagar.

Subfamily GOMPHIN A.
4. Ophiogomphus reductusn.sp. Figs. 4, 5, 6 7.

Two males, three females, “ 5—10,000 f.”

Differs from O. serpentinus Charp. as follows:

3 9.—No black mark or line on the suture between frons
and nasus, or on the nasus; prothorax yellowish green, a transverse
band between anterior and middle lobes
and either side of the posterior lobe
blackish ; the two median black bands
on the thoracic dorsum wanting ; the
narrow antehumeral black stripe iso-
lated, touching neither the anterior
mesothoracic border below nor the ante-
alar sinus above, or almost entirely
wanting in one female; no dark spot
behind the posterior legs; the dorsal
yellow spot on 3-7 rounded, not pointed,
at its hind end, on 8-9 occupying almost
the entire length of the segment.

g .—Superior appendages (2.5 mm.)
longer than the 9th (2 mm.), and con-
sequently still longer than the 10th
(1.75 mm.) abdominal segment, diverg-

f ing from each other in their basal half,
cae td ca rere converging in their apical half in a
terminal appendages of Ophio regular curve, curved also downward
gomphus reductusn.sp 3. X15 in the apical half. Inferior appendage

a ee ee ee ee re

=)

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 151

about one-third shorter; viewed in profile it is directed somewhat
upward and the superior margin is biemarginated in two places,
viz. immediately behind
the base and immedi-
ately in front of the
apex; both emargina-
tions have curved out-
lines and the ante-
apical is the smaller of
the two; the tip of the
appendage is slender
and curved upward.
The genitalia of the
second segment are : _ Fig. 5. : ,
nia Profile view, left side of the terminal abdominal
very similar to those of appendages of Ophiogomphus reductus n. sp.c
serpentinus, especially x 15.
as regards the penis, as figured in Monog. Gomph., pl. 5, f. 2.

Anal triangle of the hind wings 4-celled.

@. Thetwo “horns” of the occiput are much shorter, in one
female the right horn is absent and the left
is represented merely by two black denticles.
Second and third tarsal joints superiorly
(externally) more or less yellowish. These
females consequently, as far as the colora-
tion of the abdomen and of the tarsi is con-
cerned, resemble the female from southern
Russia described on p. 81, Monog. Gomph.
Dimensions.—-Abdomen $37.5 mm., 9 37-
39. Hind wing ¢33-34, 9 35-87.

From spinicornis Selys (Bull. Acad. Roy.

AN

Se shed of the Belg.—2-xlvi, p. 437, 1878) described from

inferior abdominal ap- a single female, from the mountains north

ae ge dag of Pekin, these females differ by the absence

x15. of a black line on the fronto-nasal suture, the
predominant color of the vertex blackish, the “horns” of the occi-
put bearing denticles as in serpentinus, not a single short spine, the
absence of the black median dorsal thoracic stripes, the isolated
position of the black antehumeral stripe.

From 0. assimilis Schneider (Selys in Monogr. Gomph., p. 81,
1857), from Asia Minor, known from two males, these males differ

152 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

by the entirely yellow lips and nasus, the rear of the head mostly
yellow as in serpen-
tinus, the absence of
the median and the
isolated position of
the antehumeral
stripes on the thoracic
dorsum; a mere black

Occi € Ophi ag we h line only, no band,
eciput of Ophiogomphus reductus n. sp. 9 toshow ‘

its two processes (“horns”). ME margins of the 02 the second lateral
eyes. x 25. thoracic suture, no

intermediate band; the dorsal yellow spots on 3-6 longer and
rounded at their hind ends.

Subfamily CORDULEGASTERINZ.

5. Cordulegaster bidentatus Selys.

Selys, Ann. Soc. Ent. France (2) i, p. 109, 1843. Amn. Soc. Ent. Belg.,
xxxi, p. 34, 1887.

One male, “ below 5,000 f.”, agrees with bidentatus in its append-
ages (very nearly), in the number of cells (three) in the anal tri-
angle, and in those color differences which distinguish bidentatus
from insignis. It differs from bidentatus in having an apical infe-
rior yellow spot on abdominal segment 1, and a twin apical yellow
spot on the dorsum of 4—6, a yellow spot on each side of the apex of
7-9, and a basal yellow spot on each side of 10; all the yellow spots
on the abdomen are larger than in bidentatus. Abdomen 55 mm.,
hind wing 46. The most eastern record for bidentatus hitherto ap-
pears to be Asia Minor.

Subfamily LIBELLULINA.

6. Pantala flavescens Fabricius.

Two females, “ below 5,000 f.”

7. Libellula quadrimaculata L,

Four males, four females “ below 5,000 f.”

Only in three of these, all females, does the black basal spot of
the hind wings extend into the triangle, and even in these three it
does not completely fill the triangle. These females and one male
may be referred to the variety prenubila, although the brown cloud
below the pterostigma is in no case intense. One of these females is
also interesting in that it approaches basilinea McLach. (Ann. Mag.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 153

Nat. Hist. [6] xiii, p. 430, 1894), as on the front wings a dark-brown
streak occurs in the submedian space from the cross-vein almost to
the distal end, and there is a small, separate brown spot in the same
space on the basal side of the same cross-vein ; in the subcostal space
of the same wings there are, between some of the antecubitals, small
pale brown spots in the midst of the yellow of the anterior margin.
This yellow extends to the pterostigma in all but two males. The
ventral abdominal spots of basilinea are not present.

Recorded from Turkestan (Brauer), Persiaand Yarkand (Selys).

8. Orthetrum cancellatum L.

Five males, nine females, “ below 5,000 f.”
Recorded from the eastern side of the Caspian and from Persia

(Selys).
9. Orthetrum brunneum Fonse,

Five males, three females, “below 5000 f.’; two females ‘ 5—
10,000 f.” Not distinguishable from European specimens, with which
I have carefully compared them, and certainly different from gracile
(Albarda) Selys and Ramburii Selys. One female has the discoidal
triangle of both hind wings crossed by one vein, but I can find noth-
ing to indicate that it is of a different species.

Abdomen ¢ 27-28, 927-28. Hind wing $34-35, 9 34-35.

Recorded from Turkestan (Brauer) and Persia (Selys).

10. Orthetrum hyalinum Kirby (7)

O. hk. Kirby, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1886, p. 326, pl. xxxiii, figs. 5, 6.

One female, “ below 5,000 f.,” is probably this species, although it
is larger (total length 38 mm., abdomen 25, hind wing 29, alar
expanse 62), and the thorax is pale olive instead of reddish-brown,
which may not, however, indicate more than that this individual is
more immature.

11. Orthetrum triangulare Selys.

Libella t. Selys, Mittheil. zool. Mus, Dresden, iii, p. 314, 1878.

Two males, “ below 5,000 f.” agree with the very brief diagnosis.
Their size is rather large; abdomen 31.5, hind wing 38 mm,

12. Crocothemis erythrea Brullé.

Six males, five females “5-10,000 f.”; six males, five females
“ below 5,000 f.” Abdomen ¢21-23.5, 9 21-22 mm., hind wing 2
25-27.5, 9 25-29. In seven males and eight females, and on one side

11

154 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

only of one male and one female, the sectors of the triangle are a
little separated at their origin.
Previously known from Turkestan (Selys).

18. Sympetrum (or Diplax) vulgatum L.

One male, “ 5-10,000 f.”, has the black longitudinal line on each
side of the third abdominal segment, the basal line of the frons pro-
longed inferiorly in front of the eyes, hamules as described by Baron
de Selys (Ann. Soe. Ent. Belg., xxxi, p.10). It is of the typical
form of vulgatum and not of the race decolorata Selys.

14. Sympetrum (Diplax) Fonscolombii Selys.

One male, two females “ 5-10,000 f.”; one female “ below 5,000
f”’ In the male, which is semi-adult, the yellow on the base of the
hind wings reaches out in the submedian space almost to the tri-
angle and more than half way back toward the hind margin. In
the females the extent of this yellow is smaller and like that of
European examples.

Previously known from Turkestan, and Murree in N. W. India.
Mr. C. C. Adams and Prof. M. J. Elrod have sent me both sexes
from the plateau of the Nilgiris, 7,500 ft., taken in August and
September, 1896.

15. Sympetrum (Diplax) meridionale Selys.

One female, ‘ below 5,000 f.” There isa greater extension of
yellowish coloring over the bases of the wings than is usual in Euro-
pean individuals of this species, but the other characters agree.

Baron de Selys refers to this species a female from “les montagnes
de l’Inde.” (Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., xxviii, p. 36, 1884).

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 155

Marcu 1,
Mr. CHarvLes Morris in the Chair.

Twenty-eight persons present.

A paper entitled “The Muscidae collected by Dr. Donaldson
Smith in Somali Land,’ by Garry de N. Hough, M. D., was pre-
sented for publication.

Marce 8.
The President, SamueL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.

Twenty-one persons present.

A paper entitled “ A new Grasshopper Mouse from New Mexico,”
by Samuel N. Rhoads, was presented for publication.

Marca 15.
Mr. CHaries Morris, in the Chair.
Twenty-seven persons present.

A paper entitled, “‘ Notes on the Fossil Walrus of Eastern North
America,” by Samuel N. Rhoads, was presented for publication.

The death of William M. Singerly, a member, was announced.

Marcu 22.
The President, Samurt G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair.

Eighty persons present.

The death of Thomas McKean, a member, was announced.

Mr. Witmer Stone made a communication on the breeding-
habits of some birds of Eastern Pennsylvania, illustrated by beauti-
ful lantern views taken by Messrs William L. Whitaker and
William L. Baily. (No abstract).

Marcu 29,
Mr. Cuarves Morris, in the Chair,
Twelve persons present.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—

156 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898..
“Birds observed in Central California in the summer of 1898,”
by John Van Denburgh.

“ Revision of the North American Slugs: Binneya, Hemphillia,
Hesperarion, Prophysaon and Anadenulus,” by Henry A. Pilsbry
and E. G. Vanaita. .

Mr. Carroll Smyth was elected a member.
The following were ordered to be printed :—

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 157

DIPTERA COLLECTED BY DR. A. DONALDSON SMITH IN SOMALILAND,
EASTERN AFRICA.

BY CHAS. W. JOHNSON.

The Diptera described and listed in this and the following paper
by Dr. Garry de N. Hough, were collected by Dr. Smith on his ex-
pedition through Somaliland from Berbera to Lake Rudolf, thence
southeast to the coast.’ All of the specimens have been presented
to the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia by Dr. Smith.

In studying this material I have had to depend entirely on de-
scriptions, and one important paper I have been unable to consult,
so that a few species have had to be set aside for the present. For
any error, therefore, that may occur in their identification, I wish to
beg kind indulgence. I also wish to express my sincere thanks to
Dr. Hough for his kindness in working up the Muscide.

CULICID 4.
Culex sp.
Two specimens, Sheikh Husein, Oct. 7th. Too imperfect for deter-

mination.
STRATIOMYIDZ.

Sternobrithes tumidus Loew.
Sternobrithes tumidus Loew, Oefers. Kongl. Akad. Forhand., 264, 1856.

One specimen, Sheikh Husein, October 3, 1894.
TABANIDZ.

Pangonia obesa Walker.

Pangonia obesa Walker. Insecta Saund, I, 14.

Five specimens 9 collected at Sheikh Husein, Sept. 20, 1894,
agree with Walker’s description.
Pangonia appendiculata Macquart.

Pangonia appendiculata Macq. Dipt. Exot. I, 97, Pl. 13, fig. 2.
? Pangonia varicolor Wied. Auss. Zweifl., I, 100.

One specimen ( 2), Abula, November 25, 1884.

Chrysops stigmaticalis Loew.
Chrysops stigmaticalis Loew. Dipt.-Faun. Ind-Afri. (101), 29, 1860;
Oefers. Kongl. Akad. Forhand., 338, 1857.

One specimen ( 9 ), Sheik Mahomet, November 9, 1894.

aq See Dr. Smith's article and maps, in The Geographical Journal for August
and September, 1896.

158 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Tabanus biguttatus Wiedemann.
Tabanus biguttatus Wied. Auss. Zweifl., IT, 623, 20.
Tabanus tr ipunctifera Walk. Zool., VIL, Append. XCV ; List, etc., pt. V,

997

wale

Tabanus cerebes Walk. List, ete , pt. I, 149.

Tabanus noctis Walk. Insecta Saund. I, 42.

Tabanus cilipes Macq. Dipt. Exot., I, 1, 120.

One specimen (¢? ), Mt. Kulol, August 27, 1895. This seems to
be a widely distributed and variable species. The male has two
white spots on the third and fourth segments of the abdomen. Iam
indebted in part to Mr. E. E. Austen of the British Museum for the
above synonymy.

Tabanus maculatissimus Macquart.

Tabanus maculatissimus Macq. Dipt. Exot, I, 1,121, Tab. 17, f. 2; Walker
List, etc., V, 227.

One specimen, Sheikh Husein, October 15, 1894.

Hematopota albihirta Karsh.
Hematopota albihirta Karsh, Berl. Ent. Zeit., 1887, 371, Taf. IV, fig. 4.
One specimen, December 12, 1894.

Hematopota maculiplena Karsh.

Hematopota maculiplena Karsh, Berl. Ent. Zeit., 1887, 371, Tab. IV,
fig. 5.

Two specimens, El] Dere, March 22, 1895. The specimens are
badly broken, but agree well with the description of this species.
ASILIDZA.
Hoplistomera serripes Fabr.
Laphria serripes Fabr. Syst. Antl., 159, 16.

Laphria maculipennis Macq. Hist. Nat. Boe I, 285, 22.
Hoplistomera serripes Macq. Dipt. Exot, I, 2, 60.

One specimen, near Lake Stefanie, June 5, 1895.
Laxenecera zonata Loew.

Laphria zonata Loew. Bericht des Konig]. Preuss. Akad. d. Wissensch. zu
Berl. 1852, 659.

Laxenecera zonata Loew. Karsch, Berl. Ent. Zeit., XX XI, 374, 1887.

Four specimens, Sheikh Husein, September 29-30, 1894.

Laxenecera sp.

One specimen, Sheikh Mahomed, November 6, 1894.
BOMBYCIDA.

Exoprosopa suffusa Klug.

Anthrax suffusa Klug. Ehrenberg, Sym. Phys. (Ins. Afr. Boreal. et Asia
occident.). 12, Tab. X XX, fig. 2, 1832.

Two specimens, Sheikh Hausin, September 28-28, 1894. This
species is beautifully figured in the work referred to. It is not the

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 159

Anthrax suffusa Walker, (List, ete., pt. II, 251), described without
habitat. As it is undoubtedly an Ezoprosopa, the two names can
remain. It is allied to Anthrax vespertilioni Meig.

Eurycarenus laticeps Loew.

Bombylius laticeps Loew, Bericht. der Konigl. Preuss. Akad. d. Wissensch.
Berl., 659, 1852; Peters, Natur. Reise nach Mossambique, Insect., 14, 1862.
LEurycarenus laticeps Loew.

One specimen, Shiekh Husein, September 26, 1894. The vena-
tion is exactly like that figured by Loew, but the pile is more or less
rubbed from the abdomen.

Bombylius sp.
One specimen, December 3, 1894. Too much injured to determine.

SYRPHIDZ.

Melanostoma annulipes Macquart.

Syrphus annulipes Macq. _Dipt. Exot, I, pt. 2, 102, pl. 17, fig. 4, 1842;
Bigot, Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., VII, 3 ser. 486, pl. 12, fig. 5, 1859.

Eleven specimens, Sheikh Husein, Sept. 29th, Oct. 7th, and Gin-
neer Noy. 14th.

Syrphus sp.

Two specimens, Sheikh Husein, September 29th, and October 8,
1894.

Asarkina sp.
One specimen, Sheikh Husein, September 20, 1894.

Rhingia c#rulescens Loew.

Rhingia cerulescens Loew. Dipt. Fauna Sud-Afri. (101) 29, 1860; Oefers.
Kongl. Akad. Forhand., 377, 14, 1857.

Three specimens, Sheikh Husein, September 29th, and October 1,
1894.

MEGATRIGON n. gen.

Head hemispherical, slightly wider than the thorax, front and
vertex of nearly uniform width, the three ocelli widely separated, the
two upper ones being situated on the vertical orbits near the angles of
the eyes, the three being widely equidistant, eyes hairy, occiput prom-
inent, third joint of the antennz ovate as long as the first and second
taken together, arista inserted near the base and slightly longer
than the third joint. Thorax as wide as long, anterior margin
straight, posterior portion rounded. Scutellum but slightly arched
and of a nearly equal width. Abdomen convex, oblong, slightly
tapering, about twice the length of the thorax.

160 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Posterior femora greatly thickened, outer portion on the under
side, armed with two ridges having teeth-like projections (Fig. 1) in
the groove between these ridges, the tibia lies when the fly is at rest,
posterior tibize arcuated and the outer half thickened, first joint of
the posterior tarsi dilated and as long as all the other joints. Wings
as shown in Fig. 2. Type M. sexfasciatus.

Megatrigon sexfasciatus n. sp.

2 .—Length 9mm. Face, front and vertex granulose, (except a
narrow longitudinal space on the front,) black, shining, with long
whitish pile on the face and front yellowish on the vertex, mouth
parts reddish, the two upper ocelli showing a red metallic lustre
in certain light; posterior and inferior orbits with a dense yellow
pubescence, eyes sparsely covered with white hairs. Antennee
and aristse black, base of the aristze and second joint of the antennze
reddish. Thorax black, shining, granulose, with
yellowish-white pile, humeri reddish, a dense yellow
pubescence forms three dorsal stripes, and a continuous
margin extending from the anterior end of the outer
dorsal stripes, the latter only reach the suture, while
the middle stripe almost reaches the posterior margin,
pleurz with a dense yellowish pubescence and long
whitish pile, posterior angle reddish with bright

Fig. 1. yellow pile, scutellum black with a yellow posterior
margin and long yellowish-white pile. Abdomen convex, black,
granulose, with sparse yellowish-white pile and six transverse bands
of dense yellowish pubescence arranged as follows: An arcuate
band on the second segment extends from the posterior angles to
the middle where it is very narrowly interrupted ; third, with a basal
and a slightly arcuated middle band; fourth
with a basal, middle, and posterior band, the
middle one slightly curved, lateral margins
of the third and fourth segments yellow, pos-
terior part of the first segments shining and
the posterior margin of the fifth yellow.
Venter concave, brown with dense grayish pubescence and sparse
white pile, lateral margins blackish. Femora black, with long whit-
ish hairs, coxze brown, anterior and middle tibize and tarsi red
covered with yellowish hairs, under side of the tibize near the outer
end with a brownish band. Groove on the under side of the outer
portion of the posterior femur into which the basal half of the tibia

Fig. 2.

*

?
"
a

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 161

lies when at rest, shining, ridges with five teeth-like projections,
posterior tibize black, pile yellowish, base of the tibize and tarsi red.
Wing hyaline, with a slight tinge of brown, veins dark brown.
Alule and halteres bright yallew:

One specimen, Sheikh Husein, October 10, 1894.

ACROCERIDZ.
Pterodontia Smithi n. sp.

Length 10 mm. Head black, with yellow and brownish pile.
Antenne yellow. Thorax yellow thickly cover with long yellowish
pile, a dorsal stripe about the width of the head extends to nearly
opposite the base of the wings where it expands into a large dis-
coidal spot occupying the entire dorsal portion, a spot on the ante-
alar protuberance, lower portion of the pleur and the sternum, black.
Scutellum yellow with brown and yellowish pile and a round central
black spot. Abdomen tricolor, with brown and yellowish pile; the
irregular black dorsal stripe and the dark and light yellow trans-
verse bands that extend on either side and divide the segments into
two equal parts may be described as follows: The first segment is
covered by the seutellum and visible only on the side, is black with
a lateral and posterior margin of light yellow; second, the black of
the dorsal stripe occupies fully one-half of the anterior and nearly
one-third of the posterior half of the segment, between the anterior
portion of the central stripes and the subtriangular black markings
at the anterior angles, is a small dark yellow spot representing the
first dark yellow band, the light yellow posterior band extending on
each side of the central marking is narrowly contracted at the lateral
margin; third, anterior half of the central stripe the same width as
the posterior half of that on the preceding segment, posterior half
contracted to about one-third that of the anterior portion, the black
lateral markings at the anterior angles quadrate, the lateral portions
of the light yellow band but slightly contracted ; fourth, the anterior
portion of the central stripe somewhat narrower at the anterior mar-
gin than at the middle or anterior margin of the light yellow band,
posterior half one-third the width of the anterior portion and not
quite or very narrowly touching the posterior edge of the segment,
lateral markings quadrate, light yellow band less contracted than on
the third segment; fifth segment similar to the fourth, except that
the central stripe does not reach the posterior margin, in one spec-
imen the central and lateral markings are narrowly connected, thus
dividing the dark and light yellow bands; sixth segment black with

162 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

a yellow spot at the posterior angles, in one specimen the latter char-
acter is wanting. Venter yellowish, first and sixth segments brown-
ish, in one specimen the base of all the other segments is slightly
tinged with brown. Legs yellow with yellow pile, cox and the
under side of the femora more or less tinged with brown, tips of the
claws black. Wings hyaline, veins yellow.

Two specimens, Crorgora, September 13, 1894. This species is
readily distinguished from those already described by its lateral
quadrate abdominal markings.

ANTHOMYIDS.
Phorbia fusiceps Zett.

One specimen, Sheikh Mahomed, November 11, 1894.

Anthomyia abyssinica Jennick.

Anthomyia abyssinica Jennick. Neues Exot. Dipt., Abhandl. d. Senckenb.
Ges., VI, 372.

Two specimens, Sheikh Husein, October 3rd; Sheikh Mahomed,
November 10, 1894.

Authomyiasp.

Three specimens, Sheikh Husein, October 3, 1894.
Anthomyia sp.

One specimen, Sheikh Husein, October 3, 1894.
Caricea marginipennis n. sp.

Length 3 mm. Front, vertex and occiput bluish-gray, face and a
ridge surrounding the base of the antennz yellow, two slightly are-
uate black lines extend from the vertical angles near the eyes, to the
yellow ridge above the antennz, space between the two lines less
bluish, on each of the vertical and frontal orbits are three minute
black points; antennze yellow. Thorax bluish-gray with two rows
of four minute black points from each of which rises a small bristle,
there are also numerous smaller ones on the side of the dorsum and
on the pleure, scutellum bluish-gray with two black bristles. Abdo-
meu of the same color with two small black dots on the third, fourth
and fifth segments. Legs yellow. Wings with a brownish tinge,
and a wide whitish-hyaline posterior margin commencing near the
second longitudinal vein.

Two specimens, Sheikh Mahomed, October 11, and Ginea, Nov-
ember 14, 1894. )

Anaphalantus politus n. sp.

Length 33 mm. Front and vertex black, with whitish bloom,
frontal orbits with silvery pubescence each with three shining black

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 163

spots, the upper one at the junction of the front and vertex; face
light yellow, palpi yellow, proboscis black, occiput black, shining ;
antenne, first and second joint and arista yellow, third joint black-
ish, and longer than the first and second taken together. Thorax
black with a hoary bloom which is more dense on the pleurz and also
forms a wide dorsal stripe, dorsum with numerous black bristles,
humeri shining, scutellum black with two lateral and two very long
apical bristles. _ Abdomen black, disc and a narrow dorsal line on
the last segment hoary, the lateral portion of the segments shining
black, venter hoary. Legs yellow with black hairs, outer half of
the anterior tibis and the first joint of the tarsi black, with long
dense black hairs, tips of the posterior femora brownish. Wings
hyaline, iridescent in certain lights, veins yellow.

One specimen, Sheikh Husein, October 3, 1894.

This species may be distinguished from Anaphalantus pennatus
Loew, by the third joint of the antennz being black, and the outer
half of the tibize only, being black.

TRYPETIDZ.

Trypeta angusta Loew.
Trypeta angusta Loew, Berl. Entom. Zeit., 1861,271, Taf. II, fig. 9.
One specimen, Sheikh Husein, October 11, 1894.

SEPSIDZs.
Sepsis costalis n. sp.

Length 5mm. Face and cheeks brown; front, vertex and occi-
put black. Antennz reddish-brown, proboscis black. Thorax and
abdomen black, opaque. Legs entirely black. Wings hyaline,
except the costal cell which is entirely black.

Two specimens, Sheikh Husein, October 3, 1894.

Sepsis sp.
Two specimens, Sheikh Husein, October 3rd; Ginea, November

14, 1894.
DIOPSIDZ.

Diopsis somaliensis n. sp.

Length 7 mm. Head red, shining, with very sparse white hairs,
mouth parts and lateral prolongations that form the eye-stalks,
brownish, the enlarged portion that forms
the base of the eye, dark brown, antenne
reddish, ariste brown.

Thorax black with a very short white
pubescence, scutellum black, spines yellow-
ish, tips of the spines brown, balters light

164 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

yellow. Abdomen black, shining, hypopygium reddish, venter
brownish, legs dark yellow, anterior tibize and all except the basal
joint of the anterior tarsi brownish. Wings hyaline slightly tinged
with brown, veins black, a black ocellate spot above and a > shaped
marking below, near the tip of the third longitudinal vein as shown
in Fig. 3.

Two specimens, near Lake Abaya, May 9, 1895.
OSCINIDA.

Elachiptera femorata n. sp.

Length 3mm. Head brownish, lower portion of the face and
front more or less yellowish, orbits in certain lights are silvery, the
ocellar triangle shining, the lower portion greatly attenuate and
almost reaching the base of the antenne, under side of the antennze
red, upper side and sete dark brown. Thorax brown, with three
black stripes and covered with a grayish pubescence, which also
forms a short prominent line in the center of the anterior portion
of the black dorsal stripe, pleurse brownish, scutellum blackish.
Abdomen black, with a narrow yellowish-white posterior margin to
all the segments, venter brownish. Femora and tibie reddish, tarsi
yellow, posterior femora somewhat thickened. Wings hyaline, veins
dark-brown.

Three specimens, Ginea, November 14th, and Sheikh Mahomed,
October 11, 1894.

Chlorops sp.
One specimen, Sheikh Husein, October 3, 1894.

HIPPOBOSCID.

Hippobosca camelina (Savg.) Leach.

Lipposca camelina Savigny mss. Leach, Eprob. Ins., Wern. Mem., II, 556.
Tab. XXVII, figs. 11-14, 1817; Rondani, Ann. Mus. Civ. Storia Nat. Gen-
ova, XII, 165, 1878.

One specimen, Berbera, July 5, 1894.

Ornithomyia nigricans Leach.

Ornithomyia nigricans Leach. Eprob. Ins. Wern. Mem., II, 10. Tab.
XXVII, figs. 7-10, 1817; Wied. Auss. Zw., 11, 609, 3; v. d. Wulp, Dipt.
Sum. Exp. 57,1; v Réder, Entom. Nachr., XIX, 236, 29.

Two specimens, Dada, November 21, 1894. These specimens
agree with the description.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 165

THE MUSCIDZ COLLECTED BY DR. A. DONALDSON SMITH IN SOMALI
LAND.

BY GARRY DE N. HOUGH, M. D.

One cannot offer for publication « paper on Muscide in which
species are described as new without a certain amount of misgiving.
So many descriptions of Muscids have been published that I fear I
may have overlooked some, and that I may have added to the
already too long list of synonyms. I can only say that I have con-
scientiously tried to avoid this. My descriptions are Jong, but the
resemblances between the Muscide are so close, that it is essential
to describe new species at length if they are ever to be recognized
by subsequent students. If any of the species described as new are
already known, I shall be very glad to be informed of it and to
publish the synonymy.

Considerable space has been given to the bristles of the head,
and, as I have felt obliged to introduce some new names, my de-
scriptions must be prefaced by a few remarks on these bristles.

Bristles of the Head.—The central feature of the muscid face is
the frontal suture, which, taken as a whole, has the shape of an in-
verted U,the arms making with one another more or less of an
angle.

If we draw a line across the face tangent to the convexity of this
suture, then the part of the face dorsad of this line and between the
eyes is the front. The front is distinetly divided into three parts,
a median (the frontal vitta), and two lateral (the geno vertical
plates). The boundary lines between the vitta and the geno-verti-
cal plates are marked by rows of bristles (usually one row on each
side of the vitta), which are inserted in a dorso-ventral line from a
point on a level with the anterior ocellus to the ventral border of
the front. These are the frontal bristles. They are in two groups
which I call the ascending frontal and the trans-frontal. The
ascending frontal, from one to four in number, are the most dorsad
of the frontal bristles. If more than one is present, the most dor-
sad is the largest, and each succeeding one is smaller (usually much
smaller) than its dorsal neighbor. They are curved dorsad, caudad
and more or less laterad, and are parallel to one another.

166 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

The trans-frontal vary in number in different species, in the two
sexes of the same species and even in different individuals of the
same sex. In the female they are directed mesad and cephalad
across the frontal vitta and more or less of them may decussate with
their fellows of the opposite side. In the male they are generally
more numerous than in the corresponding female, and they are
directed cephalad with (usually) a curve dorsad or ventrad. As
in the female they may decussate, but as a rule they do not.

Each geno-vertical plate is continued over the vertex to the occi-
pital surface in the form of a little ridge. This ridge is bounded
laterad by a suture which begins at the dorso-mesal angle of the eye,
runs to the vertex, over the vertex to the occipital surface of the
head, and then in a ventro-mesal direction as far as the great cen-
tral foramen. About half way between the vertex and the great
foramen the little ridge bifurcates. The lateral branch continues
in about the same direction as the main ridge, while the mesal branch
runs more or less directly mesad and joins its fellow of the opposite
side; thus by these two little ridges and their mesal branches a tri-
angular area is marked out at the dorso-central part of the occiput.
At the very beginning of each of these little ridges just mentioned,
right on the vertex, stands a bristle which is called the inner verti-
cal, and down a little way on each ridge just before it bifurcates
stands another which I propose to call the occipito-central. Both
of these bristles are present in every species that I have so far had
the opportunity of examining. They vary in size in different spe-
cies and in the two sexes of the same species. The inner vertical
project dorsad with more or less of a curve caudad and mesad, so
that they sometimes decussate a little and are almost always con-
vergent. The amount of convergence varies even in individuals of
the same species and sex. The occipito-central project dorsad and
mesad sometimes with a curve, sometimes without a curve, some-
times decussating a little with one another, sometimes apparently
decussating with a bristle called the post-vertical, which will be de-
scribed later.

On the vertex, just laterad the beginning of the little ridge and
the inner vertical bristle, stands a bristle which is called the outer
vertical. This bristle varies much in size in different species and in
the two sexes of the samespecies. Itis larger in the female than in
the male, and is absent in the males of some species although pres-
ent in their females.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 167

A little caudad, ventrad and laterad of the outer vertical, on the
occipital surface of the head, there is sometimes a small bristle
which curves dorsad, mesad and a trifle cephalad, apparently decus-
sating with the outer vertical. I call this the occipito-lateral.

Parallel to and at a variable distance caudad from the occipital
margin of the eye, is a row of bristles called the cilia of the posterior
orbit. They begin dorsad very near the outer vertical bristle but
distinctly caudad of it and also very near but cephalad of the occi-
pito-lateral. The members of the dorsal part of this row are com-
monly larger and more perfectly aligned than the members of the
members of the ventral portion, and there is much difference in their
size and correctness of alignment in different species as well as in
the distance to which they can be traced ventrad as a distinct row.
Frequently there are one or more rows of exceedingly small bristles
intercalated between the cilia of the posterior orbit and the occi-
pital margin of the eye. The posterior orbit is the space between
the cilia of the posterior orbit and the occipital margin of the eye ;
it is usually narrower in the male than in the female, and may be
absent.

I spoke above of a triangular area marked out at the dorso-cen-
tral part of the occipital surface of the head by the two little ridges
and their mesal branches. This triangle and the more or less dis-
tinct eminence on which the ocelli are situated, are continuous with
one another over the vertex and form a differentiated portion which
is occupied by a group of bristles which may be called the ocellar
group. Among them we must distinguish the greater ocellar (ocel-
lar pair of Baron Osten-Sacken), and the lesser ocellar.

The greater ocellar is a pair of bristles usually easily distinguish-
able by their larger size, which are inserted between the anterior
- and posterior ocelli. They vary in size, direction and curvature in
different species and in the two sexes of the same species, and in
different individuals (especially males) of the same species. They
are generally parallel to the lesser ocellar bristles and sometimes
differ from the latter in size by a very small amount.

The lesser ocellar are more numerous, from three to twelve pairs,
and are usually inserted in two parallel lines (sometimes in four)
which begin very close to the insertion of the greater ocellar and
extend caudad a variable distance, sometimes about half way to an
imaginary line joining the insertions of the inner vertical bristles,
sometimes beyond this line to the occipital surface of the head.

168 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Usually the most caudal pair of lesser ocellar is somewhat larger
than the rest, sometimes much larger, and it has received the spe-
cial name post-vertical pair. When it is much larger and at the
same time is separated by quite a space from the next pair (as im
the females of Myospila, Muscina and Graphomyia) the post-verti-
cal really seem to be an independent pair of bristles, but when (as.

in Musca and Morellia) they are hardly distinguishable in size, are

as near the next pair as that pair is to the next in the series, and
still more when we find similar bristles even caudad of the post-
verticals themselves it is clear that they belong to the lesser ocellar
series.

In some species we can see, in the middle of the frontal vitta, a
more or less distinctly differentiated dorso-ventral stripe. The ven-
tral end of this stripe is not much above the ventral end of the
frontal vitta itself. Dorsad it broadens out and then divides inte
two branches, one of which passes on each side of the ocellar emi-
nence to the vertex. Inserted on the vitta some little distance
below the anterior ocellus and close to this stripe (over which they
decussate) we find in some species a pair of rather small bristles
which I call the preocellar.

Bristles which are inserted on the geno-vertical plate are called
orbital.

On each side of the face at the ventral end of the arm of the
frontal suture, begins what is called the transverse impression of the
face. This is at first a rather broad shallow depression. It passes
almost horizontally laterad (becoming narrower as it proceeds) ven-
trad of the eye, and can be readily traced as far as the ventro-cau-
dal angle of the eye where it usually seems to end. Sometimes,

however, it can be seen to be continuous with a suture of the oeci-

put which runs from the latero-ventral angle of the great foramen
toward and sometimes to the ventro-caudal angle of the eye.

That part of the side of the face which is dorsad the transverse
impression, laterad of the arm of the frontal suture and mesad
of the eye is called by the German authors the wange. For this, I
suggest the word gena, for reasons which will appear later. The
gena is continuous dorsad with the geno-vertical plate.

Ventrad of the transverse impression and ventrad of the eye, ex-

tending ventrad to the edge of the mouth opening, cephalad to the —

vibrissal ridge, and continuing caudad on the occiput to the great
foramen, is the part which the German authors call the Backe-
For this I suggest the word bucca.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 169

In English we have but one word “ cheek” for the two German
words Wange aud Backe. The Wange is dorsad of the Backe, In
Latin the word “ gena”’ refers rather to the upper part of the cheek,
the word “bucca” to the lower part. For these reasons and be-
cause the words bucca and Backe are so nearly alike, it has seemed
to me wise to translate Wange by gena and Backe by bucca. The
bucca is sometimes clearly defined, cephalad, from the vibrissal
ridge by a distinct steep edge (I have never been able to see a
suture here), at other times it is not so defined and the line of sepa-
ration is an imaginary one, more or less clearly indicated by dif-
ferences in the characters of the hairs and bristles of the bueca and
the vibrissal ridge. That portion of the bucca which is on the occi-
pital surface is bounded by distinct sutures. The whole bucca is
hairy or bristly, the hairs and bristles varying in number and size
in different species.

Mesad of the arms of the frontal suture, constituting the lateral
boundaries of the facial fossa, are two distinct ridges, one on each
side of the face. These are the vibrissal ridges, so-called because on
them the stout bristles called vibrissae are inserted. They were
called the facialia by Desvoidy, by Walker and by Baron Osten-
Sacken, but the term used by Professor Brauer, “ Vibrissenleisten,”
meaning vibrissal ridges, is so much more appropriate, that I prefer
to sacrifice priority to good sense. If we follow the vibrissal ridge
dorsad we find that it diminishes in width and gradually disappears-
from view under the gena. If we follow it ventrad we find that it
gradually increases in width, being largest at a point called the
vibrissal angle, where the largest of the vibrisse is inserted. The
position of the vibrissal angle with relation to the edge of the mouth-
opening is not the same in all genera, being sometimes very close to
it and sometimes rather remote. In all the genera to be considered
in this paper, however, except Pol/enia and Paracompsomyia, the
two are very close together. Dorsad of the vibrissal angle we
usually find one or more vibrissee which are much smaller than the
one inserted at the angle. Dorsad of the smaller vibrisse the ridge
is usually more or less thickly beset with minute bristles as far as
or beyond the ventral end of the arm of the frontal suture. Ven-
trad of the angle there are usually a few vibrisse.

The bristles of the legs require also a few words of introduction.
These bristles have not as yet received the study that they deserve
in the Muscidw. I believe there is a typical arrangement of these

12

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

-.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 171

bristles subject, of course, to great variation but easily recognizable.
When the limbs of a Muscid are in their natural position it will at
once be seen that so far as the fore and hind Jegs are concerned,
one surface is turned toward the median line of the body and one
away from it; these are the mesal and lateral surfaces respectively.
The lateral surfaces are provided with stouter and more numerous
bristles as would be expected if, as is supposed, the function of the
bristles is a protective one. The terms flexor and extensor need no
explanation. The anterior femur in cross section has the shape I,
1, and its bristles (at least the prominent ones) are in three rows,
each of which extends from base to apex. ‘Two of these rows are
near the extensor border, the one nearest that border being made
up of larger bristles than the other; the third row is very near the
flexor border; all three are on the lateral surface. The hind femur
is shaped very like the fore femur, and has on its lateral surface an
extensor row and a flexor row of bristles, corresponding to the row
nearest the extensor border and the flexor row of the lateral surface
of the fore femur; the mesal surface has also a flexor row, but its
members are smaller and less numerous than those of the flexor row
of the lateral surface. The middle femur is much less flattened
than the others, and in its natural position its surfaces are anterior
and posterior flexor and extensor; it has an anterior flexor and
posterior flexor row of bristles and also an anterior median and a
posterior median row. Asa rule the median rows are incomplete,
i.e., do not extend all the way from base to apex. The anterior
commonly ends half way from base to apex, the most apical mem-
bers of the row being the largest, the posterior often begins about
half way from base to apex, and extends thence to the apex, its
apical members being also the largest, and usually the apical three
or four form a transverse group of considerable prominence. The
tibize are, in cross section, almost triangular with a very well marked
extensor border and with flexor, mesal and lateral (middle tibia
with flexor, anterior and posterior) surfaces. The same difference
in size and number of bristles that was noted in the case of the
mesal and lateral surfaces of the fore and hind femora is noticeable
in the corresponding tibis, but is not so pronounced. Each of
these surfaces has, ordinarily, a flexor and extensor row of bristles.
The middle tibia has also flexor and extensor rows of bristles on its
anterior and posterior surfaces, and it has, in some genera, a prom-
inent bristle on the flexor surface which does not occur (as far as

172 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898..

my observation extends) on either of the other tibie, Very often
the surfaces of the tibize have other rows besides the flexor and ex-
tensor, such are usually made up of minute bristles, except for the
terminal subapical member, but sometimes one or more of the mem-
bers are largely developed and in consequence an oblique row of
large bristles may appear on the tibia as in I, 2.

The apical bristles of the tibiae are remarkably constant in num-
ber, arrangement and relative size.

Although the number of specimens collected by Dr. Smith in the
group Muscidee (sens. strict.) is quite small, only thirty-eight, never-
theless the collection is very interesting, including eleven genera,
of which three are new, and thirteen species of which seven are
new.

Genus GLOSSINA.
Glossina longipennis Corti.

Two females taken August 19, 1894, and August 24, 1894.
They agree perfectly with Corti’s description, except that there are
no brown spots on the abdomen.

Genus IDIA.

Idia lunata Wied.

Three females taken September 29, 1894, October 2, 1894, and
November 10, 1894.

Genus COSMINA.
Cosmina sp. ?

Female, taken November 10, 1894. Too imperfect to identify or
describe.

Genus MUSCA.
Musca domestica L.

Female specimen, taken October 11,1894. This is a variety with
color and markings of abdomen somewhat like the male. The
ground color is a dull reddish-brown, on each of the first three seg-
ments there is a narrow, median, cephalo-caudal black stripe; the
whole of the ventral surface of all segments and the cephalic half
of the dorsal surface of the first segment are rather more yellow
than the remainder of the dorsal surface. In color of abdomen the
specimen reminds-me of a female specimen sent me by Dr. Wm. A.
Nason, in which the abdomen had the color and markings of the
male, Structurally the specimen is identical with domestica although
it has, to be sure, five dorso-central bristles behind the suture, but

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 173

this number occurs occasionally in otherwise normal specimens both
of domestica and corvina.

‘Musca corvina Fabr.

One male taken September 10, 1894.

Musca biseta nov. sp.

One male and four females, all taken March 10,1894. Very
much like domestica, from which it differs as follows:

Male.—Front about one-half as wide as in specimens of domestica
with the same width of head. Dorsum of first abdominal segment
entirely black.

Female.——Front of same width as that of specimens of domestica
with same width of head, but the frontal vitta is decidedly narrower
and its lateral borders less curved.

Both Sexes.—Smaller than the average sized domestica. (Geno-
vertical plates, gense, buccz and vibrissal ridges silvery white, with
scarcely a trace of the yellowish tinge which so often predominates
in domestica. Only two dorso-central bristles in front of the suture.
Bristles of the extenso-lateral row of the hind tibia equal or almost
equal. No prominent bristle in the extenso-mesal row of the hind
tibia.

Genus MORELLIA.
Morellia podagrica Loew.

Two males and one female taken March 10, 1894, and April 10,
1894. Agree perfectly with, but are smaller than, my European
specimens of this species.

Genus PSEUDOPYRELLIA.
Pseudopyrellia «p. ”

One male and one female taken March 10, 1894. This is a
new species. The specimens are too imperfect to describe fully.
The antennal arista has longer, more numerous and more delicate
hairs than cornicina (American and European specimens), and the
female has on the thorax, in front of the suture, a broad, median,
cephalo-caudal hoary stripe which fades out before the suture is
reached. The distinctness and brilliancy of this stripe vary with
the incidence of light. Of 100 American female specimens of corn-
icina examined not one has this stripe. The front of the male is
much narrower than in cornicina.

‘Pseudopyrellia nuda nov. sp.

Four females taken March 10, 1894, and September 29, 1894.
Length about 8 mm., of a brilliant metallic violet color, varying to
bronzy-green. Remarkably few and delicate macrochets.

174 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Width of head about 2.4 mm., of front about0.7 mm. Vitta occu-
pies about one-third of the front. The genze and the ventral quarter
or fifth of the geno-vertical plates are silvery-white or dead black,
according to the incidence of the light, the remainder of the geno-
vertical plates, the ocellar prominence and the dorsal half of the
posterior orbit are metallic violet or green ; the ventral half of the
posterior orbit is silvery white, dead black or with metallic reflect-
ions according to the incidence of the light; the buccze are dead
black or metallic violet according to the incidence of the light; the
vibrissal ridges are black with slight metallic reflections ; the frontal
vitta is dead black. The bristles of the vertex are as in cornicina ;
the hairs of the geno-vertical plates (there are no orbital bristles).
are as in cornicina, but much Jess numerous; the bristles of the
vibrissal ridges are yellowish-brown and arranged as in cornicina ;
the bucez are sparsely beset with delicate yellowish-brown hairs.
Palpi black or dark brown, dilated at the apices; proboscis black
or dark brown, with some metallic reflections. Antenna, 2d joint
0.2 mm., 3d joint 0.6 mm.; color brown, 3d joint lighter than 2d.
The whole thorax and abdomen has a finely punctate appearance
and is remarkably free from macrocheete, although quite as thickly
clothed with fine hairs as is usual in the Muscide.

Bristles of thorax.—I, 3a, 3b, 3c. Humeral, 1. Dorso-central, 4,
2 in front and 2 behind the suture, the posterior is of good size, the
rest are minute. Jntra-alar,1, very small. Supra-alar, 1, very
small. Post alar, 2, as usual, of good size. Notopleural, 2, as usual,
of good size. Sceutellar, apical and two marginal, of good size.
Tegule hyaline; Halteres pale yellow.

Legs—Femora black or very dark brown, with some metallic
reflections.. Tibise and tarsi black or very dark brown ; bristles of
legs much smaller and less numerous than usual in the Muscide.

Fore Leg.—Femur.—Only one extenso-lateral row of bristles, and
this is made up of fewer and smaller bristles than usual. Bristles.
of flexo-lateral row smaller and much fewer than usual. — Tibia.—
No prominent bristles except the preapical of extensor border.

Middle Leg—Femur.—The usual rows are present, but the indi-
vidual bristles are small, and there are but few of them. The only
respectable sized bristle of the femur is the preapical of the poste-
rior surface. Tibia.—Anterior surface no bristles at all. Posterior
surface.—One prominent bristle at the middle of the tibia and a
varying number of other much smaller bristles. Flexor surface—

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 175

One large bristle, about twice as large as the largest of the posterior
surface, at the junction of the third and apical fourths, inserted
close to the edge of the posterior surface.

Hind Leg.—Femur.—The usual rows present but of fewer and
smaller bristles than usual. Tibia—No prominent bristles save
one very delicate flexo-lateral.

Genus POLLENIA.

I might consider the species to be here described as the type of a
new genus in deference to the views of Professor Brauer as ] under-
stand them. He gives as one of the characters of Pollenia: ‘ two
orbital bristles in the female.” These specimens have from four to
six orbital bristles of large size inserted in a dorso-ventral line
roughly parallel to the insertions of the trans-frontal bristles and
laterad these large orbitals and parallel to them another row of very
small bristles. I am sure that the number of large orbital bristles
may vary in individuals of the same species and, therefore, am per-
sonally of the opinion that their number is not always a character
of generic value, e. g., in our common species of Morellia the num-
ber of large orbital bristles varies from two to seven, frequently dif-
fering on the two sides of the same specimen, Such being the case,
it seems to me that I must include this species in Pollenia since it
presents all the characters of that genus except the one mentioned.
The woolly hair is present only on the caudal border of the meso-
pleura, caudad the row of bristles which protect the root of the
wing, a condition often met with in our common P. rudis if the
specimen is not fresh. ‘The specimens look asif they had been wet.
Pollenia virido-cana nov. sp.

Three females taken September 5, 1895. Length about 7.5 mm. ;
width of head about 2.2 mm., of front about 0.75, of frontal vitta
about 0.25 mm. Looking at the head directly from in front, the
height of the eye is 1.3 mm., of the bucca 0.4mm. The highest
point of the vertex is a little higher (about 0.1 mm) than the high-
est point of the eye. The third antennal joint is twice as long as
the second.

The general color of the fly is a dirty greenish-white or gray. On
close examination it is seen that the ground color of the thorax and
abdomen is a metallic green, but that this is more or less concealed
by a thick, whitish, hoary coating. In some lights there seem to
be two dorso-central bands on the thorax which are free from this

176 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

coating. The anterior femora are of the same colors as the thorax,
the middle and posterior femora are dark brown, with here and
there suggestions of the green color and hoary coating. The tibize
and tarsi are a very dark brown. Tegule milky white. Halteres
brownish. The gens, geno-vertical plates, ocellar triangle, poste-
rior orbits, buccz and vibrissal ridges are dirty white with the usual
silky lustre, varying according to the incidence of the light to a pale
brown. Frontal vitta pale brown. Antenne: second joint pale
brown, third joint darker brown with hoary coating.

Bristles of Head.—Inner vertical, outer vertical, greater ocellar,
and ciliz of posterior orbit as in P. rudis. Lesser ocellar less
numerous than in rudis, only three or two pairs. Ascending frontal,
one, large. Transfrontal six to eight, mostly decussate over the nar-
row vitta. Orbital: a row of four to six large bristles, the inser-
tions of which are roughly parallel to the insertions of the trans-
frontals; a second row laterad the large ones and parallel to them
composed of very small bristles. Genz bare. Buccz with a series
of stout bristles along the edge of the mouth opening and with the
remainder of their surface sparsely beset with very fine hairs. Vi-
brissal ridges with a very few hairs dorsad the principal vibrissa
extending little or not at all dorsad the ventral end of the arm of
the frontal suture.

Bristles of Thorax, I, 5a, 5b, 5c. Humeral,3. Post-humeral, 2.
Dorso central, 6, two in front of and four behind the suture.
Acrostichals very small, one anterior and two posterior to the
suture. Jntra-alar, 4, one in front of and three behind the suture;
the most posterior is very small and a little mesad the line of the
others. Supra-alar, 3, of which, as usual, the middle one is much
the largest. Post-alar, 2, as usual. Notopleural, 2, as usual.

Seutellar.—A. small bristle of the jugum, an apical, two marginal
and a rather small discal.

Bristles of Abdomen.—As usual in Muscidee (sens. strict.).

The macrochaetz of the head and thorax and nearly all the minute
bristles and hairs of the thorax and abdomen appear to be inserted
at the centres of little black disc-shaped spots.

Bristles of the Legs.—Too imperfect to be described. The only
especially noteworthy feature that can be made out is a long, stout
bristle at the middle of the anterior surface of the middle femur.
This represents, apparently, the anterior median row of bristles of
the middle femur that is so universally present in the Muscidz (sens.
_ strict.) and is so well developed in P. rudis.

oo) tp 3 oS +e eee eS gage = 16

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 177

Genus LUCILIA.

Lucilia spinicosta nov. sp.

One male and one female, taken March 10, 1894. Length:
about 5.5 mm. (male) and 6.0 mm. (female). Width of head: male
2.0 mm. female 2.2 mm. Width of front: male 0.1 mm. at narrow-
est part, females 0.8 mm., vitta of female 0.5 mm. Third antennal
joint twice as long as the second.

Color—The usual metallic green of Lucilize with some hoary re-
flections. Legs yellowish-brown, femora much darker than tibize
and tarsi. Tegule: inferior dark smoky brown almost black, supe-
rior hyaline. Halteres yellowish. Genz, geno-vertical plate, pos-
terior orbit, bucce and vibrissal ridges silvery-white. Antenne:
second joint and base of third yellowish-brown, remainder of third
chestnut-brown. Palpi yellowish-brown. Wings hyaline, slightly
stained with yellowish-brown toward the costal border.

On the costal border of the wing, basad of but very close to the
end of the auxiliary vein, is a good sized spine. On both the upper
and under surfaces of the wing the third longitudinal vein bears a
number of minute spines, those beneath are four or five in number
and much more delicate than those above, those above are ten or
twelve in number and extend nearly to the small cross vein.

Bristles of the Head.—As usual in Luciliz.

Bristles of the Thorax.—l, 7a, 7b, 7c. Humeral,3. Post humeral,
2. Dorso-central, 5, 2 in front and 3 behind the suture. Intra alar,
4, one in front and 3 behind the suture. Acrostichal, 5, 2 in front
and 3 behind the suture. Presutural, notopleural, supra alar and
post alar as usual. Sceutellar, apical, 3 marginal and one discal.
Sternopleura and mesopleura as usual in Luciliz.

Bristles of Abdomen.—On hind border of second segment a num-
ber of small appressed bristles. On hind border of third segment
about twelve to fourteen larger and less appressed bristles. On the
fourth segment about twelve not at all appressed quite good sized
bristles both marginal and discal. In the male these bristles are
larger than in the female.

Bristles of the Legs—Fore Leg—Femur: as usual but dorsal
lateral extensor row has only about six members. ‘Tibia: in the
lateral extensor row there is in the male, but not in the female, a little
basad the junction of middle and apical thirds one rather prominent
bristle; in the lateral flexor row there is one large bristle at the
junction of the apical and middle thirds ; in the mesal extensor row

178 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

there are no prominent bristles; in the mesal flexor row there are
about four prominent bristles and these are larger in female than in
the male.

Middle Leg.—Femur: as usual. Tibia: the anterior surface, a
little apicad the middle, has one large bristle ; the posterior surface
has two rather smaller, one at the middle and one near the apical
end of the basal third ; flexor surface has one at about the junction.
of the middle and apical thirds.

Hind Leg.—Femur: as usual. Tibia: the lateral extensor row
has from three to five prominent bristles and the mesal extensor row
two, of which one is very near the middle and the other in the
basal quarter; no prominent bristles in either flexor row.

Genus PAROCHROMYIA.

The species to be here described would find its place in the table
of Brauer and Bergenstamm! between Ochromyia and Zonochroa.

The eyes of the male are very close together but not in contact.
and the male has no transfrontal bristles above the middle point be-
tween the base of the antenne and the vertex. Both sexes have
ocellar bristles. Both sexes have abdominal marochete at the sides
of each segment, on the hind margin of the third segment (appressed
and delicate), and on the fourth; the male also has some on the
hind margin of the second but they are more delicate than those of
the third. The female has one fair sized orbital bristle at the upper
part of the geno-vertical plate and, extending ventrad from this, a
series of very delicate, minute bristles or hairs which extend along
the whole of the geno-vertical plate and on the gena about half way
to the end of the arm of the frontal suture.

In Girschner’s system I should place this species among the Cal-
liphorinz with the description of which it agrees’ except that it has
three posterior intra-alar bristles. The sterno-pleural bristles have
the arrangement J-1. I can not make out the arrangement of the
second ventral segment.

Parochromyia varia nov. sp.

Three males and three females, taken March 10, 1894, Nov. 17,
1894, Sept. 3, 1895. A pale yellowish-brown fly about 6.5 to 7.5
mm. long. The wings are notably broad and extend a little
bey ond the apex of the abdomen.

1y orarbeiten zu einer Monogr., ete., Pars III, p. 90, (178).

? Separat-Abdruck aus der Pivetcdtcen Wochenschrift fiir Entomologie, Vol.
I, 1896, p. 14.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 179

Head.—The antennz, bucesx, gene, vibrissal ridges, facial fossa
and ventral third to half of the geno-vertical plate are all pale
yellowish-brown. The remainder of the geno-vertical plate is bluish
gray. The frontal vitta is brown with a slight reddish tinge. The
posterior orbit differs in the two sexes. In the female it is about
0.1 mm. wide, bluish-gray dorsally and shading off ventrally to pale
yellow; in the male it is narrower, entirely absent along the dorsal
third or half of the eye and entirely yellow. In the female the front
occupies about one-third of the width of the head and is mostly made
up of the frontal vitta the geno-vertical plate being very narrow.

Bristles of the head.—Female :—Seven to nine transfrontal of good
size and a few small intercalary, sometimes the larger ones decussate
and sometimes not, they extend a little ventrad the insertion of the
antenne. Ascending frontal, one. Orbital as mentioned in the
generic description. Greater ocellar, of good size, divergent. Lesser
ocellar, several pairs all parallel to the greater; one very small pair
is situated ventrad the greater, there are several sinall pairs dorsad
the greater and one pair at the dorsal border of the ocellar triangle
is half to three quarters the size of the greater. Inner vertical and
outer vertical, inserted as usual, equal ; only a little larger than the
ascending frontal, larger than the greater ocellar. Post vertical
small, erect, parallel to one another, inserted on the occipito-vertical
border a trifle caudad the line of the inner verticals. Occipito-
central, very small and delicate, inserted very close to the occipito-
vertical edge. Occipito-lateral not present. Cilise of posterior
orbit rather sparse but well aligned, extending ventrad to the caudo-
ventral angle of the eye. Bueca: vertical diameter as seen from in
front nearly one half that of eye; along edge: of mouth-opening a
series of large stout bristles, the remainder sparsely beset with min-
ute hairs. Vibrissal ridges: a few minute bristles dorsad the prin-
cipal vibrissa extending to a point a very little dorsad the ventral
end of the arm of the frontal suture.

Male:—Transfrontal, as mentioned in the generic description,
about seven in number. Inner vertical good sized. Outer vertical
absent as is usual in male Muscide. Greater ocellar much smaller
than in the female (the usual thing in Muscide). Lesser ocellar,
quite numerous, some of them almost equal to the greater. Post
vertical as in the female. Occipito-central (doubled in one speci-
men), ciliz of posterior orbit, bucca and vibrissal ridges as in female.

Antenna.—Third joint about twice as long as thesecond. Arista

180 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

longer than second and third joints together, its hairs rather few
(about eight above and six below). The exact shade of color varies
in different specimens, being sometimes darker and sometimes lighter;
in one female the third joint is almost a chestnut-brown. Proboscis
and palpi yellowish-brown.

Thorax.—Color, varying shades of yellowish-brown, darker on the
dorsum. On the dorsum, bands of dark brown or bluish-gray, vary-
ing much in width in different specimens (in one male none at all).
A dark spot on the middle of the scutellum in all the females and
in one male.

Bristles of the Thorax, 1, 9a, 9b, 9c. Humeral, 3. Posthumeral,
3, outermost on a level ventrad the presutural. Dorso-central, 6,
two in front and four behind the suture. Jntra-alar, 4, one in front
and three behind the suture. Acrostichal, 6, three in front and three
behind the suture. Presutura/, notopleural, supra-alar and post-alar
as usual. Post-sutwral, I venture to apply this name to a bristle,
present in all the specimens of this species, which I have not been
able to find in any other Muscids that I have seen. It is situated
caudad the transverse suture of the thorax, a little mesad and cau-

dad the anterior supra-alar, and laterad the intra-alar No. 3 (1 num-
ber the intra-alars, dorso-centrals and acrostichals from the caudal

end of the thorax cephalad, thus the intra-alar nearest the scutellum_

is No.1).

Scutellar—Apical, three marginal, jugal, two discal of which the
anterior is considerably the larger.

Abdomen.—Color: Principally yellowish-brown; of varying shale
in different specimens. There are also some very dark brown, al-
most black, markings as follows: on the first segment a very nar-
row band on the hind margin; on second segment a broader band
and a median mark, (I, 11) the width of the band and the size of the
mark varying considerably ; third segment like second, but the band
broader and the mark larger, so that in some specimens almost the
whole segment is dark brown or black: fourth segment entirely
black or dark brown.

Bristles—There are bristles on the hind borders of the first three
segments. Toward and at the sides of the segments the bristles are
larger than toward the middle. All are more or less appressed.
Those toward the middle can hardly be called macrochaetae until
we reach the third segment. On the fourth there are some discal as
well as marginal macrochaetae, and they are none of them ap-
pressed.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 181

Legs.—Color: Yellowish-brown. Bristles: Fore-leg, femur, as
usual. Tibia, lateral flexor row has one large bristle at the junction
of the middle and apical thirds, mesal extensor row has from four
to six rather small bristles about equal and equi-distant, extending
from very near the base to very neartheapex. Middle leg: Femur,
as usual, but the anterior median row is represented by only one
bristle of good size which is situated just at the middle of the femur.
On the whole, the bristles of this femur are rather few. Tibia: An-
terior surface, one large bristle at junction of apical and middle
thirds ; posterior surface two, rather smaller at junction of basal and
middle, and middle and apical thirds respectively; flexor surface
one, rather small at junction of apical and middle thirds. Hind leg =
Femur, as usual. Tibia, mesal extensor row has usually two promi-
nent but not very large bristles situated respectively at the junction
of the basal and middle, and middle and apical thirds (sometimes
the former is absent); lateral extensor row has a considerable but
varying number of unequal but almost equidistant bristles extend-
ing from base to apex; lateral flexor row is represented by only
one bristle situated at the junction of the apical and middle thirds.

Genus SOMALIA.

There is but a single specimen, and that a female of the species
on which I found this new genus, but the characters are so pro-
nounced that I have no hesitation in so doing. In the table of
Brauer & Bergenstamm’ this genus would fall in the group with
Dasyphora, except that it has but one large orbital bristle. It dif-
fers, however, from Dasyphora in several points: (1) the sterno-
pleural bristles have the arrangement 2-1, instead of 1-3; (2) there
is a row of bristles on the hypo-pleura; (3) the third joint of the
antenna is much shorter as compared with the second; (4) the out-
line of the arista as a whole is much narrower, and its hairs are less
closely set; (5) the eyes are only minutely hairy with a magnifica-
tion of twenty diameters; (6) the post-vertical bristles are very
small, while in Dasyphora they are large.

In Girschner’s classification the new genus stands far away from
Dasyphora in the 6th or 7th group of his Tachinide.

Somalia enigmatica nov. «p.
One female, taken October 11, 1894.

* Vorarb. zu Monog. Muse, Schiz., Part 11], p. 90 et seq.

182 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Length about 8.0 mm. Width of head 2.5 mm., of front 0.9mm.
(vitta 0.5 mm., geno-vertical plates each 0.2 mm.). Looked at
squarely from in front the dorso-ventral diameter of the head is 2.3
mm., the vertex extends 0.1 mm. dorsad the eyes, the dorso-ventral
diameter of the eye is 1.5 mm., of the bucca 0.7 mm. Third anten-
nal joint about 14 times as long as the second. General color pale
olive-green with a hoary coating, legs a yellowish-brown, except
that the third, fourth and fifth tarsal joints and the apical part of
the second are black. On the thorax, in front of the suture, are two
narrow bands, one on each side, between the acrostichal and dorso-
central bristles, which have no hoary coating ; these bands broaden
cephalad and unite at the cephalic border of the thorax. On the
second, third and fourth abdominal segments there is a narrow,
median, cephalo-caudal dark brown stripe not represented in the
diagram, I, 15, which shows also the arrangement of the abdominal
bristles.

Head.—Color: Genae, geno-vertical plate, facial fossa, vibrissal
ridges, posterior orbits and ocellar prominence silvery; vitta dark
brown; bucea olive; transverse impression of the face yellowish-
brown with silvery coating. Second joint of antennz yellowish-
brown, third joint darker with a hoary coating. Palpi yellowish-
brown. Proboscis black.

Bristles: Trans-frontal, about eight, of which the ventral four or
five are of good size and inserted close together, the rest small and
scattered. Ascending frontal, one, large. Orbitals, one large at
about the junction of the dorsal and middle thirds of the front and
one exceedingly minute a little dorsad the large one, no others at
all. The bristles at the vertex are somewhat injured, and I can
only say that the inner vertical, outer vertical, greater and lesser
ocellar, post-vertical (very small), and ciliae of the posterior orbit
are present ; nothing unusual can be made out in regard to them in
this specimen. Genz naked. Bucce distinctly separated from the
vibrissal ridges; parallel to the edge of the mouth-opening and a
little distance from it is a row of coarse bristles; near the cephalic
end of the bucca about as far dorsad the large bristles of the mouth-
edge as they are from the mouth edge itself, are two stout bristles
about equal in size to those of the mouth edge; the rest of the bucca
is rather sparsely beset with minute bristles and hairs. Vibrissal
ridges: The principal vibrissa and the vibrissal angle are close to
the edge of the mouth opening; dorsad the principal vibrissa there

3
es

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 183

are only a few minute bristles not extending as far as the ventral
end of the arm of the frontal suture; ventrad the principal vibrissa
are four lesser vibrissz inserted along the edge of the mouth opening
as far as the cephalic end of the bucca.

Thorax.—Color, as mentioned above. Halteres yellow. Tegule
hyaline, milky white toward the edges.

Bristles, I, 15a, 15b, 15c. Humeral,2. Posthumeral,1, on a level
dorsad the presutural. Dorso-central, 5, two in front and three be-
hind the suture. Jntra-alar, 3, none in front of the suture. Acros-
#ichal, 2, one in front and one behind the suture, both small. Presu-
tural, notopleural, supraalar and postalar as usual. Seutel/ar: apical,
two submarginal and one small discal or subapical.

Mesopleural. At the dorso-cephalic angle is a group of little
hairs, among which two are more prominent than the rest, and per-
haps deserve to be called bristles, an arrangement recalling the
prominent bristle in this situation which is so constant in the genera
Morellia, Muscinia, Musca, Myospila and their allies. As usual, there
is a large bristle just ventrad the prostigma, a little ventrad and
caudad this bristle is another, much smaller but decidedly promi-
nent, which I have not found in any other Muscid.

Sternopleural. Two in front and one behind. Pteropleural and
Aypopleural present.

Wing. Venation shown in the figure. On the third longitudi-
nal vein are about ten little spines quite regularly distrlbuted from
the base to near the small cross vein. There is a costal spine just
basad the end of the auxiliary vein.

Ventral surface of abdomen. Nb ventral membrane; second
ventral segment overlaps the edges of the corresponding dorsal, all
the other ventral segments are overlapped by the corresponding
dorsal.

fox, C71 C9 tel “CS
paw IE ta ES

Il.

Bristles of the Legs.—Anterior femur as usual. Anterior tibia:
lateral flexor row has one large bristle at the junction of the middle

184 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1898.

and apical thirds; mesal extensor row has three prominent bristles
as arranged in II, 1. Middle femur has one large bristle at the
middle of the anterior surface, a few bristles in the flexor row of
each surface, and on the posterior surface a subapical transverse
group of three. Middle tibia has one on the anterior, II, 2, three
on the posterior, II, 3, and one on the flexor, II, 4, surface. Poste-
rior femur as usual. Posterior tibia has four on the lateral surface
(two flexor and two extensor, IL, 5), and two on the mesal surface
II, 6.

Genus PARACOMPSOMYIA.

Very close to Compsomyia. In the table of genera of Brauer and
Bergenstamm it would fall with Compsomyia from which it differs as
follows: wings not hyaline but, toward base and costa, black or very
dark brown ; thorax without longitudinal black stripes ; the vibrissal
angles are not as far dorsad the mouth edge as in Compsomyia;
there are no vibrissee ventrad the principal vibrissa; the orbital
bristles are much smaller than in Compsomyia and are directed
laterad instead of ventrad ; the sterno pleural bristles are 1-1 instead
of 2-1.

Paracompsomyia nigripennis nov. sp.

Four females, taken August 23,1894. Large metallic blue, violet
or green flies with yellow heads, black legs and with the costal
border and basal half of the wings black or very dark brown.
Length of body 11 to 12 mm., of wing 10 mm. Width of head 5
mm.; of front 1.7 mm. at base of antennz, 1.8 mm. at vertex ; fron-
tal vitta 1 mm. at widest point, 0.7 mm. at base of antenne. Looked
at squarely from in front the dorso-ventral diameter of the head
(height) is 4.2 mm., the vertex extends 0.2 mm. dorsad the dorsal
border of the eyes, the dorso-ventral diameter of the eye is 2.5 mm.,
of the bucca 1.5 mm. The second antennal joint is 0.8 mm. long,
the third is 1.1 mm.

Head.—Color :—dorsal two-thirds of geno-vertical plate is polished
ferruginous, the ventral third as also the genz, bucce, vibrissal
ridges and facial fossa are a paler, yellowish-brown with a thin
hoary coating. Vitta ferruginous. Antenne yellowish-brown.
Ocellar prominence and an adjoining triangular area of varying
size at the dorsal part of the occiput ferruginous to yellowish-brown
varying in different specimens. Posterior orbit silvery. Palpi
yellow. Proboscis dark brown to black.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 185

Bristles.—Inner vertical and outer vertical of good size, inserted
as usual. Post vertical very small, inserted a little caudad the line
of the inner verticals. Occipito-central replaced by a number of
minute bristles. Cilize of posterior orbit as usual, well aligned,
rather small. Greater ocellar very small, divergent, pointing almost
directly laterad. Lesser ocellar exceedingly minute, numerous, in
four to six rows, occupying nearly the whole of the ocellar promin-
ence and extending caudad to or nearly to the line of the inner ver-
ticals. Ascending frontal, one, parallel to the outer vertical, in-
serted on a level with the greater ocellar some distance laterad the
line of insertion of the transfrontals half way between that line and
the lateral border of the geno-vertical plate. Transfrontals ten to
twelve, sma!l, non deccusate. Orbitals two, very small (0.2 to 0.3
mm. long), curved laterad instead of ventrad as usual, inserted

III.

Humeral, 3. Dorso-central, 5, 2 in front of and 3 behind the
suture. Intra-alar, 1. Supra-alar, 2. Acrostichal, 1, posterior.
Presutural, notopleural and postalar as usual. Seutellar : Apical,
four marginal and two discal as figured.

about at the middle (dorso-ventrally) of the geno-vertical plate and
0.3 or 0.4 mm. (dorso-ventrally) from each other; besides these two
orbitals the geno-vertical plate is quite thickly clothed with very
minute hairs or bristles which toward the vertex are black and
toward the gen are whitish or colorless. Gen, clothed like the
geno-vertical plates with exceedingly delicate and minute whitish
hairs. Bucew clothed like the gene, but toward the occiput the
hairs are much longer than elsewhere (as much as 0.2 mm.). Vi-
brissal ridges almost straight, only very slightly convex laterad;

13

186 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

vibrissal angle and principal vibrissa a little above the mouth edge
but not as high as in Compsomyia macellaria or in Pollenia; the
principal vibrissa is very small for the size of the fly; there are no
other vibrisse but the ridges are clothed nearly their whole length
with exceedingly minute whitish hairs.

The arista is about as long as the third antennal joint and is
densely plumose with fine hairs. Its rhachis is yellow toward the
base while its apical part and the hairs appear black.

Thorax.—Color.—Metallic blue, violet or green with hoary coat-
ing. The hoary coating is much thicker in front of than behind the
suture. The prostigma is very large and is white. Halteres yellow-
ish. Tegule white with smoky brown or black border of very vary-
ing width.

Bristles—There is a row of bristles on the hypopleura and some
bristles on the pteropleura.

Abdomen.—Color.—Metallic blue, violet or green with a hoary
coating which is thickest toward the sides and on the ventral sur-
face. The first segment and the caudal borders of the second and
third are not hoary. The fourth segment is quite thickly covered
with whitish hairs. There are no abdominal macrochete. The
second yentral plate overlaps the corresponding dorsal plates a very
little, the other ventral plates are overlapped by the corresponding
dorsal plates.

Bristles of the Legs.--Femora as usual in the Muscide. Tibiz:
anterior tibia has on the mesal surface in the extensor row three
prominent bristles III, 4, and on the lateral surface in the flexor
row one III, 5; middle tibia has on the anterior surface one III, 6
on the posterior surface three III, 7, and on the flexor surface one
III, 8; hind tibia has on the lateral surface in the flexor row two
III, 9, and on the mesal surface, in the extensor row, one III, 10.

EXPLANATION OF FIGURES.

1. Cross section of anterior femur of a Muscid.

2. Formation of an oblique row of bristles on the tibia.
3a. Bristles of thorax of Pseudopyrellia nuda nov. sp.

3b. Bristles of sternopleura of Pseudopyrellia nuda nov. sp.
3c. Bristles of mesopleura of Pseudopyrellia nuda nov. sp.
4. Wing of Pseudopyrellia nuda nov. sp.

5a. Bristles of thorax of Pollenia virido-cana nov. sp.

5b. Sternopleura of Pollenia virido-cana nov. sp.

5c. Mesopleura of Pollenia virido-eana nov. sp.

det i @

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 187

6. Wing of Pollenia virido-cana nov. sp.
7a. Bristles of thorax of Lucilia spinicosta nov. sp.
7b. Sternopleura of Lucilia spinicosta nov. sp.
7c. Mesopleura of Lucilia spinicosta nov. sp.
8. Wing of Lucilia spinicosta nov. sp.
Ya. Bristles of thorax of Parochromyia varia nov. sp.
9b. Sternopleura of Parochromyia varia nov. sp.
9c. Mesopleura of Parochromyia varia nov. sp.

10. Wing of Parochromyia varia nov. sp.

11. Marking of abdominal segment of Parochromyia varia.

12. Arista of Somalia enigmatica nov. sp.

13. Abdomen of Somalia enigmatica nov. sp.

14. Wing of Somalia enigmatica nov. sp.

15a. Bristles of thorax of Somalia enigmatica nov. sp.

15b. Mesopleura of Somalia enigmatica nov. sp.

; 15c. Sternopleura of Somalia enigmatica nov. sp.
L

Diagrams of positions of bristles of tibise of Somalia enigmatica.
1. Anterior tibia; mesal surface, extensor row.
2. Middle tibia; anterior surface.
3. Middle tibia; posterior surface.
4. Middle tibia; flexor surface.
5. Posterior tibia; lateral surface.
6. Posterior tibia; mesal surface.

II.

1. Antenna of Paracompsomyia nigripennis nov. sp.
2a, 2b, 2c. Thorax, mesopleura and sternopleura of same.
3. Wing of same.
4 to 10 positions of bristles of tibize of same.

188 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

A NEW WEASEL FROM NEW MEXICO.
BY C. M. BARBER AND T, D. A. COCKERELL.

Putorius frenatus subsp. neomexicanus n. subsp.

Similar to P. frenatus, but paler in color; white markings on
head more extensive, the white patch between the eyes large, quad-
rangular, and confluent with the stripes between eye and ear.

Color—Upper parts, including legs and body from shoulders to
tail, entirely of a uniform pale yellowish ochre, a sort of dilute
coffee color, but warmer; feet decidedly pallid, but not white.
Tail the color of the back, but rather more tinged with reddish, the
apical 50 mm. black. Under parts, including breast and throat,
uniform light yellowish-ochreous, a tint like that of the back but
somewhat paler. Head brownish-black; a large quadrangular
creamy-white patch between the eyes, slightly broadest behind,
about one-fifth longer than its greatest breadth, narrowly confluent
with broad white bands between the eye and ear, which latter ex-
tend downward and backward, fading gradually into the ochreous
color of the under parts. Face in front of median white patch
slightly speckled with whitish. Long bristles of upper lip, some
black and some white ; a variable amount of white on upper lip; no
black behind angles of mouth. Hair of ears brown-black, but white
hairs from the lateral bands invade the lower anterior parts, over-
lapping the aperture. The black of the head fades into brown be-
hind the plane of the ears, and shows here a small whitish mark;
the area behind the lower part of the ears is strongly suffused with
blackish, contrasting with the yellowish-white immediately below.

Cranial characters.—Compared with Merriam’s figure of the skull
of frenatus (N. A. Weasels, Pl. III, f. 1), the skull of neomexicanus
is similar, but the frontal region is less narrowed anteriorly and
slightly more convex ; and the zyomatic processes seem less produced
in a lateral direction ; the occipital condyles are more produced be-
hind.

Total length of skull 54 mm.; greatest breadth 32; interorbital
breadth 14} ; foramen magnum to plane of last molars 34 mm.

Measurements (of type specimen in flesh)—Length 500 mm., tail
205, hind feet 50.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 189

Hab.—The Mesilla Valley of New Mexico, near the Rio Grande,
alt. about 3,800 ft.

The type specimen was shot in the grass on the shore of Arm-
strong’s Lake, Mesilla, Feb. 1, 1898, by Mr. A. C. Tyson. It is an
old male; the teeth are somewhat worn and one or two are gone.
It had eaten some small rodent, which from the foot found in the
stomach seems to be Onychomys arcticeps Rhoads. A second speci-
men, also a male, was given to us by Mr. C. Barnes, who obtained
it from Mr. J. J. Roese. It was killed by a dog in Mesilla Park,
and was, unfortunately, much decomposed when it reached our
hands. It agrees with the typical specimen, except that the throat
is whiter and there is a little more white on the upper lip. Mr.
Roese reports that he recently saw four specimens together in a
road, early in the morning; this, with the development of the sex-
ual organs, leads us to believe that this (beginning of February and
end of January) is the mating season.

A specimen without any history, in alcohol, is in the collection of
the New Mexico Agricultural College. It approaches true frenatus
more than our examples, having a spot behind the angle of the
mouth, and the white median patch of the head confluent only on one
side with the lateral band. The discovery of P. frenatus neomexi-
canus extends the range of the frenatus series many hundreds of miles
to the north, and into the Upper Sonoran Zone. One of us, after
reading Dr. Merriam’s account of the North American weasels,
prophesied that there would be a new type found in the Mesilla
Valley, and such proves to be the case, the characters of our ani-
mal, while surely of no more than subspecific value, being quite
distinct.

190 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

ON THE GENUS HALIA OF RISSO.
BY WM. H. DALL.

The systematic position of the genus Halia, a curious deep water
gastropod discovered in the last century, has long been contested.
Lamarck (who knew it only by the shell) put it among the land-
shells like Achatina, Martyn referred it to the whelks (Buccinide),
Jay and Sacco classified it in the vicinity of Struthiolaria, and
Sowerby near Purpura. Fischer, in 1858, was the first to examine
it anatomically and concluded that it was one of the Towifera,
related to Pleurotoma. The paper was one of his earliest and rather
crude; though it added materially to our knowledge, the conclu-
sions were not altogether satisfactory to students of molluscan
anatomy. Nevertheless his view has been accepted so late as 1896
by M. Cossmann, one of the leading paleontologists of France. In
1885 Poirier, of the Paris Museum, was lucky enough to obtain a
specimen, a female, like that of Fischer, dredged in fifty fathoms
at the mouth of the Gambia River. His discussion of the dis-
section’ added very considerably to our acquaintance with the
macroscopic anatomy and that of the nervous system, He was,
however, little less unfortunate than Fischer in his examination of
the most important systematic character, the radula, and reported
an extraordinary duplication of the cesophagus, such as is quite un-
known elsewhere in mollusks, and which would require the most
conclusive confirmation to receive credence from anatomists. Poi-
rier reverted to the opinion of Martyn that Haldia is Buccinoid,
which being interpreted into systematic language, means that he
recognized in it the characteristics of a rhachiglossate Prosobranch,
which is essentially correct. The true relations of this remarkable
form were first recognized by Kobelt in a later publication? which
has unfortunately remained unfinished and has attracted no atten-
tion from anatomists. In view of the fact that the early errors
have obtained such a wide currency and that, even in Fischer’s
Manual, the characters of the nearest allied form are incorrectly

1 Bull. Malac. Soc. de France, July, 1885, pp. 17-50, pl. II-IV.
2 Inconographie der schalentragenden europ. Meeresconchylien, II, p. 6.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 191

given, it seems worth while to restate the latest and most trust-
worthy conclusions.

Each tooth of Halia is shaped much like a “wish-bone,” the
prongs forming an arched divergent base and the central projecting
portion at the junction, the cusp. The attached bases of the arch
are turned up a little and indistinctly notched on the edges; the
main part of the arch is free and very prominent. When the cover
glass of the microscopic slide is pressed down upon the radula the
pillars of the arch break away from the cusp at their junction,
which led Poirier to regard them as a separate series of lateral
teeth on each side, and Fischer, not noticing Troschel’s explanation
of this part of one of his figures, has been led into the same error in
regard to the analogous radula of Volutomitra. Poirier took the
notched bases of the broken off lateral portions of the single tooth
as the distal ends or cusps of his supposed laterals, directly revers-
ing their true position. There is only a single row of teeth.

The position of Halia is unquestionably among the Volutacea.
The radula of Scaphella Turneri as figured by Gray, is almost iden-
tical, and that of Volutomitra gronlandica is closely similar. Halia
wants the siphonal appendage of the typical Volutes and so does
Volutomitra. Both Scaphella and Volutomitra are without oper-
cula, like Halia. The external form of the foot and head is essen-
tially similar in all three. The texture of the shell of Halia, and
also its color and color-pattern, are essentially identical with those
of Seaphella (Aurinia) dubia Brod., which has the pillar and plaits
degenerate. The process of degeneration, aided by the more ample
whorls of Halia, has completed the effacement of the plaits and the
enfeeblement of the pillar or central axis of the shell. The speci-
men of Halia at my disposal for study is somewhat worn at the
apex, but the form of the nucleus indicates that, like Seaphell/a and
Volutomitra, its nepionic shell was membranous, and has left a rough
scar on the surface of the initial shelly coil, a view confirmed by
Cossmann’s figure of the nucleus of a fossil species. In Aurinia
the degenerate radula is edentulous, but the type, which began in
the Eocene, and has retained its color pattern and general charac-
ters ever since, is abundant in the Pliocene, and may readily have
thrown off the aberrant Halia at that period from which it is
known to date.

Halia was erected into a family by Kobelt, but it can hardly be
said to possess family characteristics, its essential features being

192 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

negative and due to degeneration from the normal type of the group
to which it belongs. The characters of the latter, however, fully
justify us in separating, from the operculate Volutide with their
calcareous nepionic shell and Buccinoid dentition, the family
Scaphellide, destitute of an operculum, with a membranous nepionic
shell and the peculiar dentition above described. This latter group
will include Caricella, Scaphella, Cymbiola, Eopsephea, Aurinia,
Halia, Volutomitra and their allies.

The recent Halia has been dredged along the eastern margin of
the Atlantic from the Bay of Biscay to Senegal. The genus is re-
presented in the Pliocene of Italy by one or two forms which have
received distinct specific names, The type was first named by
Meuschen in the Museum Gronovianum in 1778, and was erected
into a separate genus by Risso in 1826,

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 193

DESCRIPTION OF A NEW TETHYS (APLYSIA).
BY E. J. LETSON.

Tethys Pilsbryin.sp. Plate VIII.

_ Length 114 em., body elongated, flabby, plump, enlarged behind.
Mouth encircled by wide lips and large buccal appendages. Rhino-
phores (posterior tentacles, ) stout, short conic, slit at the extremities ;
eyes small, black, placed before the rhinophores. Anterior ends of
pleuropodial lobes well separated, posterior ends joined behind,
mantle large, median perforation very small, surrounded by radial
strize (visible only under a lens). Right margin of manile, folded
over about half its width, and largely adnate; posteriorly not
forming an excurrent siphon; gill considerably exposed. Genital
opening under forward right border of mantle, surmounted by a
fleshy prominence. Opening of opaline gland large, single, about
13 mill. back of the genital pore, and well under the gill. Gills
foliated in regular branches. External integument smooth; with a
few inconspicuous scattered warts; olive colored, with some cloud-
ing of black on the reflexed mantle and sometimes also near the
tail; shell normal.

Silam, North Coast of Yucatan, (Heilprin).
This differs from all other known species in having the mantle
folded back upon itself and adnate except near the edge.

194 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898..

A NEW GRASSHOPPER MOUSE FROM NEW MEXICO.
BY SAMUEL N. RHOADS.

Among the ten species and races of short-tailed mice of the genus.
Onychomys known to inhabit the United States we find a surpris--
ingly small amount of color variation, or of difference in size aemdb
external proportions, from the type of the genus, O. leucogaster, from

Dakota. The short, nearly unicolor, blunt tail, rounded, miervetime-.

ears, dense, silky pelage and buffy gray colors are more or less ebsur-
acteristic of all the species ranging from the Saskatchewan te the
Mexican boundary.

A careful study of their cranial characters is thus necessary im
determining their relationships.

A specimen of Onychomys in superficial appearance almost identa-.
eal with /eucogaster, was recently forwarded to the writer from Me-

silla, Dona Ana Co., New Mexico, by Mr. T. D. A. Cockerel), far-

identification. Four specimens of Onychomys from Clapham, Unaem.
Co., New Mexico, prove to be identical with the Mesilla specimem.
and on comparison with their nearest geographical allies, /eweogas-
ter, brevicaudus and longipes prove to belong to a distinct and wm.

described species. It may be known by the following diagnosis :—-

Onychomys arcticeps sp. nov. Long-Nosed Grasshopper Mouse,

“Onychomys leucogaster subsp.?”” ; Allen, Bull. Amer. Mus, N. H., 1858.

p. 74. “Onychomys leucogaster brevicauda’’; Allen, ibid, 1896, p. 25%

Type No. 1,529, ad. 3, col. of S. N. Rhoads, taken by E. E..

Thompson at Clapham, Union Co., New Mexico, Nov. 7th, 1893
General characters.—About the size of leucogaster, with shighthy

longer tail and ears, deeper fulvous (less gray) coloration abowe,.

narrower cranium, and long, slender rostrum.
Color—Above uniform ochraceous buff,’ heavily lined with black-
ish, lightest along sides, blackest on top of head and around eyes.

A blackish oval spot on upper, outer margins of ears. Tail white,

with an ill-defined, narrow stripe of blackish-buff on superior prom
imal two-thirds. Color of sides at the white margin and on lower

rump and thighs deeper ochraceous buff. ‘Lower parts tawny white-

as contrasted with the clear, pure white of leucogaster.
1 Ridgway’s Nomen. of Colors, Pl. V, No. 10.

«
@

%
4

© @ eek he dite 22s

a

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 195

Cranial characters—Skull viewed from above (contrasted with
leucogaster), long and narrow, the brain case high, compressed,
elongate, ovate; the rostrum much narrowed and the nasals slender
and projecting decidedly beyond the anterior tips of the premaxil-
laries. No distinct supraorbital bead as contrasted with longipes
from Texas. Palate ending posteriorly with a convex edge as in
torridus, as contrasted with the strongly developed median spine of
leucogaster.

Measurements (of type).—Total length 150 mm.; tail vertebre,
45; hind foot, 21; ear, from crown (dry), 11. Average of four
topotypes, in same order as above: 152—46—22. Skull: total
length, 28.6; nasal length, 11.5; zygomatic expansion; 14.7; mas-
toid expansion, 12; interorbital constriction, 4.7 ; length of mandi-
ble 15.3.

196 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

NOTES ON THE FOSSIL WALRUS OF EASTERN NORTH AMERICA.
BY SAMUEL N. RHOADS.

In the eleventh volume of the Transactions of the American
Philosophical Society,’ Dr. Joseph Leidy describes and figures two
specimens of fossil walrus obtained on the coast of New Jersey, and
discusses the relationships of the recent and fossil forms of Atlantic
walrus. In his opinion there is no foundation for a distinction be-
tween the existing species and the so-called Trichechus virginianus
of DeKay,’ based on a fossil walrus skull from Accomac County,
Virginia.

Iu the eighth volume of the Journal of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia, published twenty years subsequent to his
paper in the Transactions of the Philosophical Society above re-
ferred to, Dr. Leidy describes a walrus tusk from the phosphate
beds of Ashley River, South Carolina. This specimen he compares
with the tusks of a large skull in the museum of the Academy from
Nova Seotia, and concludes that the characters of the South Caro-
lina specimen are not of sufficient value to determine whether it per-
tained to a species distinct from the living one. The specimen from
Nova Scotia, thus casually referred to by Dr. Leidy, is yet in the
museum of the Academy, and is by far the most complete fossilized
cranium of an adult animal of which we have any record.

Before passing to a further consideration of the specimens de-
scribed by Leidy, it should be stated that Dr. J. A. Allen, in his Me-
moir of the Pinnipeds® also records‘ a skeleton of a fossil walrus
“with tusks over five inches long” in the quaternary clays of Port-
land, Maine. Dr. Allen does not seem to have examined any fossil
specimens of walrus, nor does he venture an opinion as to the
specific value of the so-called fossil species. From his full quota-
tions of Leidy, however, it is evident that Dr. Allen was inclined to
coincide with the determinations of so eminent an authority.

' New Series, pp. 83-86, pl. 4, and 5.

* Nat. Hist. N.- York, Zool., I, p. 56, pl. 19, ftg. 1, a, b.
?7U. 8. Geol. Surv., Misc. Pub , XII, 1880.

*See also Amer. Nat., Sept., 1878, p. 633.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 197

With the specimen from Nova Scotia above alluded to is a mem-
orandum, evidently penned by the sender and donor of the specimen.
It reads :—“ Office of School Commissioners, 48 George Street [ Hal-
ifax], 187[1]. Skull of a walrus (Trichecus rosmarus) Sable
Island, Nova Scotia. The walrus is now extinct in Nova Scotia.
It was last seen alive on Sable Island sand beaches. There must
have been a considerable number on the island, as a great many of
their skulls have been thrown up on the beaches at intervals after
heavy gales. The specimen sent was found some two years since,
and as none have been found since then, I am inclined to think it
the last of the series. You will observe that the tusks are partly
fossilized.— J. R. W[illis].” This specimen is recorded in the Pro-
ceedings of the Academy for 1871, and classified among recent ver-
tebrate material. ‘This fact and the tenor of Dr. Leidy’s remarks
regarding it show that he did not consider it a fossil. This is re
markable, as the specimen is of precisely the same nature in color,
texture and specific gravity as the larger fossil specimen which
Leidy described and figured in the Philosophical Transactions, and
which came from the beach at Long Branch, New Jersey. Un-
doubtedly the Sable Island specimen is of the same age and deriva-
tion from an ancient raised sea beach stratum as were the two speci-
mens obtained on the shores of New Jersey, the skeleton from the
quaternary clays of Portland, Maine, and the type of DeKay’s
Trichechus virginianus from the sea beach of Accomac County, Vir-
ginia. For this reason all of these fossil specimens are taken in the
following study as typical of the supposed fossil species of Atlantic
walrus as compared with the animal now existing on our North
Atlantie Coasts of America.

Of the four fossil specimens mentioned, three are now in the cus-
tody of the Academy of Natural Sciences, the one from Sable Island
and the more perfect of the two New Jersey specimens figured by
Dr. Leidy, being the property of the Academy. The third specimen
is the anterior half of the cranium from Long Branch, loaned to
Dr. Leidy by Prof. Geo. Cook, and figured in the T'ransactions of the
Philosophical Society. It was recently purchased from Prof. Ward
of Rochester, N. Y., by the New Jersey Geological Survey for its
museum at Trenton, and through the courtesy of Prof. J.C. Smock,
was loaned to Mr. Lewis Woolman, of Philadelphia, for use in this
connection. It is to the efforts of Mr. Woolman and his scientific
interest in the work of the Survey, as well as his devotion to original

198 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

research in the Academy of Natural Sciences that the facts con-
tained in this paper are now made accessible. Mr. Woolman’s at-
tempt to locate DeKay’s type of 7. virginianus resulted in the dis-
covery that this specimen was destroyed by fire with the other ob-
jects of natural history in the museum of the old New York Lyceum
of Natural History, now known as the New York Academy of Sci-
ences.

The loss of this specimen, together with the inadequate descrip-
tion of its characters and the crude nature of DeKay’s figure of it
make the use of the name virginianus for an extinct species of wal-
rus questionable, even in the event of proof that the other fossil speci-
mens represent a different species from that now existing. However,
if the characters of these latter can be shown to indicate such a state
of affairs and at the same time show no radical differences from what
we know of the type of virginianus, it is eminently proper that that
name should be applied to them, and the extinct walrus of the
glacial period be so distinguished from Rosmarus rosmarus.

As Leidy has already shown, DeKay’s brief diagnosis of virgin-
ianus’ is equally applicable to Rosmarus rosmarus, and had he not
figured the specimen, we would now, on account of the loss of the
type, be forced to make virginianas a probable synonym of rosmarus,
The fact, however, that the type was a fossil and was figured, and
that it, in all probability, represented the same species as the fossil
skulls from New Jersey and Sable Island, makes the name as tena-
ble as ever for a possible species of fossil walrus.

The characters of all the fossil specimens show conclusively their
closer affinity to rosmarus than to obesus of the Pacific Ocean, ex-
cept in the relative size of the molars, In this respect they ap-
proach more nearly the Pacific species as represented in the skull
of an old male from Alaska, in which the molars are very large and
rounded. ‘The canine tusks of the fossil specimens are characteris-
tic of the rather short, heavy, decurved and spreading form seen in
rosmarus. In respect of the ratio of the extreme facial width across
the maxillaries to the greatest occipital width, it is noticeable that
the fossil specimens come much nearer to obesus, in which the differ-
ences between these dimensions are much less than in rosmarus. In
the fossil specimen from Nova Scotia the maxillary expansion is
203 mm., and the paroccipital expansion (adding 10 mm. for wear)

5It reads: ‘ Cheek teeth with obliquely truncate crowns, not ridged; the
second smaller than the first.”

15898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 199

@s278 mm. Ina very old male specimen of obesus from Alaska
Giese measurements are respectively 220 mm. and 295 mm. In a
somewhat younger but adult west Greenland specimen of rosmarus
these dimensions are 195 mm. and 295 mm. Viewed anteriorly,
the facial outline of the fossil specimens, especially in the oldest
New Jersey example, shows affinity with the rosmurus type in the
amelatively greater ratio of width to height, and in the Sable Island
skull the median projection of the premaxillaries extends consider-
ably beyond the anterior plane of the maxillaries into a blunt, beak-
Ske process.

[nm the very old recent Alaskan specimen the premaxillaries are
-em a plane with the maxillaries at this point, and their median su-
were recedes behind them at its antero-inferior border in a sort of
baretip conformation.

The three fossil specimens are remarkable for the great relative
sme of the nasal bones. The New Jersey specimen now belonging
te the Geological Survey of that State is much wider across the
meaxillaries than the widest recent or fossil] walrus skull in the cus-
‘Gady of the Academy, and is from a very old individual. While
we would expect a corresponding width of the nasal bones, these
ame, wevertheless, correspondingly long, also, presenting an area
mearly twice as great as in the largest recent walrus skulls in the
-eatiection. The smaller New Jersey specimen, belonging to the
Aeademy, also has a correspondingly large nasal area. The nasal
gatures in the process of fossilization become sufficiently well-defined,
even in the oldest specimens, to determine their area. In the larger
Mew Jersey specimen the greatest nasal length is 98 mm., and the
greatest width 80 mm. In thesmaller one these dimensions are 96
omm.and 81 mm. In the largest Greenland specimen they are 72
arm. and 65 mm., and in the largest Alaskan specimen 72 mm. and
GE am.

Turning now to the upper maxillary dentition, a comparison be-
‘Gweea the fossil and recent specimens of aged individuals shows the
failowing marked differences in the permanent teeth.’

Em recent rosmarus of nearly the same size as the smaller New
Sersey fossil specimen and 25 mm. shorter in basilar length than the
Mewa Scotia fossil, all the grinding teeth average about one-half
te dimensions of the fossil specimens, and making allowance for

*K ade; the dental formula of Dr. Allen's Monograph of the Pinnipeds,
wer 57.

200 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

the difference in age they are more than one-third smaller. In the
fossil specimens the permanent incisor exceeds the grinders both in
triturating area and in alveolar depth and calibre. In rosmarus
and obesus this tooth is much smallerthan ™*. The posterior molar
(™*) in the fossil skulls (excepting the one belonging to the New
Jersey Geological Survey),’ is a deeply rooted tooth of nearly the
same calibre and triturating area as ™*. In both rosmarus and
obesus it is the smallest and shallowest rooted of the permanent “_
tition and is sometimes wanting in aged specimens.

Another marked character which is peculiar to the two fossil
specimens belonging to the collection of the Academy, and in some
degree to the specimen of the Geological Survey, is the remarkable
median depression of the maxille at the incisive foramina, and the
constriction of the inter-incisor space. In the Sable Island example
the depth of the incisive foramina below the crown of ™? is 64 mm,
and the distance between the alveoli of the permanent incisors is
only 17 mm. In the Long Branch skull it is about the same. In
the recent Greenland specimen these measurements are 41 mm. and
30 mm., and in the Alaskan specimen 50 mm. and 30 mm.

While the foregoing comparisons were made with an amount of
material far more comprehensive than that accessible td Dr. Leidy,
and supplemented by the valuable diagnoses, figures and tables of
measurements given by Dr. J. A. Allen, the author regrets that: a
larger series of adult crania of our living species of walrus was
not available. Premising, however, that the recent skulls used in
this comparison are typical in essential characters of rosmarus and
obesus, and that the fossil skulls, including the type of virginianus,
all represent a period of Pleistocene Age, the writer concludes that
the weight of evidence favors the separation of the fossil and recent
species of Atlantic walrus under the following diagnoses:

Rosmarus rosmarus (Linnus). Recent Atlantic Walrus.

Phoca rosmarus Linneus ; Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 38.
Rosmarus rosmarus Rhoads; Amer. Nat., 1894, p. 523.

Characters.—Ratio of greatest anterior maxillary width to the
paroccipital expansion, as 2 to 3; permanent upper incisor much
smaller than ™?; ™* smallest, shallow-rooted, in old adults some
times absent; superior grinders relatively weak, the opposing rows.
rea by a wide incisive diastema twice the width of the largest

7In this the posterior molars have fallen out, the alveoli showing them to.
have been of large calibre but quite shallow.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 201

molar; roof of mouth gently, evenly rounded, shallow between the
grinders; incisive foramina small, not indented, their distance be-
low the alveolus of "1 only equalling the distance between the two
opposing permanent incisors; nasals small, short, rectangular.
Rosmarus virginianus (DeKay). Fossil Atlantie Walrus.

Satta virginianus DeKay ; Nat. Hist. N. York, I, p. 56, pl.19, fig. 1,
a, b.

Characters.—Ratio of greatest anterior maxillary width to par-
occipital expansion, as 2 to 2}; permanent upper incisor as large as
m?, ™% larger than ™!, nearly as large as permanent incisor, deeply
rooted, persistent ; superior grinders massive, crowded, the opposing
rows separated by a narrow incisive diastema about as wide as the
largest molar: root of mouth deeply furrowed between the grinders ;
incisive foramina large, acutely indented; their depth below the
alveolus of ™! being twice as great as the space between the two
opposing permanent incisors; nasals large, relatively long, becom-
ing much wider anteriorly.

It should be understood that the above diagnosis of the fossil wal-
rus rests chiefly on the Sable Island specimen, and the finer skull
belonging to the Academy from New Jersey which Leidy figured
on plates 4 and 5 of volume XI of ‘the Philosophical Transactions.
Both these skulls evidently belonged to very old males. In some
respects, as in the relative sizes of the teeth to each other, the other
New Jersey specimen and the plate of DeKay’s virginianus agree im
their closer approach to the existing walrus. Owing to their frag-
mentary condition, as compared with the Sable Island and Long
Branch specimen, and the fact that the latter two agree exactly in
all the characters enumerated, it is best to consider these as typical
of the fossil animal. As DeKay’s type is destroyed and his diagno-
sis and plate of little value, I would recommend that if the charac-
ters pointed out in this paper as distinguishing the fossil from the
recent Atlantic walrus are sufficiently confirmed by other speci-
mens to warrant their separation, that DeKay’s name be retained.
The evidence in favor of DeKay’s fossil being the same as roemarus
and the other fossil specimens a distinct species, to which the name
virginianus cannot apply, is too flimsy to merit attention.

14

202 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

APRIL 5,
The President, Samuret G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Seventeen persons present.

The death of Oliver A. Judson, M. D., a member, was announced.

APRIL 12.
The President, SAamMuEL G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-six persons present.

Pror. Prmspry made a communication on the natural history
of slugs. (No abstract.)

APRIL 19.
The President, SamurEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.

Nineteen persons present.

The Function of the Radula—Mr. H. A. Pivspry spoke of a
radula of the gastropod Nerita peloronta exhibited by Mr. Keely,
mentioning its great length compared to that of the animal, and the
large number of similar teeth at the margins. The modifications
found by Fischer in the radula of Neritopsis and by the speaker in
that of Orthomesus and the Helicide indicate that specialization in
the Rhipidoglossa and Pulmonata has proceded from the median
line of the radula outward, the outer teeth being the last to be
modified, and therefore of value as indicating the ancestral con-
dition; this mode of modification being probably the result of the
greater functional activity of the median portion in feeding, due to
the rounded shape of the subradular cartilage.

Mr. CAuvert stated that the position of the radula in squids
recently dissected by him seemed to preclude the use of that organ
as a rasp, as described for snails.

Mr. Pitspry replied that he had not observed any cephalopod
feeding, but supposed that the radula here acted as an aid to
deglutition, crowding the fragments, taken in the beak, down the
cesophagus.

Dr. CuAapMAN observed that he had often observed squids eating
fish, and the beaks alone were used to bite the prey. He further
alluded to the impossibility of keeping squids in aquaria owing to
their incessant activity. They constantly dart against the glass
and soon die from the mutilation ensuing.

———_ aS OOo

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 203

APRIL 26.
The President, SamuEeL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-six persons present.

A paper entitled “Materials toward a Natural Classification of
the Cylindrelloid Snails,” by Henry A. Pilsbry and E. G. Vanatta,
was presented for publication.

Rock Inseriptions in Kauai, Hawaiian Islands—Dr. Bensa-
MIN SHARP exhibited a specimen of coquina received from Mr. J.
K. Farley of Kauai. He had visited Mr. Farley in 1893 with the
hope of seeing some rock inscriptions usually covered with sand.
An effort to uncover the rocks and expose the inscriptions had
then been unsuccessful, although the bed rock had been reached at
a depth of six feet. The following letter, accompanied by draw-
ings of the inscriptions, has recently been received :—

Ko.oa, Kauat, Hawarran Isuanps, July 18th, 1897.
Dr. Benj. Sharp,

Dear Srr:—When you were here in October, 1893, I promised
you that 1 would send you any new information that I might obtain
regarding the figures cut into the sandstone’ ledge at Keoneloa, also
diagrams of them if I ever saw them again.

On June 15th a native fisherman told me that the drawings were
exposed to view at Jow tide. I went to Keoneloa June 16th, 17th,
18th, 19th and 21st, and send you herewith, in another package,
the result of the visits. On the last date I could do nothing but
try cutting the rock with a hatchet and an old native stone adze,
as a high surf was fast covering the ledge again with sand.

With a hatchet one could, I think, make a four foot figure in
about two hours, steady work; with the adze it would take at least
six times as long, and use up a number of such tools. Most of the
figures look as if they had been cut with a semi-pointed implement
like a rounded cold chisel. With the corner of the stone adze I was
able to make about the same kind of a cut. A whirling motion
that I noticed the waves as they ran off the rock gave to the sand,
lodged it in the cuts and this may have worn the cutting into the
sort of rounded pockets noticed.

I had a talk, June 17th, with an old native woman named
Kauila, who has lived near Keoneloa for many years. She said :—
“T first saw the pictures when I was about thirteen years old (that
was in 1848). I went to see them with my school-teacher and his
other scholars and two Roman Catholic priests. My teacher's
name was Alexandro, a Frenchman. He was the first Roman

1The rock is coquina, not sandstone.

204 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Catholic priest in Koloa and built the Roman Catholic Mission
buildings. We saw a// the picture rocks exposed; you have only
seen a part of them to-day. The priest went home with me from
Keoneloa and talked with my father, Walewale, and with my grand-
father, and also with a number of other old natives (in those days
there were many old people in the land) about the drawings. They
had all seen the pictures but had never heard who cut them, or why
they were done. The oldest folks said that their fathers and grand-
fathers had told them that the pictures had always been there.”

The sand-hills to the west of Keoneloa are said to have been old
battle-fields. They were certainly used as burial grounds as we
know.’

Fugitives from the Oahu wars are said to have landed at Keone-
loa and to have been killed and buried in these sand-hills by Koloa
natives.

Alexander, in his “ Brief History of the Hawaiian People,” Chap.
15, says “About the end of the 13th century, Kalaunuiohua, a war-
like and ambitious Moi (King) of Hawaii, undertook to subdue the
whole group ... he defeated the leading chiefs of Maui, Molo-
kai and Oahu. ... he set sail for Kauai ... and landed near
Koloa, where he was met by Kukona, at the head of the warriors of
Kauai, and was totally defeated, his fleet being taken, his army de-
stroyed. It was about this time that a vessel called ‘Mamala’ in
the tradition, arrived at Kahului, in Maui. The captain and crew
are said to have been foreigners of light complexion, with bright
eyes, who intermarried with the natives and became progenitors of
a light colored stock. As there were no Europeans in the Pacific
Ocean in the 13th century, it is most probable, as Judge Fornander
has suggested, that these foreigners were the crew of some Japanese
junk, driven out of its course by a typhoon, and drifted to these
shores, as has twice happened in recent times. Also, about the year
1527-28, Spaniards, a man and his sister, were saved from a wreck
on Hawaii . . . they intermarried with the natives and became
the progenitors of certain well-known families of chiefs, such as that
of Kaikeowa, former Governor of Kauai.”

Jarvis, in his history of the islands, says, “ Cook found in the
possession of the natives of Kauai two pieces of iron, one a portion
of a hoop, and the other appeared to be part of the blade of a broad-
sword.” “The knowledge and use of iron was generally known.”

Kauila’s story would take us back to the early part of the 17th
century, without a tradition of the workers.

The cross and the flag (?)* make me think that foreigners may
have had a hand in the work, or may have given the natives, if
they did the work, a knowledge of those emblems. Were it not for
them one might think that the pictures were done by a party of

? We obtained, when with Mr. Farley, a number of bones and one complete
skeleton.
’ Referring to the drawing sent with the letter.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 205

North-west Indians, who could, I believe, easily, in their large
canoes, sail or drift down to the islands with the currents, in a
shorter time than a Japanese junk could. One can usually see
half a dozen N. W. drift logs on the beach at Keoneloa. On the
beaches of Niihau, some fifty miles away, hundreds of logs and
Red Wood posts have been picked up a few months after freshets
on the Pacific coast of the U. S. and B. C., had washed out the
logging dams of the saw mills.

The last figure on my diagram, I take it, was made to represent
a woman in parturition.

P.S. Since writing the foregoing, I have seen Dr. Emerson of
this place. He tells me that eight or nine years ago, he saw on the
beach at Honaunau, Kona, Hawaii, somewhat similar drawings,
cut into lava rock. Honaunau is not far from Keei, the place at
which the Spanish man and woman are said to have landed in
about 1527-28. The natives of Hawaii know nothing of the
workers. Dr. Emerson says: Kackeoewa came from a Hawaiian
family. My “cross” may be a totem.

Mr. Wm. W. Jefferis was appointed Curator of the William S.
Vaux Collections for the current year.

The following were appointed the Committee on the Hayden
Memorial Award for 1898:—Messrs Persifor Frazer, Angelo
Heilprin, Theodore D. Rand, Benjamin Smith Lyman, and Jos. P.
Lesley.

The following were ordered to be printed :—

206 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

BIRDS OBSERVED IN CENTRAL CALIFORNIA IN THE SUMMER OF 1898.
BY JOHN VANDENBURGH.

it was my good fortune in the summer of 1893 to be one of a
party of five who, during the weeks from June 21st to July 27th,
fairly lived in the saddle, riding nearly eight hundred miles through
the Coast Range, interior valleys and Sierra Nevada of California.
The other members of the party were Dr. Charles H. Gilbert, Dr.
W. W. Thoburn and Professor C. B. Wing of Leland Stanford
Junior University, and the Rev. Mr. Briggs, then of San Francisco.

The main object of the expedition was the gathering of material
which would throw light upon certain problems connected with the
fish fauna of the streams in the vicinity of Mt. Whitney, but all
forms of vertebrate life received more or less attention. My time
was devoted chiefly to the birds and reptiles, the latter, perhaps,
receiving the major share. Owing to the rapid rate at which it was
necessary to travel, opportunities for collecting were not of the best,
but the ornithological observations made, are presented in the hope ©
that they may be of interest from the fact that most of the birds
were in their breeding ranges and, in many instances, in localities
seldom visited by the ornithologist.

Our route lay in Santa Clara County from Los Gatos and Palo
Alto to Saratoga, and thence to Boulder Creek in Santa Cruz
County ; June 21st, Santa Cruz; June 22d, Soquel, Aptos and Wat-
sonville; June 23d, San Juan, Hollister and Tres Pinos; June 24th,
up the valley of the San Benito River to San Benito, Hernandez,
Hepsadan Mountain and Erie; June 26-29, across a divide to the
Los Gatos Creek, June 29th, and then down this stream and through
Pleasant Valley to Huron, June 30th. From: Huron we crossed
the San Joaquin Valley, by way of Lemoore, Armona and Hanford,
to Visalia, July 1-3d. From Visalia we went to Three Rivers and
then up the east fork of the Kaweak River to Cain’s Flat, Weishar
Mill and Mineral King, July 4-6th. Crossing Farewell Gap, we
spent a day in Shotgun Cajion close to Little Kern River, and then
went on to Trout Meadows and the south fork of Kern River, reach-
ing Little Kern River Lake July 12th and Soda Springs or Big

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 207

Kern River Lake one day later. Our trail then lead us up Whitney
Creek to its headwaters, across to Cottonwood Creek and thus down
to Owen’s Lake and Lone Pine, July 14-16th. From Lone Pine
we returned to San Francisco by way of Independence (July 17th),
Big Pine (July 18th), Round Valley (July 19th), McGee’s (July
20th), Troy’s near Mono Lake (July 21st), Mono Pass and Dana
Creek (July 22d), Yosemite Valley (July 23d), Crocker’s (July
24th), Buena Vista (July 25th), and Stockton (July 26th).

1. Colymbus nigricollis californicus. Eared Grebe.
The Eared Grebe was seen only in Owen’s Valley, where a single
pair were feeding in a small lake near Lone Pine, July 16, 1893.

2. Podilymbus podiceps. Pied-billed Grebe.
A pair of this species inhabited a pond near Watsonville, where
we camped, June 23d.

3. Ardea herodias. (reat Blue Heron.

This heron was observed at Watsonville, June 23d. It was com-
mon along the San Benito River, June 29th, and several were hunt-
ing in the alfalfa fields of Pleasant Valley, June 30th.

4. Ardea virescens. (ireen Heron.

The Green Heron was not uncommon along the San Benito River
from Tres Pinos to San Benito, June 24-27th. One was observed
on the east fork of the Kaweah River, July 5th.

5. Fulica americana. American Coot.

Two Coots were playing in Little Kern River Lake early in the
morning of July 15th. In Owen’s Valley a number were seen on a
small lake near Lone Pine, July 16th.

6. Actitis macularia. Spotted Sandpiper.

This loud voiced wader was seen at Kern River Lake, July 13th
and 14th.

7. ZEgialitis vocifera. Killdeer.

The Killdeer was observed near Watsonville, June 24th; at Tres
Pinos, where it was very abundant along the San Benito Creek,
June 25th, and along the Los Gatos Creek and in Pleasant Valley,
June 30th. In the San Joaquin Valley, this bird was the almost
constant accompaniment of water, July 1-4th. In Owen's Valley,

many were seen along the streams and irrigation ditches between
Lone Pine and Bishop, July 16-19th.

208 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.
8. Oreortyx pictus plumiferus. Plumed Partridge.

A large covey was observed near Mineral King, July 7th. Sev-
eral were seen near Shotgun Cafion, July 11th, and a pair with half
grown young were flushed between Trout Meadows and Kern
River Lakes, July 12th. A single adult male was seen at Crock-
er’s, July 25th.

9. Callipepla californica. California Quail.

This quail was heard constantly between Saratoga and Boulder,
June 21st.

10. Callipepla californica vallicola. Valley Quail.

Valley Quail were very abundant along the east fork of the
Kaweak River, July 4-5th, |
11. Dendragapus obscurus fuliginosus. Sooty Grouse.

The Sooty Grouse was well represented at an altitude of about
8,000 feet near Mineral King. Here they were heard at all times
of the day, and a female was seen with her covey of young, then
about the size of Valley Quail, July 7th. Several were observed
by Dr. Gilbert at the head of Shotgun Cajion, July 10th.

12. Zenaidura macroura. Mourning Dove.

This species was first observed at Watsonville, where it was com-
mon in the grain fields. After leaving Watsonville, it was with us
constantly to San Juan, Hollister, Tres Pinos, up the valley of San
Benito Creek, across into that of the Los Gatos, thence down Pleas-
ant Valley to Huron, across the San Joaquin Valley to Visalia,
and up the east fork of the Kaweak River to Cain’s Flat, at the
lower limit of pines, June 24th, July 5th. Doves were very abund-
ant in Owen’s Valley, from Lone Pine to Bishop, July 16th—-19th.
18. Pseudogryphus californianus. California Vulture.

A single individual of this species was seen sitting on a fence-
post near the road between Big Pine and Bishop Creek in Owen’s
Valley, July 19th.

14. Cathartes aura. Turkey Vulture.

‘Buzzards were noted at Aptos, Watsonville, San Juan, Hollister,
Tres Pinos, San Benito, Hernandez, Visalia, Three Rivers and
Cain’s Flat. East of the Sierra Nevada several were seen in
Owen’s Valley, and a dead one was found in Long Valley.

15. Circus hudsonius. Marsh Hawk.

A hawk of this species was seen near Big Pine, Owen’s Valley,
July 19th.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 209

16. Accipiter velox. Sharp-shinned Hawk (?).

A bird thought to be of this species was seen near San Benito,
June 27th.

17. Buteo borealis calurus. Western Red-tailed Hawk.

Several Western Red-tails were sailing high in the air near
Aptos, June 23d. The species was next seen at Tres Pinos, June
26th, but was not again observed until the party reached Dana
Creek, above the Yosemite Valley, where one was shot July 23d.
18. Aquila chrysaetos. Golden Eagle.

The only eagle seen flew from the ground near an irrigation ditch
to a large oak, near Visalia, July 3d.

19. Falco sparverius deserticolus. Desert Sparrow Hawk,

This species was first met at Soquel, where a single individual
was seen June 23d. Others were observed near San Juan and Tres
Pinos, June 24th. On June 27th one was seen near San Benito,
feeding four young which had recently left the nest.

20. Glaucidum gnoma californicum. California Pigmy Owl.

A Pigmy Owl was brought to me at Boulder by some boys who
had shot it as it flew about their camp among the redwoods at noon
June 22d.

21. Speotyto cunicularia hypogea. Burrowing Owl.

A number of Burrowing Owls were seen near San Juan, June
24th. In Pleasant Valley and between there and Huron this spe-
cies was very common, and often whole families of them could be
seen on or near the mounds which contained their nesting burrows.
June 30th, several were seen at various points in the San Joaquin
Valley.

22. Geococcyx californianus. Road-runner.

A Road-runner shot by Dr. Thoburn near Big Pine, July 18th,

was the only one observed.
23. Ceryle alcyon. Belted Kingfisher.

One Kingfisher was seen near Tres Pinos, June 26th.
24. Dryobates pubescens gairdnerii. Gairdner’s Woodpecker.

This Woodpecker was very abundant along the San Benito
Creek, June 25th to 28th.

25. Dryobates nuttallii. Nuttall’s Woodpecker.

Nuttall’s Woodpecker was observed only on the east fork of the
Kaweah River near Cain’s Flat, July 5th.

210 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

26. Xenopicus albolarvatus. White-headed Woodpecker.

The White-headed Woodpecker was very common among the
pines between Weishar Mill and Mineral King, July 7th.

27. Sphyrapicus ruber. Red-breasted Sapsucker.

Several “ Red-headed Woodpeckers” were busy in the pines at
Kern River Lakes, July 13th.

28. Sphyrapicus thyroideus. Williamson’s Sapsucker.

This bird was quite common among the pines and sequoias near
Weishar Mill, July 7th. Several were seen near Kern River
Lakes, July 12th to 14th.

29. Ceophleus pileatus. Pileated Woodpecker.

A bird of this species was noted at Weishar Mill, July 6th.

30. Melanerpes formicivorus bairdi. California Woodpecker.

This showy bird was usually seen in flocks of from three to a
dozen individuals. It was noted among the redwoods at Boulder,
June 21st, and in the oaks near Watsonville, San Juan, Tres Pinos
and San Benito, June 23d to 27th. In the San Joaquin Valley it
was common—particularly so near Visalia, July 3d—but ascended
the east fork of the Kaweah only to Cain’s Flat.

81. Melanerpes torquatus. Lewis’ Woodpecker.

Many Lewis’ Woodpeckers were circling in the air along San
Benito Creek between Tres Pinos and Hepsadan Mt., June 25th—
29th.

32. Colaptes cafer. Red-shafted Flicker.

A Flicker was noted at Watsonville, June 23d; another was
seen near San Juan, June 24th, and several were observed in San
Benito Valley, June 27th-29th. In the high Sierras three were
seen in Shotgun Cajion, July 10th.

33. Phalaenoptilus nuttallii californicus. California Poorwill.

Several Poorwills were heard in the foot hills near Tres Pinos
throughout the moonlit night of June 25th.

34. Chordeiles virginianus henryi? Western Night Hawk.

While all Night Hawks seen were flying so high as to prevent
their capture, it seems probable that two, seen near Tres Pinos,
June 25th, and also several observed at Kern River Lakes, July
13th, were of this form.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 211

35. Chordeiles texensis ? Texan Night Hawk.

A number of Night Hawks seen at Big Pine, Owen’s Valley,
July 18th, were referred to this species.

36. Chetura vauxii. Vaux’s Swift.

Five Vaux’s Swifts were seen with a flock of Violet-green Swal-
lows near Boulder, June 21st. It is probable that they were breed-
ingin hollow redwoods.

37. Trochilus alexandri, Black-chinned Humming-bird.

This Humming-bird was noted only near Lone Pine, where sey-
eral were observed July 16th.

88. Calypte anna. Anna’s Humming-bird.

Near Watsonville this fine bird frequented the blossoms of the

buckeye, June 24th. Several were seen near San Benito, June
26th-27th.

39. Selasphorus rufus. Rufous Humming-bird.
Two individuals of this little species were observed near Mineral

King, July 7th. They were flying about a clump of low bushes at
an altitude of about 7,500 feet.
40. Tyrannus verticalis. Arkansas Kingbird.

The western Kingbird was very common in the vicinity of San
Juan, Hollister and Tres Pinos, June 25th. At Tres Pinos a pair
had a nest which contained four young nearly ready to fly. The
species was observed in the valley of the San Benito as far up as
Erie.

In the San Joaquin Valley this bird was very abundant, and
several nests had been built upon the crossbars of telegraph poles.
It was noted near the east fork of the Kaweah, but disappeared a
short distance above Cain’s Flat, July 6th.

In Owen’s Valley several were noted near Lone Pine and Inde-
pendence, July 16th-17th.

41. Myiarchus cinerascens, Ash-throated Flycatcher.

The Ash-throat was quite common in the Coast Range between
Saratoga and Boulder, June 21st. It was observed in the hills near
Watsonville, June 23d, and at the headwaters of the San Benito
Creek, June 29th.

42. Sayornis saya. Say’s Phoebe.

A pair of Say’s Phoebes had a nest in a barn in Round Valley,
which contained two large young, July 19th.

212 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

43. Sayornis nigricans. Black Phoebe.

The Black Phoebe was not uncommon at Boulder, June 2\1st,
Watsonville, San Juan and Hollister, June 24th, Tres Pinos June
25th, and San Benito, June 27th. Several were observed along the
east fork of the Kaweah, July 4th.

44. Contopus richardsonii. Western Wood Pewee.

The Western Wood Pewee was common along the streams near
Saratoga and Congress Springs, June 21st, but was not again met
except on the east fork of the Kaweah River, where several were
observed July 5th.

45. Pica nuttallii. Yellow-billed Magpie.
The Yellow-billed Magpie was common at Visalia, July 3d.
.

46. Cyanocitta stelleri frontalis. Blue-fronted Jay.

This Jay was very common in the Coast Range between Saratoga
and Boulder, June 21st. It was again noted shortly after entering
the coniferous woods on the east fork of the Kaweah, July 6th;
was very common at Weishar Mill, and ranged up almost to Min-
eral King, July 7th.

47. Aphelocoma californica. California Jay.

The California Jay was found in the Coast Range between Sara-
toga and Boulder, June 21st. It was common along the San
Benito Creek from Tres Pinos to its source, June 15th-29th, and
was again observed at Visalia and along the east fork of the Ka-
weah to the lower limit of pines.

48. Corvusamericanus. Crow.

Crows were abundant near San Benito, June 27th, and several
small flocks were seen in Pleasant Valley, June 30th. They were
very numerous between Visalia and Three Rivers, July 3d.

49. Nucifraga columbiana. Clark’s Nutcracker,

A noisy troop of Clark’s Crows was observed almost at the top of
Farewell Gap, July 8th. The species was again seen near the head
waters of the south fork of the Kern River, July 15th.

50. Agelaius pheniceus. Red-winged Blackbird.

Red-wings were many near Watsonville, June 24th. A few were
seen at Trout Meadows, July 12th, and several near Lone Pine,
July 17th.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 213

51. Sturnella magna neglecta. Western Meadow Lark.

This Meadow Lark was abundant in the fields near Watsonville,
San Juan, Hollister and Tres Pinos, June 23d to 26th, and in al-
most all parts of the San Joaquin Valley where any low vegetation
grew July Ist to 4th.

52. Icterus bullocki. Bullock’s Oriole.

Bullock’s Oriole was observed near the following places: San
Juan and Hollister, June 24th; Tres Pinos, where a pair had a
nest which contained large young, June 25th; San Benito, June
27th; Erie, June 29th; Los Gatos Creek, June 30th; Lemoore,
July 1st; Visalia, July 4th; east fork of the Kaweah River, July
5th ; and Yosemite Valley, July 24th.

53. Scolecophagus cyanocephalus. Brewer’s Blackbird.

Brewer’s Blackbird was noted near the following places: Sara-
toga, June 21st; Watsonville, June 23d; San Juan, June 24th;
Hollister, June 24th; Tres Pinos, June 26th; San Benito, June
27th ; Lemoore, July 1st ; and Trout Meadows, July 12th.

54. Carpodacus purpureus californicus. California Purple Finch.
The California Purple Finch was not uncommon in the Coast

Range near Boulder, June 21st. Three were seen near Watson-
ville, June 23d.
55. Carpodacus cassini. Cassin’s Purple Finch.

Cassin’s Finch was first seen a mile or two below Mineral King,
on the east fork of the Kaweah, July 7th. They were much more
numerous in Shotgun Cajon, July 8th to 10th.

56. Carpodacus mexicanus frontalis. House Finch.

The “ Redhead” was found near Watsonville, San Juan, and
Hollister, June 24. It was plentifully distributed in San Benito
Valley from Tres Pinos up to the divide. A pair had a nest in a
tin can hung in the porch of a farm house on the east fork of the
Kaweah River, which contained two young birds, July 4th.

57. Leucosticte tephrocotis.. Gray-crowned Leucosticte.

Farewell Gap was filled with snow on July 8th, and here several
small flocks of Gray-crowned Finches were busily feeding on smal]
flies and grubs. A single bird of this species was seen in Mono
Pass, July 22d.

58. Spinus tristis. American Goldfinch.

The American Goldfinch was observed only near Watsonville,
June 23. It is abundant near Monterey in May and June, where

214 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

it is associated with S. psaltria, S. lawrencei, 8S. pinus, Carpodacus
purpureus californicus and C. mexicanus frontalis.
59. Spinus psaltria. Green-backed Goldfinch.

“ Wild Canaries” were many between Santa Cruz and San Ben-
ito, June 22d to 27th. Others were noted at the headwaters of the
San Benito Creek, June 29th.

60. Spinus lawrencei. Lawrence’s Goldfinch.

Several Lawrence’s Goldfinches were seen near San Benito, June
26th. The species was not observed elsewhere.

61. Chondestes grammacus strigatus. Western Lark Finch.

The “ Field Sparrow ” was very common in the grain fields near
Watsonville, San Juan, Tres Pinos and San Benito, June 23d to
27th. It was seen also at Armona, in the San Joaquin Valley, July 1st.
62. Zonotrichia leucophrys. White-crowned Sparrow.

The White-crowned Sparrow breeds commonly near Weishar
Mill and extends its range up the east fork of the Kaweah to an
altitude of about 10,500 feet. Here several were heard singing
where more than half the ground was covered with snow, July 8th.
A nest, found near the source of Owen’s River, contained four
young, apparently just hatched, July 21st.

63. Spizella socialis arizone. Western Chipping Sparrow.

Chipping Sparrows were quite common in San Benito Valley,
June 26th to 29th.

64. Junco hyemalis thurberi. Thurber’s Junco.

Thurber’s Junco was everywhere throughout the timbered regions
near Mineral King, July 7th, Shotgun Caiion, July 9th-11th, Kern
River Lakes, July 13-14th, and Little Yosemite, July 23d. Near
Weishar Mill a nest was found which contained three small, young,
July 7th, while one near Kern River Lakes contained four nearly
fresh eggs, July 14th.

65. Junco hyemalis pinosus. Point Pinos Junco.

This Junco, described from Monterey, was found breeding abund-
antly in the Coast Range from the vicinity of Saratoga to Boulder,
June 21st. At Boulder it was even more common than at Monterey
in May.

66. Amphispiza belli nevadensis. Sage Sparrow.

Several birds of this species were shot near Big Pine, Owen’s

Valley, July 18th.

1898.] © NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 215

67. Melospiza fasciata samuelis. Samuel’s Song Sparrow.
This bird was common near Saratoga, June 21st.

68. Melospiza fasciata heermanni. Heermann’s Song Sparrow.

A few were found at Lone Pine, July 17th.

69. Passerella iliaca megarhyncha. Thick-billed Sparrow.

The Thick-billed Sparrow was observed only between Shotgun
Cafion and Trout Meadows, July 11th.

70. Pipilo maculatus oregonus. Oregon Towhee.

This species was constantly present in the Coast Range between
Saratoga and Boulder. Many of the specimens approach P. m. meg-
alonyz.

71. Pipilo fuscus crissalis. Californian Towhee.

The California Towhee was rarely out of sight between Saratoga
and Santa Cruz, June 21st-22d. Several were seen near Watson-
ville, June 23d, Hollister, June 24th, San Benito, June 26th, and
Erie, June 29th.

72. Habia melanocephala. Black-headed Grosbeak.

This Grosbeak enlivened the woods between Saratoga and Boul-
der, June 21st. It was again observed at Aptos, June 23d, and was
abundant in San Benito Valley, June 25th-29th. One was seen in
Yosemite Valley, July 24th.

73. Guiraca c#ruiea eurhyncha. Western Blue Grosbeak.

The Western Blue Grosbeak was first observed near Lemoore in
the San Joaquin Valley, July 1st. In Owen’s Valley it was com-
mon near Independence, July 18th.

74. Passerina amena. Lazuli Bunting.

The Lazuli Buntings were singing along the road between Sara-
toga and Boulder, June 21st. Several were observed near Watson-
ville, June 24th, between San Juan and Hollister, June 24th, and
in San Benito Valley, June 26th-29th. In Owen’s Valley the species
was seen a number of times near Lone Pine, July 16th-17th. One
was found in Yosemite Valley, July 24th.

75. Piranga ludoviciana. Western Tanager.
The Western Tanager was observed on the east fork of the

Kaweah River from Cain’s Flat to near Mineral King, July 6th-
7th. It was common in Shotgun Cafion, July 9th-11th.

216 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

76. Petrochelidon lunifrons. Cliff Swallow.

Cliff Swallows were plentiful in the region around Soquel, Aptos,
Watsonville, San Juan, Hollister, Tres Pinos, San Benito and Erie,
June 23d-29th. A colony had about a hundred nests fastened to
the side of a cliffnear San Benito, Ten of these nests were exam-
ined June 26th. One held three fresh eggs, two each contained
three adult birds, the others were empty.

In Owen’s Valley this species was very abundant at Lone Pine,
July 17th, at Independence, July 18th, at Big Pine, July 19th, and
near Bishop, July 20th.

77. Chelidon erythrogaster. Barn Swallow,

The Barn Swallow was rare near Tres Pinos, June 26th. It was.
not again met until Owen’s Valley was reached, where it was found
associated with P. lunifrons at all points visited. Two young, which
had just left the uest, were sitting on a rafter ina barn at Big Pine,
July 18th. A nest near Bishop contained fresh eggs, July 19th.
78. Tachycineta thalassina. Violet-green Swallow.

Several Violet-green Swallows were flying with the swifts at

Boulder, June 21st, and a few were seen in San Benito Valley, June
26th-28th.
79. Phainopepla nitens. Phainopepla.

A bird of this species was seen in the Valley of the Los Gatos
Creek, June 30th. Several “ White-winged Blackbirds” were ob-
served on the east fork of the Kaweah, a short distance above Three
Rivers, July 4th.

80. Lanius ludovicianus gambeli. California Shrike. (7)

A Shrike was seen at Watsonville, June 23d, and others at Hol-
lister and Tres Pinos, June 24th. A number were in the lower
part of San Benito Valley, June 26th-27th, and in the San Joaquin
Valley near Huron and Armona, July Ist.

81. Vireo gilvus. Warbling Vireo.

The Warbling Vireo was encountered only in San Benito Valley,

where it was not uncommon, June 27th—28th.

82. Helminthophila celata lutescens. Lutescent Warbler.

This warbler was singing everywhere in the Coast Range near
Boulder, June 21st, but was not again observed until near Mineral
King, where several were feeding at an altitude of 7,400 feet, July
7th.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 21

J

83. Dendroica aestiva. Yellow Warbler.
Several Yellow Warblers were playing in the bushes near Sara-
toga, June 21st. One was noted at Watsonville, June 23d, and the

species was well represented in the San Benito Valley, June 26th—
28th.
84. Dendroica occidentalis. Hermit Warbler.

A single male of this species was seen among the willows at Min-
eral King, July 8th.

85. Clinclus mexicanus. Ousel.

Two Ousels were flirting on a raft of logs under a bridge in the
town of Boulder, June 22d. One was observed near Mineral King,
July 7th, standing upon a rock in the middle of the east fork of the
Kaweah River, which at this point is a mass of foaming rapids.
Soon it started up the stream but quickly dived under the water to
reappear a few moments later some distance below its starting point.
This performance was repeated several times. An adult and two
full grown young were secured on the Little Kern River at the foot.
of Shotgun Cajion, July 10th.

86. Oroscoptes montanus, Sage Thrasher.

The only Sage Thrasher observed was hanging with its neck
pierced by a barb of a wire fence in Round Valley, July 19th.
87. Mimus polyglottos. Mockingbird.

Mockingbirds were living in the gardens at Lemoore, July Ist.
Several were heard near Visalia, July 3d.

88. Harporhynchus redivivus. California Thrasher. ,

The “ Mountain Mockingbird ” was numerous in the Coast Range
between Saratoga and Boulder, June 21st. Several were observed
in the foothills near Watsonville, June 23d.

89. Harporhynchus lecontei. LeConte’s Thrasher.

One was noted between Independence and Big Pine, July 18th.
90. Thryothorus bewickii spilurus. Vigor’s Wren.

This Wren was frequently heard in the Coast Range north of
Boulder, June 21st.

91. Certhia familiaris occidentalis. California Creeper.

Two Creepers were busily examining the trunk of a redwood near
Boulder, June 22d. Several were seen at Weishar Mill (altitude
6,720 feet), July 7th. One was shot at Kern River Lakes, July

14th.
15

218 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

92. Parus inornatus. Plain Tit.

This bird was seen only in the Coast Range north of Boulder,
where it was generally distributed, June 21st.
93. Parus rufescens neglectus. California Chickadee.

Troops of Chickadees scolded as I rode through the Coast Range

between Saratoga and Boulder. One was seen near Watsonville,
June 23d.
94. Chamea fasciata. Wren Tit.

This little bird was rarely silent in the chaparral of the Coast
Range north of Boulder, June 21st. Others heard near Watson-
ville and San Benito were probably of this form.

95. Chamea fasciata henshawi. Pallid Wren Tit.

Wren Tits, which were heard, but not obtained, at Cain’s Flat on
the east fork of the Kaweah, July 5th, were doubtless of this pale
race.

96. Psaltriparus minimus californicus. California Bush Tit.

This Bush Tit was very abundant in the Coast Range near Boul-

der, June 21st, and also near San Benito, June 27th-28th. Several

flocks were seen near the east fork of the Kaweah a few miles above
Three Rivers, July 4th.

97. Regulus satrapa olivaceus. Western Golden-crowned Kinglet.

A Golden-crowned Kinglet flitted about in the pines near the
trail between Shotgun Cafion and Trout Meadows, July 11th.

98. Turdus ustulatus. Russet-backed Thrush.

This species was in full song near Boulder, June 21st. Several
were noted near Aptos, June 23d.

>
99. Merula migratoria propinqua. Western Robin.

Robins were first met among the pines along the east fork of the
Kaweah, at an altitude of about 6,000 feet, July 6th. They were
common in Shotgun Cajon and at Trout Meadows, July 10th-11th.
Several were observed at Kern River Lakes, July 12th-14th.

100. Sialia mexicana occidentalis. Western Bluebird.

A few birds of this species were observed near Boulder, June 21st,
one at Watsonville, June 23d, and others in San Benito Valley,
June 26th-29th.

101. Sialia arctica. Mountain Bluebird.

Mountain Bluebirds were often seen in Shotgun Cajion, July 10th,

but were not observed elsewhere.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 219

REVISION OF THE NORTH AMERICAN SLUGS: BINNEYA, HEMPHILLIA,
HESPERARION, PROPHYSAON AND ANADENULUS.

BY HENRY A. PILSBRY AND E. G. VANATTA.

In a former essay’ we undertook a revision of the Arionid genera
Ariolimax and Aphallarion. In the present paper the remaining
American genera of Arionide are similarly treated.

Profiting by a criticism from one’ whom all limacologists acknowl-
edge as master, we have extended our anatomical observations to
the pallial organs, muscle system, ete., with interesting and we
believe important results.

The genera of Arionidee, often scattered even by the great malacol-
ogists among Helicid or Limacid groups, now fall into orderly se-
quence ; and in the flood of light disclosed by comparative study of
the myology, the phylogeny and approximately final classification
of the various groups is seen clearly outlined before us.

Trivial and unsatisfactory as are the external features of slugs,
the details of their internal morphology are wonderfully varied.
Everywhere there are important characters; and those who starve
their souls on a mere study of the genitalia and oral armature miss
the best part of the feast.

Believing with Cope that all the facts of morphology should be
taken into account in systematic classification—that “ system ” is, in
fact, an epitome of the total structure, as well as, with certain dis-
tortions, a phylogeny of organisms, we have freely used characters
from all organs in which we found differentiation, in the construe-
tion of our scheme of family, subfamily and generic classification.

We must again gratefully acknowledge our indebtedness to vari-
ous friends and correspondents for material received, and especially
to Messrs. P. B. Randolph, J. G. Malone and Fred. L. Button,
Slugs have also been received from J. G. Cooper, 'l. D, A. Cockerell,
E. H. Ashmun, Wm. H. Dall, W. G. Binney and others; and the
series in our collection from Henry Hemphill has also been of great
service.

'Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1896, pp. 359-350, pl. xii-xiv.
? Dr. H. Simroth, in Zoologisches Centralblatt, [V, No. 6, March, 1897.

220 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Our observations may be grouped under four captions: I, Notes
- on the comparative anatomy of Arionide ;* II, Classification ; III,
Descriptions of the genera and species, and IV, Brief directions for
collecting and preparing slugs.

I, ANATOMY OF ARIONIDA.

General external features—Slugs of the family Arionids vary in
external form from the typical Limax shape, to forms with a con-
spicuous dorsal hump. The mantle is generally oval, situated anter-
iorly on the body, and completely closed over the shell, but in the
humped forms it is more posterior and larger, extending some dis-
tance in front of the shell, which is more or less exposed. The
breathing pore is in its right side near the edge, connected therewith
by a gutter. The mantle is adnate at the sides and behind, but
free for some distance in front. The foot always has longitudinal
“ pedal furrows ” above its lateral edges, defining a vertically grooved
band or “foot margin.” The pedal furrows meet at the tail, at
which point there is often a “caudal gland,” pit or slit developed.
The surface sculpture of the integument of the foot is varied in the
several genera and species. In Ariolimax there are close parallel
grooves aboye, becoming oblique and more spaced at the sides, and
with less conspicuous grooves at right angles to these, uniting them.
In Hemphillia, Binneya and Anadenus there is a dorsal groove run-
ning back from the mantle, with oblique grooves branching from it
on each side. In Prophysaon the surface is divided into a reticula-
tion of long diamond shaped meshes by pigmented grooves, each
mesh being further subdivided. One species, P. caruleum, is an
exception, having longitudinal grooves as in Ariolimaa or Arion.

The sole is distinctly divided into three longitudinal tracts separ-
ated by grooves in Anadenulus. In some other genera (Ariolima-
cine) there is an indistinct tripartite division, while in others (Pro-
physaon, Hemp hillia, ete.), this is not recognizable.

Shell—The shell varies in form from a moderately well developed
spiral (Binneya) or a convex plate (Hemphillia) exposed entirely
or in part by an orifice in the mantle, to a nearly flat, wholly inter-
nal plate as in most of the other genera. In some forms of Prophy-

* The elementary character of a portion of this paper scarcely calls for apol-
ogy in view of the fact that the study of slugs in America is still in an em-
bryonic condition. While in Europe there are many expert observers, we
have probably not more than four or five men in America who have given
especial attention to them.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 221

saon and Arion this plate is largely cuticular, the calcareous layer
being represented only by scattered, angular, granules. In all cases
the shell-cavity in the mantle is small, not much larger than the en-
closed shell. This contrasts strongly with the allied family Philo-
mycide, which has an enormously extended, empty shell sack.

General internal topography.—In most genera of completely
limaciform external contour, the body from head to tail is excava-
ted into one general body cavity (see these Proceedings for 1896,
Pl. XIU, fig. 1), in which the digestive system lies extended, with the
genitalia lying parallel with or across it, the liver or liver and ovo-
testis extending into the tail. In genera with a dorsal hump (Bin-
neya and Hemphillia) that portion of the foot behind the posterior
end of the hump is not excavated, but solid as in Helix and other
spiral-shelled genera. The liver and ovotestis lie in the posterior
portion of the cavity of the hump, into which the viscera are
crowded upward and forward. Along the floor of the body cavity,
extending from below the mouth a variable distance backward, lies
the suboral gland (P. A. N.S., 1896, Pl. XIII, f. 1), which in some
genera is deeply imbedded in the muscular tissue of the sole, in
others lies lightly attached thereto. In Ariolimax and its immedi-
ate allies the genital system including the ovotestis, is crowded for-
ward into the anterior half of the animal’s length; in Prophysaon
and most other genera it lies stretched out at greater length, and
the albumen gland and ovotestis are decidedly posterior. Other
peculiarities in the arrangement of the organs are noticed below.

Alimentary tract.—The buccal body in Arionide is short, as in
allied families of snails. The jaw varies from thin and flexible to
strong, is of the ordinary arched form, and is always sculptured an-
teriorly. The usual sculpture consists of numerous flattened ribs
denticulating the cutting margin; but in Prophysaon fasciatum: the
structure is rather a series of narrow, hardly overlapping or imbri-
cating plaits, much as in some species of the genus //ammulina of
the Endodontide. In P. humile the plaits seem quite lost in
a general, close, vertical striation, as in Pyramidu/a, also a genus of
Endodontide.

The radula resembles that of the Endodontide. The central
teeth are tricuspid, ectocones small. Lateral] teeth bicuspid, passing

*This gland, the function of which is to secrete mucus to lubricate the sole
in crawling, was erroneously interpreted as a buccal retractor muscle by
Binney, Man. Amer. Land Shells, p. 98, second paragraph from tup.

222 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

gradually into the marginal series by shortening of the basal-plates.
Marginals bicuspid, with occasionally a tooth with the ectocone
bifid. In the Ariolimacine the inner cusps of the outer lateral and
inner marginal teeth are much lengthened and oblique, the ectocones
much reduced, simulating the pseudo-zonitoid teeth of Flammulina.
Arion also shows this tendency to a much less degree. In the other
genera the cusps of these teeth are short or of moderate length.

All Arionide have four longitudinal folds of the intestine,’ as
usual in slugs generally ; the main divergence being in the compar-
ative length of the folds and the degree of their torsion. The folds
are designated by the initial G with exponents 1, 2, 3, 4, as in PI.
XI, fig. 29. The anterior loop between G’ and G° is caught up by
the cephalic artery immediately upon its emergence from the di-
aphragm (PI. XIV, figs. 66,70,72). In Arion the posterior loop
between G! and G’, forming the lower end of the stomach, lies pos-
terior to all other intestine folds;® but in all the other American
genera the loop formed by G* and G* lies behind the stomach.

In Ariolimax, Aphallarion and Hespearion (Pl. XI, fig. 33) the
gut is long and spirally wound. In Prophysaon (Pl. XI, figs. 28—
30, 32, 34), Anadenulus (fig. 35), Hemphillia (fig. 36) and Binneya
(fig. 31) it is much less twisted spirally. In the latter two genera
the posterior loop formed by G* and G+ is very short, on account of
the crowding forward of the viscera into the dorsal hump.

In Prophysaon, Anadenulus, Hemphillia and Binneya there is no
differentiation of the first fold into crop and stomach, such as occurs
in Ariolimaa, ete.

Reproductive organs.—In the Arionide there are two main types
of genital organs. In the more primitive and normal type there is
a well developed penis provided with a retractor muscle, and in
every way homologous with the same organ in the Helices and pul-
monate snails generally. This may be seen in Aviolimax, Hesper-
arion (Pl. XII, figs. 44,47), Binneya, Hemphillia, and the Himal-
ayan genus Anadenus. In the slugs, as well as in many other
snails, the terminal portion of the vas deferens is noticeably enlarged,
often considerably swollen for a distance above its insertion in the
penis (see Pl. XII, fig. 49, epi., Hemphillia ; and these Proceedings,
1896, Pl. XIV, fig. 14, epi., Ariolimax). This enlarged tract has

5In Afhallarion there is a short loop interposed between the second and
third long folds, making six folds. See P. A. N.S., 1896. pl. 18, f. 4.
6p. A. N.S., 1896, Pl. 13, f. 3.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 225

been called the “epiphallus.” In the other type, to which Arion,
Geomalacus, Prophysaon and Aphallarion belong, the penis has been
lost through degeneration, and the vas deferens enters the atrium
directly, its lower course being enlarged or modified in various ways
(Pl. XIII, all figs.) as described above, into an epiphallus.’ The epi-
phallus is not evertible, has no retractor, and does not have the
function of a penis. Init the sperm is lodged in packets or “ sperm-
atophores.” These, in Hesperarion and Prophysaon, are oblong,
narrow capsules of chitinous texture, with a long, slender filament
at one end (PI. XII, fig. 43). They may occasionally be found in
the spermatheca (Pl. XII, fig. 48, where the outlines of several are
faintly visible through the wall). In genera with this type of geni-
talia the vagina and lower portion of the free oviduct are introvert-
ible, and assume the function of the penis, being provided with a
retractor or retractors; and in some genera, such as Avion, the
spermatheca duct also has a retractor muscle. In forms having the
spermatheca duct inserted directly upon the atrium, there is, of
course, no vagina, and the free lower portion of oviduct alone acts
as penis... The peculiar enlargement of the epiphallus in Prophy-

7The term epiphallus was originally proposed some years ago by the senior
author of this paper for the structure as commonly found in such Ae/icide as
the West Indian Caraco/us and Pleurodon/e species, and in most of the larger
Kast Indian and Australian forms, in which it occurs associated with a well-
developed penis. as in Hesferarion, etc. It is strictly synonymous with Sim-
roth’s term ‘‘Patronenstrecke.”’ Mr. Collinge (Proc. Zool Soc. Lond., 1897,
p. 447) proposes to substitute ‘‘sperm-duct’’ for what we term epiphallus,
and restrict the latter name to ‘‘ the terminal portion of the vas deferens above
the sperm-duct.” There is, of course, no objection to the substitution of an
English name for the Greek compound, but since the term epiphallus has
already been used in extensive and numerous works in America, England and
Germany, it seems a little revolutionary to completely alter its significance.
If Mr. Collinge wants a term for the vas deferens above the epiphallus, he
had better, to avoid confusion, invent a new one; though what he wants it for
is not quite apparent

* Arion is a case in point, ¢/, Collinge, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1897, p. 447.
Geomalacus also is similar. In Prophysaon and Ap/allarion however, it is the
vagina proper which performs both its usual function and that of an evertible
penis. We consider Mr. Collinge’s statement (/. c.) that ‘‘ Messrs. Pilsbry
and Vanatta have suggested the term * * * vagina for what I term free-
oviduct’’ as an inadequate representation of our position, due, no donbt. to our
inadvertent enumeration of Arion as one of the genera in which the vagina
functions as a penis. We use the term “ vagina’ for the passage below the
union of the spermatheca duct with the free oviduct proper (see Pl. XIII, fig.
57, vag.), considering such usage justified by its functions. The term “ free
oviduct’ will naturally be retained for the passage from the apex of the va-
gina (when present) to the point of approximation of the vas deferens. Mor-
phologically, the vagina may be regarded as an elongated portion of the
atrium.

224 PROCERDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

saon is not hollow like a penis, but has a small duct only, the walls
being solid and muscular.

The remaining organs do not differ from their usual structure in
Aulacopod pulmonates, although the position of the ovotestis is
varied in the several genera.

Muscles—Only the muscles lying free in the body cavity, not
those composing the external walls or sole, will be considered herein,
the latter being morphologically similar in Arionide to the other
land snails.

The free muscles belong to two groups: (1) retractors of the bue-
cal mass, eye-peduncles and tentacles, and (2) retractors of the
generative organs.

The buccal and tentacle retractors, with the foot retractor or re-
tractors in ordinary spiral-shelled snails converge and are attached
posteriorly or proximally to the columella of the shell. In Limacid
or Arionid slugs the degenerate shell no longer serves as a support
for these muscles, which are inserted at or near the posterior margin
of the diaphragm, or floor of the lung; this position approximating
pretty closely to the posterior or former columellar margin of the
vestigial shell. In the more primitive genera, Binneya, Hemphillia,
Ariolimaz, ete., the retractors still converge to a point near the
middle of the back margin of the lung, under the posterior edge of
the shell (Pl. XIV, figs. 65, 66, 67, 69, 71). In the more divergent
genera Arion (PI. XIV, fig. 72) and Prophysaon (PI. XIV, fig. 70),
the eye and tentacle retractors have moved from the middle to the
outer posterior angles of the diaphragm. The convergent retractors
of Ariolimaz and its allies are a heritage from the spiral-shelled an-
cestors of the family, although the utility of the convergence is no
longer present; while the parallel retractors of Arion, ete., are a
later modification which resulted in a straight backward pull of
each retractor, independent of the others, and possibly brought about
mechanically by the tendency toward separation of the grouped
proximal insertions by strains on the converging muscles from their
separated distal terminations. Another muscle more or less closely
associated with the buccal and tentacle retractor system, is found in
Ariolimax, Hemplhillia and allied genera (PI. XTV, figs. 65, 66, 69).
This is a band passing from near the proximal insertions of buccal
and eye retractors forward across the diaphragm to an insertion in
the top or right side of the head. It has been termed the “ reten-
sor” by Simroth, who observed it in Ariolimax Californicus, and —

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 225

supposed it to be an aid to the extension of the penis. We scarcely
endorse this view of its function, after observing it in several other
genera in which it is not inserted near the atrium, but in the integ-
ument of the head or back above. It may aid in withdrawing the
head beneath the mantle. Morphologically this muscle is regarded
by Simroth asa slip detached from the body-wall. In this, again,
we are compelled to dissent. We regard it as a retractor pedis, the
anterior insertion of which has moved from the sole to the side or
upperintegument. Pending further investigation into its physiolo-
gic function and morphologic equivalency, we continue to use Sim-
roth’s name “ retensor” for this muscle.

The retractors of the genitalia are far less constant in form, num-
ber and position than those of the buccal mass and eyes. ‘Their
proximal insertions here, as in the spiral snails, are on the diaphragm
or lung floor. The chief muscles of this system are the penis retrac-
tor (PI. XIV, figs. 66,71 r.p.), which is almost invariably inserted
ou the left side of the diaphragm, and the oviduct retractors (PI.
XIV, fig. 67, vag. r.), which may be inserted either upon the
diaphragm or at its posterior border. The latter are well developed
only in those genera in which the oviduct or vagina has assumed
the function of a penis. In Arion and Geomalacus the spermatheca
duct also has a retractor. The several retractors of the female or-
gans are quite inconstant in position and number (being often in-
creased by splitting). They are not homologous with the penis re-
tractor, but have been developed de novo in the genera requiring
them.

Another muscle deserving mention is a short band uniting the
swollen epiphallus to its peduncle, in the genus Prophysaon (PI.
XIU, fig. 57, muse.). ‘This muscle.so conceals the true structure of
base of the epiphallus that no former authors with the exception of
Simroth, have correctly described or represented it.

Pallial region — Underlying’ the retractor muscle system is seen
a thin but dense membrane perforated only by the aorta and the
rectum. ‘This is the “diaphragm” separating the body cavity from
that of the lung (indicated in outline in the figures on Pl. XV).
Removing the diaphragm, the inner surface of the lung is exposed,
densely reticulated with blood vessels (P|. XV, fig. 73). The breath-
ing pore or pulmonary aperture (PI. XV, fig. 77, p. a.) is situated at

*The slug being pinned back downward in the dissecting pan. In the
natural position of the animal it overlies the muscles.

226 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

the middle of the right margin of the lung cavity in some genera
(Ariolimax, Aphallarion, Hesperarion), at the right anterior angle
in others (Arion, Prophysaon). The rectum lies along the right side,
posteriorly, and opens at the breathing pore (Pl. XV, figs. 73, ete.,
r). Lying in the lung cavity, and often almost filling it, is the kid-
ney (PI. XV, figs. 76, 77, 80, ete., &). It is rounded or squarish in
shape, thick, and attached by its upper side’ to the roof of the lung
cavity around the heart and toward its posterior side. The kidney
appears variously striated or shows branching ducts (as in Pl. XV,
fig. 74). Its secretion is voided through a slender duct the (second-
ary ureter, Pl. XV, wu. 7) emerging posteriorly toward the right
side, running parallel to the rectum, and opening near the edge of
the breathing pore. The characters of the ureter are insufficiently
shown in the figures. Behind the middle of the kidney there is an
excavation perforating it, occupied by the heart (PI. XV, a.v.). In
some genera both chambers of the heart are exposed below; in
others only the ventricle. Only in Aphallarion are both auricle
and ventricle concealed by a thin outer layer of the kidney. We
have occasionally observed a portion of the kidney protruded
tongue-like from the breathing pore in drowned specimens of large
species. The morphology of these organs is not greatly varied
among the genera of Arionide, and need not be farther considered
here. In defining the families of Pulmonata, these organs give
characters of great value.

II. CLASSIFICATION.

The generic characters of slugs in general, and of Arionide in
particular, as given in the standard manuals and faunal monographs,
are of the most superficial character. With a single conspicuous,
exception," we do not know of any writer who has given evidence of
much insight into or comprehension of the meaning of the varied
internal structure of slugs, or who has even suggested a phylogenetic
arrangement ot the genera of Arionide.

The complete classification of this and related families cannot be
presented here without unduly extending the limits of this paper by
including information upon the Old World genera; but so far as
the Arionide are concerned, the essential outlines may be gathered

© Or, as the preparation lies, its lower side.

1! Need we mention the brilliant author of Die Nachtschnecken der Portu-
gesisch-Azorischen Fauna?

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 227

from the table below, as all of the subfamilies are represented by
American genera.

Analytical key to subfamilies and genera.

I. Retractor muscles of pharynx and tentacles converging back-
ward, their posterior insertions contiguous, inserted at the pos-
terior edge of the diaphragm.

a. Tail solid, the viscera crowded forward and elevated into a
dorsal hump or visceral dome; shell partly or wholly ex-
posed ; penis present, with retractor muscle; ovo-testis
posterior in the body-cavity; intestine short and simply
folded ; an accessory “retensor ” muscle developed.

Subfamily BINNEYINE.

b. Shell exposed, spiral, Vitrina-shaped, with differen-
tiated, lirate or costulate nepionic whorl; mantle
with small lobes on each side of the breathing orifice ;
sole distinctly tripartite; genitalia with accessory
organs, the penis retractor inserted on the diaphragm ;
retensor muscle short, slender, toward the right side ;
buccal retractor shortly bifurcate anteriorly.

BINNEYA.

b’. Shell partially exposed, a flat or convex, non-spiral
plate; no lobes on the large mantle; sole not in the
least tripartite; genitalia without accessory organs,
the penis retractor muscle inserted on the “ retensor,”
which is strong, wide, and to the left of the buccal
retractor, the latter not bifurcate anteriorly,

HeMPHiLuiia.

a’, True slugs, the foot excavated throughout, the body-cavity
(and viscera) extending to the tail; shell small, flat, not
spiral, wholly buried ; ovo-testis anterior to the posterior
loop of intestine; intestine long, spirally twisted; inner
cusps of outer lateral and inner marginal teeth much
lengthened ; pharynx retractor deeply bifurcate anteriorly.

Subfamily ARLOLIMACINE.

”

b. A well-developed “ retensor” muscle present ; geni-
talia with no appendicula, the ovo-testis anterior
in position; tail with a “plug” in the caudal pore.
Large slugs.

228 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

c. No penis nor penis retractor muscle, the vagina
assuming its function; a small epiphallus ; right
eye retractor not passing between male and fe-
male branches of genitalia, APHALLARION.

ec’. Penis large, introverted apically, with well-de-
veloped retractor muscle; right eye retractor
involved between male and female branches of
genitalia, ARIOLIMAX,

b’. No retensor muscle; an appendicula on the atrium;

penis simple, with apical papilla and a well-devel-

oped retractor muscle; caudal pore an open pit;
foot-margin wide. Slugs of moderate size,

HEsSPERARION,

II. Retractor muscles of pharynx and tentacles running parallel,

the latter inserted proximally at the outer posterior angles of the

diaphragm; (in American genera the penis and its retractor

muscle wanting, the free oviduct or the vagina assuming its

function) ; epiphallus variously modified. True slugs, with com-

pletely buried shell plate or vestige, and visceral cavity extend-

ing into the tail.

Subfamily ARIONIN EE.

a. Retractor muscle of the pharynx inserted proximally de-
cidedly behind the posterior edge of the diaphragm ; intes-
tine long and strongly twisted spirally, the stomach, or
posterior loop formed by G' and G’, lying behind the loop
formed by G* and G‘; kidney ring-like, exposing both
chambers of the heart from below.

b. Epiphallus slender, tapering distally, not abruptly
bent or constricted near the atrium; spermatheca
duct inserted upon the atrium; free oviduct fune-
tional as a penis; ovyo-testis extending behind the
intestine ; external integument longitudinally rugose ;
sole more or less visibly tripartite; a mucous gland
at the tail; breathing pore decidedly anterior to mid-
dle of mantle, the genital orifice below it, ARION. —

a’. Retractor of the pharynx inserted at the posterior edge of
the diaphragm ; intestine shorter, not much twisted spir-
ally, the stomach, or posterior loop formed by G' and G’,
lying far anterior to the posterior loop formed by G* and
G*; external genital orifice anterior, near right tentacle.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 229

b. Sole not in the least tripartite; posterior portion of
the tail peculiarly modified and capable of self-ampu-
tation; kidney with a large excavation exposing both
chambers of the heart ; epiphallus more or less swol-
len, suddenly constricted and bent near its insertion
in the atrium, with which it communicates by ashort
pedicel which is bound to the swollen portion of epi-
phallus by a muscular band; vagina functional as a
penis ; ovo-testis lying in front of the posterior loop
of the gut, PROPHYSAON.

b’. Sole tripartite, the narrow median field defined by
longitudinal grooves; tail normal; kidney covering
the auricle (seen from below); genitalia unknown,

ANADENULUS.

III. DESCRIPTIONS OF GENERA AND SPECIES.
Genus BINNEYA J. G. Cooper, 1863,

Binneya Cooper, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., III, p. 62.

Xanthonyx Crosse & Fischer, Journ. de Conchyl.. XV, 1867, p. 223; Moll.
Terr. et Fluv. Mex., I, p. 192. Strebel & Pfeffer, Beitrag zur Kenntniss der
Gant Mexikanischer Land- und Siisswasser Conchylien, Theil IV, p. 26

1880).

Somewhat slug-like, with elevated, subspiral visceral hump and
external shell, subcentral on the back; mantle broadly produced
beyond the shell, not reflexed over it at edges; breathing pore sub-
median or behind middle of right margin of mantle, a small rounded
left and somewhat larger right cervical mantle lobe on each side of
it; genital orifice behind the right tentacle; foot radially grooved
and reticulate above, the foot-margin narrow; pedal grooves deep,
without a tail pore; sole tripartite, the areas separated by longitudi-
nal grooves; shell Vitrina-shaped, with the first (nepionic) whorl
distinctly demarked from the following, and strongly sculptured.

Viscera elevated into the dorsal hump, the body cavity not ex-
tending back of it into the tail, which is solid.

Jaw arcuate, with numerous ribs denticulating the basal margin.

Radula with 28-1-28 to 31-1-31 teeth (in B. notabilis), 32-
1-32 (in B. cordovanus), the rachidian teeth tricuspid, laterals bi-
cuspid, the ectocones small; marginal teeth bicuspid, the inner cusps
moderately long, sometimes bifid.

Intestinal tract (PI. XI, fig. 81) short; anterior loop formed by
G’ and G* somewhat twisted, posterior loop of G* and G* straight

230 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

and very short. Liver occupying posterior portion of dorsal hump
and spire of shell.

Genital system with well-developed penis continued beyond inser-
tion of retractor in a short epiphallus. Spermatheca with a long
duct or one of quite moderate length; an appendicula near the base
of vagina or penis, and, according to Pfeffer, two long-stalked,
globose, netted vaginal accessory appendages.

Muscle system (PI. XIV, fig. 65) Ariolimacine. Buccal and eye’
retractors converging posteriorly, contiguous at their proximal in-
sertions. A “retensor” arises from the roof of visceral cavity
slightly anterior to proximal insertion of retractors, and extends
anteriorly to the right side near the lower edge of mantle, where it
is inserted in the integument. Penis retractor inserted in the left
posterior region of the visceral dome.

Distribution, Santa Barbara Island, off California, Guadalupe Is-
land, off Lower California (B. notabilis), and States of Vera Cruz
and Chiapas, Mexico (B. Salleana, Cordovana, Sumichrasti, Chia-
pensis).

The chief differences between Binneya and Xanthonyx seem to be
that in Binneya the nepionic shell is spirally lirate, in Xanthonya
radially plicate; in Xanthonyx there is a small caudal horn, in
Binneya none; and there are certain discrepancies in the details of
genitalia as described by Binney, Crosse and Fischer, and Strebel
and Pfeffer. These may, perhaps, be in part merely specific varia-
tions, and in part errors of observation. On account of the sexually
immature condition of our specimens we unfortunately cannot verify
the published accounts. The description of the anatomy of Xan-
thonyx Salleanus given by Strebel and Pfeffer seems to be worthy
of confidence.

Binneya agrees with Hemphillia in the solid tail, the viscera being
crowded forward into the dorsal hump; in the exposed shell, short
and simple gut; the general arrangement of muscles, especially the
possession of a “ retensor”’ ; in the well developed penis, and general
system of external reticulation. It differs from Hemphillia mainly
in the better developed spiral shell, the differently placed retensor —
muscle and penis retractor, the presence of an appendicula, and the —
distinctly tripartite sole. That the two genera are closely allied is —
so obvious as to justify the supposition that Hemphillia descended
from a slug very similar to the existing Binneya.

Cryptostrakon W. G. B. is probably allied to Binneya, but the

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 231

muscles, genitalia and alimentary canal are unknown, and the types
though in alcohol, have been dried.
B. notabilis J. G. Cooper. Pl. XIV, figs. 63, 64, 65; Pl. XVI, figs. 87, 88.
Binneya notabilis J. G. Coop., Proce. Cal. Acad. Sci., III, p. 62, figs. 15, in
text. Tryon, Amer. Journ. Conch., II, p. 244, pl. 3, f. 4 (copied from Cooper).
W. G. Binney, Land and Fresh-water Shells of N. A., I, p. 68, f. 112. Terr.
Moll., V, p. 245, f. 141-143; pl. V, f. K (teeth), pl. xi, f. B (genitalia).
Man. Amer. Land Shells, p. 108, f. 71-74. Fourth Supplement to Terr. Moll.
V, p. 184, pl. 1, f. 9 (shell).

Alcoholic specimens measure about 10 mm. long to double that
length; color buff-gray with rather large black dots mainly scattered
along the radial grooves of the foot and in a line above the pedal
grooves, the mantle maculated with black. Surface with rather
coarse radial grooves and sparse reticulation ; a fine groove median
on tail above, not extending to the end ; foot margin narrow, closely
and evenly crenate ; sole unicolored grayish, rugose and distinetly
tripartite.

Jaw (Pl. XVI, fig. 87) and dentition (Pl. X VI, fig. 88) described
above.

Digestive and muscular anatomy described above.» Our spec-
imens were sexually immature, so that the description of genitalia
is taken from Binney, Crosse, Fischer, Strebel and Pfeffer.

Distribution : Santa Barbara Island, off California; Guadalupe
Island, off Lower California.

Genus HEMPHILLIA Bland & Binney, 1872.

Hemphillia Bland & Binney, Ann, Lye. N. H. of N. Y., X, p. 208 (1872),
type H. glandulosa B. & B.

Slug-like, with the mantle conspicuously elevated (in alcoholic
specimens) into a nonspiral visceral hump; the shell a slightly
convex, non-spiral plate partially exposed, its edges buried in the
mantle, which is very broadly produced beyond the shell on all
sides. Breathing pore behind the middle of right margin of
mantle. Genital orifice behind the right tentacle. Foot radially
grooved and reticulate above, the foot margin wide, conspicuous ;
pedal furrows deep, meeting in a mucous pore at the tail, or without
tail gland. Sole not in the least tripartite.

Viscera elevated into the dorsal hump, the body-cavity not extend-
ing back of it into the tail, which is solid.

Jaw low, wide, with about 14 low wide ribs with shallow intervals,

Radula with tricuspid central, bicuspid lateral and marginal
teeth, the inner cusp (mesocone) of the latter long.

232 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Intestinal tract short, crowded forward, but little twisted ; G*
angularly bent, forming a sort of fifth fold (Pl. XI, fig. 36).

Genital system with well developed penis containing penis-papilla,
the retractor terminal; passing intoanepiphallus. Spermatheca on
a short duct, inserted in atrium; ovotestis at posterior end of vis-
ceral cavity, immediately under hind end of shell.

Muscle system Ariolimacine, the eye and buccal retractors con-
verging posteriorly, contiguous at their proximal insertions; buceal
retractor spreading where it enters buccal mass, not bifurcate. A
broad “ retensor” muscle arises at the posterior margin of diaphragm
just left of the retractor insertions, and runs forward as far as the
front insertion of the mantle (Pl. XIV, fig. 69, ret.). Penis retrac-
tor inserted proximally on the ventral face of the retensor. Right
eye retractor passing between male and female branches of the
genitalia.

Lung radially striate rather than reticulate. Kidney a broad
squarish leaf, free for the greater part, adnate dorsally around the
heart, (Pl. XV, fig. 78).

Distribution ; Oregon, Washington and western Idaho.

Hemphillia shares with all Ariolimacine the primitive arrange-
ment of the retractor system. Like all of this subfamily except
Hesperarion it possesses that anomalous muscle called by Simroth
the “retensor,” which we hold to be a modified retractor pedis.

Apart from these important characteristics of the musculature,
there are profound differences from Ariolimaz and its allies: the
viscera are crowded forward and upward into a visceral hump under
the mantle, behind which the foot is solid, as in the spiral-shelled
snails; the shell is comparatively large and imbedded only at the
edges in the mantle, which exposes a considerable part of it; and
the intestinal tract, while fundamentally of the same type, is con-
siderably shortened and simplified.

In all of these departures from the normal slug structure, Hemp-
hillia is akin to Binneya; but it is a more advanced evolution-pro-
duct, in that it has lost the spiral torsion of the visceral mass and
shell, still retained by Binneya as a reminiscence of long past ances-
tors.

Among the secondary characters separating Hemphillia from
Binneya may be mentioned the tripartite sole, narrow foot margin,
and small mantle lobes of Binneya, the other genus having no divis-
ion of the sole, no mantle lobes and a wide foot margin. Internally,

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 233

Binneya has an appendicula, the penis retractor is inserted on the
lung floor, and the retensor muscle is weak, while in Hemphillia
there is no appendicula and the penis retractor is inserted on the
surface of the very broad and strong retensor. The digestive tract
is considerably alike in the two genera.

Key to species of Hemphillia.

a. Mantle papillose; tail acutely keeled above, terminating in a
fleshy horn which overhangs the caudal pore; pedal furrows
scarcely rising at their union behind. Penis with a bifid inter-
nal process inserted at the apex of the cavity ; spermatheca glob-
ular, on a comparatively slender duct; penis retractor muscle
inserted upon the epiphallus, . . . . . . . . H. glandulosa.

a’. Mantle slightly rugose, not papillose; no horn at tail; pedal
grooves abruptly rising behind, meeting over the tail. Penis
with a simple fleshy process inserted at the base of the cavity ;
spermatheca small with a very stout duct ; penis retractor muscle
SEENON i ws Nanay gf bp nn: « + J, Comtelue,

H. glandulosa Biand & Binney. PI. IX, figs. 1,2; Pl. XII, figs. 49, 50.

Hemphillia glandu/osa Bland & Binney, Ann, Lyc. Nat. Hist. of N. Y., X,
p- 209, pl. ix, f. 1, 3 (exterior), 5 (shell), 15-17 (teeth), Terr. Moll., V, p.
248, f. 144-146, pl. v, f. J (teeth), pl. xii, f. J, K (genitalia) ?. Man Amer.
Land Shells, p. 111, f. 75-77 (78?)._ Supplement to T. M., V, pl. iii, f. Hi (?).
Third Supplement, p. 211, pl. iv, f. D. Pilsbry & Vanatta, Nautilus XI, p,
44.

Color in alcohol blackish above, or yellowish with black spots;
the edge of mantle, sides of foot below mantle, foot-margin and sole
yellowish; shell yellow. Mantle extension densely papillose in
front of the shell and at sides. Breathing pore median on the right
side. Genital orifice near right tentacle, a groove running from it
toward the breathing pore. Foot obliquely grooved and rather
coarsely reticulated, pinched up into a high, acute keel posteriorly,
this keel declining and terminating in a prominent horn-like process
atthe end, Foot-margin rather wide, vertically grooved as usual.
Pedal furrows scarcely rising at the tail, meeting in a caudal pore
immediately below the “horn.” Sole transversely wrinkled, the
wrinkles bent backward mesially, as in Prophysaon. Length 10 to
13 mm.

Shell convex, with yellow cuticle, thin calcareous layer and pos-
terior nucleus.

Genitalia (P|. XII, figs. 49, 50) with the penis enormously swollen,
its lumen filled by a bifid, fleshy, imperforate, corrugated body

16 .

234 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

attached to one side above; epiphallus moderately stout, longer
than the penis, bearing the retractor muscle near its base. Sperm-
atheca globular, large, borne on a duct of its own length, inserted
upon the atrium.

Type locality, Astoria, Oregon (Hemphill); also in Washington —
at Chehalis; and according to Binney, Olympia and Gray’s Har-
bor.

Part of several of the references given above apply to H. came-
lus, Mr. Binney having included that species in glandulosa. The
latter is herein restricted to slugs with papillose mantle and caudal
horn, as originally indicated by Bland and Binney.

Besides the conpsicuous external differences noticed under H.
camelus, the two species differ markedly in the genitalia. In H.,
glandulosa the fleshy process in the penis is bifid and attached to
the side at the apex of the cavity. In H. camelus the process is
simple and attached basally. The position of the penis-retractor
and the shape of the spermatheca and its duct differ in the two
forms.

H. camelus Pilsbry & Vanatta, Pl. IX, figs. 3,4; Pl. XII, figs. 41, 42; Pl. XVI,

fig. 85.

Hemphillia camelus Pilsbry & Vanatta, Nautilus, XT, p. 44 (August, 1897).

Color in alcohol pale grayish-buff, closely speckled and maculated
with blackish on the mantle and tail, more sparsely and lightly so
on the anterior half of the foot, the sole without dark markings.
On the mantle the spots form two more or less distinct longitudinal
bands. Surface of the mantle somewhat rugose, not papillate ;
breathing pore behind the middle. Genital opening near right
tentacle. Foot with a short dorsal groove behind mantle, obliquely
descending grooves with sparse reticulation on the sides of tail, and
coarse reticulation below mantle laterally ; the head longitudinally
closely grooved and reticulate ; sole as in H. glandulosa; tail some-
what keeled above near the end, without any appearance of a cau-
dal “horn.” Foot-margin wide, grooved vertically ; pedal furrows
abruptly and conspicuously rising at the tail, with no noticeable
caudal pore at their union, at least in alcoholic examples, but in one
specimen there seems to be a transverse slit under the pedal groove,
with a vertical gutter below it, T-shaped. In another, nothing of
this appears. Length about 28 mm.

Genitalia (Pl. XII, fig. 41, 42) with a very large penis, its cavity
filled by a large, transversely corrugated, solid, fleshy body attached
at the base of the penis, and a small tongue-like body arising close

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 235

to the entrance of the epiphallus (fig. 42). The latter is longer than
in H. glandulosa, and the retractor muscle is inserted at its root.
Spermatheca small, its duct very stout, inserted upon the atrium.

Shell slightly convex, long-oval, with clear yellow cuticle, thin
calcareous layer, and posterior nucleus; thesurface lightly marked
with growth lines. Length 8, width 5 mm.

Jaw low, wide, with about 14 low, broad ribs separated by nar-
row intervals. Radula: Marginals with rather long inner cusps
(Pl. XVI, fig. 85).

Old Mission, Idaho (Henry Hemphill).

This species has a proportionally smaller shell than H. glandulosa,
a longer, less compressed and less carinated tail, with no trace of a
caudal horn and no perceptible caudal gland; the mantle is not
papillose, the pedal furrows rise abruptly at the tail, uniting over
it, and the genitalia differ in important respects, as noticed under
the description of H. glandulosa.

Genus ARIOLIMAX Morch, 1860,

Ariolimax Mérch, Malak. Blatter, VI, p. 110. Pilsbry & Vanatta, Proc.
Acad. N. 8. Phila., 1896, p. 342.

To the generic characters described and implied in our former
paper, the following may be added :

Tail gland (P]. XV, fig. 81) a peculiar triangular mass of tissue, in
aleoholic specimens deeply fissured transversely.

Muscle system (PI. XIV, fig. 66, A. columbianus) having the
buccal and eye retractors converging posteriorly, their proximal in-
sertions contiguous at the posterior edge of the diaphragm. Bue-
cal retractor very deeply bifurcate. An accessory muscle, the
“ retensor,” arises with the retractor group, to the left of the median

_line, and passing forward is inserted. i in the integument of the neck,
on the right side or above.

Lung (PI. XV, fig. 73, A. columbianus, the kidney removed) and
kidney (Pl. XV, fig. 74, A. columbianus) as usual in Arionida,
Auricle concealed by kidney, ventricle (fig. 78, 74, v) exposed.

Subsequent studies support the conclusion reached in our former
paper, that Ariolimaz is more closely allied to Aphadlarion than to
any other known genus.

Genus APHALLARION Pilsbry & Vanatta, 1896.

Aphallarion P. & V., Proc. Acad. N. 8. Phila., 1896, p. 348.

Tail pore as in Ariolimaz.

Muscle system (PI. XIV, fig. 67) substantially like Ariolimaz in
arrangement of the buccal and eye retractors, except that the right

236 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

eye retractor is not involved between the ¢ and @ branches of
genitalia; ‘“‘retensor” inserted nearer the median line anteriorly.
Penis retractor wanting, but several vaginal retractors (fig. 67,
vag. 7.) arise from the diaphragm.

Pallial region as in Ariolimax, except that the kidney is larger,
and both auricle and ventricle are concealed therein (Pl. XV, fig.
76).

Aphallarion is intimately related to Ariolimax, from which it dif-
fers in the absence of a penis and its retractor, in having the right
eye retractor free from and to the left of the genitalia, and in havy-
ing both chambers of the heart embedded in the kidney. No other
genus is nearly allied.

To our former account it may be added that Mr. Wetherby in-
forms us that his Ariolimax Hecowxi from Santa Cruz is specifically
the same as our A. Buttoni. As he remembers the genital system,
it corresponded with that of our species. Since A. Hecowi was not
described, this will in no way affect nomenclature, but is of interest
as removing a doubtful species from slug literature, and extending
the geographic range of Aphallarion.

Genus HESPERARION Simroth, 1891.
Hesperarton Simroth, Malak. Blitter (n. F.) XI, Heft 2, p. 109. Type

Ariolimax niger Coop.

Slugs with the usual small, anterior, shield-like mantle, completely
buried, non-spiral shell plate, and long body-cavity excavated to
end of tail. Breathing pore somewhat behind middle of right
mantle edge. Genital orifice distant from tentacle, below the ante-
rior margin of mantle. Foot with longitudinal grooves, becoming
oblique on the sides, the foot margin moderate, pedal furrows deep,
meeting in a very conspicuous, subtriangular, posteriorly guttered
tail pit. Sole rather indistinctly tripartite, the areas not defined by
longitudinal grooves. Jaw with coarse ribs.

Radula with the usual tricuspid central and bicuspid lateral
teeth, ectocones small; marginals with very long, oblique cusps, the
ectocone minute or vestigial.

Intestinal tract (Pl. XI, fig. 33) muchas in Ariolimaxz. G" in-
distinctly divided into crop and stomach, making a half revolution ;
G describing a complete revolution in the opposite direction, G°
another, reversed, and G* still another revolution parallel to G’.
Posterior loop formed by G* and G‘ lying behind that formed by
G' and G’, as in Ariolimacine generally.

—— |"

— |

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 257

Genital system (Pl. XII, figs. 44-48) having a well developed
penis with terminal retractor and epiphallus, lumen with plicate
walls (fig. 45), and a large apical penis papilla (figs. 45, 46).
Atrium bearing a vermiform appendicula with swollen base (fig. 44
ap ; fig. 47,ap). Spermatheca borne on ashort, basally swollen duct.
Spermatophores (fig. 43, x 13) cbitinous, elongate, with flagellum-
like extension at oneend. Ovotestis separated from albumen gland,
lying on the right side under G’*, to the right of posterior end of
stomach (Pl. XI, fig. 33, ot.).

Muscle system (PI. XIV, fig. 71) Ariolimacine in having the re-
tractors converging posteriorly, their proximal insertions contigu-
ous; buccal retractor deeply bifurcate. No “retensor.” Penis
retractor short, broad, inserted in the left anterior portion of the
lung floor or diaphragm (fig. 71, r. p.).

Lung as usual; kidney very large (Pl. XV, fig. 77, &). Only the
ventricle exposed.

Distribution : Middle portion of California, in the counties lying
near and below San Francisco Bay, west of the Sierra Nevada.

Externally Hesperarion is like Ariolimax and Aphallarion except
in the structure of the caudal pore, which is a deep, open pit in this
genus, while in the others it is filled by a mass of spongy tissue.
The jaw, teeth, intestine, pallial region and musculature of the
three genera are practically identical in their main features, except
that Hesperarion totally lacks a “ retensor” muscle.

In the genitalia are found further important differences. The
ovotestis is not packed adjacent to the albumen gland anteriorly, as
in Ariolimaz and Aphallarion, but is carried back to a more pos-
terior position among the hind loops of the intestine, and surrounded
by the liver (PI. XI, fig. 33, of.). The penis, externally similiar
to that of Ariolimaz, is of the usual simple structure, not invagi-
nated, and the atrium bears an enigmatic organ of unknown fune-
tion, our ignorance of which is veiled behind the term “ appendic-
ula.” This is wanting in other Arionide with the exception of
Binneya, the most primitive genus of the family.

The species of Hesperarion are dimorphic, like Ario/imax colum-
_ bianus, having a spotted and an immaculate form,

This convenient term was first used by Dr. von Ihering in his “ Morpholo-
gie und Systematik des Genitalapparates von Helix.’’ The appendicula in-
serted low on the vagina or on the atrium is not homologous with the elon-

ted sack found in Panda, Strophocheilus, ete., associated with the spermatheca.

he latter probably serves the purpose of an accessory spermatheca,

238 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.
H. niger (J. G. Cooper). Pl. IX, figs. 5,6; Pl. XI, fig. 33; Pl. XII, figs. 43-48;
Pl. XIV, fig. 71.

Ariolimax niger J. G. Cooper, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1872, p. 147,
pl. 3, f. B, 1-4. W.G. Binney, Terr. Moll. V, p. 234, f. 183 (caudal pore) ;
pl. v, f. D, F, (teeth) ; pl. xii, f. F (genitalia); Man. Amer. Land Shells, p.
100, f. 64; Terr. Moll. v, Third Supplement, Bull. M. C. Z., XIX, no. 4, p.
212, pl. v, f. A, I, C, D (external aspect and caudal pore). Cockerell, Ann.
Mag. N. H. (6), vi, p. 278, 279.

Wigal niger Simroth, Malak. Blitter (n. F.), xi, p. 109-119, pl. 1, f.
7-14.

Ariolimax Andersoni J. G. Coop.?, W. G. Binney, Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist. N.
Y., xi, p. 182, pl. xii, f. 9 (genitalia), pl. xviii, f. G (teeth); Terrestr. Moll.
V, p. 235, f. 135, 136, pl. xii, f. E (genitalia), pl. v, f. G (teeth). Man. Amer.
Land Shells, p. 132, f. 66, 67. Second Suppl. T. M. V, p. 43. Third Suppl.
p- 212, pl. v, f. F. Not Arion Andersoni J. G. Cooper.

Exterior: Upper surface (in alcoholic specimens) smoky brown-
black above, slightly lighter gray-black laterally, unicolored or
dappled with black ragged spots; sole gray-black, with black spots
scattered along the inner edge of the lateral areas. Integument
obliquely longitudinally grooved, not much reticulated. Mantle
with the lung pore submedian ; genital orifice some distance behind
the right tentacle, caudal pore conspicuously large and deep, witha
cleft extending to the tail ; sole indistinctly tripartite. Length (in
aleohol) 30-45 mm.

The genitalia in two individuals dissected show considerable
variation. In one, (Pl. XII, fig. 44), the penis is large nearly its
entire length, constricted at base; this being from a maculated indi-
vidual like Pl. IX, figs. 5, 6, from Santa Clara, Cal. In the other,
a typical niger in coloring, the penis is slender below, swollen
above (Pl. XII, fig. 47). We hope to receive further specimens
and ascertain the limits and significance of variation in these
organs.

In one specimen (Mus. no. 71,078) there were thirteen spermato-
phores (P]. XII, fig. 45) in the spermatheca.

Jaw with eleven wide ribs.

tadula agreeing with Ariolimaz in the long, oblique cusps of the
marginal teeth.

Cooper’s types were from the neighborhood of San Francisco Bay.
Specimens are before us from Bolinas, Haywards, Santa Clara,
Stevens’ Creek Canyon, Santa Cruz range, 900 feet altitude, and
near San José. Binney gives the localities Santa Rosa, Healds-
burg, Sonoma Co.; and for the synonymous Ariolimaxz Anderson,
mountains of Alameda Co. The general range, therefore, covers
the Coast and Bay counties from Sonoma to Santa Cruz.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 239

Professor Cockerell defines a color-form maculatus as follows:
“This much resembles A. hemphilli var. maculatus, but is larger
and stouter, and has the lateral areas of the sole marbled as in
niger. Two specimens were received from Dr. Cooper, who found
them at Haywards, Cal.” The maculated form is shown in our
figures. It seems more abundant than the spotless slug, but in our
series it is difficult to separate the two, as some which appear spot-
less often show a few macul on close examination.

H. Hemphilli (W. G. Binney).

Ariolimax HemphilliW.G. Binney, Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist. N. Y., XI, p. 181,
pl. xii, f. 7 (genitalia), pl. xviii, f. H (teeth) (1875); Terrestr. Moll., V, p.
235, f. 134, pl. v, f. H (teeth), pl. xii, f. G (genitalia) ; Man. Amer. Land
Shells, p. 102, f. 65. Third Suppl. Terr. Moll., v, p. 212, pl. v, f. G. Cock-
erell, Ann. Mag. N. H. (6), vi, p. 278.

Ariolimax Hemphilli yar, maculatus Ckll. in Binney, Third Supplement to
Terr. Moll., V, p. 212, pl. v, f. B.

Since its first publication in 1875, nothing material has been
added to our knowledge of this species. Its generic position is un-
certain. The desirability of procuring additional specimens in
order to place the form upon a better basis will be evident. The
type locality is Niles Station, Alameda Co., California.

Professor Cockerell’s color-form maculatus has been figured in
Binney’s Third Supplement, but not before described. “Small
spotted hemphilli found by Dr. Cooper at Haywards. When alive,
as I learn from Dr. Cooper, they are reddish, the spotted variety of
niger being gray; in alcohol, both appear gray. They agree with
hemphilli W.G. B. in the genitalia, and differ also from niger in
their more slender form and immaculate sole of foot. Indeed, com-
paring them with typical niger, they appear fundamentally distinct
in every way, but the var. maculatus of niger is strangely interme-

diate—just what one might expect a niger * hemphilli hybrid to

be.” (CkIl. ma.).
Genus ARION Ferussac.

Conspicuous in the European fauna for the number of species
and individuals, and forthe large size and frequently brilliant col-
oring of some forms, this genus is represented in America by one or
two species introduced from Europe and still very local in distribu-
tion. They have not yet exhibited the tendency to spread charac-
teristic of the introduced Limaces.

Arion hortensis Fér. Pl. XV, figs. 79, 82, 83; Pl. XIV, fig. 72.

Numerous specimens of this species were collected in March and

April, 1896 near or in a greenhouse in Seattle, Washington, by Mr.

240 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

P. B. Randolph. A specimen much contracted in alcohol is here
figured, with the retractor system and pallial organs. As preserved
they measure 15 to 20 mm. in length; ground-color above dirty
whitish, with a.conspicuous blackish stripe along each side of mantle
and of the foot behind it, the back with a broad median bluish or
slate-black band, tapering posteriorly, often only faintly indicated ;
sole light yellow.

In other specimens from Poughkeepsie, N. Y., the region between
the longitudinal black bands on mantle and sides is speckled and
maculated with black.

As this species is an immigrant from Europe, where it is well
known and has been repeatedly investigated anatomically, we omit
a detailed description and synonymy. The coarsely, longitudinally
rugose integument, anterior position of the breathing orifice, and
posterior position of the genital orifice, below the other, readily dis-
tinguish Arion from all native American slugs.

Arion sp.

W. G. Binney describes a slug referred by him to Arion fuscus
Miller, from Boston, Mass. Mr. Cockerell considers it likely that
the figure in Terrestrial Mollusks, Pl. LXIV, fig. 1, (copied in Man.
Amer. L. Shells, fig. 502) represents A. subfuscus. Whether more
than one species of Arion occurs in America will remain doubtful
until further examination of the Bostonian slug can be made.

Genus PROPHYSAON Biand & Binney, 1873.

Prophysaon Bland & Binney, Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist. N. Y., X, 1873, p. 293;
type P. hemphilli B. & B. Cockerell, Ann. Mag. N. H. (6), VI, p. 277-279,
and Nautilus XI, p. 77 (key to species).—W. J. Raymond, Nautilus, IV, p.6
(mutilation of tail).

Phenacarion Cockerell, Nautilus III, p. 127 (March, 1890), type Arion
foliolatus Gld. The Conchologist II, p. 118.

Siugs with anterior shield-like mantle in which the flat, non-spiral
shell is completely buried, the breathing pore in front of the middle
of its right margin ; genital orifice behind and near right tentacle.
Foot reticulated, the areole subdivided (except in cwruleum) ; the
coloration in two or three longitudinal bands on mantle or mantle
and foot, or monochromatic. Foot-margin wide, pedal furrows deep,
with no noticeable caudal pore (or only a small slit, in P. foliolatum,
hardly or not visible in alcoholic specimens). Sole not in the least
tripartite. Tail usually showing an oblique constriction at from the
posterior third to sixth of the animal’s length, marking the place
where self-amputation takes place.

eS a ee ee

————E—————«oxo - es

a oe

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 241

Body cavity extending into the foot, but frequently not to its end ;
genital system and gut lying side by side and extending about the
same distance backward (Pl. XI, fig. 34, P. fasciatum).

Jaw weak, flexible; flatly ribbed, plaited or striate. Rachidian
teeth tricuspid, laterals bicuspid, the ectocones small; marginals
formed by shortening of the basal-plates, bicuspid, the mesocone
moderate or short, ectocone small, occasionally bifid.

Intestinal tract (PI. XI, figs. 28, P. Andersoni ; fig. 30, P. ceruleum,
fig. 32, P. foliolatum, and fig. 34, P. faseiatum) with four well devel-
oped sigmoid folds; no division of G' into crop and stomach ; ante-
rior loop formed by G’* and G* twisted one-half revolution ; poste-
-rior loop of G* and G* long, extending far behind stomach, and
twisted less than a complete revolution.

Genital system (Pl. XII, figs. 37-40, and Pl. XIII, all figs.)
not crowded forward; no penis nor retractor; epiphallus either
very stout, cylindrical and fleshy, with minute perforation, or more
slender, long and tapering distally ; in either case suddenly narrow-
ing near the atrium to a minute duct, which enters the atrium by a
short tapering peduncle, in close contact with which the enlarged
epiphallus is held by a muscle (seen in fig. 57 of Pl. XIII, muse., and
fig. 39 of Pl. XII). Duct of spermatheca short ; spermatophores as
in Hesperarion. Ovotestis (Pl. XI, fig. 34) lying anterior to the
posterior loop of gut, between its upper and lower folds, adjacent
to the albumen gland.

Muscle system (PI. XIV, fig. 70) with the eye retractors inserted
at the outer posterior angles of the diaphragm, as in Arion; buecal
retractor inserted at the posterior edge of diaphragm to the right of
the middle, bifurcate distally. Right eye retractor passing between
branches of genitalia.

Pallial region (PI. XV, fig. 80) much as in Arion; breathing
pore, anus and nephridial orifice at the right anterior angle of the
pallial cavity ; kidney ring-like, excavated to show both chambers
of the heart; other features as usual in the family.

Distribution: Middle California to British Columbia, eastward
in Idaho to the Cour d’Aléne Mts.

Prophysaon stands rather isolated in the Arionine. The only
native American genus approaching it is Anadenulus, but this differs
in several important particulars to be mentioned below. The Pale-
arctic Arion is like Prophysaon in the pallial region, but differs
markedly in (1) the removal of the buccal retractor insertion back-

242 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

ward from the diaphragm edge, (2) the complex twisting of the gut
and the posterior position of the stomach (see these Proceedings, 1896,
pl. 18, f. 3) ; (8) the simpler form of the epiphallus, and well developed
retractor muscles of vagina and spermatheca, and (4) the normally
constructed tail. There are various other minor differences; but upon
the whole, the American genus is less divergent than the European
from the primitive forms of the family in its musculature, more diver-
gent in the tail structure and epiphallus. In Arion, shell reduction
has progressed rather further, at least in thetypical forms. Geoma-
lacus, a lateral branch from the Arion stem, is even more remote from
the American genus. The Himalayan genus Anadenus (with which
Fischer unites Prophysaon as a subgenus), differs conspicuously in
possessing a well developed penis with retractor, and externally in
the extreme narrowness of the foot margin and the tripartite sole.

The self-amputation of the tail in Prophysaon has been described
by Henry Hemphill® and W. J. Raymond ;* while Simroth has
noticed and figured the appearance of the tail in alcoholic specimens
before amputation.

Mr. Raymond writes as follows: “In August, 1888, I collected
on one occasion about a dozen examples of Prophysaon Andersoni
J. G. Cp., near the San José reservoir, above Lexington, Santa
Clara County. While taking measurements of the living specimens,
before putting them into alcohol, I noticed in several a contraction
about two-thirds of the length from the head. This appeared as an
indented line completely encircling the body. Upon handling the
slugs to examine this phenomenon more closely, the line became
deeper and in the case of two of the specimens the tail dropped off,
almost as readily as the ray of the so-called ‘ brittle’ starfish.”

Nearly all full grown alcoholic specimens of P. Andersoni, folio-
latum and ceruleum show a well defined impressed line around the
tail, or occasionally the tail has actually been amputated, as in the
specimen of the last-named species figured on Plate IX, figs. 7 to 11.
Dissection shows that the body cavity does not extend beyond the
point of excision, or but little beyond; the remainder of the tail
being occupied by very spongy vesicular connective tissue.

We have not seen Prophysaon alive, and observations are still
lacking ao some ier points which slots pee uaEny be sup-

3 Nautilus II, p- 126, Eprnnie: Fourth Buuclemana to Terr. Moll. V, p.
182.

14 Nautilus LV, p. 7.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 243

plied by keeping slugs in captivity. Does regeneration of the lost
member take place, and if so, is the renewed tail structurally like
the amputated one, or does loss of the tail result eventually in
death? What animals persecute Prophysaon? Observations upon
these questions might go a long way toward explaining the present
utility of tail amputation, though they may not indicate the mode
of its origin. Without knowledge of the final consquences of am-
putation to the slug, or what its natural enemies are, speculation
upon tail excision is idle. In an analogous case now well known,
that of Helicarion in the Philippine Islands, Semper” states that
every species he examined “ possessed the singular property, which
many lizards hayve—particularly the Geckos—of shedding their tail
when they are seized somewhat roughly at a little way behind the
shell. This they do by whisking the tail up and down with extra-
ordinary rapidity, almost convulsively, till it drops off; if the creat-
ure is held by the tail, it immediately falls to the ground, where it
easily hides among the leaves. If it is laid flat on the hand, the
rapid wagging movement is strong enough to raise the body with a
spring into the air, so that it falls over on to the ground. These
snails at first constantly escaped me and my collectors in this way,
and not unfrequently we had nothing but the tail left in our hands.
According to Guilding’s observations the same peculiarity of part-
ing with the hinder prolongation of the foot characterizes the West
Indian snail Stenopus. I ascertained by further investigation that
in a free state of nature such self-mutilation not unfrequently occurs,
for about a hundred specimens of Helicarion gutta, which is ex-
tremely common in the north-east of Luzon, I found, perhaps, ten in-
dividuals that had shed their tails, or, to speak more accurately, the
hinder end of the foot, and had the stumps partly healed, or the foot
to some extent grown again. Now, this hinder portion of the foot
is the most conspicuous part of the snail’s body, and it may be sup-
posed that it is, in most cases, the part first seized by the reptiles or
birds that prey upon them ; but, startled by the escape of the body,
they would soon learn to recognize, by the form of the tail, those
species which were capable, by this self-amputation, of depriving
them of the larger and probably the only valuable portion of the
prey. In this way the species of the genus Helicarion can escape
the pursuit of their enemies better than they otherwise could on
account of their exposed mode of life.”

% Animal Life, Chapter XII.

244 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Whether Semper’s plausible supposition be held to sufficiently ex-
plain the self-mutilation of Helicarion or not, it seems to us that the
slowness of the process of amputation in Prophysaon precludes the
idea that it is a means of escape from birds, which, in any case, are
as likely to seize the slug by the head or middle as by the tail. IEf
molluscan foes are in question, the time consumed in amputation is
of less moment; and it might be worth while to imprison Prophys-
aon with Cireinaria (alias Selenites and Macrocyclis), which is the
most rapacious snail of the West Coast. The suggestion is offered
for what it may be worth; and the whole subject referred to the
enterprising and enthusiastic naturalists of the West for observation
and experiment.

The species of Prophysaon fall into three very distinct groups,
two of them containing but one species each, the other including P.
Andersoni Coop. (plus Hemphilli B. & B., Pacifiewn and flavum
Ckll.), and P. foliolatum Gld. (including Piccarlan Hemphilli W.
G. B.). As the synonymy indicates, these two species are excessively
variable. In the case of Andersoni a great extent of territory is in-
habited by the several forms and typical form of the species, and
much more extensive series than we have yet seen must be brought
together before a final decision upon the limits of variation, and the
definable subspecies if any exist, can be made. Our study of them
is based wholly upon alcoholic slugs, gathered from localities hun-
dreds of miles apart; and it is to be expected that richer collections
may modify, and certainly will amplify, the conclusions reached.

Our general results so far as synonymy is concerned, do not differ
radically from those attained by Professor Cockerell, whose synopsis
of the species is given below.”

46“ (1), Epiphallus stout, sausage-shaped. A pale dorsal stripe.

a. Ochreous species, . . . . . P. Pacificum (incl. favum),
b. Grayish species, . . . P&P. Andersoni (incl. Hemphill).
“ (2). Epiphallus banana shaped, ‘but tapering attheend. No pale dorsal
stripe, . . /P. ceruleum ( Epiphallus rather slender, flattish,
tapering, somewhat curved. Shell 2 mm. long, narrow, white,
shiny).

* (3). Epiphallus slender, gradually tapering to a point. Body with a
blackish dorsal band.
B/ ORW SiNUed, Peete ss. «5, ake . LP. fasciatum,
b. Jaw only striate, . . . LP. Aumile. (Until more material
of Aumile is seen, it cannot be made sure that the jaw-character
is a specific one. \
For some further details of i peer Cockerell’s views, see Mautilus, Nov.
1897, pp. 77-79. The “banana” or “sausage” shape of the epiphallus we
find to be a variable character, not ‘cotidaane specifically.

y= SS

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 245

Key to species of Prophysaon (aleoholic specimens).

a. Surface with coarse diamond-meshed reticulation, the meshes
finely subdivided; mantle banded or spotted; foot-margin
moderate or wide.

b. Mantle free about two-thirds of the distance back to
breathing orifice (Pl. X, fig. 17). Epiphallus stout,
eylindrical, bluntly rounded at both ends; vas deferens
extremely long, convoluted in a snarl; usually a pale
dorsal line on the tail ; jaw coarsely ribbed.

e. Outer lateral and inner marginal teeth with blunt
and rather short cusps. Length 50-80 mm. (in
alcohol), the posterior third or more being marked
off by an oblique constriction and subject to self-
ampieAtion, is) 4 4 6.) ys P. foliolatum.

ce’, Outer lateral and inner marginal teeeth with long,

acutely pointed cusps. Length 25-35 mm. (in

alcohol), the posterior part subject to amputation

RMteE Sy nee el ee a a a i Be Aandernons,

b’. Mantle free as far back as the breathing orifice (Pl. X,

fig.27). Epiphallus slender, gradually tapering distally ;

vas deferens not elongated; back with a wide red or pale

area enclosing a darker median band, and bounded on

each side by dark lateral bands, or entire slug dusky ;
jaw closely, finely plaited or striated,

P. humile and var. fasciatum.

a’, Surface longitudinally closely grooved above, obliquely and

less closely so at the sides, the grooves occasionally joined by

short transverse lives ; foot-margin very narrow, 1. cwruleum.

P. Andersoni (J. G. Cooper). PI. X, figs. 18-22; PI. XI, fig. 28, 29, Pl. XIII, figs.

59-62; Pl. XVI, figs. 92, 93.

Arion ? Andersonii J. G. Cooper, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1872, p. 148,
pl. 3, f. F, 1-5.

Not ‘‘Prophysaon Andersoni J, G. Cooper,” W. G. Binney, Second Supple-
ment to T. M., V, p. 42 (=. fasciatum),

Prophysaon Andersoni J. G. Cooper, W. G. Binney, Third Supplement to
Terr. Moll., V, p. 208, pl. iii, f. 1, pl. vii, f. C; pl. i, f. 3 (dentition), pl. ix,
f. 1, J (surface reticulation). Fourth Supplement, p. 179. :

Prophysaon Andersoni J. G. Cooper, Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1879, p. 288.
Cockerell, Ann, Mag. N. H. (6), VI, R. 278; Nautilus XI, p. 77,78 (includes
P, Hemphilli). Raymond, Nautilus LV, p. 6. :

Prophysaon Andersoni yar. marmoratum Ckll., The Conchologist II, p, 72.

P. Andersoni var, suffusum Ck\l., The Conchologist LI, p. 118.

Prophysaon Hemphilli Bland & Binn., Ann. Lyc. N. H, of N. Y., X, p. 295,
pl. xiii, exclusive of fig. 5 (external view, shell, jaw, teeth, digestive system and

246 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

genitalia). W.G. Binney, Terrestr. Moll., V, p. 238, f. 137, 188, 139, pl. v
f. 1 (teeth), = xii, f. H_ (genitalia), ‘‘specimens from Mendocino County’
excluded. Man. Amer. Land Shells, p. 105, f. 68, 69, 70. Third Supplement
to T. M., V, p. 208, pl vii, f. D. Simroth, Nova Acta Acad. Cees. Leop.-
Carol. Germ. Nat. Cur., LVI, 1891, p. 362, pl. 7, f. 5-8 (full account of anat-
omy). Taylor, The Ottawa Naturalist ITI, p. 90.

Prophysaon pacificum Cockerell, Nautilus III, p. 111 (Feb., 1890); V, p.
31; XI, p. 77 (includes favum). W. G. Binney, Third Supplement to T. Ne
V, p- 210, pl. vii, f. B. F. H.

Prophysaon flavum Cockerell, Nautilus ITI, p. 111. Ann. Mag. N. H. (6),
at Pp: een as var. of pacificum. W.G. Binney, Third Suppl., p. 210,
E Scabbiean Andersonii var. pallidum Ck\l., Nautilus V, p. 31.

Length in alcohol 25-35 mm. Upper surface buff-gray or whit-
ish flesh colored, with irregular blackish diamond venation and
sometimes suffused with purplish-black, showing a pale dorsal line;
the mantle yellowish, with two curved lateral black stripes, with or
without scattered marbling; sole pale buff or dirty white ; foot-mar-
gin pale; below and anterior to mantle whitish. Integument with
rather coarse diamond venation, the areole subdivided into minute
polygonal granules.

Shel] oval, with moderately consistent calcareous layer.

Genitalia (Pl. XIII, figs. 59, 60, 61): Epiphallus cylindric,
straight or sometimes curved, with an abrupt basal constriction,
kink and peduncle secured by a short muscle, as described above.
Vas deferens very long, its length measured from end to the abrupt
bend at the atrium being about 7 times the length of the epiphallus;
thrown into a complicated snarl. Spermatheca globose or oval, on
a rather slender duct. Vaginalong. Free oviduct short. Ovotestis
showing externally a compact mass of rounded follicles. Right
eye retractor passing between branches of genitalia.

Measurements of several specimens are as follows: a (Mus. no.
69,010, Oakland, Cal.), length of swollen epiphallus 9 mm.; length
of extended vas deferens, from apex of the epiphallus to base of
same 64 mm.; b (same locality), epipballus 5, v. d. 36 mm.; ¢ (Port-
land, Ore.) epiphallus 5.5, v. d. 37 mm.

Jaw (Pl. XVI, fig. 92, specimen from San Juan I.) arcuate with
about 15 well-defined ribs, denticulating the basal margin.

Radula with 44-1-44 teeth; rachidian tricuspid, laterals bicuspid,
the ectocones quite small; marginals with moderately long, pointed
mesocones and minute ectocones (Pl. XVI, fig. 93, two outer lateral,
and a group of marginal teeth).

Alcoholic P. Andersoni varies in general tone from a smoky lead
color above to reddish with black marbling or suffusion, mantle light

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 247

dirty buff, or yellow, variously marked. Very rarely the two
curved black stripes on the mantle are wanting, and occasional
specimens fail to show the pale dorsal line, which in others is very
conspicuous. We fail, however, to find internal characters permit-
ting the division of our series into several species; and while it is
possible that some of the named forms may be geographic subspecies,
we are disposed to regard them rather as local variations of but
slight rank and uncertain diagnosis. Large series from many local-
ities must be collected and compared to define the subspecies, if any
exist.

It differs chiefly from P. foliolatum in being smaller, with very
ouch shorter “ amputateable ” tail segment, and in dentition.

Simroth found a very long, smooth, vermiform spermatophore in
P. Andersoni.

Santa Clara Co. (Ebrhorn, Raymond) around San Francisco Bay
(Cooper, Button, et a/.), California; Portland (Malone), Forest
Grove and Astoria (Hemphill), Oregon; Kalama, Chehalis, Port
Townsend and San Juan Island (Hemphill), Washington; Van-
couver Island (Wickham, Taylor); Old Mission, Lake Ceeur d’Aléne,
Idaho (Hemphill).

There is considerable variation in the shape and size of the epi-
phallus, even among specimens of similar size and external appear-
ance, collected at the same time at one locality. Thus, in one spec-
imen of a small series from San Juan Island, the epiphallus is 44
mm. long, and straight (fig. 61); while in another it measures 7 mm.
and is curved (fig. 59). The extremes in a larger series from Oak-
land, Cal., are: shortest, 5 mm. long, straight; longest 8 mm. long,
curved. After vainly trying to correlate the variations of the
epiphallus with other characters, with a view to defining two or more
species, we are compelled to conclude that they are largely individ-
ual, possibly to some extent functional, but that these variations are
not in any sense characteristic of races or species. Of course the
observations were made upon sexually mature individuals.”

Of the several forms included in the above synonymy, it is now
generally admitted that P. Hemphilli isa synonym of P. Andersoni.
Professor Cockerell" has stated his opinion that P. flavum, described

‘TMr. Cockerell’s division of Propfhysaon into forms with the epiphallus
“sausage-shaped”’ and those with it “ banana-shaped”’ is therefore not a spe-
cific criterion according to our observations.

* Nautilus, XI, p. 77, Nov., 1897.

248 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

from Gray’s Harbor, Washington, is to be included in P. pacificum,
There are all possible intergradations between the ochreous and
grayish forms in P. Andersoni and P. foliolatum.

In P. pacificum we fail to see any specific characters. The color-
ation agrees well with specimens of undoubted P. Andersoni from
Washington, and neither the measurements nor the dentition offer
differential characters, so far as we can see. The types were col-
lected by Mr. Wickham, near Victoria, Vancouver Island.

P. foliolatum (Gould). PI. X, figs. 15, 16, 17; Pl. XI, fig. 32; Pl. XIII, figs. 55, 56,

57, 58; Pl. XIV, fig. 70; Pl. XV, fig. 80; Pl. XVI, figs. 90, 98.

Arion foliolatus Gould, Moll. U. 8S. Expl. Exped., p. 2, Pl. I, f. 2a, b (1852);
Binney, Terr. Moll, II, p. 30, Pl. 66, f. 2 (1851). Copied by subsequent writ-
ers. W. G. Binney, Second Supplement to Terr. Moll., V, p. 206, PI. viii,
ff AUB OPM ix ££ 8,O;.D.

Phenacarion foliolatus Ckll., Nautilus., iii, p. 127 (March, 1890); Ann.
Mag. N. H. (6), VI, pp. 278, 279; W. G. Binney, Fourth Supplement, p. 181.
Arion foliatus W. G. Binney, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1858, p. 197.

Arion foliolatus var. Hemphilli W. G. Binney, Third Supplement, T. M. V,
p. 208, Pl. viii, f. C; ix, f. H (genitalia). Cockerell, Nautilus, III, p. 126
(March, 1890).

Phenacarion Hemphilli W. G. Binney, Fourth Supplement to T. M. V, p. 183
(not Prophysaon Hemphilli Bld. & Binn.).

Length (in alcohol) 50-80 mm. Rather slender, the posterior
third (or more) often distinctly more attenuated, defined by an ob-
lique groove. Mantle oblong, its length contained 23 to 3g times in
the total length of body, the breathing orifice decidedly in front of
the middle. Foot margin rather wide; wrinkles of the sole corres-
ponding to vertical grooves of the foot margin, bending backward
and meeting in the middle; pedal groove deep, with no noticeable
caudal pore.

Colors variable: (1) Back clear reddish-fawn with a lighter dor-
sal band, sometimes obsolete, the mantle with the usual two curved
black lateral stripes, with or without scattered maculz; becoming
paler, light yellowish on the sides and sole; or (2) back reddish,
suffused with black, mantle bands long, often with a third median
band and scattered macule, foot with the principal veins of the
reticulation black-pigmented, as are alternate grooves of the foot
margin; sides paler, gray; sole yellowish.

Surface with deeper oblique grooves connected by short longi-
tudinal grooves to form a roughly diamond-shaped reticulation, the
meshes of which are minutely subdivided.

Shell very delicate, membranous, with a thin and incoherent.
layer of calcareous granules.

, =

6: Wiles: | sea nl

J

pwrenn

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 249

Jaw (Pl. XVI, fig. 98) strong, opaque, with 8-14 wide flattened
ribs.

Radula with 44-1-44 teeth. Centrals tricuspid, laterals bicus-
pid, the ectocones small. Marginals formed by shortening of the
basal-plates, having the mesocone short, ectocone simple or on some
teeth bifid (Pl. XVI, fig. 90).

Epiphallus stout, cylindric, curved, with the usual constriction,
peduncle and muscle at base. Vas deferens extremely long, elabor-
ately twisted and tangled. Vagina long, the spermatheca duct
about as long as the spermatheca. Albumen gland very large, long
and tongue-shaped. Ovo-testis a very compact mass showing exter-
nally only the rounded-polygonal ends of the closely packed folli-
cles. In two typical individuals from Seattle (Mus. no. 71,072) the
measurements are: a (fig. 55), length of swollen epiphallus 12.5
mm., of extended vas deferens from summit of epiphallus to base of
same 92 mm.; of albumen gland 28 mm.; length of animal 80 mm.
b (fig. 57), length of epiphallus 14 mm.; of vas deferens 114 mm.
The ratio of length of epiphallus to that of vas deferens as measured
above is about 1:73 or 8. The original of fig. 58 is a small speci-
men, perhaps not fully adult.

Type locality, Discovery Harbor, Puget Sound (Pickering). Also
occurs at Olympia (Hemphill), Seattle (Hemphill, Randolph), and
doubtless throughout the Puget Sound region generally.

P. foliolatum is very closely allied to P. Andersoni Coop. It is
larger, more elongated, with the solid portion of the tail, or that sub-
ject to amputation, longer in proportion than in Andersoni. In
living specimens a mucous pore is visible at the tail, but this is not
noticeable externally in alcoholic examples. The light dorsal line
is occasionally indistinguishable.

The jaw forms probably intergrade with P. Andersoni; but the
teeth differ quite perceptibly in the shorter, blunter cusps of the
outer laterals and inner marginals. This is one of the best specific
characters.

The form described by Binney as Phenacarion Hemphilli does
not seem to offer sufficiently tangible points of difference from folio-
latum to stand as a species,even were the name not preoccupied.
It is said to be “more slender and more pointed at the tail than
foliolatus. The body is a bright yellow with bluish-black reticula-
tions. The edge of the foot and the foot itself are almost black.
Shield irregularly mottled with fuscous. The body also is irregu-

17

250 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

larly mottled with fuscous, and has one broad fuscous band down
the center of the back, spreading as it joins the mantle, with a nar-
rower band on each side of the body. It loses its color on being
placed in spirits, becoming a uniform dull slate color. Mantle
lengthened oval. Shell-plate represented by a group of calcareous
grains concealed in the mantle ; it is impossible to remove it as one
shell-plate. A decided caudal pore.” The jaw and dentition are
as in foliolatum. Genitalia much as in foliolatum, but Binney found
the albumen gland to be much shorter, less tongue-shaped and
brown-tipped. The epiphallus tapers distally, instead of contract-
ing abruptly.

Localities: Gray’s Harbor and Chehalis, Washington.

The only characters of importance are the dorsal band, which
seems to be similar to P. fasciatum, and the tapering epiphallus, also
a character of that species, if not, in this case, an indication of sex-
ual immaturity. Mr. Cockerell considers it asynonym of foliolatum ;
and, as we have seen no authentic specimen, and the name is, in any
case, preoccupied, we consider it best to leave the form as a syno-
nym of foliolatum, pending further information.

In aseries from Cascade Springs, on the Columbia River near
the Government locks, collected in October, 1897 by Mr. J. G.
Malone, (P1. XIII, fig. 54) the epiphallus is shorter, not curved, the
vas deferens also much shorter. The spermatheca is subglobular.
Measurements: length of epiphallus 8.6 mm.; of extended vas
deferens from apex of the epiphallus to the abrupt curve at base of
same, 42 mm.; of albumen gland 13 mm.; length of animal 50 mm.
As measured above, the epiphallus is about one-fifth the length of
the vas deferens. In typical foliolatum it is about one-eighth, in
Andersoni one-seventh. These specimens are (in alcohol) less ver-
miform than typical foliolatum, with paler color, back including
shield, reddish, fading on the sides; mantle striped as usual, but
blackish stripes defining the dorsal pale stripe either very faint or
lacking, so that in some individuals no pale dorsal line is visible.

The jaw in this form (P]. XVI, fig. 89) resembles that of P. Ander-
soni in the numerous ribs. Radula with long, pointed mesocones on
outer lateral and inner marginal teeth, as in P. Andersoni. In
typical P. foliolatus the corresponding teeth are shorter and blunter.

This will probably prove to be a distinct subspecies, and re-
ferable to P. Andersoni rather than to foliolatum.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 251

P. humile Cockerell. Pl. XVI, fig. 97.

Prophysaon humile Cockerell, Nautilus, iii, p. 112 (February 1890), Ann.
Mag. N. H. (6), VI, p. 277, 279. W.G. Binney, Third Suppi., p. 211, Pl.
VU, figs. E, G, L, M.

We do not consider P. humile” specifically distinct from fasciatum.
The coloration, genitalia and teeth are practically identical, and the
character of the jaw (PI. XVI, fig. 97) does not seem to be constant.
Several specimens selected at random from our series of fasciatum
from Seattle have a jaw neither plaited ur ribbed, but densely,
irregularly striated. Wecannot find any other differences between
these specimens and the ordinary fasciatum with flat-ribbed or
plaited jaw. The name humile has precedence over fasciatum and
if the two forms prove to be, as we think, specifically identical,
fasciatum will be reduced to varietal rank.

P. fasciatum Cockerell. PI. X, figs. 23-27; Pl. XI, fig. 34; Pl. XII, figs. 37-40;

Pl. XVI, figs. 91, 94-96.

Prophysaon fasciatum Cockerell in Binney, Third Supplement to Terr. Moll.,
V, p- 209, pl. vii, f. A (May, 1890). W. G. Binney, Fourth Supplement, p.
180, Cockerell, Ann. Mag. N. H. (6), VI; p. 278, 279.

Prophysaon Hemphilli,** specimen from Mendocino County,” W. G. Binney,
Terr. Moll., V, p. 239, pl. xii, f. I.

Prophysaon Anderson J. G, C., W. G. Binney, Second Supplement, p. 42.

Prophysaon fasciatum yar. obscurum Ck\l. The Conchologist II, p. 119
(Chehalis, Wash.)

Length (in aleohol) 25-35 mm., rarely as much.as 50 mm. Gen-
eral form and surface reticulation as in P. Andersoni. Color ex-
tremely variable: (1) Whitish-buff, (2) bluish-gray, or (3) red on
the back, gray-buff at the sides, always with two conspicuous black
stripes (well- or ill-developed) along the sides behind the mantle,

defining a wide, wedge-shaped light dorsal area, which encloses a

1° The original description is as follows: “ Prophysaon humile Cockerell—
Length (in alcohol) 164 mill. Body above and mantle smoke-color, obscured
by bands. Mantle wrinkled, and having a broad dorsal and two lateral black-
ish bands, reducing the ground-color to two obscure pale subdorsal bands.
Length of mantle 7 mill., breadth 5} mill. Respiratory orifice 2} mill. from
anterior border. Body subcylindrical, somewhat tapering, rather blunt at
end. Distance from posterior end of mantle to end of body 8 mill. Back
with a blackish band reaching a little more than half its length, and lateral
darker blackish bands reaching its whole length. Keticulations distinct
“foliated.” Sole strongly transversely striate-grooved, but not differentiated
into tracts. Jaw pale, strongly striate, moderately curved, not ribbed, Lin-
om membrane long and narrow. Teeth about 35-1-35. Centrals tricuspid,
aterals bicuspid, marginals with a large point, and one (sometimes two) small
outer points. Liver pale chocolate.

Found by Mr, A. F. Wickham under the bark of rotten logs in the woods
around Lake Coeur d’Alene, Idaho, 1889.

In its reticulations and general characters this species resembles P. Ander-
soni, of which it is possibly a variety.”

252 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

similarly shaped dark stripe running backward from the mantle,
sometimes well-defined, sometimes faint. Mantle buff or red, with
two curved lateral black bands (sometimes obsolete) and scattered
black maculation or marbling. Shell rectangularly oblong, 2 or 3
mm. long.

Epiphallus slender, long, and tapering distally, having an abrupt
kink at base, secured by a short muscle, as usual in the genus.
Vas deferens neither lengthened nor convoluted. Vagina apparently
functional asa penis. Spermatheca globose or oval, on a short, stout
duct which is directly continued into the vagina. Free oviduct
short and slender. Ovo-testis a rather loose bunch of oval follicles
(fig. 38).. Albumen gland unusually hard and brittle. The right
eye retractor passes between the branches of genitalia.

In one specimen (Pl. XII, fig. 57) there seems to be a glandular
enlargement of one side of the base of the epiphallus with a small
tubercle on the other side. This may be pathologic.

Jaw (Pl. XVI, figs. 94-96) arcuate with a slight median projec-
tion below, covered with flat, narrow, crowded ribs separated by
very narrow, shallow intervals, or with flat, slightly imbricated
plaits (or merely densely, irregularly striated vertically in form
humile, see above.)

Radula with 35-1-35 teeth. Centrals tricuspid; laterals lacking
the entocone; marginals formed by union of ectocone with mesocone
and shortening of the basal-plate. The cusps are short throughout.
The change from laterals to marginals is so gradual that it is prac-
tically impossible to draw a line between them. On some outer
marginals the ectocone is bifid. The figure shows a central with
one lateral and a group of three inner marginals.

Well and constantly distinguished from P. Andersoni ian folio-
latum externally by the wide, light dorsal area enclosing a darker
median stripe, and bounded laterally by blackish bands. Inter-
nally, the slender, tapering epiphallus and short vas deferens are
even more characteristic. The scarlet color of the back, noticed by
Cockerell in some specimens, is not accidental, but of common occur-
rence.

In form the species varies (in alcohol) from a long, vermiform
shape to about the contour of P. Andersont.

The body-cavity extends nearly to the end of the tail. Self-
excision of the tail occurs, but the amputated portion is short, as in
P. Andersoni, and the great majority of individuals we have seen
show no oblique constriction of the tail.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 253
P. coeruleum Cockerell. Pl. IX, figs. 7-11; Pl. XI, fig. 30; Pl. XIII, figs. 51-53 ;
PI. XVI, fig. 86.
Prophysaon coeruleum Cockerell, Nautilus, iii, p. 112, Ann. Mag. N. H.
re VI, p. 278. -W. G. Binney, Third Suppl. T. M. V, p. 209, Pl. vii, f.
bis

P. coeruleum var. dubium Ckll., 7. c.; W.G. Binney, Z. c.

Length (in alcohol) about 15 mm.; color blue or slate-blue (some-
times brown), somewhat paler at the sides. Back with close, deep
longitudinal grooves, which, on the sides, become oblique and more
spaced, and more anteriorly they radiate vertically below the man-
tle ; transverse grooves uniting the longitudinals comparatively few
and shallow. Foot-margin very narrow, a second narrow well-
defined sub-margin above it. Tail without caudal pore, frequently
self-amputated and leaving a conspicuous longitudinal slit (Pl. LX,
fig. 7, and figs. 9-11, the excised portion).”

Genitalia (Pl. XIII, fig. 51-53) somewhat as in P. Andersoni.
The epiphallus is short ; in one of the original specimens from Olym-
pia (Pl. XIII, figs. 52, 53) very short, truncated at the ends; in
another specimen from Seattle (Pl. XIII, fig. 51) itis oblong; vas
deferens tangled, but shorter than in Andersoni. Spermatheca
globular, on a rather slender duct, which is short in the Olympian
specimen, longer in that from Seattle.

Radula about as in P. fasciatum; the cusps of outer lateral and
inner marginal teeth rather short; marginals quite wide (Pl. XVI,
fig. 86).

Type locality, Olympia, Washington (Hemphill). In addition to
part of Hemphill’s original lot, we have received it from Seattle (P.
B. Randolph) and Portland, Oregon (J.G. Malone). Mr. Ran-
dolph writes that “it occurs solitary in dark fir woods under damp
logs. Color in life a brighter shade of blue. They do not bear
handling.”

“P. ceruleum is an exceedingly distinct species, distinguished at
once by its color and the character of its reticulations.” In the lat-
ter respect, the species differs from all others of the genus, and re-
- ©The original description from larger specimens than we have seen, is as fol-
lows: ‘“‘ Length in (alcohol) 224 mill., in motion 43 mill. Body and mantle
clear blue-gray, paler at sides, sole white. Mantle finely granulated, broad,
without markings. Length of mantle 7 mill., breadth 5 mill. Respirator
orifice 2} mill. from anterior border. Body subcylindrical, tapering, tps |
(In one specimen eaten off at the end.) Distance from posterior end of man-
tle to end of body 10} mill. The reticulations take the form of longitudinal
equidistant lines, occasionally joined by transverse lines, or coalescing. Sole
not differentiated into tracts. Jaw pale, strongly ribbed. Liver white. Mr.

Binney sends me colored drawings of the living animal; the neck is long and
white, or very pale.”

254 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

sembles Ariolimax. The very narrow foot-margin, with an unusu-
ally distinct border above, is another distinguishing feature.

Most of the specimens we have seen have lost the end of the tail
by self-amputation, as shown in the figures. When perfect the tail
is pointed, with no perceptible mucous pore; the longitudinal
grooves of the back become irregular near the end of the tail. The
color of Portland and Seattle specimens is distinctly blue, but some
of the original lot from Olympia, collected about eight years ago,
have become brown. Mr. Cockerell thus describes a variegated
form which he refers to cerulewm as a variety :—

“Prophysaon ceruleum var. dubium. Length (in alcohol) 8 mill.
Length of mantle, 4 mill. Distance from posterior end of mantle to
end of body 34 mill. Mantle broad, with four bands composed of
coalesced black marbling, very irregular in shape, and running
together anteriorly. Body dark, tapering. Sole pale, its edges
gray. Liverwhite. With the P. ceruleum isa small dark slug, prob-
ably a variety of it, but differing as described above. It will easily
be distinguished by its blackish color and the peculiar markings on
the mantle.”

There are, in some specimens, very close, fine, superficial im-
pressed vertical lines crossing the deeper oblique grooves.

Genus ANADENULUS Cockerell, 1890.
Anadenulus Ckll., Ann. Mag. N. H. (6), VI, p. 279 (Oct., 1890).

Slugs with the minute, non-spiral shell plate wholly buried; the
mantle small, rounded and anterior, with breathing pore median on
the right side. Genital orifice below right tentacle. Foot reticu-
late, somewhat keeled posteriorly, the foot-margin moderate, pedal
grooves rising slightly at tail, with no caudal pore there; sole dis-
tinctly tripartite, the areas separated by longitudinal grooves, mid-
dle field narrower than side fields (P]. IX, fig. 12).

Body-cavity extending the entire length. Jaw with about 20
wide, flat ribs (Binney). Radula with 20-1-20 teeth, about as in

-rophysaon in form.

Intestinal tract (Pl. XI, fig. 35) much as in Prophysaon ; posterior
loop formed by G* and G* extending far behind that formed by G'
and G’, slightly twisted posteriorly, the folds elsewhere hardly
twisted.

Genital system unknown.

Muscle system (Pl. XIV, fig. 68) as in Prophysaon. Eye retract-
ors inserted at the two posterior angles of the diaphragm, the buc-

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 255

cal retractor at the posterior margin somewhat to the right of the
median line, shortly bifurcate distally.

Pallial region (PI. XV, fig. 75). Kidney large, rounded nearly
filling the lung cavity. Ventricle exposed.

Distribution: San Diego Co., California.

No adequate discussion of the affinities of Anadenulus can be en-
tered upon until well-preserved specimens are collected permit-
ting an examination of the genitalia. Present information indicates
its proximity to Prophysaon, with which Anadenulus agrees in the di-
gestive tract and musculature. But the voluminous kidney, exposing
only the ventricle, the conspicuously tripartite sole, and the appar-
ent absence of that peculiar structure of the tail which distinguishes
Prophysaon, are all important characters indicating the distinctness
of the two genera.

Turning to Old World genera, we find Arion differing in its tail
gland, posteriorly prolonged buccal retractor and complexly twisted
intestine. Geomalacus shows the same with still other differences ;
and in Anadenus the foot margin is very much narrower, the sole
not divided by longitudinal grooves, and the intestine is long and
spirally twisted.

A. Cockerelli (Hemphill). Pl. IX, figs. 12, 13, 14; Pi. XI, fig. 35; Pl. XIV, fig.

68; PI. XV, fig. 75.

Anadenus Cockerelli Hemphill, Nautilus, [V, p. 2 (May, 1890), W.G. Bin-
ney, Fourth Supplement to Terr. Moll.,V, p. 178, Pl. i, f. 1; Pl, iii, f. 5 (den-
gaia has Cockerelli Cockerell, Ann. Mag. N. H. (6), VI, p. 278, 279 (Oct.,
1890).

Alcoholic specimens have the foot blackish, with a short, light
stripe behind the mantle above, the sides below mantle and the head
pale; mantle small, short, black with two festooned longitudinal
yellowish stripes.

Length 9-134 mm.

Cuyamaca Mts., San Diego Co., California (Hemphill).

IV. BRIEF DIRECTIONS FOR COLLECTING, PRESERVING AND
EXAMINING SLUGS.”

In the Northern States the best time for collecting slugs 1s in
early spring. From February to July, most well grown specimens

As many of our American conchologists have not ‘collected or studied
slugs especially, we have thought it not superfluous to append the following
notes on collecting slugs, with rough directions for their examination. It
will readily be understood that if the slug to be examined is of very small
size, or it is necessary to obtain all the data from one or two specimens, more
or less radical] modifications of these instructions must be made.

256 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

taken will prove to have the reproductive organs fully developed.
Autumn and late summer are a somewhat less favorable time, be-
cause the young of the year have then attained the full growth of
the species, while upon opening them the genitalia are found un-
developed. Still, autumn specimens should be collected. Always
date each “catch” and keep it separate.”

The best preservative for slugs (and other land mollusks) is alco-
hol. Of other preservatives, formalin (formaldehyde) is perhaps the
best; but it is, on the whole, a very unsatisfactory substitute, ren-
dering the tissues tough and slippery, difficult to dissect, and gener-
ally destroying calcareous organs in time. Formalin specimens are,
moreover, inferior to alcoholic for histological study. Upon the
whole, then, formalin should only be used as a permanent preserva-
tive for large slugs, if at all, and then in a three or four p. ec. solu-
tion. It should be added, however, that when travelling with limited.
means of conveyance, it is often convenient to use formalin on ac-
count of the economy of carrying it in the commercial strength, to
be diluted as occasion arises. Never crowd snails in formalin; the
bulk of the solution should exceed that of the snails six or eight
times.

After collecting slugs they should be drowned by placing in a
vessel of water with a lid laid on (not a cork pushed in) to exclude
air. Generally twelve hours is a sufficient time, but this depends
upon the slugs and the temperature. In hot weather less time is
required. Test them by taking one out, touching it with alcohol,
and if no retraction takes place they are ready to be transferred to
25% alcohol; leave in this about twelve hours, then transfer to
50%, and after twenty-four hours or more to about 75%, in which
they may be permanently kept.

If formalin is used, the slugs may be placed in the 3 or 4% solu-
tion when drowned, and changed to fresh solution after a few days,
the first being thrown away. Formalin specimens may at any time
be transferred to alcohol, or it may be used with asmall per cent. of
alcohol.

22 Of course, for economy of space and alcohol, all the lots of one species
may be kept in one jar, each in a separate vial or piece of cheese-cloth.

2 Of course, in field work the exact proportion is not vital. In general, it
is best to use a mixture of three parts of water to one of alcohol at first, then
a half and half mixture, and then the permanent strength. ‘The first and
second mixtures may be kept and used repeatedly, occasionally adding a
little alcohol to keep up the strength.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 257

To dissect slugs use a small pan, say 4x6x1} inches, with a layer
of blackened wax on the bottom. Only a pair of fine scissors, a
pair of fine-pointed tweezers, a small scalpel and a supply of fine
pins, with, of course, the small lens usually carried by naturalists, is
necessary. Cut the outer integument across the head and along the
left side, pin sole down in the pan, with water enough to cover, open
by turning the dorsal integument to the right, and cut the rectum
where it enters the back. The digestive tract may then be studied
by picking away the liver, and, with ordinary care, the genitalia
may be removed and isolated by cutting out a small area around
the genital orifice. After observing its insertion, the penis retractor
may be cut.

If specimens are abundant, use another for the examination of the
muscles and pallial organs. Open by cutting just above the foot
groove all around the body; remove the sole, pin back downward
in the dissecting pan and remove the digestive and genital systems,
care being taken to break no muscles. The whole retractor system
will then be seen, and after study the muscles may be cut and the
diaphragm carefully removed, disclosing the kidney, heart and
lung, as seen in the figures on Plate XV.

Use a large slug to begin with,such as Limax maximus, the Ario-
limaces or Aphallarion, and no difficulty not readily overcome will
be encountered.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

References cited under the several genera and species comprise all or nearly
all writings upon American Arionidz, A catalogue of the foreign papers con-
sulted in our studies would unnecessarily extend this article, as the literature

is given almost in full in one or other of the following papers, which we have
found of especial use.

Gopwin-AusTeNn, H. H. Land and Freshwater Mollusca of India, Pt. I,
pp. 46-65 (1882).

SimrotH, H. Versuch einer Naturgeschichte der deutschen Nacht-
schnecken und ihrer europiiischen Verwandten. Zeitschr. f. wissensch.
Zool., 1885, pp. 203-366. Bibliography on pp. 359-361.

SmmrortuH, i Beitriige zur Kenntniss der Nachtschnecken. Nova Acta k.
Leop.-Carol. deutschen Akad. Wissensch., LIV, No. 1, pp. 1-91 (1889).

Scuarre, R. F. The slugs of Ireland. Sci. Trans. Roy. Dublin Society,
IV, Ser. 2, pp. 513-562. Bibliography, pp. 557, 558 (1891).

SmmrotH, H, Die Nachtschnecken der portugesisch-azorischen Fauna,
Nova Acta, ete., LVI, pp. 201-424 (1891). Bibliography on pp. 416-419.

CocKERELL, T. D, A. Check-List of Slugs. The Conchologist II, p. 158.

Cotitince, W. E. On some European Slugs of the Genus Avion. Proce.
Zool. Soc. London, 1897, p. 439.

258 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.
DESCRIPTION OF PLATES.

Prats IX,

Figs. 1,2. Hemphillia glandulosa Bld. & Binn. Dorsal outline
and lateral aspect of a specimen from Astoria, Oregon (Hemp-
0 Ra Mus. no, 71,161. m, mantle; sh, exposed surface of
shell.

Figs. 3,4. Hemphillia camelus Pils. & Van. Lateral and dorsal
aspects of the type specimen. Old Mission, Idaho. Mus. no,
63,926.

Figs. 5,6. Hesperarion niger (J. G.Coop.). Ventral and lateral
aspects of a maculated individual. Santa Clara, Cal. Mus.
no. 71,198.

Figs. 7, 8. Prophysaon ceruleum Ckll. Dorsal and lateral aspects
of a specimen which has lost its tail by self-amputation. Olym-
pia, Washington. Mus. no. 63,913.

Figs. 9,10, 11. Prophysaon ceruleum Ckll. Lateral, anterior and
dorsal aspects of the self-amputated tail of a specimen from
Seattle, Washington. No. 71,074.

Figs. 12, 13,14. Anadenulus Cockerelli (Hemph.). Ventral, lat-
eral and dorsal aspects of one of the original specimens, from
Julian City, San Diego Co., California. Mus. no. 63,895.

PLATE X.

Figs. 15,16. Prophysaon foliolatus (Gld.). Lateral and dorsal
views of a typical specimen from Seattle, Washington. Mus.
no. 71,072.
Fig. 17. Prophysaon foliolatus (Gld.) Same specimen, the mantle
turned backward to show position of its anterior insertion.
Figs. 18, 19. Prophysaon Andersoni (J. G. Coop.). Oakland,
California. Mus. no. 69,010a.

Figs. 20, 21,22. Prophysaon Andersoni (J. G. Coop.), San Juan
Island, Washington. Mus. no. 63,912.

Figs. 23, 24. Prophysaon fasciatum Ckll. Seattle, Washington.
Collected in March or April, 1896. Mus. no. 68,025.

Figs. 25,26. Prophysaon fasciatum Ckll. Lateral views of two
individuals from Seattle, Washington.

Fig. 27. Prophysaon fasciatum Ckll. Same individual as fig. 26,
with mantle turned backward to show position of its anterior
insertion.

Pratze XI.

[All figures represent the digestive tract viewed from above. A. gl.,
albumen gland; B. d., bile duct; B. m., buccal mass; G',
first, second, third and fourth folds of the gut; Gen. or., exter-
‘nal genital orifice; ZL, liver; 0. t., ovo-testis ; sp., spermatheca ;
T, tail; wt., uterus; vag. vagina. |

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 259

Fig. i Prophysaon Andersoni (Coop.). Oakland, Cal. Mus. no.
9,010a.
Fig. 29. Prophysaon Andersoni (Coop.). California. Mus -no,
71,071. Received from W. G. Binney as P. Hemphilli B. &
B

Fig. 30. Prophysaon eeruleum Ckll.

Fig. 31. Binneya notabilis Cooper. Guadalupe Island. Mus. no.

» . 71,923.

Fig. 32. Prophysaon foliolatum (Gld.). Seattle, Wash.

Fig. 33. Hesperarion niger (Cooper). California. Mus. no. 71,-
O78. o.t., ovo-testis; L, liver, 7, tail.

Fig. 34. Prophysaon fasciatum Ckll. Seattle, Wash. Mus. no.
68,026. Salivary glands and anterior portion of liver removed,
genitalia and digestive tract in situ.

Fig. 35. Anadenulus Cockerelli (Hemphill). One of the original
lot.

Fig. 36. Hemphillia camelus Pils. & Van. Old Mission, Idaho.
Mus. no. 63,926. 0. t., ovo-testis.

PuaTeE XII.

[Epi., epiphallus; p. p., penis papilla; r. p. penis retractor; v. d.,
vas deferens ].

Fig. 37. Prophysaon fasciatum Ckll. Seattle, Wash. Mus. no.
68,026a. Perhaps abnormal.

Fig. 38. Prophysaon fasciatum Ckll. Same locality. Ovo-testis.

Fig. 39. Prophysaon fasciatum Ckll. Same locality. Mus. no.
68,025,

Fig. 40. Same specimen, atrium and base of the epiphallus, the
binding muscle removed.

Fig. 41. Hemphillia camelus Pils. & Van. Type specimen. Maus.
no. 63,926,

Fig. 42. The same, penis opened.

Fig. 43. Hesperarion niger (Cooper). Spermatophore.

Fig. 44. Hesperarion niger (Cooper). Santa Clara, Cal., collected
Nov. or Dec., 1896.

Fig. 45. Hesperarion niger (Cooper). Mus. no, 71,078. Apex of
penis opened.

Fig. 46. The same, side view of penis-papilla.

Fig. 47. Hesperarion niger (Cooper). Mus. no, 71,077.

Fig. 48. The same. Spermatheca.

Fig. 49. Hemphillia grandulosa B. & B. Apex of penis opened,
showing papilla.

Fig. 50. Hemphillia glandulosa B. & B. Lower portion of genital
system. Astoria, Oregon.

Piate XIII.
[f. ov., free oviduct ; muse., muscle connecting atrium and epiphal-
lus ; sp., sp. d., spermatheca and its duct; vag., vagina; ped.,
peduncle of the epiphallus. }

260 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Fig. 51. Prophysaon eoeruleum Ckll. Seattle, Washington.

Figs. 52, 538. Prophysaon coeruleum Ckll. Olympia, Washington.
The pedicel of epiphallus is seen in fig. 53.

Fig. 54. Prophysaon Andersoni (?) var. Cascade Springs, Wash-
ington. Mus. no. 71,647.

Fig. 55. Prophysaon foliolatum (Gld.). Seattle, Washington.
Mus. no. 71,072. Typical form.

Fig. 56. Thesame. Median transverse section of the epiphallus.

Fig. 57. Prophysaon foliolatum (Gld.). Another specimen from
the same locality.

Fig. 58. The same, a smaller specimen not mature.

Fig. 59. Prophysaon Andersoni (Cooper). Oakland, Cal. Mus.
no. 69,010.

Fig. 60. Prophysaon Andersoni (Cooper). California. Mus. No.
71,071. Received from W.G. Binney as P. Hemphilli B. & B.

Fig. 61. Prophysaon Andersoni (Cooper). Oakland, Cal. Mus.
no. 69,010.

Fig. 62. Prophysaon Andersoni (Cooper). Spermatophore.

PuaTE XIV.

[The retractor muscle systems are all represented as seen from be-
neath. ao, aorta; ¢. a., cephalic artery ; e. r., eye retractor; G,
intestine; J. t. r., left tentacle and eye retractor; ovid. r., re-
tractor of the oviduct; p, penis; ph.r, pharynx or buccal re-
tractor ; ret., retensor muscle; 7. p., penis retractor; r. s., rad-
ula sack ; r.¢. 7., right tentacle retractor ; sp.r, retractor of the
spermatheca; t.r, tentacle retractor; vag., vagina; vag. 7., va-
ginal retractor; v.a, visceral artery. |

Figs. 63, 64,65. Binneya notabilis Cooper. Guadalupe Island.
Ventral and lateral aspects of an alcoholic specimen, and the
retractor system.

Fig. 66. Arivlimax Columbianus (Gld.).

Fig. 67. Aphallarion Buttoni Pils. & Van.

Fig. 68. Anadenulus Cockerelli (Hemph.).

Fig. 69. Hemphillia camelus Pils. & Van. Mus. no. 63,926.

Fig. 70. Prophysaon foliolatum (Gld.). Mus. no. 71,073.

Fig. 71. Hesperarion niger (Cooper). Mus. no. 71,078.

Fig. 72. Arion hortensis Fér. Seattle, Wash. Mus. no. 68,023.

PLatTE XV.

[Pallial organs, seen from below, the diaphragm removed. a, auri-
cle; ao, aorta; k, kidney; 7, lung; p.a., pulmonary or breath-
ing aperture; ph.7., pharynx or buccal retractor muscle; p. v,
pulmonary vein; 7, G*, rectum ; 7. t. 7, right tentacle retractor ;
ur, secondary ureter; v, ventricle. |

Fig. 73. Ariolimax Columbianus (Gld.). Maculated specimen from
near Oakland, California. Pallial region from below, with
pulmonary net work of the lung roof.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 261

Fig. 74. The same, showing main ramifications of excretory canals
in kidney.

Fig. 75. Anadenulus Cockerellii (Hemp.).

Fig. 76. Aphallarion Buttoni Pils. & Van.

Fig. 77. Hesperarion niger (J. G. Coop.). Mus. no. 71,078.

Fig. 78. Hemphillia camelus Pils. & Van.

Fig. 79. Arion hortensis Fér. Specimen from Seattle, Wash.
Mus. no. 68,023.

Fig. 80. Prophysaon foliolatum (Gld.). Specimen from Seattle.
Wash. Mus. no. 71,073.

Fig. 81. Ariolimax columbianus (Gld.) End of tail, lateral view.

Figs. 82, 83. Arion hortensis Fér. Seattle, Washington.

Fig. 84. Hesperarion niger (Coop.). Oblique view of end of tail,
showing pore.

PLATE XVI.

Fig. 85. Hemphillia camelus Pils. & Van. Central, first lateral,
and three marginal teeth.

Fig. 86. so Si oy ceruleum Ckll. Group of outermost marginal
teeth.

Fig. 87. Binneya notabilis Coop. Jaw.

Fig. 88. Binneya notabilis Coop. Teeth.

Fig. 89. Prophysaon Andersoni (Coop.), var.? Mus. no. 71,647.
Cascade Springs, Washington.

Fig. 90. Prophysaon foliolatum (Gld.). Typical form. Central,
first lateral, and group of marginal teeth.

Fig. 91. Prophysaon fasciatum Ckll. Central, first lateral and
group of marginal teeth.

Fig. 92. Prophysaon Andersoni (Coop.). Jaw. San Juan Island.
Mus. no. 63,912.

Fig. 93. Outer marginal and lateral teeth of same individual.

Fig. 94. Prophysaon fasciatum Ckll. Jaw. Mus. no. 68,026.
Seattle, Washington.

Fig. 95. Much magnified portion from median part of another
similar jaw of the same species.

Fig. 96. More enlarged basal margin of same.

Fig. 97. Prophysaon humile Ckll. Much magnified portion of
the basal margin of a striated jaw. Seattle, Washington.

Fig. 98. Prophysaon foliolatum (Gld.). Jaw. Mus. no. 71,072.
Seattle, Washington.

262 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

May 3.
The President, SAmuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.

Fifty-three persons present.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—

“Notes on Mr. Meehan’s paper on the Plants of Lewis and
Clark’s Expedition across the Continent, 1804-06.” By Dr. Elliott

Coues.
“List of Bats collected by Dr. W. S. Abbott in Siam.” By
Gerrit S. Miller, Jr.

May 10.
The President, SAmMuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.

Twenty-six persons present. ;

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—

“Certain Aboriginal Mounds of the South Carolina Coast.” By
Clarence B. Moore.

“Certain Aboriginal Mounds of the Savannah River.” By
Clarence B. Moore.

“Certain Aboriginal Mounds of the Altamaha River.” By
Clarence B. Moore.

“Recent Acquisitions.” By Clarence B. Moore.

“ Environmental and Sexual Dimorphism in Crepidula.” By E.
G. Conklin.

, May 17.
Mr. Caarves P. Peror in the Chair.

Thirty-six persons present.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—

“Descriptions of five New Phyllostome Bats.” By Gerritt S.
Miller, Jr.

“Chitons collected by Dr. Harold Heath at Pacific Grove, near
Monterey, Cal.” By H. A. Pilsbry.

“Some New Species of Diatoms.” By C. S. Boyer.

The deaths of Theodore Wernwag, May ist, and of J. Waln
Vaux, May 16th, members were announced.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 263
May 24.
The President, SAmvuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.

Forty persons present.

Mr. CHAarLes Morris read a paper on the antiquity of Man
from the standpoint of evolution. (No abstract).

May 31.
The President, SAamueL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.

Twenty-one persons present.

A paper entitled “ Botanical Observations on the Mexican Flora,
especially on the Flora of the Valley of Mexico.” By J. W.
Harshberger, M. D., was presented for publication.

Papers under the following titles were accepted for publication
in the Journal :— ~
“Certain Aboriginal Mounds of the South Carolina Coast.” By
Clarence B. Moore.

“Certain Aboriginal Mounds of the Savannah River.” By
Clarence B. Moore.

“Certain Aboriginal Mounds of the Altamaha River.’ By
Clarence B. Moore.

“ Recent Acquisitions.” By Clarence B. Moore.

The following were ordered to be printed :—

264 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

MATERIALS TOWARD A NATURAL CLASSIFICATION OF THE CYLIN-
DRELLOID SNAILS.

BY HENRY A. PIISBRY AND E. G. VANATTA.,

While recording some recent additions to the North American
landsnail fauna with the intention of revising the ‘‘ Check List ” of
United States land mollusks published in these Proceedings for
1889, the attention of the senior author was recalled to the rejection
of the generic name Cylindrella by Messrs. Harris and Burrows in
1891, and their substitution of a new name for the group. Upon
compiling a list of the generic and subgeneric names which have
been applied to species of “Cylindrella,” it became obvious that a
thorough taxonomic revision was urgently needed. In order to as-,
certain which of the numerous names should be retained as valid,
to place these upon a solid basis, and to reduce the remainder to
synonyms, it was found necessary to supplement a review of the lit-
erature of the group by an examination of the snails themselves,
especially with reference to the radulz, and the internal characters
of the shells, revealed by a study of sections cut to expose the inter-
nal columella or axis. This detailed examination has been made
chiefly by the junior author of this paper.

The characters of the radula have been utilized as a basis for
classification by Crosse and Fischer in 1870, their paper marking
an epoch in the taxonomic history of this family. W.G. Binney
has added to our knowledge of this subject upon the lines laid down
by the French writers ; and later, Strebel and Pfeffer, in their sug-
gestive and original series of papers upon the Mexican fauna, have
made important contributions toward a rational classification of the
group. There are many other writings bearing upon the nomen-
clature of the Cylindrellas, but no others of importance for original
facts or views concerning their phylogeny or structure, aside from
mere species work.

The external conchologic characters of the Cylindrellas are well
known by the writings of Pfeiffer, Poey and others, but the modifi-
cations of the internal armature have been far less fully elucidated.
A portion of Pfeiffer’s descriptions mention briefly the internal
structure, and some ef the plates of the Novitates Conchologice

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 265

and Malakozoologische Blitter represent it; and Arango, in his
Contribucion a la Fauna Malacologiea Cubana, notes the internal
structure of the Cuban species. Most of these observations, how-
ever, are not sufficiently detailed or exact to meet the requirements
of the case, now that a classification is based largely upon internal
structure ; and our own work is therefore founded wholly upon the
study of a series of sections including nearly every species in the
collection of the Academy.

Without entering into any elaborate exposé or criticism of the
work of former authors upon the Cylindrellas, attention should be
directed to the contention of Crosse & Fischer’ and later of Fischer?
that the series should be distributed between two family groups, the
Cylindrellide and the Pupide, a conclusion based wholly upon the
structure of the teeth and jaws; the first family having greatly mod-
ified teeth and plaited jaw, the second having normal dentition and
solid jaw.

That this splitting of the Cylindrellas into two is an unnatural
division, seems to us to be proven by the following considerations:
(1) The discovery of completely Cylindrelloid shells (Epirobia)
with the “‘normal” type of teeth. (2) The presence of transition
stages in the teeth in the genus Holospira, and (3) the recent dem-
onstration by the senior author of this paper’ of the rapid changes
undergone by the teeth of some genera under the stress of changed
habits, without corresponding changes in the rest of the anatomy,
as seen in Papuina, Polymita, etc. (4) The general law of change
in the structure of the jaw, as illustrated in the families Endodon-
tide and Helicide, must now be recognized as largely discounting
the old value placed upon that organ as a factor in systematic mal-
acology ; and in any family of snails we may expect to find both
the more primitive plaited and the later solid type of jaw. The
final reason for rejecting the idea that any of the group under con-
sideration are Pupida, is that none of them, so far as known, possess
the extremely characteristic complication of the male genital organs
found in Pupa, Buliminus, Clausilia, and their immediate allies, and
which constitute one of the most important characters of the
family Pupide.

1 Journ. de Conchyl., 1870.
? Manuel de Conchyliologie.

* Manual of Conchology (2), LX, introduction and portions relating to ar-
boreal Helices.

18

266 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Our further observations upon the family may be grouped under
five heads :—
I. Names applied to generic and minor groups of Cylindrelloid
snails,
II. Key to the genera and subgenera.
III. Classified lists of the species with zoo-geographic and other
notes.
IV. Brief sketch of other genera of the family.
V. Provisional phylogenetic diagram and table of geographic dis-
tribution.

I. CHRONOLOGICAL LIST OF NAMES APPLIED TO CYLINDRELLOID
SNAILS.

(Exclusive of those pertaining to Lia, Macroceramus, Holospira, and other
generally recognized genera).

1822 (or earlier). CocuLopina Férussac, Tableau Systematique,
etc., p. 24, 61.

Under Helix, Férussac establishes a “ Quatorziéme sous-genre.
Cochlodine, Cochlodina nobis.” The subgeneric definition applies
better to Clausilia than to the other forms included by Férussac in the
group; and, indeed, seems to be based wholly upon that genus.

The species of Coehlodina are classified as follows :—

* Shell dextral.
+ Aperture without teeth or lamin.

1. Peristome not continuous.
Premier groupe. Les Pupoides, Pupoides.

493 carinata Gmel. [==Macroceramus lineatus Brug.].
494 nebulosa nobis. [nomen nudum].
495 ignifera nobis, [nomen nudum].

2. Peristome continuous.
Deuxiéme groupe. Les Trachéloides, Tracheloides.

496 sloanii nobis. [nomen nudum].

497 draparnaldi nobis. [nomen nudum].

498 petiveriana nobis. [probably—=C. eximia Pfr. ].

499 blainvilliana nobis. [nomen nudum].

500 cylindrus Chemn. [= Cylindrella].

501 rosata nobis. [nomen nudum].

502 truncata Dillw. [Undeterminable ?—=Megalomastoma].
503 fasciata Lam. [ Undeterminable ?—=Megalomastoma].

Gar

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 267

504 tortuosa Chemn. [= Tortulosa tortuosa, an oriental operculate).
505 gracilicollis nobis. [nomen nudum].
506 perplicata nobis. [nomen nudum].
507 collaris nobis. [= Cylindrella].

508 subula nobis. [nomen nudum].

509 antiperversa nobis. [nomen nudum].

s

+t Aperture armed with large folds or long teeth.
510 gargantua nobis [nomen nudum= Odontostomus].
** Shell sinistral.

1. Aperture without lamine.

Troisiéme groupe. Les Anomales, Anomales; Pupa Drap.
511 perversa L. [=Balea].
512 chemnitziana nobis. [ Cylindrella elongata Chemn. ].

2. Aperture armed (with laminz or an elastic operculum).
Quatriéme groupe. Les Clausilies, Clausiliv ; genre clausilie Drap.

[Includes the species of Clausilia, with some nomina nuda per-
haps pertaining to other groups].

It will be seen that Cochlodina is a miscellaneous group, including
species of at least six modern genera, all of which have since been
named. Under these circumstances it had better be left as a
synonym of Clausilia, as the diagnosis precludes its use for any of
the other groups included.

1828. Bracuyrus Guilding, Zool. Journal, III, p. 167. Pro-
posed for B. costatus Gldg. Preoecupied in Aves by Swainson,
1824, and in Diptera by Meigen in the same year.

1837. Urocortis Beck, Index Moll., p. 83. Species, petiverana
Fér., blainvilliana Fér., eylindrus Ch., Dw. and Wood; rosata Fér.,
glandula B., abbreviata B., coarctata B., List H., XX1,17; trunea-
tula Lam. (Clausilia), gracilicollis Fér.

J. E. Gray, in Proce. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1847, p- 177, selects
“Turbo” cylindrus as type. This would make the group equivalent
to Thaumasia Alb. a later name. Von Martens, in Die Heliceen,
1860, names decollata Nyst as type. This species belongs to Crosse
and Fischer’s later group Eucalodium ; and as it does not appear in
Beck’s original list of species, must be rejected from the group. +
Urocoptis is the earliest tenable name for any genus of the family.

1837. BracnyropeLia Beck, Index Moll., p. 89. Proposed for
perplicata Fér., collaris Lam., subula Fér., antiperversa Fér.

268 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [18)8.

1837. Aroma Beck, Index Moll. p. 89. For elongata Chetan.
(chemnitziana Fér.). Gray, 1847, and Morch, 1852, retain the
name for this species.

1840. CyLInDRELLA Pfeiffer, Archiv fiir Naturg., p. 41. For
the following species:

Gracilicollis Fér. [a Brachypodella] collaris Lam, [a Brachypo-
della] antiperversa Desh. [a Brachypodella], subula Desh. [type of
the later group Mychostoma Alb.], perplicata Fér. [a Brachypo-
della], chemnitziana Desh. [type species of the earlier group Apoma
Beck], elegans Pfr. [type of the later group Gongylostoma Alb.],
crispula Pfr. [a species of the later group Gongylostoma], ? torticol-
lis (Oliv.) Lam. [= Clausilia of the section Bitorquata Bttg.].

Another Cylindrella, in Conide, was proposed in 1840 by Swain-
son (Malacology, p. 311), and still again, for the group now gener-
ally known as Cylichna (t.c. p. 326. See Man. of Conch., XV, p.
287). It is now, so faras we know, impossible to decide whether
Pfeiffer’s group was published prior to Swainson’s or vice versa.
Cossmann has proposed to substitute the term Disteectria (q. v.) for
Cylindrella Pfr. As Cylindrella is later than both Urocoptis and
Brachypodella, and the same name was used in the same year for
two other groups, we reject it from the nomenclature of this family.

1840. StpHonostoMA Swainson, Treatise on Malacol., pp. 168,
333. For costata Gldg. and fasciata (Encycl. Meth., pl. 461, f. 17).
Name preoccupied by Voigt in Vermes, 1836 ; also used in Rotifera,
1832.

1847. Bracnypopisca Agassiz, Nomentlator Zool., Index Uni-
versalis, p. 51. An emendation, upon etymological grounds, of
Brachypodella Beck.

1850. THaumasta Albers, Die Heliceen, p. 207. Proposed for
decollata Nyst, liebmanni Pfr., gruneri Dkr., eylindrus Chemn., san-
guinea Pfr., brevis Pfr., binneyana Pfr.

The two first species belong to Lucalotlium, the rest to the Jamai-
can and Haytien group of large Cylindrellas. Name preoccupied by
Perty in Arachnida, 1830. Spartina (q.v.) has been proposed as a
substitute, but it is superfluous, as the group is a synonym of Uro-
coptis Beck, 1837.

1850. Mycuostoma Albers, Die Heliceen, p. 207. Prsposaee for
subula Fér., collaris Fér., gracilicollis Pfr., hanleyana Pfr., pallida
Guild., seminuda Adams.

In the second edition of Die Heliceen, 1860, p. 37, von Martens
selects C. subula as type.

— |

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 269

1850. GoncyLosroma Albers, Die Hel., p. 208. Proposed for
sowerbyana Pfr., humboldtiana Pfr., rosea Pfr., variegata Pfr., ele-
gans Pfr., crispula Pfr., sagraiana Pfr., porrecta Gould, philippiana
Pfr.

From this list of species, von Martens selected elegans as the type,
in Die Heliceen, 1860, p. 38.

1850. Casra Albers, Die Heliceen, p. 208, proposed for elongata
Ch. and gracilis Wood, the former selected as type by von Martens,
1860. This group is absolutely equivalent to Apoma Beck, 1837.

1852. SrropHina Morch., Catal. Yoldi, p. 35. Proposed for
laterradii Grat. only.

1853. TracHe tia Pfr., Monogr. Hel. Viv., III, p. 564. Proposed
for marmorata Shutt., volubilis Morel., porrecta Gld., gracillima
Poey, spelunce Pfr., subtilis Morel., gouldiana Pfr., rugeli, Shutt.,
riisei Pfr., cinerea Pfr., morini Morel., philippiana Pfr., sealarina
Shutt.

These are mainly slender Brachypodella species. Name preoc-
cupied by Scopoli in Aves, 1777, by Serv. in Coleoptera, 1834, and
by Westwood in Coleoptera, 1839. It is, therefore, rejected from
molluscan nomenclature.

1870. CaLLtonta Crosse & Fischer, Journal de Conch., 1870, p.
18. Based upon one species, Cyl. elliotti Poey.

1880. Eprropra Strebel & Pfeiffer, Beitr. zur Kenntniss der
Fauna Mex. Land- und Siisswasser-Conch., Theil IV, pp. 77, 85.
Proposed for Cylindrella berendti, polygyra, morini (not of Morelet),
apiostoma.

This is a valid genus, well distinguished by the dentition and
hollow axis.

1891. DisracrrrA Cossmann in Harris and Burrows, Eoc. and
Oligoc. Beds Paris Basin, pp. 100, 114. Proposed as a substitute
for Cylindrella Pfr. no reason being given for the change. By
reference to the list of species originally assigned to Cylindrella, it
will be seen that long before the year 1891, every one was amply
provided with generic names, Gongylostoma Alb. and Brachypodella
Beck including all of them. The name Distectria, therefore, falls
asasynonym. Being of even date with Spartina Harr. & Burr.
(q.v.), it might possibly dispute supremacy with that term as a
generic name for “COylindrella” parisiensis Desh. ; but it is obvious
that that species (which, in our opinion, is not a Cylindrella nor a
member of the same family), does not require both a generic and
subgeneric name.

270 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

189L. Spartina Harris & Burrows, The Eocene and Oligocene
Beds of the Paris Basin, pp. 100, 113 (Sept. 28, 1891). Proposed
as a substitute for Thawmasia Alb., 1850 (not Perty, 1830-1834).

As Thaumasia is based partly on species of Eucalodium (Crosse
& Fischer, 1868), and partly on species of Urocoptis (Beck, 18387),
the name Spartina falls as a synonym under these groups, unless,
indeed, it be retained for the Paris Basin Eocene species described
by Deshayes as “Cylindrella” parisiensis, which is the only species
mentioned under Spartina by Harris and Burrows. See under Dis-
tectria.

II. ANALYTICAL KEY TO CYLINDRELLOID GENERA AND THEIR
SUBDIVISIONS.
(Exclusive of the generally recognized genera Lia, Macroceramus, Eucalo-
dium, ete. ).

I. Axis of the shell a solid, not perforated, column; teeth of the
radula very peculiar, the centrals very narrow, laterals with
gouge-shaped cusps.

a. Radula with large posterior cusps (ectocones) upon all of
the side teeth, which are of similar form, gradually becom-
ing smaller from the inner to the outer edge of radula,
generally with no abrupt break in size between lateral and
marginal teeth; rows slanting, “ en chevron” (Pl. XVII,

fig. 5). Genus UROCOPTIS Beck.
b. Axis slender and simple, without spiral laminz or
other processes. Subgenus Urocoptis.

c. Shell large, stout and fusiform ; axis straight.
Section Urocoptis s.s.

ce’, Shell small, thin and fusiform ; axis straight.
Section Cochlodinella P. & V.
ce’. Shell small, pillar-shaped ; axis sigmoid below.
Section Spirostemma P. & V.
_6'. Axis with a single, strong, smooth spiral lamina,
median in each whorl. Subgenus ARANGrA P. & V.
b’. Axis with two series of hooks curving toward each

other, or with a series of oblique nodes or ribs.

Subgenus Iprosremma P. & V.
b°. Axis with a single stout spiral fold crenulated at the
edge, Section Maceo P. & V.
b'. Axis with one or several spiral laminz, the lower of

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 271

which is cut into teeth or crenulated, at least in the
earlier whorls. Subgenus GonGyLosroma Alb.

Cc.

Three to seven spiral laminze developed, increas-
ing in size from the upper to the lowest one,
which is largest. Section Pycnoptychia P. & V.

. Three laminz, the lowest smallest, upper largest.

Section Callonia C. & F.

. Two subequal spirals; a median whorl with
’

accessory laminz upon the upper and _ basal
walls. Section Sectilumen P. & V.

. Two spirals, the lower dentate in upper whorls,

and in an intermediate whorl expanding into a
very broad, flat or cup-like plate.
Section Esochara P. & V.

. Two gradually increasing spirals, the lower cren-

ulate or denticulate; sometimes a short, low,
third spiral interposed in an intermediate whorl.
Section Gongylostoma s. str.

. Two strong, subequal spirals, both crenulated or

denticulate (Haiti).
Section Amphicosmia P. & V.

. One incised or denticulate lower lamina with

sometimes a smaller one above it.
Section Tomelasmus P. & V.

a’. Radula with the posterior cusp (ectocone) sub-obsolete or
wanting on the first or both lateral teeth ; two laterals on
each side enormously developed, the marginals abruptly
smaller, narrow, probably functionless, with vestigial cusps ;
arranged in horizontal lines (Pl. XVII fig. 4). Axis of
the shell without lamine.

Genus BRACHYPODELLA Beck.

b. Inner lateral tooth with a vestigial posterior cusp (ecto-
cone) without cutting point; outer lateral with cut-
ting point developed on the ectocone.

c.

c.

Subgenus BRACHYPODELLA.
Axis slender throughout, rarely with a small
spiral fold ; shell slender and elongate.
Section Brachypodella s, str.
Axis strong, heavily calloused ; shell obese.
Section Strophina Mérch.

272 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

b'. Inner lateral tooth with no ectocone; that of the
outer lateral without cutting point. Species all Ja-
maican,

c. Axis slender, straight; last whorl of shell be-
coming free, and keeled below; aperture subcir-
cular, angular below, as wide as high.

d. Shell small, narrowly fusiform, with strong-

ly ribbed whorls. Section Geoscala P. & V.

d', Shell slender, pillar-like, white and smooth,
of many narrow whorls.

Section Mychostoma Alb.

c'. Axis a mere edge of contact between whorls ;
shell white, sinistral, slender, of many oblique
whorls, the last not free; aperture oval, longer
than wide. Section Apoma Beck.

II. Axis of the shell a hollow column; radula of normal form and
arrangement; central teeth tricuspid, short and wide; laterals
numerous, similar, bicuspid ; marginals wide, very short, multi-
cuspid (Pl. XVII, fig. 2).

a. Shell very slender and elongate, thin, not conspicuously
calcareous, the axis subcylindrical or bulging in each

whorl, usually rugose. Genus EPIROBIA S. & P.
a‘, Shell stout, pupiform, with entire spire, conspicuously cal-
careous, ete., ete. Genus HOLOSPIRA Mart.

III. CLASSIFIED LISTS OF SPECIES.

As the groups defined by us in the preceding table of classification
differ radically in limits from those hitherto accepted, it is necessary
to supplement the characterization of the genera and subgenera by
detailed lists of species. These lists contain only species whose
characters we have ascertained by the examination of sections.
Those we have not been able to examine are omitted,’ although a
large part of them could doubtless be approximately grouped by the
published information.

The names of species of which the radula is known are distin-
guished by the following symbols: “(CF)” after the name of a
species indicates that the dentition has been examined by Crosse &

‘ The lists are, therefore, a catalogue of the species in the collection of the
Academy, excluding a considerable number of doubtful, unidentified or new
species. Any forms not mentioned herein we will be glad to receive and offer
an exchange for.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 273

Fischer ;> “‘(B.)” that it has been examined by W. G. Binney ;
“(S P.)” by Strebel & Pfeffer ;’ “(P V.)” by ourselves.

Genus UROCOPTIS Beck.

This genus is restricted to Cuba, Jamaica and Haiti, with a few
stragglers from the Cuban fauna in south Florida. It is practi-
cally a group of the Greater Antilles. The typical forms, with the
axis simple, are the most widely spread and probably the oldest
type. The large, stout forms being a local development common to
Jamaica and Haiti.

The forms with spiral folds or other ornamentation of the axis
are confined to Cuba and the adjacent portion of Haiti. There is
every reason to believe them autochthonous to Cuban soil, a few
species recently spreading eastward.

This genus shows the bond between Jamaica and Haiti to be
rather stronger than between Cuba and Haiti, the Cuban groups
occurring in Haiti being represented by very few species, and these
restricted to the extreme western end of the island.

The elements common to Jamaica and Cuba are the more general-
ized and presumably older sectional groups of the genus.

Respecting the habits and environment of the Jamaican Cylin-
drellas of both the genera Urocoptis and Brachypodella, Mr. Charles
T. Simpson writes of the experiences of Mr. J. B. Henderson and
himself, as follows: “CO. sanguinea, rosea, obesa, cylindrus, aspera,
brevis and allied forms live on the ground among the serub and
dead leaves, and are of just about the color of their surroundings.
We found C. nobilior abundant in a talus of decomposed shaly rock
at Bogwalk, of which it was almost exactly the color. C. seminuda,
alba and robertsi are found in the crevices of craggy limestone
rocks, among cliffs. C. rubra and tenella live in the ground in
thickets where there is abundance of dead and decaying wood.
The shells, in form and color, always look exactly like pieces of broken
twigs, which are found abundantly with them, and it was a long
time before Henderson and I found a single specimen, They are
very abundant though in proper localities. C. gracilis Wood grows
invariably on the trunks and stems of trees in thick scrub. These
trees have grayish or whitish spotted bark; the little rascals attach
themselves to it by the foot and stand out with the shell nearly at

5 Journal de Conchyliologie, 1870.
® Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., IL.
7 Beitr. Mex. Moll.

274 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

right angles to the trunk or limb, and as the shell is always more or
less dirty, the resemblance to a thorn is so astonishing that we
doubtless passed by thousands of them, never dreaming for a mo-
ment that they were Cylindrellas.”

Mr. Uselma C. Smith found B. elongata living on limestone cliffs,
upon which the white shells hung like stalactites, for which he at
first mistook them.

Subgenus Urocoptis Beck.

Type U. eylindrus (Chemn.), P}]. XVIII, fig. 11 (axis) and Pl.
XVII, fig. 5 (dentition).

Section Urocoptis, s. s.

Species of Jamaica.

U. amethystina (Chitty). U. megacheila (Chitty).

U. aspera (Ad.). U. nobilior (Ad.).

U. baquieana (Chitty). U. procera (Ad.).

U. brevis (Pfr.) [C F.]. | U. rosea (C. B. Ad. not Pfr.)
U. carnea (Ad.). | (CF Bs, Pos eae

U. eylindrus (Chemn.). U. sanguinea (Pfr.) [C F.].

U. gravesii (Ad.). U. zonata (Ad.).

U. lata (Ad.).

Species of Hayti.

U. adamsiana (Pfr.). U. gruneri (Pfr.).

U. areuata (W. & M.). U. guigouana (Petit).
U. crenata (W. & M.). U. mabuja (Weinl.).

U. eugenii (Dohrn). U. malleata (Pfr.).

U. eximia (Pfr.). U. menkeana (Pfr.).

U. flammulata (Pfr.). U. puncturata (Pfr.).

Section CocHLODINELLA Pils. & Van.
Type U. poeyana (Orb.). Radula with 12.1.12 teeth, which are
typical for the genus in form, but decrease rather rapjdly.
Species of Cuba and Florida.

U. angulifera (Gundl.). U. mamillata (Wright).

U. atropurpurea (Arango). U. mixta (Wright).

U. goniostoma (Gundl.). U. paradoxa (Arango).

U. illamellata (Wright). U. poeyana (Orb.) [B., P V.J.
U. jejuna (Gld.). U. presasiana (Pfr.).

U. lactaria (Gld.). U. variegata (Pfr.).

1898.} NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 275

Species of Jamaica.
U. auguste (C. B. Ad.). U. pupeformis (C. B. Ad.).
U. hollandi (C. B. Ad.). | U. striata (Chitty).
U. hydrophana (Chitty). |
Section SprrosTemMA Pils. & Van.
Type U. rubra (C. B. Ad.), Pl. XVIII, fig. 12. The species are
all Jamaican.

U. dunkeriana (Pfr.). U. rubra (C. B. Ad.).
U. montana (C. B. Ad.). | U. similis (C. B. Ad.).
U. princeps (C. B. Ad.). U. tenella (C. B. Ad.).
U. pusilla (C. B. Ad.). | U. tenera (C.B. Ad.).

Subgenus Arangia Pils. & Van.

Type C. sowerbiana Pfr., Pl. XVIII, fig. 20. Subgeneric name
in memory of the Cuban naturalist, Rafeal Arango.

U. sowerbiana Pfr., Cuba. | U. monticola Wein]. Gonave I.
Subgenus Idiostemma Pils. & Van.

Type C. uncata Gundl., Pl. XVII, fig. 10.

A Cuban group, containing some of the most peculiar species of
the genus. There is a series of species leading by gradual stages
from the axial pairs of hooks of the typical forms to the oblique
nodes or ribs of U. lateralis, ete.

U. uneata (Gundl.). U. geminata (Pfr.).

U. perlata (Gundl.) (C F., P.V.] | U. fastigata (Gundl.).

U. levigata (Gundl.). U. lineata (Gundl.).

U. intusmalleata (Gundl.). | U. lateralis (Paz.) [P V.].

Section Macro Pils. & Van.

Radula with the teeth very rapidly decreasing, the third decidedly
smaller than second, formula about 8.1.8. Subgeneric name in
honor of a Cuban patriot.

U. interrupta (Gundl.) [P V.], Cuba. Pl. XVII, fig. 7.

Subgenus Gongylostoma Albers.
Section Pycnoptycuia Pils. & Van.
Type U. humboldtiana (Pfr.), Pl. XVIII, fig. 14. Species all
Cuban. :

U. humboldtiana (Pfr.) [B.]. U. striatella (Wright).
U. oviediana (D. Orb.). U. trilamellata (Pfr.).
U. sceeva (Gundl.) [C F.}. _| U. vignalensis (Wright) [C F).

U. shuttleworthiana (Poey).

276 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.
Section CALLONIA Crosse & Fischer.

Type C. elliottii Poey. Radula typical. See Pl. X VIII, fig. 18,
U. dautzenbergiana (Crosse). Species all Cuban.

We have enlarged the group of Crosse and Fischer to include
other Cuban species having the same internal structure and denti-
tion.

Species elaborately sculptured with hollow ribs :—

U. elliottii (Poey) [C F.]. U. dautzenbergiana (Crosse)
Pav
Somewhat smooth species :—
U. brunnescens (Gundl.). U. notata (Gundl.).
U. clara (Wright). U. vineta (Gundl.).
U. guirensis (Gundl.). U. saxosa (Poey).

U. infortunata (Arango).
Species with beaded suture :—
U. albocrenata (Gundl.)
Section SECTILUMEN Pils. & Van.
U. ornata (Gundl.) [B., P V.]. Cuba. Pl. XVII, fig. 9.
Section EsocHara Pils. & Van.

Type U. strangulata (Poey), Pl. XVIII, fig. 15. Distribution,
Cuba.

U. fabreana (Poey) [P V.]. | U. teneriensis (Wright).
U. strangulata (Poey). |

Section GONGYLOSTOMA Albers (restricted ).

Type U. elegans (Pfr.), Pl. XVIII, fig. 17 (variety). Also Pl.
XVIIL, fig. 16, U. pruinosa. Distribution, Cuba.

U. artemesie (Gundl.). U. fortis (Gundl.).

U. auberiana (D. Orb.). U. gutierezi (Arango).

U. conereta (Gundl.). U. lavalleana (Orb.).

U. coronadoi (Arang). U. obliqua (Pfr.).

U. crispula (Pfr.). U. planospira (Pfr.).

U. elegans (Pfr.) [B., P V.]. | U. pruinosa (Morel.) [P V.].

Section ToMELAsMus Pils. & Van.

Type U. torquata (Morel.), Pl. XVII, fig. 8; also Pl. XVIII,
fig. 13, U. wrighti var. Radula typical. Species all Cuban.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 277

U. aculeus (Morel.). U. heynemani (Pfr.).

U. acus (Pfr.). U. hidalgoi (Arango).

U. adnata (Pfr.). U. hilleri (Pfr.) [P V.].

U. afinis (Pfr.) [P V.]. | U. incerta (Arango).

U. angustior (Wright). U. integra (Pfr.).

U. arcustriata (Wr.). U. irrorata (Gundl.).

U. assimilis (Arango). U. macra (Wright).

U. eapillacea (Pfr.). U. plumbea (Wright).

U. coerulans (Poey). U. producta (Gundl.).

U. colorata (Arango). | U. sawvalleana (Gundl.) [P V.].
U. crenulata (Gdl.). | U. seabrosa (Gundl.).

U. erystallina (Wright). U. thomsoni (Arango).

U. decolorata (Gundl.). | U. torquata (Morel.).

U. diaphana (Wright). _ *U. unguiculata (Arango).

U. discors (Poey). U. ventricosa (Gundl.) [P V.]
U. fibrosa (Gundl.). | U. violacea (Wright).

U. fusiformis (Wr.). U. wrighti (Pfr.).

U. gareiana (Wright).

Section AMPHICOSMIA Pils. & Van.

Type C. salleana Pfr., Pl. XVIII, fig. 22.
Proposed for three San Domingo species in which the columella
bears two spiral laminz, both finely denticulate.

U. salleana (Pfr.). U. gracilicollis (Auct.).
U. hjalmarsoni (Pfr.).

Genus BRACHYPODELLA Beck, 1838.

In this genus the radula is more highly specialized than in Uro-
coptis and the shell generally less so, internal armature of the axis
being entirely absent, or limited to a weak, scarcely noticeable,
spiral fold above.

The geographic range of Brachypodella includes not only the ter-
ritory occupied by Urocoptis, but surpasses it on all sides: in the
Bahamas on the north, the Virgin group on the east, the whole
Caribbean chain and northern border of South America on the
south, and west and southwest is sparsely distributed over Central
America and southeastern Mexico.

The distribution of the minor groups is suggestive. The Jamai-
ean sections form a group by themselves characterized by the ex-
tremely aberrant dentition as well as the modified shells. The spe-
cies of other islands and the mainland are decidedly less specialized,

278 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

and show but a small amount of variation in general appearance.
The section Strophina has the dentition of typical Brachypodella.
Section BRACHYPODELLA s. 8.

Type B. antiperversa Fér.

This subgenus has a less specialized radula and wider geographic
range than the others. The species are all small, mainly quite slen-
der forms, for the most part not exhibiting great variety of form ;
but two exceptions may be noticed: B. brooksiana of Cuba, and
some related species, have the neck enormously drawn out; while
in some of the continental forms there is a weak spiral lamina upon
the pillar.

Continental Species: Tabasco and Yucatan to Venezuela.

B. bourguignatiana (Ancey). B. spelunce (Morel.).
B. hanleyana (Pfr.). B. spelunce var. dubia (Pils.).
B. morini (Morel.). B. subtilis (Morel.).
Insular species: Curacao and Trinidad to Porto Rico.
B. raveni (Bld.). Curacao. BL. pallida (Gldg.). St. John,
B. trinitaria oe )[P V.]. Trin- Tortola, St. Thomas, Porto
idad. Rico.
B. costata (Gldg.) [C F.]. Bar- | B. chordata (Pfr.). St. Croix.
bados. B. portoricensis (Pfr.). Porto
B. antiperversa (Fér.) [P V.]. Rico. . |
Guadeloupe. B. riisei (Pfr.) [P V.]. Porto

B. collaris (Auct.) [P V.]. Gua- Rico.
deloupe, Martinique.

Greater Antilles— Haiti.

B. dominicensis (Pfr.). B. smithiana (Pfr.).
B. gouldiana (Pfr.). B. weinlandi (Pfr.).
B. obesa (Weinl. & Mts.).

Greater Antilles— Cuba.

B. blainiana (Gundl.). B. modesta (Poey).

B. brooksiana (Gdl.) [C F., P. | B. philippiana (Pfr.).
WJ: B. plicata (Poey) [P V.].

B. camoensis (Pfr.). B. porrecta (Gld.).

B. capillacea (Pfr.). | B. rugeli (Shutt.).

B. cyclostoma (Pfr.) [B., P V.]. | B. sealarina (Shutt.).

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 279

B. gracillima (Poey). | B. seopulosa (Gundl.).

B. gundlachiana (Poey). B. sexdecimalis (Jien.).

B. marmorata (Shutt. ). | B. soluta (Pfr.).

B. minuta (Gundl.). |B. turcasiana (Gundl.).
Bahamas.

B. bahamensis (Pfr.). New Providence, [C F., P V.].
Section SrroPpHINA Morch.
B. laterradii (Grat.) [P V.]. San Domingo.
Section Groscata Pils. & Van.

Type B. seminuda (C. B. Ads.).

A Jamaican group similar to some Brachypodellas except in the
dentition, which is of the highly evolved type seen in Mychostoma.
The shell differs from this last group in being fusiform, fewer
whorled and strongly costate.

B. seminuda (C. B. Ad.) [B., P | B. inornata (C. B. Ad.).

V.j. | B. robertsi (C. B. Ad.).
B. costulata (C. B. Ad.). |

Subgenus Mychostoma Albers.

Mychostoma Alb., Die Hel. (edit. 1), p. 207. All species are

Jamaican.
B. agnesiana (C. B. Ad.) [C F., | B. alabastrina (Pfr.).

i Val _ B. pearmaniana (Chitty).

B. alba (Ad.). B. subula (Fér.) [B.].
Subgenus Apoma Beck.

Apoma Beck, Index Moll., p. 89.

Casta Alb., Die Hel., p. 208.

A very distinct group, containing two sinistral Jamaican species.

Type Turbo elongatus (Wood), Pl. XVIII, fig. 21.

Von Martens objects to the name Apoma because of its inapplica-
bility as implying that other allied groups should be operculated ;
but it was obviously given to direct attention to the most conspicu-
ous difference between this group and Clausilia, and from this
point of view is eminently appropriate.

B. gracilis (Wood) [C F., 8 P.]. | B. elongata (Chemn.) [B., P V.].
g g

Genus ANOMA Albers.
1850. Anoma Alb., Die Heliceen, p. 209, for acus Pfr., gossei Pfr.,
tricolor Pfr. (the last selected as type by von Martens, Die Hel. 2d
edit., 1860, p. 269). Not Anomus Fairm. Hemiptera 1846.

280 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

1850. Leia Albers, Die Hel., p. 207. Sole species LZ. maugert
Wood. Not Leia Meigen in Diptera, 1818, nor Meg., Coleoptera,
1821.

1852. Lia Moreh, Catal. Yoldi, p. 35. Sole species LD. maugeri.
Not Lia Esch., in Coleoptera, 1829.

1869. Inliaculus Schaufuss, in Paetel’s Moll. Syst. et Catal., p. 15.

1894. Vendrysia Simpson, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., xvii, p. 480.
Substitute for Leia.

Distribution, Jamaica; mountains of the interior.

Of the several names proposed for this group, Anoma has priority.
It has the disadvantage of being preceded by Anomus, which some
writers would hold to be identical. Those adhering to this view
will adopt the name Jnliaculus of Schaufuss ; but pending some con-
certed action upon this point in “nymology” the oldest name may
be allowed to stand.

The dentition (Pl. XVII, figs. 8 and 6, A. maugeri) is extremely
peculiar, differing from that of Urocoptis in having the cusps of the
teeth serrate.

A. maugert (Wood). A, zebrina (Pfr.).
A. blandiana (Pfr.). A. tricolor (Pfr.).
A. macrostoma (Pfr.). A. gossei (Pfr.).

Genus MACROCERAMUS Guilding.

1822. Cochlodina, Lre groupe, Pupoides Fér., Tabl. Systematique,
p. 24, 61.

1828. Macroceramus Guilding, Zool. Journ., IV, p. 168. M.
signatus.

1850. Colobus Alb., Die Heliceen p.177. Not of Illiger, 1811,
Merrian, 1820 (Rept.), or Serv., 1833 (Coleopt.).

For anatomy see Crosse & Fischer, Journ. de Conchyl., 1870, p.
20; Moll. Terr. Mex., I, p.419. Binney, Terr. Moll., V, p. 384;
Ann. N. Y. Acad., III, p. 126. Strebel & Pfeffer, Beitr. Mex. L. u.
S.-W. Conch., IV, p. 89.

Preponderantly Antillean, this genus has representatives upon the
mainland bordering the Gulf of Mexico from Venezuela to Florida.
These peripheral species are apparently all members of the section
Microceramus. In the West Indies the genus is present on nearly
every island, but is especially developed in Cuba, to which Spiro-
ceramus is confined. It is poorly represented in Jamaica by a few
species of the group Microceramus, to which the species of the
Bahamas likewise belong.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 281
Synopsis of subgenera.
I. Axis slender, straight and simple.

a. Macroceramus. Shell comparatively solid and large. Type
M. signatus Gldg.

a’. Microceramus Pils. & Van., (n. s.-g.). Shell smaller, thin.
Type W. floridanus Pils.

Il. Axis with a strong spiral lamina.

Spiroceramus Pils. & Van., (n. s.-g.). Dentition unknown. Type
M. amplus Gundl.

Genus PINERIA Poey.

This small group, originally described from the Isle of Pines, but
also occurring in several of the Caribbean Islands, is probably an
offshoot of the genus Macroceramus. The peculiar features of the
external anatomy described by Poey should be re-examined.

Genus EPIROBIA Strebel & Pfeffer, 1880.

Epirobia 8. & P., Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Fauna mexikanischer
Land- u. Siisswasser-Conchylien, Theil LV, pp. 77, 85.

Type E. polygyra Pfr. Pl. XVII, fig. 2 (dentition). For figure
of the axis, see Strebel, /. c., pl. 14, f. 14.

Many-whorled, slender species of Eastern Mexico, usually retain-
ing the spire intact, differing from Urocoptis and Brachypodella in
dentition and in the hollow axis. Notwithstanding the entirely
“ Cylindrella”’-like aspect of the shell externally, these features un-
questionably locate the group near Holospira and Celocentrum.

Strebel and Pfeffer referred all of the Mexican Cylindrellas to
their group; but it must be restricted by removal of the forms with
solid axis, which apparently belong to Brachypodella. In addition
to the two species mentioned below, FE. berendti Pfr. [S P.] belongs
here, and probably gassiesi Pfr. and swiftiana Crosse also. The * E.
morini Morelet,” of Strebel & Pfeffer was incorrectly identified,and
probably a form of E. polygyra.’ The true C. morini is a Brachy-
podella with acutely keeled base.

E. polygyra Pfr. [S P., P V.].

E. apiostoma Pfr.

SSince this paper was written, this form has been referred by Dr. yon
Martens to C. folygyrel/a Mts. It is a true Z/irodia.

19

282 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.
Genus HOLOSPIRA von Martens.

This genus, which is confined to the mainland of Mexico and the
adjacent States of the Union, offers an interesting series of structures
in the internal lamelle, parallel to those of Urocoptis. The prin-
cipal divergence from that genus is in the frequent development of
parietal and basal lamellz, which are of rare occurrence in the
Antillean genera.

Professor Dall,? who has ably investigated the subject, gives the
following classification, which seems worthy of unqualified ap-
proval :—

Subgenus Hotosprra s. s., type WN. pilocerei Pfr., with section
Bostrichocentrum Strebel & Pfeffer, Haplostemma, Eudistemma and
Distomospira Dall.

Subgenus Merasroma Strebel & Pfeffer, type H. roemeri Pfr.

Subgenus CazLosteMMA Dall, type H. elizabethe Pilsbry.

The first group includes species with an axial plait and usually
various other armature. More or less similar structures occur in
Gongylostoma. Metastoma has the axis simple, as in typical Urocop-
tis and Brachypodella. In Celostemma a swollen, vertically cost-
ulate axis is found, unlike any Antillean type, although there is
some analogy with the subgenus Jdiostemma Pils. & Van.

Genus EUCALODIUM Crosse & Fischer.

In this Mexican genus the large, solid shell resembles typical Uro-
coptis; the axis is solid and sinuous, with a continuous spiral plait,
as in the subgenus Arangia P. & V., of Urocoptis.

The subgenus Oligostylus Pils.” has the axis straight and smooth,
as in typical Urocoptis.

These two types of pillar are exactly paralleled also in the genus
Macroceramus Gldg. and its subgenus Spiroceramus Pils. & Van.

Subgenus Anisospira Strebel & Pfeffer.

An eastern Mexican group, of few species. The soft anatomy is
still unknown. It seems to be a subgenus subordinate to Hucalo-

dium.
Genus BERENDTIA Crosse & Fischer.

Like Spurtocentrum, to which it is closely allied ; but with the axis
solid, slender and smooth, and the spire tapering, with fewer, more

% Proc. U. S. National Museum, xix, p. 344, 1896.
19See Dall, The Nautilus 1X, p. 51; Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. XIX, p. 348.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 283

rapidly widening whorls. ‘The only species, B. taylori Pfr., inhabits
the table land of Lower California.

Genus CHLOCENTRUM Crosse & Fischer.

The hollow and usually vertically ribbed axis is unlike any of the
Antillean types, although radiating spines, such as Dall describes in
C. astrophorea, recall certain forms of Gongylostoma. In the section
Spartocentrum Dall” there is a spiral inflation and no vertical rib-
lets.

. Genus CERION (Bolt.) Mérch.
See Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1896, p. 315.

This genus has generally been placed in the neighborhood of
Pupa, but it is not closely allied to that group in shell characters
and is entirely diverse in genitalia. It may possibly belong to the
Odontostomine ( Odontostomus, Tomigerus, Anastoma) of South A mer-
ica; but we prefer to associate Cerion with the Holospira and Euca-
lodium groups of Urocoptide.”

As this genus has been made the subject of special papers by Dr.
W. H. Dall and by the present writers, it need only be said here
that it differs from the other genera in being strictly littoral in dis-
tribution, never straying far from the seashore. The Miocene forms
( Eostrophia) are probably aberrant rather than primitive, in lack-
ing parietal and axial lamine.

Genus MEGASPIRA Lea.

A Brazilian group very peculiar in its polygyrate shell with large,
rounded nuclear whorls, plicate columella and peculiar internal arma-
ture, somewhat recalling Gongylostoma, Idiostemma, etc. This has
been described and figured by Gabb.” The dentition we have now
examined (Pl. XVII, fig. 1), the radula having been found in a dry
shell. There are 28°1°28 teeth, arranged in slightly sinuous trans-
verse rows, and of the type usual in ground snails, much like those
of Eucalodium, Berendtia, ete.

™ See Nautilus IX, p. 51 (Sept., 1895), type Calocentrum irregulare Gabb.
The genus Teneritia Mabille, Bull. Soc. Philomathique de Paris, (Ser. 8), Vol.
IX, p. 79( 1897 or 1898) isa synonym of Spartocentrum. Types Berendtia digueti
and B. minorina Mabille. M. Mabille is perfectly right in separating his
group from Berendtia, but he overlooks the only really important differential
character, viz., the hollow axis.

1? Dall has hinted at the same relationship. See Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus.,
XIX, p. 347, 348, 1897.

1° American Journal of Conchology LI, p. 64.

284 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Megaspira was placed in the vicinity of Clausilia by Deshayes,
who thought the internal structure indicated the presence of a clausi-
lium. This inference does not seem justified by the facts of the case,
though we are far from denying its possibility; our specimen with
the soft parts dried in shows no trace of a clausilium. Upon the
whole, it would appear that Megaspira is an aberrant member of the
Urocoptide, nearest perhaps to Eucalodium among existing genera.

The South African genus Celazis and the Papuan and Australian
Perrieria are somewhat similar to the foregoing American genera,
but are doubtless correctly referred to Pupida, near Clausilia. Per-
rieria has a complicated internal armature, only partially worked
out by Fischer.

The Colombian Rhodea is probably referable to the Achatinide,
grouping near Subulina Beck (type S. octona).

TABLE SHOWING GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION OF THE UROCOPTIDA.

Genus UROCOPRTIAN. <.c.cecccsccsscsesrnn
Section Urocoftis (restricted)...
Section Cochlodinella......ccccs0e
Section SPirostemmMa.....ce creer

Subgenus Arangia.....0. v0
Subgenus /diostesti1....ccccseeveee
Section Maceo. ......c.cssc00
Subgenus Gongylostoma..... eas
Section Pycnoptychia...ecee.e+++
Section Calonia............ccesessee
Section Sectz/umen ...
Section Lsochara. ..sccccscsscersese
Section Gongylostoma (Ss. 5.).+.+
Section AmPAiCOSMIG .0000 veceeeees
Section Torelasmus....c.cccccesses

Genus BRACHYPODELLA ........000000
Section Brachypodella (s.5.)...
Section StropAind.......cssccccseeee
Section Goscala.ccece..-scoscecerses
Section Mychostoma......cseo
Section Afoma

Genus EPIROBIA F

Genus HOLOSPEEAS. «0. <<cccosserssvesses

Genus MACROCERAMUG.........cecsee0

Genus AMOMA \((232) 0. cssssesdesss0snce

Genus EUCALODIUM «2... csoccesecesees

Genus CoELOCENTRUM ........csceseee

Genus BERENDTIA ....:cccscssedabsercnee

Pe eo sete tee UC Wo ia Ce fate te ee ee tt | Lower California,
Piewe Cee CT eet hn er ry ee he | Mexico, Central America,

Phone Careloree lot Carte Ven Wer ten Vr wet | Caribbean Is.
Po Cee ee vy ote i Ae I Teh Tee et Peo ig | Porto Rico, Virgin Is.

SL. Ae VT eR HE Le Coe ae ie tae | Haiti
CPi e PH RH TPH TEP eed ieee | Jamaica.

Se PLL ie ttl tb imeem LRH RHR HH HH LK I | cuba.
BOL eet oe Pate Che tora eis te bel | Bahamas.

MULWaT LULA Tee a ee te | 8. Florida,

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 285

SUGGESTED PHYLOGENY OF THE GENERA AND PRINCIPAL
SUBGENERA OF UROCOPTID.

A
poma Mychostoma
Geoscala
Gongylostoma Strophina
BRACHYPODELLA
Idiostemma rangia

UROCOPTIS

MACROCERAMUS

BERENDTI

A
HOLOSPIR CELOCENTRUM EUCALODIUM

Anisospira

EPIROBIA
A

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
PuaTE XVII.

CERION

Fig. 1. Megaspira elata Gld. Half of a transverse row of teeth
(the outermost marginals placed above, to the left).

Fig. 2. Epirobia polygyra (Pfr.). The same, a few outermost
marginal teeth lacking.

Fig. 3. Anomamaugeri( Wood). Group of teeth from the median
part of the radula.

Fig. 4. Brachypodella (Apoma) elongata (Ch.). Half of a trans-
verse row of teeth.

Fig. 5. Urocoptis cylindrus (Ch.), very small variety from Port-
land, Jamaica. Half of a transverse row of teeth.

Fig. 6. Anoma maugeri (Wood). <A lateral tooth seen in profile.

Fig. 7. Urocoptis (Maceo) interrupta (Gundl.). Section of shell.

Fig. 8. ee (Tomelasmus) torquata (Morel.). Section of
shell.

Fig. 9. Urocoptis (Sectilumen) ornata (Gundl.).

Fig. 10. Urocoptis (Idiostemma) uncata (Gundl.).

286

Fig.

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig. -
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898,
Puiate XVIII.
Urocoptis eylindrus (Chemn.) (C. rosea var. major C. B.
Ad.).

Urocoptis (Spirostemma) rubra (C. B. Ad.).
Urocoptis (Tomelasmus) wrighti (Pfr.) var.
Urocoptis (Pyenoptychia) humboldtiana (Pfr.).
Urocoptis (Esochora) strangulata (Poey).
Urocoptis (Gongylostoma) pruinosa (Morel.).
Urocoptis ( Gongylostoma) elegans (Pfr.).
Urocoptis ( Callonia) dautzenbergiana (Crosse).
Brachypodella (Mychostoma) agnesiana (C. B. Ad.).
Urocoptis (Arangia) sowerbiana (Pfr.).
Brachypodella (Apoma) elongata (Chemn.).
Urocoptis (Amphicosmia) salleana (Pfr.).

1898. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 287

CHITONS COLLECTED BY DR. HAROLD HEATH AT PACIFIC GROVE,
NEAR MONTEREY, CALIFORNIA.

BY H. A. PILSBRY.

During the summer of 1897 Dr. Heath collected a series of inver-
tebrates and fishes for the Academy, including some twenty-four
species and varieties of Polyplacophora. As he has kindly engaged
to collect again during the present season, a full report on the
Chitons, with illustrations of new, unfigured and unusual forms may
be deferred until further specimens come to hand; but it may be
well to enumerate the forms already seen, and describe two which
seem to be new.

It is evident that the Mopalias require more study than has yet
been given them. At Pacific Grove, the typical muscosa, typical
lignosa and typical Hindsii occur, without, so far as the series seen
shows, any specimens of intermediate character. The reference of
these to onespecies may, therefore, have been premature. A Mopalia
described below, differs from those hitherto known in the perfectly
regular form of the tail valve, which is like that of Jsehnochiton,
thus breaking down, in large measure, the distinction between the
Ischnochitonide and the Mopaliide. This lawless species is new,
and I have given myself the pleasure of associating the name of my
friend Dr. Heath with it.

The occurrence of two seven-valved adult monsters is also notable.
I shall return to these on a later occasion.

LEPIDOPLEURIDS.
Lepidopleurus rugatus (pr.
Lepidopleurus nexus Cpr.
ISCHNOCHITONIDSZ.
Tonicella lineata Wood.
Trachydermon (Cyanoplax) Raymondi Pils.
A small form of the species, occurring in tide pools,
Trachydermon (Cyanoplax) Hartwegi Cpr.
Ischnochiton radians (pr.
This species is very similar to J. interstinctus Gld., but the teeth
are longer and the slits decidedly deeper.

288 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Ischnochiton scabricostatus Cpr. var.
Ischnochiton regularis Cpr.

One specimen has but seven valves, but in all other respects is
perfectly normal.

Ischnochiton Mertensii Midd.
Ischnochiton Cooperi Cpr.
Ischnochiton (decipiens var,?) sinudentatus Cpr.
Ischnochiton (Stenoradsia) Magdalenensis Hinds,
Callistochiton crassicostatus Pils.
Callistochiton palmulatus var. mirabilis Pils.
Chetopleura gemmea Cpr.
Nuttallina Californica ‘ Nutt.’ Rve.
Nuttallina Thomasi Pilsbry, n. sp.

In tide pools with Tr. Raymondi. See below.

MOPALIIDZA.
Mopalia muscosa Gld. Typical.
Mopalia muscosa lignosa Gld. Typical.
Mopalia muscosa Hindsii ‘Sow.’ Rve. Typical.
Mopalia Heathii Pilsbry. See below.
Mopalia ciliata Sow. Typical.
Placiphorella velata Cpr.
ACANTHOCHITIDA.
Katharina tunicata Wood.
Cryptochiton Stelleri Midd.
One full grown specimen is 7-valved, otherwise normal.

Mopalia Heathii n. sp.

Oblong, rather elevated, carinated, with nearly straight side
slopes; surface smoothish to the naked eye, lusterless, and in color
(1) olive-green with some lighter spots, or purplish maculation, or
slight roseate suffusion, or (2) vivid red, with scattered biue spots.

Valves shaped as in M. lignosa, but without a median anterior
projection of the tegmentum ; the intermediate valves very faintly
radially trisuleate at the sides, the anterior two grooves defining the
low, slight and inconspicuous diagonal rib, the lateral areas not
raised ; entire surface very finely and evenly granulate, the granules
small, rather pointed, separated, intervals very minutely, radially
wrinkle-granulate. Anterior valve with a few faint, shallow radial
furrows. Posterior valve with semicircular posterior outline, the
mucro in front of the middle of tegmentum, profile of the surface in
front of it convex, that of the posterior slope decidedly concave.

: Paar oy, t=

+4 tn boa

Le

é
;
.
.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 289

Interior deep rose color or slightly purplish ; sutural laminz and
sinus about as in lignosa. Teeth rather long and somewhat rough-
ened, asin lignosa. Valvei with 8 slits; ii-vii with 1-1; valve viii
entirely “ Ischnoid,” with regular, crescentic insertion plate, cut by
7 or 8 slits, which are somewhat closer posteriorly ; no sinus behind.

Girdle leathery, nude except for solitary or two or three closely
grouped long bristles at all or part of the sutures, one on each side
of the head valve, and two behind the tail valve.

Gills about 25 on each side, not extending quite to the anterior
end of the foot.

Length 25, width 12 mm. (dried specimen), or smaller.

In one specimen there are 9 bristles on each side and one in the
middle in front. Another lacks this median bristle; and in still
another, some of the sutures are without bristles. In all, some of
them are broken off close to the girdle, leaving only stumps or pores.

This form resembles M. sinwata and imporcata in the sutural
bristles, but differs from them in sculpture and form of the tail valve.
The latter is completely as in Ischnochiton, and its form is approached
only by M. acuta Cpr., which however has a slight caudal sinus,
much stronger sculpture, more depressed and more posterior mucro,
and scattered hairs on the girdle, without sutural bristles. It is
also blue-green or pale blue inside, while M. Heathii is rose colored.
One of the specimens was dredged in 17 fms. ; station of the others
unknown,

Nuttallina Thomasi n. sp.

General form oblong, rather depressed, not keeled dorsally ; sur-
face granulose when not eroded. Color blackish or dark brown,
with a whitish band on each side of the median line of back, or irre-
gular whitish maculation; girdle dark.

Intermediate valves short and wide, with a slight or hardly notice-
able depression on each side of the jugum, and others in front of and
behind the scarcely defined, obsolete, diagonal convexity; the ante-
rior and posterior margins subparallel, slightly arcuate. Anterior
valve granulate, without radial ribs, the posterior margin excavated
mesially, Posterior valve with tegmentum slightly wider than the
anterior, the obtuse mucro somewhat behind the middle.

Interior blue-green, with the area behind the valve-callus dark
brown, or livid purplish, with light sutural laminw and blue-green
area behind the sinus. Slits in valve i, 9 or 10; valves ii to vil,
1-1; valve viii, 10 or 11. Teeth rather separated, those of valve i

290 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

unequal, slightly rugose outside; posterior tooth of valves ii to vii
small, very obliquely directed forward; teeth of valve viii very
short, strongly directed forward and roughened. Sinus wide and
square, spongy, the area behind it transversely grooved. Eaves
rather wide, “spongy ” or porous.

Girdle sparsely covered with short, rigid, obtuse, glossy spines of
a blackish-brown color, or occasionally some are whitish.

Gills in type specimen, 26 on left, 23 on right side; not quite
reaching the anterior end of the foot. In another there are 23 on
the left, 25 on the right side.

Length 15, breadth 8 mm., or smaller.

Pacific Grove, in small tide-pools 4 to 8 ft. above mean tide mark.

This species differs markedly from N. Californica (‘ Nutt.’ Rve.)
and NV. fluaa (Cpr.)' in the shorter valves, lack of radial ribs on the
anterior and intermediate valves, and more anterior mucro of the
posterior valve, and the single slitting of valves ii to vii. I at first
considered it a Middendorffia, but the girdle is like that of Nuttal-
lina, not having the peculiarly modified spines of the Mediterranean
Middendorgia. It lives with a small form of Trachydermon (Cyano-
plax) Raymondi, which is much more numerous in the tide-pools.
From that species it may be known by the spiny girdle. Nearly all
the specimens collected are much eroded.

This species may be considered the type of a new subgenus of
Nuttallina, with the following differential characters: Intermediate
valves with 1-1 slits; anterior valve not radially ribbed ; posterior
valve with the mucro post-median, but not terminal. Other char-
acters as in Nuttallina.

At Mr. Heath’s request, it is named in honor of Mr. Thomas, who
found the first specimens.

1—Oh. scaber Rve., 1847, not of Blainville, 1825.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 291

NOTES ON MR. THOMAS MEEHAN’S PAPER ON THE PLANTS OF LEWIS
AND CLARK’S EXPEDITION ACROSS THE CONTINENT, 1804-06.

BY DR. ELLIOTT COUES.

Many years ago I prepared for publication in these Proceedings
a paper on the plants of Fort Macon, N. C. It never appeared,
because I submitted it to Professor Asa Gray, who told me it was a
very good one, but asked me what was the use of printing it. Taking
the hint to heart, I have from that day to this curbed any aspira-
tions I may have felt to botanical authorship ; and it now behooves
me to explain why I presume to have anything to say on a botani-
eal subject. In fact, I do not now write on Lewis and Clark’s
plants, but solely on the localities where their plants were procured.
I do not pretend to any knowledge of botany, but if there is any-
thing I do know, it is exactly where Lewis and Clark were on every
day, almost every hour, from start to finish of their famous expedi-
tion. Consequently, I can give the precise locality of every speci-
men which bears a date in the herbarium that Mr. Meehan recently
discovered to be still extant, and thus available for the determina-
tion of so many of the type specimens of Pursh’s species. This
discovery seems to me one of the happiest and most important that
could have been made, and I doubt not that Mr. Meehan’s identifi-
cations of these plants, with the assistance of Messrs. Robinson and
Greenman, will be justly regarded as a boon to working botanists.
I could wish that these writers had effected what I conceive should
have been done to set forth the whole matter in its proper light, but
since they did not give the requisite precision to Pursh’s generally
loose and vague, sometimes wholly erroneous, indications of locality,
that duty seems to devolve upon me.

In reading Mr. Meehan’s paper, I have been little short of
astounded at the kind of geography which seems to have answered
the purposes of the botanists concerned in this case. Nothing of
the sort would satisfy a zodlogist, Iam sure. ‘To describe a new spe-
cies upon a type specimen, assigned to “ the banks of the Missouri,”
or to “the valleys of the Rocky Mountains,” would not be tolerated
in zodlogy, and should not be endured in botany, when the data

292 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

required to pin every dated specimen down to the precise spot where
it was collected are ample, and easily accessible in the edition of
Lewis and Clark which I brought out in 1893.

Neither praise nor blame attaches to me for any of the botany
which appears in that work. As stated in my preface, most of the
botanical determinations were those of Mr. F. H. Knowlton, whom
I engaged for that purpose, and whose identifications of the plants
mentioned or described by Lewis and Clark I accepted without
question in any instance. That they should all prove to be correct
was not to be expected, and I am now aware of several errors. In
the case of the trees, the mistakes have, perbaps, all been detected
and corrected in the admirable critical review lately published by
Professor C. 8. Sargent in Garden and Forest, Nos. 465, 466, Janu-
ary 20th and 27, 1897. I could wish that the same searchlight had
been turned by Mr. Meehan and his collaborators upon the rest of
the botany in my book, and venture to suggest that the whole sub-
ject will not be put in its full light or final shape till this has been
thoroughly well done.

Great as are the obligations under which Mr. Meehan and his as-
sistants have placed all who are in any way interested in this sub-
ject, in the paper which I now proceed to annotate geographically,
there remains for some one the agreeable and useful task of review-
ing Lewis and Clark’s botanical teat as distinguished from their
specimens. For it is a curious fact, as I find on studying Mr. Mee-
han’s paper, that the plants of which Lewis and Clark have most to
say in their Journal, are not, as a rule, those of which specimens are
now extant in their herbarium. Their botany, it may be said, runs
in two parallel courses. One of these is represented by the speci-
mens which they collected, and which became so many of Pursh’s
types; the other, by the herbs, shrubs and trees which they observed,
and noted in their narrative, but did not actually collect. Often-
times, to be sure, they describe what is in the herbarium, but I
should imagine that fifty, if not a hundred species are to be found
in the book, no specimens of which are known to be extant. This
would appear to me to be a field of research at once alluring and
stimulating to some well equipped botanist, and I trust that the
work may soon be done once and forever. Lewis and Clark’s whole
botany could easily be set abreast of the status I have myself been
able to confer upon their zodlogy, their ethnology and their geo-
graphy.

a,

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 293

With these remarks, which I trust will be found neither ungra-
cious nor presumptuous, I proceed to review Mr. Meehan’s paper
from a purely geographical point of view. I take his list precisely
as it stands, assuming the identifications to be correct in every in-
stance, and raising no botanical questions whatever. I only follow
the zoélogists’ rules of nomenclature in writing all specific and sub-
specific names with a lower case initial letter, all personal names in
the genitive case with a single 7, all trinomial names without the in-
tervention of “ var.”—a practice which I think most botanists would
like, if they could once get used to it.

Anemone canadensis L. (A. pennsylvanica L.)

August 17, 1804. Missouri River, close to the mouth of the
creek on which the Omahas resided ; now Omadi Creek, in Dakota
Co., Nebraska. L. & C. there August 15-20, 1804.

Anemone quinquefolia L.
June 15, 1806. Collins’ Creek, a branch of the Kooskooskee ;

now Nahwah River, or Lo Lo fork of Clearwater River, in Shoshone
Co., Idaho.
Clematis douglasi Hook. @. hirsutissima Pursh, FI., 384.

No date. Pursh has “ plains of the Columbia, May.” L. & C.
were not on the Columbia itself in May of either year. In May,
1806, they travelled by land approximately up Snake River or
Lewis’ fork to the mouth of the Kooskooskee, 1st—4th, up the Koos-
kooskee, 4th-13th, and were at their Camp Chopunnish, on the
right bank of the Kooskooskee, nearly opposite but alittle below
the mouth of Commearp Creek, now known as Lawyer’s Cafion
Creek, till June 10th. Thisis a notable locality, where many plants
were collected in May and June, 1806. The position is in Shoshone
Co., across the river from, and nearly opposite, that of present
Kamai or Kamiah, in Nez Percés Co., Idaho.

Delphinium menziesi DC.

April 14, 1806. On the Columbia River, one day’s journey by
boat below The Dalles, coming up stream.

Dentaria tenella Pursh, FI, 439.

April 1, 1806. On the Columbia, at the mouth of Quicksand
River of L. & C., now called Sandy River. This explains the state-
ment of locality in Mr. Meehan’s paper as “ Columbia near quick-
sands.”

294 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898,

Erysimum aspersum DC. ZL. /anceolatum Pursh, Fl. 436, nec R. Br.

June 1, 1806. Camp Chopunnish, as above described. This is
on the Kooskooskee. But the other specimen which Mr. Meehan
adduces from “ Rockford Camp, April 17, 1806,” is from The Dalles
of the Columbia. ‘“ Rockford” Camp, elsewhere called “ Rocky ”
or “ Rock,” is a mistake for Rock Fort or Fort Rock Camp, as L. &
C. called it when they were at The Dalles. The position is at the
mouth of their Quinett Creek, called Wasco Creek on some maps,
and now Mill Creek. The position is one of the best known on the
Columbia, Oregon side. L. & C. were there October 17, 1805,
going down, and April 15-17, 1806, coming up.

Cleome integrifoliaT.& G. 0. serrulata Pursh, ¥1. 441.

August 25, 1804. At or very near mouth of Vermilion River,
Clay Co., South Dakota. (Whitestone River of L. & C.)

August 29, 1806. At or near mouth of White River, Lyman
Co., South Dakota.

Cerastium arvense L. (. elongatwm Pursh, FI. 321.

April 22, 1806. On the Columbia, between Des Chutes and
John Day Rivers (the Towanahiooks and Le Page’s Rivers of L.
& C.). “Plains of the Columbia,” as given, is therefore quite
right.

Malvastrum coccineum Gray. Cristaria coccinea Pursh, FI. 453,

July 20, 1806. “Plains of the Missouri,” as given, is a mistake,
unless the phrase is used in a very broad sense. On this date the
expedition was widely separated. Lewis was high up on Maria’s
River near its forks in N. W. Montana; Clark was on the Yellow-
stone, at Camp Cottonwood, above Clark’s fork of that river. Clark
was busy building boats, and no doubt Lewis collected the plant.
The latter botanized that day, as we see by his Journal, p. 1090 of
my edition.

Linum lewisi Pursh, FI. 210.

July 9, 1806, and July 19, 1806, for the same specimen ; the dates
conflict, but “ valleys of the Rocky Mountains,” as given, can be
right for neither date in 1806, if the locality of this particular
specimen is meant. On July 9, 1806, Lewis was on Sun River, at
or near Fort Shaw, Montana, On July 19, 1806, he was high up
on Maria’s River; both of these places are out of the mountains.
But probably the label was only meant to indicate the general
range of the plant, not the exact locality of the specimen. Peren-

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 295

nial flax was first noticed by the expedition on the Missouri above
the Great Falls “ for several days” before July 19, 1805, below, at
and above Dearborn’s River, in the vicinity, not close, of Helena,
Montana. The species then described was identified as L. perenne
by Mr. F. H. Knowlton, p. 423 of my edition of the work. Some
of the country traversed in July, 1805, distinctly includes “ valleys
of the Rocky Mountains,” and I suspect that “1806” should read
1805; also, that July “9” and “19” are merely scribal duplication
of a single date.

Claytonia lanceolata Pursh, Fl. 175, t. 3.

June 27, 1806. “ Headwaters of the Kooskooskee” is quite
right. L. & C. were on the Lo Lo or Northern Nez Percé Trail,
along the divide between sources of both N. and §. forks of that
river, in central Idaho. It is the same day on which they notice
Erythronium grandiflorum.

Claytonia perfoliata Don. (In Mr. Mechan’s footnote, p. 19.)

March 26, 1806. On the lower Columbia, above Puget’s Island
and below the Cowlitz River.

April 17, 1806. ‘“ Rocky Camp,” i. e., The Dalles, as above ex-
plained.
Claytonia sibirica L. (In Mr. Mechan’s footnote, p. 19.)

April 8, 1806. In camp on the Columbia, in Multnomah Co.,
Oregon, about 10 miles above Quicksand or Sandy River; vicinity
of the place called Cape Horn.

Claytonia linearis Dougl. (In Mr. Meehan’s footnote, p. 20.)
June 27, 1806. As above said for C. lanceolata.

Lewisia triphylla Rob.
June 27, 1806. Same as the last.

Lewisia rediviva Pursh, FI. 368.

July 1, 1806. At mouth of Traveller’s Rest Creek of L. & C.,
i. e., of the Lou Lou Fork of the Bitter-root River, some 12 miles
south of Missoula, Montana. It should be explained “ Clark’s
River,” the assigned location of this plant and some others, always
means Bitter-root River, in so far as any plants collected are con-
cerned. Lewis named Clark’s River September 6, 1805, when the
expedition was in Ross’ Hole near the head of the east fork of the
Bitter-root River ; the party went down this river only as far as the
Lou Lou Fork just said, up which they turned sharp and so on over

296 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

the Bitter-root range to the sources of the Kooskooskee. They
were never on the Clark’s River of modern geography, as the great
stream of which the Bitter-root is a collateral head does not now
bear Clark’s name above the junction of the Bitter-root with Hell-
gate River. I may add that Lewisia rediviva, the racine amére (or
bitter root) of the French, is the plant from which the river, its
valley, and the mountain range on the west derive theirname. An
alternative name of the Bitter-root was St. Mary’s River, imposed
by Father P. J. De Smet in 1842.

Montia parviflora Howell. Claytonia perfoliata Pursh, Fl. 176, nee Don.

March 26, 1806. As above said for Claytonia perfoliata.
April 17, 1806. As above said for Claytonia perfoliata.

Montia sibirica Howell. Claytonia alsinoides Pursh, F). 175.

April 8, 1806. As above said for Claytonia sibirica. There
seems to be a duplication of the record of the same specimens of
this and preceding species in Mr. Meehan’s main text and footnotes.

Pachystima myrsinites Raf. Jlex ? myrsinites Pursh, Fl. 119.

June 16, 1806. On the Lo Lo Trail, vicinity of Hungry Creek
of L. & C., a branch of the north fork of the south fork of Koos-
kooskee River, next east of Collins’ Creek.

November 16, 1805. In camp on the Columbia in sight of the
ocean, at the landward end of Haley’s or Baker’s Bay, just inside
Chinook Point.

I heartily agree with Mr. Meehan that the name of this genus
should be written Pachystigma.

Ceanothus velutinus Dougl.

(No date.)

Rhamnus purshiana DC. QR. alnifolia Pursh, F). 166, nec Mehx.

May 29, 1806. Camp Chopunnish.

Rhus canadensis trilobata Gray.

October 1, 1804. In the Little Bend of the Missouri (Lookout
Bend of L. & C.), at or near the mouth of Cheyenne River. “ First
discovered in the neighborhood of the Kancez River,” i. ¢., when
L. & C. were about the mouth of Kansas or Kaw River, which was

reached June 26, 1804; “now very common” means at the date
said, Oct. 1, when they were in the said bend.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 297

Cissus ampelopsis Pers.

September 14, 1806. “ Council Bluffs, Missouri,” as given, is not
any locality, for Council Bluffs, Pottawattamie Co., Iowa, did not
exist in 1806, and the Council Bluff of L. & C. was much higher
up and on the other side of the river, where now stands Fort Cal-
houn, Washington Co., Nebraska. L. & C. passed it September 8,
1806, coming rapidly down river ; they were, therefore, many miles
below when they camped at Leavenworth, Kansas, on the 14th,
having come 53 miles that day.

Acer circinatum Pursh, Fl. 267,

October—, 1805. ‘‘ Great Rapids of the Columbia.” The date can
be set closer, as L. & C. did not reach the Cascades till October 30,
1805. The vine maple is fully described on p. 834 of my edition,
along with Acer macrophyllum.

Acer macrophyllum Pursh, Fl. 267.

April 10, 1806, Cascades of the Columbia, on the home voyage.
But L. & C. had noticed it in the same region the previous au-
tumn.

Polygala alba Nutt. P. seneca var. tenuifolia Pursh, Fl. 750.

August 10, 1806. At or near White Earth River of L. & C.,
now Muddy River, a branch of the Missouri, at whose mouth is
Williston, Montana, near the east boundary of the Fort Buford
military reservation. (Not modern White Earth River, which isa
different stream, much lower down.)

Amorpha fruticosa angustifolia Pursh, FI. 466.

August 27, 1806. Great Bend of the Missouri, as stated. This
formation is below Pierre, South Dakota, and just above the Crow
Creek Agency.

Astragalus missouriensis Nutt.

September 18, year not given. If 1804, one day below the Great
Bend of the Missouri, going up; if 1806, on the Missouri from
Grand to La Mine River, within the recent State of Missouri; most
probably 1804.

Astragalus mortoni Nutt.

September 15, 1804. At or near mouth of White River, Lyman
Co., South Dakota.

September 5, 1804. Mouth of the Niobrara River, or within one

day above it.

20

298 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Lupinus argenteus Pursh, Fl, 468.

July 7, 1806. ‘On the Cokahlaishkit ’—an interesting locality.
This is the River of the Road to Buffalo of L. & C., now the Big
Blackfoot River, a branch of Hellgate River. On the 7th Lewis
was on its headwaters, as this is the day he went over Lewis and
Clark’s Pass of the Continental Divide to the Middle Fork of
Dearborn’s River, thus passing from Deer Lodge County to Lewis
and Clark County, Montana.

Lupinus sericeus Pursh, Fl. 468.
June 5, 1806. Camp Chopunnish on the Kooskooskee.

Oxytropis nana Nutt. var. O. argentata Pursh, FI. 473.
ytrop { ,

July —, 1806. “ Near the head of Clark’s River ” means the Bit-
ter-root River at the mouth of its Lou Lou branch, the Traveller’s
Rest Creek of L. & C., and the date is July 1st or 2d, when Lewis
was botanizing as the Journal shows, p. 1065 of my edition. See
Trifolium microcephalum, below.

Petalostemon violaceus Mchx. Pursh, FI. 461.

July 22, 1806. “On the Missouri ;” impossible. At this date
Lewis was on Cut-bank Creek, one of the main headwaters of
Maria’s River, in N. W. Montana near the foot of the Rocky
Mountains, and Clark was on the Yellowstone. No doubt Lewis
collected the specimen.

September 2d, year not given; no locality indicated. If 1804, at
Bonhomme, South Dakota; if 1805, on Fish Creek, a tributary of
Salmon River, Idaho; if 1806, at or near James’ River, South
Dakota. The first and third of these are practically the same
locality, as the expedition crossed the years 1804 and 1806 in pass-
ing Bonhomme Island on September Ist. I presume the year is
1804, for, in the case of the related Psoralea argophylla, collected
October 17, 1804, and in the present case of Petalostemon violaceus,
Lewis makes similar remarks on the use of these plants by the
Indians in decoctions for wounds.

Psoralea argophylla Pursh, FI. 475.
October 17, 1804. On the Missouri, very near the mouth of
Cannonball River, North Dakota.

Psoralea tenuiflora Pursh, Fl. 475,
September 21, 1804. Great Bend of the Missouri, as stated.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 299

Trifolium megacephalum Nutt. Lupinaster macrocephalus Pursh, Fl. 479, t. 23.

April 17, 1806. Rock Fort Camp (not “ Rockford”) at The
Dalles of the Columbia.

Trifolium microcephalum Pursh, FI. 478.

July 1, 1806. Same spot as Oxytropis nana, above; here called
“ Valley of Clark’s River.” The Journal, p. 1066 of my edition,
speaks of “two species” of clover in this valley, one with a very
narrow, small leaf and a pale red flower, the other with a white
flower, and nearly as luxuriant in its growth as our red clover.
Amelanchier alnifolia Nutt. Pyrus sanguinea Pursh, FI. 340, in part.

April 15, 1806. Rock Fort Camp. The species is also recorded
repeatedly by L. & C. in widely separated localities ; see my edi-
tion, pp. 277, 282, 419, 828.

Crategus douglasi Lindl. ©. glandu/osus Pursh, FI. 337.

April 29 or 19, 1806 ; for dates conflict in main text and its foot-
note. If 19th, the place is Celilo Fails of the Columbia; if 29th,
mouth of Wallawalla River, on the Columbia, site of o/d Fort
Wallawalla and of modern Wallula. It is also elsewhere reported,
by L. & C. on the Columbia, much lower down. Mr. Meehan refers
to the Journal of January 20, 1806, but there is no allusion to the
plant at that date. He evidently means the description of No. 12
of the botanical list drawn up at Fort Clatsop; this is found on p.
826 of my edition, but there are no dates in this list. I am sorry to
find that Mr. Knowlton has discredited the identification, supposing
No. 12 to be Pyrus rivularis. It is correctly given, however, on p.
908, March 25, 1806, when the expedition was in the vicinity of
Puget’s Island. Again, on June 10, 1806 (p. 1041 of my edition),
when L, & C. left Camp Chopunnish, they speak of the “ purple
haw,” and Mr. Knowlton there bracketed Viburnum pauciflorum—
no doubt in error, as pointed out by Professor C. 8, Sargent in his
admirable paper on the trees of the expedition in Garden and For-
est, No. 466, January 27, 1897, p. 39.

Geum triflorum Pursh. @. ci/atum Pursh, Fl. 352.

June 12, 1806. Camp on Quamash Flats, the modern Weippe
or Oyipe Prairie in Shoshone Co., Idaho, on the Lo Lo Trail near
the west base of the mountains.

Pyrus sambucifolia Cham. and Schl. (7).

June 27, 1806. On the Lo Lo Trail, same place as Claytonia

lanceolata,

300 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898

Potentilla anserina L.

March 13, 1806. Fort Clatsop, L. & C. winter quarters of 1805-
06, a short distance up their Netul, now commonly called Lewis and
Clark’s River, a small stream which falls into the Columbia near
its mouth on the Oregon side.

Potentilla fruticosa L. Pursh, Fl. 355.

July 5, 1806. “ Prairie of the Knobs,” as given, is a remakable
place on the Cokahlaishkit or Big Blackfoot River, one day west of
Lewis and Clark’s Pass, in Deer Lodge County, Montana. It is
also called Blackfoot Prairie and Stevens’ Prairie, but Lewis did
not reach it till July 6th.

Prunus demissa Nutt.

August 10, 1806. “A cherry found near the beaver bents on the
Missouri.” I do not know what these are, but the place meant is
present Beaver Creek, in Flannery Co., North Dakota, almost on
the border of Mountraille Co., about where present White Earth
River (not the one so named by L. & C.) falls into the left bank of
the Missouri. The Journal of this date, p. 1173 of my edition,
has this note: “In the low grounds of the river Captain Clark
found to-day a species of cherry which he had never seen before,
and which seems peculiar to this small district of country, though
even here it is not very abundant.” No identification was offered
in my work, as I had no hint of what the species was, and I am
particularly pleased now to find it out.

Prunus virginiana L.

May 29, 1806. Camp Chopunnish.
Prunus?

June 27, 1806. On the Lo Lo Trail, east of Lo Lo Fork (Col-
lins’ Creek), and west of the main range of the Bitter-root Mount-
ains, Shoshone Co., Idaho.

Prunus ?

May 7, 1806. Main Kooskooskee River above Colter’s or Pot-
latch Creek, and below the mouth of the Chopunnish or North Fork.
Prunus sp. (P. pumila of Mr. Meehan’s footnote.)

May 29, 1806. Camp Chopunnish.

Purshia tridentata DC. Tigarea tridentata Pursh, Fl. 333, t. 15.

July 6, 1806. Prairie of the Knobs, as above described for

Potentilla fruticosa.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 301

Rosa woodsi Lindl.

September 5, 1804. On the Missouri, immediately above the Nio-
brara.
October 18, 1804. On the Missouri, immediately above the Can-
nonball, not “at or near Fort Mandan” as Mr. Meehan states, but
much below that site, which was not reached till the 26th. Mr.
Meehan cites May 18, 1806, Camp Chopunnish, as the date on
which’ L. & C. “saw the wild roses in bloom.” I find no allusion
to roses in the Journal of that day, but on June 10, 1806, when L.
& C. had just left Camp Chopunnish, they ‘“ observed two species
of wild rose, both of a damask-red color.” These Mr. Knowlton
supposed to be R. nutkana and R. sayi ?, which names were accord-

ingly bracketed in my edition, p. 1041.

Rubus nutkanus velutinus Brew.

April 15, 1806. Rock Fort Camp, on the Columbia.

Rubus spectabilis Pursh, Fl. 348, t. 16.

March 27, 1806. Lower Columbia River, above Kalama River,
in the vicinity of Deer Island. The plant is not mentioned in the
Journal of this date, but was discovered by L. & C. in this vicinity,
near the mouth of the Multomah or Willamette, November 4,
1805 ; see my edition, p. 695.

Spirea discolor Pursh, Fl. 342.

May 29, 1806. Camp Chopunnish.
Philadelphus lewisi Pursh, FI. 329. ¥

May 6, 1806. Main Kooskooskee River, vicinity of Colter’s or
Potlatch Creek, below mouth of the North Fork.

July 4, 1806. “On the waters of Clark’s River.’ This means
Hellgate River, between Missoula, Montana, and the mouth of Big
Blackfoot River, in Missoula Co., Montana.

Ribes aureum Pursh, FI. 164.

July 29, 1805. Three Forks of the Missouri, junction of Jeffer-
son, Madison and Gallatin Rivers. Both currants and gooseberries
are mentioned at this date, and one species, which Mr. Knowlton
_ identified from the description as R. oryacanthoides, is described at
length ; fruit large, jet black with crimson pulp, extremely acid,
ete. But the original mention of R. aureum is earlier in the work,
p- 419, July 17, 1805, when L. & C. were at Pine or Half Breed
Island and Rapids, a little below the mouth of Dearborn River.

302 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

It is here particularly described, along with two other kinds of cur-
rants which Mr. Knowlton identified as R. hudsonianum and R.
viscosissimum, and two species of gooseberries which he doubtfully
referred to R. rotundifolium and R. oxyacanthoides.

April 16, 1806. Rock Fort Camp, on the Columbia,

Ribes menziesi Pursh, Fl. 372.

April 8, 1806. Columbia River, at the place above said for
Montia or Claytonia sibirica.

Ribes viscosissimum Pursh, FI. 163.

June 16, 1806. “ Heights of the Rocky Mountains.” This means
on the Lo Lo Trail over the Bitter-root Mountains, at the same
place that Pachystigma myrsinites was procured.

Clarkia pulchella Pursh, FI. 260, t. 11.

June 1, 1806. “ Kooskooskee and Clark’s River.” It is impos-
sible for a specimen to have been collected on those two rivers on
the same day; at the date said, L. & C. were in Camp Chopunnish
on the Kooskooskee. See Hrysimum asperum, above.

Cnothera cespitosa Nutt. (Pursh, Fl. 735.) 0. seapigera Pursh, FI. 263.

July 17, 1806. “Near the falls of the Missouri” is correct.
Lewis that day went from the Great Falls over to Teton or Tansy
River.

Cnothera heterantha Nutt.

June 14, 1806. “Squamash flats.” This means the Quamash
Flats on Weippe or Oyipe Prairie ; same spot where Geum triflorum
was taken on the 12th.

Sedum stenopetalum Pursh, FI. 324.

June 15 and July 1, 1806. On the Lo Lo Trail; at first date
immediately east of the Quamash Flats, at the other date at the
mouth of Traveller’s Rest Creek in the Bitter-root Valley.

Label only of a supposed Angelica.

September 3, 1805. On Fish Creek, the north fork of Salmon

tiver, in Lemhi Co., Idaho.

June 25, 1806.. On the Lo Lo Trail in the Bitter-root Mount-
ains, on Hungry Creek.

Peucedanum ?

April 14, 1806. On the Columbia, at or near Sepulcher Rock,
which is an aboriginal burying place about 3 miles below Cataract
or Klikitat River.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 303

Peucedanum leiocarpum Nutt. Smyrnium nudicaule Pursh, Fl. 196.

April 15, 1806. Rock Fort Camp, at The Dalles of the Colum-
bia.

Peucedanum simplex Nutt. (or /. triternatum Pursh).

May 6, 1806. On the main Kooskooskee River; same place as
the supposed Philadelphus lewisi, above.

Peucedanum utriculatum Nutt.? Phe//andrium aquaticum Pursh, Fl. 195.

June 10, 1806. Near Camp Chopunnish, which L. & C. left that
day, travelling north down aud nearly parallel with the Kooskoos-
kee, past Collins’ Creek to the Quamash Flats.

One or another of the foregoing species of Peucedanum is the
plant called cows, cowas or cowish, and particularly described at
no one of the above dates, but at May 9, 1806, p. 999 of my edition,
where I callit P. cous. It appears as “ cow-weed ” in the McVickar
edition of the work.

Cymopterus campestris Nutt.? (Mr. Meehan’s suggested identification, in a foot-
note).

April 29, 1806. On the Columbia at the mouth of Wallawalla
River. This is the shapelell or shappalell of L. & C. There is no
mention of it at this date in the Journal, but the name appears on
April 14, 1806, p. 949 of my edition.

(Label only).

April 25, 1806. On the Columbia, approaching Umatilla River.
At date of May 16, 1806, p. 1014 of my edition, is mentioned “a
kind of fennel, called by the Shoshonees yearhah, resembling anni-
seed.” This is supposed to be yamp, Carum gairdneri or a related
species. See also p. 562.

(Two unidentified Umbellifers).

April 14, 15, 1806. Below and at Rock Fort Camp on the
Columbia.

Cornus canadensis L.

June 16, 1806. On the Lo Lo Trail, Collins’ Creek to Hungry
Creek, with Pachystigma myrsinites, Ribes viscosissimum and Loni-
cera ciliosa.

Lonicera ciliosa Poir. Caprifolium ciliosum Pursh, Fl. 160,

June 5 and June 16, 1805, Camp Chopunnish and the Lo Lo
Trail. This record is quite right; but in enumerating the same spe-
cies among plants of Fort Clatsop, p. 835 of my edition, I under-

304 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

stand L. & C. to have been mistaken. While at Quamash Flats,
June 10, 1806, L. & C. speak of “the honeysuckle bearing a white
berry,” which Mr. Knowlton supposed to be Symphoricarpos race-
mosus, and so I used the name on p. 1041 of my edition.

Lonicera involucrata Banks.

September 2, 1805. “On the waters of the Columbia” does not
mean the river itself of that name, but its general watershed. On
this date L. & C. were on their Fish Creek, which is the north fork
of Salmon River, in Lemhi Co., Idaho.

July 7, 1806. Sources of Big Blackfoot River, near Lewis and
Clark’s Pass, in Deer Lodge Co., Montana.

Achillea millefolium L. A. tomentosa Pursh, F1. 563, nee Willd.

May 20, 1806. Camp Chopunnish.

Aplopappus spinulosus DC. Amel/us spinulosus Pursh, FI]. 564.

September 15, 1804. On the Missouri, passing mouth of White
River, Lyman Co., South Dakota.

(What has become of the big H with which the name of this
genus ought to begin? Botanists should not tolerate such a Cock-
neyism as “ Aplopappus.” No one can aspire to grammatical pro-
priety without an aspirate.)

Aplopappus sp.

October —, 1805. lL. & C. reached the Columbia itself on the
16th, and were on it the rest of the month; prior to that date in
October, 1805, they were on the Kooskooskee and Snake Rivers.

Artemisia cana Pursh, FI. 521.
October 1, 1804. In Lookout Bend of the Missouri of L. & C.,
now called the Little Bend, passing mouth of Big Cheyenne River.
October 2, 1804. A few miles further up the Missouri—practi-
cally the same locality as the last.

Artemisia dracunculoides Pursh. A. dracunculus Pursh, Fl. 521, nee L.
September 15, 1804. On the Missouri, passing mouth of White
River, Lyman Co., South Dakota.

Artemisia frigida Willd. Pursh, Fl. 521.

September 2, 1804. On the Missouri at Bonhomme Island, Bon-
homme, South Dakota.

October 8, 1804. On the Missouri, two days above Big Cheyenne
River, nearing Little Cheyenne River.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 305

Artemisia longifolia Nutt. A. integrifolia Pursh, FI, 520.

October 1 and 3, 1804. See preceding species of this genus. L.
and C. do not speak of sage brush in their Journal at any of the
above dates. On April 14, 1805, when they were on the Missouri
between the Little Missouri and present White Earth Rivers, they
speak of aromatic plants “ resembling the sage, hyssop, wormwood,”
etc., p. 273 of my edition.

Artemisia ludoviciana Nutt. ?

April 10, 1806. “Rockford Camp” as given is impossible, as
L. & C. were not at Rock Fort Camp till April 15th that year.
On the 10th they had reached the head of tide-water of the Colum-
bia, vicinity of Beacon Rock, and were drawing their boats up the
Cascades from Brant Island.

Aster oblongifolius Nutt.

September 21, 1804. Big Bend of the Missouri, as correctly
stated.

_ Aster oreganus Nutt.

October —, 1805. “ Lewis River.” If on Lewis’ River itself the
date was October 10-16th, while L. & C. were descending Snake or
Lewis’ River from the mouth of the Kooskooskee to the Columbia
itself.

“ Bidens-like.”’

October —, 1805. “ Lewis River,” as last said.

Balsamorrhiza sagittata Nutt. Buphthalmum sagittatum Pursh, Fl, 564.

April 14, 1806. On the Columbia, one day below Rock Fort
Camp.

July 7, 1806, Lewis and Clark’s Pass of the Continental Divide,
near head of Big Blackfoot River, in Dear Lodge Co., Montana.

Bigelowia graveolens (Gray. Chrysocoma dracunculoides Pursh, Fl. 517.

May 6, 1806. Main Kooskooskee River, below Camp Chopun-
nish.

October 2, 1804. Just above Little or Lookout Bend of the Mis-
souri; see Artemisia cana above.
Bigelowia graveolens albicaulis Gray. Chrysocoma nauseosa Pall, in herb, Pursh,

FI. 517.

October 15, 1805. “On the Columbia River” as given is not
quite right, as that day L. & C. were descending Snake River, and
did not reach its confluence with the Columbia till the 16th.

306 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Cnicus edulis Gray.

March 13, 1806. Fort Clatsop, as correctly given. Mr. Meehan
quotes the Journal of January 20th for this species, though nothing
is said of it on that date in the Journal as printed. The passage
cited by Mr. Meehan occurs in the general account of the botany of
Fort Clatsop, where Cnicus edulis is No. 1 of the list, p. 821 of my
edition ; “shanatanque ” of the natives. But it is quite true that
the botanical matter begins in Clark’s Codex P, p. 89 of the manu-
script, at date of January 20, 1806.

Eriophyllum cespitosum Dougl. Actinella lanata Pursh, Fl. 560.

June 6, 1806. Camp Chopunnish.

Gaillardia aristata Pursh, FI. 573.

July 7, 1806. As above, under Balsamorrhiza sagittata.

Grindelia squarrosa Dunal. Donia squarrosa Pursh, Fl. 559.

August 17, 1804. Camp near the Omaha village on the Missouri,
nearly opposite mouth of Omadi Creek.

Gutierrezia euthamie T. & G. Solidago sarothre Pursh, Fl. 540.

September 19 and 21, 1804 (one of these dates misprinted “ 1805”).
Approaching and on the Great Bend of the Missouri.

Liatris pycnostachya Mchx.

September 15, 1804. On the Missouri, passing White River.
Liatris scariosa Willd.

September 12, 1804. Three days below White River, passing
Shannon’s or Washinanpi Creek, vicinity of Rosebud Landing,
Gregory Co., South Dakota.

Matricaria discoidea DC. Suantolina suaveolens Pursh, FI. 520,

June 9, 1806. Camp Chopunnish.

Microseris macrocheta Gr.

April 17, 1806, “ Rock” Camp, as here given, is the Rock Fort
Camp already often mentioned.

Solidago rigida L.

September 13, 1804. Two days below White River, on the Missouri.
Composite ?

May 27, 1806, Camp Chopunnish.

Arctostaphylos uva-ursi Spreng.

No date. No. 38, Fort Mandan. This fort was occupied Novem-
ber, 1804—April, 1805. Mr. Meeban says, in speaking of the name

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 307

“sacacommis ” used for this plant by “ Engagés,” that it is not
clear who “ Engagés” were; but an engagé was any hired man of
a fur trading company; the word means precisely the same as em-
ployé or employee. Mr. Meehan states that “ Professor Knowlton
in the notes to Coues’ edition of the travels, suggests the name
Arctostaphylos pungens for this.” But I cannot find A. pungens in
my book. Sacacommis is given in four places, p. 139, p. 674, p.
729, p. 827, in each instance correctly identified as the bear-berry,
A. ura-ursi. This is one of the few botanical identifications that I
made myself, as I happened to know the plant very well.

Arbutus menziesi Pursh, Fl. 282.

November 1, 1805. Cascades of the Columbia, a little above
head of tide-water.

Gaultheria shallon Pursh, FI. 283.

June 20, 1806. “On the coast of the Pacifie Ocean,” as given, is
impossible. At that date L. &.C. were on the Lo Lo Trail in north-
ern Idaho. I suppose this date to be a misprint for some day in
January, 1806, when L. & C. were at Fort Clatsop, and repeatedly
mention the salal, shallun or shellwell with particularity ; see my
edition, p. 731, p. 739, p. 791, p. 798, p. 825. The form of the
name shallum, adduced by Mr. Meehan, does not occur in my
work,

Vaccinium myrtillus L. (V. myrtilloides L. in Mr. Meehan’s footnote.)
June 20, 1806. ‘Fort Clatsop,” as given, is impossible ; see

under Gaultheria shallon. "

Vaccinium ovatum Pursh, Fl. 200.

June 27, 1806. “ Fort Clatsop,” as given, is impossible; see
under Gaultheria shallon.

While on the question of Vaccinium, I should much like to know
what botanists can make of the “cranberry of the low and viny
kind” mentioned by L. and C. in the Fort Clatsop list of plants,
No. 11, p. 826 of my edition, and considered by Mr. Knowlton to
be V. macrocarpon, ibid.

Dodecatheon meadia L.

April 16, 1806. Rock Fort Camp, on the Columbia. In his
footnote Mr. Meehan says: “There might have been a specimen
collected on the march up the Missouri in 1804, as in the Journal
under date April 17th, it is noted that ‘ violets, doves foot and cow-

308 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

slips are in bloom,’ the Dodecatheon being probably referred to as cow-
slips.” But L. and C. were not on the voyage up the Missouri on
April 14, 1804; they did not start till May 14, 1804, and at date of
April 17, 1804, there is not a word about cowslips in the Journal.
What Mr. Meehan means is a passage in the meteorological register
kept by L. and C. at Camp Dubois, at the mouth of Wood River,
which empties into the Mississippi in Illinois, till the date of their
departure. The correct quotation for April 17, 1804, is: “the
violet, dove’s-foot, and cowslip are in blow,” p. 1283 of my edition.
Mr. Meehan’s other citation of “cowslip,” at date of April 9, 1806,
also found in the meteorological register, p. 1295 of my edition, is
correctly referred to the Columbia River.

Frasera thyrsiflora Hook. Swertia fastigiata Pursh, Wl. 101.

June 14, 1806. “Squamash flats,” as given, means Quamash
flats, on the Lo Lo Trail, west of the Bitter-root Mountains. So also
does Pursh’s “on the Missouri Flats near the Rocky Mountains,”
which reads curiously to one who knows the geography of the route.
It is wrong by several hundred miles—yet not so far out of the way
as some others of his that I could instance.

Colloma linearis Nutt.

April 17, 1806. “ Rockford ””=Rock Fort Camp, on the Col-
umbia.

Gilia aggregata Spreng. Cantua aggregata Pursh, FI. 147.

June 26, 1806. Hungry Creek, as given, is correct ; a small trib-
utary of the north fork of the south fork of the Kooskooskee, east
of Collins’ Creek, in the mountains of the Lo Lo Trail. Pursh’s
“banks of the Mississippi,” as cited in Mr. Meehan’s paper, is more
than a thousand miles out of the way; and if this be an inadvert-
ence for “ banks of the Missouri,” still it is wrong by several hun-
dred miles.

Polemonium ceruleum L.

June 27, 1806. One day further east than the last, on the Lo Lo
Trail over the Bitter-root Mountains.

Phacelia circinata Jacq. P. heterophylla Pursh, Fl. 140. P. scabioseefolia Pursh,

MS. (type).

June 9, 1806. Camp Chopunnish, the day before L. and C. left
it. Mr. Meehan’s footnote is erroneous in citing ‘ on the Kooskoos-
kee, August 9, 1806”—I presume merely by a slip of the pen. On
August 9, 1806, L. and C. were on the Missouri below the mouth of
the Yellowstone.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 309

Phacelia menziesi Torr. Hydrophyllum lineare Pursh, Fl. 134.

April 17, 1806. Rocky=Rock Fort Camp, on the Columbia—
not “on the banks of the Missouri,” as Pursh has it.
Plagiobothrys tenellus Gray.

April 17, 1806. As the last.

Krynitskia sp. ?
April 17, 1806. As the last.
Nicotiana quadrivalvis Pursh, Fl. 141.

October 12, 1804. “The Ricara’s town” said was one of the 3
Arikara villages which were flourishing in 1804 within 8 miles
above the mouth of Wetarhoo River of L. and C., now Grand
River, South Dakota—one of them on Ashley Island, the other twoa
little higher up, on the right bank of the Missouri. Pursh says of
N. quadrivalvis, “the tobacco prepared from it is excellent.” That
makes me believe he never smoked the nasty stuff.

Mimulus luteus L. Pursh, Fl. 426.

July 4, 1806. ‘On the waters of Clark’s River” means Hellgate
River, close by Missoula, Montana.

Orthocarpus tenuifolius Benth. Bartsia tenuifolia Pursh, Fl. 429.

July 1, 1806. “ Valley of Clark’s River” means the mouth of
Traveller’s Rest Creek, the Lou Lou Fork of the Bitter-root River.

Pedicularis grenlandica Retz. Pursh, Fl. 426,

July 6, 1806. “ On the low plains on the heath of Clark’s River”
means Prairie of the Knobs on Big Blackfoot River.

P.scopulorum Gray? P. elata Pursh, Fl. 425, nee Willd.

July 6, 1806. As the last. Nothing is simpler than the geogra-
phical explanation of the apparent discrepancies in this identifica-

tion and the three preceding ones. The Bitter-root, the Hellgate
and the Big Blackfoot are three of the sources of Clark’s River,
coming together in the vicinity of Missoula. July 1st to 6th Lewis
went down the Bitter-root to Missoula, up the Hellgate to the Big
Blackfoot, and up the latter to within one day’s march of Lewis
and Clark’s Pass of the Continental Divide. As I have said before,
neither Lewis nor Clark ever saw Clark’s River as understood by
modern geographers,

Pentstemon diffusus Dougl.
May 20, 1806. Camp Chopunnish.

310 PROCEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Synthyris reniformis major Hook.
June 26, 1806. Hungry Creek, as said.

Salvia lanceolata Willd. WS. trichostemmoides Pursh, FI. 19.
September 21, 1804. Big Bend of the Missouri, as said.

Scutellaria angustifolia Pursh, Fl. 412.
June 5, 1806. Camp Chopunnish.

Oxybaphus nyctagineus Sweet. A//ionia ovata Pursh, FI. 97.
September 1, 1804. At or uear Bonhomme Island, South Dakota.

Atriplex canescens James. Ca//igonum canescens Pursh, FI. 370.

September 21, 1804. Big Bend of the Missouri, as said.

Atriplex nuttalli Wats.

July 20, 1806. “ High plains of Missouri” is doubly impossible:
there are no high plains in Missouri, and if high plains of the
Missouri River be meant, it is wrong; for at this date Lewis was
high up on Maria’s River, and Clark was on the Yellowstone.

Sarcobatus maculatus Torr.!

July 20, 1806. As last said. This is the “ pulpy leaved thorn ”
of L. & C,, p. 324, p. 462, and p. 463, of my edition, there correctly
identified by Mr. Knowlton as S. vermicularis.

Polygonum bistortoides Pursh, Fl. 271.

June 12, 1806. Quamash flats, as said, but by no means “ on the
banks of the Missouri,’ as Pursh says, for there are none such.
Among the several Quamash flats described and mapped by L. and
C. the one where they were on June 12, 1806, is the Weippe or
Oyipe Prairie near the west end of the Lo Lo Trail, in Shoshone
Co., Idaho.

Elzaguus argentea Pursh, Fl. 114.
July 6, 1806. Prairie of the Knobs, on Big Blackfoot River.

Shepherdia argentea Nutt. Hippophe argentea Pursh, FI, 115.

A. No. 39, no date. But date is easily supplied, if the specimen
was “obtained at the mouth of the River Quicourre ;” for this is a
L. and C. way of spelling L’ Eau qui Court, French name of Running
Water or Niobrara River, where L. and C. camped September 4,
1804; they passed it again September 6, 1806, but that the former
date is the one is shown by the fact they speak of sending the speci-

1 Sarcobatus maculatus Torr., in my paper, was a misprint for Sarcobatus
vermicularis Torr. (J. M.)

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 311

men in a box to Captain Stoddard at St. Louis, and this box started
from Fort Mandan April 7, 1805.

Euphorbia heterophylla L. ZL. cyathophora Pursh, Fl. 605, nee Willd.

October 4, 1804. On the Missouri, above Big Cheyenne River,
and nearing Little Cheyenne River.

Euphorbia marginata Pursh, FI. 607.

July 28, 1806. “On the Yellowstone River, M. Lewis.” This is
impossible, because Lewis was never on the Yellowstone, though he
passed its mouth twice; and at the date said he was on the Missouri
above Maria’s River, at the Cracon du Nez or Grog Spring, in the
vicinity of Fort Benton. Clark was on the Yellowstone at this date,
below the mouth of the Bighorn, and above the mouth of Tongue
River.

Maclura aurantiaca.

(No label.)

Betula? i.e. Alnus rubra.

March 26, 1806. Lower Columbia River, between Puget’s Island
and Cowlitz River. I am pleased to find Mr. Meehan confirming
the identification of the black alder several times mentioned by L.
& C. and given in my edition as Alnus rubra, p. 698, p. 724, p. 749,
p. 833, p. 911.

Quercus garryana Doug).
March 26, 1806. Same place as last said.

Quercus macrocarpa depressa Eng!m.

September 5, 1804, From the Niobrara River, where L. & C.
camped on the 4th (not on the 5th), upward. The “ White Point”
Creek which Mr. Meehan cites in this connection isthe White Paint
Creek of L. and C., now known as Bazile Creek, which falls into the
Missouri next below the Niobrara and on the same side. The date
on which L. and C. described this tree particularly is the 16th, not
15th, as cited by Mr. Meehan; they were then camped a short dis-
tance above White River, one mile above their Corvus Creek, now
known as American Crow Creek. This oak is the one malidentified
by Mr. Knowlton in my edition, p. 119, as Q. undulata var. wrighti,
and first referred to Q. macrocarpa by Prof. Sargent, Garden and
Forest, No, 465, January 20, 1897, p.28—a masterly criticism of the
way all the L. & C. trees were handled in my work, and one for
which I am profoundly grateful to its distinguished author.

312 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.
Populus monilifera Ait. P. angulata Pursh, Fl. 619, nee Willd.

August —, 1806. Somewhere on the Missouri; location not
determinable.

Populus trichocarpa T. and G.

June —, 1806. ‘Cotton tree of the Columbia.” But L. & C.
were not on the Columbia in any part of June, 1806, the whole of
which month they spent either at Camp Chopunnish or on the Lo
Lo Trail in Idabo. While they were low down on the Columbia
they mentioned this species twice, March 25 and 27, 1806; see my
edition, p. 908 and p. 911, where P. trichocarpa is correctly given.

Calypso borealis Salisb. Pursh, FI. 593.

June 16, 1806. Hungry Creek, as said.

Iris missouriensis Nutt. J. sibirica Pursh, FI. 30, nec Wild.

July 5, 1806. Prairie of the Knobs, on the Big Blackfoot River.
Allium sp. (Perhaps in part A. angulosum Pursh, Fl. 223. It may be A. reticula-

tum.)

April 30, 1806. Neither of the three botanists concerned in this
case seem to know what sort of an onion itis. All I know about
it is, that if it was collected at the date said, it was not collected “on
the waters of the Kooskooskee,” as said; for on April 30, 1806, L.
& C. were on the Wallawalla in the vicinity of Touchet River.

Brodiza douglasi Wats. #2. grandiflora Pursh, Fl. 223, nee Smith.

April 20, 1806. Great Falls of the Columbia, near Celilo. Mr.
Meehan speaks of this as the “ hyacinth of Colorado Plains,” by slip
of the pen for Columbia Plains. The passage of L. & C. which
he cites as from the Journal of April 16th, occurs in the meteoro-
logical register of that date, p. 1295 of my edition. Mr. Knowlton
imagined this hyacinth, as mentioned by L. & C. on April 16th, to
be quamash, and so it stands Camassia esculenta on p. 952 of my
edition, by egregious error.

Calochortus elegans Pursh, Fl. 240.

May 17, 1806. Camp Chopunnish,
Camassiaesculenta Lindl. Phalangium quamash Pursh, FI. 226,

June 23, 1806. Quamash flats on the Lo Lo Trail. Pursh is
far out with his “ upper part of the Missouri” as the location of this
specimen. In citing the Journal of June 29, 1806, for the blooming
of this species, Mr. Meehan means the meteorological register
of that date, p. 1297 of my edition. It should be particularly noted

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 313

that the Quamash flats of L. & C. of June 29th are not those of
June 23d. The latter are on Weippe Prairie, near the west end of
the Lo Lo Trail; the former are near the east end of that trail, on
Quamash or Glade Creek, also called Prairie and Takon Creek.
Both are in Idaho, but over 100 miles apart.

I do not understand why Mr. Meehan, or Messrs. Robinson and
Greenman, should use Camassia esculenta as the technical name of
this plant. The first specific name being quamash Pursh, 1814, and
the first tenable generic name being Quamasia Rafinesque, February,
1818, the coupling of these as Quamasia quamash is the required
name of the plant, as first given by Mr. Coville, Pr, Biol. Soc. Wash.
XI, April 21, 1897, p. 64.

Erythronium grandiflorum Pursh, Fl. 231,

June 5, 1806. Camp Chopunnish.
Erythronium grandiflorum parviflorum Wats.

May 8, 1806. Wooskooskee River, below Camp Chopunnish,
near mouth of the north fork of the river.
Fritillaria lanceolata Pursh, Fl. 230.

April 10, 1806. Brant Island in the Columbia, at foot of the
Cascades, near head of tide water.

Fritillaria pudioa Spreng. Lilium? pudicum Pursh, FI. 228, t. 8.

May 8, 1806. Kooskooskee River, below Camp Chopunnish.
Trillium ovatum Pursh, FI. 245.

April 10, 1806. Same place as Fritillaria lanceolata.

Trillium petiolatum Pursh. Fl. 244.

June 15, 1806. On the Lo Lo Trail, on or near Collins’ Creek.
Veratrum viride Ait. or V. californicum Dur.

June 25, 1806. On the Lo Lo Trail, on or near Hungry Creek.

Xerophyllum tenax Nutt. Helonias tenax Pursh, FI. 243.
June 15, 1806. Same place as Trillium petiolatum.

Zygadenus elegans Pursh, FI. 241.

July 7, 1806. Head of Cokalahishkit or Big Blackfoot River,
near Lewis and Clark’s Pass.

Aira brevifolia Pursh, Fl. 76 (or Poa tenuifolia Nutt.).

June 10, 1806. At or near Camp Chopunnish, which L. & C.
left this day.

21

314 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Hordeum jubatum Pursh, Fl. 89.

March 18, 1806. Fort Clatsop.

July 12, 1806. White Bear Islands of L. & C., still so called,
in the Missouri near mouth of Sun River, above the Great Falls,
adjoining city of Great Falls, Cascade Co., Montana,

Festuca ovina L. var.

June 10, 1806. See under Aira brevifolia.
Agropyron divergens Nees. Festuca spicata Pursh, Fl. 83.

June 10, 1806. As last.

Koeleria cristata Pers. Pursh, Fl. 85.

June 10, 1806. As last. All the grasses of this date reported :
as from “‘ Plains of the Columbia,” where none of them were col-
lected.

Stipa spartea Trin. S. juncea Pursh, Fl. 72, nee L. (S. comata Trin., fide Scribner),

July 8, 1806. East base of Continental Divide, in Lewis and
Clark Co., Montana, about headwaters of north fork of Dearborn
River and of Sun River.

Zizania aquatica L. d

No. 59. September Sth, year not said. If 1804, on the Missouri
near Fort Randall, South Dakota. If 1805, in the Bitter-root Valley,
Montana. If 1806, on the lower Missouri between the Council Bluff
and the mouth of the Platte.

Spartina gracilis Trin. ?

(No label.)

Pinus ponderosa Doug}.

October 1, 1805. In Canoe Camp, on the main Kooskooskee, at
the mouth of its north fork, or Chopunnish River of L. & C.
Juniperus communis L.

October 17, 1804. On the Missouri, a little below Cannonball
River—same place as Psoralea argophylla.

Juniperus occidentalis Hook. J. excelsa Pursh, FI. 647.

October 2, 1804. In the Little or Lookout Bend of the Missouri,
at or near mouth of Big Cheyenne River.
Juniperus sabina procumbens Pursh, Fl. 647.

October 16, 1804. On the Missouri at or near Fort Yates, North
Dakota. This is far from being “ within the Rocky Mountains,”
Pursh.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 315

Equisetum arvense L. ~

August 10, 1804. On the Missouri, above Little Sioux and below
Big Sioux River; Monona Co., Iowa, on the right hand going up ;
Burt and Blackbird Counties, Nebraska, on the left.

Aspidium spinulosum Sw.

June 20, 1806. “Fort Clatsop;” but date impossible, as L. &
C. were on the Lo Lo Trail in Idaho at this date. Probably “June”
is here in error for January.

Lomaria spicant Desy. Blechnum boreale Pursh, Fl. 669, nee Willd.

June 20, 1806. “ Fort Clatsop ;” impossible; see last.
Hypnum oreganum Sull.

June 20, 1806. “Fort Clatsop;” impossible; see Aspidium
spinulosum.

Bazzania trilobata (L.). 8S. F. Gray.

July 1, 1806. Mouth of Tr aveller’s s Rest Creek, or Lou Lou
Fork of Bitter-Root River.

Egregia menziesi (Turn.) Aresch. (Phyllospora menziesi.)

November 17, 1805. Mouth of the Columbia River.
Sorbus microcarpa Pursh.

September 4, 1805, and June 27, 1806. Two different specimens,
as well as dates, may be in question. In any event, on September 4,
1805, L. & C. passed over the Bitter-root range from Idaho into
Montana, from Fish Creek, the north fork of Salmon River, to Ross’
Hole, near the head of the east fork of the Bitter-root River; and
on June 27, 1806, they were on the Lo Lo Trail, in the Bitter-root
Mountains, nearing its east end, about to pass from Idaho into Mon-
tana, but at a place 100 miles or more distant from the other. The
two situations, however, I should suppose to be practically identical,
from a botanical standpoint.

(Label only.)

April 14, 1806. On the Columbia, one day below Rock Fort
Camp.

Phlox speciosa Pursh, Fl. 149.

May 7, 1806. Not “on the Plains of the Columbia,” as said, but

on the main Kooskooskee River, below Camp Chopunnish.

316 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

LIST OF BATS COLLECTED BY DR. W. L. ABBOTT IN SIAM.
BY GERRIT 8S. MILLER, JR.

During the year 1896, Dr. W. L. Abbott made an extensive col-
lection of mammals in the State of Trong, Lower Siam, a region
whose fauna has hitherto been practically unknown. The collection,
which Dr. Abbott has presented to the United States National Mu-
seum, includes sixty-one bats, all but six of which were sent to
Washington in formalin. Eleven species are represented. Three
of these prove to be new, while several others are of special interest.
Considerable time must elapse before it will be possible to prepare a
complete account of Dr. Abbott's Malayan collections. Meanwhile
it seems advisable to publish a list of the bats that he has thus far
taken, and the following is printed here by permission of the
Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.

Pteropus medius Temminck.

One skin (9 young adult, No. 83,277) taken on April 15, 1896
I refer with some hesitation to this species. Its measurements are
as follows: head and body, 260 ;' expanse of wings, 1,296 ;' forearm,
175; thumb (with claw), 75; second finger, 127; third finger, 315 ;
fourth finger, 246; fifth finger, 230 ; tibia, 85 ; foot (with claws), 55;
ear from meatus, 39; ear from crown, 37; width of ear, 22; skull:
basal length, 167; basilar length (Hensel), 164; palatal length, 39;
palatal width (anterior end of first molar), 13.4 ; zygomatic breadth,
36; breadth across postorbital processes, 28; length of nasals,20; great-
est breadth of nasals, 6; maxillary tooth row (exclusive of canine),
20; crown of first molar, 6.6x4; canine at level of cingulum, 4x3.2;
greatest length of mandible, 56; depth of mandible at anterior base
of first molar, 6.6; depth of mandible through angular and coronoid
processes, 24; mandibular tooth row (exclusive of incisors and ca-
nine) 27; crown of first lower molar, 6x3.4; lower canine at level
of cingulum, 2.8x3.

Cynopterus angulatus sp. nov.
Type.—Adult % (in alcohol), No. 83,569, United States National
Museum, Trong, Lower Siam, collected in 1896 by Dr. W. L. Abbott.

1 From fresh specimen by collector.

—

o han hh

Hae

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 317

General characters—Size medium (forearm 60-70); tail well-
developed ; incisors + ; ear conspicuously rimmed with white; poste-
rior border of ear conch with well-developed angular projection im-
mediately above base; general color dull rufous.

Ears.—Ears about double length of muzzle; laid forward they
reach to anterior corner of eye. General form of ear as in Cynop-
terus brachysoma (see Dobson, Monograph of'the Asiatic Chiroptera,
p. 28), but projection at base of outer margin sharply angled instead
of bluntly rounded. Tip of conch rather narrowly rounded off. A
slight, though distinct, concavity in posterior border immediately
below tip. Rim of ear with a conspicuous whitish border, about 1.5
mm. wide near base and narrowing to a mere trace at tip, but never-
theless continuous. Area occupied by white border on anterior mar-
gin distinctly thickened. Inner surface of ear conch with six in-
distinct cross ridges. Basal third of ear furred externally, the
remainder naked inside and out except for a few hairs along ante-
rior margin.

Membranes.—Membranes thick and leathery, broad and ample.
Interfemoral membrane deeply emarginate, only 6 mm. wide in
middle. Wings from sides of back and middle of outer toe.

Fur and color—Throughout the body the fur is short and scant,
that on the middle of back only 6 mm. in length. In malesit is dis-
tinctly longer on sides of neck (10 mm. in type), and in both sexes
it is much shorter on throat and on sides of body (this especially
noticeable in females). The fur of the body extends to middle of
forearm, both above and below, but does not reach the membranes
except in middle of uropatagium. Propatagium thinly haired below
through proximal half. Wings with scattered hairs below along
sides of body and behind forearm.

General color of two males (skins) burnt umber, to a varying ex-
tent tinged with red and overlaid with olivaceus, darker on crown
of head and puler along middle of belly. A female is paler through-
out, the general color more closely approaching the chestnut and
russet of Ridgway. Ears and membranes of dry specimens black-
ish, the former edged with dirty yellowish-white. Metacarpals and
phalanges of fingers varied with whitish, which irregularly involves
the membrane close to the bone.

Skull—The skull is strongly built and moderately angular, Old
individuals show a tendency to form a sagittal crest.} Face line
slightly concave immediately behind tip of rostrum, then nearly

318 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

straight to highest point about over middle of brain case. Frontal
region with a broad longitudinal groove running from between post-
orbital processes to within about 3 mm. of tip of rostrum. Post-
orbital processes well-developed, about 4 mm. long. Extent of bony
palate behind molars equal to distance between second premolars.

Teeth.—Upper incisors in pairs, the outer tooth slightly smaller
than the inner. First’ upper premolar about as large as inner in-
cisor, occupying less than half the space between canine and second
premolar. Crowns of second and third premolars about equal
when viewed from above, the first much the larger when viewed
from the side. Molar about equal to third premolar, but with
slightly narrower crown. Outer lower incisors distinctly larger than
inner, the incisor row slightly bowed outward. First lower premolar
more than double as large as first upper premolar, and like it occu-
pying the middle of the space between the canine and second pre-
molar. Crowns of second and third premolars and first molar sub-
equal when viewed from above, but regularly graded in height from
before backward when viewed from the side. Second lower molar
about one-third as large as first and equal to first premolar.

TABLE OF MEASUREMENTS OF CVYNOPTERUS ANGULATUS.

| )
PUSUYTUDIEY yo oe ahecsuGh heated snivacubacpommpssacvancabeaeveaceeces | 83524 |83569*| 83572 | 83592 | 83593 | 84441 | 84497
Sex .. ass cevesenapndestis as ates rol g Q fof
Total length .. 97 | 110 | 114 | 123 | 118
Dail tssetovssexcs |} 8 9 11 10 9
DADS, ocustvevousvsa.vies ty ah onveteccoeesnes 24 24.6| 24 29 28 26 25
HOO sup arisen tne npoiseene detsaiseDadeena caret corescbineds 13 15 | 14.6) 16 16 14 14
Calear wdsefiverseurs 7 6 | \Gaiee7 7 7 7
OUEANIO pee csatesopenyaer asercases be saparecucessteecstncorer 61 66 , 70 71 68 65 65.
ALAAULDMLS (pe gh seeonden poaverassohoesst pede eueenateen aueuer suossell 23 26 | 26 29 28 26
Second in Sersic, sscssvescovss-coceeve-cvsvwtyesacreenstses | 47 45 | 48 49 50 45
Third finger ............s00004 111 | 110 | 118 | 120 | 115
Fourth finger ................. 88 84 91 93 91
ipbynitbi vite Aa pee CeerEee 87 83 89 89 88
Ear from meatus............ : 18.4} 18 20 21 21
Ear from crowD.............- 15 17 17 18 18
Width Of G8 <..20: scouscaserrenee | 12 138 } 14 14 14
Skull: Basal length 29 28 27
Basilar length of Hensel............scs0++ ag 24.4) 25 24
Greatest length......... 32 81.4! 29
Zygomatic breadth... 21 21 19
Width across postorbi 11.8} 11.4] 12
Width ene t bens _Postor! tal]
processes.. ee aoe 7 | 66| 6.4
Length of palate. stad snulidven ac citevudieonnauveds pa 14 14 13
3readth of palate at anterior border on
molar y 6.6 6.4
Upper tooth row exclusive of incisors 10 10.4 10
Length of mandible 24 25 22.6
Depth of mandible at anterior border of
second premolar .. | 3 3 2.8
Depth of mandible through angular. and,
COTONOIA PLOCeSSS. .......ssseeeerseeessesseseese 13 13 11.8
Lower (008 XOW s2.sissssva cuties omporvs stv svecaal | 12 | 12 11

*Type.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 319

General remarks.— Cynopterus angulatus bears a strong resem-
blance to C. marginatus, but is readily distinguishable by its consid-
erably smaller size and by the form of the ear. It is larger than C.
brachysoma, the only other known species with similarly formed
ear, and quite different in color.

This bat is represented in Dr. Abboitt’s collection by two skeletons,
three skins with skulls, and six specimens in formalin.

Rhinolophus trifoliatus Temminck.
Four specimens in formalin. For measurements see table.

Rhinolophus affinis Horsfield.
Four specimeus in formalin.

TABLE OF MEASUREMENTS OF RHINOLOPHUS TRIFOLIATUS AND

R. AFFINIS.

| R.trifoliatus, | R. affinis.

|
MMULIELDGL o0scecenc coscesevccesednecsosscnssconsscccoesssavesccersescsseve| GODL0 8O067 | 88578 | S538 | 88540 | 88571
a et 2 an i Be ae a gt | oe a 7
RA FNBRL lain doth Listy Sp cltnae aidoaddasanieaduacsensehatohoneoeae 96 | 104 | 100 85 | 87 ;
RRsat ee RT ir ee ee thE Navas heceademostetea 38 | 38 | 85 | 23 | 25 | 25
CES SRR TNR I A 26 | 25 | 25 | 24 | 24 | 25
TU Aid ndiseren cleced induanbisdonsarteustedauaccccbuertacsasbuyeseseve 11 12 12.4; 10 |; 10 10.6
Cit ent ebeapatcos dah gsacarieas cveuaakadaeoe seid acanees ¢lenpe'| 16.4; 12 | 14 7 7 10
UMMA ateS a yesovb edb adapdeidevsck ¢nadxneucivausauesosiials dyeasTosuson 53 53 | 53 51 | 50 51
URIEINED Lian Th sachs «dius vipa vuideaacaddrncve miapusecussGasseressesocuep Y | 8.4 8 8.6 7.6 9

é 38 40 41 42

Second finger
Third finger.
Fourth finger
Fifth finger.....
Ear from meatu
Ear from crown
Width of ear (exc of antitragus)
Length of nose leaf from lip............... |} 19 20
Greatest width of nose leaf ............ +

_— — — — —____

Hipposideros larvatus (Horsfield).
One skin and ten specimens in formalin.

The form occuring in Trong differs considerably from the Hippo-
sideros larvatus of Dobson and Blanford, which is represented in the
National Museum collection by two specimens (in alcohol) taken at
Bhano, Upper Burma, by Fea. As the type of Phyllorhina lar-
vata Horsfield came from Java, the probabilities are that if either
of the mainland forms is referable to the typical subspecies, it is the
one inhabiting the southern half of the Malay Peninsula. Assum-
ing this to be the case, the form of Hipposideros larvatus found in
Assam and Upper Burma is unnamed. As compared with the
northern and better known form, that from Trong is slightly smaller
in general size. The foot is disproportionately smaller, and the ear

320 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

is narrower in proportion to its length. The skull is smaller and the

teeth, especially in the lower jaw, are comparatively slender and
weak,

TABLE OF MEASUREMENTS OF TWO FORMS OF A/PPOSIDEROS LARVATUS.

LOCALITY,

BHANO
BuRMA. TRONG, LOWER SIAM.

bare toe 83565 en 83542 | 83570

Second finger...... | 52 50 46 47 48 45 47 46 50 47 45 47
Third finger ....... 91 86 82 83 85 85 82 79 85 83 81 83
Fourth finger......, 68 70 65 66 66 67 65 64 67 65 64 67
Fifth finger......... 72 70 64 65 65 65 63 62 66 63 62 65
Ear from meatus. 23 24 23 24 24 23.4| 22 22 23 22.4| 23 24
Ear from crown... 18 19 19 18 18 iA hi. 16.4; 17 18 17 19
Width of ear....... } 21 20.4) 18 18 19 18.6} 18 18 18 19 18.4); 19
Length of nose

leaf from lip.....) 10 9.6) 9 10 a peu 10 9 9 9:6 8 10
Width ofnoseleaf, 6.8) 7 7 6.6 7 6.6 6 6 6 6.4) 6 6.4

Megaderma spasma (Linnzus).

An adult male in formalin and one skin. The latter is an adult
female taken on March 28,1896. On the label of this specimen Dr.
Abbott has written: “ Uterus contained a fetus about two inches in
length and hairless. Discoidal placenta about } inch in diameter.”

While this bat is clearly not related to Megaderma lyra, I am not
satisfied that it is the M. spasma of Dobson and Blanford. From
the descriptions of the latter species it differs in the following char-
acters: skull with small but evident postorbital processes (more pro-
nounced than in Dobson’s figure of MM. lyra); mesopterygoid fossa
divided by a central longitudinal ridge in its anterior half only;
first upper premolar very small and partly hidden by cingulum of
second premolar which is almost, or quite, in contact with canine;
inner basal cusp of upper canine indistinct ; middle lower incisors
trifid; posterior branch of tragus apparently longer; free upper part
of nose leaf with very strongly convex sides and a deep constriction
at base; heart shaped supplemental leaf above nostrils barely reach-
ing edge of principal leaf.

Measurements: head and body, 2,77; head, 3, 28; tibia,d,32,
9, 32; foot,¢, 16,9, 15; calcar,¢13.4,9, 11; forearm, 3, 57; ;

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 321

thumb, 3, 16.4,9, 18; second finger, 3, 51,9, 51; third finger, 3,
100,29, 101; fourth finger, 3, 78,9, 73; fitth finger, 3, 79,9? ,78;
ear from meatus, 3, 38,9, 33; ear from crown, ¢, 32,2, 27; width
of ear, dé, 25,9, 23; tragus (from posterior base) to posterior tip,
$, 20,9, 19; tragus (from posterior base) to anterior tip, 3, 11.4,
9,10; nose leaf from edge of upper lip,é, 12.4,9,12; greatest
width of nose leaf (2 mm. below tip), 3, 7.4, 9, 7.8.

Skull: basilar length, , 18; greatest length, ¢, 24.6, 9, 25;
length of bony palate in median line, ¢, 6.2; zygomatic breadth, 3,
15; breadth across postorbital processes, 3 ,5.8,9 ,5.6; upper tooth
row, ,10,9,9.6; mandible, ¢,17.8,9,17; mandibular tooth row,
$,11.6,9,11.4.

Tylonycteris pachypus (Temminck).

Twenty-eight specimens in formalin.

The genus Tylonycteris, although currently united with Vespertilio
(=“ Vesperus”’) appears to be perfectly valid. It may be defined as
follows: Dental formula (as in Vespertilio), i, 253 °C, =I ; pm, i= :
m, 2=*—=32; skull very broad and flat, with greatly reduced rostrum
and no trace of sagittal crest; ball of thumb and sole of foot pro-
vided with broad, dise-shaped pads.

Four specimens from Buitenzorg, Java, agree in size with those
from Trong, but in color they are much lighter. This difference
may be due to alteration in color resulting from long immersion in
alcohol. The Javan specimens were collected by G. B. Ferrari, and
have been in the National Museum since 1890.

Scotophilus kuhli Leach.

An adult female and three young.

The genus represented by this bat is so closely related to the

orth American Nycticeius that it is doubtful whether the two can
be regarded as distinct. The characters pointed out by Dobson,
however, appear to be of nearly as much importance as those separ-
ating Nycticeius and Rhogeéssa.

Myotis muricola (Hodgson).

Four specimens in formalin. These are chiefly interesting from
the fact that they formed part of the meal of a nocturnal, bat-eating
hawk, Macherhamphus aleinus.

Kerivoula minuta sp. noy.

Type-—Adult 2 (in aleohol), No. 83,547, Trong, Lower Siam,

September, 1896. Collected by Dr. W. L. Abbott.

322 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

General characters—About the size of the Bornean Kerivoula
pusilla Thomas,’ but with shorter ears, feet and legs, less hairy wings,
and more uniform coloration. Upper incisors bicuspidate; crowns
of upper premolars with transverse diameter equal to or slightly
greater than antero-posterior diameter.

Eurs.—The ears are relatively shorter than in K. hardwickii; laid
forward they reach to nostril. Anterior border extremely convex,
much more so than in K. hardwickii, but probably about as in K.
pusilla, Posterior border with subterminal concavity very shallow
and close to tip of ear. Tragus essentially as in K. hardwickii, but
with a distinct notch immediately above anterior base.

Membranes.— Membranes very thin and delicate, light brown with
irregular pellucid mottling. The specimen is in an excellent state
of preservation, so that this mottling of the membranes must be re-
garded as a normal character. Wings essentially naked as in K.
hardwickii ; uropatagium more hairy. The fur of the body extends
along the base of the wings in a very narrow line only; beyond this
a few inconspicuous hairs are scattered over the area bounded ex-
ternally by the line from elbow to knee. Proximal half of inter-
femoral membrane rather thickly sprinkled with yellowish hairs,
which extend along the legs to feet.

Fur and color.—Fur long and soft, but not dense; that on mid-
dle of back about 10 mm. in length.

Color ochraceus buff throughout, scarcely paler on the belly, the
hairs of the back faintly tipped with rufous. Except on the head and
membranes the hairs are everywhere plumbeous at base.

Skull—Skull much smaller than that of K. hardwickii, but with
relatively broader and heavier rostrum. Brain case much more in-
flated anteriorly than in K. hardwickii.

Teeth.—Each upper incisor bicuspidate, relatively smaller than in
K. hardwickii; the outer separated from the canine by a distinct
space. First and second upper premolars subequal in all dimen-
sions, the transverse diameter of each equalling or slightly exceeding
the antero-posterior diameter. Crowns of molars relatively narrower
than in K. hardwickii. Two inner lower incisors trifid and each
considerably smaller than the unicuspid outer incisor. Lower pre-
molars essentially like those of the upper jaw.

Measurements.—Total length, 70; head and body, 31 (33)°; tail,

? Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 6th ser.. XIV, p. 461, December, 1894.
® Measurements in parenthesis are those of the type of K. pusilla, an adult
female, as given by Thomas in the original description.

9
=
a

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 323

35 (39); tibia, 11.4 (14); foot without claws, 4.4 (6.2); foot with
claws, 5.2; calear, 9; forearm, 27 (28); thumb, 4; second finger,
27 (28.5); third finger, 58 (56); fourth finger, 44; fifth finger, 42;
ear from meatus, 10 (11.6); ear from crown, 8; width of ear, 10;
distance between tips, 21 (25); tragus,6.4. Skull: greatest length,
11.4; zygomatic breadth, 7; length of palate in median line, 5;
upper tooth row (exclusive of incisors), 4.6; mandible, 8.8; lower
tooth row (exclusive of incisors), 4.8.

General remarks.—Kerivoula minuta is in no way closely related
to K. hardwickii or to any of the species hitherto known from the
mainland of Asia. Its relationships are wholly with the small
Bornean form recently described by Mr. Thomas as K. pusilla.

Dr. Abbott secured only one specimen of this species.

Emballonura peninsularis sp. nov.

Type.—Adult ¢ (in alcohol), No. 83,575, United States National
Museum, Trong, Lower Siam, November, 1896. Collected by Dr.
W. L. Abbott.

General characters.—In general appearance most like Emballo-—
nura monticola Temminck, one of the smaller members of the genus,
but in size slightly surpassing E. semicaudata (Peale), the largest
species hitherto known.

Ears.—Ears moderate; when laid forward they extend slightly
beyond nostril. Anterior margin straight from base (over middle
of eye) to about middle, whence it is faintly convex to slight con-
cavity immediately below tip. Tip very narrowly rounded off.
Posterior border concave immediately below tip, then gently and
evenly convex to faint notch opposite base of tragus, after which it
is more abruptly convex to base, which is distinctly below line of
lower lip. Inner surface of conch with thirteen cross striations
arising near posterior border and disappearing shortly beyond mid-
dle.

Tragus with anterior and posterior borders nearly parallel, though
on close inspection each is seen to be very faintly concave. As a
result the tragus is slightly narrower at mid height than at base or
immediately below the bluntly rounded tip. Whole periphery of
tragus faintly crenulate. A trace of a lobe on posterior margin just
below level of anterior base.

Membranes.—The membranes are full and ample, but in no way
peculiar. Wings from ankles. Uropatagium including tail to base
of penultimate vertebra. Distance from tip of tail to free edge of

324 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

membrane considerably more than length of tail. Upper surface of
uropatagium thinly furred to line of tip of tail. Lower surface of
uropatagium rather thickly sprinkled with short hairs along veins
except near legs. Wings naked except where fur of body extends
both above and below to line joining middle of humerus with lower
third of femur.

Fur and color.—Fur of middle of back about 11 mm. in length.
Face and muzzle practically naked. Fur of head covering basal
third of ears.

Dorsal surface uniform dark sepia; under parts much paler, very
near the broccoli brown of Ridgway. Hairs everywhere, both above
and below, indistinetly whitish at base. Muzzle, ears and mem-
branes blackish.

Feet.—The feet are slender, a little less than half as long as tibia
and considerably more than half as long as calear. Calcar slender,
weak and ill-defined, 3-5 mm. shorter than tibia, terminating in a
small lobe.

Skuli—Skull thin and papery; muzzle about } as wide as brain
case, slightly inflated laterally, and with a deep central longitudinal
groove; postorbital processes long and very slender, reaching almost
to highest point of zygomata; brain case strongly inflated poste-
riorly. Measurements of two skulls: No. 88,574, 9 adult; greatest
length, 14; basilar length, 10.4; zygomatic breadth, 8.8; greatest
anteorbital breadth, 5.8; palatal length, 4; width of palate between
posterior molars, 3.4; length of upper tooth row (exclusive of in-
cisors) 5.2; mandible, 9.6; lower tooth row (exclusive of incisors),
5.6. No. 83,556, 8 adult; greatest length, 14; basilar length, 10.4;
zygomatic breadth, 9; greatest anteorbital breadth, 5.4; length of
postorbital process, 3; palatal length, 4; width of palate between
posterior molars, 3 ; length of upper tooth row (exclusive of incisors),
5.2; mandible, 9; lower tooth row (exclusive of incisors) 5.4.

Teeth—The teeth are essentially as in the £. monticola of Dobson,
except that the first upper premolar is tightly wedged between the
canine and second premolar, and the first lower premolar is very
much smaller than the second in cross section.

General remarks—Emballonura peninsularis needs comparison
with only one species, the E. monticola of Temminck.‘ I have seen
no specimens from Java, the type locality of this form, but Tem-

*Van der Hoeven’s Tijdschrift voor Naturlijke Geschiedenis en Physiol-
ogie, V, p. 25, 1838.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 325

minck’s original description is so full that it furnishes a satisfactory
basis for comparison. In passing it may be remarked that the
Philippine bat referred by Dobson to E. monticola’® is probably a dis-
tinct species from either the Javan or peninsular forms, as the: dis-
crepancies in measurements are too great to be the result of mere
individual variation.

From E. monticela the peninsular form differs chiefly in its larger
size (forearm 43-45 instead of 40, extent of wings about 280 instead
of 215-230) and longer tail (see table of measurements). None of
the Trong specimens show the snuff-colored head and fore-neck men-
tioned as occasionally occurring in E. monticola. The fur of the
ventral surface of the body is nearly as noticeably whitish at base
as that of the back, while in E. monticola it is said to be brown at
base. As shown in the table of measurements, Emballonura penin-
sularis slightly exceeds E. semicaudata in size. It is thus the largest
known species of the genus.

Dr. Abbott secured seven specimens, all of which were sent to'the
National Museum in formalin.

TABLE OF MEASUREMENTS OF EMBALLONURA MONTICOLA, E. SEMICAUDATA
AN £. PENINSULARIS,

ae |
oy ~ 4
ee s 8
: | a
ae) S ~ ‘ .
= 3 & | E. peninsularis.
s S of .
= 5
yoy | y
3727* 83574 | 83579 83556 83575* 83576 83577 | 83578
Ce 3 Sabu dt of dS
60 | 62 | 61 | 61 | 60 | 6 | 60

57
10.4 15 12 | 146] 16 | 13.6) 18 4 15

|
13 | 20 | 0 | 2 |} 2 | 19 | 2 | a

'
16.4, 16 16 17 17 16.4} 16 16
64| 64) 7 6.4) 6 6.8| 6.6] 6.4
2 Wwe) mM | 18. | 12 13
40 | 41 “4 | 43 | 44 45 4 43 45
te ee 6 741.6 eae 7
a | 37 | 87 | 38 | 37 | 35 | 36 | 39
1 67 | 7 | 70 | 7 | 7 | 72 | 72 | 76
EEO SOL res cassessvesseccrsnsessee 47 50 47 5 | w 48 | 49 |
Fifth finger... CSTE Sea 46 | 46 44 47 48 45-| 46 48
Ear from meatus... ee oA ie ae ee: 18.4; 12 | 11.4] 12 114
Ear from crown).............00000000- |} 98| 10 | 10 | 11 1 | 10 | 10
en pe On Ss epeddasbtuiele wusiceine 71° 9 86 9 94) 10 | 10 10
BA 5. 2s iS RSE | 4.6 44| 44] 5 46] 48) 5 | B4| 5
wi th of tragus at tip.......-..+| 24| 2 1.6 1.6) 1.6) 1.4] 18) 1.6
} t j i i
4
®° Catal. Chirop tera Brit. Mus., p. 361-362.

® Luzon, Philf pine Islands (from Dobson ).

at ava Aiiiual emminck ).

326 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

DESCRIPTIONS OF FIVE NEW PHYLLOSTOME BATS.
BY GERRIT 8. MILLER, JR.

The greater part of the material on which are based the descrip-
tions of the following five new bats is contained in the United States
National Museum, and the descriptions are published here by per-
mission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. An impor-
tant collection from Jamaica, sent by the Museum of the Institute of
Jamaica to the United States Department of Agriculture, and sub-
mitted to me for determination by Dr. C. Hart Merriam, includes
topotypes of the little known Natalus micropus Dobson, and the
unique type of Reithronycteris aphylla. The type and only known
specimen of Glossophaga longirostris forms part of a small collection
of bats made by Mr. W. W. Brown, Jr., at Santa Marta, Colombia,
and referred to me for identification by Mr. Outram Bangs. Series
of specimens from each of these collections are to be presented to the
National Museum.

CHILONATALUS subgen. nov. (Nataline).
Type Natalus micropus Dobson.

Subgeneric characters—Similar to typical Natalus Gray, but with
conspicuous dermal outgrowths on chin and above nostrils. These
outgrowths, as pointed out by Dobson, produce a strong resemblance
to Chilonycteris. Males with a large glandu-
lar swelling on forehead, between and slightly
in front of eyes (figure 1).

General remarks.—Natulus micropus and N.
brevimanus differ so remarkably from the other
members of the genus that they must be re-
garded as forming at least a distinct subgenus.
. The form of the glandular elevation above the
nostrils and the apparently double lower lip,
taken in connection with the other characters
pointed out by Harrison Allen in which the
Fig. 1.—Head of Chilo- Nataline resemble Chilonycteris and Mor-

Tae (b). hete shee moops, may indicate a closer relationship be-

moved. (Slightly en- tween the two groups than has heretofore been

ineged). suspected.

_
wl
»

327

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

.
foe)
lor)
ia)
bed

ao HH

Om Qow ope hee. Sher 2
Hts etd aaa

|

“sndviy,

|

Spr tr | S'6¢ | Ls | 86'S SE
oF cr 19 E 4 €&
oF cr 19 £8 i 4 €&
cr tr 09 | FSS 1 (as
ch tr 19 ¥E t CS
cr cr 09 inc F F°ZE
cr tr Lg 1€ t sé
cr cr 09 bite) t $s
cr tr 09 (as i #3
tr tr 09 €& t eé
cr Cr 09 FE t rae
cr tr 69 | 9ZE t (aa

O'SF (a g¢ | 9&8 r ras
tr tr g$¢ Ze i FE
tr If 9¢ 18 t FIs
tr (Ga Lg | FE | 8S oe
cr cr 09 te r Fee
cr cr 09 | F GE ia 9SS
oF cr 19 $s | 8's £&
cf cr 09 a 4 oe
eF Gr LS Ee t 1€
Sb | OLF 9 | Ses | iF $'e8
St L¥ in) FS | FP ES
SF SP $9 ae \ oe
SF SF co Ee t FE

yj ie] a] tae =
2 2 E g Fy g
e| eI BIB! SE
i= 7) > = oa
E] bh 5 > . B
oR 5 ® S :
na Pl es De a
A es

° on

OO Sit % Tt

gor | T'oF
91 | 6F
cl | oF
FOL | SF
ol | LF
gt | &F
gl | LF
oer | OF
a
cl | OF
ol OF.
cl) oF
cr | LF
rd
cl) oF
cl oOF
ct | SF
cl | SF
cL | $F
cr | &
cL) FF
tL oF
S91 LF
rt) ae
SI | LP
=|
Ele
B | 4
:
a
e

SRASELSSSSBSSESBSB

|

*xos | O+%% DDD" 060+01010401010100+

“qyau9] (8101,

*zoquiny

‘soUaPIACL, PIO
“NaplAorg PIO
“aUaPTAOA PLO
“aoUePIAOLd PIO
‘aouaPIACdd PIO
‘AOUEPTAOLT PO
‘aonapraodd PO
‘Q0UaPIAOA PIO
‘BOUaPLAGI PIO
“QOUBPTACL PIO
“QOUAPTAOLT PIO
“ROUaPIAOIT PIO
‘aOUAPIAGIT PIO
‘aouaplAorg Plo
“aOUPPIAOLT PIO
‘aoneptaord PIO
‘a9UaPTAOIT PIO
‘souapTAold PIO
‘BOUAPIAOLT PIO
‘aouaplAord PLO
“QOUaPIACL PLO
~worEmy

“AUTROO'T

mineveeree (a3vs9an) saurmtassg *
ns Saaecatmaite smuDmrar4g

ange inieban oi smurustarsg

cveenenees oo gE PAg

inoue snuvmiar.g

ee pm enatas4g

soeeeeeneees pepe ta taeeg

4

Se 22%

;
®
]
g
:
<

“SmuMpMIaIAg
““Smmvmiarsg
suscecnenestunesereessuce snuvniiarsg *
reseesseneees (ORBIOAB) sngosriua

NOOR eee eeee sereneaneseenss ged OsIIMe
se tseseensee sm PO4 II ME

seeeeeeeee sngosriua

SSAA AARSA SAR RVAASS

“

“out

SQNVHIAANY “N UNV SQdONIINW SATKLYN JO SLINANAYOSVAN AO TIAVL

328 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Natalus (Chilonatalus) brevimanus sp. nov.

Natalus micropus J. A. Allen, Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., III, p. 169, No-
vember, 14, 1890.

Type.—Adult $ (in aleohol), No. 15.835, United States National
Museum, Old Providence Island, Caribbean Sea. Presented by
Chas. B. Cory.

Specific characters. _Slightly smaller than Natalus mieropus Dob-—
son' from Jamaica and with relatively longer ears and shorter
fingers. Color apparently paler than in NV. micropus.

General remarks.—Dr. J. A. Allen recorded the occurrence of this
bat on the island of Old Providence as long ago as 1890, but with
only a single individual at hand, he naturally considered it the same
as the Jamaican species. On comparing fifty-seven specimens from
Old Providence with three from Jamaica, I find a slight but re-
markably constant difference. Taking into consideration the per-
fect isolation of the two forms it seems best to apply to them bi-
nomial names. ‘The characters are well brought out in the following
table of measurements. The apparent lighter color of NV. brevimanus
may be due to the bleaching effect of alcohol, as I have seen no skins,
and both lots of specimens have been preserved for an unknown
length of time.

Micronycteris microtis sp. nov.

Type.—Adult o (skin and skull) No. 3388, United States Na-
tional Museum. Collected at Greytown, Nicaragua, by Dr. L. F.
H. Birt.

Specific characters.—Smaller than Micronycteris minutus (Gervais);
thumb, foot, calear and membranes as in M. megalotis Gray ; ear
from meatus about half as long as forearm; middle lower premolar
relatively larger than in M. megalotis; general color wood-brown,
scarcely paler on ventral surface.

Fur and color.—The fur is distributed precisely as in M. megalo-
tis, except that there is a slightly more extensive sprinkling of hairs
on the dorsal surface of forearm. Fur on middle of back about 10
mm. in length.

Color uniform wood-brown, slightly richer on dorsal surface.
Hairs on body both dorsally and ventrally, nearly white through
basal third. |

Ears.—FEars densely furred on basal half externally, the fur run- —
ning up along anterior border to within 5 mm. of tip. Distal half —

~ 1 Proe. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1880, p. 443.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 329

bare, with a few very fine scattered hairs. In form the ears are
much like those of M. megalotis. Their tips, however, are more
abruptly narrowed, a condition made still more apparent by their
much smaller size. inner surface of auricle with eight sharply de-
fined cross ridges arising at posterior border and extending about
half way across ear. The distance between the uppermost and lower-
most ridge is about 5 mm.

Feet.—Foot distinctly shorter than calcar and slightly more than
half as long as tibia.

Skull—In the type the brain case is more elevated immediately
behind the orbits, and the zygomata are less flaring than in the
skulls of M. megalotis with which I have compared it, but these
differences may prove to be individual.

Teeth—When viewed from above, the crowns of the three lower
premolars appear to be of approximately equal size, though the
second is slightly smaller than either of the others. In MW. inega-
lotis the crown of the middle lower premolar is very conspicuously
smaller than the first. In other respects the teeth of the two species
appear to be identical.

General remarks.—Micronycteris microtis is so different from the
other described species of the genus that it needs no special com-
parison with any. From M. megalotis its nearest geographical ally,
its small ears and uniform wood brown color separate it at a glance.
Yet it is probably most closely related to M. megalotis and M. hir-
suta, since M. behnii and M. minuta, the only other known species,
are distinguished by differences in the proportions of the parts of
the fingers and feet, to say nothing of the peculiar attachment of
the wings in M. minuta,

In the type of Micronycteris microtis the exact form of the nose
leaf cannot be determined. The free, upright portion of the leaf,
however, appears to be shorter and broader than in either of the
races of M. megalotis. The whole leaf is finely pubescent.

The striation of the inner side of the ear is very different in Miero-
nycteris microtis and M. megalotis. In the latter, instead of eight
sharply defined ridges crowded into the space of 5 mm., there are
thirteen ill defined strie with a distance of nearly 10 mm. between
the first and last.

Micronycteris megalotis mexicanus subsp. nov.
Type—Adult Q (in aleohol) No. 52,105, United States National

Museum (Biological Survey collection). Collected at Plantinar,
22

330 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Jaliseo, Mexico, April 4, 1892, by E. W. Nelson. Original num-
ber 2,389.

Subspecific characters— About the size of typical Micronycteris
megalotis Gray, but with longer middle finger and apparently lighter
color.

General remarks.—W hile the Mexican material at hand is fairly
satisfactory, lacking only skins for the accurate determination of
color characters, the South American series is very deficient. Yet the
nine specimens that I refer to true mega/lotis agree very closely among
themselves, and differ fairly constantly from the Mexican form.
The color appears to be paler in the Mexican specimens, but as all
are preserved in alcohol no special weight can be attached to this
fact. The real characters of the two forms are shown in the accom-
panying table of measurements.

Dobson’s key to the species of Micronycteris (= ‘ Schizostoma ’)
rearranged and extended to include the two new forms just described
is as follows:

First phalanx of middle finger conspicuously shorter than second ;
forearm 47. 36s ... ... dM. behnv (Peteray
First phalanx of middle Green, ea See equal to second ;
forearm 30-40.
Wings from tibiz ; metacarpal of thumb about equal to remain-
ing parts; calear shorter than foot . . M. minuta (Gervais).
Wings from tarsus or metatarsus ; metacarpal of thumb much
longer than remaining parts; calcar longer than foot.
Legs and forearms conspicuously hairy. JZ. hirsuta (Peters).
Legs and forearms essentially bare.
Ear from meatus about one-half forearm
M. microtis Miller.
Ear from meatus about two-thirds forearm.
Longest finger 60-64 . M. megalotis megalotis Gray.
Longest finger 68-72 . M. megalotis nexicanus Miller.

Glossophaga longirostris sp. nov.

Type—Adult @ (skin and skull) No. 8,046, Bangs collection,
Santa Marta Mountains (near Santa Marta), Colombia, February
10, 1898. Collected by W. W. Brown, Jr. Original number, 60.

Specific characters—Much larger than any species hitherto de-
scribed ; skull large and greatly elongated, color darker than in
either phase of G. soricina.

tse
ok %

—
9 “moroe]]Oo ssa 4
ae s od ADs
; : . ; | :
Sb | 89 (89 | Ler] LT) L°o) See) 9st | 62 | 2°69 lee oS) 6 | OST) OF th 09 | [reberrescsnnees (aFvssav)
; ‘vuvoireu sizo;udem “jy
an pe eee cI RI & ot oT 18 aL OL Le Ol For £1 SP co 61's ‘OOUXUO ‘OFUMIOG “OIG “VuMNIEreW Srz07VNem “jy
rh 9 Way Gt} Lt PIG) PEL) SEE] 6S) OL | FOL] 98 | #8 ST | 9ST | OF | Lg 90T'ZS “OOST[UL AVAGUY]Y “wars Srz0;eXeu “jy
tp L L | bt) OF) PIs] Sl) SFr} os) ze] 6 98) Of} Of} SI) FF] Lo] *<S0V'ZS | ‘oost[Ur AVUTQUL[ “VMN S170;DTou “TY
S Bf 2 99 | OFT | POT) 9 TG] Pl) St} 08) 69/98 | 98} OF] OL] S| SF |—]| © | tor‘es ‘ “OOST[U “AVUUN “wewrexrent sizorwSem “py
= FPO] 2 | ory Lt) oo] Fr! Pet} os] |) 6 |oss) 6 | gt] #1) e)—! & | sor'ze ‘OORTCL AVUT UU “Vvren 577070oue “Ty
fee] die 9 | 8°9 SI LU} Go| FT ST) 06) 4) 8 98) 23: PST) eR 2} ; £60'CS | ‘OOSBL ‘ABUIURLY “wane srp0puR “yy
my oP 9 | 92 St} 8st € | FL) OSE) 6s) 69) 6 $8} 8 | 9ST] —| er] —| & |-cF9'TS | “UUUTOD *RUNTO) “wuworram srpopn Sem “py
= Ld L 9°9 ST} 80] 02} FE} $8E)8) 29) OT} ge! 6 ST] $1) or) gc) ¥ | PEO'IC “BUNTTOD “BMUT[O “vuvrram stop dou “jy
5 ¥ 9 yi? iat LI PIG| PRL] SC} 08) 89) 6 | Fos] 6 FL | PSE Ce! Ze) & | SEo'te | “UUT[O ‘UIUT]OD “waworrew sip0opoFewm “jy
a sb | P9 v9 br] LT) FIG) FL) et) o8| 89) 6 S8| 6 | PST) GI} 9OF] 19) 2 | zro'te “WINT[OD “BIO “wanrxrenme sryopnSom “jy
x VP £ | 99 St; L240] 2G] Ll) £08) 02/96 cE | 6 { SI) 9ST) FF] 69] £ | rHotre “BULL[O) ‘BINTOD “wane sipepuFem py
= ¥ |39 | 9.) #1) OF] Ie) er} sties| 29} 8 | —lee |] —| ot] eb) 09) £ | epotte “BULL[OD “O[[TUUZUV]Y “vaMIrIM S.popwTam “Wy
dm «GF 9 89 GI ot Z| PEL) FL] OF TL] OF} 98] 6] OF LI | OF | #9 | & | gea'te “VULLPOD ‘OLURZUNY “wawors srzopuSeum “py
Ay yy} 9 |89 | Pr) St] Of) ef] St/9e] 19} 8 | zs] ZL ah) SE) PR) 99) 2 | Croll | ‘SUINpUOH wonyed |-s77070-Tame srzopwSoue “py
ts + 2 L BE} 9) OG] FE] Or) 2o| $9 3 OF L tI] GI bi Lo) © | FIO'l “sBanpUO FT ‘won “srze;eSew sazezoSone py
io) Pr | 69 | F’9 PL} OLE) 91S | VST) SSL) 246) 39)S6 | ree] 8's | SEL ZsI | FF | 8¢ | BIQUIO[ED “VyAuyY wyuYg weseess sees (QHUIOAT)
' : ‘‘sizozuseme srzopo Sem ‘y)
& 4 9 r —j; St] &| tT] SI} 8c] 9] 6 = 6 SE) FSl 9F 09) 4 foco's -wiqumiopoD ‘wiaNy_ vyUBS srpepudore rpepudom W
3) g 9” ).9'9 Hr) LE; GG) PST) SE) Le] oo] 6 lore! HS FI! SL) ZF) 09) 2 feco’s uIqmo}oD ‘wianyy wIUKS “syz077Se00 SrpepM3e00 “py
“ ~} ~} 2} FT] Ly] TI Mst | ost) 9s] so] OF; ose] OF) St] —|—)]—)| & \dsto's [erqmojop ‘wyreyy wyag |-srzoyeF00 S1z0pnSome “py
& ee eat Co i OB hee Peel Oil! 16 ro) 6 HE} =! —|—) & depo's curqmojop ‘uyanyy uyaeg ssxze7edvm srzopeSom “yy
5 a | PT} LT) We) esr| kt} ze] oo] Of] eeiss | ct} —)--|—| ©) siz‘so “PULIS] VLAWAAVIL “8 popper sipopnFome “py
D BOP CR aD st Lt 12|9'FT) &2)86)] 89) OL) PEs] 6 or] —|—|—| 3 | ttz'so *PpUyS] VAUANyY osvjzoywSeue srzopoFoue “py
3 a a tl} POC} 1%) St) St) Fe) 09] 6 ws | 8 ST} 80] OF) Go| 2 | 2201s “prepara, |s1p0pu3ome SHopudeu “py
4 y |s's | 8's 6 a or FL | OSE} 96} gel ss | 8 |ozt| —|—|—| & leove‘or “WNSTTAVOTN ‘UMO} L014) PGR se: Ww
§ ete eee ee SE |
sy -
az Ble a eee | eave Tee Ge o30 |
e |S a ee aa oe a he it ie =
sial*l|ele/el/E/ElE| 2] * Big| | %
. a |e g Babe 2 ie S : oat - “Aa VO'] ‘omuy
e | 3 Pigigial|*® [Fla : Z| F
81g wae =
; eee ’

1898.]

SIMALIANONIIW AO SWUOA IUD AO SINANTUASVAW AO ATW

332 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Fur and color.—In quality and distribution the fur resembles
that of G. soricina. It is 7 mm. in length on middle of back,
slightly longer on throat and shorter on belly.

Color above dark hair brown, slightly tinged with Prout’s brown,
the hairs everywhere very pale hair brown through basal two-thirds
or three-fourths. Belly light broccoli brown, becoming much
darker on chest and throat.

Ears.—As nearly as can be determined from the dried specimen
the ears are essentially as in G. soricina, though considerably larger
and apparently with broader tragus.

Skull—aAside from its conspicuously larger size the skull of Glos-
sonhaga longirostris differs from that of G. soricina in its relatively
longer rostrum, the sides of which are more nearly parallel, less
strongly arched brain-case, and in the narrowness of the backward
prolongation of the bony palate behind the plain of the last molar.
In G. soricina the width of the bony palate at the constriction im-
mediately behind the last molar is contained only twice in the dis-
tance from the latter point to the tip of the hamular. In G. longi-
rostris it is contained nearly two and one-half times.

Teeth.—In the only known specimen of Glossophaga longirostris
—an adult, though by no means aged individual—the incisors have
all been shed. Distinct traces of the alveoli can still be seen in the
mandible, but these are nearly obliterated in the upper jaw.
Whether this condition is normal, as in the genus Lichonycteris,’ it
is, of course, impossible to say. In much older individuals of G. sori-
cina and G. truet’ the incisors are invariably present, so far as my ob-
servation has gone. In relative size the premolars and molars are es-
sentially as in G. soricina. All, however, are very distinctly nar-
rower. Or, in other words, the teeth have shared in the general
elongation of the jaws without undergoing any proportional increase
in width. In the lower premolars where the characters are most
strongly marked, the width of each tooth is appreciably less than in
G. soricina, while the longitudinal extent of the three together
exceeds the same measurement in (. soricina by nearly one milli-
metre.

Measurements.—Total length, 80 ;* tail, 18;* tibia, 16 ; foot, 10 ;*
thumb, 9; forearm, 39; longest finger, 80; ear, 14.4 Skull: total

2 Thomas, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 6, X VI, p. 55, July, 1895.
3H. Allen, Science, N. S., V, No. 108, p. 153, January 22, 1897.
* Collector's measurement.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 303

length, 23.4 (19.8) ;° basilar length, 19.8 (16.2) ; zygomatic breadth,
10.8 (9.6); last molar to tip of hamular, 7 (5.6); last width of bony
palate behind molars, 2.4 (2.2); mandible, 15.8 (13); maxillary
tooth row, 8.2 (6.8); mandibular tooth row, 8.6 (7).

General remarks— Glossophaga longirostris needs no close com-
parison with other members of its genus. Should the early decidu-
ous incisors prove to be a constant character, the animal will prob-
ably require at least subgeneric separation from the forms related to
G. soricina.

REITHRONYCTERIS gen. nov. (Glossophagine.)
Type Reithronycteris aphylla sp. nov.

Generic characters.—Dental formula (as in Phyllonyeteris), i,
— ‘ C, = ; pm, 2-3 > mM, sa 82 ; zygomatic arches incomplete (as
in Hemiderma) ; floor of brain-case from basisphenoid forward ele-
vated out of its usual position, so that the roof of the posterior nares
is formed by two longitudinal folds, given off by the pterygoids and
nearly meeting in the median line in the region usually occupied by
the basisphenoid and presphenoid (figures 3 and 4); calcar ab-
sent ; nostrils perforating a dise-shaped elevation which lacks a true
“leaf” or free, pointed process above (the conditions are exactly
reproduced in Brachyphylla); ears small and separate; tongue
broader than in Phyllonycteris and more abruptly narrowed at tip,
the papille short and stiff; tail about as long as femur.

General remarks.—Reithronycteris is a very aberrant member of
the subfamily Glossophagine. Its broad teeth, heavy rostrum, mas-
sive lower jaw and broad tougue with short papille remove it widely
from extreme forms such as Chwronycteris and Lichonycteris. In
its reduced nose leaf and in the form of the mandible and of the
mandibular teeth it resembles Brachyphylla. Whether these char-
acters indicate any real affinities with the Stenodermata is, however,
very questionable. In addition to these less important characters,
Reithronycteris differs from all other bats with which I am ac-
quainted in the structure of the interpterygoid region.

5Measurements in parenthesis are those of an adult female, Glossophaga sori-
cina. from Cuernavaco, Morelos, Mexico ( No. 36,017, U. 8S. Nat. Mus. ),

® Since this paper has been in type I have received the late Dr. Harrison
Allen’s monograph of the Gicktntagion (Trans. Am. Philos. Soc., N.&.,
XIX, pt. Il, pp. 237-266, June, 1898). Here Arachyphylla is united with
Phyllonycterts to form the group ‘ Brachyphyllina,’ placed at that end of the
glossophagine series nearest the Stenodermatine.

334 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Reithronycteris aphylla sp. nov.

Type.—Adult 3 (in alcohol) No. 9, Museum of the Institute of
Jamaica. Collected in Jamaica. No further history.

Specific characters.—External appearance much as in Phyllonye-
teris sezekorni Peters,’ but muzzle conspicuously broader and termi-
nating in a disc-shaped rudimentary nose leaf like that of Brachy-
phylla cavernarum. Feet relatively larger than in Phyllonycteris
sezekorni, and interfemoral membrane much less developed. Skull
broader and more heavily built than that of P. sezekorni and lack-
ing the slender, but complete zygomatic arches often present in the
latter. Teeth conspicuously shorter and broader than in Phyllo-
nycteris sezekorni; front lower molar very slightly larger than suc-
ceeding ones, not greatly elongated as in P. sezekorni. Color, of
specimen preserved in alcohol for an unknown period, light yellow-
ish brown.

Fur and color —The fur is short, about 6 mm. in length on mid-
dle of back, 4 mm. on belly; it is very closely confined to the body,
barely reaching the membranes. Color both above and below light
yellowish brown. Ears and membranes light brown.

Ears—The ears are short; when laid forward they reach just
beyond inner canthus of eye. Anterior border strongly convex from
base to a little above middle, then nearly straight to narrowly
rounded off tip. Posterior border slightly concave below tip, then
convex (the curve about the same as that of anterior border) to base.
Posteriorbase in line with upper lip,the distance from cornerof mouth
a little less than from the latter point to chin. A wart (concealed
by the hair) about as large as eye midway between corner of mouth
and posterior base of ear. Inner surface of ear with seven ill de-
fined cross ridges.

Tragus a little less than half height of ear. Anterior border
gently and evenly convex from base to acicular tip. Posterior bor-
der with four deep scallops, subtending as many prominent tooth
like projections, of which the basal is less developed than the
others (it does not show in the view from which figure was taken).

Feet.—-Foot very large, fully three-fourths as long as tibia, the
toes deeply cleft and provided with large claws. No trace of calear.

7 This comparison is made with specimens from Nassau, Bahamas. These
may prove to be different from the typical Cuban form.

* Dobson, basing his description on Jamaican material, states that in Phyllo-
nycteris the zygomatic arches are incomplete. This is not true of the Baha-
man specimens. ‘There is little reason, however, to believe that the Jamai-
can Phyllonycteris with pointed nose leaf is the same as that found in the
Bahamas, and no certainty that either is true sezekorni.

tee

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 335

Fig. 2.—Head of Phyllo-
nycteris sezekorni (a) and
Reithronycteris aphylla
(b). (Slightly enlarged).

is very difficult to represent in the drawing).

Skull—The skull (figure 3) is larger and more massively built

Membranes.—Wings full and ample, at-
tached at middle of tibia. Uropatagium
reduced to a narrow frill scarcely wider
than the fleshy part of the thigh, and reach-
ing not quite to middle of tibia. Tail in-
cluded to middle in membrane.

Tongue.—The tongue (figure 5) while
distinctly of the glossophagine type is con-
siderably broader in proportion to its length
than in any of the other members of the
group that I haveexamined. At the tip it
narrows very abruptly to an unusually
acute point. The terminal area of elonga-
ted stiff papillee has much the same general
shape as in Phyllonycteris sezekorni, allow-
ance being made for the difference arising
from the greater breadth of the tongue, but
the individual paplliz are shorter and of
more uniform length, so that the median
groove is less conspicuous (this difference

than that of Phyllonycteris or
any other glassophagine ge-
nus with which [ am acquaint-
ed. The rostrum is especially
broad and deep. Face line
straight from nostril to middle
of brain case ; a well develop-
ed sagittal crest and lambdoid
crest; bony palate behind
molars narrower than in Phyl-
lonycteris sezekorni. The ham-
ular processes are very broad
and strongly concave intern-
ally, the resulting form quite
different from that in Phyllo-
nycle ris or Glossop haga. The
structure of the floor of the

Fig. 3.—Skull of Reithronycteris aphylla. brain case has already been
(About 14 times natural size). referred to. Unfortunately

336 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

the type is so old that it is impossible to trace the sutures in this
part of the skull, but the longitudinal folds forming the roof of the
posterior nares are apparently given off by the pterygoids. In fig-
ure 4 is shown a diagrammatic cross section

ft
just in front of the hamulars. ei
Mandible very heavy and massive, especially yar

in the region of the symphysis. It is quite un- 5, ;

f g. 4. — Diagram-
like that of any other member of the Glossopha- _ matic cross section
gine, and closely resembles that of Brachy- through ptery-

: . goids and floor of
phylla, allowance being made for its much | brain case at re-
smaller size. gion marked a-b

Teeth.—In number and arrangement the vec, A
teeth agree with those of Phyllonycteris sezekorni, __sisphenoid.
but in form they are even less typically glossophagine, than is espe-
cially the case with the mandibular teeth, which strongly resemble
those of Brachyphylla cavernarum. In relative size the teeth agree
with those of Phyllonycteris sezekorni except that the front upper
premolar is larger, the second upper premolar smaller, and the front
lower molar much shorter. The lower premolars are less crowded
than in P. sezekorni.

Measurements.—Total length, 88; head, 28; greatest breadth of
muzzle in front of eyes, 10; eye to eye, 8; eye to tip of muzzle,
10.4; ear from meatus, 16; ear from crown, 13; width of ear, 12;
tragus, 8; tail, 12; free part of tail, 6; tibia, 22.8 ; foot, 17; claws,
5; width of uropatagium at middle of femur, 6; forearm, 48;
thumb, 14; second finger, 37; third finger, 84; fourth finger, 66;
fifth finger, 64; penis, 10. Skull: greatest length, 26; basilar
length, 20; interorbital breadth, 5.4; mastoid breadth, 12.4 ; depth
of brain case, 9; depth of rostrum at anterior end of first molar, 6:
width of palate between last molars, 5; last molar to tip of hamu-
lar, 7.8; upper tooth row exclusive of incisors, 8; greatest length
‘of mandible, 16.6; depth of mandible at space between premolars,
3; lower tooth row exclusive of incisors, 9.

General remarks.—Reithronycteris aphylla needs close comparison
with only one described species, the Phyllonycteris poeyi of Gund-
lach.2 This bat, from the “ Kaffeepflanzung Fundator,”’ Cuba, is
still wholly unknown except for the rather meagre original des-
cription. In size, color, general structure of the nose leaf, and
absence of calcar, it agrees very closely with Reithronycteris

® Monatsber. K. Akad. Wissensch., Berlin, 1860, p. 817.

a

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 337

aphyila, but the ear is longer and
narrower (18.5x11 instead of 16x12),
the rudimentary nose leaf quite differ-
ent in form (5.75x4. 5 instead of 4x6),
the tail is shorter, especially in its free
portion, and the forearm and fingers
are slightly shorter. These differences
coupled with the seeming impossibility
Fig. 5.—Tip of tongue (dorsal that anyone should consider animals
surface) of Reithronycteris sq widely different in aspect as Phy/-
aphylla (a) and Phyllonycteris ee : = ate
sezekorni (b). (About 5 times lonycteris sezekorni and Reithronycteris
natural size). aphylla as possibly individual varia-
tions of one and the same species,’ make it appear more reasonable
to apply a new specific name to the Jamaican bat.

* Gundlach says (under Phyllonycteris sezekorni) : “ Die Vergleichung einer
grisseren Anzahl von Exemplaren wird iibrigens entscheiden miissen, ob diess
eine selbstiindige Art ist oder ob sie mit der vorhergehenden zu vereinigen
sein wird.”

338 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

JUNE 7.
The President, SAmuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-eight persons present. ’

The deaths of Professors Jules Marcou and Fridolin Sandberger,
Correspondents, were announced.

JuNE 14.
The President, SAMUEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-five persons present.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—

“List of Fishes collected at the Canary Islands by Mr. O. F.
Cook, with Descriptions of Four New Species.” By David Starr
Jordan and James Alexander Gunn, Jr.

“ Hyalodendron nayalium, a New Genus and Species of Euplec-
tillid Sponge.” By J. Perey Moore.

JUNE 21.
Mr. BenyAMIN SmitH LyMan in the Chair.

Nineteen persons present.

>

A paper entitled “A New Chipmunk from northeastern China,’
by Gerrit S. Miller, Jr., was presented for publication.

JUNE 28.
Mr. CuarvLes Morris in the Chair.
Thirteen persons present.

The ComMITTEE ON THE HAYDEN GEOLOGICAL MEMORIAL
Awarp reported in favor of conferring the medal and the interest on
the fund for 1898 on Proressor Orro Martin Tore t, the Di-
rector of the Geological Survey of Sweden, in recognition of the
value of his contributions to the literature of geological science, his
able direction of the Swedish Geological Survey, and the eminence
of his standing among geologists.

The award was made by the Academy in accordance with the
recommendation of the Committee.

The following were ordered to be printed :—

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 359

LIST OF FISHES COLLECTED AT THE CANARY ISLANDS BY MR. 0. F.
COOK, WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF FOUR NEW SPECIES.

BY DAVID STARR JORDAN AND JAMES ALEXANDER GUNN, JR.

In 1891, Mr. O. F. Cook presented to the Museum of the Leland
Stanford Junior University a valuable collection of fishes which he
had obtained on a visit to the Canary Islands. We give below an
annotated list of the species contained in this collection with a de-
scription of those which are new. The following species seem to be
new to science.

Umbrina valida Jordan and Gunn, No. 10,584, L. S. Jr. U.

Scorpena rubellio Jordan and Gunn, No. 4,291, L. S. Jr. U.

Scorpena teneriffea Jordan and Gunn, No. 3,111, L. 8. Jr. U.

Blennius canariensis Jordan and Gunn, No. 4,285, L. 8. Jr. U.

Family GALEIDZ.

1. Mustelus canis (Mitchill).
One specimen.

Family SQUALIDA.

2. Centrophorus granulosus (Bloch «& Schneider),

One specimen.
Family RAJIDZA.

3. Raja clavata Linnwus.

One specimen. It differs from Giinther’s description in having
three rows of claw-like spines along the tail, instead of one, and in
the absence of a patch of claw-like spines on the side of the head
and on the pectoral.

Family DASYATIDZ.

4. Dasyatis pastinacea (Linnwus.)

Family LEPTOCEPHALIDZ.

5. Leptocephalus conger (Linnmus).

One specimen. It differs from the descriptions at hand in that
the length of the pectoral fin is contained two and one-half times in
that of the head, instead of three and one-half times.

340 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898,
Family MURA NIDA.
6. Murena augusti Kaup.

The one specimen of this species differs from Giinther’s descrip-
tion in that the tubule of the anterior nostril, instead of being as
lung as the diameter of the eye, is only half that length.

-7. Murena helena Linneus.
One specimen.
8. Murena melanotis Kaup.

Two specimens.

9. Lycodontis vicinus (Castelnau) (7).

Three specimens. They differ from published descriptions in be-
ing mottled with whitish instead of with purplish or a darker brown
than the body color. We do not feel certain of their identity with
this species, and its synonymy as given by Jordan and Evermann
is somewhat doubtful.

Family CLUPEID.
10. Clupanodon maderensis (Lowe).

One specimen. ‘The pectoral fins are shorter than described.

Family SYNODONTIDZ.
11. Synodus saurus (Linnzus).
Two specimens.
Family ESOCIDA.
12. Esox belone (Linnieus).

One specimen.

Family MACRORHAMPHOSIDA.
13. Macrorhamphosus scolopax (Linnzus).
Eight specimens.
Family ATHERINIDA.
14. Atherina boyeri Risso.
Three specimens.
Family MUGILIDZ.
15. Liza aurata (Risso).
Four specimens.
Family SPHYRENIDZ.
16. Sphyrena sphyrena (Linnwus).
Four specimens.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 341

Family MULLIDZ.
17. Mullus surmuletus Linnus.

One specimen.

Family SCOMBRIDZ.
18. Scomber colias (Gmelin.
Four specimens.

Family GEMPHYLIDZ.
19. Prometheichthys prometheus (Cuv. & Val.),

The single specimen of this species has six extremely large canine
teeth on the premaxillary instead of four as described and figured
by Goode and Bean and by Cuvier and Valenciennes.

20. Ruvettus pretiosus (Cocc.).

One specimen.

Family LEPIDOPODID.
21. Lepidopus caudatus (Euphrasen).
Two specimens.

Family CARANGIDA.
22. Trachurus picturatus (Bowdich).
Two specimens.
23. Hypodis glaucus (Linnieus).
One specimen.

Family SERRANIDZ.
24. Serranus scriba (Linnus).
Two specimens.
25. Epinephelus guaza (Linneus).

One single specimen (=Epinephelus gigas [Brunnich]) differs
from ordinary specimens by the absence of “faint, whitish spots
arranged in vertical series.”

Family SPARIDZ.
26. Diplodus vulgaris (Cuvier & Valenciennes).

Two specimens.
27. Diplodus sargus (Linnwus).

Three specimens.
28. Pagrus pagrus (Linnmus).
Two specimens.

342 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

29. Pagellus centrodontus (Delaroche).

The single specimen of P. centrodontus in this collection has only
eight soft rays in the anal fin instead of twelve; but the fish had
evidently received an injury, during life, by which some of the pos-
terior anal rays were torn away.

30. Pagellus bogaraveo (Briinnich).

One specimen. .
$1. Pagellus mormyrus (Linnieus).

One specimen.

32. Pagellus erythrinus (Linnzus).
One specimen.
Family KYPHOSIDA.
33. Spondyliosoma cantharus (Linnwus).
One specimen.
34. Box boops (Linnzus).

One specimen.

Family SCIZNIDZ.
35. Umbrina valida Jordan & Gunn, new species.

Head 3} in length; depth 3; eye in head 3{; D. X-I-29; A.
II-7 ; scales 7-47-11. Body rather stout, back elevated, ventral
line from anal to lower lip nearly straight; mouth low, lower jaw
embraced within upper when mouth is closed; maxillary extending
to vertical from anterior edge of pupil; snout blunt, rounded, scaly,
extending a little beyond premaxillary ; anterior nostril circular, a
membrane half closing it on postero-ventral side; posterior nostril
large, pyriform, slightly nearer to orbit than to anterior nostril, a
membrane nearly half closing it on dorsal side; teeth villiform,
subequal, in broad bands which are interrupted at median line in
both jaws; preopercle denticulate on its bony edge; barbel below
symphysis short, thick, blunt; third and fourth dorsal spines long-
est, 24 in head ; pectorals equal to, or slightly longer than ventrals
and reaching more than half way to vent, 12 in head; caudal trun-
cate, except for three or four dorsal rays which are abruptly pro-
duced; second anal spine strong, 2% in head; gill rakers 5 + 10,
short, thick.

Color (in spirits) yellowish-olive with a dark violet streak along
each row of scales; these streaks intersect with the lateral line;
vertical and ventral fins dark; pectorals dark behind. One speci-

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 343

men, from Canary Islands, 30 em. long, exclusive of caudal; col-
lected by O. F. Cook. This well-marked species is nearest to Um-
brina coroides Cuvier & Valenciennes. The latter has, at all ages,
well-marked black cross-bands.

Family POMACENTRIDZ.
36. Chromis chromis (Linnzus).
One specimen.
37. Abudefduf luridus (Broussonet).

The two specimens of this species agree perfectly with the genus
Abudefduf as defined by Jordan and Evermann, except that the
teeth are not emarginate. The front teeth are truncate and those in
the sides of the mouth rounded. This species agrees in this regard
with Stegastes imbricatus Jenyns, but in the genus or subgenus Ste-
gastes, the snout is fully scaled.

Family LABRIDZ.

38. Centrolabrus trutta Lowe.
Two specimens.

39. Diastodon scrofa (Cuvier & Valenciennes).
Two specimens.

40. Sparisoma cretense (Linnmus).
Four specimens.

41. Thalassoma unimaculatum (Lowe).

Head 34; depth 34; eye in head 5}, in inter-orbital width 1};
snout in head 27. D. VIII-13; A. III-11; scales 2 to 3-26 to 29
-9 to 10, before D. 6. Body-color (in spirits) olive-gray ; perpen-
dicular, violet-black or reddish-brown streaks, extending across
centers of scales, two-thirds down sides of body, and alternating with
white streaks which extend to ventral surface; crossing these are
faint, longitudinal, white streaks, extending along each row of scales
and sometimes giving body a mesh-work appearance; top of head
and snout black or violet ; a more or less distinct black stripe from
eye to near posterior edge of opercle ; pectorals with a small, black
spot superiorly in axil, or not, darkened at tip or not; outer rays of
caudal extended along and darkened; basal one-third of anal
violet, the outer two-thirds white; a black spot on the back at each
side of dorsal at bases of second to fifth soft rdys; dorsal with a
broad, dark-violet stripe along its whole length, leaving a narrow,

344 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

white margin along the crest and the base, the latter usually inter-
rupted by union of black spot of back and violet stripe of fin. Five
specimens from Canary Islands, 7.5 to 10 em. long, exclusive of
caudal; collected by O. F. Cook. This specimen is apparently dis-
tinct from Thalassoma pavo, differing at least in color.

Family TETRAODONTIDA.
42. Spheroides spengleri (Bloch).
Two specimens. :

Family SCORPHNIDZ.
43. Scorpena rubellio Jordan & Gunn, new species.

Head 23; depth 3; eye in head 4, in inter-orbital width 7 ; snout
in head 33. D. XII-10; A. III-5; scales ctenoid and rather
small, 7-26-16, before D. 6. Breast closely covered with small,
smooth scales; ctenoid scales on operculum and on posterior part of
cheek above sub-orbital ridge; a single, horizontal row of scales,
some of them smooth, below sub-orbital ridge, and near them a few
scattered, cup-shaped, rudimentary ones ; on top of head, from occi-
put to nostrils, are scattered, minute, cup-shaped or flat scales, im-
bedded in the skin, upon each of which is produced, usually from
the posterior edge, one or two upright prickles. Inter-orbital area
moderately concave, its longitudinal ridges hardly perceptible. No
occipital or sub-ocular groove or pit. Supra-orbital and anterior
nasal plumules each shorter than diameter of pupil. Three moder-
ate spines on supra-orbital crest, followed posteriorly by a row of
three others; two rather low opercular ridges ending in spines; a
series of three spines behind middle of eye, the first one directed up-
ward, the third with a smaller one above it. Sub-orbital ridge
moderate, bearing two spines; behind it two closely apposed spines
on edge of preopercle, the hinder one larger; below these, and also
on edge of preopercle, a row of four, short, stout spines. The ante-
rior and postero-ventral extremities of pre-orbital produced into
spines which project over the maxillary. Two pairs of barbels, at-
tached nearer lip than median line. Fourth dorsal spine longest ;
24 in head; last soft ray joined by membrane for nearly its whole
length to the back. Second anal spine longest, longer than longest
dorsal. Last ventral ray attached to the body by membrane for
half its length.

Body color (in spirits) reddish-brown ; a dark area at origin of lat-
eral line, fading posteriorly. Head covered with dark specks. Dorsal

4,
:
‘
ia

eS Ss Se

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 345

mottled with reddish-brown and light. The dark base of caudal sep-
arated by a light area from the dark spots arranged in three or four
transverse bars on the distal two-thirds of the rays. Anal chiefly
dark with only a few white specks. Ventrals white, shaded with a
little brown. Numerous scattered brown specks on rays of pectorals.
On the posterior side of base of pectoral and gradually diminishing
in number posteriorly in the axil and on the body area which the
fin covers when folded back are numerous white specks, about as
large as the pores of lateral line. One specimen from Canary Is-
lands ; length 9.5 cm. exclusive of caudal; collected by O. F. Cook.

This species is allied to Scorpena porcus, but differs in the arma-
ture of the head, in the coloration and in the more densely scaled
breast. ‘

44. Scorpena teneriffea Jordan & Gunn, new species.

Head 22; depth 3; eye in head 34, in inter-orbital width 4;
snout in head 44. D. XII-10; A. III-5; scales 6-25-13, before
D. 2. Breast and head scaleless, latter pustulate, spinous, without
tentacles except over anterior nostrils ; a deep inter-orbital groove
corrugated by a furrow along its bottom and terminating posteriorly
in a deeper, transverse, occipital groove which is continuous with
the post-orbital cavities. A pair of small spines in occipital groove,
two pairs of large ones behind it; a large, hooked spine in each post-
orbital pit, half way between which and the large supra-scapular
spine are two short, broad ones; one or two small spines in anterior
part of post-orbital pit ; a large spine anteriorly, and two small ones
posteriorly on supra-orbital ridge ; two inter-nasal spines; preor-
bital with anterior and postero-ventral extremities produced into
spines and with three or four median spines, the anterior of which
is largest and all of which, together with the one at postero-ven-
tral extremity, project over the maxillary; sub-orbital ridge
strong, with three spines; behind these, and situated on the poste-
rior edge of preopercle, are two closely apposed spines, the hinder
one the larger ; below this point, and also on posterior edge of pre-
opercle, are four, short, stout spines; two ridges, the lower one
stronger, cross the opercle terminating posteriorly in strong spines;
a strong humeral spine above axil. Scales ctenoid, moderately
large. Third and fourth dorsal spines longest, more than half
length of head. Second anal spine longest, nearly equal to longest
dorsal.

23

‘

346 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Color (in spirits) reddish-brown above, white and yellowish-white
below; a dark area on lower part of cheek and opercle; a small
dark spot above, and one or two behind axil of pectoral ; irregular
dark spots on pectoral, lower rays tipped with white; spinous dor-
sal slightly darkened, a few dark spots on soft dorsal. Caudal fan-
shaped, almost immaculate at base, but with large, dark spots be-
tween the rays disposed in two or three transverse bars, in the cen-
tral region of fin, and irregularly near its extremity. Anal white
with a few dark spots; ventrals white with one or two spots. One
specimen 13.5 cm. long from Canary Islands, collected by O. F.
Cook.

This species seems to be distinct from the Madeira species Scor-
pena ustulate Lowe, to which it is allied.

Family GOBIIDA.
45. Gobius niger Linnzus.
One specimen.
Family TRACHINIDZ.
46. Trachinus draco Linnzeus.

Three specimens.
Family BLENNIIDZ.

47. Labrisomus nuchipinnis (Quoy & Gaimard).
In the two specimens of this species the band of villiform teeth is
broader behind the upper front teeth than that behind the lower.

48. Blennius canariensis Jordan & Gunn, new species.

Head 42; depth 4}; eye in head 43, in inter-orbital width 2. D.
XI-22; A. IJ-22; snout rounded, obtuse, 3 in head. Two canine
teeth in each jaw, the lower ones twice as large as the upper, incis-
ors long, villiform, in single series in each jaw, not fixed. Dorsal
beginning above margin of preopercle, continuous, extending to
caudal but not uniting with it. Ventrals inserted below origin of
dorsal, 73 in body-length. Distance of anal from caudal equals di-
ameter of eye. Supra-orbital cirrus bifid, as long as half diameter
of eye; anterior nostril with a flap equalling one-third diameter of
eye. Caudal fan-shaped.

Body color (in spirits) reddish-brown, whitish below; posterior
half of body sometimes whitish, in which case, three longitudinal
interrupted brown stripes extend over the light part. Ventrals and
pectorals reddish-brown ; vertical fins darker; anal dark violet, the

+ a

EE ——————— Ee

—

en

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 347

rays tipped with white and sometimes whitish at base. Two speci-
mens from Canary Islands, 10 and 10.5 em. long; collected by O.
F. Cook.

This species seems to be different from Blennius tentacularis and
from all others with which we have been able to compare it.

Family TRIGLIDZ.
_ 49, Trigla hirundo (Linnieus).
One specimen.

50. Trigla lineata (Linnus).

One specimen.

Family GADIDZ.

41. Urophycis mediterraneus (Delaroche).

One specimen.

Family PLEURONECTID&.

52. Platophrys podas (Delaroche).

The three specimens of this species differ from published descrip-
tions in having a re-entrant angle at the base of the snout, and in
not having an angle opposite the upper eye.

Family SOLEIDA.
53. Solea lascaris (Risso).
Two specimens.
54. Quenselia ocellata (Linnmus).
One specimen.

348 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

A NEW CHIPMUNK FROM NORTHEASTERN CHINA.
BY GERRIT 8. MILLER, JR.

In a paper recently published in these Proceedings (1898, pp.
120-125) Mr. S. N. Rhoads refers two chipmunks from the Pro-
vince of Pechili, northeastern China, to Eutamias asiaticus (Gmelin).
Through the kindness of Mr. Witmer Stone I now have the speci-
mens before me. They agree perfectly—allowance being made for
difference in pelage—with a skin in the United States National
Museum taken near Peking, and differ widely from published
descriptions of Eutamias asiaticus' and from a skin of the latter (in
the National Museum) labelled ‘ Fort Ulba, Siberia.” Considering
the isolation of the region inhabited by the Pechili Chipmunk, and
the extreme plasticity of the genus Eutamias, it is not surprising
that the animal should prove to be distinct from its Siberian con-
gener. The question immediately arises, however, as to what true
Eutamias asiaticus really is, and at present it is impossible to give
a wholly satisfactory answer. Gmelin based his Sciwrus striatus
a asiaticus primarily on the Sciwrus striatus of Pallas,’ a compos-
ite of the Asiatic and American species, but composed chiefly of the
former. The range of the Asiatic animal extends, according to
Pallas, from the Dwina River in Russia, east through the whole of
Siberia. That only one species of Hutamias occurs in this vast area
is almost beyond the possibility of belief. But however many forms
there may be, and whatever one Pallas may have had in hand when
he wrote his description, the animal that he described was approxi-
mately like the ‘ Ulba’ specimen, and consequently very unlike the
Chinese form. Roughly speaking, the Chinese animal is a pale,
grayish, brown-striped form much like Eutamias merriami and E.
senex, while the ‘Ulba’ specimen, together with those usually re-

1 See, for instance, Allen, Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., III, pp. 71, 72, June,
1890.

2 This locality I have been unable to find on any map. Inthe Government
of Tomsk, however, there is a river whose name is variously spelled as Uba,
Ouba and Ooba. The name on the Museum label may be a lapsus penne
for Uba.

*Glires, p. 378.

A al

er.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 349

garded as true asiaticus, resembles the members of the brightly col-
ored, black-striped quadrivittatus group. That ‘Pallas had before
him a specimen of the latter type, is clearly proved by his excellent
description. The back he says is marked with five black stripes,
of which the middle one extends from nape to base of tail, the outer
from shoulder to thigh. The specific name asiaticus, based on this
description, is obviously inapplicable to an animal which has only
one, or at most three, black dorsal stripes. The Chinese form, on
account of its striking resemblance to the American Eutamias senex
may be called:

Eutamias senescens sp. nov.

Tamias (Eutamias) asiaticus Rhoads, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia,
1898, p. 122. (Nec Sciurus striatus a asiaticus Gmelin, 1788, nec Tamias
asiaticus Allen, 1890).

Type—Adult @ (skin and skull) No. 83,395, United States
National Museum, collected August 21, 1896, on low barren hills
fifteen miles west of Peking, China, by Geo. D. Wilder.

General characters—Much paler and grayer than Eutamias
asiaticus ; only the middle part of central dark stripe constantly
black ; feet larger than in a specimen of supposed asiaticus from
‘Fort Ulba, Siberia.’

Color—Type specimen in fresh post nuptial pelage: sides pale
yellowish-brown, becoming grizzly gray at shoulders, rump tinged
with orange rufous; crown slightly browner than shoulders and
nape; sides of head yellowish-gray, with the usual stripes, the latter
light brown and ill defined ; ears concolor with crown, a whitish
stripe along posterior border on outer side, a faint yellowish wash
within, belly soiled whitish ; tail with three bands of color, a broad,
pale yellowish, median area, followed by a black subterminal band
and a white border, the pattern very distinct beneath but obscured
on the dorsal surface, where in addition to the three color bands
normally present, the hairs have dusky bases ; median dorsal stripe
extending from nape to base of tail, dusky brown anteriorly, becom-
ing black near middle and fading to pale reddish-brown posteriorly ;
second stripe shorter and slightly paler than first; outer stripe
broader than either of the others, much paler and less well defined ;
outer white stripe dusky whitish (about like belly), slightly broader

*“ Dorsum /asciis quinque nigris, longitudinalibus striatum, quarum media
a nucha ad caudam, proxime acervice ad clunes, extime a scapulis ad femora
protenduntur.”

350 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

than inner, which is much the same color as grizzle of neck and
shoulders ; whole’ back sprinkled with black and reddish hairs, the
latter most numerous along the edges of the dark stripes.

Adult female in worn winter pelage (No. 4,601, Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, Tung Ching Tzu, Pechili, China,
May 30, 1897. Skin considerably over-stuffed): ground color
throughout much paler than in the type, rump scarcely tinged with
reddish ; dark stripes on both head and body more conspicuous ;
the second dorsal stripe black in middle, the median white stripes
paler; tail much less bushy but similar in arrangement of colors,
except at base where new hairs are coming in. The other specimen
(3 ad. No. 4,602, Sian Lang Kou, Pechili, China, June 18, 1897),
likewise in worn winter pelage is similar to the last, but a shade less
pallid.

Measurements—The material at hand furnishes a rather unsatis-
factory basis for measurements. The following, however, are fairly
accurate. ;

Number sex total length tail hind foot front fout

m.m. m.m. m.m. m.m.

83,395 2 297 127 40 24
4,601 2 —- _- 38 22
4,602 3 — — 38 23

The ‘Fort Ulba’ specimen measures: hind foot, 36; front foot,
20.

General remarks.—The cranial characters of Eutamias senescens
have been sufficiently described by Mr. Rhoads in his paper, to
which reference has already been made.

This paper is published here by permission of the Secretary of
the Smithsonian Institution.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 301

JULY 5.
Mr. BenJAMIN SmitH LyMAN in the Chair.
Nine persons present.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—

“Contributions to Neotropical Herpetology.” By Robert Baird
McLain.

“ Critical Notes on a Collection of Reptiles from the Western
Coast of the United States.” By Robert Baird McLain.

“The Eastern Reptiles in the Collection of the Museum of the
Leland Stanford University, Zoological Department.” By Robert
Baird McLain.

bap ey gm O22
Mr. BensaAmin SmitH LyMan in the Chair.
Eleven persons present.

A paper entitled “ Descriptions of Three New Rodents from the
Olympic Mountains, Washington,” by C. Hart Merriam, was pre-
sented for publication.

JuLY 19.
Mr. Coarves Morris in the Chair.
Twelve persons present. .

A paper entitled “ A New Land Snail from Clarion Island,” by
Henry A. Pilsbry, was presented for publication.

JuLy 26.
Mr. Coar tes Morris in the Chair.
Eleven persons present.
Charles M. Burk, M. D., was elected a member.

The following were ordered to be printed :—

352 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

DESCRIPTIONS OF THREE NEW RODENTS FROM THE OLYMPIC
MOUNTAINS, WASHINGTON.

BY C. HART MERRIAM.

Owing to an unavoidable delay in the publication of my report
on the Olympic Mountains, it seems desirable that the following new
species of mammals should be recorded as early as practicable.
Arctomys olympus sp. nov.

Type-—From Timberline at head of Soleduc River, Olvera
Mountains, Washington. No. 90,518, ¢ ad. U.S. Nat. Mus. Bio-
logical Survey Coll. Collected August 27, 1897, by C. Hart Mer-
riam and Vernon Bailey. Original No. 6,210.

Characters.—Size and general characters as in A. caligatus, from
which it differs markedly in color, the feet being brown instead of
black, and upper parts in summer pelage uniform dull ochraceous
yellow, without the hoary shoulders and fore back, dark posterior
back, or the blackish top of head of that species.

Color—Entire upper parts except ears and nose, dull buffy or
ochraceous yellowish, becoming brown on underparts ; ears and feet
brown ; chin and nose white, with a dark bar across face between
nose and eyes. This face bar is probably absent in full summer
pelage, and indicates the beginning of the fall change to blackish
pelage.

Measurements.—Type specimen, 3 ad., measured in flesh: Total
length, 750 mm.; tail vertebra, 210 mm.; hind foot, 110 mm.
Eutamias caurinus sp. nov.

Type-—F rom Timberline near head of Soleduc River, Olympic
Mountains, Washington. No. 90,636, ¢ ad. U.S. Nat. Mus. Bio-
logical Survey Coll. Collected August 27, 1897, by C. Hart Mer-
riam. Original No. 6,211.

Characters.—(Type specimen in post breeding pelage—molt not
completed posteriorly). Similar to E. amewnus, but hind feet longer ;
underside of tail with black border broader, and median chestnut-
fulvous band darkened by mixture of black hairs; post-auricular
patches obsolete ; face stripes duller; back of neck not grayish or
hoary, but grizzled with fulvous, like shoulders; middle pair of

1898.} NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 353

pale dorsal stripes less sharply defined anteriorly and everywhere
mixed with fulvous hairs.

Measurements.—Type specimen measured in flesh: Total length,
210 mm.; tail vertebrz, 85 mm.; hind foot, 34 mm.

Microtus macrurus sp. nov.

Type-—From Lake Cushman, Olympic Mountains, Washington.
No. 66,151 9 ad., U.S. Nat. Mus. Biological Survey Coll. Col-
lected June 26, 1894, by Clark P. Streator. Original number 3,975.

Characters.—Similar to M mordax but larger, with longer tail
and decidedly larger hind feet ; color darker.

Color.—Upper parts brownish bister with a grizzled ‘ pepper and
salt’ appearance, suggesting M. austerus ; under parts whitish, the
plumbeous under-fur showing through ; tail bicolor, dusky above,
whitish below, the tip sometimes white, sometimes dusky all round.
In summer pelage the back is browner and the under parts are
washed with buffy.

Cranial characters —Skull similar to that of M. mordax, but
slightly larger, with rostrum and nasals slightly broader,

Measurements.—Type specimen: Total length, 220 mm, ; tail ver-
tebre, 88 mm.; hind foot, 24mm. Average of 5 specimens from
Olympic Mountains: Total length, 204 mm.; tail vertebra, 80;
hind foot 24:3,

Average of 5 specimens of Mf. mordaz from Saw Tooth Lake,
Idaho: Total length, 182 mw.; tail vertebre, 66°5; hind foot, 22.

Remarks.—In coloration Microtus macrwrus agrees closely with
M. longicaudus from the Black Hills of South Dakota, but in size
and proportions it differs from /ongicaudus even more than from
mordax. Allthree of these animals are very closely related, and it
would not be far amiss if both mordax and macrurus were placed as
subspecies of longicaudus,

354 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

A NEW LAND SHELL FROM CLARION ISLAND.

BY HENRY A PILSBRY.
Succinea Mogregori n. sp.

Shell ovate, thin, red-amber colored, irregularly wrinkled-striate,.
composed of 34 very convex whorls separated by deeply
impressed sutures. Aperture two-thirds the length of the
shell, regularly ovate, oblique, its width contained 1%
times in its length ; columella arcuate, its edge thread-like

above.

Alt. 134, diam. 8, length of aperture 9 mm.

Alt. 124, diam. 7, length of aperture 84 mm.

Clarion Island, collected by Mr. R. C. McGregor, in whose honor
the species is named,

This species closely resembles S, Donneti Pfr. from Chili in form,
but differs in color, the Chilian species being pale yellowish corneous.
It has the deep reddish hue of many Hawaiian Succineas, such as S.
canella Gld., or the Japanese group to which S. lauta belongs. 8.
Oregonensis Lea is decidedly shorter and not of so dark a color.

At my request Mr. McGregor furnished the following notes on
Clarion Island :

“ Clarion Island is some three hundred miles southwest of Cape
San Lucas. The sandy beaches are covered with broken coral.
Back of the beach where we landed is level ground for a quarter of
a mile, covered in places with cacti and vines (Jpomea cathartica
Poir., Phaseolus atropurpureus D.C. and Sophora tomentosa L.).
The troublesome bush, Caesalpinia Bonducella Roxb., with its sharp,
curved spines, abounds on the hillsides and the flats. The interior
of the island rises in more or less rough hills. There are quite a
number of elevated flats or plateaux covered with a tangle of vines,.
grasses and shrubs. Among the last are Euphorbia Clarionensis
Brandegee and E. Californica Benth., on the stems of which was
found the only land shell. This mollusk closely resembles the bark
of these plants, and was very abundant. One might collect twenty
or thirty specimens from a single plant.

“Clarion Island is decidedly tropical, though it includes in its
fauna insular forms of birds of such temperate zone genera as Speo-
tyto, Zenaidura and Troglodytes. There are no mammials on the is-
land. Lizards and several species of snakes were captured.”

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 355

AvuGustT 2.
Mr. Caarves Morris in the Chair.

Nine persons present.

Aveusr 9.
Mr. BensAMiIn SmitH LyMan in the Chair.

Thirteen persons present.

The following biographical note was presented by the Committe
on the Hayden Memorial Award :

Orro Martin Torett.—Born in Varberg in Sweden, the Sth of
June, 1828, he passed the examination for entrance into the Uni-
versity of Lund in 1844, and was made Doctor of Philosophy, 1853.
He then turned his attention to medical studies, and passed the sec-
ond examination for physicians in the year 1858. He became
Adjunct Professor of Zoology in 1860, and in 1866 was nominated
as Professor of Zoology and Geology at the University of Lund.
He soon left the University for Stockholm, and was in 1871 ap-
pointed Chief of the Geological Survey of Sweden, which office he
resigned some months ago.

In 1856 he visited Switzerland with the object of studying the
glaciers, and in 1857 he made a voyage to Iceland with the same
view. His main purpose was to determine whether it is probable
that glaciers formerly covered the whole of Scandinavia.

In 1858, in company with A. E. Nordenskiold, he went to Spitz-
bergen for the first time, and the following year to Greenland.
These voyages may be said to have led to the Swedish Polar Expe-
ditions, and Torell was himself the leader or manager of the first of
these of any importance, namely, the expedition to Spitzbergen in
1861, which was very rich in scientific results.

The most important part of his work at Spitzbergen was his deep
sea investigations with the grapnel, which were executed in order to
study the animal life at the bottom of the sea (2,500 meters below
the surface), a depth from which before that time only foraminifers
had been obtained. This discovery afterwards led to many re-
searches of the sea bottom, through which, one may say, a new era
has arisen in the history of the geology and physical geography of
the ocean bed.

Partly for scientific studies and partly as a member of geological
and geographical congresses, Professor Torell has made many jour-

356 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

neys to Denmark, Germany, Switzerland, Italy, France, Belgium,
Holland, England, and the United States.

He was one of the first Swedish naturalists to accept the glacial
theory in place of the theory (by Sefstrom) of the “ rullstensflod.”
Of his works, those which treat of the ice period are the most im-
portant. To these, belong “Contribution to the molluscan fauna,
with a general view of the natural state of the Arctic Regions,”
(1859); “ Investigations of the Ice Period,” 1, (1878), 2, (1878),
and 3, (1887); and ‘On the causes of glacial phenomena in the
northeastern portion of North America.”

Partly by these works and partly by lectures Torell has, in Swe-
den as abroad, powerfully contributed to the dissemination of the
theory that the territory of northern Europe, where great blocks of
Scandinavian rocks have been found, was formerly covered by land
ice, extending from Scandinavia, like the ice in Greenland at the
present time, and not, as had been formerly supposed, by a frozen
sea (Eismeer).

Among other works of Torell may be mentioned: “ On geologi-
cal researches in Norway,” (1865) ; ‘‘ Contribution to the geognosy
and paleontology of the Spargurite Stages,” (1867) ; “ Petrificata
Suecana formationis Cambrice,” (1870) ; “Sur les traces les plus
anciennes de |’existence de l’homme en Suéde,” (1876); “On the
most important crystalline minerals,” (1882); “The deposits on
both sides of the boundary between Sweden and Norway,” (1888).
In 1868 the Scientific Society in Haarlem awarded to him its first
prize for his work on the origin of the diluvial deposits at Grénin-
gen in Holland.

Dr. Torell isa member of the Royal Society of Sciences of Swedens
(1870), of the Agricultural Academy (1872), and of many other
scientific societies in Sweden and abroad.

He is Commander of the Swedish ‘“ North Star;” Grand Officer
of the Italian Order of the Crown; Knight of the second class of
the Russian Order of St. Anna; Commander of the Danish Danné-
brog; Officer of Public Instruction and Officier de la Legion
d’honneur.

Aveusr 16.
Mr. Bensamin Suira Lyman in the Chair.
Ten persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :—

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 357

“Description of a new genus and species of Microtine Rodent
from Siberia.” By Gerrit S. Miller, Jr.

“ Notes on the Arctic Red-backed Mice.” By Gerrit S. Miller,
Jr.

Auecust 23.
Mr. BensaMin SmitH LyMAN in the Chair.
Six persons present. :

The death of James Hall, a Correspondent, the 7th inst., was
announced.

Avausr 30.
Mr. BengJAMIN SmitH LyMAN in the Chair.
Nine persons present.

The following were ordered to be printed :—

358 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

NOTES ON THE ARCTIC RED-BACKED MICE.
BY GERRIT 8S. MILLER, JR.

“We challenge the proof that Mus rutilus is not a cireumpolar
species.” “The view thus forcibly expressed by Dr. Elliott Coues
twenty-one years ago’ fairly represents current opinion in regard to
the Arctic Red-backed Mice, at least so far as concerns those of
Alaska and the Old World. From time to time during this period,
Evotomys rufocanus has been recognized as a distinct form; but
Evotomys rutilus is universally regarded as an exceptionally homo-
geneous and wide-ranging circumpolar species. Writing of the
Red-backed Mice in 1897, Mr. Vernon Bailey says: “The only
circumpolar species [of Evotomys] is the Arctic E. rutilus, which
does not undergo any considerable change throughout the cir-
cumference of the Arctic zone.””

A recent examination of the Arctic red-backed mice in the Uni-
ted States National Museum convinces me that the Evotomys rutilus
of authors is far from the unvarying species that it has been repre- —
sented. While the material at hand is too limited to form the
basis of anything like a final revision, it clearly proves the distinct-
ness of Evotomys rufocanus, and also the existence of three forms of
so-called ruti/us, one in the extreme north of Europe, one in Kam-
tschatka, and onein Alaska.

The Mus rutilus of Pallas came from Siberia immediately east of
the Obi. As no specimens from this region are available for com-
parison, the question of the exact identity of the species must, for
the time being, remain open. Geographical considerations lead me
to apply the name ruti/us provisionally to the most westerly of the
Old World forms rather than to the one occurring in Kamtschatka.
The latter is the Arvicola wosnessenskii of Polyakoff. Its identity
with Richardson’s Arvicola rubricatus from Bering Strait, is too un-
certain to be worthy of serious consideration at present. ‘The lat-
ter is described as slate color on the back, and nearly scarlet on
the sides—a color pattern quite unknown in the genus Evotomys.

1 Monogr. N. Am. Rodentia, p. 138.
2 Proc. Biolog. Soc. Washington, XI, p. 113.

a ae

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 359

Even if it be assumed, as Baird has suggested,’ that the colors of
the back and sides were accidentally transposed in Richardson’s
description, the case is not much helped, since no known member of
the rutilus group has slate colored sides. Although Baird assumed
that Richardson’s animal came from Siberia, the statement in the
original description that it “ appears to be quite distinct from any
American meadow mouse hitherto described,” leads to the belief
that the type locality was on the Alaskan side of the strait. The
objections to applying the name to the Alaskan animal are, how-
ever, no less than in the case of the Kamtschatkan species.

The general characters of Evotomys rufocanus, and of the three
species hitherto confused under the name ruti/us, are given in the
following synopsis :

Teeth large and heavy as in Microtus (never perfectly rooted ?) ;
molar rows about 6.5 mm.; posterior lower molar long, some-
what encapsulated ; skull with prominent postorbital processes ;
sides clear gray (highly aberrant). . . . . . . E.rufocanus.

Teeth small and weak (perfectly rooted in adult); molar rows
about 5 mm.; posterior lower molar short, not encapsulated ;
skull without prominent postorbital processes; sides strongly
fulvous (typical Evotomys).

Skull narrow ; rostral protuberances standing out conspicu-
ously from root of zygoma (fig. 1 a); audital bulls small ;
feetslender. .... ... . . « EB. wosnessenskii.

Skull broad ; rostral pceniberanogs not nhaiigng out con-
spicuously from: root of zygoma (fig. 1 6); audital bull
large ; feet broad.

Nasal bones short, contained 3) timesin greatest length
of skull; tail 34-40 mm.; color generally chestnut

E. rutilus.

Nasal bones long, contained only 3 times in greatest

length of skull; tail 20-30 mm.; color generally dull

SOPEWOIDOUS, 0... 0 se fe Se sy ES ClO

Evotomys rufocanus (Sundevall).

1846. Arvicola rufocanus Sundevall, Oefy. Vet. Akad. Foerh., p. 122.
1897. Evotomys rufocanus Bailey, Proc. Biolog. Soc. W ashington, XI, p.
122, May 13, 1897.

Skull.—The only skull of Evotomys rufocanus that I have at hand
is badly damaged. Nevertheless it shows strong Shannehery: to dis-

5Mam. N. Am., p. 551.

360 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

tinguish it from that of E. rutilus, or in fact from any other known
member of the genus. The anterior edge of the squamosal is pro-
duced to form a very distinct postorbital process, quite as in many
species of Microtus. The mandible is massively built and, like the
skull, shows a degree of angularity more in keeping with Mierotus
than Evotomys. The palate, although damaged, appears to be that
of typical Evotomys. Mr. Bailey says of this species: “ Evotomys
rufocanus (Sundevall) of northern Europe is remarkable for its large
molars and almost microtine form of skull.” He gives the follow-
ing measurements of a skull from Lapland: basal length, 25 mm.;
nasals, 7.6; zygomatic breadth, 15; mastoid breadth, 12.2; alveo-
lar length of upper molar series 6.7.

Teeth.—The teeth of Evotomys rufocanus are chiefly remarkable
for their large size and great strength. Their development rela-
tively to the’size of the skull is more in accord with the proportions
normal in Mierotus than in Evotomys. Apparently the molars do
not develop as complete roots as in other species of Evotomys. The
root of the lower incisor is nearly as long as in some species of
Microtus, and the long back lower molar is encapsulated, though
not conspicuously so. The enamel pattern (fig. 2 d) differs widely
from that of Evotomys rutilus (fig. 2 a). Its most striking peculiar-
ities are the simplicity of the posterior upper molar, and the shallow
reentrant angles on the outer side of the posterior lower molar.

Color—A specimen in fresh autumnal pelage has a well defined
dorsal stripe of a color intermediate between the hazel and cinna-
mon rufous of Ridgway. This stripe begins between the eyes and
extends back nearly to base of tail. Ears colored like dorsal stripe.
Sides an indescribable grizzle of hair brown, whitish, black, and
slate color. Whole under parts soiled buffy-white, darkened by the
slaty bases of the hairs, which show through irregularly on the sur-
face. Cheeks, muzzle, and sides of head similar to sides of body,
but slightly darker. Tail sharply bicolor, brownish above, dirty
white below. Feet dirty whitish.

General remarks.—Mr. Bailey has already called attention to the
fact that Evotomys rufocanus “is the most divergent form of the
genus known.” So divergent is the animal that it may well be ~
questioned whether it is to be regarded asa true Evotomys. Its
heavy and apparently imperfectly rooted teeth more closely resem-
ble those of many species of typical Microtus than they do the weak,
perfectly rooted teeth of true Evotomys. The relationships of the

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 361

root of the lower incisor and the posterior lower molar, while not
typical of either genus are clearly suggestive of Mierotus rather
than Evotomys. The palate structure, on the other hand, appears
to agree with that of Evotomys. The question of the animal’s true
position cannot be answered until good series of specimens represent-
ing different ages are available for comparison.

Evotomys wosnessenskii (Polyakoff).

1839. ?? Arvicola rubricatus Richardson, Zodlogy of Beechey’s Voyage of the
Blossom, p. 7 (Bering Strait).

1881. Arvicola wosnessenskii Polyakoff, Appendix to Volume XX XIX of
the Memoirs of the St. Petersburg Academy of Sciences, p. 56
(text in Russian) Kamtschatka.

1884. Arvicola wosnessenskii Lataste, Ann. Mus. Ciy. di St. Nat di Genova,

X, p. 28.

Skull_—The skull of Evotomys wosnessenskii as compared with
that of E. rutilus and E. alascensis is slightly narrower and more
depressed, though the differencesin general form are not very strik-
ing. The anterior edges of the antorbital foramina are folded out-
ward so as to form conspicuous swellings, which for want of a bet-
ter name I have called rostral protuberances. These protuberances
are apparently formed by the wall of a canal which takes a super-
ficial downward course from the anterior edge of the antorbital for-
amen, and probably transmits a branch of the fifth nerve. In Evo-
tomys wosnessenskit the rostral protuberances stand further forward
from the bases of the zygomata than in E£. alascensis (fig. 1). This
position as well as their large size makes
them very conspicuous. Audital bulls
small, much smaller than in E£. rutilus or
E. alascensis, their greatest breadth about
equal to alveolar length of maxillary
tooth row. Mandible slender and lightly
built, with weaker articular process and!
angular process than in the related species.

Measurements of an adult skull from:
Bering Island: greatest length, 24 mm. ;
basal length, 22.8; basilar length, 21; zygo-
matic breadth, 13.6; mastoid breadth,
11; interorbital constriction, 4; nasals,.
7.8 ; incisive foramen, 5 6; diastema, 7,4 ;

Fic. 1. ailetcin of Evo- : : fj
tomys wosnessenskii (upper Maxillary molar series (alveoli), 5; man-

figure) and £. alascensis dible, 13.8; mandibular molar series (al--

(lower figure). (x 39).
24

veoli), 5

362 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Teeth.—The teeth of Evotomys wosnessenskii (fig. 2 6) present no
characters of special importance.

Ears.—The ears are slightly smaller than in E. alascensis, but
not peculiar in form.

Feet.—The hind feet are slender and much less densely furred
than in E. alascensis. The latter character at first sight appears to
be due to season, as most of the National Museum specimens of EF.
wosnessenskii were taken in summer, while the Alaskan series is
chiefly composed of October skins. Several of the Kamtschatkan
specimens were, however, taken during the last week in September,
and one as late as October 8th. In none of these does the hairiness
of the hind foot closely approach the condition found in Alaskan
specimens taken from three weeks to a month later.

Tail—The tail is more slender than in E. alascensis, and less
densely haired than in either £. alascensis or E. rutilus. The differ-
ence is fully apparent on comparison of specimens in winter pelage.

Color.—Autumnal specimens have the dorsal stripe a clear, deep,
tawny, finely and inconspicuously sprinkled with black. Sides
ochraceous buff. Belly dull whitish, faintly darkened by the slaty
bases of the hairs. Summer adults are essentially similar, but im-
mature specimens are much darker and duller.

Measurements —For measurements of Evotomys wosnessenskii see
table, page 566.

Specimens examined.—Total number of specimens examined 26,
from the following localities :

Kamtschatka: Bering Island, 17; Kalakhtyrka, 1; Petropaul-
ski, 6; no definite locality, 2.

General remarks.—Evotomys wosnessenskii is more distinct from
E. rutilus and E. alascensis than either of these is from the other.
Aside from its cranial characters it is easily distinguishable from its
allies by its slender, thinly haired tail and feet.

Evotomys rutilus (Pallas).

1778. Mus rutilus Pallas, Nov. Sp., Quadr. Glir. Ord., p. 246 (Siberia, east
of the Obi).

1874. Evotomys rutilus Coues, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, p. 187,
(part).

Skull—In the north European Evotomys to which I have pro-

visionally restricted the name rutilus, the skull ‘closely resembles
that of E. alascensis, except that the rostral protuberances are placed
further forward, as in E. wosnessenskii, and the nasal bones are
shorter relatively to the length of the skull. In £. alascensis the

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 363

nasal bones form about 33.3 percent of the occipitonasal length,
while in E. rutilus they form about 28.5 percent only. The differ-
ence is due to the less backward extent of the nasals in E. rutilue,
rather than to any actual shortening of the rostrum. Audital bull
large and rounded as in E. alascensis, very different from those of
E. wosnessenskii.

Measurements of an adult skull from Lapland: greatest length,
24 mm. ; basal length, 22.4; basilar length, 20.6 ; zygomatic breadth,
13; nastoid breadth, 11.8; interorbital constriction, 4; nasals, 7;
incisive foramen, 5; diastema, 7.4; maxillary molar series (alve-
oli), 5; mandible, 13.8; mandibular molar series (alveoli), 5.

Teeth.—The teeth of Evotomys rutilus (fig. 2 a) do not differ ap-
preciably from those of E. wosnessenskii and E. alascensis.

Ears, feet and tail—So far as can be judged from dry skins the
ears of Evotomys rutilus do not differ appreciably in form from those
of E. alascensis and E. wosnessenskii. They are, however, ap-
parently a trifle larger than in the latter. Feet broad, asin the
Alaskan form. Tail about as in EF. alascensis, but considerably
longer and somewhat less densely haired.

Color.—An adult male from northern Sweden taken in December
and another specimen from same region but without date, agree
very closely in color. Both have the dorsal stripe a clear bright
chestnut, faintly darkened by a slight admixture of black-tipped
hairs. The sides are ochraceous-buff, and the belly dirty white or
cream color. Feet whitish; ears chestnut. Tail sharply bicolor,
brownish, tinged with red above, dirty white below. Fur every-
where slaty plumbeous at base, this color appearing irregularly at
surface on belly and sides. Two other undated skins from Lap-
land are slightly paler in color.

Measurements —For measurements of Evotomys rutilus see table,
page 366.

Specimens examined.—F our, from the following localities:

Lapland: no definite locality, 2.

Sweden: Karesnando, 1; no definite locality (northern Sweden), 1.

General remarks —The Arctic red-backed mouse of northern
Europe is readily distinguishable among the known Arctic forms*

‘There are no less than five of these, 2. rutilus, 2. wosnessenskii, EF. alas-
censis, E. ungava, and £. proteus. For agg, ae of the last two, both of
which are from Labrador, see Bailey, Proc. Biolog. Soc. Washington, XI,
pp- 130, 131, and 137, May 13, 1897.

364 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

by its bright color, absence of any known dusky phase, relatively
long tail, and small square skull with large audital bulls, conspicu-
ous rostral protuberances, and short nasal bones.

Evotomys alascensis sp. nov.

1839. ?? Arvicola rubricatus Richardson, Zodlogy of Beechey’s Voyage of
the Blossom, p. 7 (Bering Strait).
1877. Evotomys rutilus Coues, Monogr. N. Am. Rodentia, p. 136 (part).
1897. near ‘oie Bailey» Proc. Biolog. Soc. Washington, xh p- 118
part).

Type—Adult 3, number 3%, United States National Museum,
collected at St. Michael’s, Alaska, October 26, 1897, by E. W. Nel-
son. Original number, 96.

General characters.—See synopsis, page 359.

Skull—The skull of Evotomys alascensis more closely resembles
that of E. rutilus than it does that of its geographically nearer ally
E. wosnessenskii. The brain case is broad and squarish in outline.
Squamosals produced into very small, pointed postorbital processes.
Audital bulle large, their greatest breadth considerably more than
alveolar length of maxillary molar series. Rostral protuberances
(fig. 1 6) much closer to roots of zygomata than in either of the Old
World species. The nasal bones (fig. 1) are longer than in either
E. rutilus or E. wosnessenskii. This difference is not due to greater
length of rostrum, but to greater backward prolongation of the nasal
bones. The nasal branches of the premaxillaries also extend fur-
ther back than in either of the Old World forms.

The skull of the type specimen measures: greatest length, 25 mm;
basal length 22.6; basilar length, 21.8; zygomatic breadth, 13.4;
mastoid breadth, 11.6; interorbital constriction, 4.6; nasals, 8; in-
cisive foramen, 5; diastema, 7; maxillary molar series (alveoli),
5.2; mandible, 14; mandibular molar series (alveoli), 5.

Teeth.—The enamel pattern (fig. 2 c) is essentially as in Old
World Arctic species.

Ears.—The ears do not differ in form from those of EF. rutilus and
E. wosnessenskii, but they are appreciably larger than in the lat-
ter.

Feet.—The front feet present no characters of importance. The
hind feet, like those of E. rutilus, are short, broad, and very densely
haired both above, on the sides, and below. On the sole the hair
extends from the heel to the middle row of tubercles.

Color.—In the type the dorsal stripe is dull ferruginous sprinkled
with black hairs, which, however, are very inconspicuous. Sides

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 365

-ochraceous-buff, finely ‘lined’ with black. Belly clear buff, shading
to grayish on the throat. Feet buffy-whitish ; face mixed buffy and

Fic. 2. Enamel pattern of Evotomys rutilus (a), I. wosnessenskii (b), FE.

eerste (c), and JL. rufocanus(d). Lower teeth below, upper teeth above.

reddish. Ears concolor with dorsal stripe. Tail sharply bicolor,
buffy below, brownish tinged with red above.

A series of seventeen skins taken at St. Michaels, Alaska, during
‘October and November show little variation in] color. In some
specimens there is less of the buff wash on the belly, but this is ab-
sent in one only. Several are much darker below than the type.
In one immature individual the red of the dorsal stripe is much
‘duller than in the adults.

Measurements—For measurements see accompanying table.

.
eo
lor)
D
5 el
i

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

366

“snjvoml Woy IV

“JOOy PUTA

xe
CMAACONAOCrOSoSOR
_ Se oe | SSS St ee

©

CO 19 19 19 15 1 Hr

“ued

"@1qazdeA [Te L

ssl izse

£
=|
EE

=
o

f1ppseruins

_

“£poq pue pwofy

S

i
mm
b a |

nN
118] |
-_

S&T

Rag
See

“YW 18ug] [BIO],

.

P | ST6‘6¢ “BYSBLY ‘S[OVNTW 3S
P| e9s'rr "BASEL ‘S|OVyOTW “IS
2 | 6es‘st "BYSLLV ‘OVO “IS
e | sce'st "BASBLY ‘S[OBVYOHNT “3S
2 | 9ce'FT “BySELY ‘S[eByoT 4S
P | pee'oT “BYSULY ‘SOCIOL “IS
2 | 2ae‘Fr “eysepy ‘s[aBtPTW “4S
P | ¥26'6S “Bysely ‘UOYNA WOT
a SOP ~ *pueydery
e TOF “HOPOMG ULOYILON
=—= lt CACake “UNPAAS ULOYAON
e £00'FS “Byyeyosjuey ‘Tys~nedo.yeg
4 | 666‘E8 “‘eyVeyosyuey ‘pue[sy Futsog
P | 166‘E8 ~eyyeyos}ue y ‘pur[sy Sutog
P | 946'e8 “By eyos}me y ‘purlsy Sut
§ £26'89 “ByBYs} wR Y ‘purls] Satseg
122.69 “Byyeyos}urey ‘pur[sy Sutsegq
P | gee‘cr “Byyeyps}ue y ‘pur[sy Sutaog
P Tee‘Ct “eyeyos} ue y “puv[sy Sato
& | oge'er “wyqEyspme yy ‘purjsy Sulsog,
fe Z
@Q
i=]
a a
eS
$ “Ayr [WOOT

ss gesmansnyn “a

“sisuaosvyy “ay
“Susua2snyD “az
*susua2svyy “a
“S2sua2svzD *

een eee ene nner eee tenet new eeeseeeet Pee ee tes wenee

Ween nee eneneeeeen teense sees eeeeee senses eesensseees seene

“*"n1ysuassousom
“*"22ysuassauUsone
“"21ysuassausom
“*"a2ysuassausom
“"21ySuassaUuson
“1nySuassausom
“ny Suassausonr
"nysuassauson. *
dasnseosShpaneve Fos bassliap iaugsucsnniuussdpnmvavceiaWhura< ik “anysuassauson. *

Perrrererrrrrrrerirry

Preeerrit ier eter reerr reer ee eee

POePrIIeEererrirrrritittt ier erie

Ge 0

“OUIUNT

‘SAWOLOAG OLLOUV FO SUIOAdS AAUHL WO SLUNG OS Va

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 367

Specimens examined.—Total number of specimens examined 21,
from the following localities :

Alaska: Fort Yukon, 2; St. Michels, 19.

General remarks.—Evotomys alascensis appears to be more closely
related to the European FE. rutilus than to the Kamtschatkan FE.
wosnessenskii or to any of the American species. It has the broad
skull, large audital bulls and broad feet of EF. rutilus, but differs
from both European and Kamtschatkan species in its long nasal
bones, and in the positién of the rostral protuberances.

I am permitted by the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution
to published this paper here.

368 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

DESCRIPTION OF A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES OF MICROTINE RODENT
FROM SIBERIA.

BY GERRIT 8S. MILLER, JR.

Before the first ocean telegraph cable was laid, the Western
Union Telegraph Company organized an expedition to investigate
the practicability of an overland international line by way of Alaska
and Siberia. A few mammals were collected during this explora-
tion, and among them is a mouse representing an undescribed genus

; and species. It was
taken at Plover Bay,
Bering Strait, Siberia.
In general appearance
this animal resembles a
lemming. So close is
the likeness that the spe-
cimen remained for
many years in the Na-
tional Museum collee-
tion labelled ‘ Myodes,’
Recently, however, Mr.
F. W. True detected the
error in identification
and referred the subject
to me for further study.
I find that the species,
while possessing no im-
portant characters not
found in Microtus and

Evotomys, yet combines
" the peculiarities of these
two genera so perfectly
that it is necessary either to recognize the new form as an annectant
genus, or to reduce Evotomys to the rank of a subgenus of Microtus,
and treat the Plover Bay animal as still another subgenus. While
the latter course would be the more logical, it would involve the
serious inconvenience of uniting two large, widely spread, and else-
where sharply defined genera. Hence I prefer the first alternative. —

Fic, 1. Skull of Aschizomys lemminus (x 2).

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 369

ASCHIZOMYS gen. nov. ( Microtine).
Type, Aschizomys lemminus sp. nov.

Generie characters.—Skull (fig. 1) broad, depressed, lightly built,
smooth and rounded. Palate as in true Evotomys.'’ Molars small
and weak, their angles rounded as in Evotomys (fig. 2), but the teeth
growing from a persistent pulp as in Microtus (fig. 3). Lower
incisor with long root (nearly as in Microtus)
which strongly displaces root of large poste
rior lower molar (fig. 4). Form lemming-
like. Tail vertebre shorter than hind foot, ,
pencil nearly as long as vertebra. Plantar
tubercles six. Number of mamme unknown.

Remarks.— As already intimated, the
proper disposition of this genus is open to
serious question. It must be recognized as
an intermediate between Evotomys and Mi-

crotus, but opinions may well vary between iS,
the logical course of combining all three C
under one generic name, and the convenient

expedient of allowing each to stand as a full

genus. For the present I have chosen the p.. 9 Enamel bie
latter course. A third alternative would be tern of Aschizomys lem-
to remove from Microtus and unite with ™"4- (x10).
Aschizomys the subgenera Eothenomys’ and Anteliomys, in which the
palate structure of Evotomys is exactly reproduced. With these
might be joined the highly aberrant Lvolomys rufocanus. This would
not only remove anomalous forms from Microtus and Evotomya, but
would also create a fairly homogeneous group characterized by the
combination of shelf-like palate with long-rooted lower incisor and
encapsulated posterior lower molar. When good material represent-
ing all these questionable forms can be brought together, some such
course as this may prove necessary.

Aschizomys lemminus «p. nov.

Type—Adult, number 7, United States National Museum,
collected at Kelsey Station, Plover Bay, Bering Strait, by C. W.
Baxter.

‘See North American Fauna, No. 12, fig. 7, and pl. II, fig. 10, July 23,
_ 1896. '
See North American Fauna, No. 12, pp. 45-49, pl. II, figs. 8 and 11.
5 For characters of Evotomys rufocanus see antea, p. 359-361.

370 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

External form.'—Ears broad and rounded, longer than the fur imme-
diately in front of their bases. (In the dry skin the ears have shrunk
considerably and appear much shorter than the surrounding fur).

. Muzzle hairy ; septum of the nostrils
naked, the free edges crenulate and
grooved transversely.

Fore feet large, with five prominent
tubercles. Palms naked, claws short
and stout; thumb rudimentary, with a
convex, compressed nail.

Hind foot broad; soles with six tu-
bercles, of which five are subequal and
one much smaller. Hinder part of
sole densely hairy as far forward as the
posterior tubercle; anteriorly granu-
lar, with a considerable number of

Fic, 3. Side view of molars; : aRGs
upper figure Lvotomys, lower fig- short, white hairs interspersed among

ure Aschizomys (x 2$). the granules. Claws moderate, over-

hung with white hairs. Tail club-shaped. Whiskers long, reach-
ing to the shoulder.

Fur and color.—The fur is everywhere dense, soft and silky, that
on the back about 10 mm. in length; on the belly it is nearly as
long. Throughout the pelage the hairs are slate-gray at base. On
the back the slaty portion occupies about the basal two-thirds of the
hairs. Beyond this is a narrow subterminal band of pale yellowish
wood-brown. The extreme tips of the hairs are sepia. The result-
ing surface color is a fine grizzle of sepia and yellowish-brown, very
uniform throughout the dorsal surface. There is no indication of a
darker dorsal area, but the shading is slightly heavier across the
lumbar region than elsewhere. In front of each ear is an indistinct
tuft of whitish hairs. Sides, belly, all four feet and legs, and under
side of tail light straw-yellow, sharply defined from color of dorsal
surface.

This description can be only approximately correct, since it is
taken from the skin which had been immersed in alcohol for many
years.

Tail.—Before skinning, the tail was club-shaped, and in its pres-
ent condition it retains a trace of this form. For a short distance

‘From notes made by Mr. F. W. True before the specimen was removed
from alcohol.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 371

at base it is covered with short, loose hairs, similar in texture to
those of the body. Near the middle of the tail the hairs become
abruptly much elongated, stiffened and strongly directed backward.
The pencil thus formed is nearly as long as the tail
vertebre. It is distinetly flattened from above.
The general appearance of the tail is much like
that of Dicrostonyx, but it is even more bushy
than in average specimens of any lemming.

Skull—tIn general form the skull (fig. 1) is
much like that of Evotomys alascensis, though it is
considerably larger. The rostrum is more taper-
ing than in E. alascensis, and the rostral protuber-
ances,’ although apparently uninjured, are much
less conspicuous. The incisive foramen is consid-
erably shorter than in Evotomys alascensis or E.

Fic, 4. Inner wosnessenskii; audital bullze of about the same
side of left man- ‘ . P ag

dible viewed 2¢tual size as in the former, therefore relatively in-
slightly from be- termediate between the two. Mandible rather
pee jae more heavily built than in Evotomys alascensis.
lower figure As- § Teeth—Upper incisors relatively smaller than
chizomys. (x 3%). in Evotomys alascensis ; molars relatively, slightly
larger. Enamel pattern (fig. 2) apparently not essentially different
from that of the Arctic red-backed mice.’ The posterior upper molar
is, however, remarkably long. It has four distinct salient angles on
each side.

Measurements—Total length, 99 mm.; head and body, 85; tail
vertebra, 16; pencil, 14; hind foot, 17.5; ear from meatus, 11.5;
ear in dry skin, 8.3. J

Skull: greatest length, 25.4 mm.; basal length, 23.8; basilar
length, 22; zygomatic breadth, 14.8; interorbital breadth, 4;
mastoid breadth, 12.6; occipital depth, 7; fronto-palatal depth (at
middle of molar series), 7; length of nasals, 3; incisive foramen,
4.6; maxillary tooth row (alveoli), 6; mandible, 15; mandibular
tooth row (alveoli), 6.

I am permitted by the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution
to published this paper here.

5 See antea, p. 364.
6 See antea, p. 365, fig. 2, a-c.

372 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF ~ £1898.

BOTANICAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE MEXICAN FLORA, ESPECIALLY
ON THE FLORA OF THE VALLEY OF MEXICO.

BY JOHN W. HARSHBERGER, PH. D.

Leaving Philadelphia, Tuesday August 4, 1896, for a botanical
excursion to Mexico, the capital of the Republic was reached Tues-
day August 11th, at 6 p.m. Several stops were made en route, one
at St. Louis, where the Missouri Botanical Garden was visited, and
one at Eagle Pass, Texas, where Sunday was spent. During the
sojourn in the City of Mexico, numerous botanical trips were made
into the surrounding country in company with Mr. C. G. Pringle,
to whom I extend my most hearty.thanks for much kindness and
suggestive help. The itinerary is herewith given.

ITINERARY.

August 12, 1896, (Wednesday).—Visited a number of the lots in
the City of Mexico, where cattle and burros are allowed to roam at
will, and where a number of interesting plants were collected.

August 13th, (Thursday).—Mr. Pringle, Tranquelino Duran, a
Mexican boy, and the writer visited Salazar by the National Railroad.
Salazar is situated on the crest of the western mountain ridge,
known as the Sierra de las Cruces. Here was fought, in 1810, the
battle between Hidalgo and the Spaniards, resulting in a victory for
the patriots. Salazar is situated at an elevation of from 10,000 to
11,000 feet above sea level. Many cool springs gush from the hill-
sides, mostly denuded of timber, and many alpine plants were found
in the upland meadows.

August 15th, (Saturday).—Tlalpam was visited this days In
reaching this town, we passed through Cherubusco, made famous by
the fight there between the Americans and Mexicans. ‘Tlalpam is
a quiet suburban town of some 7,000 inhabitants, fourteen miles
south of the City of Mexico. There are many flower and fruit gar-
dens hereabouts, for the supply of the city markets; important fac-
tories of cotton, woollen cloth and paper are in the neighborhood.
The eastern road from Tlalpam leads to Lake Xochimilcho, where
we gathered the several interesting aquatics found on and near the

a ak re
7 :

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 373

chinampas. The botanist must needs hire a canoe to procure speci-
mens. The town is a veritable Venice.

August 17, (Monday).—The town and hills of Guadalupe, the
Cerro de Tepeyac and Cerro de Gachupines visited, and a number
of noteworthy plants collected. Guadalupe, some three miles north
of the capital, is reached by tram-cars from the Plaza Mayor, and
is interesting on account of the Sacred Chapel of Nuestra Sefiora de
Guadalupe.

August 18th, ( Tuesday).—An interesting locality visited this day
was that of LaCima near the summit of Ajusco at about 10,000
feet elevation. The hill above the Indian town afforded more plants
than could be conveniently carried. The pedregal in the neighbor-
hood also yielded a rich harvest.

August 20th, (Thursday).—This day was spent in the neighbor-
hood of Tlalpam, where the fields and ditches yielded a rich supply
of plants. The edge of the Tlalpam pedregal was visited, and the
interesting plants of the northern portion of the lava-bed collected
and noted.

August 22d, (Saturday). Another trip was made to the Tlalpam
pedregal and to the hills beyond. In the pedregal, Senecio praecoxr
DC., Cereus serpentinus and Wigandia were noted, and specimens
collected for future study at home,

August 25th, (Tuesday).—The pedregal of Tlalpam extending to
Tizapan, the lava bed was visited in the neighborhood of that town.
Here the plants were found in the same abundance as lower down
the mountain side, so that the pedregal in all its parts may be said
to be a veritable flower garden.

August 26th, (Wednesday).—The writer left the City of Mexico

. for the Mexican tropics, via the Mexican Railroad to Orizaba and

Cordoba; the next few days were spent amid the tropical luxuriance
of the Mexican flora. Epiphytie orchids and other interesting
plants were collected about Orizaba and in the neighborhood of the
waterfall called Rincon Grande.

August 29th, (Saturday).—Returned to the City of Mexico, where
the plants collected in the tierra caliente were preserved, some in
formalin, others by drying.

Angust 31st, (Monday).—Visited the Tlalpam pedregal on the
Mexican, Cuernavaca and Pacific Railroad at a much higher ele-
vation than formerly visited, at about 9,000 feet. Here Dahlias
were found in the greatest profusion and abundance. Returning

374 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

down the mountain side after a rough tramp over the pedregal, we
took a train for the City at Eslava, where a number of plants were
found.

September Ist, ( Tuesday).—Left the City of Mexico alone en route
for Guadalajara via Irapuato, where a number of days (September 2d
to September 5th) were spent. The celebrated barranca was visited
in company with an Indian, and a number of plants collected.

September 5th-September 9, 1596.—This time was profitably spent
in a trip to Tampico on the Gulf Coast.’ En route the beautiful
Tamasopo Cafion was admired, as also the extensive palm forests
about Rascon and eastward. No botanical exploration of the
country was made,

September 10, 1896.—Ciudad Juarez and El Paso were reached on
the homeward journey. A hasty botanical survey was made of the
hills about El Paso, but little of interest was found in the immediate
vicinage of the town, because of the extreme dryness of the season.

TOPOGRAPHY AND GEOGRAPHY OF THE PLACES VISITED.

The Valley of Mexico, situated 7,350 feet above the level of the
sea, is of an elliptical form with its long axis rupning in a north
and south direction. The greatest length of the valley according to
Orozco and Berra is from Cerro de Sincoque on the north to Cerro
del Teutli on the southern border of Lake Xochimilcho, a distance
of about 45 miles. The greatest breadth of the valley is from, the
Hacienda de los Morales, westward a distance of 21 miles. This
most beautiful of basin-shaped valleys is walled in by high hills and
lofty mountains on all sides. Sierra del Ajusco rises in a series of
ridges and peaks to the south, the highest point the voleano of
Ajusco, long since extinct, lifting its peak 13,612 feet above sea
level. In the east, this ridge of mountains sinks, and forms between
Amecameca and Ozumba,a broad saddle, over which passes the
railroad from the capital to the State of Morelos. The eastern
mountainous rim stretches itself as a mighty wall, separating the
Valley of Anahuac from Pueblo. It culminates in the southeast in
the voleanic peak of Popocatepetl (17,782 feet), and in Iztaccihuatl
along high broken mountain mass, 16,060 feet elevation. Contigu-
ous to Iztaccihuatllying to the north, we find the continuous ranges
called Cerro Telapon, Cerro Tlaloc, Cerro Tlamacas, Cerro Cha-

'See an article by the writer in Bot. Gazette, May, 1898, p. 362.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 375

pingo and the small Sierra de Patlachique—to the east as an outlier
in the Valley of Puebla, Monte de Rio Frio. These are all of vol-
eanic origin. About the north foot of Cerro Tlamacas spread the
the fruitful plains of Otumba and Apam. The railroad to Vera
Cruz crosses here.

The enclosure of the Valley of Mexico is completed to the west by
the Sierra de las Cruces, continued northward by the spurs called
Monte alto and Monte bajo, and ending finally in the Sierra de Tepot-
zatlan and Cerro de Sincoque, separated from the northern range of
hills by the railroad cut and drainage ditch, Tajo de Nochistongo.
The floor of the valley is generally level and uniform with six large
lakes filling the more depressed portions. Their size and elevation
in metres and square kilometers is given in the subjoined table:

io | T, 1862. | II, 1868.

Lake Texcoco.. . . . .| 182,495 sq.km. | —1,907m. | —0.85m.
Lake Chaleo. . . . . .| 104,985 sq.km. | +1,175m. | +2.16m.
Lake Xaltocan. . . . .| 54,072 sq.km. | +1,567m. | +2.05m.
Lake Xochimilcho . . .| 47,050 sq.km. +1,202m. | +2.16m.
Lake Zumpango.. . . . | 17,205 sq.km. | +4,155m. | +-5.75m.
Lake San Cristobal. . . = 11,060 sq. km. | -++1,690m. | +2.05m.

ast oem, HS.

_ 416,867 sq. km. |

The relative elevation, minus or plus, has been referred to the
base of one of the cornersof the National Palace on the Plaza Mayor,
as the zero level. During the diluvial period of geologic time the
lakes were very much more extended than now. The whole Valley .
of Mexico was filled by a large inland sea with here and there a vol-
eanic hill rising, as an island, or as a peninsula, out of its surface.
Texcoco was in the past quite saline. Fernando Cortez in a letter to
Charles V, dated 1500, says: ‘“ Enel dicho Ilano (del Valle de Mex-
ico) hay dos lagunas, que casi lo ocupan todo. E Ja una de estas
lagunas es de aqua dulce, y la otra, que es mayor, es de aqua salada.”
The earth of the plains surrounded Texcoco Lake is impregnated
with salt, and in many places the saline material forms a rich efflo-
rescence. ‘The flora of this region of the valley has a marked char-
acter. Various species of Chenopodium, Atriplex, Salsola and Grati-

376 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

ola are found growing here as saline plants. The chinampas are
the so-called floating islands, more especially found in Lake Xochi-
milcho.

A number of small conical voleanoes rise from the floor of the
valley, and are known locally as Cerro de taza (cupped hill, Kup-
pen). One remarkable collection of these low hills is to be found
in the neighborhood of the town of Guadalupe, separating the Val-
ley of Mexico into a northern and southern portion. These, the so-
called Sierra de Guadalupe, are connected with the western mount-
ain chain Monte bajo, by the low ridge Cuesta de Barrientos, and
with the north-eastern ridges by the Cerro de Chiconautla. The
northern half of the valley thus formed is occupied by Lakes Zum-
pango, Xaltocan and San Cristobal, the southern half by the three
lakes best known to travellers, Texcoco, Chaleo and Xochimilcho.

A few words are necessary as to the geography, topography and
geology of the region visited botanically. Cerro de Tepeyac, one of
the hills of the aforementioned Sierra de Guadalupe, is 140 ft. high ;
very few plants are found on this hill. If one ascends the east side, '
he finds for the first 115 ft. a fine crystalline rock of a dark violet-
gray color of a close texture frequently spotted with green, scaly,
porous particles. The summit of the hill is covered with a pitch-
stone-like rock formation about 16 to 26 ft. thick. By a rocky bridge,
Cerro de Tepeyac is connected with the Cerro Gachupines. Felix
and Lenk’ say of this hill; “ An dessen Abhang passirt man zun-
achst zwei, 5 bezw. 8 m. miichtige Pechsteinzonen, zwischen und
liber welchen der réthlichgraue, kérnige Andesit sich ausbreitet, der
die Hauptmasse des Berges ausmacht und in einigen Steinbriichen
zu industriellen Zwecken abgebaut wird.”

The pedregal of Tlalpam, or of San Angel is one of the most
interesting formations in the valley, covering an area of about
7,000 acres. The pedregal is an extinct lava stream situated, be-
tween the towns of San Angel and Tlalpam, and extending south-
ward up the sides of the Sierra del Ajusco to the hill called Chitle.
It was formed when the southern mountains were in active volcanic
eruption. The eye of the traveller sweeps unobstructedly over an
arid black landscape, which might be compared to the sudden stif-
fening of the rolling surface of the sea. The country is extremely
uneven and rugged; the coulee of lava is full of cracks, blisters,

21890. Felix and Lenk, Beitrige zur Geologie und Paliontologie der
Republik Mexico, I, 70.

_

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 377

caverns and sinks produced during the process of cooling. It is
raised into cones, presents most curious sinuosities, and is here and
there broken down into rugged jagged protuberances, as sharp and
cutting as a knife’s edge. This interesting coulee is from 33 to 50 ft.
thick over its greatest extent, and from 20 to 26 ft. thick along its
borders. Felix and Lenk’ give a very interesting and true descrip-
tion of this lava bed. “ Wogenberg erhebt sich neben Wogenthal ;
hier ist die Lava glatt und mit einer glinzenden Erstarrungskruste
tiberzogen, dort ist sie, wie der Gischt der Welle, schaumig und
schlackig. Deutlich kann man beobachten, wie die erstarrte Ober-
fliche haufig geborsten ist und auf den weitreichenden Rissen diinn
fliissigere Lavamassen emporgequollen sind, die yon den klaffenden
Spaltenrindern miachtige Blocke mitgerissen und nach kurzem
Transport zu chaotischen Triimmerhaufen aufgestaut haben.—
Ausser kleinen, einst durch die Gasentwicklung in der Lavamasse
entstandenen Hohlriumen, welche schliesslich zur kleinheit der
Dampfpore herabsinken, finden sich stellenweise in ihr auch geriiu-
mige mehrere cubikmeter haltende Grotten, welche genetisch wohl
als sogenannten ‘ Schlackensiicke’ zu betrachten sind. Durch spi-
teren der Einsturz Decken oder durch die bei Abkitihlung in Folge
der eintretenden Contraction aufgerissenen Spalten sind sie zum
Theilge6ffnet und bieten zahlreichen Fledermiusen Wobhnung, dem
Reisenden bei einbrechendem Unwetter schiitzendes Obdach.” The
lava of the Tlalpam pedregal is a typical hypersthene free basalt.
But that which concerns us most are the plants, which together
form a very rich and remarkable flora. Among the causes which
favored the development of this peculiar flora may be mentioned
the soil temperature, which is warm and uniform, owing to the soil
being a basaltic scoria in the protection of which a large number
of herbaceous plants flourish; the direction of the wind, the hu-
midity of the atmosphere of this region also favor a rich plant
growth. The pedregal is surrounded by high hills, protected thus
from the tempestuous winds of the north. Woods of pine, oak and
fir clothe the hillsides and serve as an additional protection. In this
region are found deep cafiadas, always damp and wet from abund-
ant water, which comes from numerous showers and the spray of
waterfalls which precipitate themselves from various heights. Asa
result of these factors, the climate of the pedregal is more temper-

31890. Felix and Lenk, 1. c., 79.
25

378 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

ate and more constant than that of the City of Mexico, or of the
Hacienda de Eslava, where a meteorological station has been estab-
lished. In consequence of the meteorological conditions, the ped-
regal supports a flora made up of many representatives of the tierra
fria, tierra templada and tierra caliente.

The Serrania de las Cruces is a continuation northwestward of
the Sierra del Ajusco. It is an elevated region, and by reason of
that elevation and exposure to the winds of the north and west pre-
sents a very distinct flora. One part of the region, that on the west
flanks of the Serrania del Ajusco, is very humid; the central por-
tion is more dry. Large forests of fir, Abies religiosa, once covered
the western side, but these are fast disappearing before the axe of
Mexican wood choppers. The higher elevations present a charac-
teristic alpine flora. Many of the places with an eastern exposure
are quite sterile, as to the abundance of plants found in such locali-
ties. :

- CATALOGUE OF SPECIES FROM THE VALLEY OF MEXICO.
A. Lots. City of Mexico.
FICOIDEZ.

1. Sesuvium portulacastrum Linn. Syst. ed X, 1,058; Jacq. Amer., t. 95, Biol.
Centr. Amer., I, 556.

North Mexico, South Mexico, Nicaragua. Common on the sea-

shores within the tropics. “ Verdolaga de Costa,” (Cuba). Aug.12

(1).
ONAGRACEZ.

2, Enothera rosea [Soland in] Ait. Hort. Kew. ed. I, ii, 3; DC. Prodr., III, 51;
Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 454.
Widely distributed through Mexico, extending into Texas; also
in Colombia and some of the West Indian Islands. Naturalized in
tropical Africa, India and the Canary Islands. Aug. 12 (8).

COMPOSIT &.

3. Aster Potosinus A. Gray in Proc. Amer. Acad., XV, (1880), 32; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., II, 122.

North Mexico, mountains of San Luis Potosi, 6,000 to 8,000 feet
(Parry & Palmer, 384). Aug. 12 (4).

‘Phe natural orders are arranged according to the Engler and Prantl sys-
tem. The species are according to the Index Kewensis with the aid of
Hems.ey’s Biologia Centrali Americana (Botany). See for a description of
the ecological plant regions of the Valley of Mexico an article by the writer:
“A Botanical Excursion to Mexico.’’ Amer. Journ, Pharm., 68, p. 588, and
the translation Una Excursion botdnica 4 México, E] Tiempo Diario Catolico,
Dec. 4, 1896.

v

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 379

4. Erigeron scaposus DC., Prodr., V, 287.
Aster rivularis Lees in Linnea, V, 143, excl. synon.

Widely distributed in Mexico. Aug. 12 (2).

B. Tlalpam Valley of Mexico.

SALICACEZ.

§. Salix Bonplandiana H. B. K., Noy. gen. et Sp., II, 24, tt. 101, 102; DC., Prodr.
XVI, 2, p. 200.

A tree found in several recorded districts in South Mexico. Along
roads leading from Tlalpam to Lake Xochimilcho, “ Sauce” (Mex-
ico). Aug. 15 (86).

NYCTAGINACEA.

6. Mirabilis Jalapa Linn., Sp. Pl., 177 ; Choisy in DC. Prodr., XIII, 2, p. 427; Lam.
Ill., Pl., t. 105; Bot. Mag., t. 371.

Roadsides near Tlalpam. Abundant in other parts of Mexico.
“ Maravilla” (Cuba); “ Marvel of Peru”; “Four o’clock ”;
“ False Jalap.” Aug. 15 (81).

CARYOPHYLLACE.

7. Arenaria lanuginosa Rohrb. in Mart. Fl, Bras., XIV, ii, 274; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., I, 69.
Arenaria alsinoides Willd. in Ges. Naturf. Fr. Berl. Mag., VII, (1813) 201.

Common from North Carolina to Mexico, southward to Peru and
Bolivia. Tlalpam, Aug. 22 (215).
ILLECEBRACEZ.

8. Corrigiola Andina Planch & Triana in Ann. Se. Nat. Sér., [V, XVII (1862) 146;
Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., III, 11.

Found in North and South Mexico and Colombia ; Tlalpam, Aug.
22 (220).
RANUNCULACEZ.

9. Ranunculus orthorhynchus Hook., Fl. Bor. Am., I, 21, t. 9; Biol. Centr. Amer.
But. 1, t-
Ranunculus dichotomus Mog et Sessé in DC, Syst. Veg. I, 288.

A widely distributed plant in Mexico. Ditches near Lake Xo-
chimilcho, Aug. 15 (80).
PAPAVERACES.

10. Argemone Mexicana Linn., Sp. Pl., 508; Lam. Ill, t. 452; Materia Medica
Mexicana, 153 (plate).

This is now a common weed in most tropical and sub-tropical
countries, flowering from April to October, and abundant in culti-

380 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

vated fields. Introduced with ballast into Philadelphia. It is used
by the bush doctors of the Bahamas according to Dolley® for the
small-pox. “Its seeds have been used elsewhere as a substitute for
Ipecacuanha, its juice is said to destroy warts, to be efficacious
against the bites of venomous serpents, and to be useful in opthal-
mia.”

“ El Chicalate ” ; “ Argemone du Mexique” ; “ Adormidera espi-
nosa,” Chicalotl (Mexico); “Cardo Santo” (Antilles, Cuba) ;
“Prickly-poppy”; “Mexican Poppy,” “ Yellow-thistle,” “ Fin
Bush.” Roadsides near Tlalpam, Aug. 15 (82).

CRUCIFERA.,
11. Raphanus Raphanistrum Linn., Sp. Pl., 669.

This plant is naturalized in Mexico, and occurs in the collections
of many travellers. ‘“ Wild Radish.” Aug. 20 (185).

12. Sisymbrium canescens Nutt., Gen. Am., IT, 68.

In North America from Arctic Circle to South Mexico. Tlal-
pam, Aug. 22 (221).

RESEDACE.
13. Reseda Luteola Linn. Sp. Pl., 449; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 46.

Without doubt an introduced plant. Tlalpam, Aug. 20 (186).

LEGUMINOSZ.
14. Phaseolus sp.

Near Tlalpam, Aug. 15 (103).

15. Trifolium amabile H. B. K. Nov. gen. et sp., VI, 503, t. 593; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., I, 232.

Abundant throughout Mexico. The several specimens collected
in 1896 are questionably referred to this species. Tlalpam, Aug.
20 (155).

GERANIACEZ.

16. Oxalis divergens Benth. Pl. Hartw., 9; Bot. Reg., t. 1,620; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., I, 163.
Collected by various botanists in several parts of Mexico along
ditches. Tlalpam, Aug. 20 (178).
17. Erodium cicutarium L’Herit ex Ait. Hort. Kew. ed. I, ii, 414; Leman in DC,
Fl. Fr., IV, 840; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 161.
Widely dispersed in the north temperate regions of the Old
World, and now exceedingly common in many parts of North Amer-

5 Dolley, Prov. List Plants of Bahama Islands.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 381

ica, but supposed to have been originally introduced by the Span-

iards. Collected by botanists in several places. Tlalpam fields,

Aug. 20 (183).
ANACARDIACEZ.

18. Schinus molle Linn. Sp. Pl., 388; Lam. IIl., t. $22; Biol. Cent. Am. Bot., I, 221.

Dispersed from country to country by the birds tzenzontles and
xilgueros, which eat the fruit and void the seeds. Found in Tropi-
eal America to South Brazil, occurring in the Andes at 12,000 to
13,000 feet. Supposed to have been introduced by the early Span-
iards in order to procure wood in the volcanic district (Christy).
Will bear droughts and the intense summer heat of Central Austra-
lia better than almost any introduced plant (Von Mueller). The
plant, which flowers from March to May in Mexico, occurs in the
Valley on the pedregal in saline soils, fertile soils and along the mar-
gins of Lake Texcoco. “El Arbol de Peru”; “ Pelonquahuitl” ;
“Copalquabuitl” ; “ Molle”; “ Pimientade America.” Roadsides
near Tlalpam, Aug. 15 (84).

MALVACEZ.

19. Sphaeralcea angustifolia G. Don. Gen. Syst., I, 465; Biol. Ceatr. Amer. Bot.,
I, 113.
Malva angustifolia Cay. Diss., I, 64, t. 20; Bot. Mag., t. 2,839.
Sphaeroma angustifolium Schi. in Linnwa, XI, 353.

Widely distributed in Mexico according to the collections of botan-
ists. Tlalpam, Aug. 20 (181).
LYTHRACEZ.
20. Cuphea sp.
Near ditches. Tlalpam, Aug. 15 (85).
21. Lythrum alatum Pursh. FJ. Am, Sept., I, 354; Biol. Cent. Am. Bot., I, 447.
From Canada southward, chiefly in the eastern and southern
States to South Mexico. Roadsides near Tlalpam, Aug. 15 (87).
ONAGRACEZ.

22. Cnothera rosea [Soland. in] Ait. Hort. Kew., ed. I, ii, 3.
(Repeated). Tlalpam, Aug. 20 (172).
PRIMULACEZ.
23. Anagallis arvensis Linn. Sp. Pl., 148; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 289,

A widely dispersed Old World plant naturalized, and common in
some parts of Mexico (Hemsley). Tlalpam, Aug. 22 (no number).

382 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

POLEMONIACE.

24, Cobwa scandens Cav, Ic., I, 11, t. 16, 17; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 358; Bot.
Mag., t. 851; Flore des Serres, t. 1,467.

Walls of gardens. Tlalpam, Aug. 20 (148).

LABIATA.,

25. Salvia Mexicana Linn. Sp. Pl., 25; DC, Prodr., XII, 337; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., II, 361; Cav. Ic., I, p. 16. t. 26.

Reported from a number of localities in North and South Mex-
ico. Tlalpam, Aug. 22 (222).

26. Salvia amarissima Orteg. Hort. Matr., Dec. 4; DC. Prodr., XII, 317; Bot.
Reg., t. 347; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 553.

Reported from several localities in Mexico. The specimens col-
lected in 1896 are doubtfully referred to this species, differing in
several respects, notably the rough hairs and long petioles from the
plant so named in the herbarium of the Academy of Natural Sci-
ences. It may be a variety, which I here propose, as variety petio-
laris n. var. Tlalpam, Aug. 22 (223).

SOLANACEZ.

27. Solanum Cervantesii Lag. Gen. et Sp., Nov. 10; Biol. Cent. Am. Bot., II, 406.
North and South Mexico. Roadsides near Tlalpam, Aug. 15
(83).
28. Solanum nigrum L., var. villosum Mill. §S. nigrum Linn. Sp. Pl., 186; Biol.
Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 412.
This species is a common weed in nearly all tropical and temper-
ate countries, but it is impossible to determine where it is really in-
digenous (Hemsley). Tlalpam (154).

29. Solanum cornutum Lam. [Illustr., II, 25; DC. Prodr., XIII, i, 328; Jacq.
Eclog., t. 104; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 407.

North and South Mexico. Tlalpam, Aug. 20 (180). Asa Gray
distinguishes S. cornutum by its simple, non-stellate hairs, otherwise
it is much like S. rostratum from Colorado.

30. Nicotiana glauca R. Grah. in Edinb. N. Phil. Journ. (Apr._June, 1828) 175 ;
Bot. Mag., t. 2,837; DC. Prodr., XIII, i, 562; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 434.

“This quickly growing arborescent species can be raised on mere
sand on the coast, as one of the best plants to establish shelter and
stay the shifting of the sand waves. There the poisonous quality of
its foliage is not objectionable. It is inadmissible to pastural places
on account of its deleteriousness” (Von Mueller). North and

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 383

South Mexico, Valley of Mexico. Roadsides near Tlalpam and
growing on walls and roofs of adobe houses.
PLANTAGINACEZ.

$1. Plantago hirtella H. B. K. Noy. Gen. et Sp., II, 229, t. 127; A. Gray, Synop.
Fl. N. Am., II, 392 ; Biol. Centr, Amer. Bot., II, 575.
California, Mexico, Chili. Tlalpam, Aug. 20 (153).
COMPOSIT.
$2. Eupatorium sp.

Tlalpam, Valley of Mexico, Aug. 20 (179).

_ $3. Heterotheca Lamarckii Cass. in Dict. Se. Nat., XXI, 130; DC. Prodr., V, 317;

8. Wats., Proc. Am. Acad., XVIII, 102; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., IV, 52.
South Carolina, westward and southward, North Mexico, Monte-
rey, Nuevo Leon. Tlalpam, Aug. 20 (182).

$4. Heterospermum pinnatum Cav. Ic., III, 34, t. 267; Willd., Sp. PI., III, 2,129;
Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 195.

North and South Mexico, collected by a number of botanists.
Tlalpam, Aug. 20 (219).
$5. Schkuhria virgata DC. Prodr., V, 654; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 212.

North Mexico, region of San Luis Potosi, 6,000 to 8,000 feet (Parry
& Palmer); South Mexico, Guanajuato (Mendez) ; near Tacubaya
(Schaffner) ; Chapultepec (Bilimek); Guatemala. Tlalpam, Aug.
22 (214).

C. Lake Xochimilcho, Valley of Mexico.
MARSILIACEZ.

36. Marsilia heterophylla?

Ditches near Xochimilcho, Aug. 15 (78).

ALISMACZE.

$7. Sagittaria sagittifolia Linn. var. Mexicana, Mart. et Gal.

S. sagittifolia Linn., Sp. Pl., 993; Biol, Centr. Amer. Bot., ILI, 439; var.
Mexicana Mart. et Gal. in Bull. Acad, Brux., IX, 8; Micheli in DC.
Monogr. Phanerog., ILI, 66.

Lake Xochimilcho on wet chinumpas, Aug. 15 (92).
CYPERACEZ.
$8. Cyperus unioloides R. Br. Prodr. F!. N. Hall., 216; Clarke in Journ. Linn, Soe.,
ats 61

Cyperus bromoides Willd. ex Link, III, 85; Kunth. Enum. PI. LI, 8.

Found in South Mexico, Guatemala, Venezuela and Paraguay.
Other varieties of this species are found in India, Australia and
South Africa. Lake Xochimilcho on chinampas, Aug. 15 (93).

384 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

ERIOCAULONESA.
39. Eriocaulon Benthami Kunth Enum., Pl. III, 545; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot.,
IIT, 443; Koern in Mart. Fl. Bras., III, 490.

Recorded from South Mexico and Guatemala. Lake Xochimil-
cho on chinampas, Aug. 15 (97).

PONTEDERIACES.
40. Eichornia azurea Kunth Enum., Pl. [V, 129; Solms in DC. Monogr. Phanerog.,
IV, 528; Abhandl. Naturf. Gesell., Halle, VI, 177, cum icon.; But. Mag., t. 6,487,

Pontederia azurea Swartz, Fl. Ind. oce., I, 609.

Common over Tropical and Extra-tropical South America and
the West Indies. Closely similar to the water hyacinth Piaropus
(Pontederia, Eichornia) speciosa Kunth, a native of South Amer-
ica. Whether this plant is indigenous to the canals and lakes of
the Valley of Mexico is a question ; at any rate it is very abundant
in many of the ditches in the City of Mexico, and is also found
abundantly floating about in Lake Xochimilcho. The related
Water Hyacinth is extremely troublesome to navigation in the riv-
ers of Florida.*

Lake Xochimilcho, Aug. 15 (88).

POLYGONACESA.
4l. Polygonum amphibium Linn., Sp. Pl., 361; DC. Prodr., XIV, 115; A. Gr,
Man. Bot. ed. 5, 416; FI. Dan., t. 282.
A very widely dispersed species in the temperate and subtropical |
regions of the N. Hemisphere. Lake Xochimilcho on the edge of
the chinampas, Aug. 15 (91).

NYMPHAEACEZ.

42, Nymphea Mexicana Zuce. in Abh. Akad. Muench., I, (1832), 365; Flora (1832)
II; Beibl, 75; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 26.
The flowers of this plant are straw-yellow. Lake Xochimilcho,
Aug. 15 (100).
43. Nymphea tussilagifolia Lehm., Ind. Sem. Hort. Hamb, (1853), 10; Ann. Se.
Nat., ser. 4, Vol. I, 326.
Collected by Lehman in Lake Chalco near Yotla, also found in
the Amazon. The flowers of this handsome water lily are white.
Lake Xochimilcho, Aug. 15 (101).

®See the Water Hyacinth and its Relation to Navigation in Florida, Bull.
18, Div. of Bot. U. S. Dept. Agric., H. J. Webber.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 385

RANUNCULACE.

44. Ranunculus Cymbalaria Pursh. Fl. Am. Sept., II, 392; DC. Syst. I, 252;
Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 16. .

Distributed from Canada to the Argentine Republic, also in
Northern Asia and Europe. Ditches near Lake Xochimilcho,
Aug. 15 (79).

SCROPHULARIACEZ.

45. Escobedea (linearis) laevis Cham & Schlecht in Linnwa, V, (1830), 108; DC.
Prodr., X, p. 337; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 456, also plate.

Recorded from a number of localities in South Mexico. Lake
Xochimilcho on the chinampas. Flowers white. Aug. 15 (90).

LOBELIACE,

46. Lobelia fulgens Willd. Hort. Berol., t. 85; DC. Prodr., VII, 382; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot.. II, 267.

Lobelia splendens Willd., Hort. Berol., t. 86; A. Gr., Synop. Fl. N. Am. II,
3; Bot. Mag., t. 4,960 (var. ignea).

From Texas to Panama throughout Mexico. Lake Xochimilcho
on chinampas, Aug. 15 (89).

COMPOSITE.
47. Solidago paniculata DC. Prodr., V, 340; Biol. Centr. Amer, Bot., II, 116.
S. Mexicana H, B. K., Nov. Gen, et. Sp., LV, 104?
Lake Xochimilcho on chinampas, Aug. 15 (95).
48. Cnious linearifolius Watson.
Lake Xochimilcho on chinampas, Aug. 15 (99).

49. Bidens chrysanthemoides Michx. Fl. Bor. Am., II, 136; Torr. & Gr., Fl. N.
Am., II, 352; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., IT, 201.

Common from Canada throughout the United States east of the
Rocky Mountains and in Arizona, California and North Mexico,
Lake Xochimilcho on chinampas, Aug. 15 (102).

D. Cerro de Guadalupe, Valley of Mexico.

LILIACEZs.
50. Milla biflora Cav. Ic., II, 76, t. 196; 8. Watson, Proc. Am. Acad., XIV, 240,
et XVIII, 165; Bot. Reg.,t. 1,555.
Found in New Mexico, South Arizona, North and South Mexico.
Cerro de Guadalupe growing on exposed rocky faces of the bill in
small soil pockets, Aug. 18 (108).

386 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

PORTULACACES.
51. Talinum aurantiacum Engelm. in Bost. Jour. Nat. Hist., VI, (1850), 153 ; Biol.
Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 78.
Texas and New Mexico to North and South Mexico in sandy
places. Cerro de Guadalupe on rock faces,’ Aug. 18 (106).
52. Talinum patens Willd. Sp. Pl., II, 863; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 79.
North and South Mexico, also in South America, West Indies

and some of the Pacific Islands. Cerro de Guadalupe on rock
faces, Aug. 18 (109).

GERANIACEA,

58. Oxalis decaphylla H. B. & K. Gen. et Sp., V, 238, t. 468; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., I, 163.

Texas to North Mexico to South Mexico. This oxalid shows
great senstivity to light, in that its leaves assume the hot sun posi-
tion in the same manner in which they show nyctitropie, or sleep
movements. Each of the ten leaflets arranged at the end of the com-
mon petiole in a circular manner, first fold the two halves on each
side of the midrib back to back, and then they all fold down to-
gether like the closing of an umbrella. Cerro de Guadalupe, Aug.
18 (107).

CACTACEZ.

54. Mammillaria strobiliformis Scheer ex Salm. Dyck. Cact. Hort. Dyck., ed. II,.
104; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 524.

Collected by Potts in Chihuahua. I refer the plant collected by
me doubtfully to this species. Cerro de Guadalupe, Aug. 18.

BIGNONIACEZ:.

55. Tecoma mollis H. B. K. Noy. Gen. et. Sp., III, 144; DC. Prodr., IX, 224; Biol.
Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 496. «

North and South Mexico. Cerro de Guadalupe, Aug. 18.

E. Pedregal near Tlalpam. Valley of Mexico.

6. Selaginella lepidophylla Sering. Monogr. Lycopod. II, 72; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., III, 707.

Texas through Mexico, southward to Peru. One of the so-called
resurrection plants. In normal grown condition, the leaves and

7See An Ecological Study of the Genus Talinum with Descriptions of Two
Species, Bull. ‘Torrey Botan. Club, XXIV, p. 182, Apr., 1897, J. W. Harsh-
berger.

*

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 387

branches are outspread, and the plant becomes mortar-shaped ; when
dry it rolls up and may preserve this form for years. If again
wetted it unrolls.

Abundant on faces and sides of the lava. Pedregal near Tlalpam,
Aug. 20 (190).

57. Polypodium sp.
Pedregal near Tlalpam, Aug. 20 (164).
58. Notholaena ferruginea Desy. Hook, Sp. Fil. V, 108; Eaton Ferns N. Am., I,
297 t. 39, figs. 7-10; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., ILI, 673.
Texas, New Mexico, Arizona, North and South Mexico, West
Indies and Colombia to Chili.
Bare faces of rocks, pedregal, Aug. 22 (208).
59. Cheilanthes myriophylla Desy. Hook, Sp. Fil., II, 100, t. 105 A; Biol. Centr.
Amer., ITI, 616.
North and South Mexico reported from several localities and the
pedregal by Bourgeau ; in Peru and Chili.
Bare rocks, pedregal, Aug. 22 (207).
GRAMINEZ.

60. Bouteloua prostrata Lag. in Varied. Cienc., ii, [IV (1805) 141; Gen. et. Sp.
Nov. 5th; S. Wats. in Proc. Am. Acad., XVIII, 176; Biol. Cent. Am. Bot.,
ITI, 562.

“This annual grass is widely distributed from Mexico to Colo-
rado, prevailing in bottom land, where it frequently mats the ground
but does not seem to be relished by cattle ’’ (Vasey).

North and South Mexico, Colombia and Ecuador. Pedregal,
Aug. 20 (156).

61. Microchloa setacea R. Brown, Prodr., I, 208; S. Wats., Proc. Amer. Acad.,
XVIII, 176; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., ITI, 557.

Reported from North Mexico southward to Bolivia and Brazil.
Also in North Australia, tropical Africa and Asia.

Hills near Tlalpam, pedregal, Aug. 22 (204).

CYPERACEZ.

62. Cyperus seslerioides H. B. K. Nov. Gen. et Sp. I, 209; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot.,
IIT, 451.

Reported in North and South Mexico, also on the Orinoco.
Pedregal, Aug. 22 (196).
COMMELINACEZs.

63. Commelina scabra Benth. PI, Hartw., 26; C. B. Clarke in DC, Monogr. Phane-
rog., III, 153 Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., ITI, 389.

FILICES.

South Mexico in several places. Pedregal, Aug. 22 (218).

388 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

LILIACE.

64. Milla biflora Cav. Ic., II, 76 t. 196.

Pedregal, Aug. 20 (repeated).
65. Calochortus flavus Schult. f. Syst., VII, 1535; Biol. Cent. Am. Bot., III, 380.

Reported in both North and South Mexico. The flowers have
large nectar glands on the petals guarded by hairs.

Pedregal, Aug. 20 (161).

ORCHIDACEZ.

66. Habenaria filifera Wats.

Collected by Mexican botanists on Sierra de Ajusco at Eslava,
8,000 feet. Pedregal, Aug. 22.

CUPULIFERSA.

67. Quercus undulata Torr. var, grisea Engelm. Q. undulata in Ann. Lye. N. York,
IT, (1828) 248, t. 4.
A low-growing, scrubby tree, used for fire-wood. Pedregal, Aug.
22 (195).
PORTULACACEZ.
68. Talinum napiforme DC. (Char. amplif.) Hemsley, Diag. Pl. Nov. pars altera.,
23; DC. Prodr., III, 357; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 79; Bull. Torrey Bot.
Club, XXIV, 183, t. 299.
Described from drawing made by DC. of the species. Pedregal,
Aug. 20 (166).
CARYOPHYLLACESA.

69. Drymaria gracilis Cham. & Schlecht. in Linnaea, V (1830) 232; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., I, 73.

South Mexico. Pedregal, Aug. 22 (199).

RANUNCULACEA.
70. Clematis dioica Linn. Syst. ed. X, 1084; Sloane, Hist. Jam., I, 199, t. 128, fig.
1; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 2.
Recorded in several places in South Mexico, also found in Brazil,
Colombia and West Indies, “ Cabello de Angel” (Cuba).
Pedregal, Aug. 20 (162).

LEGUMINOS#.
71. Phaseolus sp.

Pedregal near Tlalpam, Aug. 20th (187).
72. Zornia diphylla Pers. Syn., II, 318; Benth in Mart. Fl. Bras., XV, 80 tt., 21,

22; Biol. Centr, Amer. Bot., I, 273.
A very variable plant, common in most tropical and subtropical
regions throughout the world, and occurring in nearly all collections

@ we

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 389,

from Panama, Costa Rica, Nicaragua, Guatemala and Mexico. The
two leaflets usually assume the hot sun position standing up verti-
cally back to back. When the gi is in flower, these serve to en-
close the blossom.

Pedregal on exposed Java in Sbtitia Aug. 20 (167).
73. Eysenhardtia amorphoides H. B. & K. Nov. Gen. et Sp., VI, 489 t. 592.

From New Mexico, Texas, through North to South Mexico.
“Palo dulce blanco ;” “ Coatle.” Used as a succedaneum for san-
dal-wood. Pedregal, Aug. 22 (197).
74. Crotalaria pumila Orteg. Hort. Matr., 23; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 228.

From New Mexico to South Mexico. Pedregal, Aug. 22 (217).
75. Phaseolus sp.

Pedregal, Aug. 22 (212).

EUPHORBIACE.,

76. Acalypha phleoides Cav. in Anal. Hist. Nat. Madr., II (1800) 139; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., III, 127.

Abundant in two varieties through Mexico, The plant collected
in 1896 in the Valley of Mexico is doubtfully referred to this spe-
cies. Pedregal, Aug. 22 (203).

77. Euphorbia adenoptera Bertol. Misc. Bot., III, 20, t. 23; DC. Prod., XV, 2, 49.

Distributed from Florida, Texas, New Mexico to South Mexico,
West Indies and South America. Doubtfully referred by me to
this species. Pedregal, Aug. 22 (202).

SAPINDACE.
78. Cardiospermum Halicacabum Linn. Sp. PI. 366; Biol. Cent. Am. Bot., I, 209.

A very common plant in tropical and subtropical regions of both
hemispheres. It was difficult for me to distinguish my plant from
C. molle, which it closely resembles. North and South Mexico.
Pedregal, Aug. 20, climbing over other plants (159).

MALVAOEAE.

79. Malvastrum Peruvianum A. Gray. Bot. U.S. Explor. Exped., I, 146; Biol.
Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 99.

Pedregal, Aug. 22 (224).
CACTACEZ.

80. Cereus serpentinus DC. Prodr. III, 467; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., 546; Bot.
Mag,, t. 35, 66.

South Mexico, used occasionally for forming hedges. Pedregal,'
Aug. 22.

390 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

UMBELLIFERZ.
81. Eryngium comosum Delar. Eryng. 30, t. 7; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot. I, 560.

Recorded from a number of stations in South Mexico. Pedregal,

Aug. 22 (211).
ASCLEPIADACEZ.

82. Asclepias neglecta Hemsley. Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 325.

Recorded from South Mexico by a number of botanists. The
specimens collected in 1896 doubtfully referred to this species.
Hills above Tlalpam portion of pedregal, Aug. 22 (194).

83. Aselepias Linaria Cav. Ic., I, 42, t. 57; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 324; DC.
Prodr., VIII, 570.

North and South Mexico. Pedregal, Aug. 20 (165).
84. Philibertia elegans Hemsl. Biol. Centr. Amer, Bot., II, 318.

Recorded from a number of localities in South Mexico. A climb-
ing or trailing plant. Pedregal, Aug. 20 (188).

PLUMBAGINACES.

85. Plumbago pulchella Boiss. in DC. Prodr., XII, 692; Biol. Cent. Am. Bot., II, 287.

From North to South Mexico. Used by the Mexican Indians to
raise blisters, cure toothache and the running of the eyes (Materia
Medica Mexicana, p. 79, fig.) ‘‘ El Pafiete” ; “ Jiricua” ; “ Tlepatli’” ;
“Yerba del alacrin”’; ‘‘ Cola depescado”; “Cola de iguana” ;
“ Yerba lumbre.” Pedregal, Aug. 22 (213).

CONVOLVULACE.

86. Ipomoea longipedunculata Hemsl. Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 389.

Pedregal, Aug. 20 (175).

VERBENACEZ.

87. Priva tuberosa S. Wats. in Proc. Amer. Acad., XVIII (1883) 135.

Pedregal near Tlalpam, Aug. 22 (198).

LABIATZ.

88. Mentha rotundifolia Huds. FI. Angl. ed. I, 221; Biol. Cent. Am. Bot., IT, 546.

Naturalized in some parts of Mexico. Found also in Europe,
Asia, and Northern Africa. Pedregal, Aug. 22 (221a).

SOLANACEZ.

89. Nectouxia formosa H. B. & K. Nov. Gen. et Sp., III, 10,t. 193; Biol. Centr.

Amer. Bot., II, 425.
This herbaceous monotype has been collected in a number of
places in Mexico. The fruit is eaten. Pedregal, Aug. 20.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 591

90. Solanum bulbocastanum Dun. in Poir Encyc. Suppl., III, 749; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., II, 405.

Pedregal, Aug. 22 (209).
SCROPHULARIACE.

91. Pedicularis Mexicana Zuce. ex Bunge in Bull. Phys. Math. Acad. Petersb., I,
(1843) 384; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 467.

Pedregal, Aug. 20 (184).
92. Lamourouxia rhinanthifolia H. B. & K, Nov. Gen. et Sp., II, 337, t. 169;
Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 466.
Collected in quite a number of places through Mexico. Pedre-
gal, Aug. 22 (193).
ACANTHACEZ.
93. Calophanes decumbens A. Gr. Syn. Fl. N. Am., II, i, 325; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot. IT, 502. :
From Texas, Arizona to the Valley of Mexico. Pedregal, Aug.
22 (200).
94. Ruellia sp.
On hills above pedregal near Tlalpam, Aug. 22 (205).

COMPOSIT ZA.
95. Tagetes lucifer Cav. Ic., III, 33, t. 264; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 222; DC.
Prodr. V, 643; Bot. Mag., t. 740.

Extending from Texas through North to South Mexico. Col-
lected by Bourgeau in pedregal. “ Pericon.” pedregal, Aug. 20
(192).

96. Dahlia coccinea Cav. Ic., III, 33, t. 266; Bot. Mag., t. 762; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., IT, 196.

Collected by Bourgeau in the Valley of Mexico. This plant has
a northerly and extensive distribution. “ From the Cordilleras of
Chihuahua, within 200 miles of the United States boundary, it
ranges southward through the mountains to Jalisco and the Valley
of Mexico. It shows a remarkable variation in color from cardinal
of several shades, through scarlet, scarlet-orange, mandarin, orange,
lemon-yellow, yellow. ‘The so-called scarlet-orange rays are scarlet
with lines of yellow running through, so that the strap-shaped
corolla has a somewhat banded appearance. The ligulate corolla is
about an inch long and half an inch broad. ‘The entire head varies
in size from two inches in the cardinal ones to three inches in the
scarlet-orange.” (See my article “ The Native Dahlias of Mexico,”
Science n. s. VI, 909, Dec. 17, 1897).

Pedregal near Tlalpam, Aug. 20 (160),

392 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.
97. Zinnia pauociflora Linn. Sp. Pl. ed. IT, 1,269; Lam. IIL, t. 685, f.1; Biol. Centr.
Amer, Bot., IIT, 154; Amer. Acad. Arts & Sci., XXXIT, 19.

Mexico, Andes of Peru, Bolivia, St. Thomas, W. I., and intro-
duced into W. Africa and Cape Verde Islands. Pedregal, Aug. 20
(157).

98. Zexmenia aurea Benth & Hook, f. Gen., II, 371, in nota sub Wedelia; Biol.
Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 172.

Pedregal, Aug. 22 (191).

99. Tagetes micrantha Cav. Ic., IV, 31, t. 352; DC. Prodr., V, 646; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., II, 222.

Recorded by a number of botanists from Arizona and Texas
southward to Costa Rica. Pedregal, Aug. 22 (201).

100. Pectis prostrata Cav. Ic., IV, 12, t. 324; DC., Prodr., V, 100; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., II, 226.

Collected in Florida, New Mexico, Mexico, Colombia and the
West Indies (Cuba). “ Romero macho” (Cuba); Pedregal, Aug.
22 (210).

101. Stevia Eupatoria Willd. Sp. Pl., III, 1,775; Bot. Mag., t. 1,849; Biol. Centr,
Amer. Bot., II, 86.

The specimens resemble Stevia linoides Schult. Bip., although the
inflorescence is flatter and more compact. The plant is, therefore,
doubtfully referred to the above named species; North and South
Mexico. Pedregal, Aug. 22 (206).

101b. Senecio praecox DC., Prodr., VI, 431.
Senecio praecox is a composite plant inhabiting the voleanic beds

in the Valley of Mexico. It has a cylindrical stem rising three or °

four feet from the ground with clustered, deeply lobed leaves at the
top. The plant stores up an abundant supply of water in the pith,
which is gradually used up during the dry season in Mexico, which
lasts from October to June. The flowers develop in April at the
expense of the reserved supply of water. Loss of water during the
dry season is prevented by the fall of the leaves, and by the protec-
tive cork and balsam secreted in the exo- and endocortex. The
water stored in the turgid discs of pith is gradually conducted by
the woody cells and tracheids, which penetrate into the medulla by
wedge shaped ingrowths, representing the primary bundles, to the
growing point where it is used. That this is the case, is shown by
the dry parchment-like pith membranes, which were left in a piece
of a stem which had remained in the dry state for over sixteen

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 393

months. Conduction of water in this stem was accomplished with-
out the aid of root pressure, without any appreciable influence on
the part of the small green leaves in drawing up the liquid by the
pumping action of transpiration.®

Pedregal near Tlalpam, Aug. 22.

F. Pedregal near Tizapan, Valley of Mexico.

Tizapan is a suburban village of the City of Mexico, much higher
in elevation above the floor of the valley than Tlalpam, which lies
to the northwest of Tlalpam. The pedregal near Tizapan presents
the same rugged characters as elsewhere. Along its edge, here,
runs the small stream known as Rio Cherubusco. The region
shows the same profusion of flowering plants as elsewhere in the

dregal.
9 FILICES.

102. Pellwa gracilis.
Pedregal, 7,500-8000 feet, Aug. 25 (334).

COMMELINACEZ.

103. Tradescantia crassifolia Cav. Ic., I, 54, t. 75; Bot. Mag., t. 1,598; Biol.
Centr. Amer. Bot., III, 391.

North and South Mexico, pedregal (Bourgeau). Pedregal, 7,500
-8000 feet, Aug. 25 (227).

DIOSCOREACE.
104. Dioscorea sp.

Pedregal, 7,500-7,800 feet, Aug. 25 (440).
PORTULACACEZ.
°105. Calandrinia grandifiora Lindl. Bot. Reg., t. 1,194.
Pedregal, 7,500-7,800 feet, Aug. 25 (337).
LEGUMINOSZ5.
106. Eysenhardtia amorphoides H. B. & K. Novy. Gen. et. Sp., VI, 489.
Pedregal, 7,500-7,800 feet, Aug. 25.
107. Zornia diphylla Pers. Syn., IT, 318.
Pedregal, 7,500-7,800 feet, Aug. 25.

108. Cassia sp.
Pedregal, 7,500-7,800 feet, Aug. 25.

®See abstract of pope Water Storage and Conduction in Senecio praecox s
from Mexico, read at Soc. Botanical Physiologists and Morphologists at Cor-
nell University, in Bot. Gaz., Feb., 1898, p. 116, also Science, n, s., vii, p. 120.

26

394 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

109. Indigofera sp.
Pedregal, 7,500-7,800 feet, Aug. 25.
SAPINDACEZ:.

110. Dodonwa viscosa Jacq. Enum. PI. Carib., 19; Linn. Mant., 228; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., I, 215.

Collected by Dr. José Ramirez on the pedregal at Eslava. A
plant found in nearly all tropical, sub-tropical and south temperate
regions throughout the world, and very common in Central America
and Mexico. I doubtfully refer the plant collected to this species.

“ Chapulistle;” “ Limonillo.” Pedregal, Aug. 25 (276).

SOLANACEZ:.

111. Solanum nigrum Linn. Sp. Pl., 186; DC. Prodr., XIII, i, 50; Biol. Centr,
Amer. Bot., IT, 412.

A common weed in nearly all tropical and temperate countries ;
but it is impossible to determine where it is really indigenous. Col-
lected by Dr. José Ramirez at Eslava 8,725 feet. Tizapan ped-
regal, Aug. 25.

COMPOSITA.
112. Dahlia coccinea Cav. Ie., III, 33, t. 266.
Tizapan pedregal, 7,500-7,800 feet (228 a. See ante).

G. Contreras.

Contreras is a station on the Mexico, Cuernavaca and Pacific
Railroad 17.5 miles from the City of Mexico. The following plants
were collected while the train stopped.

PHY TOLACCACEZ.

113. Phytolacca octandra Linn. Sp. Pl., ed. II, 631; DC. Prodr., XIII, ii, 32;
3iol. Centr. Amer. Bot., III, 30.

South Mexico and southward to Peru and Uruguay, and in the
West Indies. Aug. 18 (114).
SOLANACEA.

114. Physalis pubescens Linn. Sp. Pl., 183; Griseb. Fl. Br. W. Ind., 435; Biol.
Centr. Amer., III, 420.

Generally dispersed in tropical America, Aug. 18 (113).
H. Eslava.

The Hacienda of Eslava and the village of that name are dis-
tant from the City of Mexico 19 miles. The pedregal, which

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 395

here reaches its northern limit, is elevated 2,500-3,500 metres
(8,000-11,800 feet). The flora presents a greater richness than lower
down, the region being protected from the cold winds, which blow
over the valley, by the forests of oak and pine and by the high hills
to the west and north. It is, therefore, warmer.

CONIFER.

115. Pinus leiophylla Schlecht & Cham.in Linnea, VI, (1832), 354; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., , ILI 187.

Collected by a number of botanists in different parts of Mexico.
Peak of Orizaba, 7-9,000 feet (Linden) ; Pedregal and Cafiada de
Tizapan (Christy). Called “ Pino;” “ Ocotechino” by the Mexi-
cans. Eslava pedregal 8-10,000 feet, Aug. 31 (396).

AMARYLLIDACEA.,
116. Agave megalacantha Hemsl. Diag. Pl. Nov. Mex.,3,55; Tab. LAXXVIII, A.
Eslava pedregal, 9,000 feet, Aug. 31 (400). (Collected by

Bourgeau here).
CUPULIFERZ.

117. Quercus reticulata Humb. Bonpl. Fl. Mquin., II, 40, t. 86; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., III, 176.

Collected in several parts of South Mexico. Peak of Orizaba,
8,000 to 10,000 feet (Liebmann) ; San Angel (Bourgeau), ete.; Es-
lava pedregal, 8-10,000 feet, Aug. 31 (394).

LEGUMINOSZ.
118. Lupinus sylvaticus Hemel. Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 231.

North ‘and South Mexico, Valley of Mexico, Desierto Viejo (Bour-
ie Eslava pedregal, 9,000 feet, Aug. 31.

RHAMNACES.

119. Ceanothus azureus Desf. Tabl. ed. II, 252; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 199;
Bot. Reg., t. 291.

Recorded from a number of localities in Mexico, and collected by
Dr. José Ramirez at Eslava, 8,830 feet; a very ornamental plant
in flower. “Sayolistle;” ‘“ Cuaicuastle.” Eslava pedregal, 10,000
feet, Aug. 31 (393).

OROBANCHACEZ.

120. Conopholis Mexicana A. (ray ex 8. Wats. in Proc, Amer, Acad., XVIIT,
(1882-83), 131.

Really not distinct from C. Americana Wallr., which ranges from ‘
New England to Michigan and Florida. Eslava pedregal, 9,000
feet; parasitic on roots of oak. Aug. 31.

396 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

RUBIACEA.
121, Crusea brachyphylla Cham. & Schlecht in Linnwa, V, (1830), 165; Biol, Centr.
Amer. Bot., II, 57.
South Mexico, peak of Orizaba at 7,000 feet; Eslava pedregal,
8-10,000 feet, Aug. 31 (399).

COMPOSIT&.

122. Dahlia Merckii Lehm. Delect. Sem. Hort. Hamb. (1839), ex Linnwa, XIV,
(1840) 130; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 197.

North Mexico, region of San Luis Potosi,6,000 to 8,000 feet (Parry
& Palmer); South Mexico, Real de Monte (Coulter), summit of a
mountain near Guadalupe (Bourgeau). This dahlia is one of the
showy species; the color of its flowers runs from purple to pure
white through the gradual fading out of the purple color. One
most commonly sees in a state of nature the white heads, which are
tinted with lavender or pale purple at the base of the ray floret.
The heads in each case are nearly uniform in size, being about an
inch and three-fourths across. (See an article of mine, “ The Na-
tive Dahlias of Mexico,” Science n. s., VI, 910, Dec. 17, 1897).

Eslava pedregal, Aug. 31; 10,000 feet.
123. Dahlia coccinea Cav. Ic., IIT, 33, t. 266.

Eslava pedregal, 10,000 feet, Aug. 31; (see ante).
124. Dahlia variabilis Desf. Cat. Hort. Par., ed. III, 182.

This dahlia is confined to the region around, including the Val-
ley of Mexico. It is a most striking plant, growing from 5 to 6 feet
tall, and bearing flowers ranging in color from purple to sulphur-
yellow through the following gradations: lavender-purple, helio-
trope, heliotrope-yellow (various shades of lighter and lighter hue
approaching yellow), sulphur-yellow. The heads in which the ray
florets are colored heliotrope-yellow, are in reality of an heliotrope
color, the bases of the ligulate corolla being of a yellow color, shad-
ing off into heliotrope. They are broad (1 inch), long (2 inches)
and ovate spatulate. See “ The Native Dahlias of Mexico,” (Science
n. 8., VI, 909, Dec. 17, 1897).

Eslava pedregal, 10,000 feet, Aug. 31 (390).

125. Cosmos sp.

Eslava pedregal, 9,000 feet, Aug. 31 (384).
126. Stevia nudiflora.

Eslava pedregal, 9,000 feet, Aug. 31 (385).

aa

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 397

127. Stevia sp.
Eslava pedregal, 9,000 feet, Aug. 31 (386).

I. La Cima. Summit of Sierra del Ajusco.

La Cima is an Indian town 38 miles from the city of Mexico
on the crest or summit of the Sierra del Ajusco at about 11,000
feet above sea level. It is, therefore, about 2,000 feet lower than
the Cerro Grande del Ajusco, or voleanic cone (13,612 feet). It
was from this extinct crater, that the great pedregal of Tlalpam
and many of the smaller pedregals were formed by lava flows in
prehistoric times. The pedregal of La Cima is lower than the town,
which consists of a few adobe huts. It presents the same rugged
features, as those of the great lava bed between San Angel and Tlal-
pam, which has been already fully described. Most of the plants
mentioned in the accompanying list are from the hill overlooking
and directly above the town on the east side of the railroad. The
soil of this hill is of a rich black character and is marked by many
foot paths running in every direction.

; CONIFER.
128. Juniperus tetragona Schlecht in Linnwa, XII (1838) 495; DC. Prodr., XVI,
ii, 491; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., III, 184.

Reported from North Mexico in the Sierra Madre to South
Mexico and ascending on the peak of Orizaba to the limits of vegeta-
tion 12,000 to 14,000 feet. Pedregal, La Cima, Sierra del Ajusco,
11,000 feet, Aug. 18 (125).

129. Pinus Montezume Lamb. Gen. Pin. ed., I, iii, 149, t. 64; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., III, 188.

A plant of many synonyms; it stretches from North to South
Mexico, extending to timber line on Orizaba, Popocatepetl and
Iztaccihuatl, 10-14,000 feet. La Cima, Sierra del Ajusco, 11,000
feet, Aug. 18 (126).

LILIACEZs.
130. Stenanthium frigidum Kunth. Enum., Pi. [V, 189 (1843); Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., I11, 381; Baker in Journ. Linn. Soc., XVII, 484.

South Mexico, peak of Orizaba 9,000 to 12,500 feet (Linden) ;
Anganguio, 9,000 feet (Hartweg). Pedregal, La Cima, 10,000 feet,
Aug. 18 (182).

181. Anthericum sp.

Sierra del Ajusco. A plant with fascicled roots for storage of

food, an inch, or two long. Aug. 18 (143).

‘

398 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

IRIDACER. -
182. Sisyrinchium Schaffneri S. Wats. in Proc. Amer, Acad., XVIII, (1883) 160.
Sierra del Ajusco, Aug. 18 (144).

ORCHIDACE.
133. Microstylis tenuis Wats.

La Cima, pedregal, Aug. 18 (117 specimen lost).

134. Spiranthes aurantiaca Hemsl. Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., III, 300.

Reported from several stations in South Mexico. The specimens :
here were collected by Mr. John MacGlashen assistant to Mr.
Pringle. La Cima, pedregal, Sierra del Ajusco, Aug. 18 (116). |

PIPERACEZ.

135. Peperomia umbilicata Ruiz and Pay. Fl. Per., I, 30, t. 45, f. b.; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., III, 66.

North to South Mexico, Colombia and Bolivia. The small tubers
are of a piquant flavor resembling the true pepper (pimienta) ;
hence, “ Pimienta de tierra.” Sierra del Ajusco, 11,000 feet, Aug.
18 (145).

SAXIFRAGACEZ.

136. Ribes Jorullense H. B. & K. Nov. Gen. et Sp., VI, 61; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., I, 386.

Emetic properties are attributed to the roots of this plant, called
‘“‘Saracuacho” by the Mexicans. La Cima, pedregal, Aug. 18
(124).

137. Ribes microphyllum H. B. & K, Nov. Gen. et Sp., VI, 62; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., I, 386.

La Cima, pedregal, 11,000 feet, Aug. 18 (115).
ONAGRACEZ.,

138. Oenothera sinuata Linn. Mant., II, 228; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 454.
From the United States southward through Mexico. Sierra del
Ajusco, 10,000 feet, Aug. 18 (138).
UMBELLIFERZ.
139. Eryngium montanum Coult. & Rose.
La Cima, pedregal, Aug. 18 (112).
CORNACES.
140. Garrya lauriflolia Benth. PJ. Hartw., 14; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 576.
Reported from a number of localities in North and South Mex-’

ico. A plant used medicinally. “El Cuauchichic ;” “ Chichicua~
huitl.” Sierra del Ajusco, Aug. 18 (147).

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 399

ERICACEZ.

141. Pernettya ciliaris D.Don. ex. G. Don Gen. Syst., ITI, 837; Biol. Centr, Amer.
Bot., II, 280.

A strong, low growing, woody shrub with ericaceous lanceolate
leaves and red berries and strong root development. Said to be
poisonous to sheep. La Cima, Sierra del Ajusco, Aug. 18 (133).

GENTIANACEZ.
142. Halenia parviflora G. Don. Gen. Syst., [V, 177; Biol. Centr, Am. Bot., IT, 352.

Distributed through Mexico to Colombia and Peru. La Cima,
Sierra del Ajusco, Aug. 18 (137).

BORAGINACEZ.
1483. Lithospermum angustifolium Michx. F]. Bor. Am., I, 130; Biol. Centr.
Amer, Bot,, II, 381.

Illinois to Wisconsin, southward to Texas and westward to Utah
and Arizona, also in Mexico. La Cima, Sierra del Ajusco, Aug. 18
(136).

144. Lithospermum distichum Orteg. Hort. Matr., Dec.8; Biol. Centr. Amer, Bot.
II, 381.

South Mexico, peak of Orizaba, 11,000 to 12,000 feet (Galeotti).

Sierra del Ajusco, Aug. 18 (146).

LABIATAE.
145. Salvia glechomaefolia H. B. & K. Nov. Gen. et Sp., IT, 290, t, 141; Biol.
Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 556, ‘
South Mexico between Guanajuato and Santa Rosa at about 8,800
feet (Humb. & Bonpl.). Sierra del Ajusco, Aug. 18 (142).

SOLANACEZ.
146. Nectouxia formosa H. B. & K. Nov. Gen. et Sp., IIT, 10, t. 193.

Reported from various parts of Mexico. La Cima, Sierra del
Ajusco, 11,000 feet, Aug. 18 (110),

147. Solanum tuberosum Linn. Sp. Pl., 185; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., IT, 416,

“ The potato is wild in Mexico, but whether really indigenous it
is impossible to say. It is probable that more than one species was
concerned in the parentage of the cultivated varieties. On the other
hand, several tuberiferous Solani described by various authors as
distinct species differ less from each other than the more distinct of
the cultivated varieties.” These plants in such an unfrequented’
place as the pedregal on top of a high mountain are probably wild.

400 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

FEjemplar silvestre recogido dela montafia. This plant was one
foot high with purple flowers. Pedregal, La Cima, 10,000 feet,
Aug. 18 (131).

148. Solanum tuberosum Linn. var. boreale Gray.

Sierra del Ajusco, Aug. 18 (140).

SCROPHULARIACESA.

149. Castilleja angustifolia Mart. & Gal. in Bull. Acad. Brux., XII, ii, (1845) 29;
Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 460.

Sierra del Ajusco, Aug. 18 (123A).

150. Castilleja tenuiflora Benth. Pl. Hartw., 22.
Pedregal, La Cima, Aug. 18 (123).

151. Pentstemon barbatus Roth. Catalect. fase., III, 49; Nutt. Gen. Am., II, 53.
Pentstemon coccineus Engelm. in Wisliz.Tour. North. Mex., 107 (Sketch, 23).
Colorado, New Mexico, North and South Mexico. La Cima,

Sierra del Ajusco, 10,000 feet, Aug. 18 (104).

152. Pentstemon imberbis Trautv. in Bull. Se. Petersh. V, (1839) 345; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., II, 445.

Reported by a number of botanists in North and South Mexico.
La Cima, Sierra del Ajusco, Aug. 18 (104a).

153. Pedicularis Mexicana Zucc, ex Bunge, in Bull. Phys. Math. Acad. Petersb., I,
(1848) 384.

Pedregal, La Cima, 11,000 feet, Aug. 18 (111).
‘ CAPRIFOLIACEA.

154. Symphoricarpos microphyllus H. B. & K. Noy. Gen, et Sp. III, 424; Biol.
Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 4.

North Mexico, region of San Luis Potosi to South Mexico.
Pedregal, La Cima, Sierra del Ajusco, Aug. 18 (122).
COMPOSITZ.
155. Stevia serrata Cav. Ic., IV, 33, t. 355; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 89.
North Mexico, region of San Luis Potosi; South Mexico, near
Tacubaya (Bourgeau). La Cima, pedregal, Aug. 18 (127).
156. Stevia linoides Sch. Bip. in Linnea, XXV, (1852) 284.
The specimens collected are doubtfully referred to this species.
La Cima, Sierra del Ajusco, Aug. 18 (128).
157. Senecio Sanguisorbe DC. Prodr., VI, 427; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 247.
A plant ranging from San Luis Potosi in North Mexico to Real
del Monte in South Mexico. La Cima, Sierra del Ajusco, Aug. 18
(139).

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 401
158. Dahlia Merckii Lehm. Delect. Sem. Hort. Hamb., 1839; ex Linnwa, XIV,
(1840) Litt., 130.
La Cima, pedregal, Aug. 18 (118, see ante).
159. Gnaphalium Bourgovii A. Gray in Proc. Amer. Acad., XTX, (1883) 3.
The plant is questionably referred to thisspecies. South Mexico.

A plant resembling G. cheiranthifolium Lam, La Cima, in railroad
cut below the town. Aug. 18 (121).

J. Salazar and Sierra de las Cruces.

A brief description of this region is givenin the introductory geo-
graphical portion. The region is one of great exposure to trying
and cold winds, we, therefore, find a more truely alpine flora than
at La Cima, although the elevations are about the same. This
accounts for the presence at Salazar of low, cespitose, or dwarfed
species.

A ditch along the railroad before reaching Salazar afforded many
interesting plants. Las Cruces Valley, the scene of the battle in
1810 between Hidalgo and the Spaniards resulting in a victory for
the patriots, yielded a great variety of plants. The level of the
mountain meadows composing the valley is about 10,000 feet altitude.
Many cold springs, render the district fine botanizing ground.

FILICES.

160. Polypodium heteromorphum Hook. et Grey. Ic. Fil, t. 108; Biol. Centr. .
Amer. Bot. IIT, 660.

Sides of ditches, Salazar, Sierra de las Cruces. Extending from
South Mexico to Colombia and Ecuador. Aug. 13 (59).

GRAMINEZ.

161. Brachypodium Mexicanum Linn. Hort. Berol., I, 41; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot.,
III, 584.

North Mexico, region of San Luis Potosi (Virlet D’Aoust) ; South
Mexico, Chapultepec and Tacubaya (Schaffner); Chinantla, San
Felipé, (Liebmann).

Salazar, 10,000 feet, Sierra de Jas Cruces, Aug. 13 (32).

ERIOCAULONACE &.
162. Eriocaulon sp.

Boggy places, Salazar, Sierra de las Cruces, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13
(50).

402 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

OOMMELINACEA.

163. Weldenia candida Schult f. in Flora, XII, (1829) 3t., 1A.; C. B. Clarke in DC.
Monogr. Phanerog., III, 319; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., III, 396.

South Mexico, between Chico and Real del Monte (Ehrenberg),
Nevada de Toluca (Karwinski), Cuesta de Catinga (Schiede) ; Gua-
temala, Volcan de Agua at 14,000 feet (Hartweg). ‘“ Yerba de la.
rata.’ At base of Abies religiosa, Salazar, Sierra de las Cruces,
10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (138).

164. Commelina sp.

Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (17a).
165. Tradescantia sp.

Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (24).

IRIDACER.

166. Sisyrinchium Schaffneri S. Wats. in Proc. Amer. Acad,,X VIII, (1883), 160 ;
Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., IIT. 330.

North Mexico, region of San Luis Potosi, (Schaffner, Parry &
Palmer). Salazar, Sierra de las Cruces, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (26).

URTICACEA.

167. Urtica Breweri 8. Watson in Proc. Amer. Acad., X, (1875), 348. :

Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (56).

PORTULACACEA.
168. Claytonia perfoliata Donn. Ind. Hort. Cant.,25, ex. Willd. Sp., Pl., [, 1,156;
Bot. Mag., t. 1,336; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 80.
Temperate North America to South Mexico. An annual succu-
lent herb, serving for salad and also for spinach. The Indians of
Mexico, eat it raw. “ Qualite de venado.” Salazar, Aug. 13 (55).

CARYOPHYLLACE.

169. Arenaria alsinoides Willd. ex Schlecht in Ges. Naturf. Fr. Berl. Mag., VII,
(1813), 201.
A, lanuginosa Rohrb. in Mart. Fl. Bras., XIV, ii, 274.
Common from North Carolina to Mexico, Central America, Peru
and Bolivia also in the West [ndies. Salazar, Aug. 13 (48).
170. Arenaria decussata Willd. ex Schlecht in Ges. Naturf. Fr. Berl. Mag., VII,
(1813), 212; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 70.

A dwarf alpine plant collected at Salazar, 1-2 inches high. North
to South Mexico. Salazar, Aug. 13 (27).
171. Cerastium viscosum Linn, Sp. PI. 437.

C. glomeratum Thuill, Fl. Par. ed., I, 226.

Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (16).

.
,

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 403

RANUNCULACER.
172. Thalictrum strigillosum Hemsl. Diagn. Pl., Nov. 1; Biol. Cent. Am. Bot., I, 4.

T. Hernandezii Tausch in Pres]. Rel. Henk., IT, 69.

South Mexico, rare in ravines among bushes (Schaffner), Tizapan, —
Valley of Mexico(Bourgeau), Zimapan (Coulter), mountains around
Mitla, Oaxaca (Andrieux), between San Miguel and La Jaya
(Schiede). The specimens collected by me are doubtfully referred
to this species. A plant which is used as a diuretic and for kidney
complaints. ‘“ El Cozticpatli.” Salazar, Aug. 13 (76).

173. Ranunculus stoloniferus Hemsl. Diagn. Pl., Nov. 17; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., I, 8.

North to South Mexico. Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (11).

174. Ranunculus dichotomus Moc. & Sessé ex DC, Syst., I, 288; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., I, 6.

R, orthorynchus Hook. Fl. Bor. Am., I, 21, t. 9. :

Recorded from a number of localities throughout Mexico. Salazar,
10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (54).

CRASSULACEZ.
175. Sedum Moranense H. B. K. Noy. Gen. et Sp., VI, 44; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot.,
I, 397.
“Siempreviva.” Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (57).

ROSACEZ.

176. Potentilla candicans Humb, & Bonp!. var. nana Nutt.

A plant confined to South Mexico. Its woody roots contain
tannin. The plant contributes in a great part to the turf of the
region. An alpine xerophyte. Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (72).
ayy B Fragaria Mexicana Schlecht in Linnwa, XIII, (1839), 265; Biol. Centr, Amer.

Bot., I, 375,

F, vesca Linn. Sp. Pl., 494.

A strawberry distributed from North Mexico, where it is common
in the Sierra Madre to South Mexico. Salazar, Aug. 12 (12).

LEGUMINOS#.
178. Trifolium Schiedeanum §. Wats. in Proc. Am. Acad., XVII, (1882), 339; Biol.
Centr. Amer, Bot., IV, 25.
Distributed from North to South Mexico. Salazar, 10,000 feet, :
Aug. 13 (64).

404 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.
179. Trifolium involucratum Ortega. Hort. Matr., Dec. 33; Willd. Sp. Pl., III,
1,372; Biol. Centr. Amer, Bot., I, 232.
A plant found in California, Colorado, New Mexico, extending to
South Mexico. Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (70).
180. Astragalus didymocarpus Hook. Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy., 334.
Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 31 (44).
181. Astragalus reptans Willd. Hort. Ber., II, 88, t. 88; Biol. Cent. Am. Bot., I, 266.
South Mexico, Tacubaya, Valley of Mexico (Bourgeau) ; Chap-
ultepee (Bilimek). Salazar, Sierra de las Cruces, 11,000 feet, Aug.
13 (20).

GERANIACEA.
182. Geranium sp.

Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (65).

183. Erodium cicutarium L’Herit. ex Ait. Hort. Kew. ed., I, ii, 414; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., I, 161.

A plant widely dispersed in the north temperate regions of the
Old World, and now exceedingly common in many parts of North
America, but supposed to have been originally introduced by the
Spaniards. Used as a fodder plant in Europe. Extends from North
to South Mexico.

“ Alfilaria”; “Storksbill”; “ Pinclover”; “ Pingrass”; “ Pin-
weed”; “Filaria” “ Filaree” ; “Alfilarilla.” Salazar, 10,000 feet,
Aug. 13 (14).

184. Oxalis violacea Linn. Sp. Pl., 434.

Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (69).

185. Oxalis corniculata Linn. var. repens n. var, probably O. repens Thunb., Diss.
Oxal., 16: Prod. Pl. Cap., 82.

This plant is found in nearly all (except the colder) parts of the
world, varying very much. North Mexico to South Mexico, Guate-
mala and Nicaragua. Salazar, Aug. 13 (18).

LINACEZ.

186. Linum Mexicanum H. B. & K. Nov. Gen. et Sp., VI, 39; Bot. Reg., t. 1,326;
Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 143.

Abundant in South Mexico. Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (63).

EUPHORBIACESA.

187. Euphorbia campestris Cham. & Schlecht in Linnea, V, (1830), 84; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., III, 92,

Collected by a number of botanists in South Mexico. Salazar,
Aug. 13 (35).

st

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 405

VIOLACEZ.

188. Viola Grahami Benth. PI. Hartw., 35; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., 1, 50.
North and South Mexico. Salazar, Aug. 13 (8, 15). .

189. Viola flagelliformis Hems!]. Diagn. P]., Nov. 20; Biol. Cent. Am. Bot.,-I, 50,
Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (15a).

ONAGRACEX.

190. Epilobium Bonplandianum H. B, & K. Noy. Gen. et Sp., VI, 95.
Salazar, Sierra de las Cruces, Aug. 13 (38).
191. Fuchsia microphylla H. B. & K. Noy. Gen. etSp,, VI, 103, Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., I, 458.”
Abundant in South Mexico. Growing along irrigating ditches,
11,000 feet. Salazar, Aug. 13 (30).

UMBELLIFERS.

192. Angelica Pringlei Coulter & Rose.
Salazar, Sierra de las Cruces, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (45).

193. Eryngium ranunculoides Benth. Pl. Hartw., 38 ; Biol. Cent. Am. Bot., I, 562.
South Mexico in mountain pastures, Aganguio (Hartweg). Salazar,
in mountain meadows, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (50a).

194. Eryngium dilatatum Lam. Encyc., IV, 755.
Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (50).

ERICACEZ.

195. Pyrola secunda Linn. Sp. PI., 396; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 283.

South Mexico, peak of Orizaba, 8,000 to 10,000 feet (Liebmann),
Desierto Viejo, Valley of Mexico (Bourgeau). Salazar, 10,000 feet,
Aug. 13 (34).

LOGANIACES.
196. Buddleia Humboldtiana Rem. & Schult. Syst., III, 93; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., II, 341.

From Southwest Texas and Southern New Mexico to Oaxaca.
“En las cafiadas y al margen de los arroyos. Se usa como forraje
para las reses” (Ramirez). Salazar on mountain sides, 11,000 feet,
Aug. 13 (29).

ASCLEPIADACES.,
197. Asclepias «p.
Salazar, Sierra de las Cruces, Aug. 13 (46).

406 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

LABIATAE.
198. Salvia fulgens Cay. Ic., I, 15, t. 23; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., IT, 556; DC.
Prodr., XIT, 333.

South Mexico. Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (62).

199. Salvia nana H. B. & K. Nov, Gen. et Sp.,II, 289; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., IT,
561; DC. Prodr., XII, 304.

North Mexico to Guatemala. Doubtfully referred to this. Salazar,
10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (71).

200. Stachys coccinea Jacq. Hort. Schcenb., III, 18, t. 284; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot. Olds

Texas to Arizona, North Mexico to Guatemala (V.olcan de Fuego,
7,000 feet). Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (42).

201. Stachys repens Mart. & Gal. in Bull. Acad. Brux., XI, ii, (1844), 194; Biol.
Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 573; DC. Prodr., XII, 479.

South Mexico, Peak of Orizaba, 9,500 to 11,000 feet (Galeotti,
Linden) ; Desierto Viejo (Bourgeau). Salazar, Sierra de las Cruces,
Aug. 13 (43).

202. Prunella vulgaris Linn. Sp. Pl., 600; DC. Prodr., XII, 410; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., II, 570.

This species is spread over the whole range of the genus in
Europe, Asia, America and Australia. Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug.
13 (25).

SOLANACES.
203. Physalis lobata Torr. in Ann. Lye. N. York, IT, (1826), 226. A. Gray, Synop.
Fl. N. Am., II, 233; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., 1V, 75.

Colorado, Arizona, Texas—North Mexico, mountains west of
Saltillo, Coahuila (Palmer). My specimen is doubtfully referred to
this species. Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 18 (51).

204, Solanum tuberosum Linn. Sp. Pl., 185.

Salazar, away from highway and railroad along an irrigating
ditch. 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (53). (A plant 18 inches high, rough
hispid with deep purple flowers, No. 61).

SCROPHULARIACES.
205. Sibthorpia Pitchinchensis H. B. & K. Nov. Gen. et Sp., II, 390, t. 175; Biol.
Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 454.

South Mexico, Vera Cruz to Orizaba (Miiller), Zimapan (Coulter),
Valley of Mexico (Bourgeau), peak of Orizaba, 9,000 to 12,000 feet
(Galeotti, Linden), Cordillera of Oaxaca at 9,000 feet (Galeotti).
Colombia to Peru, Bolivia and Argentina. Salazar, Sierra de las
Cruces, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (47).

aowtn &

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 407

206. Castilleja tenuiflora Benth. PI. Hartw., 22; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., IT, 463.

Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (68).

207. Castilleja Schaffneri Hemsl, Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 462, tab. LXIII, B.,
figs. 7-13.

A small alpine plant 2 inches high. Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug.
13 (17).

208. Mimulus luteus Linn. Sp. Pl., ed. II, 884; DC. Prodr., X, 370; Bot. Mag., t.
150, 3,336, 3,363; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 449.

A variable species common in Western America, from the Aleu-
tian Islands and Alaska, through Mexico and along the Andes to
South Chili. Also naturalized in some parts of the Old World
(Hemsley). Salazar, Sierra de las Cruces, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13
(65a).

209. Pentstemon campanulatus Willd. Sp. Pl., III, 228; DC. Prodr., X, 326; Biol.
Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 444; Bot. Mag., t. 1,878 ett. 3,884.

South Mexico, very common. Salazar, Sierra de las Cruces. In
fir forests at about 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (31).

PLANTAGINACEZ.
210. Plantago Patagonica Jacq. Ic. Pl. Rar., II, 9, t. 306; Coll. Suppl., 35.
The specimens collected are doubtfully referred to this species.
They may be P. Mezicana Link. (Enum. Hort. Berol., I, 121).
Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (9).

211. Plantago hirtella H. B. & K. Nov. Gen. et Sp., I, 229,t. 127. A. Gr., Synop.
Fi. N. Am., II, 392; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 575.
Salazar, Sierra de las Cruces, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (40).
RUBIACEZ.

212. Houstonia Palmeri A. Gray. Proo. Amer. Acad., XVII, (1881-'82), 202; Biol.
Centr. Amer. Bot., IV, 47.

A small alpine plant. Salazar, 11,000 feet, Aug. 13 (23).

LOBELIACEZ.

213. Lobelia nana H. B. & K. Nov. Gen. et Sp., III, 317, t. 272; DC. Prodr., VII,
379; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., II, 268.

South Mexico, near Real del Monte and Moran, at about 8,000
feet (Humboldt & Bonpland), Vera Cruz to Orizaba (Miiller), peak
of Orizaba, 11,000 to 12,500 feet (Linden). A small plant, alpine
in habit. Salazar, Sierra de las Cruces, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (23).

214. Lobelia fulgens Willd, Hort. Berol., t. 85.

Salazar, Aug. 13. Collected also at Lake Xochimilcho (ante).
(77).

408 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

COMPOSIT A.

215. Gnaphalium purpureum Linn. Sp. Pl., 854.

Salazar, Sierra de las Cruces, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (6).
216. Eupatorium Popocatepetlense Schlecht. ex Hemsl. Biol. Centr. Am. Bot., IT,

99 nomen.

North Mexico, region of San Luis Potosi, 6,000 to 8,000 feet
(Parry & Palmer) ; South Mexico, Chidpas (Ghiesbreght). Salazar,
10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (31).

217. Eupatorium pycnocephalum Less. in Linnwa, VI, (1831), 404.
Salazar, 10,000 feet, Aug. 13 (39).

218. Senecio (Cacalia) silphifolia n. sp.

A plant resembling greatly in habit our western American Com-
pass-plant Silphium laciniatum with large leaves which stand ver-
tically at various angles. The plant bears an upright corymb of
flowers. Named here tentatively, because, it has been probably
named and distributed with Pringle’s plants of 1896. Salazar,
10,500 feet in meadows, Aug. 13 (28).

ORIZABA AND CORDOBA.

Orizaba (4,000 feet) and Cordoba (2,700 feet) on the line of the
Mexican Railroad (Ferro-Carril Mexicano) can be treated of
together. Orizaba is a town of 15,000 inhabitants, 82 miles from
Vera Cruz and 181 miles from the City of Mexico. The town lies
in a little valley surrounded by very fine mountains. The peak of
Orizaba, however, cannot be seen, save a tiny strip of glittering
white over the crest of the Cerro de la Escamela. The other sur-
rounding hills are: the Barrego; the Ranchito de Cristo; Jala-
pilla; San Juan del Rio; the Rincon Grande; and La Perla. The
town is composed, for the most part, of low houses with red-tiled
roofs; it is crossed by two small streams, and by the little river
Orizaba (through a rocky ravine filled with tropical plants), all of
which unite near by in the River Blanco, which plunges over a pre-
cipice in a cascade in the Rincon Grande. The valley alone was
explored botanically during the short time at the disposal of the
writer. The several ravines were followed through the town to the
outskirts, when circling the town, the fields and copses and woods
were investigated for the plants that might be in flower. Most of
the larger trees were found to be loaded down with epiphytes,
orchids, tillandsias, and mistletoe with several ferns. To one who

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 409

for the first time visits a tropical country, the very wealth of the
material completely nonplusses him fora time. The region abounds
in orchids. Only the smaller forms were collected although many fine
large ones were seen. A botanist is at once impressed with. the
luxuriance of the epiphytic growths. A hasty visit was also paid
to the Rincon Grande, where a number of plants were collected
within the influence of the spray of the water-fall.

Only two hours were spent at Cordoba, between trains, so that
only a most hasty and superficial collection of plants was made of
the flora of this most interesting tropical region.

| FILICES.
219. Adiantum Capillus-Veneris Tinn, Hook. Sp. Fil., II, 36; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., III, 607.

A plant very widely diffused in temperate regions, throughout
the world including the mountains of Mexico, where it occurs up to
an altitude of 10,000 feet on the peak of Orizaba. Orizaba, Aug.
27 (363).

220. Polypodium aureum Linn. Hook. Sp, Fil. V, 16; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot.,
III, 655.
A fern extending from Florida southward in Mexico to Brazil.

The specimens collected by me were found in the forks of trees.
Orizaba, Aug. 27 (369).
221. Nephrolepis cordifolia Pres]. Hook. et Bak. Syn. Fil., 300; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., III, 652.
South Mexico to Brazil and Peru, also in Cuba. Orizaba, Aug.
27 (356).
LILIACE#.

222. Schoenocaulon officinale A. Gray in Benth. PI. Hartw., 29; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., III, 383.

South Mexico to Guatemala and Venezuela. Slopes of El Bor-
rego, abundant. Orizaba, Aug. 27 (4,500 feet), (349).

ORCHIDACEZ.

223. Cypripedium irapeanum La Llave Lex. Nov. Veg. Dese. fase., II (Orch. Opuse.)
10; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., III, 307.
C. molle Lindl. in Benth., Pl. Hartw., 72.
South Mexico to Guatemala. Slopes of hills near waterfall in
Rincon Grande. Orizaba, Aug. 27 ; flowers yellow, (328).

27

410 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.
224. Epidendrum virens Lindl. & Paxt. Flow. Gard., I, (1850-51), 152; Biol.
Centr. Amer. Bot., ITI, 242.
The living specimens collected and brought home, I doubtfully
refer them to this species. Orizaba, Aug. 27 (394).

PIPERACES.
225. Piper umbellatum Linn. Sp. Pl., 30; Biol. Centr, Amer. Bot., IIT, 56.
South Mexico, southward to Peru and Brazil, also in West Indies.
Cordoba, Aug. 26 (346).
226. Piper sp.
Orizaba, Aug. 27 (371).

CARYOPHYLLACE.,
227. Silene Armeria Linn. Sp. PI., 420.

Orizaba, Aug. 27 (366).

ANONACESA.

228. Anona Cherimolia Miller Gard. Dict. ed, VIII, n. 5; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot.,
I, 18; Bot. Mag., t. 2,011.

Extending from South Mexico to Ecuador and Peru; widely
spread in Tropical America. Naturalized in some of the West
Indian Islands according to Grisebach. ;

“One of the ‘Custard Apples.’ This shrub or tree might be tried
in frostless forest valleys where the humidity and rich soil will prove
favorable to its growth. It is hardy in the wildest coast regions of
Spain, also in Chili. In Jamaica it is cultivated up to 5,000 feet.”
(Mueller). Orizaba, Aug. 27 (380).

LEGUMINOS&.
229. Mimosa albida H. & B. in Willd. Spec., IV, 1,030.
Cordoba, Aug. 26 (350). “ Sensitive Plant.”

MALVACEZ.
230. Malvaviscus arboreus Cav. Diss., III, t.48; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 118.

North Mexico to Guatemala, Panama; also common in the West
Indies including Cuba. Orizaba, Aug. 27 (862).

CACTACEZ,

231. Cereus triangularis Mill. Gard. Dict. ed. VIII, n. 9; Bot. Mag., t. 1,834;
Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 547.

Orizaba, Aug. 27.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 411

232. Phyllocactus grandis Lem. in FI. des Serres, IIT, (1847), 255, verso.

Mexico, region of Orizaba, Honduras. Orizabain Rincon Grande,
Aug. 27 (373).

MYRTACEA.
233. Psidium Guajava Linn. Sp. Pl., 470; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 406.

From the West Indies and Mexico to South Brazil. “This
handsome evergreen and useful bush should engage universal atten-
tion anywhere in warm lowlands, for the sake of its aromatic whole-
some berries, which attain the size of a hen’s egg, and can be
converted into a delicious jelly. The pulp is generally cream col-
ored or reddish, but varies in the many varieties which have arisen
in culture, some of them bearing all the year round. Propagation
is easy from suckers, cuttings or seeds. This big shrub is easily held
under control in extra-tropic countries, but in the warmest and moist-
est tropical regions it may become irrepressible, as it spreads readily
from suckers, and gets disseminated by birds and cattle easily.”
(Mueller). Orizaba, Aug. 27 (367).

ARALIACES.
234. Dendropanax arboreum Decne. & Planch, Rev. Hort., ser. IV, iii (1854), 107.

This species has a wide range in the West Indies and tropical
South America. “ Vibona,’ (Cuba). Orizaba, Aug. 27 (353).

ASCLEPIADACEZ.
235. Gonolobus erianthus Decne. in DC. Prodr., VIII, 592; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., IT, 331.

The specimens collected by me are more hairy than those distrib-
uted by Pringle. It is possible that they are to be referred to G.
atratus Gray with broader leaves, but the same pubescence. South
Mexico to Guatemala. Orizaba, Aug. 27 (364).

VERBENACEZ.
236. Duranta Plumieri Jacq. Select. Am., 186, t. 176, f. 76; Biol. Centr, Amer, Bot.,
II, 538.

A shrub 8 to 12 feet high in rough rocky woods, not uncommon
from Florida through South Mexico to Peru, Brazil and in the
West Indies. “ Violetina” (Cuba). Orizaba, Aug. 27 (352).

237. Lantana camara Linn. Sp. Pl., 874; DC. Prodr., XI, 598; Biol. Centr. Amer.
Bot., II, 527.

Georgia, Florida, Texas, Mexico, and generally dispersed in
tropical South America and West Indies. “ Filigrana” (Cuba). *
Orizaba, Aug. 27 (358).

412 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

CUCURBITACEA.
238. Sechium edule Swartz. Fl. Ind. Oce., II, 1,150; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot., I, 491.

“The large, starchy root of this climber can be consumed as a
culinary vegetable, while the good-sized fruits are also edible. The
fruit often germinates before it drops. The plant bears, even in the
first year, and may ripen one hundred fruits a year. Cultivated up
to 5,000 feet in Jamaica” (Mueller).

South Mexico, Santa Anita near Mexico (Bourgeau), Orizaba
(Botteri), valley of Cordova (Bourgeau) ; Panama, without locality
(Seemann); West Indies and Tropical South America. ‘ Chow-
Chow” (Jamaica); “ Chocho,” “Chayota” (Mexico).

COMPOSITE.

239. Senecio grandifolius Less. in Linnaea, V, (1830), 162; Biol. Centr. Amer. Bot.,
IT, 240.
South Mexico, region of Orizaba (Botteri, Bourgeau), valley of
Cordova (Bourgeau), Montecinos, Vera Cruz (Linden).
Orizaba, Aug. 26th (860).

ADDENDA
(with families omitted).

240. Thalia dealbata Fras. Thal. dealbata, t. 1; Bot. Mag., t. 1,690; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., IIT, 310.

Along ditches of Mexican Central R. R., near Guadalajara.

241. Nymphaea gracilis Zuce. in Abh. Akad. Muench., I (1832), 362; Biol. Centr.
Amer. Bot., I, 25.

“A Mexican species of great merit, has large, handsome, star-
shaped white flowers, which are borne on stout stems well above the
foliage. It is worthy of note as being the only white day-blooming
tropical or tender species ; a very vigorous plant, free-flowering, the
flowers possessing a delicate fragrance, resembling Lily of the Val-
ley” (1897), Tricker, The Water Garden, p. 90, fig. on p. 91 and pl.
III. South Mexico, lakes near Oaxaca, 5,000 feet (Galeotti), Mex-
ico (Karwinski), ditches at Tacubaya, Valley of Mexico (Bourgeau),
Aguas Calientes (Hartweg).

In ponds along Mexican Central R. R. near Guadalajara.

242. Talinum Greenmanii Harshberger in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, XXIV, 183,Apr.

24, 1897, Plate 299, Fig. 4.

Volcanic gravel, Sierra del Ajusco, Mexico, 8,500 feet. Possibly
it is T. humile described by E. L. Greene. Pringle Plante mexicana,

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 413

No. 6,472. Named in honor of Jesse Moore Greenman, of the Gray
Herbarium, Cambridge, Mass.

243. Agave Americana Linn. Sp. Pl., 323.

A plant extensively cultivated throughout Mexico for its fibre
and for the juice which yields, upon fermentation, the national bev-
erage, pulqué.

244. Taxodium mucronatum Tenore in Ann. Se. Nat. sér. III, xix, (1853), 355.

A tree found reaching gigantic girth in several parts of Mexico.
The grove of Mexican cypresses below the Castle of Chapultepec
being noted for the size of the individual species composing it. Two
notable trees are found in it, one 194 feet in diameter, the other, the
tree of Montezuma, 14 feet in diameter. Another gigantic specimen
is found at Tule on the road from Oaxaca to Guatemala, cireumfer-
ence, five feet from ground, 146 feet; longest diameter, 40 feet;
shortest diameter of the trunk, 20 feet. This tree was also met with
at Las Canoas on the Tampico branch of the Mexican Central Rail-
road. ‘Ahuebuete.”

245. Zea Mays Linn. X Euchlaena Mexicana Schrad. Zea Mays Linn., Sp., pl. 971.

Euchlaena Mexicana Schrad. Ind. Sem. Hort. Gotting (1832).—Cf. Linnaea

viii (1833) Litt. 25.

The hybrids of these two plants throw considerable light upon the
origin of our cultivated maize. I would refer the student to several
papers upon this subject by the writer, as follows:

1. Maize: A Botanical and Economic Study. Contrib. Botan.
Lab. University of Penna., I, pp. 75-202, with 4 plates. A Spanish
translation of the entire paper appeared in Mexico, entitled “ El
Maiz: Estudio Botanico y Econémico” (1894), pp. 164.

2. Fertile Crosses of Teosinthe and Maize. Garden and Forest,
IX, p. 522.

3. Notes on the Hybrid of Maize and Teosinthe. Garden and
Forest, X, p. 48.

4. The Uses of Plants Among the Ancient Peruvians. Bull. of

the Museum of Science and Art, University of Penna., I.

414 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

FOSSIL MOLLUSKS AND DIATOMS FROM THE DISMAL SWAMP,
VIRGINIA AND NORTH CAROLINA; INDICATION OF
THE GEOLOGICAL AGE OF THE DEPOSIT.

BY LEWIS WOOLMAN.
WITH NOTES ON THE DIATOMS.
BY CHARLES 8S. BOYER.

During the winter of 1897-98 the Dismal Swamp Canal was
widened and deepened, and the level of the central portion lowered so
as to dispense with the middle two of the four locks heretofore in use.
The work was done by the McManus Construction Company of
Philadelphia, steam rotary dredging machines being used in exca-
vating. These dredges brought up from the bottom, at points both
south and north of the Virginia-North Carolina boundary, large
numbers of marine mollusks. Through the appreciative interest in
scientific matters of M. Homer, Secretary and Treasurer of the Con-
struction Company, we have been furnished on three occasions with
specimens of these shells, which he specially and personally col-
lected on his visits to the field of operations.

It is the purpose of this paper to put on record the species of
these shells and also of the marine diatoms which were associated
with them in the same matrix, and to indicate, though perhaps ten-
tatively, from a study of both the macroscopic and microscopic fos-
sils, the geological age of the bed from which they were obtained.

The Dismal Swamp Canal connects on the south at a point near
South Mills, N. C., with the headwaters of the Pasquotank River, a
tributary of Albemarle Sound, and on the north at a point near
Deep Creek with the waters of the south branch of the Elizabeth
River, a tributary of the James River and the Chesapeake Bay.
The general direction of the canal between these two points is north-
ward, with, however, a decidedly obtuse angled bend, or bow, to the
westward, the angle being near Drummond Lake, from which a
feeder canal brings the water from the Jake into the main canal.
This feeder was also deepened.

M. Homer states that the shells furnished by him were obtained
from the following localities :—

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 415

1st.—A point on the main canal in North aes two to three
miles south of the Virginia boundary.

2d.—A point on the main canal in Virginia, about five miles
north of the feeder, or four miles north of Wallaceton, a small Post
Office and settlement on drained land near the centre of the swamp.

3d.—A point about midway of the feeder, say one and one-half
miles west of its junction with the main canal. —

A noticeable peculiarity, as stated by M. Homer, 1s that the
collections from the main canal, from both the Virginia and North
Carolina localities, contain great numbers of the large conch, Fudgur
carica, while this shell is wanting in those thrown out from the
feeder. Here, however, the oysters, Ostrea virginica, are exceed-
ingly numerous, and many of them are of extra large size, one speci-
men in the possession of M. Homer measuring ten inches in length
and four and one-half inches in width.

But few specimens, comprising only three species, were brought
from the locality south of the Virginia-North Carolina line. M.
Homer, however, states that the shells seemed as varied in form and
as plentiful there as north of Wallaceton.

In one lump of clay matrix, about the size of a walnut, obtained
from the bottom of the dredgings north of Wallaceton, we discov-
ered, on a preliminary microscopic examination, a very few diatoms,
and a few, though perhaps aslightly larger number of sponge spicu-
les. A separation and cleaning of the diatoms from this lump of
clay was made by a fellow member of the Academy, John A.
Shulze, after which the forms were identified by another member,
Prof. C. 8. Boyer. The mollusks were jointly identified by Prof. H.
A. Pilsbry of the Conchological Section of the Academy and C. W.
Johnston, Curator of the Wagner Free Institute of Science.

Below we tabulate the mollusks according to their range in geo-
logical time into three columns headed Miocene (M), Pliocene (P)
and Recent (R)—under Recent are included both Pleistocene and
now living forms. On the right, in two additional columns, we note
the occurrence of such of the forms as have been found in the Croa-
tan, N. C., and the Waccamaw, §. C., beds, both of which contain
a somewhat similar molluscan fauna.

The geological range, as noted in the first three columns, we take
from Dr. W. H. Dall’s “ Tables of Species” from the Waccamaw
and the Croatan beds. ‘

1 Transactions of the Wa agner Free Institute of Selence, Vol. ILI, Part 2,
pages 210 to 215.

416 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

The Croatan beds are in North Carolina, about 120 miles slightly
west of south of the Dismal Swamp, and about eighteen miles from
the nearest point on the coast. They are on the northern border
of a similar swamp area on the southern side of the Neuse River,
and are about fifteen miles below Newbern. Both the Croatan
and the Dismal Swamp shell localities are approximately 75 or 80
miles eastward of the rocks of the Piedmont plateau, which rocks
bound the inland border of the less consolidated beds of the Atlan-
tic Coastal plain. The two localities occupy a similar position both
geographically and stratigraphically.

The Waccamaw beds are in the extreme eastern part of the State
of South Carolina, and are exposed along the banks of the Wacca-
maw River from some four miles, to about 18 miles above Conway.
They are on low ground, and are also on the western side of another
of the swamp areas that occur on the seaward margin of the coastal
plain from Cape May County, N. J.,to South Carolina and Georgia.
Geographically, they are similarly situated to the Croatan and the
Dismal Swamp localities.

Fossil mollusks from the Croatan and the Waccamaw localities
have been carefully studied and listed by Dr. W. H. Dall, who refers
both beds to the Pliocene. The fauna, however, when considered
with reference to the percentage of recent over extinct forms, would
indicate that the Croatan beds were slightly the younger of the two
deposits, there being, according to Dr. Dall, 83 per cent. of recent
forms in the Croatan and only 70 per cent. in the Waccamaw beds.
In summing up, Dr. Dall says “the Croatan beds are obviously
newer than those of the Waccamaw, yet when compared with the
admitted Pleistocene beds of South Carolina such as those of Sim-
mons Bluff, the presence on the Neuse” [the locality of the Croatan
beds] “of 41 out of 90 species, which have not been known later
than the Pliocene, forbids us to regard the fauna as later than Plio-
cene.”

In the study of the mollusks from the Dismal Swamp Canal the
writer has had the advantage of some correspondence with Dr. W.
H. Dall and of consultation with Prof. H. A. Pilsbry and C. W.
Johnson, the latter of whom has collected a full series of shells from
the Croatan beds, and a like series from the Waccamaw beds, both
of which collections are now displayed in the Museum of the
Wagner Free Institute of Science of Philadelphia, and with which
the shells from the Dismal Swamp have been carefully compared.

“ya a lide snl

olen, —— tellin.

a a ee ee

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 417

The three species previousiy noted as having been collected from
the bottom of the old south level near South Mills, N. C., were Uro-
salping cinerea, Fulgur cariea and Ostrea virginica—the elevation
of the surface at this point being about 11 feet.

All the forms, however, listed below, excepting Urosalpins: ¢ cin-
erea Say, were obtained from a locality along the Deep Creek level
of the Old Canal, at a point four miles north of Wallaceton, Va.,
and from a depth of about ten feet, the elevation of the surface being
about sixteen feet. The Deep Creek level is next north of the sum-
mit level of the old canal, the latter having an elevation of about
twenty feet.

Ostrea virginica, generally much larger and more numerous than
at South Mills or at north of Wallaceton, was likewise brought up
in the dredgings from the bottom of the feeder leading from Drum-
mond Lake, say at approximately ten feet below the surface level,
which, at the point under consideration, is about twenty feet above
tide, the elevation of the surface of the lake being, according to a
survey made by the U.S. Engineers during the winter of 1895-1896,

22.45, feet.

_ Mollusks from the base of a low escarpment on the western bor-
der of the swamp near Suffolk, Va., and near the Jericho Canal,
which leads north-westwardly from Lake Drummond to the Nanse-
mond River, have been noted by Prof. N.S. Shaler. After listing
the species as identified by Dr. W. H. Dall, he says: “ Traces of
this same deposit occur a few miles south of Suffolk, and I suspect
the existence of similar beds near Elizabeth City. From certain
comminuted fragments taken from the bottom of the main Dismal
Swamp Canal, it seems to me not improbable that the beds were
touched in making that excavation. I am, therefore, disposed to
believe that the foundation rocks beneath the swamp district consist
mainly of the beds indicated by the foregoing list of fossils.”

Prof. Shaler thus indicates fossil beds which the recent deepening
of the Dismal Swamp Canal has abundantly verified, though very few
of the species in Prof. Shaler’s collection and our own are the same ;
and yet, as will be seen further on, upon analyzing the forms in the
two collections, they tell a similar geological tale.

We now insert tables of the mollusks from the Dismal Swamp
and the Jericho Canal localities.

*Tenth Annual Report U. 8. Geol. Survey, page 316.

{
418 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

TABLE OF SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS DREDGED FROM THE DISMAL
SWAMP CANAL IN NORTH CAKOLINA AND VIRGINIA.

Range
in time.
Mollusks.

Found also in the
Croatan beds, N.C.
And in the Wac-
camaw beds, S. C.

Arca limila Conr., ONC...0is.0 secsccnccasseccvesse re
Arca plicatura Conr., var. sublineolata D’Orb.,
TUGINGKOMS Fonds ss ox wane dere seeacetcccnesieacet wae ede x
Corbula comtracta Say....-2secocrcesseveonass cavonsens x
Cytherea convexa Say = (C. sayana Conr.)...... x
Mulinia ( Mactra) lateralis Say...s.csiscccseeers ex
Nucla proxima Say ..-reecceeees qeetvene es: Bae cesaes rex:
VENUS. TET CENATIC VATA Kosscsseccsscnce ececosceses. x
Lucina crenulata Conr....+.. Pau vat isto dentes ee des cites 3.
x

x

x

x

x

va)
°
°

°
ooo

Olivelia nifidtala Dil Won 2s ccte+s---p9a+01-000secess00-
Polynices ( Natica) ( Neverita) duplicata Say...
Tornatina ( Bulla) canaliculata Say...s.sswseeeee
Wassa obsoleta Say, fOW .recsseccssosceeeesscsesasces
Divaricella (Lucina) quadrisulcata D’Orb......
Caecum coopert Smith ......ssecceceecececes Anessa:
Ostrea virginica GMe]....000ececsceseceessasceessoee
Crepidula plana Say.....-. Seva usnincicte aawa danaes
LUupleura CAUAALA SAY. ..0cc00ee covcvcsess soceos senses
Fulgur canaliculatum Say, ONC-+..000eeeseeeeeeeees
Fulgur carica Gmel., DUMETOUS. «....-+-2--2+00 eee
Nassa trivittata Say, NUMETUUS. ...+0+0+ weeeeeeee *
Scala lineata Say.......++++ 00 Sec saRe dave: hrevesses
Turbonilla reticulata AGS....+.0.s.c0scocencerssvesse
Spisula ( Mactra) solidissima Dillw.....s++.cesesees
Tellina tenera Say ..-......+000s pic sestprecsreenesaces
Solem americanus Gel .cesere vecereee sosceesecees
Urosalpinx cinerea Say ...0ccscererssvscscoersereccecs

eoooc°o
ooooooo$o

HHH HM HK MH KKK K WH KKK KK KH
ooco

HH KK HH HK KKM KKH KM KWH KK KK KA

oooooocso

Coral.

AStrANZia AANAE AGQAS...1cseeeeeseccsersescssoscsvees x

For comparison with the above we tabulate in a similar manner
the list of fossils obtained by Prof. N.S. Shaler, from the north-
western part of the Dismal Swamp, near Suffolk, and identified by
_ Dr. Dall. We take the list from Prof. Shaler’s monograph on the
Dismal Swamp in the Tenth Annual Report of the United States —
Geological Survey, page 315.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 419

TABLE OF MOLLUSCAN SPECIES FOUND IN BEDS EXPOSED BY A
ROAD CUTTING NEAR THE JERICHO CANAL, TWO MILES
EAST OF SUFFOLK, VA.

| : :
pies ox
Range abe : .
in time. a a e 5
a 2 TS
-_=— 2 = @&
Sig = 2
| ae ie Aad ta
A 5 2 q @
BSP Te eter 16
Ck SNOT Ee eS ee een oe x
Crassatella unditlata Say .....ccrcececererreceeeeeees tex
IIR SOME GOODE saciasandsccnce: doisavor2 c0ceyebe lex te) |
Anachis ( Columbella) avara Say.sccrerseccccserees x 0?
Turritella apicalis Hp, (var. ).-ccccccsesseseeserees | = |
PPE ANO SPEC. OT bic sadie ccc suk, woxceadoscaceseasses |xx °
STA OLIUAO BAT vasissvavaccanestepocdp iss reatsounses Fe Cr 2 ° 0
Callista convexa Say (=C. sayana Conr.).+.++ x. x 0 °
Eryphyla lunata Conr ......sesseccesecssseseenseeens cox = 0
MUSSER MINCE LLC a featdsvc arxencnadacsss cance asncr ins xe x
SP EMES OOUIE, « socryisn<cncscenisadunserass¥onsursaet Le xs ty) | t)
Lucina crentilata Con... ...ccscersseeeee sensesceees a ces 0 0
Yoldia limatila Say ...cccescseccecsrereeseeecavecees ele oe 0 |
AT RIRECA LEDS COUT csxnsedatvss cocontascsicvacenasss x x °
ENC CAP DURE OVINE, « canccn sapssncesaeeten dv, so0 eas “x
Pecten exasperatis SOWD .+.cceerescee cececeevecseces x x
Crepidula comvera Bay 00.00, .csecnenes ssccsssoreiess x x ty) 0)
Liomesus stimpsonii Dall. ......+ dg WJaabscersueveedes > >
Turbonilla interripta Totten. ..cccesreccesersceeees EP 3 o 0
Caduulus carolinensis Bush .ececesssssseseeseveseecees x
Cardium tilandicum Lin. «cccccesssessecees eecseees Ps
MNOM ID ALAIIGL. <hc000snscausnsbnasseanesunieds rns -
Nuccula tenuis Mtgcrecrccrcserecccssccscerseceeceeees x
SOREN FFE CE PUL sn aurea tasers caeabveahvennvinssphgssnas x
Tellina modesta Verrill.....+0ccccssseosccesseseoasess x
Scalaria clathratiula AGams...+++,+0++0+eeeceeeeees x
Ethalia Sp. f frag. cccsrssesncstestsvessseve
Eulima BP. Peccscccsvceccesscesseccessesceeece
Balanus SP. Possccesccccsceeces secevecsceeeese|

Of the 26 species of mollusks from near Wallaceton, 17 occur at
both Croatan and Waccamaw, 2 others occur at Croatan and not at
Waccamaw, and still 2 others at Waccamaw and not at Croatan,,
while 5 have not been recorded at either of these two localities.

Of the 26 specifically identified out of the 29 forms from near
Jericho, 6 occur at both Croatan and Waccamaw, 1 occurs at Croa- 4
tan only, and 3 at Waccamaw only, while 16, more than half of
which are recent, have not been noted at either of these localities.

420 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

In the lists above there are but 3 species occurring in}both locali-
ties, viz.: Cytherea convexa, Lucina erenulata, and Ostrea virginica,
Adding the numbers in the two lists and deducting these three,
since they have been counted twice, we find there are, altogether, 52
molluscan forms, of which 3 are not specifically identified. Analyz-
ing the remaining 49, we find their numbers range in geological
time as follows :—

|M.|M.&P.)/P.|/M.P.&R./P&R| BS
&
From near Wallaceton| 2 a 69 | 4—26
From near Suffolk......| 3 1 La fl | 6 §=26
By 8. | a1"). .18)-))

Deduct commontoboth |
NOGAILTICS a cancessoassee 2 1 3
stale tetas ee ee “6 |) 2

from which it will be seen that there are

Pliocene and pre-Pliocene forms. . . . ... 7 species,
Ranging from Miocene to Recent . . . . . 16 species.
Both Pliocene and Recent. . ... . . . 14 species.
Recent, including Pleistocene . . . . . . . 12 species.

Judging from these proportionate figures alone, which show 42
forms still living, out of a total of 49, the writer would be inclined
to assign the age of the beds from which these fossils were obtained
as not earlier than late Pliocene time, while it may even possibly
belong to Pleistocene time.

We may, however, more particularly note other reasons for this
conclusion as to age.

Twenty-six, or fully one-half of the shells specifically identified,
clearly have a post-Miocene aspect, including two forms, Fulgur
carica and Ostrea virginica, which are the most numerous of the col-
lection. The specimens of J’, carica present a peculiarity of sculpt-
‘ure which distinguishes them from the shells now living upon the
coast; the surface being densely scored by fine crimped or undulat-
ing spiral strise, in fully adult, large individuals. In recent shells
of similar size such striation is nearly obsolete or wholly wanting,
even when the superficial coat has not been removed by erosion..

1898.] . NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 421

Sixteen other forms have a persistent range from the Miocene
through the Pliocene and Pleistocene periods down to the present
time.

If we include these 16 as representatives of recent time, we have,
as noted above, 42; or, as pointed out by Dr. Dall in a letter from
which we quote, “ nearly all the species as recent.”

One other form, Arca limula, is usually considered distinctively
Miocene, but its presence may be accounted for by considering it as
an introduction from the underlying Miocene beds, which are prob-
ably not over 50 feet from the surface in this region. Bearing upon
this, the writer may say that he has in his possession artesian well
borings recently made at Old Point Comfort and Norfolk, Va. At
Old Point Comfort, at the depth of 50 feet, were a number of shells,
among them such Miocene forms as Dosinia acetabulum and Pecten
madisonius, while at Norfolk there were obtained, at the depth of
105 feet, a fragment of Pecten madisonius, at 115 feet a perfect shell of
Gnathodon clathrodon, and at 175 feet a fragment of Pecten eboreus.
Respecting another form in the Dismal Swamp bed, Arca plica-
tura, or perhaps a variety thereof, Dr. Dall says, after an examina-
tion by him of a number of specimens of this species which we had
sent him: “The Area you send is one which occurs in the Duplin
County Natural Well, North Carolina, and which was named by
Conrad Arca lineolata; but as there was already a species of this
name, D’Orbigny re-named it sublineolata. It appears to be a mu-
tation of A. plicatura, to which I have referred it in my (MS.) work
on the Tertiary Arcas of the United States. There was one Plio-
cene species in the fossils from the Jericho Canal,’ and as the Du-
plin beds are at the very top of the Miocene, it would not be strange
if A. sublineolata overlapped.”

Bearing still further upon the entire subject, we further quote Dr.
Dall from the same letter :—

“The species from your list‘ are all recent except Arca limula
{and Arca sublineolata], but some of them are not now found so far
north. Now we know that in Pliocene times some northward ad-
vance was made by the warm water species, such as Gnathodon and
Cyrena, There are too many recent species (assuming that the fauna
is not a mechanical mixture of shells of different ages) for the refer-

* This has reference to the bed near Suffolk, the forms from which appear
in the second of the preceding lists.
* Reference is here made only to the first list, that from near Wallaceton.

422 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

ence of this fauna to the Upper Miocene—and we know that the ex-
tinct species [ A. limula and A. lineolata] are not quaternary even in
Florida—so, subject to the above assumption, I think we shall have
to regard it as Pliocene. * * * * The Croatan beds are dis-
tinctively Pliocene, but these are more like the contact between the
southern Pliocene and a more northern cold water fauna.”

Corroborative of the views already advanced as to the age of this
bed is the following, written by Prof. N. 8. Shaler respecting the
mollusks listed above from near the Jericho Canal: “ The species
determined by W. H. Dall, paleontologist of the U.S. Geological
Survey, indicates in a general manner that the beds are of Pliocene
age. Of the 29 species that appear in my collection, 24, according
to Dr. Dall, belong to living forms and 5 are extinct. The extinet
species are found in the so-called Pliocene of Florida, South Car-
olina and Virginia. There can be no question the deposit is of pre-
glacial age.”®

We now consider the evidence presented by the diatom flora
which we think corroborates that presented by the mollusks for rea-
sons which we shall note after the introduction of the following state-
ment by Charles S. Boyer, A. M., made by him after a careful ex-
amination of a number of mounts prepared from the material which
had been reliably cleaned, as already stated, by John A. Shulze, and
to which we are well assured there has been no admixture of di-
atoms from any other source :—

“The following list includes all the forms, 31 in number, found
in the slides of the Dismal Swamp material except a few fragments
which were too small for accurate determination.

“In the middle column is noted the relative frequency and rarity
of some of the forms in comparison with the rest as seen in the
strewn mounts :—

‘Of the above forms all but four are strictly marine. The ex-
ceptions are Navicula major and Stauroneis Phoenicenteron, which
are fresh water, Campylodiscus Echeneis which is both brackish and
fresh water, and Melosira crenulata var. antiqua, which is possibly
also fresh water.

“T think I have named all on the slides at hand, except probably
one or two forms of Coscinodiseus and Navicula, which were in frag-
ments.

°>Tenth Annual Report, U. 8. Geol. Survey, page 515.

oe

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 423

“Of the 51 named, 2, Actinoptychus Heliopelta and Aulacodiscus
Rogersii are distinctly Miocene ; 4, Coscinodiscus robustus, Step hano-
pyxis aculeata and Corona, and Triceratium semicirculare are quite

Actinocyclus Ehrenbergit Ralfs.........+. Common Miocene and Recent

Actinoptychus Helicpelta Grum.....+...0000. Rare Miocene only
A ctinoptychus undulatus E...s..cererseeveeee Common /|Mioceneand Recent
Aulacodiscus Rogersii (Bail) A. S......... Not uncommon Miocene only
Auliscus caclatus Bail....ccscsseceeevecessees Miocene and Recent
Auliscus punctatus Grun.....-..seseeseeeeeees Miocene and Recent
Biddulphia Rhombus (E.) Wm. 8m...... Miocene and Recent
Biddulphia Tuomeyi (Bail) Roper....... Miocene and Recent
Campylodiscus Echenets E. ..ccssesecesseeees Not uncommon Fossil in Deposits
later than Miocene
also Recent.
Brackish and Fresh
Water.
Corataulus turgidus Ei...+..secsecseseeesevees Later than Miocene,
| also Recent
Coscinodiscus apiculatus E..cccsecessseseeeee Miocene and Recent
Coscinodiscus Asteromphalus E. ...+++..0000 Miocene and Recent
Coscinodiscus bulliens A. QS. veces coeseeees Miocene and Recent
Coscinodiscus marginatus Fi.c..ssssssecseess Miocene and Recent
Coscinodiscus radiatus E....ccccecescsseseeee Miocene and Recent
Coscinodiscus robustus Grev...sscesesecevees Miocene
| Craspedodiscus Coscinodiscus E.......000+00 Miocene and Recent
Lup: discus radiatus Bail. .....+++ sssecseee Recent

Although var. antigua Cox is found)

NMIUME BUTOGLTIO; (ds cave andsconsscnghde sap als | Later than Miocene
Gontothecium Rogersit Bu..cccccsescececeeees Miocene and Recent
DEPMITIODESETS IAETES Wave cscacnsenvecssevuccnevee Miocene and Recent
RAR MMULL QUEL» ais dnstacs ss sect v deeciness > ‘Miocene and Recent
Melosira crenulata var, ambigua Grun.

Fossil in Hungarian deposit (Mio-

cene?), as, however, there are numer-

ous varieties which are recent, this)

RE IS Mada Nis chamss sen stdtarguavecses Fresh Water ?
Navicula Gruendleri A. S cicecece sececeee Recent, marine
MSUACHLE MRAIOF. Ott ccccisconscssabiiepsvevs Common Miocene to Pleisto-

cene, also Recent
lresh Water.

Plagiogramma Gregorianum Grey... «++. Miocene and Recent
Pseudauliscus radiatus A. S..ccse. sesseenes ; Miocene and Recent
Stauroneis Phanicenteron (Nitzsch) E...| Later than Miocene,
also Recent Fresh
| Water.
Stephanopyxts aculeata E.ecsccseccessessssess ‘Miocene
Stephanopyxis Corona (E.) Gran. sees ‘Miocene
Triceratium robustum Grey. ecccre csessees Miocene and Recent
Triceratium semicirculare Bt iscccccssseeees Miocene

characteristic of that period, while of the remaining 25, only 4,
Campylodiscus Echeneis, Cerataulus turgidus, Eupodiscus radiatus

424 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

and Stauroneis Phoenicenteron can be considered as distinctive of
later deposits.

‘In general, therefore, it may be said that the deposit can be con-
sidered as a mixture of Miocene and later deposits, though the lat-
ter need not necessarily have been so very recent.”

From an examination of the above list of diatoms the present
author would classify them as follows: Six forms characteristically
Miocene, 19 forms that have survived from Miocene to present time
and are now living, and 4 either Pliocene or Pleistocene, or both,
and also now living. These 4 are the same as those noted above by
C. S. Boyer as distinctive of deposits later than Miocene.

If the 19 survivals belong to present time, there are 23 that may
be considered recent, or comparatively so. Respecting the ex-
clusively Miocene forms it is probable that these have been brought
down in post-Miocene times by the James River in its passage over
the original beds from Richmond southeastward. It is probable
also that some of the individuals of perhaps each of the 19 species
having the more cosmopolitan range were also similarly introduced.
We are confirmed in this view by the occurrence among the char-
acteristic Miocene diatoms of Actinoptychus Heliopelta, a form which
the writer has frequently found heretofore both in outerops and in
well borings, but always at or below the base of the great 300 to
400 feet Miocene diatomaceous clay bed of the Atlantic Coastal
Plain. In Maryland it occurs at the-base of this bed in well bor-
ings at Crisfield and in outcrops at and near Nottingham on the
Patuxent River. In Virginia it has been found in outcrops at
Petersburg’and Bermuda Hundred. In New Jersey, owing proba-
bly to a thickening of the basal beds of the Miocene, it occurs some
distance below the main diatom bed. It has thus been found in out-
crops near, Shiloh and in well borings at Asbury Park and Wild-
wood. At the latter place it was found in a thin seam of clay about
250 feet below the bottom of the great diatom bed. In each instance
just cited its position is at or very near the base of the Miocene,
either resting directly upon or only a short distance above green-
sands of Eocene Age. Many other borings have been made in New
Jersey through or nearly through these beds, from which the writer
has had complete series of specimens every 10 to 20 feet apart, all
of which he has examined, but in none of them has he ever found A.
Heliopelta stratigraphically higher than near the base of the Mio-
cene. Now the diatom bed outcropping at Richmond, Petersburg

pal

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 425

and vicinity has been found by the writer in the Norfolk well bor-
ing at between the depths of 585 and 625 feet, while the continuation
upward of the same clay contained sponge spicules up to about 400
feet from the surface. No diatoms or sponge spicules were found
higher in this well excepting between the depths of 25 feet and 65
feet, where astratum, probably the equivalent of the Dismal Swamp
bed, contained these same micro-organisms, though, as in the Dis-
mal Swamp deposit, very sparingly. The Miocene beds at Bermuda
Hundred and Petersburg are rich in diatoms, and especially so in
A. Heliopelta, and since the diatoms in the Dismal Swamp deposit
were exceedingly meager, (perhaps not one per cent. of the entire
matrix), and since A. Heliopelta and other Miocene species were
scantiest in numbers ofall the contained forms, we cannot, in view of
all the facts, consider that the introduction of these Miocene forms has
been by other than mechanical means in post-Miocene times. At what
period that subsequent time was, three of the more recent forms,
Campylodiseus Echeneis, Cerataulus turgidus and Stauroneis Phoeni-
centeron, shed much light. We will now particularly notice each of
these forms.

In a mass of brick clay from a low terrace at Bridgeton, N. J.,
which terrace is assigned by the New Jersey State Geological
Survey report to a very recent geological phase of the gravels of
that State, the writer found a very considerable number of diatoms
not at all Miocene in aspect, and among them a large number of
the same species of Cerataulus.

Respecting Campylodiscus Echeneis it may be stated that this form
has been recorded as living principally in brackish waters the world
over, though Prof. C.S. Boyer informs the writer that he has found
it in a fresh water reservoir at Philadelphia, supplied from the
Schuylkill River. Though not, however, heretofore recorded, so far
as we are able to learn, as fossil, yet the writer has so seen it in a
low level clay from near Buckshutem on the Maurice River, below
Millville, N. J., the stratigraphical position of which is the equiva-
lent of the Bridgeton clay above referred to.

On a map of the surface formations of New Jersey in the annual
report of the geological survey of that State for 1897 there is shown
a low level formation on the shores of Raritan Bay and thence border-
ing the Atlantic Ocean from Sandy Hook to the Cape May peninsula,
which it either entirely covers or nearly so, and thence extending
up the Delaware River nearly to Trenton. This low lying terrace,

28

426 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

which is stated in the text to have an elevation of 30 to 50 feet, ex-
teuds inland along the courses of the following streams: some 20
miles up the Mullica and the Great Egg Harbor Rivers, about 25
miles up the Maurice River, and some 10 miles up the Cohansey
River. These measurements were made in a direct line from the
mouths of the rivers and not by following the winding courses thereof.
The surface deposit of this terrace has been named by Prof. R. D.
Salisbury the Cape May Formation. He describes it as a “ thin
body of loam, sand and gravel of lesser age than any ” of the surface
formations of the State described in the same paper “except pos-
sibly the drift of the last glacial epoch.” He further says: ‘“'The
strict contemporaneity of this formation with the drift of the last
glacial epoch is not established, but it is probably at least partly
contemporaneous with it, though its later portions may be still
younger.” ® To this formation belong the diatom clays noted in the
preceding paragraphs as at Bridgeton and Buckshutem.

Stauroneis Phoenicenteron has never been seen by the writer in
any of the numerous specimens of Miocene diatomaceous clays which
he has examined during the past ten years, nor has it, so far as he
has been able to learn from consultation of the literature relating
to it, been recorded by others as occurring in beds of that age. It
has, however, a world wide distribution in freshwater deposits of
decidedly later age. Ehrenberg, in the Atlas of his Mikrogeologie,
notes it in various sands and black, white and gray earths at numer-
ous localities (named below) most of which the writer would char-
acterize from their position stratigraphically and geographically as
decidedly post-miocene and some of them as clearly glacial and
post-glacial. Thus Ehrenberg lists this diatom on page 19 of his
Atlas as occurring in various earths and at different places,
as follows:—in lake mud from Loka, Sweden; in Bergmehl from
Degenfors and Lillhaggsjohn, Sweden, also from Santa Fiora, Italy,
and from the south point of Tierra del Fuego, S. A.;in Blatterkohl
from Westerwalde, Prussia; in white earth from Guatemala; in Kiesel-
guhr from Andover, Pelham and Wrentham, Massachusetts; from
Ceyssatt, France ; from Down, Mourne Mountains, Ireland; from
New Hampshire and from Earlton, Nova Scotia; in white marl
(Mergee) ; from Farmington, Conn.; in Meteorpapier, from Rauden,
Prussia; in tripoli and polishing powder, from Moscow, Russia;
and in Weisenpapier, from Freiberg, Saxony.

® Annual Report Geol. Survey of N. J., 1897, page 19.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 427

It has also been found fossil by Prof. C. S. Boyer, in specimens of
clays obtained by the writer from the upper portions of two well
borings, one on the beach at Wildwood,’ Cape May Co., N. J., and
the other at Rock Hall,* Md., on the eastern side of Chesapeake
Bay opposite the mouth of the Patapsco river. The clays referred to
occupied, at Wildwood, the interval between the depths of 79 and
181 feet, and at Rock Hall a similar interval between the depths of
50 and 130 feet. The clays at both localities contained a mixture

_of fresh-water and marine diatoms, the numbers of individuals of the
fresh-water forms somewhat exceeding those of the marine. That
these two deposits are probably synchronous in age appears probable
from the similarity of their position next below the surface forma-
tion (Cape May formation ?), also from the similarity of the as-
sembled forms of diatoms, and from the occurrence in both of a
unique diatom, Polymyzxus coronalis, L.W. Bailey, not however, found
in our examination of the forms in the Dismal Swamp bed. This
form has not been heretofore known except as living off the mouths
of the Para and Amazon Rivers in South America. That the two
deposits are much later than Miocene in age may be inferred from
the fact that the one at Rock Hall lies directly upon the Rancocas
division of the Cretaceous, the Miocene itself resting at a higher
level upon Eocene beds a few miles southward and eastward; while
at Wildwood the top of the great Miocene diatom clay bed uccurs
nearly 200 feet deeper than the base of the deposit under considera-
tion, or at the depth of 370 feet from the surface. The well borings,
however, show that apparently the same Miocene clay, but without
diatoms, commences at the depth of 294 feet.

These two deposits containing Po/ymyrus coronalis and Stauroneis
Phoenicenteron, the writer suggests were probably laid down in the
deltas of the ancient Delaware and Chesapeake Rivers at the time
when the shore line of the Atlantic Coastal plain was many miles
eastward of its present position and much of the now submerged
portion of the plain was above sea level.

SUMMARY.

After considering the position of the Dismal Swamp bed, beneath
a low lying terrace on the eastern margin of the Coastal Plain and
evidently resting immediately upon fossiliferous Miocene beds which

An, Report Geol. Survey of N. J. for 1894, page 165.
*In manuscript, not yet published.

428 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

can be traced westward along the James River some eighty miles
or more to Richmond, Va., and after a careful study and analysis of
the contained mollusks and diatoms the conclusion before stated has
been reached that both the macroscopic and the microscopic fossils
indicate a mechanical mixture of the Miocene and a comparatively
recent fauna and flora’ the Miocene forms having been contributed
and brought down by erosion from the broad and somewhat higher
and gradually rising Miocene belt to the westward, while the more
recent forms lived and were deposited as the bed was laid down in
a more recent geological time.

If we accept the conclusions of all the authorities we have quoted
who have studied the Dismal Swamp deposit, we should have to re-
fer this bed unequivocally to the Pliocene period. The writer, how-
ever, cannot resist inferring from the scantiness of Miocene fossils,
which, as already noted, he views as mechanically introduced—
from the wide range of many of the Pliocene mollusks, extending
down to the present time—from the very decidedly recent aspect of
many other shells—and from the even more decidedly recent aspect
of some of the diatoms, a more recent date for the bed, and therefore
considers that it cannot belong to a period earlier than the latest
Pliocene, and that it may, indeed, even belong quite within Pleisto-
cene time.

Specimens of all the mollusks listed from the Dismal Swamp
Canal have been presented to the Academy of Natural Sciences by
M. Homer, and are now arranged in its paleontological collection,
while strewn mounts of the diatoms have been deposited in the cab-
inet of the Biological and Microscopical Section by the author.

® Diatoms are now generally regarded as belonging to the plant kingdom.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 429

SEPTEMBER 6.
Proressor Henry A. Pipssry in the Chair.

Eight persons present.

SEPTEMBER 13.
Mr. BensJAmMiIn SmitH LyMan in the Chair.
Seventeen persons present.

A paper entitled “ New Cretaceous Fossils from an Artesian
Well-Boring at Mount Laurel, N. J.,” by C. W. Johnson, was pre-
sented for publication.

SEPTEMBER 20.
The President, Samuet G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Fifteen persons present.
The deaths of Wm. H. DeCamp and J. C. H. Crosse, Correspond-
ents, were announced.

A paper entitled “Contributions to a Knowledge of the Hymen-
optera of Brazil, No. 5, Vespids,” by Wm. J. Fox, was presented
for publication.

SEPTEMBER 27,
The President, Samuret G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Thirty persons present.

A paper entitled “ New Species of Odontostomus from Brazil
and Argentina,” by Henry A. Pilsbry, was presented for publica-
tion.

_ Thomas L. Montgomery was elected a member.
The following were ordered to be printed :—

430 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

HYALODENDRON NAVALIUM, A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES OF
EUPLECTELLID SPONGE.

BY J. PERCY MOORE,

The type of this genus and species is one of a small collection of
silicious sponges gathered in Japan in 1893 by Mr. Frederick
Stearns, of Detroit, Michigan, and sent to the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia for determination. They were collected by
native fishermen and brought into Yokohama harbor by the dredge
boats. The single specimen of Hyalodendron is the only one which
had been reported by the fishermen. Other than this, no data relat-
ing to the collection are available. The specimens are accompanied
by a set of sketches by a native artist.

The species represented are, in addition to Hyalodendron, Euplee-
tella, anchor spicules of probably E. aspergillum Owen, Hyalonema
reflera Ijima, a fine specimen of this recently described species and
Farrea occa (Bowerbank) Carter, an unusually large example.

HYALODENDRON nov. gen.
Hyalodendron navalium n. s.

The general appearance of the type and only specimen is well
shown on Plate XIX, reproduced from a sketch by a Japanese artist
which accompanied the collection. The sponge was originally
about 18 inches high, but is now slightly mutilated at the summit.
It presents a firm base, above which rises a slender tapering body or
stalk, ending in a sharp apex, and bearing numerous lateral branches
of various sizes, at the bases of which the sponge wall is perforated
by large crater-like openings.

The base is a thin, flat and spreading, encrusting layer, which has
evidently conformed itself to the rocky bottom to which the sponge
was adherent, some fragments of which are still attached. Its
upper surface is uneven, but smooth and without any spines or pro-
cesses. It is perforated by three or four small holes. It measures
34x 3% inches in diameter, and is from ;; to 4 inch thick. The
spicules of this region are mostly slender, more or less curved,
pointed diacts of various sizes, most of them being almost fibre-like.
They cross one another at various angles and are firmly united into

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 431

a hard stony mass by a secondary deposit of silica which encrusts
and cements them, with the formation of numerous synaptacula
(Plate XX, fig. 6). Regular or modified hexacts are occasionally
found wedged in interstices, but the appearance is that the demalia
and hypodermalia have been worn or decayed away from this region...

The sponge body or stalk rises from near the centre of the base
to a height of 16 inches. Its summit is frayed out and must have
been originally at leastan inch higher. Itis terete and tapers gently
and regularly from the base, which is }} of an inch in diameter, to
the broken apex, ¢ of an inch in diameter. A well developed
gastral cavity extends through the sponge body from base to sum-
mit, so that it is hollow throughout. Toward the base the walls
are thick and firm, owing to secondary incrustations of silica, while
above they are much thinner and quite friable.

The lower 3} inches of the body have a texture and appearance
similar to the base, but the transition to the branched upper region
is gradual. A very few short blunt spines are borne on the sponge
wall, and these partake of the stony hardness and silicious incrus-
tations which characterize the walls of this region. Two longer
spines, having more of the character of the upper branches, are
present, the first 1 inch, and the second 24 inches above the base.
These ‘are respectively { and } of an inch long. The former is
situated just above the first crater-like opening in the sponge walls.
This region of the sponge has a smooth hard surface, and like the
basal portion lacks the superficial layers of spicules.

At about 34 inches above the base, loose flesh spicules become
more plentiful and soon form a thick soft layer, looking very much
like a covering of a fine cotton wool paste, or as if the specimen had
been dipped into a thick soap lather, which had been allowed to dry
on its surface. Coincident with this change in the character of the
surface, spinous processes become more numerous and very much
longer, but in this specimen the lower spines are imperfect. While
in the lower portion (4) of the sponge the processes remain compar-
atively simple and unbranched, those which densely cover the upper
half of the stalk are often very long (the longest nearly 5 inches
and 7; of an inch in diameter at the base), much and complexly
branched, sometimes to the third order. Wherever such branches
cross they are united by secondary anastomoses, due to the concre-
sence of the parenchyma. The principal branches vary in diameter ,
from 7; to :‘; of an inch, but two may fuse at their bases and form

432 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

a much larger mass. The smaller may be unbranched and reach
a length of two inches, but are usually provided with a few small
branches. The larger are complexly branched, the secondary
branches usually forming angles of about 60° with the principal
branches, which latter arise from the central trunk at angles of 80°-
90°.

While the base and lower part of the stalk are perforated by
only a few small pores, the upper part has numerous conspicuous
oscula. They perforate the sponge wall between the larger bundles
of fibrous spicules, the outer flesh layers rising $ of an inch as 7
delicate crater-like rims, scarcely thicker than a sheet of paper.
The oscula are usually elongated in the longitudinal direction of the
sponge, and in that case have a length of 5 to 6 mm., by a width of
2 to 3 millimeters. In such the rim flares out somewhat at the
sides and contracts at the ends, so that its outer edge has a nearly
circular outline. Some few of the oscula are circular at their
gastral ends. With regard to their distribution on the sponge
walls, the lower-most is situated 24 inches above the base, and its
rim is thickened like the neighboring sponge walls. Most of them
evidently stand in some relation to the larger branches. Three
occur at precisely the level where the largest spine arises, and two
near each of most of the other large branches. In many cases
the oscula lie directly at the bases of the large branches, their
crater-like rims being continuous on one side, most often above,
with the substance of the branch. Looking through the oscula on
to the gastral surface, this is seen to be formed of a fibrous network
of spicules, without the woolly surface covering of loose spicules.

The specimen is a macerated one; as I was unable to dissect
or section it, the arrangement of the chambers and the exact ar-
rangement of the spicules could not be determined. The bulk of
the skeleton of the sponge wall is, however, chiefly composed of
bundles of long fibre like diacts of various sizes and characters.
These are disposed in bundles which run longitudinally through the
sponge body, but divide and reunite in such a way as to form a net-
work, in the meshes of which the oscula open, and which raise more
or less evident ridges on both gastral and dermal surfaces. In the
upper part of the sponge these diacts remain free, but below they
are cemented together as above described. They exist in great
variety, but the majority have the form represented in Plate XX,
fig. 1, in which the transverse rays are reduced to minute nodules ;

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 433

in others they are much more evident, or may be entirely wanting.
Some of this type are straight, but most are more or less curved,
those surrounding the oscula being often semicircular. The ends
may be simply pointed, or variously enlarged, and either smooth or
roughened with minute spines as shown by a few examples in
Plate XX, figs. 2, 3,4 and 5. The dermalia consist of sword shaped
hexacts, which are so numerous as to suggest the specific name of the
species. Like the diacts, these differ much in the relative develop-
ment of the several limbs, any of which may be straight or more or
less curved or even sharply bent. Fig. 9 shows the most typical
proportions, but the handle may be scarcely longer than the blade
or not more than 4 as long. The cross pieces may be straight or
curved, or sharply bent upward (Plate XX, fig. 12). The handle
differs most, being slender and pointed, club-shaped or knobbed, and
usually sculptured throughout or at the tip only. The points of
the other rays are also usually spinose. The sword handles support
the skin, and are not furnished with floricomes at their distal ends ;
instead they are surrounded by bundles of minute acicular diacts,
Plate XX, fig. 7.

The hypodermalia are regular hexasts, oxy-hexasters, which have
the principal rays prolonged (Plate XX, fig. 8), rosettes which vary
in the length of the principal rays, as shown by two examples in
Plate XX, figs. 14 and 15, and discohexasters of great beauty and
symmetry of form. One of the simplest of the latter is shown in
Plate XX, fig. 16. This has the principal rays well developed, while
each group of terminal rays has sixteen members, the pin-head
shaped disks having again 16 marginal teeth. Other discohexasters
have the number of terminal rays much greater, or the principal
rays shortened, so that all appear to arise from a central sphere.

The gastralia are also sword-shaped hexacts without bundles of
accessory acicular spicules. This sponge would appear to be the
type of a new subfamily of Euplectellide.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES.

Plate XIX. Hyalodendron navalium n.s. The type specimen as
it appeared when first taken, from a drawing by a
Japanese artist. x yy.

Plate XX. Illustrating some of the forms of the spicules of
Hyalodendron navalium.

Fig. 1. One of the smaller simple diacts of the kind which make

up the interior skeleton of the spines and processes, and

434

Fig. 2
Fic. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
Figs. 10,
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Fig. 15
Fig. 16

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

which run in bundles through the sponge walls. x 56. 1 a,
middle region of the same showing a slight enlargement,
and the axial fibre with the two reduced transverse axes.
x 250.

. A short, thick diact, with transverse limbs entirely sup-

pressed, with slightly enlarged rounded ends, and axial
fibre almost gone. x 56.

. A small, slender and straight diact, with transverse limbs.

indicated as rounded nodules, with ends pointed and
roughened, and axial fibres complete. x 56. 3, one of the
ends of the same. x 250.

. A small, slender, curved oxy-diact, with transverse limbs

distinctly indicated as four nodules. x 56. 3a, middle
region of the same. x 250. 3b, one of the ends of the
same. x 250.

. A peculiarly modified end of a large diact, showing a zig-

zag course of the axial fibre. x 56.

. A portion of the sponge base showing the secondary union

of spicules by the formation of encrusting and cementing
deposits and numerous synaptacula. At a, the encrusting
layers are represented as broken away, exhibiting the
original diact. x 56.

. A group from one of the bundles of minute acicular diacts.

found in the superficial parenchyma about the handles of
the sword-shaped hexacts. x 56.

. An oxy-hexasterin which the axial rays are continued be-

yond the place of branching. x 500

. One of the usual type of sword-shaped hexact. x 56. 9a,
b, c, are respectively enlarged views of the handle, tip of

one of the cross pieces and the point. x 250.

11 and 12. Three of the sword-shaped spicules. x 56. 10
is short and regular; 11 has the blade bent and the cross.
rays rough, uneven and thickened; 12 is straight, with
the cross pieces bent sharply upward toward the handle.

. A small, spiny, regular oxy-hexact. x 56. 13a, one of the

rays enlarged. x 250.

. A rosette in which the axial rays are continued beyond the

disk, and the number of terminal rays is small and con-
fined to the margin of the disk. x 250.

. A rosette with roughened axial or stem rays terminated

by disks bearing a close brush of fine terminal rays. x 340,

. One of the simpler disco-hexasters with distinct stem rays,

and sixteen terminal rays in each group. The disks or
pin-heads have usually sixteen marginal teeth each. x 250-

|

oo Ci 2 a |

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 435

ENVIRONMENTAL AND SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN CREPIDULA.
BY EDWIN G. CONKLIN, PH. D.

I. The genus Crepidula Lam. is represented on our North Atlan-
tic Coast by at least three species, viz.: C. fornicata Lam., CO. plana
Say, and C. convexa Say, while the species C. adunca Sby. and C.
navicelloides are abundant on the Pacifie Coast of the United States.

All these species are more or less completely sedentary, and they
are usually, though not invariably, carried about by other animals
with whom they are messmates and upon whom they are securely
fixed. All the larger species of Crepidula are immovably fixed to
one spot, e.g., C. fornicata, C. plana, C. navicelloides, while the
smaller species C. conveca and C. adunca are able to move about to
a limited extent.

Among these smaller forms the characters of the shell are fairly
constant, but among the larger forms it is well-nigh impossible to
tell what the normal or usual form is; this is especially the case
with C. plana, where it is a rare thing to find two shells alike.

Even among the smaller species there are marked local varieties
depending upon the immediate environment, e. g., C. convexra as
found on I//yonassa and Littorina shells is deeply convex and very
darkly pigmented. On oyster shells it is very much flatter and
lighter in color, and is frequently mottled as shown in Plate XXI,
Row 2. This local variety has been considered a distinct species,
viz.: C. glauca Say ; its anatomical and embryological characters
show, however, that it is not specifically distinct from C. convesa.
The same is true of Lea’s species, C. acuta, which is merely a local
form of C. conveza.

Among the larger and more sedentary species, C. fornicata and C.
plana, the most remarkable differences in the shape of the shells may
be observed due to the character of the surface upon which they are
attached. “ Upon a smooth, plane surface, the shell is regular and
unusually broad and flat; on a convex surface it is deep and highly
arched ; on a concave surface it is concave; on a twisted surfaee, such
as the columella of Neverita, it is twisted; on an irregular surface,
such as a rough stone, it is irregular; if pressed upon from the sides,

436 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

the animal and shell become long and narrow; if growth is limited
in front, the shell becomes short and broad; if limited on all sides,
the shell may increase greatly in thickness but remains small in area,
completely filling the space in which it isfound. In such cases, the
lines of growth are crowded close together, and the very edge of the
shell may be as thick as any other portion.

“The cause of these variations is not far to seek ; the shape of the
shell is conditioned by the shape and position of the mantle edge;
the mantle is moulded oyer the surface upon which the animal rests ;
and consequently the shape of the shell comes to correspond in time
to any sort of a surface upon which the animal is attached.”

Arnold Graf? has described a case in which a shell of C. forni-
cata was marked by radial folds corresponding to those of a Peeten
upon which the Crepidula was attached. I have, myself, repeatedly
noticed similar cases.

More recently, Bradney B. Griffin,’ has called attention to a Pla-
cuanomia shell which was found attached to a valve of Sazidomus,
and which was marked by lines and folds exactly coinciding with
the concentric markings of the Saxidomus.

Griffin also remarks that many similar phenomena have been ob-
served and commented upon by paleontologists in fossil shells, and
he refers particularly to two papers by Keyes‘ on the modifications
of Platyceras shells due to the surface of attachment.

All these modifications are similar to those which I have observed
in Crepidula, and are, undoubtedly, due to the causes which have
been mentioned.

Such irregularities of form could scarcely be called dimorphism,
though they might properly enough be called environmental poly-
morphism. In no case which I have observed is there any evidence
that any of these modifications of form are becoming hereditarily
fixed, though they may be found in many individuals and have fre-
quently been considered of specific value (e. g., Crepidula glauca
and (©. acuta).

? Conklin, The Embryology of Crepidula. Jour. Morph., Vol. XIII, 1897.

7A. Graf, Adaptation of the shells of Crepidula fornicata to the shell of Pec-
ten Jacobeus, Trans. New York Academy of Sciences, April 3, 1896.

* Griffin, Adaptation of the shell of P/acuanomia to that of Saxidomus with
remarks on shell adaptation in general. Trans. New York Academy of Sci-
ences, Feb 22, 1897.

* Keyes, The Sedentary Habits of P/atyceras, Am. Jour. of Science, October,
1888, and On the Attachment of P/atycerasto Palaeocrinoids and its effects in
modifying the forms of the Shell, Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., Vol. XXV, 1888.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 437

II. An interesting case of environmental dimorphism to which I
wish to call attention is found in a race of dwarfs which is specifi-
eally identical with C. plana (Plate XXII, Rows 3 and 4).

This species is found most abundantly inside dead shells of Never-
ita inhabited by the large hermit crab, Eupagurus Bernhardus. In
this position individuals grow to a large size, mature females fre-
quently reaching a length of 2 inches and a breadth of 14 inches.
On the other hand, the dwarfs referred to are found within dead
shells of I//yonassa or Littorina inhabited by the little hermit, Hupa-
gurus longicarpus, and never exceed j inch in length by ¢ in breadth,
i. e., they are about 4 the linear dimensions of the larger form. I
removed from their shells a large number of individuals of both the
common and the dwarfed forms, and estimated the volume of the
body in the following way: The individuals were first placed on
blotting paper to remove any excess of water, and then a given
number were dropped into a known volume of water in a finely gradu-
ated tube. In this way the average body volume could be deter-
mined with sufficient accuracy. The results of very many such
measurements in which mature females of all sizes were taken with-
out any conscious selection of large or small individuals show that
the average body volume of a mature female of C. plana is § ce.,
while the average volume of a mature female of the dwarf variety is
ty cc., i.e., the average body volume of the typical form is about
thirteen times that of the dwarf. This disproportion in size would
be much greater if comparison were made between the largest indi-
viduals obtainable in the two classes since the dwarfs are much more
uniform in size than the type forms.

This difference in size is not due merely to differences in the age
of individuals compared, since only sexually mature females were
chosen for purposes of measurement; all the individuals measured
were carrying egg masses, and unless we assume that sexual matur-
ity appears much earlier in the dwarfs than in the giants, we must
conclude that they were of approximately the same age. A careful
study of the shells of the dwarfs and giants also strengthens the view
that the former are, on the whole, as old as the latter; for while the
dwarf shells are much smaller and more delicate than those of the
giants, they are, in no sense, immature in shape or character; the
lines of growth are closely crowded together, the margin of the shell
is frequently thickened, and its general shape differs from that of an ‘
immature shell,

438 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

The dwarfs are perfectly formed in all respects, and all organs of
the body seem to be reduced in size in about the same proportion.’
Strangely enough, however, the cells composing the various organs
of the dwarfs are not reduced in size. It must follow, therefore, that
a smaller number of cells are present in the various organs and also
in the entire body of the dwarf than in the giant. It is an almost

impossible task to count the actual number of cells present, even in-

a very small organ. I have, however, been able to count the num-
ber of cells in a cross section of the rectum, and while the size of the
cells here, as everywhere, is the same in both varieties, the number
of the cells in the sections is greater in the giants than in the dwarfs.
Of all the cells of the body the ova are most readily enumerated ;
they are laid in capsules which can be easily counted, and each of
which contains a nearly constant number of eggs. Oft repeated ob-
servations show that, without exception, the fertilized but unseg-
mented eggs of the dwarfs are of exactly the same size as those of
the giants, but are very much fewer in number; e. g., the following
table of averages has been obtained from a large number of obser-
vations :—

Diam. of egg. No.ofcaps. Eggs in caps. Total No.

C. plana (type) .136 mm. 51 176 9,000
C. plana (dwarf) .136 mm. 48 64 3,070

It is notable that the number of capsules formed is nearly the
same in the two varieties, though there is a great difference in the
number of eggs inclosed in each capsule. _

In Crepidula, therefore, the cell size is constant, and variations in
the size of the body are due to variations in the number of cells
present,

This conclusion leads naturally to an inquiry as to the cause of
the smaller number of cells, and hence the smaller size of the body
of the dwarfs as compared with the giants. In this connection it
will be remembered that Semper® long ago observed that the pond

°It is worthy of note that certain organs, particularly the gill filaments, are
reduced in uméer in the smaller individuals but not in size, e. g., the num-
bers of gill filaments in three different individuals were as follows :—

Mature female . . Vol. of body, .75 cc., Gill filaments, 204.
Immature female . Vol. of body, .05 cce., Gill filaments, 53.
Dwarffemale . . Vol. of body, .05 cc., Gill filaments, 58.

® Semper, Ueber die Wachsthumsbedingungen der ZLimneuss tagnalis. Arb.
aus dem. Zool. Zoot. Inst. Wiirzburg, Vol. 1, 1874, also Animal Life as af-
fected by the Natural Conditions of Existence, 1879.

here eS Vs

rm

Pon ee oe

<a

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 439

snail (Limnea stagnalis) remained small when grown in a small
quantity of water, while the larger the quantity of water, up to 4,000
or 5,000 ec., the larger the snails reared in it. As the result of nu-
merous experiments, Semper concluded that this difference in size
was not due to differences in the quantity of food, inorganic salts or
oxygen obtainable, and he suggested that some unknown substance
must be present in the water which acts as a stimulus to growth
without actually contributing to it.

More recently, DeVarigny’ has repeated these observations, and
concludes, as the result of several experiments, that the relative vol-
ume of the water, in which the snails are grown, is much less import-
ant than the relative amount of surface exposed. He holds that the
larger the surface the more exercise the animals are able to take,
and, therefore, the larger they become. His results show that Sem-
per’s conclusions are untenable, but they by no means establish his
own. It is certainly not generally true, as he holds, that physiolog-
ical or mechanical impedimenta to movement result in dwarfing.
The larger forms of C. plana are as immovably fixed as the dwarfs ;
in this case, therefore, movement can have nothing to do with body-
‘size.

In Crepidula, the dwarfed form is unquestionably correlated with
the smaller size of the shell in which it has found lodgement. It is
possible that the diminished size is due to diminished supply of food
or oxygen; however, the following observation is opposed to this
view: I have never found more than one mature female in a shell
inhabited by the small hermit, whereas, from four to eight very
large individuals may be found in the shell of a large hermit ; under
these circumstances, it seems very improbable that the difference in
size is due to differences in the amount of food or oxygen obtainable.
The most natural interpretation is that the dwarfing is due to pres-
sure which limits growth in various directions; though it must be
confessed that the shell of the dwarf remains thin and delicate,
whereas, the shells of the common form which are limited in growth
by surrounding hard parts grow thick and have a distorted appear-
ance. The fact, also, that the males of all these species, and espe-
cially of C. plana, remain very much smaller than the females (as is
pointed out in Section III), speaks against the view that the smaller
size is due to a diminution of food or oxygen, since the males have

7 DeVarigny, Experimental Evolution, 1891.

440 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

the same opportunities in this regard as the much larger females;
and the fact that the males are in no case limited for space in which
to grow, as are the females, makes against the view that their small
size, as compared with the females, is due to pressure. On the whole,
it seems to me, that some factor, other than those mentioned, is in-
volved.

Whatever the cause of the dwarfed form, it will be noted that in
Crepidula it operates by stopping cell-growth and division, and the
real causes of so fundamental a phenomenon are worthy of a more
extended study than I have, as yet, been able to devote to it.

There is good evidence that these dwarfs are not a permanent va-
riety or race. In the first place there are no anatomical differences
between the two varieties save size only; secondly, the eggs, em-
bryos and larvee of the two cannot be distinguished - thirdly, there
is evidence that the dwarfs do not produce enough eggs to continue
the variety in its present numbers, for since the type and rate of de-
velopment are the same in the two varieties, it is probable that rel-
atively no more individuals will come to maturity in the one case
than in the other, and yet every giant female produces three times
as many ova as are produced by a dwarf; the relative number of
these two varieties remains practically constant from year to year,
and, therefore, I think it must follow that the ranks of the dwarfs
are continually recruited from the descendants of the giants. Both
live together on the same beach under about the same conditions of
food, temperature and water, the embryonic and larval development
of both forms are identical, and it seems probable that the adults of
both would be the same if one was not forced by the smaller quarters
which it inhabits to remain smaller than the other. But what is
still more conclusive is the following observation: A few specimens
were found which showed by the shape and character of their shells
that at one time they had been typical dwarfs; afterward, having
been detached, they obtained a new foothold on a larger surface,
and their shells increased in size, the new portions of the shell be-
coming shaped so as to fit the surface upon which they had found a
new home. In every such shell one can recognize both the dwarf
and the normal forms. The dwarfs are what they are by reason of
external conditions, and not because of inheritance ; they are, in
short, a physiological and not a morphological variety. In such a
case the shape and size of the body, as well as the number of cells
in the entire organism, are greatly modified by the direct action of

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 441

environment. But in this case, as in that of the irregular shells
mentioned above, I have found no evidence that these modifications
have become in the least degree heritable.

III. Marked as is the environmental dimorphism in C. plana, the
sexual dimorphism is even greater. The average body volume of a
mature male of this species is about =: cc., while the volume of an
adult female is about 7 cc.; that is, the average female is almost 15
times as large as the average male. In all species of Crepidula the
males are smaller than the females, though the difference in size is
greatest in C. plana. The following table gives the actual and rel-
ative sizes of males and females of the different species :—

Actual vol. of body. Relative vol. of body.

Species Male. Female. Male. Female.
C.plana, . . 046cc. .667 ce. .. 14.5
C.adunca, . 025ce. .208 ce. if 8.3
C.convera, . .01 ec. .05 ce. ., 5.0
C. fornicata, . 1.25 ce. 1.6 cc. 1. 1.34

These averages are derived from the measurement of at least 20 ma-
ture individuals of each sex.

In the case of the males as in that of the dwarfs, the smaller size
of the body is due to the smaller number of cells present rather than
to the smaller size of the cells. Careful measurements of cells of
the intestine, stomach, liver, kidney, muscles of foot, epithelium of
gill chamber, and epithelium of gill filaments show that the cell size
remains the same in the male as in the female. Whatever the ulti-
mate cause of the smaller size of the males may be, it operates in
this case as in that of the dwarfs by causing a cessation of cell growth
and division.

In all these species the males are almost invariably found mounted
upon the shells of the females, and in plana, adunca and convexa
they are able to move about more or less freely, but the full-sized
males of fornicata are as immovably fixed to one spot as are the fe-
males. In such cases sexual union could take place only between
individuals attached near to each other. On muddy bottoms C. for-
nicata has the habit of piling together, one individual on top of
another, until there may be as many as ten or twelve individuals in
a single chain; such chains are often found in which there is not a
single male, and yet I have never found an unfertilized female.
Again, perfectly isolated females with large numbers of fertilized

29

442 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

eggs are of frequent occurrence. In such cases I was, for a long
time, puzzled to know how the eggs came to be fertilized. I after-
ward found by a study of serial sections that in the females of
all the species there is a seminal receptacle in the form of a con-
voluted tubule which opens into the oviduct, and in all mature
individuals this is filled with spermatozoa. These spermatozoa are
attached by their apices to the walls of the receptacle; it is prob-
able that they receive nutriment from these walls just as they do in
the seminiferous tubules of the male, and that. they can live indefi-
nitely in this position. Since there are myriads of these spermato-
zoa in the receptacle, and since they are carefully conserved, as is
shown by the facts that polyspermy rarely, if ever, occurs, and that
no superfluous spermatozoa are found in the egg capsules or oviduct,
it might well be that one sexual union would suffice for a life time.
In some such way as this must be explained the fact that perfectly
isolated females of C. fornicata lay eggs which are always fertilized,
though both the full grown males and females of this species are
perfectly sedentary.

In the case of the other species named, the males are never im-
movably fixed to one spot, they are able to move about slowly upon
the surface of attachment, and, if detached, can obtain a new
foothold; their shells, also, are not distorted so as to fit irregular
surfaces as is the case with the females. In all cases locomotion is
limited to small individuals. The young of all species and of both
sexes craw] about freely and rapidly. In C. convexa individuals of
both sexes retain this power to a limited extent, but the large fe-
males of adunca, navicelloides and plana become firmly fixed, whereas
the males of these species remain relatively small and retain, to a
certain extent, their power of locomotion. The larger any individ-
ual becomes, the more limited are its powers of movement, and it is
evidently in relation to this fact that the males are so much smaller
than the females; because of this marked sexual dimorphism, the
large and sedentary females may be repeatedly, or, in C. fornicata,
perhaps once for all, visited and fertilized by the smaller and motile
males.

In C. plana the shell of the male is more nearly round than that
of the female, and is usually sharply pointed at the apex; it is
thicker than an immature shell, the edges being thickened and the
lines of growth crowded together as is the case with the dwarfs. These
characters are so constant that it is usually easy to distinguish a

vi

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 443

male from an immature female, as is shown in Plate XXIII, where
immature individuals are shown in the first row, mature males in
the second, and an immature female at the right end of the third
row. To the left of this immature female are shown a number of
individuals in which the older part of the shell has the male char-
acters, while the newer part has those of the female. “ Insuch ani-
mals the penis is usually very small, and, in some cases, has almost
entirely disappeared. Quite a complete series of stages in the de-
generation of this organ was observed, from the fully-formed organ
on the one hand, to a minute papilla on the other. Sections of such
animals show that neither male nor female sexual cells are produced
at this time. The evidence seems to favor the view that we have,
in these cases, an example of proterandric hermaphroditism, but I am
not able to assert that this is really the case, although I have spent
much time in attempting to decide it.”* Further, I have not stud-
ied a sufficient number of cases to be able to decide whether this is
a regularly occurring phenomenon or only an unusual and abnor-
mal approach to hermaphroditism.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

The plates are from photographs of actual specimens, and are re-
duced about one-third in size.

Plate XXI. Row 1. C. convera from exterior of I//yonassa. The
shells are deeply pigmented and highly arched ;
3d to 6th show males attached.

Row 2. C. convexa (C. glauca Say) from flat sur-
faces, some from exterior of oyster shells. The
shells are unusually flat and broad, and those
from the oyster shells are light in color and mot-
tled with brown spots.

Row 3. First five shells are C. adunea, all with
males attached. Remainder of row and all of
Row 4. C. navicelloides; many of the shells irregu-

lar in shape.

Row 5. C. fornicata; various sizes, shapes and colors.

Plate XXII. All shells on this plate are of C. plana.

Row 1. Interior views of shells of very different
shapes, due to the characters of the surfaces of
attachment.

Row 2. Exterior views of same,

* Embryology of Crepidula, Jour. Morph., Vol, XIII.

444

Plate XXIIT.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Row 3. Exterior views of dwarfs (mature females)
from interior of J/lyonassa and Littorina shells
inhabited by the small hermit crab.

Row 4. Interior views of same. Last five shells in
row males and immature forms of dwarfs.

All shells shown are those of C. plana.

Row 1. Immature forms; not differentiated sexu-
ally.

Row 2. Mature males.

Row 3. First six, mature males; seventh to tenth,
forms intermediate between males and females;
last shell in row immature female.

Row 4. Mature females; a few with males attached.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 445

CONTRIBUTIONS TO A KNOWLEDGE OF THE HYMENOPTERA OF
BRAZIL, NO. 5.—VESPIDZ.

BY WILLIAM J. FOX.

This paper relates solely to the social wasps, which are, in the
present author’s opinion, not only distinct in their habits from the
solitary species, but differ also in having the middle abe always
with two spurs.

In stating the sex of a specimen throughout this paper I have not
been quite sure whether certain specimens represented females or
workers, and therefore, when the sex represented is other than the
male, I have written female, or worker.

I understand it is the intention of Mr. Herbert Smith to contrib-
ute a memoir on the nests of these insects of which he has a large
number. These are at present stored away in boxes and are
unavailable. Therefore, for the descriptions of the nests of the new
and other species noted herein those interested must await Mr.
Smith’s return from South America where he expects to pass two
years collecting natural history specimens.

Mischocyttarus labiatus Fabr.

Rio de Janeiro, October, November; Mararu, April; Chapada,
March, April; Uacarizal, February; Pedra Branca, April; San-
tarem. About 50 specimens.

Apoica pallida Oliv.

Rio de Janeiro, November; Chapada, January, April, October ;
Santarem. Fifteen specimens.

This is quite a variable species the body color running from
entirely whitish-yellow to dark brown. The following forms are in
the collection :

1. Entirely yellowish-white; antennwe white at tip; costal cell
clear, wings whitish.

2. Yellowish-white, with vertex, dorsulum in part, sutures of
thorax, legs, petiole at base, and apical margins of segments obscurely,
pale brown; costal cell a little ferruginous, wings whitish.

3. Same as No. 2, but with dorsulum entirely brown, which color *
is well spread out over the entire thorax but in a very pale tint;

446 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

abdomen whitish above; costal cell quite ferruginous, the wings
not whitish, dark subhyaline.

4. Head, thorax, legs and petiole quite brown, the cheeks, prono-
tum laterally, postscutellum, middle segment apically, and body of
abdomen pale yellowish ; wings colored as in No. 3.

5. Entirely brown; posterior margin of pronotum, two spots on
scutellum and postscutellum, apical margin of segments 1-5, and
greater part of sixth, yellowish wings as in No. 3. (=arborea?).

6. Dark brown, the thorax above black ; first abdominal segment
narrowly yellow at apex; wings as in No. 3; size large.

It is quite probable that A. virginea and arborea are only varieties
of A. pallida.

Synoeca testacea Sauss.

Mararu, April, May; Santarem. Eight specimens.
Synoeca surinama Linné.

A large series from Chapada, January to April, October; Uacari-
zal, February ; Rio de Janeiro, November; Santarem.

Synoeca cyanea Fabr.

Rio de Janeiro, November. Two specimens.

Synoeca azurea Sauss.

One specimen. Chapada, December. In addition to the bluer
color and prominent tubercles of petioles this species is peculiar for
its small head which is barely as wide as thorax.

The collection also contains a single ¢ specimen with the second
submarginal cell greatly narrowed above, the distance between the
first and second transverso-cubital veins at the top less than that
between the recurrent veins on the cubital vein. The head is about
as wide as thorax. Otherwise it is very close to surinama.

Polistes Ferreri Sauss.

A large series from Corumbé, Chapada, Santarem and Rio de

Janeiro.
Polistes bicolor Lep.

Two specimens. Santarem.
Polistes versicolor Oliv.

About 75 specimens. Benevedes, July ; Mararu, April; Rio de
Janeiro, October and November; Chapada, April and October;
Santarem. The maculation of abdomen varies from a simple yellow

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 447

band at apex of first segment to forms with the abdomen almost
entirely yellow.
Polistes carnifex Fabr.

Chapada, October, December, January ; Rio de Janeiro, Noyem-
ber; Corumbé, April; Santarem. Nine specimens.

Polistes ruficornis Sauss.

Chapada, February to April, June. About 35 specimens. The
amount of red and black on thoraxis variable. The prothorax and
scutellum may be either celor.

Polistes cinerascens Sauss.
Chapada, February, March, June; Rio de Janeiro, November.
Ten specimens.

Polistes pacificus Fabr.
Mararu, April; Santarem. Six specimens.

Polistes acteon Hal.
One specimen. Rio de Janeiro, November.

Polistes subsericeus Sauss.
Sixteen specimens. Chapada, March and December.

Polistes thoracicus n. sp.

Brick red; sides of middle segment, metapleura and mesopleurze
sometimes, and four hind cox, more or less, black ; wings yellow-
ish. The following parts are obscurely yellow, or of a paler tint
than most of body: head in front, cheeks, hind margin of pronotum,
tegulz, scutellum, postscutellum, apical margin of segment } and 2,
and 3-6 entirely yellow.

@.—Clypeus longer than broad, obtusely angular anteriorly ;
space between hind ocelli about equal to half that between them and
eyes, the latter separated from base of mandibles by a distance equal
to the fourth, fifth and half of sixth joints of antennze; pronotum
strongly margined ; dorsulum nearly one-quarter longer than broad ;
middle segment with indistinct transverse striations. Length 16—
17 mm.

%.—Antenne longer; striation of middle segment coarser.

Chapada, February to April. Related to P. carnifex, but is much
smaller, with black sides of thorax, comparatively longer clypeus.
Itis larger than P. ruficornis, of which it might be taken for a,
variety, and the clypeus is much longer. The coloration is quite
constant in the six specimens before me.

448 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Polistes geminatus n. sp.

Head, dorsulum and abdomen black; mouth, antenns beneath
basally, thorax on sides and beneath, legs and base of first segment,
reddish-brown ; inner and posterior orbits, clypeus at sides and
apically, inner margin of mandibles, scape beneath, line on pronotum
anteriorly and posteriorly, tegulz, line on anterior part of scutellum
and postscutellum, two broad stripes on middle segment, a small
spot near base on each side, spot at sides of scutella, and at top of
metapleurz, stripe on four hind cox, apex of middle segment, two
spots on first segment of abdomen, its posterior margin, and posterior
margin of segments 2 and 3, or 2-4, narrowly, yellow; wings light
fuso-hyaline, costal cell somewhat yellowish; femora sometimes
striped with yellow.

2? —Clypeus about as broad as long, obtusely angular anteriorly,
rather distinctly punctured ; space between hind ocelli equal to
nearly two-thirds of that between them and eyes, the space between
the latter and base of mandibles not equal to the width of the latter ;
pronotum margined ; dorsulum more than one-quarter longer than
broad. Length 14 mm.

Var.—Clypeus entirely black ; femora striped with yellow ; lateral
spot of first segment coalescing with the yellow at apex. Length
15 mm.

Chapada, March. Two specimens. Resembles P. cinerascens, but
differs in color of wings. In the bi-spotted first segment it seems to
haye some resemblance to P. biguttatus, but that species is quite
differently colored, judging from the description.

Polybia fulvofasciata DeG.

Chapada, January, April, September to December. Forty-three
specimens,

Polybia fasciata Lep.

Chapada, February, March, June, September, October. About
one hundred specimens.

Leipomeles lamellaria Mobius is colored precisely as P. fasciata
judging from the description. Are they perhaps identical? P.
fasciata is a Polybia, however.

Polybia fastidiosuscula Sauss.

Over 100 specimens. Chapada, April, September to November.
Polybia surinamensis Sauss.

tio de Janeiro (July, November); Mararu (April); Santarem.
Sixteen specimens.

|
|
|
|

= =

SS Oe ees ee

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 449

Polybia occidentalis Oliv. (—pygmea Fabr.).

About 250 specimens of typical occidentalis, and over 60 represent-
ing pygmea Fabr., which I regard as a variety of this species. The
large series before me shows that the two supposed species intergrade.
Both forms seem to occur in the same localities simultaneously.
From Chapada, Santarem and Rio de Janeiro, March, April, Sept-
ember, October. :

Quite as large a series of individuals, having the head reddish, is
also represented. This form is not distinct as a species from ocei-
dentalis. Occurs in the same regions and at same time as typical
occidentalis.

Polybia oecodoma Sauss.
Rio de Janeiro and Chapada in November. Six examples.

Polybia scutellaris White.

Chapada, March, October, December. Nearly 100 specimens, of
which 90 per cent., represent a variety with the head and part of
thorax above, rusty-red.

Polybia pumila Sauss.
About 100 specimens from Chapada and Sebastiz. March, April,
October, November.

Polybia pediculata Sauss.
Chapada, October; Paré, June; Santarem. Over 60 examples.

Polybia rejecta Fabr.

Mararu, April; Chapada, January, April, September, October ;
Santarem ; Sebastixe, October. About 50 specimens, whose colora-
tion is quite constant.

P. bicolor Smith is evidently synonymous with rejecta.

Polybia Jurinei Sauss.

Over 60 examples, not showing any variation of color. Chapada,
January, September, December; Rio de Janeiro, November; Mar-
aru, April; Santarem,

Polybia metathoracica Sauss.
Chapada and Mararu (April); Santarem. Three specimens of
the typical form.

Polybia bifasciata Sauss.
Two specimens from Santarem.

450 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

Polybia rufidens Sauss.

Two specimens. Corumbé (April); Chapada (May).
Polybia atra Oliv.

Chapada, January, March-June, August, December ; Santarem.
About 250 examples.
Polybia dimidiata Oliv.

Chapada, January, April, October to December. Thirty-four
specimens.
Polybia socialis Sauss.

A single specimen from Rio de Janeiro, November.
Polybia sylveire Sauss,

Three specimens, Rio de Janeiro, November. P. enzius Smith
seems to be identical with sylveire.

Polybia pallipes Oliv.

The series before me shows that in coloration this species merges
from the form figured by Saussure on Pl. X XV (fig. 2) of his work,
abdomen brownish or blackish, into the species known as fulvo-
fasciata DeGeer. The latter has the wings quite yellow, however,
whereas in pallipes they are subhyaline.

About 45 specimens. Chapada, January, March, April, Sept-
ember, October, December: Corumbé, April, May ; Pedra Branca,
April; Rio de Janeiro, November ; Santarem, February.

Polybia vespiceps Sauss,

Sebastize, October; Chapada. About 60 specimens.
Polybia liliacea Sauss.

A large series of this species from Chapada, March, April, Sept-
ember, October, December; Mararu, April; Santarem.
Polybia angulata Fabr.

Eleven specimens from Santarem.

Polybia carbonaria Sauss.

There is a single male in the collection from Rio de Janeiro, Nov-
ember, which I doubtfully refer to this species. Saussure described
the female only.

Polybia angulicallis Spin.

Two specimens. Santarem.

Polybia lugubris Sauss.

Rio de Janeiro, November. One specimen.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 451

Polybia flavicans Fabr. (—testacea Fabr.).

Mararu, April; Santarem. Eighteen specimens. -
Polybia paraensis Sauss.

Same localities as flavicans. Five specimens.
Polybia chrysothorax Licht.

Chapada, January-April, October; Mararu, April; Santarem.
About 40 specimens.

Polybia sericea Oliv.
Nearly 200 specimens from various localities. The coloration

seems quite constant, no specimens of the variety with ‘‘ abdomen
brunatre,” mentioned by Saussure, being present.

Polybia mexicana Sauss.

Four specimens from Rio de Janeiro in November, are perhaps
this species, as near as can be judged from the description. The legs
are apparently yellower and the body darker than in mexicana,
which species, however, is quite variable according to Saussure.

Polybia infernalis Sauss.

Santarem. Two specimens. One has quite distinct abdominal
fasciz.
Polybia emaciata Luc.

Twelve specimens from Mararu, April, and Santarem, agree with

the description of this species, except that the dark spot on vertex is
wanting.

Polybia sedula Sauss.
Over 75 specimens. Chapada, March, September, October;
Mararu, April; Sebastiz.

Polybia latior n. sp.

2 or ¥.—Black, with a silky pile; legs brownish the four hind
coxze striped with yellow, and a narrow yellow stripe on post-
scutellum.

Clypeus distinctly broader than long with tolerably strong punct-
ures ; ocelli in an equilateral triangle, the space between hind pair
equal to considerably more than half that between them and eyes ;
latter almost reaching mandibles; flagellum subclavate, the first
joint about as long as two following united; pronotum short, finely
margined ; dorsulum fully one-quarter longer than broad; middle
segment short, not longer than scutellum and postscutellum, sulcate

452 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

down middle, subconeave ; petiole of abdomen slender, but broadened
from beyond middle, so that it becomes somewhat infundibuliform,
in length longer than hind femur; remainder of abdomen ovate ;
wings brownish basally and in the costal cell, otherwise dark sub-
hyaline, with nervures and stigma brownish; third submarginal
cell rhomboidal, higher than long, its outer nervure strongly sinuate.
Length 12-13 mm.

Chapada, October. Three specimens. Belongs apparently to
Saussure’s IV Division My., and is allied to P. constructor. Viewed
from above the shape of petiole greatly resembles the lower part of
a horse’s fore leg seen from the front, the swollen portion represent-
ing the hoof.

Polybia flavitincta n. sp.

2 or ¥.—Black, with a dense silky,brown pile; flagellum, tegule
and legs from tip of femora, ferruginous brown ; a narrow line on
pronotum posteriorly, and at apex of petiole, yellowish.

Clypeus a little broader than long, with a few large punctures
anteriorly ; ocelli in a high triangle, in consequence of the hind pair
being much closer than they are to the anterior one; flagellum sub-
clavate, the first joint a little longer than the two following united ;
eyes almost reaching the mandibles; pronotum tolerably well devel-
oped above, not margined or ridged ; dorsulum broad and short, its
length barely one-fifth greater than its width ; middle segment short,
almost perpendicular, strongly suleate down middle, and with dis-
tinet separated punctures, and silvery pile apically; petiole of
abdomen elongate, about as long as hind femur, slender basally and
suddenly broadened beyond middle, so that it presents an infundi-
bulate appearance; remainder of abdomen short-ovate; superior
wings strongly yellowish anteriorly, otherwise the wings dark sub-
hyaline, nervures and stigma yellowish; second submarginal cell
quite triangular; third submarginal rhomboidal, higher than long,
distinctly narrowed above, its outer nervure a little curved near the
top. Length 14 mm.

Santarem. Two specimens. Allied to P. lugubris. In colora-
tion it more closely resembles P. angulicallis, but the prothorax is
not produced as in that species.

Polybia tinctipennis n. sp.
2 or %.—Black, with brownish silky pile; legs and tegule
brown ; posterior margins of pronotum and petiole with an obscure

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 453

narrow, yellow line; superior wings fuscous on basal two-thirds,
especially in costal cell with dark nervures, the apical third whitish-
yellow, with yellowish nervures and stigma.

Clypeus subcordate, nearly as broad as long, with large scattered
punctures throughout ; ocelli forming an almost equilateral triangle,
the space between hind pair, however, slightly less than that sepa-
rating them from the anterior one, and not nearly equal to half the
distance between them and eyes; the latter not reaching base of
mandibles, being separated from them at their closest proximity by
a distance nearly equalling the length of fourth antennal joint;
pronotum short, finely margined or carinated at the sides anteriorly,
but not medially ; dorsulum at least one-quarter longer than broad ;
scutellum, postscutellum and metathorax strongly punctured, all
three more or less suleate down middle, especially the middle
segment which has the furrow much broadened apically; sides of
thorax strongly punctured ; petiole, distinctly punctured, shorter if
anything than hind femur, somewhat clavate, being gradually
broadened from before the middle, the basal third stem-like ; remain-
der of abdomen cordate; second submarginal cell short, much higher
than long and narrowed above; third submarginal rhomboidal,
higher than long, somewhat narrowed above, the outer nervure
sinuate. Length 13 mm.

Chapada, September and December. ‘Two specimens. Belongs
to Saussure’s IV Division My. Its resemblance to P. socialis is only
superficial. The shape of petiole is nearly as in P. lugubris, but is
more slender.

Polybia chapade n. sp.

2 or ¥.—Ferruginous; body of abdomen, sides of prothorax and
mesopleurs sometimes darker; two broad oblique marks uniting in
V-form on front, and the occiput black; antenne dark above ;
clypeus, mandibles except tips, inner and posterior orbits,two oblique
lines on vertex behind ocelli, lines on pronotum anteriorly and pos-
teriorly, two rather indistinct lines on dorsulum, scutellum and post-
scutellum anteriorly, tegule, spot at top of meso- and metapleure,
two broad lines on middle segment, four anterior coxw beneath,
stripe on hind coxe, spot at tip of all femora, (sometimes obscure),
and apical margin of abdominal segments 1-3 or 1-6, or the first
only, yellowish.

Clypeus about as broad as long, not distinctly punctured ; ocelli
forming an equilateral triangle, the space between hind pair a little

454 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

less than that between them and eyes; the latter almost reaching
mandibles ; first joint of flagellum as long as the second, third and
most of fourth; pronotum short, margined; dorsulum more than
one-quarter longer than broad; middle segment broadly channelled,
down middle almost concave; petiole of abdomen about as long as
hind femur, elongate, tolerably slender, broadened gradually and
gently from beyond middle; remainder of abdomen ovate; wings
dark subhyaline, faintly yellowish in the costal cell; nervures and
stigma brownish; third submarginal higher than long, the outer
nervure curved, and just before its junction with the cubital nervure,
angulate. Length 15 mm.

Chapada, February. Three examples. Belongs to Saussure’s V,
Division Kappa, and is apparently allied to P. raphigastra. The
petiole is more broadened at apex than in P. surinamensis, and the
body quite robust.

Polybia gorytoides n. sp.

9 or ¥%.—Blackish or dark brown; head, except a broad trans-
verse stripe on vertex, thorax entirely on sides and beneath, pronotum
except an oblique stripe on each side, two stripes on dorsulum,
scutellum and postscutellum except posterior margins, middle seg-
ment except in longitudinal furrow, legs (tarsi darker), abdomen
entirely beneath, first dorsal segment at sides and apex, apical mar-
gin of dorsals 2-6, yellow, that on second dorsal extending to base
at sides.

Clypeus broader than long, with a few large punctures, its fore
margin sharply angular; ocelli forming a rather high triangle, the
space between hind pair less than that between them and anterior one,
and not equal to half the distance between them and eyes; the latter
almost reaching base of mandibles; vertex distinctly punctured ;
flagellum clavate, the first joint about as long as the two following
united; pronotum indistinctly margined ; dorsulum punctured, but
not very strongly, about one-fifth longer than broad ; middle segment
broadly furrowed, rather flat, and sloping evenly from base to apex ;
first abdominal segment subcampanulate, much shorter than hind
femur, not much longer than first hind tarsal joint; remainder of
abdomen subpyriform, very broad at base, acute at apex ; wings sub-
hyaline, very faintly yellowish along costa; nervures and stigma
yellowish ; third submarginal cell longer than high, twice as long,
or more, than second, a little narrowed above, the outer nervure
gently sinuated. Length 103 mm.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 455

Var.—Reddish-testaceous, with the yellow marking obscure, the
stripe on dorsulum wanting; black spot on vertex quite prominent.

Chapada, September; Santarem. Twelve specimens. Belongs
perhaps to Saussure’s II, Division Iota, but the third submarginal
cell is longer than high ; otherwise it agrees with the characteristics
of that group. It has a strong superficial resemblance to some
species of Gorytes. The variety mentioned comes from Santarem.

Polybia suffusa n. sp.

9 or ¥.—Black; scape and pedicel, pronotum more or less,
body of abdomen, and legs in part, obscure ferruginous-brown ;
mandibles, fore margin of clypeus, spot on inner orbits at base of
elypeus and at bottom of cheeks, pronotum anteriorly and posteriorly,
two spots on mesopleura, one at top of metapleura, scutellum, post-
scutellum, middle segment except on sides, base of petiole and a
fascia at its apex which is extended along the sides, and a fascia at
apex of segments 2—5, yellow; head and thorax with a golden pile,
not very dense, however.

Clypeus broader than long, not distinctly punctured, its fore mar-
gin acutely angulate; front with shallow punctures; ocelli form a
high triangle; eyes barely reaching base of mandibles, at any rate they
are more distant than in P. pediculata, to which suffusa is related ;
flagellum clavate, the first joint nearly as long as three following
united; dorsulum about as broad as long; middle segment with
shallow punctures, strongly furrowed down middle, more so than in
pediculata; petiole, if anything, slightly longer than hind femur,
slender, strongly dentate behind middle, and a little dilated from
the teeth to apex; remainder of abdomen cordate; wings sub-
hyaline, strongly iridescent; nervures and stigma dark brown;
third submarginal longer than high, three times as long as second,
slightly narrowed above, the outer nervure sinuous. Length 7-8 mm.

Chapada, May and October. About 60 specimens. This species
is closely allied to P. pediculata, but differs in coloration, less tri-
angular second submarginal, and generally more slender form.
The petiole is shaped almost precisely as in pediculata.

Polybia frontalis n. «p.

9 or ¥,and ¢.—Black; front, clypeus and most of scape, red-
dish-yellow ; posterior orbits, narrow line on pronotum anteriorly
and posteriorly, spot beneath wings, postscutellum except apex, tips
of all femora, spot at tips of four anterior tibiw, and a narrow line,

456 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

sometimes wanting at apex of petiole, pale yellow; mandibles red-
dish.

Clypeus with shallow punctures, broader than long, obtusely
angular anteriorly ; ocelli forming a low triangle in consequence of
the hind pair being nearly twice as far apart as they are from the
anterior one, the distance between the hind pair about equal to that
between them and eyes; the latter almost reaching base of mandi-
bles; flagellum subclavate, the first joint about as long as the follow-
ing two united; pronotum short, margined ; dorsulum barely longer
than broad, middle segment short, rather concave, with a narrow
raised line down middle on each side of which there is a furrow;
petiole shorter than hind femur, elongate and tolerably stout, gradu-
ally enlarged from near base, much more slender than in P. socialis ;
remainder of abdomen subovate; legs robust; wings subhyaline
throughout; nervures and stigma dark; third submarginal cell
higher than long, the outer nervure angulate before its junction with
the cubital vein. Length 11-12 mm.

g .—Colored like 9 or 3%, but having the usual sexual differences ;
smaller clypeus, narrower front, antennz longer and acuminate at
tip; otherwise agreeing with the preceding description.

Chapada, October and November. Ten females (workers ?), one
male. Allied to P. socialis, but the more slender petiole excludes it
from Saussure’s II, Division Iota. These divisions are not natural,
however.

Polybia marginata n. sp.

2 or ¥—Thorax, petiole and legs reddish-brown, the first men-
tioned with thin golden pile; head, and body of abdomen black;
sides of thorax and petiole apically dusky ; line on inner orbits be-
low emargination, on posterior orbits above, line on pronotum
anteriorly and posteriorly, fore margin of postscutellum, two lines on
middle segment, spot on four hind coxe, and at tip of all femora,
pale yellow.

Head subquadrate, not very transverse; ocelli forming an equi-
lateral triangle; first joint of flagellum nearly as long as the three
following united ; pronotum sharply margined anteriorly ; dorsulum
about one-fifth longer than broad ; middle segment concave medially ;
petiole elongate, slender, broadened from beyond middle, altogether
more slender than P. sericea, in length greater, if anything, than
hind femur; wings dark, paler apically, black in costal cell ; breadth

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 457

of second and third submarginal cells at the top nearly equal.
Length 15 mm.

Chapada, September, October. Four specimens. Is the exact
counterpart of P. sericea superficially, but differs by the squarer head,
margined pronotum, more slender petiole, shorter dorsulum, ete.

Tatua morio Fabr.
Chapada, January, November, December; Santarem. About 40
specimens.

Chartergus apicalis Fabr.
Over 60 specimens. Sebastize, October; Chapada, October to
December ; Corumba and Mararu, April.

Chartergus Smithii Sauss.
One example. Corumbd, April.
Chartergus ater Sauss.
Two specimens. Chapada, January ; Santarem, April.

Chartergus chartarius Oliv.
Chapada, March and October; Santarem. Nearly 50 specimens.

Chartergus globiventris Sauss.

Sebastiz, October. Two specimens (? ¢). The male closely
resembles the female, but has the clypeus entirely, a spot on scape
beneath, spot on all femora beneath near apex, and all the cox
beneath, pale yellow ; the clypeus is considerably smaller.

Chartergus fasciatus n. sp.

9 or %.—Black ; head below insertion of antennz, cheeks, scape,
pronotum except a blotch on each side, scutellum anteriorly, mid-
dle segment entirely, mesopleurse except medially, legs including
coxze, a fascia on segments 1-3 at apex, segments 4-6 and ventrals
entirely, yellow; flagellum black above, reddish-yellow beneath.
Differs from C. Smithii other than in coloration, as follows: dor-
sulum shorter, nearly as broad as long; scutellum and postscutellum
smaller, the latter not tuberculate medially ; the wings are colored
as in Smithii, but the superiors have a pale band crossing them and
including the space between the apex of the costal, base of second
discoidal, and base of third submarginal cells, the veins included in
this region, and the stigma are whitish-yellow, elsewhere dark ; neu-
ration nearly as in Smithii. Length 7} mm.

Mararu, April. One specimen.

30

458 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1898.

Chartergus griseus n. sp.

9 or ¥.—Black ; head in front, cheeks, scape arid pedicel of an-
tenn, orange; tibize and tarsi more or less brown, the anteriors pal-
est; thorax and abdomen with a thin griseus pubescence, more
obvious on middle segment ; posterior margin of pronotum yellow-
ish medially as a rule.

Clypeus obtusely angulate; flagellum scarcely clavate; ocelli
forming a high triangle, the space between hind pair much less than
that between them and the anterior one; pronotum with a tolerably
long dorsal surface, much longer than in C. ater, sharply margined
anteriorly, and, with the dorsulum, rather coarsely punctured,
remainder of thorax similarly punctured ; postscutellum not tuber-
culate ; middle segment shallowly concave; abdomen ovate ; wings
subhyaline, the anterior margin of the superiors, including the mar-
ginal cell, fuscous ; nervures and stigma black ; second submarginal
triangular, much narrowed above, the third rhomboidal narrowed
above, the outer nervure nearly straight. Length 7} mm.

Mararu, April; Santarem. Nine specimens.

CHARTERGINUS gen. nov.

Head flat, transverse, the development of cheeks varying in the
different species, but lessthan in Chartergus. Front long and rather
narrow. Eyes long and narrow, practically reaching base of man-
dibles. Mandibles slender, contracted medially, with four distinct
teeth on inner margin ranging from the apex, which is not trunca-
ted asin Chartergus or Polybia, but shaped somewhat as in Neeta-
rinia. Maxillary palpi 6-jointed, the first and last joints longest ;
labial palpi 4-jointed, the basal joint longest, the second and third
shortest. Clypeus truncate or acuminate at tip; antenne inserted
at base of clypeus. Thorax truncate anteriorly, shaped throughout
as in Chartergus, the scutellum scarcely raised above the level of’
postscutellum, and not emarginate. Middle segment concave, the
sides not angularly produced or spinose; tibial spurs 1-2-2. Abdo-
men with first segment campanulate, practically sessile with second
segment, with a basal petiole varying in length in the different spe-
cies, in some species almost wanting. Neuration of wings as in
Chartergus.

Type: C. fulvus.

Charterginus is intermediate between Chartergus and Nectarinia.
It is more closely allied to the former genus, from which it differs

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 459

by the slender mandibles, flatter head and differently shaped first
abdominal segment.

Charterginus fulvus n. sp.

? or ¥.—Entirely fulyous ; a broad stripe across vertex, flagel-
lum above, and sometimes the suture between dorsulum and scutel-
lum and a spot on second dorsal segment medially, black or black-
ish ; clypeus paler yellow.

Clypeus much longer than broad, with large, shallow, scattered
punctures, its fore margin broadly truncate; vertex with strong,
separated punctures; ocelli forming an equilateral triangle, the
space between hind pair about one-third less than that between them
and eyes, the latter almost reaching base of manibles; flagellum
clavate, first joint longer than second, but distinetly shorter than
the combined length of second and third ; occiput sharply margined
posteriorly ; pronotum medially with a distinct surface, transversely
margined on each side; thorax strongly punctured; dorsulum a
little longer than broad; postscutellum with a distinct tubercle
medially ; middle segment strongly swollen on each side posteriorly,
not compressed ; abdomen strongly punctured, first segment cam-
panulate, with a basal petiole nearly as long as first hind tarsal
joint, transversely impressed before apical margin; wings subhya-
line, black along costal margin, as are also the nervures and stigma ;
second submarginal cell triangular, narrowed more than two-thirds
above; third submarginal longer than high, subquadrate, narrowed
about one quarter above. Length 7-8 mm.

Mararu, April; Santarem. Eight specimens. Judging from de-
scription, C. fu/vus must greatly resemble Chartergus colobopterus,
but the dorsulum is not black as in that species, which is apparently
atypical Chartergus, with short first abdominal segment.

Charterginus fuscatus n. «p.

9 or ¥.—Black, with brownish pile; line on inner orbits below
emargination, continued along the sides of clypeus to apex, and
narrower line on posterior orbits, pale yellow; first dorsal segment
at apex narrowly and obscurely yellowish.

Head very flat, the cheeks scarcely developed ; clypeus longer
‘than broad, pyriform, acuminate at apex, finely punctured ; front
with shallow punctures; ocelli almost forming a curved line, the
hind pair separated by a much greater distance than they are from
the anterior one, and almost equal to that between them and eyes ;

460 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

the latter narrow and long, fully reaching base of mandibles; tho-
rax strongly punctured; pronotum very sharply margined ante-
riorly, with a distinct medial surface; dorsulum nearly one-quarter
longer than broad ; postscutellum not tuberculate, triangular, the
posterior margin extended ; middle segment strongly concave, more
or less compressed laterally ; abdomen strongly punctured, the first
segment short, campanulate, the basal petiole scarcely evident ;
wings subhyaline, black in the costal cell; third submarginal much
longer than high, narrowed about one-third above, the outer nervure
strongly sinuate ; nervures and stigma black. Length 8 mm,
Mararu, April. One specimen.

Charterginus cinctellus n. sp.

? or ¥.—Black; line on inner orbits below emargination, ex-
tending along sides of clypeus to apex, narrow line on posterior or-
bits, two short curved lines (sometimes wanting) on vertex, line on
pronotum anteriorly, and a short one on posterior margin just before
tegulz, anterior margin of scutellum and postscutellum, and a fascia
at apex of abdominal segments 1-5, pale yellow; scape reddish be-
neath.

Head about as in fuscatus ; middle segment not as strongly mar-
gined, shorter medially ; dorsulum shorter, not one-quarter longer
than broad ; postscutellum similar, but not as triangular; first dor-
sal segment short, campanulate, the basal petiole quite short, but
still more evident than in C. fuscatus; wings subhyaline through-
out; nervures and stigma black; third submarginal cell a little
higher than long, narrowed about one-fifth above. Length 7 mm.

Chapada, October. Seven specimens. Has a superficial resem-
blance to Chartergus chartarius, but is smaller.

Nectarinia Lecheguana Lutr.

About 50 specimens. Chapada, January, June, September to
December ; Corumbaé, March; Santarem,

Nectarinia bilineolata Spin.

Chapada, January, March, May, November, December. Thirty-
five specimens.
Nectarinia Augusti Sauss.

Chapada, same months as bilineolata; Santarem. Twenty-five
specimens.

Nectarinia scutellata Spin. r

Chapada, December, One example.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 461

NEW CRETACEOUS FOSSILS FROM AN ARTESIAN WELL-BORING AT
MOUNT LAUREL, N. J. ;

BY C. W. JOHNSON.

The following material was obtained by Mr. Lewis Woolman
from tle borings of an artesian well on the farm of Mrs. Samuel
Shreeve, Mount Laurel, Burlington County, N. J. The well was
put down on the 70 feet contour near the base of the southern slope
of Mount Laurel. The following section, published by Mr. Wool-
man,’ was given him by the contractor, Mr. Wm. C. Barr:—

Commenced in the bottom of

a dug well at the depth of... 25 feet.
Reddish-gray sand.............. 31 feet = 56 feet. | 7}
a ee 175 feet — 231 feet.
A few molluscan fossils at | a
about 100 feet. iM cle
Numerous mollusks at 150 r Matawan Clay maris. } 8
to 160 feet. | 3
Tough green clay.............+. 30 feet — 262 feet. | 5
Dark-bluish clay.............+.. 42 feet = 304 feet. |
Gray sand, water bearing...... 2 feet = 306 feet. Sewell water horizon. J

Stopped on a whitish clay.

Mr. Woolman states that: “The whitish clay on which this bor-
ing stopped is probably equivalent in horizon with certain alternat-
ing lamin of whitish clays and sands that were found near the bases
of the wells at the Wenonah Hotel and at Sewell. Beneath these
laminz, at the last two named localities, occur coarse sands and
gravels with large pebbles, forming an open stratum from which an
abundant and excellent supply of water is obtained. The water
horizon reached at Mount Laurel may be considered as practically
the same. We have designated this as the Sewell water horizon.
Its position is at the base of the Matawan clay marls and the top of
the Raritan plastic clay series, and has a thickness, if we may judge
by the boring at Sewell, of at least forty feet.”

A comparison of these fossils with those obtained by the writer for
the Museum of the Wagner Free Institute of Science from the banks
of the Chattahoochie River, below Eufaula, Alabama, shows that this

‘Report on Artesian Wells in New Jersey, by Lewis Woolman, from the
Geol. Survey of N. J. Ann. Rept. for 1897, p. 262.

462

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1898.

fossiliferous stratum is equivalent to the Ripley bed of Alabama,
Mississippi and Texas, which is also represented in North Carolina,
especially at Snow Hill, Greene County.’

The following is a list of fossils obtained from the well :—

Ostrea plumosa Morton.

Exogyra costata Say.

Anomia tellinoides Morton.

Camptonectes burlingtonensis
Gabb.

Pinna sp.?

Pteria sp.?

Trigoniarca cuneata Gabb.

Pectunculus sp.?

Nucula pererassa Conrad.

Nucula sp.?

Leda sp.?

Trigonia thoraciea Morton.

Lucina eretacea Conrad.

Cardium eufaulense Conrad.

Veniella conradi Morton.

Veleda lintea Conrad.

Leptosolen biplicata Conrad.

Legumen sp. ?

Corbula crassiplicata Gabb.

Cinulia costata n. sp. (fig. 1).

Cinulia costata Johnson, n. sp.
264, name only.

Corbula foulkei Lea.

Dentalium sp.?

Cinulia costata n. sp.

Pyrifusus subdensatus Conrad.

Alaria rostrata Gabb.

Anchura sp.? (expansion of outer
lip only).

Anchura? pergracilis n. sp.

Pugnellus densatus Conrad.

Lunatia halli Gabb.

Trichotropis cancellaria Conrad.

Scalaria sillimani Morton.

Turritella vertebroides Morton.

Turritella quadrilira n. sp.

Tuba(?) reticulata n. sp.

Placentaceras placenta Dekay.

Hamulus squamosus Gabb.

Platytrochus speciosus Gabb &
Horn.

Annual Rept. Geol. Sur. N. J., 1897, page

Shell with four whorls, spire prominent, body whorl with from 12
to 13 revolving grooves, which form an equal number of smooth,
flat, revolving coste ; these average about double
the width of the grooves. In one specimen the
third and fifth costs from the suture are almost
twice the width of the others, and the two lower
costz divided by a minute, impressed line. The
first spiral whorl has six, and the second five, re-
volving grooves. Apical whorl smooth, suture
deeply impressed. Aperture narrow, oblique, lip
broad, thick and crenulated on the inner margin
with eight small teeth-like projections, and extend-

Fig. 1.

? Conrad, in Kerr’s Geology of North Carolina, Appendix, Vol. I, 1875.

1898] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 465

ing to the suture where it joins the callus of the peristome, which is
continuous to the base of the columella; base with two oblique folds,
above which is a prominent fold or plate extending at almost right
angles to the columella ; between this and the posterior angle of the
aperture is a small, tooth-like projection.

Alt. 4, diam. 24 mill.

Three adults and two juvenile specimens in the collection of the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.

Anchura? pergracilis n. sp. (fig. 2).

Anchura sp.? (young). Annual Rept. Geol. Survey N. J., 1897, page 264.

Shell fusiform, whorls convex, the body whorl with about 18 and
the spiral whorls with 15 equidistant, flexuous, longitudinal ribs ;
numerous fine revolving lines, more prominent between
the ribs, and somewhat obsolete on the angles of the ribs,
cover the entire shell; suture deeply impressed. The
length of the largest specimen (including the two apical
whorls, which are wanting), is about 20 mill.

I would hesitate in describing this young shell if it
were possible to determine the shed/s of this group from the
figures and description of the casts that have already been
described. This species can always be determined, but in
identifying casts when the external characters are un-
known, there is always more or less doubt, even when one
has access to the types.

Anchura =p. 7

This species is represented only by a fragment, the expanded por-
tion of the outer lip. This resembles somewhat
that of Anchura abrupta Conrad (Jour. Acad.
Natural Sciences, 2d series, IV, 284, pl. 47, fig. 1),
but has on the lower or anterior edge a small
projection or angle near the base (fig. 3), but no
downward projection at the end. It probably

Fig. 3.

represents a new species. Length of specimen,
18 mill.
Turritella quadrilira n. sp.
Turritella quadrilira Johnson, n. sp. Annual Rept. Geol. Sur. N. J., 1897,

page 264, name only,
This species closely resembles the Turritella trilira Conrad of the
Ripley bed, but is at once distinguished by having four instead of
three equidistant revolving lire; it also differs in being perfectly

464 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

smooth between the costs, while the lens shows the interstices of 7’.
trilira to have numerous, minute, raised revolving lines. The spe-
cimens are all greatly broken, the largest, showing five whorls, is
14 mill. in length, but the fragments indicate that it probably at-
tains the size of the average T. trilira, about 50 mill.
Tuba? reticulata n. sp.
Tuba ? reticulata Johnson, n.sp. Annual Rept. Geol. Sur. N.J., 1897, page
264, name only.

Whorls very convex, with four equidistant, revolving, raised
lines, which are crossed by equidistant longitudinal ribs of a corre-
sponding size, which form equal, quadrate interstices, except below
the suture where the longitudinal ribs become obsolete. At the
junction of the two series of raised lines are small tubercles through-
out the entire shell. Owing to the imperfect apertures of the five
specimens, its generic position remains doubtful, but its distinet
sculpture will distinguish the species. Length of the largest speci-
mens, 6 mill.; probably attains the length of about 10 mill.
Trigonia thoracica Morton.

Trigonia eufalensis Gabb.

There seems to be considerable confusion regarding these forms.
That 7. eufalensis Gabb is only the young of 7. thoracica Morton
can be readily proven by the large suite collected by the writer at
Eufaula and Prairie Bluff, Alabama. -Morton’s type came from the
latter locality. The species recorded from Reeve’s clay bank near
Lenola, N. J., is 7. thoracica, not T. mortoni Whitfield.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 465

OcroBER 4.
The President, Samuet G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Nineteen persons present.
OcroBER 11.
The President, Samure.t G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair.

Thirty-six persons present.

OcroBeR 18.
J. Cuoreston Morris, M. D., in the Chair.
Thirty-four persons present.

A paper entitled “Some Cuban Species of Cerion,” by H. A.
Pilsbry and E. G. Vanatta was presented for publication,

i

A Memorial of Dr. Joseph Leidy—Dr. Nouan presented to the
Academy as a memorial ot the late Dr. Joseph Leidy, five volumes of
biographical notices, portraits, autograph letters and original draw-
ings. The contents of the volumes in detail are as follows:

Vouume I. 1. Biographical notices by J. Parrish, M. D., New
- Jersey Medical Reporter, 1853; Henry C. Chapman, M. D., Pro-
ceedings of the Academy, June 30, 1891; Wm. Hunt, M. D., be-
fore the Alumni and Students of the Medical Department of the
University of Pennsylvania, Noy. 17, 1891; W. 8. W. Ruschen-
berger, M. D., Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society,
April 25, 1892; Dr. Persifor Frazer, American Geologist, January,
1892; Jos. Wharton, before the graduating class of 1891 at Swarth-
more College ; George A. Piersol, M. D., to the classes of the Medical
and Dental Departments of the University of Pennsylvania, Octo-
ber, 1891; from the International Clinic, July, 1891.

2. Transcripts of the original manuscripts of the memorial ad-
dresses delivered at a special meeting of the Academy, May 12,
1891, in recognition of Dr. Leidy’s long continued service to it.’
They consist of papers by Dr. William Hunt on the personal his-
tory of the subject of the memorial, by Dr. Harrison Allen on his
work in comparative anatomy, by Dr. H. C. Chapman on his
work in invertebrate anatomy, by Professor Angelo Heilprin on his

man to prepare for the PRoCEkEDINGs a biographical notice which, with much
else, combined and epitomized the matter of the memorial addresses.

466 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

work in geology and paleontology, by Joseph Willcox on his work
in mineralogy, by Dr. James Darrach on his work in botany, and
by Dr. Edw. J. Nolan on his services to the Academy with comments
on his personal character.

3. These are followed by a verbatim report of a conversation held .
with Dr. Nolan, October 29, 1867, when Dr. Leidy related in detail
and with the exquisite candor and simplicity which were character-
istic, the details of his life up to that time. The notes were made
by Dr. Nolan immediately on the conclusion of the interview with
fulness and accuracy, and form a most interesting autobiographical
contribution to the volume, being much more intimate and detailed
than the texts of the published notices.

4. Manuscript of the last paper contributed by Dr. Leidy to the
Proceedings of the Academy, 1891, pp. 234 et seq.

5. Autograph letters, and ‘“ Notes upon daily scientific observa-
tions, commenced March 1, 1846.”

6. Letter from Dr. Levick regarding Dr. Leidy’s last illness.

7. Valedictory Address, March 27, 1858.

8. Detailed index.

VouuME II. Botanical drawings and notes, including representa-
tions of plasmodia, algze (Diatoms, Schizophytes, Desmids, Proto-
coccus, Confervoids, Vaucheria), fungi, ferns and angiosperms.

VoutumeE III. Zoological drawings and notes. Infusoria (Flagel-
lata, Ciliata, Sectoria, Atricha, including forty-five originals of the
figures in the Freshwater Rhizopods of North America, Rhizopoda),
sponges, and one hundred and seventy-six unpublished illustrations
of gregarines from twenty-one hosts, a most valuable contribution
to a monograph of these parasites.

VotumeE LV. Zoological drawings and notes, continued. Hydro-
zoa, ctenophors, bryozoa, worms (Platyelminthes, Nematilminthes).

Voutume V. Zoological drawings and notes, continued. Worms
(Annulata), arthropods, (Rotatoria, Crustacea, Arachnoidea, In-
secta), mollusks, fishes, reptiles, and mammals.

The botanical material has been arranged by Dr. J. W. Harsh-
berger according to the classification of Warming’s Handbook of
Systematic Botany, while the zoological drawings have been placed
by Dr. Nolan in accordance with Carus and Gerstaecker. Exhaus-
tive indexes have been prepared and bound with the volumes.

Much the greater part of the drawings and notes have been
contributed by Mrs. Joseph Leidy, to whom the thanks of the
Academy are due for thus providing for the preservation of these
interesting relics of her distinguished husband.

Dr. Leidy is unquestionably the most prominent figure in the his-
tory of the Academy. This distinction is due not only to the variety,
extent and value of his scientific work, but also because of his long
connection with the executive offices of the society, as fully set
forth in the several biographical notices included in the first volume
of the memorial.

1898. } NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 467

It is, of course, through his scientific work that he will be known
to succeeding generations, but the personal qualities of the man:
his humility, his charity, his integrity, and his transparent truth-
fulness can only be fully appreciated by those who were thrown into

daily communication with him.

It is fitting that these volumes should be placed in the Academy,
where nearly all of Dr. Leidy’s work was done, as an evidence of bis
artistic ability and the diversity of his scientific interests, for they
not only contain exquisite specimens of draughtsmanship but the
drawings belong to nearly every department of natural history from
Myxomycetes to Man.

OcroBER 25.
The President, SamMuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Forty persons present.

Dr. D. G. Brinton made a communication on the ethnology of
the Philippine Islands. (No abstract).

Prof. J. Wharton James and Prof. Wm. Libbey, Jr. spoke of the
Enchanted Mesa. (No abstract).

The following were elected members :

D. M. Barringer, George C. Thomas, Lincoln Godfrey, Henry
Emerson Wetherill and Miss Emeline Maddock.

The following were ordered to be published :

468 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1898.

NEW SPECIES OF DIATOMS.
” BY CHARLES 8S. BOYER.

RHABDONEMA.
Rhabdonema Woolmanianum n. sp. Boyer.

Valve oblong, with sharply crenulate margin, punctate, the puncta
in transverse rows, about 6 in .01 mm. — Pseudoraphe indistinct.
Septa perforate, connected with each other usually near alternate
ends by straight transverse diaphragms.

L. of V. .155 mm. to .231 mm.

Fossil in the Miocene deposit from an artesian well at Asbury
Park, N. J., at a depth of 40 ft. Not uncommon.

Approaches R. hamuliferum Kitton and Rk. Musica Brun., but it
does not show either hooked septa as in the former nor curves re-
sembling musical notes as in the latter. It also differs in the char-
acter of the margin and in size, being four or five times larger than
either.

Plate X XIV, figs. 1, la, 1b.

BIDDULPHIA.
Biddulphia interrupta n. sp. Boyer.

Valve elliptical, with small, rounded processes. Surface convex,
finely punctate, the puncta about 10 in .01 mm., radiating in seat-
tered lines from the centre at which are three minute spines. About
one-third the distance from centre to processes, at each end, a
hyaline band produced by the interruption of puncta, crosses the
valve transversely extending nearly to the sides.

L. of V. .112 mm.

Campeachy Bay. Rare.

Plate XXIV, fig. 2.

Biddulphia verrucosa n. sp. Boyer.

Valve suborbicular, convex. Processes very large, cylindrical,
truncate. Surface coarsely reticulate, the reticulations unequal,
irregular, about 2 in .01 mm. Within the reticulations are coarse
puncta abont 3 in .O1 mm.

L. of V. 138 mm.

Fossil at Redondo Beach, Cal. Very rare.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 469

This form, which approaches the Ceratau/us group, is distinguished
by the incrusted or warty appearance of the surface.

Plate XXIV, fig. 5.

Biddulphia Keeleyi n. sp. Boyer.

Valve broadly rhombic-elliptical, rounded at the ends. Surface
slightly convex, without depression, reticulated, the reticulations
unequal, hexagonal, about 2 in .01 mm., with puncta within the
reticulations about 8in .01 mm. ‘Three stout spines are placed on
each side near the margin. Processes inflated at the base, small at
the apex and placed not at the ends of the valve but obliquely
opposite, near the ends.

L. of V. .148 mm.

U.S. S. “ Tuscarora” Soundings, Lat. 36° 12’ N., Long. 123° 11’
W., 1,605 faths.’ Also coast of California. Rare.

Only two specimens have been noticed, one of which was found
by Mr. F. J. Keeley on seaweed from California.

Plate XXIV, fig. 4.

Biddulphia Argus n. sp. Boyer.

Valve broadly elliptical, convex, with an elliptical depression at
centre. Surface finely reticulate, the reticulations, more or less
hexagonal, about 3 in .01 mm. at the border, and 5 in .01 mm. at
the centre from which they radiate in curved lines. ‘The central
depression is encircled by from ten to twelve short spines. Pro-
cesses rather short and obtuse.

L. of V. .165 mm.

Port Antonio, Jamaica. Not common.

Distinguished chiefly by the central spines and by the size of the
reticulations, whence the name. It approaches B. Roperiana Grev.

Plate XXIV, fig. 6.

Biddulphia semicircularis Asburyana n. var. Boyer.

Valve arcuate with the ends produced and elevated into rounded
processes. Surface not divided by costate lines, convex, punctate,
the puncta rounded about 6 in .01 mm. near the hyaline excentric
space from which they radiate irregularly, increasing in size to
about 1) in .01 mm. at the margin where they are irregular and
occasionally confluent.

L. of V. 181 mm. ;

Fossil in the Miocene deposit from the artesian well at Asbury
Park, N. J. at a depth of 40 ft. Not uncommon.

470 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Quite distinct from Huodia producta Grun. and from B. semicir-
ewlaris (Br.) in the irregularity of the produced ends, in their eleva-
tion into processes, in the size, shape and distribution of the puncta
and in the absence of costz.

Plate XXIV, fig. 3.

Biddulphia Shulzei n. sp. Boyer.

Valve elliptical, slightly raised toward the centre, with a large
rounded process-like elevation at each end. Surface punctate, the
puncta rounded, oblong, averaging 5 in .01 mm., but for the most
part scattered, leaving numerous hyaline spaces, one of which
appears as an indefinite, indistinct transverse band at the base of
each process. Owing to the irregularity in the distribution of the
puncta the circumference of the valve appears to show a scalloped
border.

L. of V. .115 mm.

In the character of its markings it approaches Tabulina Testudo
Brun. from which it is distinguished by having but two processes
and in being without the hyaline lines which cross the valve in the
latter.

Fossil in the artesian well deposit at Weymouth, N. J. I have
seen but one specimen which was found by Mr. John A. Shulze who
also discovered a variety having two processes at one end and one
at the other.

Plate XXIV, figs. 7, 8.

There appears to be no special reason why either this form or that
known as Tabulina Testudo Brun. should be separated from the
genus Biddulphia. The hyaline lines are not always definite even
in Tabulina Testudo, while the variety in which but three processes
appear clearly indicates an approach toward the type of Biddulphia.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIV.

Fig. 1. Rhabdonema Woolmanianum Boyer, valve view. x 284.

Fig. la. Rhabdonema Woolmanianum, septum. x 284.

Fig. Rhabdonema Woolmanianum, zonal view. x 284.
Fig. Biddulphia interrupta Boyer. x 310.

Fig Biddulphia semicircularis Asburyana Boyer. x 300.

Biddulphia Keeleyi Boyer. x 300.
Biddulphia verrucosa Boyer. x 302.
Biddulphia Argus Boyer. x 330.

. Biddulphia Shulzei Boyer, var. x 475.
Biddulphia Shulzei Boyer. x 475.

Le |

3
a
ONAMAP WN TE

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 471

NEW SPECIES OF ODONTOSTOMUS FROM BRAZIL AND ARGENTINA.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.

The forms noticed below are mainly recent accessions to the col-
lection under my charge, received from Dr. H. von Ihering, the
Director of the young but progressive Brazilian institution, the
Museu Paulista. Three of the species belong to the subgenus of
Odontostomus called Macrodontes, a group characterized by the con-
tinuous peristome, spirally lirulate earlier whorls, and regular, fine
striation of the later ones, with minute and shallow but close spiral
incised decussating lines. This very distinct subgenus contained
four species: odontostomus Sowerby, fasciatus Dohrn, Grayanus
Pfr. and cordovanus Pfr. Dr. von Ihering’s zoological explorations
have already nearly doubled this number.

All of the species of Macrodontes hitherto known have the aper-
ture obstructed by large teeth ; but in.two of the new forms, degen-
eratus and Dautzenbergianus, the teeth have degenerated to such a
degree that they are probably no longer functional as barriers
against predacious arthropods. In another, paulista, the teeth are
more strongly developed than in any other Macrodontes.
Odontostomus (Macrodontes) paulista Pilsbry & v. Ihering, n. sp.

Shell lengthened fusiform; rather solid; reddish-chestnut, with
irregular, lacerated and somewhat zigzag, obliquely longitudinal,
hydrophanous, cream-tinted streaks. Surface dull, very minutely
but sharply striated in the direction of growth lines, a strong lens
showing much more minute and superficial, dense, spiral striation,
the apical whorls spirally lirate. Whorls 6, the first turned in, the
rest rather rapidly and regularly increasing, moderately convex, the
last becoming free at the aperture, compressed behind the outer lip,
the trench there impressed by five pits; base pinched into an acute,
produced keel; and behind the columellar Jip there are two pits and
a deep axial pit, with another shallow pit behind the elevated
parietal wall. Aperture slightly oblique, narrow, irregularly
oblong, obstructed by eight pliciform teeth and a strong, deep-seated
columellar lamina; peristome continuous, white, reflexed through-
out, the outer lip with two large teeth situated like those in 0.

472 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

odontostomus, with smaller teeth between them and another above
the upper one; the teeth upon the columellar and parietal margins
corresponding in position with those of O. odontostomus.

Alt. 37, diam. 12 mm. length of aperture (including peristome)
15, width 8 mm.

Iguape, prov. S. Paulo, Brazil (Dr. H. von Ihering).

This most beautiful of the Macrodontes species has hydrophanous
cuticular markings somewhat like Auris Hauawelli (Crosse). It
differs conspicuously from the well known O. odontostomus in the
more slender contour, basal instead of baso-peripheral position of
the keel, and the longer and narrower aperture, which is consequ-
ently more filled by the large teeth. There is also one more tooth,

and the striation is much finer. O. Grayanus differs strongly inthe | —

less tapering and quite differently shaped base, as well as in lack-
ing the median tooth of the outer lip, ete.

Odontostomus (Macrodontes) Dautzenbergianus n. sp.

Shell oblong-ovate, thin, light chestnut with a golden sheen and
sparse, narrow oblique or zigzag creamy hydrophanous markings
(absent on some specimens) ; surface dull, with very minute but
regular and sharp striation along the lines of growth, and much finer,
shallower, close spiral lines; the apical 1} whorls delicately spirally
lirulate. Whorls 5, the first with in-turned tip, the rest rapidly in-
creasing, convex, the last becoming very shortly free at the aperture,
somewhat compressed behind the outer lip, and with three small
pits; the base pinched into a short keel, behind the columellar lip
two-pitted, with a deep umbilical fissure. Aperture irregularly
oblong; peristome continuous, reddish or flesh colored, narrowly
reflexed, the upper margin with a small blunt tooth, outer lip with
three small teeth within, the lowest low and wide, the upper two
minute and acute, whitish; basal lip with one low, wide tooth, the
columella with a strong oblique fold upon which a minute whitish
denticle is placed, another one being situated below the columellar
fold.

Alt. 26, diam. 11 mm.; length of aperture 12, width 7} mm. (in- *
cluding peristome).

Raiz da Serra, Sao Paulo, Brazil (Dr. H. von Ihering).

This species, to which we have attached the name of a distin-
guished French conchologist, is obviously a member of the O. odon-
tostomus group of Macrodontes, agreeing with those forms in the posi-
tions of the denticles ; but in our species the armature of the aper-

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 473

ture has degenerated to a series of very small denticles. For the
rest, the form is fuller than any other known Macrodontes.

A specimen from Cubatad, Sao Paulo, differs from the type in
being darker colored, of a dark reddish-chestnut hue, somewhat
more solid, with the denticles on the outer lip and columellar mar-
gin subobsolete, hardly noticeable, and of the reddish color of the
lip itself; the pits behind the lip are correspondingly obsolete, but
there are two minute white denticles on the columellar fold. This
shell measures: alt. 26, diam. 10 mm.; length of aperture 11, width
64 mm.

Odontostomus (Macrodontes) degeneratus n. sp.

Shell oblong-turreted, minutely perforated, thin but moderately
strong, pale yellowish-green tinted. Surface hardly shining, striated
in the direction of growth-lines, the striz hardly visible without the
aid of a lens, under which they are seen to be thread-like, well
raised, finely but rather superficially cut into beads by decussating
spirals which crenulate the summits of the striw. Spire convexly
conic, the apex obtuse; whorls nearly 6, quite convex, the earlier 14
densely spirally striated, the last whorl becoming free and somewhat
descending in front, constricted and showing 3 small pits behind the
outer lip, bicarinate at base, the keels short, outer one strongly
pinched up, the inner low, rounded, a distinct depression between
them. Aperture oblique, quadrangular-oblong, nearly 4 the total
length of the shell, obstructed by a strong columellar fold which
terminates below in a transverse lamella, and by 6 small, tuberculi-
form teeth: one upon the parietal margin close to its posterior
termination, three upon the outer lip, the uppermost quite small,
and with the parietal denticle, defining a small rounded posterior
sinus or notch, the others low, removed from the lip-edge; basal
tooth median ; columellar tooth below the columellar fold. Peri-
stome white, narrowly reflexed, continuous and free throughout.
Alt. 21, greatest diam. 8°3, length of aperture 7 mm.

Palmeiras, Province of Parana, Brazil (Dr. H. von Ihering).

The species here described differs so widely from all other known
species of the group, that detailed comparisons are needless.

Odontostomus (Plagiodontes) Iheringi Pilebry & Vanatta, n. «p.

Shell deeply rimate, pupiform with conic spire, rather solid, light
olivaceous brownish with darker longitudinal streaks; somewhat
shining, sculptured with fine, irregular growth-strie, Last whorl

31

474 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

subeylindrical or barrel-shaped, those above rapidly tapering, form-
ing a rather short, conic spire. Whorls 63 or 7, nearly flat, the last
with a more or less distinct basal keel on its latter half, and having
a small flattened tract within the keel behind the basal lip. Aper-
ture slightly oblique, shortly, irregularly ovate, obstructed by three
principal lamellz and one or two smaller denticles or teeth ; one
lamella well within on the parietal wall, bifid at its outer end;
one very obliquely entering lamella on the columella; and a third
lamella within the outer lip near its middle. Besides these there
is a denticle or very small lamella on the basal lip near the foot of
the columella, and another within the outer lip above the median
lamella.

Alt. 19, diam. 9, length of aperture 8} mm.

Alt. 20, diam. 9, length of aperture 83 mm.

Sierra Ventana, Argentine Republic.

This species does not seem to be closely allied to any of the numer-
ous Argentine forms described by Doering, a part of which have not
yet been figured. Only one of the specimens shows the small den-
ticle above the lamella on the outer lip.

w
1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 475

: SOME CUBAN SPECIES OF CERION.

BY H. A. PILSBRY AND E. G. VANATTA.

Since the publication of our catalogue of this genus,’ the follow-
ing species have been described :

Cerion (Maynardia) niteloides Dall, Bull. Lab. Nat. Hist. State
Univ. Iowa, IV, no. 1, p. 15, pl. 1, f. 2 (Dec., 1896). Water Cay,
Salt Cay Bank, on the north side of Cuba near the western end of

{
|
|
the Bahama banks.
Cerion pillsburyi Pils. & Van., these Proceedings, November 25,
1897, p. 366, f.5. Gun Cay, Bahamas.

Cerion fordii Pils. & Van., [bid, p. 365, f. 1, 2. Bahamas
(Abaco ?).
1

5 6 7 S 9

The forms herein described were received from Mr. I’. E. Blanes
and Prof. de la Torre, bearing manuscript names; which we were
requested to publish. As they are forms of considerable interest

' Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1896, p. 315,

476 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

and undoubted distinetness, so far as specific distinctions can be
said to exist in Cerion, we present them as a further contribution
to knowledge of this peculiar genus.

Since writing upon this topic in 1896, we have been unable to
procure living or suitably preserved specimens of Cerion for anatom-
ical investigation ; but we have no reason to doubt that such study,
when it becomes possible, will justify our reference of the genus to
the family Urocoptide (“ Cylindrellide” of authors).

Respecting the extraordinary plasticity of the shell under the
force of varying circumstance, something was said in our former
communication ; but as it would seem from questions put to us by
various conchological friends, the case was not stated strongly
enough. We do not seek paradox when we say that frequently the
differences between individuals of a species are greater than the
differences between species ; so wide is the swing of racial and in-
dividual variation. .

Cerion torrei Blanes. Figs. 1, 2.

Shell cylindrical, obese, strong, rimate and perforate, the lower
two or three whorls of approximately equal diameter, those above
forming a rather short cone with sides diverging at an angle of 85°
to 90°. Whorls 10-11, the earliest 1-23 white or corneous, several
following finely and sharply striated, the remaining whorls nearly
smooth; last whorl ascending in front, somewhat tapering below,
and generally striated at the base. Brown, marbled with very irre-
gular stripes and dots of white. Aperture short, showing a small
short parietal tooth and a small columellar fold; peristome white,
thickened and convex, reflexed and recurved, continuous, the
parietal margin more or less calloused.

Alt. 233, greatest diam. 13, length of aperture 11 mm.

Alt. 28, greatest diam. 12}, length of aperture 11 mm.

Alt. 24, greatest diam. 114, length of aperture 10 mm.

Port of Vita, Cuba (Francisco E. Blanes).

This species resembles C. dimidiatum, differing in being of less
rude texture, less squarely obese form, higher terminal cone, no trace
of a keel defining the base, ete.

It has the coloration of C. vulneratum.

Var. ornatum P.& V. Figs. 3, 4.
Similar in form to the longer specimens of C- torrei, but strongly
and regularly ribbed throughout, the ribs on the cylindrical portion

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 477

1-2 mm. apart, and decidedly narrower than the intervals; parietal
margin of peristome more elevated.

Vita, Cuba.

This looks like a distinct species, but is merely the costate form
of the preceding. It is more slender than the ribbed form of C.
dimidiatum, with finer ribs, continued upon the terminal cone, and
there is no basal keel.

Cerion sueyrasi Blanes. Fig. 6.

Shell cylindrical, solid, rimate, the lower three whorls of about
equal diameter, those above forming a rather short, obtuse cone.
Whorls 10, the first smooth, next finely costulate, the rest very con-
vex, coarsely and sharply ribbed, the ribs high, angular, 15 to 18 in
number on the last whorl; numerous rather irregular spiral strie
revolving about the middle of the lower two or three whorls. Color
(of specimens some time dead when collected), creamy or fleshy
white. Aperture small, with small teeth; peristome expanded,
blunt, continued raised and straight across the parietal margin.

Alt. 21, diam. 83, length of aperture 7} mm.

Alt. 22, diam. 9, length of aperture 8 mm.

Vita, Cuba (Francisco E. Blanes).

A fourth member of the group of C. sca/urinum, decidedly stouter
in the spire than C. scalarinum Gundl. or C. johnsoni Pils. & Van.,
and differing from C. felis P. & V. in the weak development of the
teeth. —

Cerion incanum saccharimeta Blanes. Fig. 5.

Shell much larger than typical incanum, with long, tapering spire
and blunt apex. Whorls 13, the last frequently irregularly costate.
Alt. 38, diam. 13, length of aperture 12 mm.

Sugar Loaf Key, Florida (I. E. Blanes).

Cerion crassiusculum Torre. Figs. 7, 8.

Shell rimate, cylindrical, rather solid, lusterless, light brown or
yellowish-brown throughout. Latter three whorls of equal diameter,
or wider above, those above tapering in a short cone with straight
or slightly concave outlines; apex obtuse, rather mammillar,
Sculptured with rather close, regular, strong riblets, which are some-
what oblique, varying from as wide to half as wide as the inter-
stices, and about 28 in number on the antepenultimate whorl; be-
coming obsolete or partially so on the last whorl. Whorls nearly
10, but slightly convex, the last slightly ascending in front.

478 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Aperture vertical, with a very small, short parietal tooth, and
moderate axial fold; peristome blunt, expanded, subreflexed, the
terminations distant, connected by a moderate parietal callus.

Alt. 203, diam. 83, length of aperture 74 mm.

Alt. 20, diam. 9}, length of aperture 8 mm.

Cayo Juin, Baracoa, Cuba (Prof. de la Torre, F. E. Blanes).

There is a small form, alt. 13, diam. 64, length of aperture 5 mm.,
having all the characters of the larger except that there are only 8
whorls.

The last whorl in this species is half the total length of the shell
or a trifle more, and upon it the ribs are weak or wholly obsolete.
Compared with C. incrassatum microdon, it differs in the concave
instead of convex outlines of the terminal cone, and the color. It
differs from C. tenuilabre in the coarser sculpture; and from both
in the comparatively smooth last whorl.

Cerion sanzi Blanes. Fig. 9.

Shell rimate, solid and strong, cylindric-conic. White, very
sparsely and inconspicuously mottled with grayish or brown ; luster-
less, the ribs rather glossy. Lower three whorls of about equal
diameter, those above forming a rather long cone terminating in an
obtuse apex. Whorls 10-113, the first smooth, the rest ribbed ; ribs
- rather strong, narrow, separated by far wider interstices, 20-27 on
the penultimate whorl, frequently in part obsolete on the last whorl,
split on the base into an irregular striation. | Aperture irregularly
oval, the throat brown; peristome reflexed, more or less thickened,
the terminations joined by a heavy parietal callus. Parietal tooth
deep within, strong and rather long; columellar tooth well marked.

Alt. 27, diam. 114, length of aperture 10 mm.

Alt. 233, diam. 103, length of aperture 9 mm.

Confites Key, Nuevitas, Cuba.

This species has considerable resemblance to C. mumia, but differs .
conspicuously in the strong development of the parietal fold, the
inner termination of which is not visible from the aperture. In
some specimens the interior of the aperture is mainly white, the
brown appearing far within. In one shell of the type lot there is a
small accessory denticle to the left of the main fold.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 479

NoveMBER 1.
The President, Samuet G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.

Twenty-eight persons present.

The death of John Shalleross, a member, was announced.

A paper entitled “ Notes on the growth of the Hobblebush, Vibur-
num lantanoides,” by Ida A. Keller, was presented for publication.

NOVEMBER 8.
The President, SamugeL G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-three persons present.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :

“The occurrence of Marcasite in the Raritan Formation.” By
8. Harbert Hamilton.

“ Margarita Sharpii, a new Alaskan Gastropod.” By Henry A.
Pilsbry.

“The Bone Cave at Port Kennedy and its partial examination in
1894, 1895 and 1896.” By Henry C. Mercer.

NoveMBER 15.
The President, Samuret G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair.

Twenty-one persons present.

The death on the 11th inst. of Charles P. Perot, a member, was
announced,

NOVEMBER 22.
Mr. Cuarues Morris, in the Chair.

Twenty-four persons present.

Mr. Mercer’s paper on the Port Kennedy Bone Cave was ordered
to be printed in the JourNAL.

The following minute of appreciation of the service of the late
Charles P. Perot was unanimously adopted:

The Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia has heard with ,
great regret the announcement of the death on the 11th inst. of
Cuarves P. Preror.

480 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

He was elected a member in May, 1874. He served as Treasurer
during the years 1898 and 1894 and was a member of the Finance
Committee from 1890 to 1893 and again from 1895 until his death.
He was Chairman of the Library Committee, and was continuously
a member of the Council from his first election thereto in 1881 until
his decease.

In all these positions Mr. Perot was a wise, liberal and devoted
friend and supporter of the Academy. His services were given
with fidelity and with high efficiency. In all these various relations
Mr. Perot not only won the confidence of his associates but by his
urbane manner and equable temperament he secured their personal
friendship as well. He was a good type of those broad minded
and sympathetic business men in Philadelphia and vicinity who
have freely given their valuable aid to this institution and have con-
tributed so largely to its usefulness and high standing.

The Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia hereby ex-
presses and places on record its appreciation of the value of Mr.
Perot’s efficient services to the institution and of the great loss
which has been sustained by his death.

NoveMBeER 29.
The President, Samuren G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.
Twenty-seven persons present.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :

“Some Observations on the Classification of Birds.” By Dr. R.
W. Shufeldt. g

“ A Study of the type Specimens of Birds in the Collection of the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, with a brief history
of the Collection.” By Witmer Stone.

Occurrence of Oryzomys palustris in Southern New Jersey.—MR.
WirMer Stone placed on record the capture of two specimens of
the Rice-field Mouse, Oryzomys palustris, in southern New Jersey,
on Noy. 21, 1898, by Mr. Henry W. Warrington.

The history of the species is of peculiar interest. It was originally
discovered in 1816 by Dr. John Bachman at Charleston, 8S. C. but
was not described until 1836 when a specimen and description were
sent to Drs. Pickering and Harlan of Philadelphia for comparison
with Ord’s Arvicola riparia and for publication if the ‘southern
animal proved distinct.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 481

Dr. Bachman named the mouse Arvicola oryzivora. Upon com-
parison with specimens in the Academy collection Dr. Harlan not
only found that Bachman’s mouse was quite distinct from Arvicola
riparia but also discovered that a mounted specimen identical with
it was already in the collection labelled from ‘ Fastland” near
Salem, N. J.

He thereupon ignored Pee! s manuscript and described the
New Jersey specimen under the name of Mus palustris.’ Baird
subsequently established the genus Oryzomys for it, and it has since
been known as Oryzomys palustri is (Harlan).

Further explorations have shown that the Rice-field Mouse is
distributed from North Carolina to Texas but until the present time
no other specimens have been obtained from New Jersey. For
some time past Mr. S. N. Rhoads has made persistent efforts to dis-
cover this animal and has trapped without avail in Cape May Co.,
Port Norris, and Salem.

As a result of the failures it seemed most probable that the
original Harlan specimen had been wrongly labelled and that the
Rice-field Mouse was not a member of the New Jersey fauna. This
view had in fact been generally adopted.

Mr. Warrington’s rediscovery of the animal in this State after a
lapse of at least sixty-two years is therefore of great interest.

He states that the specimens were secured on the marshes border-
ing Delaware Bay about midway between Port Norris and Salem,
and that they were inhabiting old Muskrat houses in which they
had made their nests.

Mr. Stone stated further that steps would be at once taken to
secure a satisfactory series of these mice for comparison with those
of the Carolinas as there is a possibility of the latter proving a dis-
tinct subspecies.

The form inhabiting Florida has been already separated by Chap-
man as Oryzomys palustris natator.

The following were elected members :—

Charles Mohr, M. D., Henry L. Broomal, H. B. Gross, Miss
Emily Lowber, Miss Ethel Smith, Mrs. Julia Stockton Robins,
Miss Emily Williams Biddle and Mrs. J. Edgar Thomson.

The following were ordered to be printed :—

1 Am, Jour. Sci. and Arts, XX XI, 385.

482 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

THE GROWTH OF VIBURNUM LANTANOIDES Michx.
BY IDA A. KELLER.

During a visit to Lake Ganoga, Sullivan County, Pa., last August,
I found nothing more plentiful than the hobble-bush, Viburnum lan-
tanoides. The long branches of this plant with their large round-
ovate leaves, the brown naked winter buds, at that time already fully
developed, and the clusters of the then red berries were everywhere
conspicuous. There is something strikingly characteristic about the
species. It is described in Gray’s Manual as a “straggling bush ”
and in Britton & Brown’s Flora as “a bush of irregular growth.”
On collecting and comparing a sufficient number of specimens I came
to the conclusion that there is some peculiar tendency at the bottom
of this apparent irregularity and that law and order prevail in the
growth of this seemingly eccentric species. Although some shoots
differ so widely from others that they seem hardly to belong to the
same kind of plant it is by no means a difficult matter to find the
necessary connecting links. The accompanying illustrations, al-
though diagrammatic, are directly drawn from nature and by means
of these I have endeavored to show that this so-called “ irregular
growth ” is chiefly due to a peculiar method of ramification on the
one hand, and to a tendency to the suppression of the growth of the
main axis on the other.

Plate XXV, fig. 1 represents a form frequently occurring in
younger plants. A main axis and two lateral branches are con-
spicuously developed, The important point to observe is the con-
tinued growth of the main axis after ramification, which even sur-
passes that of the branches. It may be noticed incidentally at this
point that the axis ends with three buds, which are represented on a
larger scale in fig. 6. It must also be observed that the axes of the
lateral branches cease to indicate vigorous growth after again
branching. These axes terminate at a’. Attention must also be
called to the fact that on the ends of the branches marked b’ there
appear but two instead of three buds. Fig. 7, which represents
these buds on a larger scale, is a repetition of fig. 6 with one of the
lateral buds obliterated.’ The lateral bud in each case shows a

1 The suppressed lateral bud occurs occasionally as arudiment. See figs. 8
and 9

ia)

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 483

greater elongation of the stem than the central bud. It thus fore-
shadows the precedence which it takes in the future development of
the plant. It can be readily observed that the suppressed lateral
bud is the one next the main axis of branch b.

Comparing fig. 4 with fig. 1, a decided difference in the relative
growth of the main axis and its branches is to be observed. This
difference is still further emphasized by such shoots as the one
represented by fig. 3.

From the foregoing, fig. 5 represents a striking contrast in some
respects. Here we find a short axis terminated at a, with long
lateral branches which are studded with branchlets along their
upperside. Fig. 2 is the necessary connecting link. This was taken
from a low bush with a very short main axis. The right lateral
branch resembles fig. 5, while the lateral branch to the left is quite
similar to the branches of fig. 1.

Plate XXV, fig. 5 explains itself if we recall the two buds of fig.
7. We can readily see that this effect is produced by the vigorous
growth of the lateral bud with little or no growth of the main axis.
The axes of the branches in their turn are suppressed when the next
ramification occurs and the energy of growth is again transferred to
the lateral branch of the next series. We have thus produced a
so-called false axis, i. e. an axis which is successively formed from
the lateral branches of the main axis, the latter continuing to exist
with little or no growth. This is well known to botanists as the
sympodial method of branching and is observable in many of our
forest trees.

In making the drawings I was struck with their resemblance to
the diagrammatic representations, found in many of our text books,
of the cyme, in which the oldest flower terminates the stem while
the main growth continues laterally. Compare, e. g., fig. 4, with the
little axillary clusters of Weigelia or the inflorescence of the Caryo-
phyllacese. Furthermore a peculiar modification of the cyme is
well known as the monochasium in which there is but one lateral
ramification. This finds its parallel in fig. 7. The monochasium
repeats itself indefinitely and here also this peculiar method of
branching has a decided tendency to continue until at times we have
a false axis whose length is to be measured by the yard, It is
curious that the lateral branch which carries on the growth is always
on the same side of the axis and thus the case is further comparable

484 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

to the helicoid uniparous cyme in which the flowers (here represented
by a, a’, a”, etc.) always fall on the same side of the rhachis.

I mention the similarity between this kind of inflorescence and
the sympodial method of branching of this species particularly be-
cause the inflorescence of Viburnum belongs to the cymose type.
The comparison is interesting if not of greater significance. Tomy
knowledge it is not usual to look for, or to find; a correspondence
between the method of branching of the vegetative system and that
of the flowering system of a species.

From a comparison of the shoots of Viburnum lantanoides we
may draw the following conclusions :

This species begins its career normally with a main axis ending
with a terminal and two lateral buds.

A tendency soon becomes evident toward retarding the growth
of the main axis while the chief growth energy is transferred to the
lateral ramifications.

There is a further tendency to the complete suppression of one of
the lateral buds which, however, may be present in rudimentary
form.

In consequence we have the true axis often replaced by a false
axis and we may regard V. lantanoides as a bush with a decided
tendency to the sympodial method of branching.

? Revisions to the original type of branching, represented by figs. 1, 3 and 4,
are not uncommon and assist in producing the irregular eflect. See figs. 11
and 12.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 485

THE OCCURRENCE OF MARCASITE IN THE RARITAN FORMATION.
BY 8. HARBERT HAMILTON.

The Gault formation of Folkstone near Dover, England, has Jong
been known to produce the form of marcasite known as “spear head
ore” from its apparent close resemblance to this weapon. So far as
I can ascertain this form of marcasite has never been observed in
this country where it occurs under similar circumstances as in
England.

The beds of the Raritan formation at Sayreville, near New Bruns-
wick in New Jersey, which are largely worked for clay and kaolin,
contain a considerable amount of pyrite usually in the form of balls,
and concretions, in many instances resembling coprolites. Imbeded
in the plastic clays associated with these pyrite nodules were found
perfect specimens of the spear head variety of marcasite, very closely
resembling in size and appearance those from the foreign locality
already cited. In some specimens the marcasite twins are implanted
upon pyrite; again, crystals of marcasite were
studded with minute cubes of pyrite illustrat-
ing the pseudo-morphism between these
dimorphous ferric sulfides.

The specimens here described were ob-
tained upon a joint excursion of the New
York and Philadelphia mineralogists to this

Fic. 1. x2, locality under the guidance of Mr. John A.
Manley of New Brunswick, who collected the first specimens.

486 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898,

MARGARITA SHARPII, A NEW ALASKAN GASTROPOD.
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY.

Margarita Sharpii n. sp.

Shell thin, of low-conoid form, with extremely broad funnel-
shaped umbilicus and very rapidly expanding whorls. Color, dull
salmon or brick-pink, becoming ashy on the spire and within the
umbilicus. Sculpture, numerous spiral cords and threads, which on
the spire are strong, alternately smaller, then with a tertiary series
intercalated, the whole becoming less pronounced on the last whorl,
where by further intercalation of threads the spirals
become very numerous in some individuals, and in
others mostly obsolete ; the base with close, strong
spiral cords outside the edge of the umbilicus; the
whole surface with fine, crowded and somewhat
lamellar growth-striz, the spire with some spaced
coarser radial riblets. | Whorls 43, very rapidly ex-

Fic. 1. panding, the last at the aperture about three times
the width of the preceding (seen from above) ; gently convex; peri-
phery angular; base convex, the umbilical region broadly excay-
ated, nearly as large as the aperture. Aperture large, very oblique,
salmon colored within, with brilliant green reflections, but having a
wide border within the lip appearing dull whitish from in front,
but showing red and white reflections seen from below. Peristome
thin, deeply excised in the umbilical region, above the excision pro-

duced forward as a low wall curving around the umbilical edge, |

continuing as far as the posterior termination of the outer lip. Alt.
7.5, greater diam. 14, lesser 11 mm.

Operculum concaye externally, with about 8 closely coiled whorls
with slightly free overlapping edges.

Dutch Harbor, Unalaska (Dr. B. Sharp, June 21, 1896).

The relations of this species are with M. umbilicalis Brod. & Sowb.
and M. vorticifera Dall.’ The former of these is a Greenland species
with the glossy surface and rounded whorls of the North Atlantic
Margaritas. MM. vorticifera is found in the Aleutian Islands, and

'Manual of Conchology, XI, p. 288, pl. 59, f, 48-50,

EE

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 487

was taken by Dr. Sharp at Unalaska. It resembles M. Sharpii
closely in color, texture and sculpture, but differs from it in the
following particulars of form: Seen from above the whorls of M.
Sharpii increase in breadth very much more rapidly, the last be-
coming far broader near the aperture. The umbilical area in MV.
vorticifera is broad and excavated, but the umbilicus proper is com-
paratively small, round and deep; while in M. Sharpii the excavated
area is not only much larger, but the entire cavity is widely open to
its beginning. In M. vorticifera the columellar margin of the per-
istome is broadly concave along the margin of the “ funnel,” passing
into a subtriangular dilation above (well shown in the front view of
Dall’s original figures), which impinges upon the circular umbilicus
and to a small extent vaults it over, as in many Helices. In M.
Sharpii the columellar margin is much more deeply excised, and its
continuation above forms a raised wall curving around the entirely
open and far wider umbilicus,

Types are No. 70, 554 of the conchological collection of the Acad-
emy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.

488 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

DECEMBER 6.
The President, SamugeL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair.

Thirty-three persons present.

The death of Redwood F. Warner, a member, Nov. 29, aged 81

years, was announced.

Dr. FLorence Bascom made a communication on petrographi-
cal methods of rock determination, illustrated by the Philadelphia
belt of crystalline rocks. (No abstract).

DECEMBER 13.
The President, SAMUEL G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair.

Thirty-four persons present.

DECEMBER 20.
Mr. CHARLES Morris in the Chair.

One hundred and thirty persons present.

A paper entitled “Synopsis of the United States Species of the
Hymenopterous Genus Centris Fabricius,” by Wm. J. Fox, was
presented for publication.

Pror. AnGeLto Her_prin made a communication, illustrated
by lantern views, on the geology and physical geography of the
Klondike Gold Mining Region, with incidents of a journey to
Dawson City. (No abstract).

DECEMBER 27.
The President, SamureL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair,
,

Twenty-nine persons present.

The following was ordered to be printed :— -

—————— rl lm

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 489

OBSERVATIONS ON THE CLASSIFICATION OF BIRDS.!
BY DR. R. W. SHUFELDT.

In former papers of mine the classification of various groups of
birds has been treated; their osteology, as a rule, being the anatom-
ical system employed and referred to for the purpose. These inves-
tigations, as many are aware, have not been confined entirely to
recent avifaunze, but have also taken into consideration fossil
material; the remains of birds that existed as far back as tertiary
time.

So far as the United States ornis is concerned every family, or
indeed, nearly every genus of the recent age has thus been dealt with,
and some of the mss. presenting the details of these researches have
been published, while the far greater proportion of them tempora-
rily await asimilar disposition. Itis in this manner that such groups
as the Passeres, the Swifts, the Humming-birds, the Goatsuckers, the
Trogons, the Kingfishers, and many others have been gone over and
issued in the form of memoirs in different publications, while upon
the other hand the osteology of entire groups has been written out
and illustrated, and will, when printed, fill in gaps that formerly
existed. Among these last, extensive work has also been done with
large and small groups of birds not occurring in this country, as the
Penguins, the Ostriches, and others. These will not be taken espe-
cially into consideration in the present connection, for the reason
that considerable unanimity of opinion exists among naturalists
with respect to their taxonomy ; though probably the Penguins form
an exception to this statement. Commencing in the United States
avifauna with the Pygopodes, however, and passing the various
groups in review following their linear arrangement in the order in
which they are usually printed, we meet not only with single species
but with groups of species, the true taxonomic position of which, in
the system, ornithologists entertain very diverse opinions. It
is to these that it is my intention to refer in the present paper.
They have all been closely studied by me osteologically, and in the

‘Read by title at the Sixteenth Congress of the American Ornithologists’
Union, at the United States National Museum, Washington, D, C. 17th of
November, 1898.

32

490 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

case of many of them their general anatomy has been investigated,
and their biology as a whole given weight. My views upon the
classification and systematic position of some of these families or
species now in my mind, have been briefly abstracted and published,
either in The Ibis of the British Ornithologists’ Union, or in the
Proceedings of the Zodlogical Society of London. Others there are
that have not been so noticed.

Prior to passing to the aforesaid subject-matter in chief how-
ever, it may be as well first to pay some attention to the morpholog-
ical characters of birds with special reference to their use in determin-
ing a scheme for the natural classification of the Class. By the
natural classification of Aves is meant an orderly arrangement of
existing birds into major and minor subdivisions according to their
true affinities as they actually obtain in nature. Thata real relation-
ship exists among certain and various tribes of birds, since the time
they have, through their evolution, become differentiated from their
remote reptilian stock, is a fact that it is feared those who attempt
their taxonomy do not always keep impressed with sufficient
strength upon their minds. Consequently we often hear of this
classifier’s arrangement, and that classifier’s arrangement or scheme,
just as though no real affinities existed, whereas it is the duty of
each and every one attempting a taxonomic scheme to discover pre-
cisely how the avian tree has thrown out its branches and its twigs,
and, if possible, determine the points from where they sprung.
Equally useless is it to attempt a classification of birds by selecting
for the purpose the ornis of any particular area of the earth’s sur-
face. Those that enter upon the task by applying to taxonomic
ornithology the birds occurring within arbitrary political boundaries
as mapped out by man will fail utterly, and such a piecemeal, pro-
visional classification will, with the greatest certainty, be broken up
the moment the first far-seeing taxonomer tests it with the morpho-
logical facts gathered from the entire class, both existing and ex-
tinct, as far as they are known to science. For this reason, we
must consider all the classifications of birds up to the present time
as being merely provisional, in as much as we are yet so far from
possessing the necessary knowledge to define the true one, based
upon the complete biological history of the Class. A study of the
various classificatory schemes that have been presented within the
last twenty-three centuries will convince any one that there has been
just as much of an evolution in this field as there has been in the case

= wenbienber ie es Cll

ee! e.

~~, eis “oie <a)

ole 4,

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 491

of birds themselves. It must be remembered in this connection that
even as early as Aristotelian time, birds were classified into groups,
and Pliny, adhering to much that had been done five centuries
before him, selected only the very obvious characters of the feet for
the purpose, which threw all the birds known to him, into three
divisions, of which a Hawk, a Hen, and a Goose were respectively
representative. Thus were associated the Ducks and Cormorants,—
the Rails and Robins,—and this is what the feet did. Ornithology
was placed upon a scientific basis about the middle of the seventeenth
century through the labours of Willughby and Ray. They were
the first to use the two main divisions of Land and Water birds, and
in subdividing, both the bills and feet were used as classificatory
characters. For the most part Linnzeus followed Ray, and in doing
so kept many birds in taxonomic juxtaposition where the affinity
was quite remote. Mergansersand Albatrosses were kept together,
as were Divers and Gulls,—and so much for what bills and feet did
in those days. Improvement over early authors was very evident,
however, and many palpable errors were rectified. From such
beginnings the science has grown up, authors and classifiers being
more and more numerous with each succeeding generation. Some
used one set of characters and some another, but it is to be distinctly
noticed that the previous taxonomic schemes have always influenced
their followers in later years. Merrem, who in 1812, was perhaps the
first to publish a systematic arrangement of the groups of birds, was
doubtless influenced by all that had been accomplished prior to his
time, as the work of Nitzsch in pterylography, Cuvier in structure,
and Linnwus and Ray in a number of external characters. His
scheme was a solid contribution to the classification of birds, based
as it was upon a variety of anatomical characters, as those drawn
from the sternum, those from the feathers, those from the osseous
system, and those from other parts, as the bills and feet. In fact
Merrem took a long step in the direction of the truth, or rather in
the discovery of the true relationships of birds in nature.

De Blainville quickly followed Merrem, and again rearranged the
avian scheme of classification, fascinated as he was by the characters
presented on the part of the body of the sternum. In some direc-
tions further advancement was evidenced, however, and this advance-
ment later on was powerfully increased by the labors of Nitzsch
who brought into play the arterial system, the song-muscles, the
nasal glands, and other morphological features.

492 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Thus from the time of Nitzsch down to the present day, the
classification of birds has gone through many changes and many
phases at the hands of the ornithologists of the succeeding genera-
tions as they have passed. The greatest advances have been made
since the scientific demonstration of the law of organic evolution
and the derivation of birds became known, and these by the men
who have studied the subject from that standpoint. Were it pos-
sible for us now to know the complete biology of every bird-form
that has existed upon the earth since birds as birds came into exist-
ence, there would be among ornithologists an agreement of opinion
upon their classification, the world over, within a twelvemonth. If
half the species that have existed were known, the scheme would
almost work itself out. As it is, we probably see to-day in the
world’s avifauna but a paltry remnant of that enormous and un-
known host, and it will be generations yet to come ere there will be
a consensus of opinion upon the affinities of this puzzling and very
homogeneous group of vertebrates. When compared with other
major groups of animals, either vertebrate or invertebrate, the
structural differences to be found among the forms making up the
natural minor groups of existing birds are far less apparent than in
any one of them. ‘Taken in their entireties, the difference between
an Apteryx and a Humming-bird morphologically, is not to be com-
pared with what exists when thus contrasted, between such forms,
for example, as a man and an Ornithorhynchus among mammals, or
between a Lancelet and a Bass among fishes. Birds are an extremely
compact group, and the disposition is altogether too prevalent in
attempts to classify them, to accord too high rank to not a few of the
divisions above the family. Were birds fishes, the entire congrega-
tion of them, would hardly make more than a respectable order.
They are a lucky lot of closely affined volant feathered reptiles that
have specifically multiplied at a wonderful rate since they sprang
into existence, and as useful and as charming asthe majority of them
are in nature, their taxonomy nevertheless has puzzled the wits of
many a man since Aristotle lived, and will doubtless continue to do
so in the years to come. To arrive at their true affinities and a
natural grouping of the class, it will be necessary to utilize every
fact that we possess in regard to their biology; by this it is meant
every paleontological fact; every fact referring to geographical dis-
tribution for all time; every morphological fact; besides all that is
known of their biology, habits, and development. In so far as their

ree

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 493

anatomy is concerned some of the systems have undoubtedly proved
to be of more value than others in the matter of classification. For
example, in this particular the study of the skeleton teaches us more
than a comparison of the dermal appendages, but the osseous
system is by no means all-sufficient to meet the ends of taxonomy
as some still seem to believe. With regard to thisit is easy to agree
with what Professor Alfred Newton has said, when commenting
upon the value of the work left us by Nitzsch, for “there can be no
part of a bird’s organization that by proper study would not help
to supply some means of solving the great question of its affinities,
This seems to the present writer to be one of the most certain general
truths in zodlogy, and is probably admitted in theory to be so by
most zodlogists, but their practice is opposed to it; for, whatever
group of animals be studied, it is found that one set or another of
characters is the'chief or favorite of the authors consulted—each
generally taking a separate set, and that to the exclusion of all
others, instead of effecting a combination of all the sets and taking
the aggregate.” Thus it is, that notwithstanding the relative value
of the characters furnished on the part of any particular morpho-
logical system, as indicating interexisting affinities, that value is cer-
tain to be affected when the facts brought out by a study of another
system, as the muscular system, for example, are applied to it. As
evident as this is, however, we have not far to seek in order to dis-
cover avian classifiers who would be content to base their taxonomic
scheme of the class upon some single character of some special
system, as, for instance, De Blainville did in using only the body
of the sternum for the purpose. Such a practice lands one not very
far from the plane arrived at by Pliny in the first century.

Doctor Alfred Russel Wallace in criticising this memoir of Mr.
Blanchard’s in The Ibis for the year 1864, says very truly that we
should make the greatest errors in classification by following the
sternum alone, as “ for example, the sterna of the Finches and the
Flycatchers are scarcely distinguishable, notwithstanding the great
dissimilarity in almost every part of the structure of these birds—
their bills, their feet, their plumage, their habits, food, and digestive
organs. On the other hand, the sterna of the several genera of the
Caprimulgide differ from each other more than those of the most
distinct families of the restricted Passeres. The Bee-eaters, the Bar-
bets, and the Woodpeckers, again, are three very distinct families,
which, in a classification founded upon all parts of a bird’s organiza-

-

494 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

tion, cannot be brought in close contact; and yet, their sterna,
according to Mr. Blanchard, much resemble each other. _ It is evi-
dent, therefore, that the whole structure of a bird and its correspond-
ing habits may be profoundly modified, and yet the sternum may
undergo the important changes, while the general organization and
habits are but little altered.” So much for the value of single
anatomical systems in avian taxonomy, and so much for the value
of single characters in any system. Now as to the value of osteology
as a whole in the classification of birds, no ornithotomist or classifier
of this group of vertebrates will for a moment doubt. Employed in
its entirety the osseous system of Aves stands far in advance of any
other in settling the question of affinities and affording characters in
classification. It has been almost entirely through our studies of
the fossil skeletons of birds that we have been enabled to fix their
origin in time, or to link them with their extinct reptilian ancestors.

The researches of the Parkers in the development of the embryo-
logical skeleton of birds ; of Huxley in the skull; and the labors of
Macegillivray, Nitzsch, Merrem, De Blainville, L’ Herminier, Cuvier,
St. Hilaire, Gervais, Blanchard, Eyton, Owen, Garrod, Forbes, Fiir-
bringer, Gadow, Lucas, Beddard, and many others upon the general
skeleton; while the study of paleontological osteology by Milne-
Edwards, Cope, Marsh, and their colleagues in the same field, would,
when taken in the aggregate go far toward establishing a natural
classification, or rather toward indicating the true affinities of birds,

Still in face of all this we must believe, that osteology is by no
means an all-sufficing guide, nor has it been in the mind of the pres-
ent writer in his attempts to discover the true kinships existing
among birds; their systematic positions; and the places the vari-
ous natural groups should occupy in any scheme of classification.

On the contrary the aim has been to examine with care into the
results of the anatomical and general biological investigations of
birds by whomsoever they may have been undertaken and published,
so long as those researches seemed to have any bearing upon the
solution of the true affinities of the class. With this in view a very
wide field of literature has been considered, and the works of a great
many authors examined. All through this, osteology has held the
main place, but constantly subject to subordination when factors
drawn from other anatomical systems or from the general life-his-
tories of the bird-groups, possessed beyond all doubt greater weight
and significance,

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 495

Bearing this in mind, and from osteological premises, let us now
proceed to examine into the probable affinities of certain birds or
groups of birds and how we should classify them. An inquiry of
this kind would hardly seem to require any apology, in as much as
no two systematists of all those who have published a scheme of
classification for Aves, since 1867 when Professor Huxley gave us
his, agree upon the position in the system and the affinities of not
a few of the natural avian assemblages. Take for example the
Grebes and Loons. Huxley associated them with the Laride, Pro-
cellariidx, and Alcidz in his Group Cecomorphe; Garrod placed
them among the Ducks and Penguins, in the Anseres; Forbes in-
cluded the Heliornitidz with them, and created a new group Ere-
topodes; Dr. Sclater retained them as a family Colymbidz with the
Alcidz in the order Pygopodes; Reichenow did the same, but added
the Penguins to the group, and called the order Urinatores; they
are a family of a superfamily, and associated with four other super-
families, of the Cecomorphe in Dr. Stejneger’s scheme; Dr. Fiir-
bringer giving still other new names for orders, suborders and genera,
places them between the Flamingoes and the extinct Hesperornith-
idx ; we find them among the Galliformes in Seebohm’s arrange-
ment; and finally considered as two separate orders by Dr. Sharpe.
Still other eminent taxonomers, as Cope, Professors Gadow and New-
ton, take different views of the subject. In 1890 Professor D’Arey
W. Thompson and the present writer pointed out quite independ-
ently of each other the fact that the Loons and Grebes were descend-
ants of the Hesperornithidw, an opinion previously expressed by
Cope and Fiirbringer. At great variance with this, Professor New-
ton, Lydekker, and Marsh, contended that these extinct cretaceous
divers were some kind of a natatorial Ostrich. These so-called
ostrich or “struthions characters” have been a stumbling-block in
times past to more than one avian systematist, but I think their
real significance is gradually coming to be better appreciated as
time goes on. The great probability is, that there was a time in the
former history of the Class, possibly at about the age when Hesper-
ornis flourished, that all birds exhibited such characters in their
skeletons. They are retained now only in a few and widely separ-
ated groups or families, as the Kiwis, the Tinamus, Ostriches and
some others.

Now apart from a general and superficial resemblance a typical *
Loon and a typical Grebe are not, to judge from their osteology, as

496 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

near akin as many seem to think. . Differences of a very marked
character distinguish their skulls, their vertebral columns, their
sterna, their pelves, and their limb bones. Still there is a greater
similarity between the skeleton of a Loon and a Grebe than there
is between a Loon and any representative of the Ales. About this
fact I have satisfied myself after having compared, character for
character, as they occur in the skeletons of several species of Loons
with the corresponding ones in a number of Grebes and both with
all the Auks found in our United States avifauna, save Cerorhinea.
D’Arcy Thompson has shown, beyond all question in my opinion,
in his paper, On the systematie position of Hesperornis, the affinity
of our modern or existing Colymbi with that ancient diver. It
would seem then that the time cannot be far distant when naturalists
can at least agree upon the relations that these birds bear to each
other and to kindred groups. To express this relationship, Loons
and Grebes should be associated in one and the same suborder, and
a superfamily created for either assemblage. In a linear classifica-
tion, I believe their nearest relatives are the Penguins upon the one
hand and the Auks upon the other, with the Heliornithidee in the
next place as a related branch, and one more nearly so than the
Laride or the Procellaridee. In part, this is believed by Dr. Stej-
neger, to be the relationship who, however, widely dissociates the Hes-
perornithide. While this last relationship is fully appreciated
by Professor Fiirbringer, that eminent authority nevertheless ap-
parently, sees no special affinity, between an Auk and a Loon or
Grebe, and so very widely separates the Colymbo-Podicipites and
the Laro-Limicolz assemblages.

Passing next to the anserine fowls, one would think that by this
time there would be more or less unanimity of opinion among
systematic ornithologists as to the affinities and position of such a
homogeneous group. Asa family, the existing Anatide can but
contain the Mergansers, Ducks, Geese and Swans, while the outliers,
either existing or extinct, are not as a rule very puzzling forms.
The anserine affinities of Palamedea are now pretty generally re-
cognized ; and there can be no question as to the relationships of
the extinet Cnemiornis or Cereopsis. Moreover the relation borne
by the Flamingoes to the Anseres has been known for a good many
years past, and yet notwithstanding all this we find almost as much
diversity of opinion among the classifiers of birds as to where this
very natural group belongs, as has already been pointed out in

— ye eee eS Get)

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 497

regard to the Pygopodes. After a careful examination and com-
parison of the skeleton of Palamedea, all of our United States Ans-
eres except one or two species; the Flamingoes including the extinct
ones, and Palolodus; and a great many species and genera. of
Herons, Ibises, Storks, Scopus, and their allies near and remote;
and finally an equal number of the Steganopodes, [ was led to
believe a year or two ago, that the duck tribe in its widest sense,
with the allied suborders containing the Palamedeidx, the Pheeni-
copteridz and their fossil relatives, constituted a group, the nearest
related branches to which were the Steganopodes upon the one hand
and the Herodiones upon the other. An opinion, practically quite
similar to this is entertained by Dr. Sharpe and Dr. Stejneger,
while on the other hand, Dr. Gadow places the Anseriformes between
the Falconiformes upon the one hand and the Crypturiformes upon
the other,—which of course is an utterly different view of their
relationships. To discuss these latter here, is obviously out of the
question, as it would carry the present paper far beyond its limits.

Fic. 2.

Fig. 1. (Upper figure) Right lateral view of the skull of Dendrocygna
autumnalis, showing complete bony ring surrounding orbit. Pterygoids lost.
From a photograph by the author. 4 nat. size.

‘ig. 2. Right lateral view of part of trunk skeleton of same specimen.
# nat. size.

Before turning from the Anseres, however, I desire to say that I 4
have found some interesting osteological points in the skeleton of
Dendrocygna autumnalis,—one of the tree-ducks. Although present-

498 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

ing several anatomical peculiarities, this genus is one containing
several species of ducks, and ducks not so very far removed from
either the Teals, or the Mallard, or perhaps Spatula. There is very
little Goose, and still less Swan in the morphology of Dendrocygna,
and for what reason the genus has been placed between Philacte and
Olor in the Check-List it is difficult for me to understand. In
the first edition of his Manual Mr. Ridgway places Dendrocygna,
the last genus in the duck-series where the synopses of characters of
the Anseres are set forth, while in the part devoted to the diagnoses
of species and genera, these Tree-ducks are placed between the
Swans and the Geese as in the Check-List. They have as I have
just said some peculiar characters about them, and of these, one of
the most interesting is the fact that they have complete bony rings
surrounding the orbits, as is the case in several genera of parrots
“and some other birds. So far as I am aware it is the only genus of
ducks that presents this character,—indeed, the only anserine bird
that has it.

Coming to the Cranes and Rails we meet with an interesting form
in Aramus giganteus. During the past few years I have compared
the skeletons of several hundred species of birds, and written out the
osteology of nearly every genus in this country, and among all these
have been included the entire Crane and Rail group with all the
North American birds in any way related to it. In this manner have
Grus, Aramus, Rallus, Porzana, Crex, Ionornis, Gallinula, Fulica,
and others been dealt with, and their skeletal characters arrayed in
tabular form in great detail. Without entering upon the general
taxonomy of this group, it is an interesting fact, that in so far as the
skeletal characters are concerned, Aramus presents two for every
one in favor of its affinity with Grus as compared with Rallus, yet
in nearly all avian classifications we find this bird arrayed with the
typical Rails. Four years ago I published in England, an abstract
in which was incorporated some of the facts here stated, with part
of a scheme for the classification of this group. Since then I have
examined a number of forms at that time not available, and although
they have not materially altered my original views, some changes
will necessarily have to be made in order to include these facts which
have since come before me.

Of recent years nothing has come to my notice that seems likely
to again check the now growing opinion that the Woodpeckers, as
another assemblage of birds, see their nearest relatives in the Passeres,

1898.]} NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 499

and they do not possess those vestiges of lacertilian morphology in
the bases of their crania that were formerly supposed to exist there.
The double vomers that a few years ago were attributed to them,
are now generally conceded to be nothing more than mesial edges
of the imperfectly ossified palatines, as was pointed out by Garrod
in 1872. In that year Garrod printed a brief paper in the Jbis, in
which he claimed that Gecinus viridis and its allies possessed
a median vomer, though it was differently formed from the bone as
it occurs among some of the Passerine birds. Nevertheless Dr.
Sharpe as late as 1891, in his extremely useful brochure, Recent
Attempts to Classify Birds, still claims saurognathism for the Pici,
although in the same paragraph he admits that in this entire sub-
order the “ vomer is slender, pointed and split” (p. 84). It is not
difficult to believe that all of the alleged saurognathous characters
in the skull and associated bony arches of the woodpeckers are due
to changes wrought in time through the special habits of this
particular group of birds, rather than that they stand in evidence
as structural remnants inherited from their ancient reptilian ances-
tors.

500 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

The following annual reports were read and referred to the Pub-
lication Committee :—

REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY.

With a view to supplying matters of interest for the meetings of
the Academy and thereby increasing the attendance, the Committee
on Instruction and Lectures has been charged with the duty of pre-
paring an announcement of the programme for each month, postal
eard notices being sent accordingly to the members. By this means
tle average attendance has been slightly increased from 25 to 28,
the largest number being 135 and the smallest, at the midsummer
meetings, being 6. The communications presented and the discus-
sions based on them have frequently been interesting, but, except in
a few cases, they were not records of the results of original investiga-
tion and were not, therefore, prepared for publication in the Proceed-
ings of the Academy. The speakers during the past year were
Messrs Skinner, Goldsmith, Rand, Carter, Dixon, Ferrier, Heilprin,
Keeley, Woolman, Pilsbry, Chapman, Holman, Stewardson Brown,
Calvert, Stone, Frazer, Sharp, Palmer, Spiller, Mills, L. Witmer,
Barr, Holman, Lyman, Vaux, U. C. Smith, Willcox, Conklin, Mont-
gomery, Chas, Morris, Harned, J. Cheston Morris, Wells, Brinton,
J. Wharton James, Libbey, A. E. Brown, A. F. Witmer and Miss
Keller.

Six hundred and fifty-two pages of the Proceedings illustrated by
twenty-seven plates have been issued. Twenty-five pages of the
Journal with one plate and a large number of text illustrations have
been printed and distributed in the form of an author’s edition, the
entire expense of publication having been defrayed by Mr. Clarence
B. Moore, the continuation of his valuable work on the southern
burial mounds constituting the subject matter of the issue.

It forms the first portion of the second number of Volume XI of
the Journal, the continuation, on which the printer is now engaged
consisting of Prof. Cope’s posthumous paper on the fossils of the Port
Kennedy Bone Cave, to be illustrated by four plates of the remains
of the new species described, and one by Mr. H. C. Mercer on the
general characters of the cave, the mode of making the explora-
tions, and his methods of preserving and recording the results, with
text illustrations. These papers, it is hoped, will be distributed
early the coming year.

.
EE eee

—

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 501

Fifty-six papers have been presented for publication during the
past year as follows:—Henry A. Pilsbry 6, Henry A. Pilsbry and
E. G. Vanatta 4, Gerrit S. Miller, Jr. 5, Clarence B. Moore 4,
Samuel N. Rhoads 4, Robert Baird McClain 3, John Van Denburgh
2, William J. Fox 2, Chas. S. Boyer 2, William H. Dall 2, Edw.
Goldsmith 1, Francis R. Cope, Jr. 1, Philip P. Calvert 1, Edw. J.
Nolan 1, John B. Smith 1, Daniel G. Brinton 1, Alvin Seal 1, T.
Chalkley Palmer 1, C. M. Barber and T. D. A. Cockerell 1, E. J.
Letson 1, Gary de N. Hough 1, E. G. Conklin 1, John W. Harsh-
berger 1, David Starr Jordan and J. A. Gonb, Jr. 1, J. Perey
Moore 1, C. Hart Merriam 1, Charles W. Johnson 1, Ida A. Keller
1,8. Harbert Hamilton 1, Henry C. Mercer 1, R. W. Shufeldt 1,
and Witmer Stone 1.

Five of these form a portion of the Journal before alluded to,
three were returned to the author, one was withdrawn, one is now
about going to press, and one has been held over until next year.
The others have been printed in the Proceedings. It is gratifying to
find in this connection that representatives of departments of the
United States Government, and of several important educational
institutions including the Agricultural College of New Mexico, the
Leland Stanford, Jr. University, the Smithsonian Institution and
the University of Pennsylvania have found it to their advantage to
avail themselves of the facilities for securing early date of publica-
tion afforded by the mode of issue and distribution of the Academy’s
Proceedings. It is earnestly urged that as soon as the Academy’s
means will permit, the numbers as issued be distributed free of
charge to all members of the society in good standing.

The Entomological Section (Am, Entomological Society) has
issued 231 pages and 11 plates of the Entomological News, 128 pages
and 2 plates of the Transactions, and 202 pages of special papers.

The publications of the Conchological Section during the year have
consisted of 143 pages and 27 plates of the Manual of Conchology.
This gives a total, exclusive of the Journal, of 1,356 pages and 67
plates issued since Dec. 1, 1897.

The present statistics of distribution of the Academy's publica-
tions proper are as follows :—

Proceedings, mailed to subseribers . . .... 81
- mailed to exchanges. . 100

5 sent to exchanges through th the Inter-
national Bureau (Smithsonian Inst.). . . . . 444
Total, 625

502 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Journals, mailed to subscribers. . . . . 34
e mailed to exchanges... . . 14
“sent to exchanges through Inter-

national Bureau (Smithsonian Inst.) . 52
Total, 100

The edition of the Proceedings is 1,000 copies, of the Journal 500.

The stock of the publications‘of the Academy had been removed
in the fall of 1897 to the basement of the new building so as to make
room for the office of the Executive Curator and for the growth of
the library. Roomy and convenient storage cases had been pro-
vided, a new account of stock had been taken, and it was believed
that this important part of the Academy’s possessions was at last
safely and permanently placed, with sufficient room for the additions
of many years to come and without danger of being again crowded
out by the growth of other departments. It was found later that
the basement was not entirely free from suspicion of dampness and
that the dust found its way through even comparatively air tight
doors and would therefore be objectionable. These evils might
have been remedied, but it was impossible to provide against the
accident which has made another removal absolutely necessary.

It occurred on the third of last August in the form of the
heaviest rain-fall ever known in this region. Its suddenness and
volume was that of a tropical storm. Streets became rapid torrents,
the fence on the south side of the Academy’s premises was torn
down, the excavated lot rapidly filled, with no outlet except through
the basement of the new museum building, where the water in a few
minutes reached a height of three feet. The publications on the
lower range of shelves were soaked, and before they could be re-
moved to the upper floors, where as rapidly as possible they were
spread out to dry, they sustained further damage from the mildew
consequent on the high temperature and humidity of the season.
The recent illustrations by photographic processes will have to be
replaced in both Proceedings and Journal as the peculiarly pre-
pared paper has been welded by the dampness and pressure into
masses of cardboard while the older lithographic plates printed
on honest linen paper are comparatively uninjured. The damaged

numbers have been placed in piles on the upper floors of the-

new museum building where they are at present safe from further
injury except to some slight extent from dust; but the necessity for
providing space for the entire stock of the back publications of the

}
{
'
‘

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 503

Academy which will be at once permanent, safe and convenient is
one that must be provided for immediately. The importance of
this matter is paramount in view of the fact that the reputation of
the Academy as a scientific institution depends more on the char-
acter of its publications, embodying as they do the notable work of
its members during eighty-seven years of its existence, than upon the
extent of its library and museum. Its publications keep it in com-
munication with other scientific societies; they form the basis of its
exchange in the intellectual markets of the world and place it on a
far higher plane than that of a mere local club of naturalists.

Pending an arrangement of the damaged publications on shelves
to be provided for them I have not been able to form estimate of the
cost of repair. The electro-blocks of the plates which must be re-
placed have been preserved, so that the printing alone will have
to be provided for.

Twenty-one members have been elected. The deaths of eleven
members have been announced, four have been dropped and the
resignations of nine have been accepted, as follows:—Julius F,
Sachse, Charles P. Turnbull, Mrs. L. L. W. Wilson, Charles W.
Dulles, Ellen W. Longstreth, Charles Coulter, Ruth Clement, J.
Howard Breed and J. Lewis Crew. ‘This leaves a net loss of three
from the membership roll. The deaths of nine correspondents have
been reported.

At the instance of the Secretary of the American Association for
the Advancement of Science a committee consisting of Messrs.
Meehan, McCook, Wilson, Skinner and Nolan was appointed early
in the summer to secure the co-operation of the city authorities and
representatives of educational establishments with a view to inviting
the Association to meet in Philadelphia in 1899, The invitation
was conveyed by a representative of a joint Committee but was not
accepted, the place selected for the meeting being Columbus, Ohio.

The Hayden Memorial Medal was conferred, in accordance with
the recommodation of the Committee on Award, on Prof. Otto
Martin Torell, the Chief of the Geological Survey of Sweden.

A note of thanks was unanimously tendered to Miss Anna T.
Jeanes for her munificent gift of $20,000 the income of which is to
be expended for the improvement and increase of the museum.

The President of the Academy and Mr. William Wynne Wister,
Jr. have been appointed Managers on behalf of the Academy of the
Wistar Institute of Anatomy under the deed of endowment.

504 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

The President was authorized to memorialize Congress for aid in
the establishment of a Floating Institute as defined in a communica-
tion from the 7th International Congress of Geologists held last year

in St. Petersburg. a a
EpwARD J. NoLAN,
Recording Secretary.

REPORT OF THE CORRESPONDING SECRETARY.

During the past year, commencing Dec. 1, 1897, there have
been received from eighty-five societies, museums, libraries, ete., one
hundred and fifty-four acknowledgements of the receipt of the pub-
lications of the Academy, and from forty societies, libraries, ete.,
forty-nine notices that their publications have been forwarded to the
Academy. ‘Twenty-seven applications for exchange and for supply
of deficiencies in sets of the Academy’s publications, together with
nine letters on miscellaneous subjects, fourteen circulars and invita-
tions to the Academy to participate in Congresses or meetings, and
several announcements of the deaths of scientific men have also been
received and when necessary answered.

The deaths of the following correspondents have been reported :

Charles E. Beddome, of Hobart Town, Tasmania; elected 1883,
died Sept. 1, 1898.

Ernest Candéz, of Liege, Belgium; elected 1877, died June 30,
1898.

Joseph Charles Hippolyte Crosse, of Paris, France; elected 1867,
died Aug. 7, 1898.

James Hall, of Albany, New York; eleeted 1843, died August
7, 1898.

Rudolph Leuckart, of Leipzig, Germany ; elected 1884, died
June, 1898.

Jules Marcou, of Cambridge, Mass.; elected 1860, died April 17,
1898.

R. P. Montrouzier, of New Caledonia; elected 1867, died 1898.

Osbert Salvin, of London, England; elected 1867, died June 1,
1898.

Karl Ludwig Fridolin yon Sandberger, of Wuerzburg, Germany,
elected 1855, died April 11, 1898.

Six hundred and eighty-eight acknowledgements for gifts to the
library and sixty-three for gifts to the museum have been forwarded.

Respectfully submitted,
Bens. SHARP,
Corresponding Secretary.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN.

505

The accessions to the library of the Academy during the year
since the first of December, 1897, number 4,469 of which 3,946 were
pamphlets, 517 volumes and 6 detached maps.

They have been received from the following sources :—

tit vs ay es BOLT
I. V. Williamson Fund,. 1,138
ee... | T8D
MEOEGec es « s . ... 200
Angelo Heilprin,. . . 101
U.S. Dept. of Agricult-

Oe ee 53
James Aitken Meigs

Fund, . . : 44
Estate of Geo. i. <_ L 27
U.S. Department of the

Interior, . . 23) |

Department of enw

mictoria, . 1 .. 20 |

Geological Survey “of

_ Sweden, . 14 |
U. §S. Diguarinent fos

0 ee 14.
Wilson Fund, . . 13
Ministry of Public Works,

France, .. 11
Geological Su ngs of

India, . . . | Geological Survey of Por-

me 8. Reparisvent of
Labor,. . . 6

Comité Géologique — 6

Department of Mines,

New South Wales,. . 5
Department of Geology,
Indiana, . . 4
~ U.S. Commission of Fish

and Fisheries, . . 3
Secretary of oe Mex-
ico, . ;

33

Chas. P. Perot, . :

Geological Survey of New
Jersey, . :

University Geo Vo, og cont
Survey of Kansas, .

East Indian Government,

Dr. D. B. McCartee, .

U.S. War Department, .

U. S. Treasury Depart-
ment, :

U.S. Interstate Guinn
sion, 2

U.S. Civil Saecis Goi!
mission, .

S. P. Langley, .

Queensland Government,

Commissioners of Inland

Fisheries and Game,
Mass., . ;
Librarian of Csi

Geological Survey of

Canada,

tugal, ;
Department of Mines,
Nova Scotia,
Thomas Meehan, :
Trustees of the British
Museum,
Illinois State Destin of
Labor, .
Mrs, C. F. Palen,
Weir netn bite 60%

bo bh bo tb

506 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

M. E. Wadsworth, . . 1

The Editor Publishing

(1898,

Geological Survey of Co., Cincinnati, O., . 1
Mexico, 1 Smith, Elder & Co., Lon-
Iowa Geological Biers 1 Gon; 4 1
i A. Pilabry,) 3.) .\'5 4 1 | Estate of J Ke HL. Red-
T. D. Rand, . : 1 field, hs 1
Edw. J. Nolan, 1 | Southern Rail Road Co., J 1
They were distributed to the several departments of the library as
follows :—
Journals, . . 3,639 | Medicine, 18
Geology,. .- . . . . 196 Physical Science, 18
Botany, . . . » « 120} Mineralogy, . 17
General Natural History, 91 | Herpetology, 16
Agrienitnre,**'. ") i". 56 Helminthology, 15
Entomology, ... . 37 | Ichthyology, 14
Mammalogy, ... . 37 | Ornithology, : 11
Anthropology,. .. . 30 | Geography, . . ~ wo 5
Conchology,. . . 28 | Chemistry, -..-. “a am 1
Anatomy and Phy sigloaa 27 | Bibliography,.... .. a0 1a
Voyages and Travels, 20 | Miscellaneous (unclass-
Encyclopedias,. . . . 18 ified),, . |. 4) 4% Seen 36

The decrease during the year in the number of accessions is partly
due to a curtailment of the amount appropriated for the purchase
of books and partly to the fact that deficiencies in the publications
of corresponding societies, persistently asked for, had been in a great
measure previously supplied, at all events as far as they are likely to
be, except by purchase from second hand dealers.

The facilities for cataloguing have been greatly increased by the
purchase of improved cases which not only accommodate the card
entries of all the books and pamphlets now in the library but
provide ample space for the growth of at least the next fifty years.

The necessity for mereased shelf room, to which attention was
called in my last report, becomes more pressing, especially in the
department of Journals.
packed away in such form as to be difficult of access, the disadvant-
aye being greatly increased by the lack of means for necessary bind-
ing. It is strongly urged that both these need: more cases and a
larger appropriation for binding, be supplied at an early date.

In many instances the accessions are now

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 507

Some little relief in the way of additional room has been secured
by the selecting out and packing away of a number of volumes of
official documents, State executive reports, miscellaneous literature,
and other material entirely unconnected with the Academy’s func-
tion. It is suggested that these be disposed of to some library where
they will not be so entirely out of place and where they are likely
to be looked for by those interested in them.

A large collection of duplicate volumes and pamphlets numbering
1,096 titles have been arranged and catalogued. It is hoped that
means may be furnished for the printing of the list. There is no
doubt that the expense would be refunded by sales, while the books
would be so distributed as to confer benefit on these acquiring them
instead of lying, as now, useless in our storage room.

While the binding during the year of 174 volumes has been un-
usually small in amount, it has been unusually important in char-
acter, twelve volumes of Gould’s folios, embracing the Birds of New
Guinea in five volumes and the Birds of Asia in seven, have been
bound in a manner befitting the artistic beauty of the works. The
_ expense was defrayed from the Wilson Fund, to which the books
themselves were credited, thus materially curtailing the amount
available from that source for the purchase of additions. The un-
bound numbers had, however, been practically inaccessible to students
since the completion of the works, whereas they now form an ayail-
able portion of the ornithological library and a superb addition to
the collection of finely illustrated folios which, thanks to the taste
and liberality of Dr. Thomas B. Wilson, is one of our notable posses-
sions.

A careful enumeration of the library during the year furnishes
the following results :—

VOLUMES, PAMPHLETS.

Journals, : R p . ; F 20,645
Geology, Jd en 2,655 2,568
General Natural History, : ; : 2,641 810
Botany, é , : F , 2,166 1,155
Voyages and Travels, é =. aed & 1,764 89
Anatomy and Physiology, ; ‘ ' 1,591 1,101

_ Anthropology, : . . : ; 1,263 695
Entomology, ; ; P : ; 1,144 1,188
Conchology, . ee et 1,004 691

Medicine, ’ ’ ‘ ’ ’ ' 819 1,1 22

508 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Ornithology, . ; : : : 816 538
Encyclopedias, Disewiaie etc, . : 811
Bibliography, ’ ; yt oS, ; 691
Mineralogy, . ; 3 : : ; 520 490
Physical Science, .. ze Ral Ks 548 735
Geography, . : - ; ; ; 336 46
Agriculture, . - : ; ; 5 301 223
Ichthyology, . . i j ' _ 286 301
Mammalogy, . ; ; , : : 281 383
Helminthology, . : ; : ; 264 367
Chemistry, . ; , ; : : 259 300
Herpetology, . ; ‘ ; : : 172 217
Unclassified, . : : pie 356
Warner Library, mostly Mathimation: : 1,090 627
42,423 13,646
Volumes formed by as of pam-
phlets, . : : 958
Volumes in library of iieaclepioal Sec-
tion (Am. Ent. Soc.), ; 2,864

Volumes in James Aitken Meigs’ hey: 1,975

Total, 48,220

Nearly all the pamphlets above enumerated are bound, theentire __

collection forming, as noted, 958 volumes.

The library of the Entomological Section (American Entomolog-
ical Society) comprises 2,864 volumes, many of them, however, being
duplicates of those elsewhere credited.

The James Aitken Meigs’ library of miscellaneous literature is
entirely foreign to the province of the Academy, the scientific por-
tions of it having been catalogued and placed when received with
the special sections of the main library of which they now form a
part. The miscellaneous portion is retained and kept together out
of regard for the wishes of the donor John G. Meigs. A shelf list
has been prepared but it has not been otherwise catalogued although

there is a large amount of material in the collection of indirect —

interest, sufficient indeed to warrant the preparation of an author
and subject catalogue when time can be secured from more pressing
matters.

Excluding, therefore, if it be thought proper, the two sections last
referred to, the working library of the Academy contained when

°

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 509

counted last August, 43, 381 volumes. The last previous enumera-
tion was made in 1888 when there were 30,831 volumes on the
shelves; the addition of 12,550 volumes, therefore, in ten years, is a
gratifying rate of increase in view of the strictly special character
of the library.

In two lectures on the literature of natural history delivered in
November as introductory to the Academy’s Ludwick Institute
courses for the year, I had the pleasure of commenting on some of
the bibliographical treasures of the library while defining the scope
and purpose of such a collection. The Academy is to be congratu-
lated on the fact that there is probably no other in America from
which the subject could be illustrated so amply.

It gives me renewed pleasure to again acknowledge my indebted-
ness to Mr. Wm. J. Fox for efficient assistance during the year.

Epw. J. NoLan,
Librarian.

REPORT OF THE CURATORS.

The Curators are able to report the collections under their care to
be in an excellent state of preservation.

Besides the preparation and cataloguing of new material received
during the year, it has been possible to devote considerable atten-
tion to the re-arrangement of several departments of the museum.

Following the plan adopted last year, about half of the wall cases
were removed from the upper gallery of the old museum and erected
in the new basement, thus completing the Alcoholic department as
originally planned. All the remaining Alcoholics, comprising the
Reptilia, Batrachia, Mammalia, and Invertebrata were transferred
to these cases. The systematic arrangement of the Fishes and
Invertebrata has been completed, the latter as well as the Reptilia
and Batrachia having been catalogued during the year.

It might be added that the entire zoological collection of the
Academy has now been catalogued, except a part of the Mollusca,
the dry Invertebrate preparations, and the Osteological preparations
of Fish, Reptiles, and Batrachians.

The magnitude of this work can be appreciated when it is learned
that the combined number of catalogue entries of the vertebrates
amounts to sixty-five thousand six hundred,

510 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Fifteen half-upright cases were purchased during the year, in
which it is intended to arrange the dried specimens of Lower Inver-
brates, the duplicates being stored in closets, which have been pro-
vided underneath the cases. Part of this transfer has been already
accomplished and when completed it will permit the removal of the
remaining wall cases where the Invertebrata have been stored
heretofore.

Two new museum cases have been placed in position on the mam-
mal floor in which are arranged the higher Quadrumana and
Carnivora. One of these was provided through the Mary Jeanes
Fund, established this year by Anna T. Jeanes for general museum
purposes. The fund will enable us to make much more progress in
future in furnishing the new building and in accommodating our
rapidly increasing collection. Another improvement in the Mammal
department has been the placing on exhibition of the Pacific Walrus
obtained by Dr. Sharp and Mr. J. M. Justice.

In the Archeological Department Mr. Clarence B. Moore had]
presented an upright case for the reception of some of the material
which he has added to the Moore Collection during the year. Mr.
Johnson has continued to devote much time to the arrangement of
the Isaac Lea Eocene Collection, which has been largely increased”
during the year through the liberality of the Rev. Dr. L. T.Cham- |
berlain. This collection now occupies four large double mahogany
eases contributed by Dr. Chamberlain, and is undoubtedly the most |
complete and important series of American Eocene mollusca in
existence, while it also contains the largest series in America of —
European Eocene shells. Mr. Johnson has also been engaged to
re-arrange the Academy’s series of Tertiary Invertebrates.

In the Botanical rooms a series of nine cases has been erected for
the accommodation of the herbarium, which has outgrown its old —
quarters,

Temporary cases have also been fitted up in the Ornithological
room for skins of large birds. Much time has been devoted by the
several Conservators to the care of the specimens in their special
departments.

The Curators regret to have to report that much damage was done
to furniture and material stored in the basement by the severe flood |
of August 3rd. The extraordinary rainfall flooded the city sewers
and filled the streets to the depth of eighteen inches, from which it~
forced a way into the cellars and basement. The damage has, how-

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 511

ever, been repaired so far as possible, and the actual loss of specimens
seems to be very slight, though much time was consumed and im-
portant museum work seriously hindered.

Owing to the necessity for removal of the publications from the
basement several closets in the new building as well as considerable
space on the top floor have been devoted to their accommodation,

The additions to the museum during the year have been particu-
larly noteworthy as will be seen by reference to the accompanying
list. Most important are the valuable collections of Mammals,
Birds, Reptiles and Fishes bequeathed to the Academy by the late
Prof. Edw. D. Cope, which number about eight thousand specimens
and include many of his types. The collection of vertebrate prepara-
tions formed Dr. Harrison Allen and presented by Mrs, Allen is
another important accession. A valuable series of birds from Mon-
golia was received from Dr. A. D. Smith and the Messrs, Mdward
& George Farnum, and a number of Japanese plants and verte-
brates from Miss A. Hartshorne. An important collection of over
800 South Australian invertebrates, mainly mollusks, has been
obtained from Mr. W. T. Bednall. The Zoological Society of
Philadelphia has presented numerous specimens during the year,
which have been prepared in the taxidermical department. In the
Botanical department the most important addition has been the
entire collection of Lichens made by Dr. J. W. Eckfeldt, the well
known authority upon this group.

Another accession of especial importance is a collection of Reptiles
and Batrachians numbering several hundred specimens, presented by
Mr, Arthur E. Brown.

Efficient service has been rendered by the Jessup students, Messrs,
W. J. Gerhard, H. W. Fowler, 8. H. Hamilton, Jo. G. Vanatta and
A. F. Satterthwait in their several special departments,

During the year specimens have been loaned for study to the fol-
lowing: Dr. J. A. Allen, M. L. Fernald, Dr. C, Hart Merriam, H,
©. Oberholzer, E. W. Nelson, I°. L. Scribner, Elizabeth G, Britton,
F. A. Lucas, W. H. Dall, H. T. Osborn, Walter Rothschild, Alfred
Newton, G. 8. Miller, Outram Bangs, Katharine J. Bush, Dr. G, N,
Best, P. A. Rydberg, Dr, J. I’. Whiteaves, G. D, Harris, Dr, G. M,
Dawson and FE. P. Bicknell.

Henry C, Cuarman, M. D.,
Chairman of the Curators.

‘

512 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF (1898.
REPORT ON THE WM. S. VAUX COLLECTIONS. |

The Curator of the William 8. Vaux Collection begs leave to ;
report that since November 30th, 1896 he has added to it by pur-
chase one hundred and twenty-five specimens. Although the
number is not as large as in former years, yet the quality of thespec- _
imens is better, a number of them being species new to the collec-
. tion including several extra fine large crystals.

As reported by the Curators several fine new cases were pur-
chased during 1897 for the display of the various large specimens —
which had formerly been exposed.

The collection now numbers 8,091 specimens all in good order
with the exception of two marcasites which have decomposed.

There have been no additions to the Archeological Collection —
since my last report though it continues to attract much attention —
from visitors. |

Wma. W. JEFFERIS,
Curator.

REPORT OF THE BIOLOGICAL AND MICROSCOPICAL
SECTION.

The Section has held ten meetings during the year. The new
room upon the second floor has been partially furnished and the
collections placed therein. It is expected that upon the completion
of anticipated improvements the accommodations for biological
investigations may be made of permanent value to the members and
increase the interest of the stated meetings.

During the year numerous communications have been made, of
which the following were presented at the meetings of the Academy:—

“On the Structure of Diatoms,” by Mr. F. J. Keeley.

“Observations on Errant Frustules of Eunotia major,” and
“ Conjugation of Closterium acerosum,” by Mr. T. Chalkley Palmer.

“‘ New Species of Diatoms,” by Mr. Charles S. Boyer.

“On Isthemia nervosa in Hudson Strait,” by Mr. John A. Shulze. ~

“Old and New Microscopes and Methods of Preparation,” by Dr.
J. Cheston Morris.

Other communications of interest were made by Dr. Morris, Me
Holman aud Mr. Woolman.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 513

The Conservator reports the loan to the Section of two microscopes

by Dr. Morris, which are of value as models of ancient and peculiar

construction. Mr. Shumo presented numerous specimens brought
by him from Jamaica.

The Section has lost by death Mr. Chas. P. Perot, for a long time
our Treasurer and valued member. Resolutions of respect were
passed and presented at the meeting of the Academy.

The following officers were elected for the ensuing year :—

Director, . ; ; . : J. Cheston Morris, M. D.
Vice-Director, . ; : . T. Chalkley Palmer.
Treasurer, . : - ; : Lewis Woolman.
Conservator, : . F.J. Keeley.
Corresponding Seerdary : . John G. Rothermel.
Recorder, . * : : Charles S. Boyer.
CuHARLEs 8S. Boyer,
Recorder.

REPORT OF THE CONCHOLOGICAL SECTION.

Work on the collection during the past year has been confined
mainly to the reidentification of the Bulimulide and other groups
monographed in the Manual of Conchology, the rearrangement of
part of the fresh-water shells, and the renovation and cataloguing
of the alcoholic mollusks.

The accessions to the conchological museum have been important,
though no single collection of great size has been received. A large
number of new species and species new to the collection having been
secured. Additions to our North American series have been made
by Messrs. J. H. Ferris, R. C. McGregor, E. H. Ashmun and P. B.
Randolph, whose collections from the Great Smoky Mountains,
northern California, New Mexico and Alaska respectively, are worthy
of special mention amoung those of the large number of naturalists
who have added to our American series. Dr. H. von Ihering has
continued to send valuabe South American consignments, including
a large series of alcoholic land snails from Brazil. The New Zea-
land collection received from Mr. H. Suter, and the Australian
species from Messrs. W. T. Bednall and J. C. Cox, with a large
number of land shells new to the collection, purchased by the Con-
chological Section and the Academy, materially augment the series
of non-American mollusks.

514 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Throughout the year the Conservator has been efficiently assisted
by Mr. E. G. Vanatta.

The accessions of the year are enumerated in the list of additions
to the Museum.

The following officers were elected at the annual meeting in Dee-
ember :—

Director, . : : : : . Benjamin Sharp, M. D.
Vice- Director, : ' ; j John Ford.
Recorder and Librarian, . , : Edw. J. Nolan, M. D.
Corresponding Secretary, . : ‘ Chas. W. Johnson.
Treasurer, ; . ; : : S. Raymond Roberts.
Henry A. PIbssy,
Conservator.

REPORT OF THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SECTION.

This has been a very busy year in the history of the Entomolog-
ical Section. The collections have been well cared for with the
assistance of Mr. W. J. Gerhard and Mr. Alfred Satterthwaite,
and by individual members interested in special branches of entomo-
logy. The rearrangement of the American Coleoptera is nearly
completed and valuable work has been done on the exotic species by
Dr. H. G. Griffith. The unarranged material in the Horn Collec-
tion has been placed in safe receptacles preparatory to proper in-
corporation in the main collection. Special groups in this collection
have been loaned to specialists for study and revision. Many
families in the Diptera have been rearranged by Mr. C. W. John-
son, in new book boxes purchased for the purpose. Two large
boxes of Hemiptera have been purchased, representing a large
number of specimens, quite a number of them being new to the
collection. The Membracide have been arranged by Mr. Gerhard
with the aid of Dr. F. W. Goding, an authority on this subject.
The Neuroptera, other than the Odonata, and the Orthoptera have
been properly placed in new receptacles by the Conservator.

Prof. James 8. Hine has studied and properly identified our
material in the genus Bittacus, of which we now have a representa-
tive collection. Dr. Calvert has had the care of the Odonata; our
collection in this branch is among the very finest in the world.
In the Lepidoptera we are indebted to Prof. C. H. Fernald, of Am-
herst, Mass. who has studied and revised the Pterophoride, a very

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 515

difficult group. The material has been returned in good condition.
Mr. Gerhard, with the aid of the Conservator, has put in fine order
the Hesperide of the world. This is a part of the Martindale col-
lection. Much work has also been done on the other families in this
fine collection. Mr. Satterthwaite is engaged in rearranging the
exotic moths in this collection and has thus far finished the Sphin-
gide. Fifty new boxes and a fine cabinet have been purchased to
contain the Hymenoptera and Mr. E. T. Cresson is now engaged in
their rearrangement. Mr. Fox has made some valuable contribu-
tions to science by his studies in this Order.

Numerous specimens have been added to the cabinet, the more im-
portant donations being a collection of American Coleoptera from
Dr. Eckfeldt; 61 specimens of Honduras Lepidoptera by Dr. H.
G. Griffith ; 68 Hesperidz from Colima, Mexico, from Henry Skin-
ner; 124 Beetles, 10 Hemiptera, 3 Orthoptera, 1 Hymenoptera from
Dr. A. D. Smith and the Farnum brothers, all from Manchuria;
9 Coleoptera by W. F, Bednall, from Australia.

Many valuable works have been added to the library; nine
hundred and thirty-three have been the gift of the late Dr. Geo. H.
Horn. One bundred and seventy works have been bound. Valu-
able books have been purchased, some of them not being repres-
ented in other libraries in this country, the amount expended being
$529.93. The Entomological News has been continued and the
ninth volume completed with 264 pages and 12 plates. The present ©
space devoted to the Entomological Section is inadequate, owing to
its rapid growth in all departments.

At the annual election held Dec, 22nd. the following persons were
elected officers for the year 1899 :—

Director, - ; J ‘ ; , Philip Laurent.
Vice-Director, ; } ; ; : H. W. Wenzel.
Recorder, : ; . ; Henry Skinner.
Treasurer, . : : ; j ‘ Ezra ‘Tl’. Cresson.
Secretary, . : : ; . ; Wm. J. Fox.
Conservator, . ; ; ' : Henry Skinner.

Respectfully submitted,
HENRY SKINNER.
Recorder.

REPORT OF THE BOTANICAL SECTION.

‘

The Botanical Section of the Academy reports a fair amount of

progress as detailed in the Conservator’s report, attached as part
of this document.

516 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

The arrangement and fastening down of the specimens, begun by
Mr. Redfield many years ago, has now been carried down as far as
Solanacee. In this good work Mr. Uselma C. Smith has rendered
valuable aid to the Director. If a salaried Conservator could be
engaged to direct a number of volunteers this great work of the
Academy might be completed within a short time.

The Section is out of debt with a small balance in the Treasury.
The officers for the ensuing year are:

Director, : : ; ‘ ; Thomas Meehan.
Vice-Director, . : f ; : Charles E. Smith.
Recorder, : : : ; ; Charles Schaeffer, M, D.
Corresponding Secretary, ; ; Jos. D. Crawford.
Conservator and Treasurer, . Stewardson Brown.

Respectfully submitted,
THoomas MEEHAN,
Director.

Report of the Conservator.—In presenting this report for the year
1898 the Conservator of the Botanical Section wishes to express his
appreciation of the aid rendered by the Curators of the Academy in
the furnishing of additional cases for the accommodation of the her-
barium in the new botanical room on the Library floor formerly ©
occupied by the Entomological Section.

These cases which were completed in the early part of the year,
have rendered necessary the rearrangement of the herbarium, which
has been accomplished through the aid of the Director of the Section,
Mr. Thomas Meehan. The consolidation of the North American
herbarium, formerly kept in the room on the gallery floor, with the
general herbarium, will be found to be a great convenience to those
making use of the collections. This latter work, which is necessarily
slow, will be completed during the present winter.

The rearrangement of the collections, notwithstanding the addi-
tional cases furnished, has made it necessary to remove the speci-
mens of vascular Cryptogams to the cases on the gallery floor
formerly occupied by the North American Herbarium, the Phanero-
gams being disposed of in the cases in the two rooms on the library
floor.

The work of arranging the collections deposited’in 1897 by the
American Philosophical Society has satisfactorily progressed, and, it
is hoped, will be completed by the end of the coming year.

The mounting of the general herbarium has been somewhat
retarded during the year owing to the enforced absence of the assist-
ant in the herbarium, due to illness.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 517

The herbarium of the Philadelphia Botanical Club has not hereto-
fore been referred to, and I wish, therefore, to here call special
attention to the excellent work being done by the members of this
organization. ;

The plants comprising this collection are from points within a
radius of about a hundred miles of the city, including Pennsylvania
east from the Susquehanna River and south of the Blue Ridge, all
of New Jersey south of the same range of mountains, and the north-
ern counties of Delaware and eastern Maryland.

The lack of specimens of our local plants in the herbarium of the
Academy, created the necessity of such a collection, which now
numbers many thousand specimens from all sections of the district
and it is hoped in time to make it the most complete collection of
its kind extant.

The noteworthy additions to the herbarium during the year
have been a collection of Japanese plants presented through Miss A.
C. Hartshorne, a collection of South African plants purchased and
presented by Mr. Thomas Meehan, and many plants our own con-
_ tinent presented by Messrs. Joseph Crawford, C. F. Saunders and
- Stewardson Brown.

Respectfully submitted,
Srewarpson Brown,
Conservator.
REPORT OF THE MINERALOGICAL AND GEOLOG-
ICAL SECTION.

The Director of the Mineralogical and Geological Section of the
Academy would respectfully report that meetings have been held
regularly during the year, except during the summer; that the
attendance has been good, and the interest manifested encouraging.

On May 21st the Section under the leadership of Prof. Fred. B.
Peck of Lafayette College visited a number of interesting localities
around Easton, Pa.

Additions to the museum have been valuable but not as numerous
as in former years.

The following officers were duly elected for the coming year :—

Director, ‘ : , : . ; Theodore D. Rand.
Vice- Director, ; . 2 ; : W. W. Jefferis.
Recorder, 7 , ’ , P ‘ Charles Schaffer.
Conservator, . ; ‘ , ; . W. W. Jefferis.
Treasurer, . ; : : ; y John Ford,
Respectfully submitted,
Tueo. D. Ranp.

Director.

518 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

REPORT OF THE ORNITHOLOGICAL SECTION.

The work of the Section during the past year has been mainly
devoted to the study collection. But little progress has been made in
the rearrangement of the exhibition collection of birds owing to the
need of cases on the third floor of the new building.

A synoptical collection has been arranged there, as promised in
last year’s report, but the main series of mounted birds is still
in the old gallery. Though not displayed to advantage it remains
in an excellent state of preservation. .

The study collection has been carefully examined and better pro-
vision made for many of the large skins. Most of the Conservator’s
work this year has been devoted to a study of the types in the collec-
tion which have been carefully identified and arranged in special
cases, the results of this work having been embodied in a paper
which will appear in the Proceedings.

The Delaware Valley Ornithological Club has made many addi-
tions to the collection presented by it to the Academy so that it is
now probably the most complete exhibition of its kind in existence.
The meetings of the Club continue to be held at the Academy and
do much to stimulate ornithological study.

The Section is also much gratified to be able to report that through
its efforts the annual meeting of the American Ornithologists’
Union will be held at the Academy in Noy., 1899. The importance
of this meeting to local ornithologists and to the Academy will be
readily understood.

During the year the most important accession has been the collec-
tion of bird skins bequeathed by the late Prof. E. D. Cope number-
ing nearly 1,000 specimens and containing the once famous collec-
tion of C.S. Turnbull.

Of great importance also is a small series of specimens from Man-
churia received from Dr. A. Donaldson Smith and the Messrs. Far-
num. Valuable specimens were also received from the Zoological
Society of Philadelphia, Dr. J. E. Romig and others. .

The magnificient collection of North American land birds formed
by Mr. Josiah Hoopes has been received on deposit.

At the annual meeting held Dec. 19, 1898, the following officers
were elected :—

Director, 4 ; ; : A : Spencer Trotter.

Vice-Director, . / ; ‘ . ; Geo. 8, Morris,

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 519

Recorder, . : : . ; 2 Stewardson Brown.
Secretary, ‘ : ‘ . Wn. A. Shryock.
Treasurer and Chilaersaiee. ; : Witmer Stone.

Respectfully submitted,
WiutMER STONE.
Conservator.

REPORTS OF THE PROFESSORS.

Henry A. Pirspry, Professor in the Department of Mollusca,

reports that during the year he has delivered a course of lect-
ures upon bivalve mollusks. Several special reports upon par-
ticular groups of mollusks, based upon material in the collection of
the Academy, have been prepared and published in the Proceedings
of the Academy. Progress in the classification of the collection has
been made, the details of which may be found in the report of the
_ Conservator of the Conchological Section.
Daniet G. Brinron, M. D., Professor of Ethnology, reports
_ that during the year 1898 a course of lectures, free to the public,
was delivered by him on various ethnological subjects, in the Hall
of the Academy. They were well attended, and considerable inter-
est was shown.

The collections in this department are well displayed and care-
fully looked after by the Curators.

Henry Sxryner, M. D., Professor in the Department of Insecta,
reports having delivered a course of six illustrated lectures on ento-
mology in connection with the Academy’s Ludwick Institute Course.
He refers to his report as Conservator of the Entomological Section
for a statement of other work accomplished during the year.

520 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

The election of Officers, Councillors and Members of the Finance _
Committee to serve during 1899 was held with the following re-_
sult :—

President, : : ; Samuel G. Dixon, M. D.
Vice- Presidents, : : Thomas Meehan.

Rev. Henry C. MeCook, D. D.
Recording Secretary, 2 Edward J. Nolan, M. D.
Corresponding aint! : Benjamin Sharp, M. D.
Treasurer, ‘ ; George Vaux, Jr.
Librarian, ; . : Edward J. Nolan, M. D.
Curators, ; : - Henry A. Pilsbry.

Henry C. Chapman, M. D.
Arthur Erwin Brown.
. Samuel G. Dixon, M. D.
Councillors to serve three years, Charles E. Smith.
Uselma C. Smith.
John Cadwalader.
William Sellers.
Finance Committee, . ; Charles Morris.
Chas. E. Smith.
Uselma C. Smith,
William Sellers.
Charles Roberts.
Councillor for unexpired term
of two years, . : Charles Schaeffer, M. D.

COUNCIL AND STANDING COMMITTEES FOR 1899.
CouNCIL.

Ex-officio—Samuel G. Dixon, M. D., Thomas Meehan, Rev.
Henry C. McCook, D. D., Edw. J. Nolan, M. D., Benjamin Sharp,
M. D., George Vaux, Jr., Henry A. Pilsbry, Henry C. Chapman,
M. D., Arthur Erwin Brown.

To serve Three Years.——Charles E. Smith, Uselma C. Smith, John
Cadwalader, William Sellers.

To serve Two Years—Charles Schaeffer, M.D., Dr. C. Newlin
Pierce, Theodore D. Rand and Philip P. Calvert, Ph. D.

To serve One Year—Thomas A. Robinson, Charles H, Cramp,
Charles Morris, Isaac J. Wistar.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 521

STANDING COMMITTEES.
Finance.

Uselma C. Smith, Charles Morris, Charles E. Smith, William
Sellers, Charles Roberts.

Publications.

Thomas Meehan, Charles E. Smith, Henry A. Pilsbry, Henry
Skinner, M. D., Edward J. Nolan, M. D.

Tabrary.

Arthur Erwin Brown,Thos. A. Robinson, Henry C.Chapman,M.D.,
Dr. C. Newlin Peirce and Charles Schaeffer, M. D.

Instruction and Lectures.

Uselma C. Smith, Benj. Smith Lyman, Samuel G. Dixon, M. D.,
Philip P. Calvert, Ph. D. and Charles Morris.

Committee of Council on By-Laws.

Isaac J. Wistar, Theodore D. Rand, Arthur Erwin Brown and
Benjamin Sharp, M. D.

ELECTIONS DURING 1898.
MEMBERS.

January 25.—D. M. Castle, M. D., Caroline A. Burgin, Charles
G. Sower, Israel W. Morris.

February 22.—James Lane Pennypacker.

March 29.—Carroll Smyth.

July 26.—Charles M. Burk, M. D.

September 27.—Thomas Lynch Montgomery.

October 25.—Emeline Maddock, D. M. Barringer, George C.
Thomas, Lincoln Godfrey, Henry Emerson Wetherill, M. D.,
U.S. A.

November 29.—H. B. Gross, Julia Stockton Robins, Ethel Smith,
Emily Lowber, Mrs. J. Edgar Thomson, Emily Williams Biddle, ‘
Charles Mohr, M. D., Henry L. Broomall.

34

522 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

ADDITIONS TO THE MUSEUM.
MAMMALS.

Mrs. Harrison ALLEN. One hundred and thirty-five jars of
mammalian preparations and dissections and a number of dry
preparations of Chiroptera.

J. L. Buck. Skull of Baboon and Common Porcupine, Erythizon
dorsatus, and skeleton of Timber Wolf, Canis griseoalbus.
Estate oF Epwarp D. Corr. A large collection of alcoholic
mammals. A collection of 298 skins and skeletons of Brazil-
ian mammals formed by the Naturalist Exploring Expedition,

1882-3. A number of miscellaneous skins and skeletons.

J. L. Cox. Two skins of Newfoundland Caribou, Rangifer nove-
terre, prepared for mounting.

J. Epwarp Farnum, GeorGe Farnum and Dr. A. DonaLpson
Smita. A small series of mammals from Mongolia.

Miss A. C. HartsHorne. Twelve skins and skeletons of Japanese
mammals.

Purcuasep. Four skins of Fur Seals, Callotaria ursina. Young’

Orangoutan (since mounted), Simia satyris. Several skulls of
Common Sheep, Ovis aries.

Dr. J. H. Romie. Six skins of Alaskan mammals.

GrorGEe Vaux, JR. Smooth haired St. Bernard Dog (prepared as
skeleton). |

ZooLocicaL Socrery or PHILADELPHIA. The following mammals,
which have been prepared asindicated. Mounted: Sable ante-

lope, Hippotragus niger; Dorcas Gazelle, Gazella dorcas;

Agouti, Dasyprocta isthmica? Capybara, Hydrocherus capy-
bara; Chamois, Rupicapra tragus; Rocky Mountain Sheep,
Ovis cervina and Red Monkey. To be mounted: Chevrotain
Black Lemur two Monkeys and Javan Squirrel. Skins and
skulls: Antelope cervicapra; Nasua narica; Mustela martes ;
Cercopithecus ruber; Semnopithecus rubicundus; 8. cephalo-
pterus; Papio sphinz ; Spermophilus franklini. Skins: Felis
temmincki; Gazella muscatensis. Skulls: Dorcas Gazelle,
Arctic Tox, Agouti (D. isthmica?); Red Monkey. Dis-

— Sats So. ee

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 523

articulated Skeletons: Capybara, Sable Antelope, Golden Cat,’
Felis tenmincki. Rough Skeletons: Oscelot, Felis pardalis ;
Asiatic Elephant, Elephas indicus; Anubis Baboon, Wild Sheep,
Ovis eycloceras; Equus hemionus, Also viscera and brain of
Asiatic Elephant. Foetal Opossum and Young Vervet Mon-
key in alcohol.

BIRDS.

Dr. W. L. Assorr. Skin of Antrostomus carolinensis, Cuba.

J. L. Buck. Curassow sp. (skin).

Mr. Bucknety. Albino Robin, mounted.

Esrate or Epw. D. Core. A collection of about 700 skins of
North American Birds and several hundred Brazilian Birds in
alcohol. A few miscellaneous skins and skeletons.

I. N. DeHaven. Golden Eye Duck, Clangula americana, and For-
ster’s Tern, Sterna forsteri (skins), Cape Charles, Va.

DELAWARE VALLEY ORNITHOLOGICAL CLuB. A number of nests,
eggs and birds presented by members of the Club, for the Club
Collection. Male and female of the Red Shouldered and
Broad Winged Hawks, Buteo lineatus and latissimus, received
from Chas. S. Welles, Sooty Shearwater, Puffinus stricklandi,
from Theo. L. DeBow.

J. Evwarp Farnum, GeorcE Farnum and Dr. A. DoNALDSON
Smirxe. A small collection of Birds from Mongolia.

H. W. Fowter. Several mounted North American Birds.

C. R. Hansett. Screech Owl, Megascops asio.

Miss A. C. HArrsHorNE. Six skins of Japanese Birds.

Howarp T. Jerrertes. Specimen of Krider’s Hawk, Buteo bor-
ealis krideri, from Minnesota. Dendroica, Pennsylvania.

Dr. J. C. Kirkpatrick. Skins of Peacock and several small
birds from Burmah.

Samuet N. Raoaps. Skin of Passer domesticus.

Dr. J. H. Romic. Skins of ten Alaskan Birds, including two
McKay’s Snowflakes, Passerian hyperborea.

Dr. Paut J. Sarraix. Mounted specimen of Bird of Paradise,
Paradisea apoda.,

S. L.SHumo. Three skins of Floridian Birds.

A. P. Wittetrs. Two skins of Horned Lark, Otocoris alpestris,
Beach Haven, N. J.

R. T. Youna. Several nests and eggs of North American Birds,

ZOOLOGICAL Socrery or PutLADELPHIA. Specimens received in
the flesh and preserved as follows, Skins and sterna: Palwornis

524 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

nepalensis, Agapornis canus, Polyteles melanurus, Bernardius ber-
nardi, Trichoglossus novehollandie, Crax fasciolata, Pelecanus
crispus, Conurus carolinensis, Callenas nicobarica, Chrysolophus
pictus, Pseudogryphus californianus. Flat skins: Apteryx owent
and mantelli. Skull and sternum: Cygnus olor, Pelecanus
erythrorhynchus, Anthropoides virgo; Skeletons: Sarcorhamphus
gryphus, Anthropoides virgo, Apteryx oweni, Apteryx mantelli.

REPTILES.

ArrHur Erwin Brown. A collection of several hundred Reptiles
and Batrachia mainly from North America.

Mr. BrappENnBuRG. Specimen of Python reticulatus (prepared as
a skeleton).

Estate or Epw. D. Corr. About 3,000 Reptiles and Batrachians
including many types.

J. Epwarp and GeorGcE Farnum and Dr. A. DonALpson Smita.
A small collection of Reptiles and Batrachia from Mongolia.

Joun LUNKENHEIMER, JR. Skull of Green Turtle, Chelone
mydas.

Davin McCappen. Jar of Plethodon erythronotus.

Henry A. Prrspry. Jar of Bufo americanus, Cape May, N. J.

Jos. W. Tatum. Specimen of Amblystoma punctatum.

Bens. Warnwrieut. Specimen of Amblystoma punctatum, Del-
aware Co., Pa.

ZOOLOGICAL SocteTy OF PHILADELPHIA Salamandra maceulosa,
Tumpinambis teguexin, Varanus indicus, Pelophilus madagas-
cariensis, Corallus madagascariensis, Testudo angulata (two
specimens). Two casts of snakes made in taxidermical depart-
ment and one cast purchased.

FISHES.

Estate or Epw. D. Corr. Several hundred jars of fishes includ-
ing a number of types.

J. Epwarp and GreorGe Farnum, and A. DonaLpson SMITH.
Two jars of fishes from Mongolia.

SranLtey W.Rusw. Two Sea Catfish, Hluricthys marinus, Harvey-
Cedars, N. J.

F. W. Wavmstey. ‘Three species of fish, Wood’s Holl, Mass.

J.S. Wirmer, Jr. Two jars of freshwater fishes, Lancaster Co.,
Pa.

ies

“a
e

Enq
,

.

1898.} NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 525

RECENT MOLLUSCA.

T. H. Auprica. Twenty-two species of marine shells from Sumatra.

Dr. Harrison ALLEN. One tray of Pisidium from Nantucket
Island.

AMERICAN EnTomOLoGIcAL Soctety (Enrom. Sec. ACAD.). Thir-
teen species from the collection of the late Dr. George H. Horn.

Mrs. Georce AnpRews. Seven species of land shells from Ten-
nessee.

E. H. Asumun. Fifty-one species of Jand and freshwater mollusks
from New Mexico and Arizona.

Frank C. Baker. Nineteen species of freshwater shells from
Illinois.

C. A. Barker. Three species of land mollusks from West Indies.

W. T. Bepnati. Two hundred and ninety-eight species of marine
shells from South Australia.

Francisco E. Buanes. Seven species of Cerion from Cuba.

J. H. Brirrs. Four species of Goniobasis from Missouri and North
Carolina.

F. L. Burron. Five species of marine shells from California.

R. E. C. Cary. One tray of Pisidium from New Mexico.

Mrs. JutiA CuanpLer. Pholas costata Linné from Long Beach,
Mississippi.

Georce H. Ciapp. Nine trays of land shells from Pennsylvania.

T. D.A.CockrerELL. Nineteen species of land and marine mollusks
from West Indies and New Mexico.

M. Cossman. Four species of marine and land shells from Europe
and Africa.

Dr. J.C. Cox. Three trays of marine shells from New South
Wales.

Dr. W. H. Daty. Four species of land and marine mollusks from
California.

Rey. A. Dean. One tray Zonites from Florida.

Mr. Desmonv. Fifteen trays of marine mollusks.

Dr. Samvuet G. Dixon. Two species of mollusks from Maine.

H. F. Dore. Two species of Fluminicola from Oregon.

J. H. Ferriss. Twenty-two species of land shells from the Great
Smoky Mts.

Joun Forp. Sixteen species of marine shells.

H. W. Fowrer. Four species of freshwater shells from the crop of
a duck.

526 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

Mrs. E. M. Gaytorp. Six species of marine shells from Oregon.

Lrevr.-Cot. H. H. Gopwin-Austin. Alcoholic specimens of
Acavus hemastomus.

A. F. Gray. Two species of Pupa from Oregon.

R. C. McGregor. Seventy-seven species of marine shells from
Mexico and California.

E. Haru. One tray of Strobilops from Illinois.

S. H. Hamizron. Three species freshwater shells from New
Jersey.

A. W. Hanuam. Three species of land shells from Quebec.

Haroup Heara. Sixty-five species of mollusks from California.

S. W. Hearon. Seven species of marine shells from California.

CHARLES Hepiey. Five species of mollusks from New South
Wales,

Pror. AnceLo Hertperin. Two trays of shells from Algeria.

J. B. Henperson. Land mollusks from Enganio Island and
Jamaica.

C.S. Hoacson. One tray of Strobilops from Lllinois.

Horn Exrepirron. Twenty-nine species of Australian land shells.

T. Van Hynina. Three species of marine shells.

_H. von Inerine. Seventy-one species of South American land
shells.

C. W. Jonnson. Three species of marine mollusks.

Dr. R. J. Kirxuanp. Five species of Ancylus from Michigan.

Miss E. J. Lerson. Eighteen trays of marine shells.

H. Loomis. Five species of shells from Japan.

Avustey Lupiaw. Fulgur perversum Linné, Anglesea, New Jersey.

J.G. Matonsr. Thirty-four species of land and freshwater shells
frem Oregon.

CLARENCE B. Moore. Two species of mollusks from Callawassie
Island, Ga.

Wm. Moss. Two species of shells from New Zealand.

C.F. Newcoms. Tornatina eximia from British Columbia.

J.W. Parmer. Three species of land shells.

H. A. Pirspry. Four hundred and sixteen trays of American
land and freshwater shells.

H. A. Piurspry and C. W. Jonnson. Seven species of shells
from Florida. ‘'

H. A. Pirspry and E.G. Vanarra. Twenty-one species of Mel-
ania and Diplommatina from Java. :

eee

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 527

E. Piess. Twenty-one trays of Plewrocera.

Miss Sapre F. Price. Thirty species of freshwater mollusks from
Kentucky.

P. B. Ranpotpn. Seventeen trays of mollusks from Alaska. |

W. J. Raymonp. Seven species of marine shells from California.

Estate or J. H. Reprieip. Sixty-five species of marine mollusks
from Panama collected by Prof. C. B. Adams.

S. N. Raoaps. Five species of shells from Pennsylvania.

Dr. Wn. H. Rusu. Thirty-one species of marine mollusks from
West Indies.

G. F. Russert. Ten species of marine mollusks from British
Guiana.

Jose N. Rovrrosa. Nine species of mollusks from Tabasco,
Mexico.

F, A. Sampson. One species, Polygyra from Missouri.

8. L.Scnuumo. Twenty-four species of land shells from Jamaica.

Ipa M. Suerarp. Twenty-one species of marine mollusks from
California.

B. Saimex. Pleurocera and Campeloma from Alabama.

J.A.Srmyetey. Glandina from Texas.

Userma C. Smita. Two species of marine mollusks from New
Jersey.

L. H. Strene. Amnicola from Michigan.

8. H.Srupaxorr. Polygyra from Pennsylvania.

H.Surer. Twenty species of marine shells from New Zealand.

E. R. Sykes. Two species of Chiton from South Africa.

Pror. pE La Torre. Cerion torrei Blanes, from Cuba.

E.G. Vanarra. Twenty-six species of American mollusks (see
also under Pilsbry and Vanatta).

A. Vayssiere. Thirteen species of French marine shells.

H. Viereck. Rumina decollata from Philadelphia.

A.G. Wernerey. One tray of Parastarte from Florida.

JoserH WiLuLcox. Five species of mollusks from Florida.

Lewis Wootman. Five species of marine mollusks from New
Jersey.

CRUSTACEA.

Dr. W. L. Assorr. One bottle of specimens from Tso Kiagr
Ladak. ‘

W.T. Bepnacv. Six trays of specimens from South Australia.

C. E. Berecuer. One tray of specimens from Wekiva River,
Florida,

528 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

LesTerR Bernstern. One tray of Balanus.

H. W. Fowier. One bottle of specimens from Tolchester, Mary-
land.

Wm. J. Fox. Ten bottles and three trays of specimens from
Jamaica,

R. C. McGrecor. Twotrays of Cypris from Redding, California.

W. Hays. One Cambarus from Big Creek, Kansas.

H. A. Pinssry. Balanus eburneus Gld. from Betterton, Maryland.

Dr. W. H. Rusu. Two trays of specimens from Uruguay.

FREDERICK STEARNS. Lepas anatifera from Japan.

Mr. Warton. Two species from San Diego de Cuba.

OTHER INVERTEBRATES.

AMERICAN EnTOMOLOGICAL Society (Entom. Src. Acap.). Seven
trays of corals from collection of the late Dr. Horn.

W. T. Bepnatu in exchange. Seven trays and four bottles of
Echinoderms from South Australia.

Dr. Samvuet G. Drxon. Two bottles of Echinoderms from Isles-
boro, Maine.

H. W. Fow.er. One bottle of Gordius and two bottles of Jelly-
fish from Tolchester, Maryland.

Haroup Hearn. Thirteen bottles of marine invertebrates from
Pacific Grove, California.

Rey. H. N. Hyper. One tray of invertebrates from Mexico:

Jas. N. Pearce. One Hipponoé esculata Leske from Bermuda.

Dr. W. H. Rusu. Two bottles of invertebrates from Cape de Verde
Isles and Maldonado Bay.

S. L. Scuumo. Two trays of invertebrates from Jamaica.

Dr. B. SHarp. Thirteen bottles of starfishes from Alaska.

Userma C. Smirn. Seven trays and one bottle of invertebrates
from New Jersey.

F. W. Watmstey. Eight bottles of marine invertebrates.

Lewis Wootman. Mellita pentapora Gmel. from Avalon, New
Jersey.

INSECTS.

Dr. W. H. Grirrirs. Fifty-seven butterflies and 7 moths.

C. Few. Setss. Collection of 108 local Orthoptera.

Dr. J. W.Ecxrexpt. Collection of 1,215 North American Coleop-
tera.

H. A. Puspry. Five trays, Helicopsyche from Arkansas, Iowa,
Indiana and New York.

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 529

INVERTEBRATE FOSSILS.

American EntomoLocicaLt Socrery (Enrom. Sec. Acap.).
Collection of the late Dr. Horn. One tray.
G. Bauman. Two trays of mollusks from Greenland.
M. CossmMann. Two trays of Dentalium from Biot, France.
Pror. ANGELO Hemprin. Forty-four trays of fossils from Atlas
Mountains, Algeria.
M. Homer. Thirty-four trays of fossils from Dismal Swamp
Canal, Virginia.
J. E. Ives. One species from Lenola, New Jersey.
Miss M. E. Lynpatu. Eleven trays of specimens from Shiloh,
New Jersey.
A.M. Mercer. Three trays of specimens from Centerville, Mary-
land.
CLARENCE B. Moore. Pecten from Doctortown, Georgia.
ig J.A.Murpny. Twenty species from Eureka Springs, Arkansas.
_ H.A. Piuspry. Chrysodomus stonei Pils. from Cape May, New
Jersey.
8. L. Saumo. Collection of Invertebrate Fossils from Jamaica (not
yet assorted).
J. A. Srxciey. Two species of Dentalium from Galveston, Texas.
Usei_ma C. Smita. One species from Lenola, New Jersey.
JoserpH WiLLcox. Ninety-one trays of fossils from Florida.

*

CARBONIFEROUS PLANTS.
E. W. CLaypoLe. Small collection.
MINERALS ROCKS, ETC.

Homer DARLINGTON. Serpentine.

Joun Forp. Zeolite.

AnGeLo HeiLtprin. Gypsum.

Gro. H. Horn. Several specimens.

W. W. Jerreris. Altered Biotite, Rattlebox, Pyrite, Tale, Calcite.

Farnum Bros. Opal Pebbles,

8. H. Hamitton. Tourmaline.

Epw. Lonostretu. Several specimens of minerals.

Witrrep McSortey. Conglomerate Geode, Mt. Holly, N. J.

W. E. Meewan. Chalcedony, Florida.

ApoLPH MUELLER. Quartz.

Tueo. D. Ranp. Meerschaum pseudomorph after Quartz from
Radnor, Pa.

530 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898,

Srupents MineraALocicaL Cius. Chalcopyrite, Bornite, Cys
Calcite.

J. W. Ripparn. Borings from wells, Philadelphia.

MINERALOGICAL Section. Calcite, Chrysolite.

Purcaasep for William 8. Vaux Collection, twenty-one specimer

ARCH ZOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY. >

Geo. Farnum and J. Epw. Farnum. Human Cranium, Mon-

golia. q
Miss J. A. Fuaniaan. Indian Tanned deer skin, Western, N. A.
Esrate or Geo. H. Horn. Various specimens, Arrow points, ete.
Epw. Lonesrreru. Several miscellaneous specimens. ;
CLARENCE B. Moore. Various important additions to the Moore

collection of mound implements, ete.

PLANTS.

SrewARDsON Brown. Four hundred species, Pennsylvania plants;
two hundred and fifty species plants from the Northwest coast;
one hundred and fifty species plants herbarium of Wm. Boo

JoserH Crawrorp. ‘Two hundred and fifty species of No rh
American plants. si

Anna C. Hortsnorne. Six hundred and seventy species of Japan
ese plants.

Tsomas Meewan. Eight hundred species of South African plants. ‘

C. F.Saunpers. Two hundred and fifty species of Pennsylvania —
plants.

J. W. Eckretpt, M.D. The entire Eckfeldt Collection of Lichens.

1898. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 531
INDEX TO GENERA, ETC.,
1898.

By en A ee 378 | Ammospermophilus . . . 123
i oe Rly sk hice 419 | Amorpha ere eaten 21, 297
ONG. ees | RMA cn et cae 84
Acalypha 389 Amphichena . ee
Acanthacee . 391 | Amphicosmia . 271, 277
Acanthochitide. . .. . 288 | Amphiprora ....« «. 112
mecpitey....... 80, 209 | Amphisbeena . 103-105
Cas 5i ve. ca: 21, 297 | Amphisbenide . 103
a 190 | Amphispiza 214
NO ss 30, 304 | Ampullaria. ...... 106
Acroceride....... 161 | Anacardiaceze 381
See Get | RRB) By fw a 419
Actinocyclus . . . 423) Anadenulus 220, 222, 229, 254
Actinoptychus 423, 424 Anadenus ....... 220
meee TG, 200 | ARORRINS oo oh ck ee 381
Adiantum . 409 | Anaphalantus 162
Egialitis. . . . 207 | Anastoma 283
Se ee (2 | Anatidye . . 606s ee 137
Aschninw ..... PS OTS er eee , 148
Ae 395, 412 | Anemone . 16, 17, 293
Agelaius. .... 82, 212 | Angelica . . 302, 405
Agrionine . 142, 147 Anguidse 4 1a
Agropyron. . 45, 314 | Anisolepis . ... . 102, 104
[ae 45, 313 | Anisospira . Ls See
atts kc a a “wate 78 | Anoma . . 279
Alactaga. .... . . 121 | Anomia . 462
Alaria . . . 462) Anona . . 410
Alcide 127, 495 | Anonacer . 410
ee Ee 383 Anthericum 397
Allionia . . . 89 | Anthomyia 162
0 SS ee 42, 312 | Anthomyide . 162
See a Qk | Anthraxm. . «6 3): 158
Anochura...... 462, 463 | Antirrhinum...... 38
Amaryllidacew ..... 895 | Antrostomus .... . 81
ee ae 103 | Aphallarion 219, 222, 228,

Amelanchior . . . . 24, 299 | 226, 228, 235
UO. Sw pie 30 | Aphelocooma ...... 212
Ammodramus 83, 139 Aplopappus. . . . 30,31, 304

532 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898
MORN Gee gree 193 | Berbers... eee 48
mee he os Ga 445 | Berendtia ..... 282, 283
ReCMS .- 268,272; 279 :| Betwla ysl yo. san 41, 311
SC RC ae 492 Biddulphia. . . 423, 468-470
EUR. Peon ie ond ine say 209 | Bidens ns). «2 ee 385
Ayalinces ~ | 23's)... tas 4 411 Bigelowia. . 32, 33, 305
ei eet fel 498 | Bignoniacee ...... 386
i 270, 275 | Binneya 220, 222, 224, 227,
Arbutus . . . . 35, 307 229, 232
ct a ae ae 418, 419, 421 | Binmneyine ....... 227
Brctomya 6) J iscsi 123, 352) Blechnum . . 2. agen 47
miretometta . . .. « «8s 4s 137 | Blenniids . ...-. soe 346
Arctostaphylos . . 30, 306 | Blennius. .-. .-. 37m 346
Mnteg t eC ORRG 78, 207 eA oS Ae eee 105, 106
Arenaria. 0. A 319, 402 | Boide . ... 5 48s 105, 108
AS POMIGNG Ss: (2) 0s, en 4 379 | Bombycide ...... 158
Ariolimacine . . 220, 222, 227 | Bombylius....... 159
Ariolimax 219-222, 224, Bonasa . . . . <7 79
226, 228, 232, 235-237 | Boraginacee ...... 399
Mad fe? se 220-226, 239 | Borus:. . |. . < . 2 ae 106
Arionide ... . .. 220-222 | Boutelona . . . ~ mamas 387
Arionms . oi. loge 226: | Box . 20s, 6 oss Sean 342
Artemisia . 31, 32, 304, 305 | Brachyphylla..... . 333
POEUN a os ae 358 | Brachypodella . 267, 269,
IIE 5 ig haut oe are, (ot 59-61 271, 277, 281
mesa rine s.r Mais. 159 | Brachypodisca .... . 268
BCHOMIYS . 368-370 | Brachypodium .... . 401
Asclepiadacee . 390,405, 411 | Brachypus....... 267
i CT a ne 90, 405 | Branta ... .. . = 138
ANT | i Se ae 158 | Brebissonia . . . «am 112
Aspiimim . 9. 4°: . 47, 314 | Brodiza . .... 29 42, 312
ae are 32,:305;.378 | Babo’. . | # > (eae 80
Astragalus . . . 21, 297, 404 | Buccinids . . . . Gay 190
POR a ss es Ber 418 | ‘Buddleia. « . :. ge 405
PARED ee ace 340 | Buliminus : .. . 73 265
Peer ae KES $40'| Balimog . .. . > 2am 106
Atriplex. . 39, 310, 375 | Buphthalmum .... . 32
Aulacodiscus ...... AZ) ‘Bates... o.e < veaee 80, 209
penne 3. Ss 423 | Cactacee. . . . 386, 389, £10
Th ee 101,/192'| Cadalus ... ...+ i) ae 419
8 i) ee eee ee es) 140'| Caecum .. < . +305 418
BACWISeIA».. S- ss) 2 BMY 113 | Celocentrum .... «5 281
Balan. os) oa A19 | Cusalpinia. - «...%% 354
Balsamorrhiza 32;:805 |(Caiman. . .. 27 101
arieeng 5 |! ube ie 79 | Calandrinia. . . . = 2% 393
a 38, 49 | Calcatius... . . Ae 139
Dazania. <5. «4 47, 315 | Calligonum. ...... 39
Belogona ...... 67, 68 | Callipepla....... 208

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 533
SS See 419 | Chetopleura ...... 288
Callistochiton. ..... 288 | Chetura ...... 81, 211
mmm .. . . 269,271, 276 | Chamea ......°.. 218
Callospermophilus. . . . 123 | Charterginus. . . . 458-460
Calochortus 43, 312, 388 | Chartergus. .. . . 457, 458
Calophanes. ...... 391 | Cheilanthes ...... 387
OS ee 42, 312 | Chelidon® ..... 84, 216
ere 211 |} Ohalydids.... . 2). ; 101
ss 8°. = 2 WAS, GAs | ONO. Gh oa 138
Campylodiscus 429, 423, 425 | Chenopodium. . ... . 375
Camptonectes. ..... 462 | Chilonatalus ...... 326
Seta... . . 87 | Chilonycteris. ..... 326
IS ao, en Lemone” 2. Ae 419
A 124 | Cheronycteris ..... 333
Caprifoliacee. ..... 400 | Chondestes....... 214
Caprifolium ...... 30 | Chordeiles . . 81, 210, 211
SN show ow’ we GO| Darema. es oa ee 343
Sg ws es 223 | Chrysocoma ...... 32
ee Gas | Camynone: 3 uh ae eke fs 157
Cardiospermum .... . Soe | CaRuia. ew. ale ee 462
Mergiam...... 419; 462 | Circinaria’ . . . / ... 244
ee ae See: | SeOld 2° Sede 80, 208
| Se oe Ree } Cleese > ee 21, 297
| CE Per oot teenie” V4 dee ete 137
Carpodacus.... . on, vie | Olarkia . . . £73" % 28, 302
SS eg Se 303 | Clausilia . 265-267, 284
Caryophyllacee 379, 388, Claytonia. . 19, 20, 295, 402

402,410 | Clematis 15, 17, 293, 388
IN 4) "52 os a 393 | Cleome. .... 16,18, 294
IS er Wee |} Chae ae el es 217
SE 400, 407 | Clupanodon ...... 340
OS eee el ee a Pg 340
Ceanothus. . 20, 48, 296, 395 | Cnemiornis. ..... . 496
Cecomorphe ...... 495 | Cincus. . . . . 33, 305, 385
Centrolabrus ...... Sas | Cees (S54, are ees 382
Centrophorus. .... . 889 | Coccyzus ......-. 80
Semtropyxs .... . 103, 104 | Cochlodina. . . 266, 267, 280
Ceophleus 81, 210 | Cochlodinella. . . . 270, 274
ee 68 | Colaxis ..... ‘vce
a 129 | Celocentrum...... 283
Cerastium . 18, 294, 402 | Celostemma ...... 282
Cerataulus . 423, 425 | Colaptes...... 81, 210
Cercosaura....... ee Re ee oad ee 79
ae ee ae 496 | Colletes....... 51-53
Cereus . 373,889, 410 | Collinsia. ....... 38
Cerion . . 283,475-478 | Collomia. . ... . 36, 308
DLE) ac, 6. Son Pea A” ee oe 280
ee 80, 209 | Columbella. ...... 419

534 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898

Galvmbids ... . suse 495 | Cylindrellide. .....
RNIN a's SS cee 207, | Gymbiola . ...._ auiaig
Commelina. . .. . 387, 402 | Cymopterus ... . 29, 308
Commelinacee . 387, 393, 402 | Cynopterus. ... . 316-319
Composite 378, 383, 385, Cyperacee ..... 383, 387
391, 394, 396, 400, 408, 412 | Cyperus ...... 383, 387
Compsomyia ...... 186 | Cypripedium ......
Compsothlypis .... . SD |, Cyrena |...) eee
CASI ws ey 395, 397 | Cytherea. ..... 418, 420
Conophelis: .. . 5° s jsiikae 395 | Dahlia . . 391, 394, 396, 400
Centopus. . 6 3. .'. $1, 212 | Dasyatids .- . =e 33
Convolvulacee ..... 390 |. Dasyatig’. i... sp eee
ORE: «es ee 418, 462 | Dasyphora . ..: 5 Sone
Cordulegaster. . .... 152 | Delphinium .... 18,286
Cordulegasterine . ... 152} Dendragapus......
Gormarem® i¢ .. 5 32's 398 | Dendrocygna. . . . 497, 498
OO ea ee ee oe 433 | Dendroica «_<,- ae 85, 217
Cartimigia © 2." 2 oie ws 379 | Dendropanax. .....
Corvus . 30, 82, 140, 212, 303 | Dentalium .. . . . 2%
Coscinodiscus. . . 422. 423° Dentatia...« See 18, 293
rem as OS ae Boe a eee 172 | Diastodon . >. . Seam
22g pe en 296 | Distoma . = .... acne
Craspedodiscus . ... . 423 | Dicrostonyx .-. - =n
Cramatelia’. ..5.4 5 oe 419 | Diomedea .’. . = gam
eT a ee 403 | Diomedeide ......
RSBEROOUR .tristian a5 24,299 | Diopside . ... .)\ceeee
Crepidula . 418, 419, 435-444 | Diopsis . .......
Or) rd og eee ee ‘498 | Dioscorea ... .
MEE Fs. ke sa os 19 | Dioscoreacew . . . .. ;
Crocodilide ...... 101, | Diotia .: <5, +, ee
CromOguerde cn tas 104 | Diplacodes. . . 3am
Crocothemis ...... 153 | Diplodonta. . ... cam
RpwatATIR ts. Pee 389 | Diplodus . i>... cae
Crymophilus...... 138 | Diploglossus . . . . 1038, 105
Cryptochiton...... 288 | Distectria’..: -° s oumiee
RC TTE = Sense ssh i 380 | Divaricella. ..: +. d,c0m
Crise ys aban or Ah 396 | Dodecatheon . ... 386, 307
Gwenrnibaces.: 2 4 ik iG. 412.| Dodonwea -. +. >::) gee 9
Cee ot ne ea ak 157 | Dolichonyx « «3 foe
NO sk EN eo . 157 Donita. +... .. 3. .5eee
SOMME LIS ox at. ao ie 59, 60 Dosis: ce ches 419, 421
en ee eee 681 | Drymaria < . -.% Sone
CDRICER cs. ge 388 | Dryobates ..... 80, 209
Cupulifers. ... . «» 395'| Duranta. . . .. + as 11
Cyanocitta. .... 82, 212 | Ectopistes ...... -»
LVONODIAS 62 3) 5. ae 287 | Egregia ... . 17,47, 816
Cyclorrhynchus. ... . 128 | Eichornia. . >. 4 3 Jom 384

Cylindrella . . . 264, 267-270 | Elachiptera ......,

1898.]

Eleagnus A . 40, 310
Elaphroptera . . 72-74)
Emballonura . 323-325
Empidonax . 81
Endodontine . . . 221, 265 |
Enyalius ... . 102, 104
Eopsepheea . ste cur ee
Eostrophia . . 283
Epicrates ; . 105
Epidendrum . . 410
Epilobium . . . 405
Epinephelus : . 341
Epiphragmophora . 67-71
Epirobia. 265, 269, 272, 281
Equisetum . . 47, 314
Eretopodes acter Se
Ericacez . 399, 405
Erigeron . 49, 379
Eriocaulon . . 384, 401
Eriocaulones . . 384, 401
Eriophyllum . 33, 306
Erodium . . 380, 404
Eryngium . 390, 398, 405
Eryphyla . - . 419
Erysimum . 18, 294
Erythronium . 43, 313
Esobedea . x. wl ee OOO
Esochara ~ Bide IG
Esocidee 340
Esox . 340
Ethalia. . 419
Eucalodium 267, 268, 270,
282-285
Euchlena . . 413
Eulima . . 419
Eulota . . 68
Eunectes . 105
Eunotia 110-118
Eupagurus = re Son
Eupatorium . . 883, 408
Euphorbia 40, 311, 354,
389, 404
Euphorbiacese 389, 404
Euplectella . 430
Eupleura 418
Eupodiscus 423
Eurycarenus . 159

Eutamias 122, 123, 348-

a

350, 352 | Gnathodon

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

535

Evotomys 358-371
Exogyra 462
Exoprosopa : 158
Eysenhardtia . i 389, 393
Faleo . 80, 209
Farrea . - - 480
Festuca. ‘ 45, 314
WTOONAOIS C08 5) “a, mnt be
Filices 887, 393, 400, 409
Flammulina . 221,. 222
Fragaria 403
Fragilaria . = rct elas
Frasera . 36, 308
| Fratercula ee bey
| Fritillaria . 44, 313
Pacis. «... % 4-20 a
Fulgur . 415, 417, 418, 420
Fulica «: sa =: a eae
| Fulmarus . a
Gadide. . . i ee
Gaillardia . 38, 306
Galeide . » « ooo
Galeoscoptes . 86
Gallinula 498
Garrya . - <a
Gaultheria . . 385, 307
Gazella 6” at ee
Gecinus . 499
Geckonide . 102
Gemphylide . 341
Gentianacee . 399
Geocoecyx 2 Ries? lah ae
Geomalacus ~ 228; 225
Geoscala . - 212, 279
Geothlypis . ee eee
Geraniacese 380, 386, 404
Geranium . Sida lin See
Gerardia ; : 49
Gerrhonotus . . 63-66
Geum 24, 299
Gilia 37, 308
Glabaris . . 106
Glaucidum 209
Glossina 172
Glossophaga , 330-333, 335
Glossophagine ‘ 333
Glyptostoma . ‘ ‘67, 68
Gnaphalium . ‘ 400, 408
ao: > dah AC

536

Gobiid 346
Gobius . «99, o to
CUS a” at EG? Oe
Gomphine. . . 20 Oe
Gongylostoma 269, 271 ;

275, 276, 283
Goniothecium .* |, ae
Gonolobus 411
Gouldia is , ats
Gramine . . eT, a0
Grammatomya ... . 957
Graphomyia . 168
Gratiola > Fae
Grindelia 33, 3806
Grus : 498
Guiraca tig 215
Gutierrezia . . . 384, 306
Habenaria . 388
Habia fg od de
Eiapropoda. .: |.4%. 2) 5 bt
Heematopota . 158
Halenia .' en eoe
Hislia: . . . 2 RBO-192
Halizetus . fake
Balictns «>... 25 BO
Hamulus Hid. ads ek ee GD
Harporhynchus . 86, 217
Helicarion . ; 243
Helicidz i ths, Oe Pee
Helix 68,70; 107; 221
Heliornithide . .. . 495
Helminthoglypta . . . 68
Helminthophila . 216
Beploniad~ 00-35-58 a4
Hemicnemis eee
Hemidactylus . 102, 105

Hemphillia 220-222, 224,

227, 230-235
Herodiones . . . 497
Hesperarion 222, 223, 226,

228, 232, 236-239

Hesperornithidee 495
Hesperornis 495
Heteractites . . . 139
Heterodactylus 101, 103, 105
Heterodonax . . 59-62

Heteroglypta. . . . . 459
Heterospermum . 383

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1898
Heterotheca 383
Hippobosca 164
Hippoboscidee an
Hippophe . . ... .
Hipposideros. . . 319
Holospira. 265, 266, 272,
281-283
Hoplistomera . .- .
Hoplocercus 104
Hordeum 45, 314
Houstonia uum
Hyalodendron . 430-443
Hyalodiscus 423
Hyalonema 430
Hydraspis . 101
Hydromedusa . . . =
ee ee . |
Hyla. . : 2
Hypnum 47, 315
Hypodis . . . om
Icterus . 82, 213
Rene, as! a 5
Idiostemma 270, 275, 283
Iguanide . . . . 102, 108
Hex . . . » » «nn
Illecebracese . 1.) on
Illyonassa . . 435, 437
Inliaculus . . . ae
Tonornis me
Ipomea . . 354, 390
Iridacese . 398, 402
frig... 4 eo
Isarcha . . . >. « Soe
Ischnochiton . . 287, 288
Ischnochitonide . .° 26%
Ischnura ae 147
Stace. 2 : 83, 214
Juniperus . 46, 314, 397
JUssISA ss 4 49
Katharina . 288
Kerivoula . 321-323
Koeleria. . . . . 45, 314
Krynitskia. . . . 37, 309
Kyphoside .... . 342
Labiate . 382, 390,399, 405
Labridz ee
Labrisomus ii: 5
Lagopus . 139, 140

407 «a

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 537
Lamourouxia . 391 | Luceilia . AO) cactat hts Rte
Lanius . 216 | Lucina . 418-420, 462
Lantana 411 Lunda « L2ly «240
Laphria . . » 158 | Lunatia. 462
Laride . 131, 495 | Lupinaster . > oa ysis aloe
Larus . 181, 1382 | Lupinus . 21,298, 395
Laxenecera . . » 158 | Lycodontis siti ate eee
Leda. . . 419, 462 | Lynx ears.” |
Legumen . . 462 | Lysine . SPE 5
Leguminaria. . 60 Lythracez . - 3, oot
Leguminose 380, 388, 393, _ Lythrum * ay BOE

395, 403, 410 Mabuia. . 104-106
Leia. . . ». « + 280 | Maceo 270, 275
Leipomeles_ is . . 448 | Macha . when 1 ae
Lepidopleuride . bind ae Machzerhamphus . 321
Lepidopleurus . . 287 | Maclura 41, 311
Lepidopodide - * 341 | Macoma ia eee
Lepidopus . . . 341) Macroceramus 266, 280 282
Leptarionta , . . 68) Macrodontes . . 471, 472
Leptocephalide . . + 839 | Macrorhamphoside . 340
Leptocephalus . « 039 Macrorhamphosus 340
Leptocnemis . . » 142 | Mactra.. 0”. + a
Leptosolen . 462 Malvacer . 381, 389, 410
Lepus . . 124) Malvastrum . 19, 294, 389
Lestes . . 147. Malvaviscus i! * 5 een
Leucosticte . . 139, 213 | Mammillaria . 386
Lewisia. . . . 16,19, 295 Marcasite . 485
Lia... =... . 266, 280) Margarita . 4&6
Liatris . . 34, 306 Marsilia 383
Libellula . 143, 145, 146, 152 Marsiliacer » +, OOe
Libelluline . . . 143 152 | Matricaria. 34, 306
oe adage ‘ 333 Maynardia. » . 475
Liliacer 385, 388, 397, 409 Mevachile . 55
Lilium . : 44, 49 | Megaderma 320
Limneea . . . 439 | Megascops 80
Linacez . . + » « « 404] Megaspira . 83, 284
Linum . . 19, 294, 404 Megatrigon 159, 160
Liomesus - « » + 419 Melanerpes .. . 81, 210
Lipidosternon . 104 Melanostoma . 159
Lithospermum . + 399 | Melosira 422, 423
Littorina . . . . 495, 437 | Melospiza . 84, 139, 215
kama. . . . 340 | Mentha. 390
Lobelia. . . 385, 407 | Menziesia . . 49
Lobeliacee . , . 385, 407 Merganser . * », 140
Loganiaces - » 405 | Merula . ie! 9 Claes
Lomaria 47, 315 | Mesoplura . . . 59, 60,,
Lonicera . 30, 303, 304 | Metastoma 282

35

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

538

Micrarionta 68
Microchloa <2 ae e foe
Micronycteris . 328-330
Microseris . . 84, 306
Microsty lis pay lore eee
Microtus . . 120,358 368
Middendorffa. . . . . 290
Milla : . 3885, 388
Mimosa . oY aes Se eee ee
Mimulus 38, 49, 309, 407
Mimus . Oe he ae
Mirabilis 379
Mischocyttarus 445
Mniotilta 85
Molothrus . 82
Monadenia. ee Sa
Montia . 3. 20) "286
Mopalia . . 287, 288
Mopalliidze pee ee
Morellia. 178, 175, 188
Mugilidse oy ee
Mulinia 418
Mullide 341
Mullus . 341
Mureena 340
Mureenide . ; 340
Mus . : 121, 358
Musca 172, 173, 183
Muscidze 172
Muscinia = 168, 183
Mustelus Co see Bee
Mychostoma . 268,272, 279
Myiarchus . ee ey ee
Myodes . eh ae slite,
Myospila . 168, 183
Myotis . . ; oe toed
Myrtacez . i a
Nassa Love 4138
Natalinse SS “Bue
Natalus . . 026-328
Navicula . 110, 422, 423
Nectarina . yo ae
Nectouxia . 390, 399
Nephrolepis . . 409
Nerita 202
Neritopsis . 202
Neusticurus 104
Nucifraga . 212

Nicotiana: 37, 309, 382
Nitzschia 110, 113, 114
Notholiena . a 387
Nyctaginacez . 379
Nycticeius . 321
Nycticorax .
Nymphea . . 384,. 412
Nympheacee . : 384
Oceanodroma . 136
Ochromyia . ——:
Odontostomus. 267, 2838, 471
(Enothera 28, 302, 378,
381, 398
Oidemia Aye 138
Oligostylus 282
Olivella . 418
Olor , 498
Onagracese 376, 381, 398, 405
Onychomys : 194 .
| Ophiodes : 103, 104
| Ophiogomphus . 150-152
Orchidacese 388, 398, 409
Oreortyx . » 20s
Ornithomyia - 164
Ornithorhynchus 492
Orobanchaceze 395
Oroscoptes . ae
Orthetrum . . 145, 166
Orthocarpus 38, 309
Orthomesus ‘ . 202
Oryzomys . : 480, 481
Ostrea 418-420, 462
Oscinidse ; 164
Otocoris 82
Oxalis . 380, 386, 404
Oxybaphus . . | Oo, eee
Oxytropis - . 16,21, 298
Pachystima 20, 296
| Pagellus . . 3842
Pagrus . 341
Palzlodus . 2)
Palamedea . . 496, 497
Palamedeide . ; 497
| Pangonia . 3 ee
142,143, 152

Nucula .
Nuttallia
Nuttallina .

Pantala .

418,419, 402

(1898.

58
288-290

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 539
Pantodactylus . 108, 104 | Phytolacca . . 3894
Papaveraceee . . . 379 | Phytolaccaceze a) ae ee
Papuina i ee eee | Lica . 140, 212
Paracompsomyia . 169, 184 | Pineria . «oe ee
Parochromyia . . 178 | Pipilo 84, 216
Parus 87, 218 | Pinna pete Ae
Passer . . . 83 | Pinnulacea 381
Passerella . 139, 215 | Pinnularia ... - 110-1 18
Passeres . 489, 493 | Pinus . 46, 49, 314, 395, 397
Passerina 84, 215 | Piper . é 410
Paulicea 101, 108 | Piperacee . . 398, 410
Pecten 419, 421 | Piranga. 84, 215
Pectis : . . 9392 | Placentaceras . . . 462
Pectunculus . 462 | Placiphorella . ry pit ih joan
Pedicularis 16, 38, 309, 391, 400 | Placosoma . . 108, 105
Pellea . . 393 Placuanomia . A
Pentstemon . 39, 49, 309, _ Plagiobothrys 37, 3809

400, 407 Plagiogramma ot gp
Peperomia . . . 398 | Plantaginacese . 383, 407
Pepsis 75 | Plantago . 383, 407
Pernettya . 399 | Platemys oi, (iy ce
Perrieria . . 254 | Platophrys 347
Petalostemon . 21, 298 | Platyceras . 436
Petricola . « » « 60) Plagiodontes . 473
Petrochelidon. . . 84, 216 | Platystoma. 108
Peucedanum . . 28,302, 303 Platytrochus . 462
Phacelia . 37, 308, 309 | Plectrophenax of an
Phainopepla . . 216 Pleurotoma . 190, 347
Phalacrocoracide 137 | Pliorhytis . is Sea ie oe
Phalacrocorax 137 | Plumbaginacerw . . . . 390
Phalnoptilus 210 | Plumbago ; ee,
Phalangium 43 | Podalirius . ~ ee,
Phalaropus. . 139 Podilymbus thie, ee
Phaseolus 354, 380, 388, 389 | Polemoniacee . : 382
Phellandrium . 29 Polemonium . of, 308
Phenacarion 249 Polistes . . 446-448
Philaete. . . . . . . 498. Pollenia . 169, 175
Philadelphus . . . 27, 301 | Polybia . 448-456, 458
Philibertia . - + « 890 Polychrus . - 108, 106
Philohela . 79 Polygala » 21, 297
Philomycide . . . 221 | Polygonacee . oh vy Ss,
Phlox 48, 315 Polygonum 40,310, 384
Phoca ; . 200 | Polymita 68, 265
Pheenicopteride , 497 Polymyxus Marae rs
Phorbia. 162 Polynices Mee toe
Phyllocactus . 411 | Polypodium. . 387,400, 409°
Phyllonycteris ; 333-3387 | Pomacentride .. . . 343
Physalis . 394, 406 | Pontederiacese 384

540

Toormies fo. 3. ge
Popa. ce 1 0S MAR
Portulacacee . 386, 388,

398, 402
Porzana ee
Potentilla . . 25, 300. 403
Page. i. a) a ee
Prionodactylus 101, rite 104
Procellariide . . . 135, 495
Prometheichthys . 341
Prophysaon 59)-228, 240-254
Prunella 405
tines. ~ « |.) 320; s00
Psaltriparus - RLS
Psammobia . . . 957, 59-62
Psammobiide. . *° . . 57
Psammocola 59-61
Paammosolen.< 2". rr 69
Psammotella . .. .-. 58
Pseudauliscus . : 423
Pseudogryphus 208
Pseudoplatystoma 108
Pseudopyrellia ee hie
Pseudo-Tsuga. . . . . 49
Psidium . Oe era
Psoralea , 23; 48, 298
Pteria PA abe
Pterodontia 161
Pteropus ee ae ee ei
Pumas: 7’. .*..*2° ee
Pugnellus . 462
Pupa. . . se Paibo
Pupide . . 265, 284
Purpura ,. |e a LO
Purshia. . . . » 26; 800
Putorius a a, SUL
Pycnoptychia | : « BGr Bio
Pygopodes. 489, 495, 497
Pyramidula eRe aa
Pyrifusus 462
Pyrola . pe CD
Pyrus 24,47, 299
OUCMBOUS 4. 3. ss “UN aT
Quercus. . 41, 311, 388, 395
Onisonivigehs °s ws 2. ee ee
Raja. . , 339
Rajide . 339
Rallus 498

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1898.
Ranunculacee 879, 885, 403
Ranunculus 379, 385, 403
Raphanus . ‘ 380
Regulus . ; 218
Reithronycteris 333-337
Reseda . : 880
Resedaceze . 3880
Rhabdonema . 468
Rhamnacee . + -SRe
Rhamnus 21,266
Rhingia. : Js! Mie
Rhinolophus . 319
Rhodea . 284
Rhogeéssa . 321
Rebus: ct eae ‘21, 296
Ribes «. . 27,001; 302, 398
Rissa : 131
Rosa . 26, 301
Rosacee . 408
Rosmarus . -198- 201
Rubiacese 396, 407
Rubus 26, 301
Ruellia . 391
Ruvettus . 341
Sagittaria . 383
Salicaceze 379
Salix 379
Salsola .. 875
Salvia 39, 310, 382, 399, 405
Sanguinolaria . 58-62
Santolina 3 See
Sapindaceee . 389, 394
Sarcobatus . 40, 310
Saxicola . 139, 436
Saxifragacee . me | 398
Sayornis 81, 2145. 212
Scala ? 418
Scalaria . 419, 462
Scaphella 191, 192
Scaphellidze poe
Schinus . 381
Schizonyx . 146
Schkubhria . 383
Scheenocaulon 409
Scienidse 342
Scincidee 104
Sciurus . ; 348
Scolecophagus 213

|
.

Fi

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 541
Scomber 341 | Sparisoma . 9 Tee mg Seat
Scombride . 341 | Spartina . 46, 270, 314
Scopus . . - 497 | Spartocentrum. . ... . 282
Scorpena . . 344-346 | Spatula. ey A ee
Scorpeenidse 344 | Speotyto . . . . 209, 354
Seotophilus . . 321 | Spheeralcea i a eee
Scrophulariace 385, 391, Spheeroides . 344
400, 406 | Sphecodes . 56

Seutellaria . . . 39, 310) Sphyrena . 340
Sechium ~ « «+ « 412 | Sphyrenide 340
Sectilumen. . . . 271, 276 | Sphyrapicus jin Jee ee
Selurus. . .. . 85, 86 -Spinus . . 83, 2138, 214
Sedum . . . . 28,302, 403 | Spirea . 26, 49, 301
Selaginella . . . . 886 | Spiranthes . += letheeiee
Selasphorus . . . . . 211 | Spiroceramus. 281
Senecio 373, 392, 400, Spirostemma . 270
408, 412 | Spisula . ‘+ hae ee

Sepside . . » 168.) Spizella ... . . S83e8i
Sepsis . . 163 | Spondyliosoma . 342
Serranide . 341 | Squalide . 339
Serranus 341 | Stachys. 405
Sesuvium . . . « 9878 | Stauroneis . 422-497
Shepherdia . . . 40, 310 | Steganopodes . ‘ 497
Sialia . .. . . 88, 218 | Stegastes 343
Sibthorpia . . .« 406 | Stenanthium . 397
Silene 410 | Stenodermata . 333
Siliquaria . 9-61 | Stephanopyxis 423
Siphonostoma . . + « 268 | Stercorariide . . . . 130
Simorhynchus . . 128, 129 | Stercorarius . . . 130, 131
Sisymbrium Tae ey ee 133
Sisyrinchium . . . 398, 402 | Sternobrithes. . 157
Sitta . afk 86 | Stevia 392, 396, 397, 400
Smyrnium . Nh: ee ge ee ff |
Solanacew 382, 390, 394, Stratiomyide . ay LOT
399, 406 Strigilla penal atiet e

Solanum 382, 391, 394, Strophina 269, 271, 279
399, 400, 406 | Struthiolaria. . . . . 190

Solea 347 | Sturnella ... . 82, 218
Solecurtus . 59-61 Gubaling. «Gs 4 in, w BBA
Soleide . ; 347 | Succinea 354
Solen . 59, 61, 62, 418 | Surirella 110
Solenoglyphe . 108 | Swertia . 36
Solidago . 34, 1, 306, 385 | Sylvania 86
Somalia . 181 Sympetrum eer eee
Somateria . 138 | Symphoricarpos . . 49, 400
Sophora . » « « 854 | Synodontide . . .. . 840°
Sorbus - + « « « 47, 315 | Synodus 340
Sparide .... . . 3841 | Syneca. 446

542

oo 39, 310
Syrians hw es 80
Byrne: ox... . Sayer 159
PIS sg! x owe nee 159
sy NE Se eae 157
MBDBRUS so gee PS . 168
SS es Dart 470
Tachycineta ... . 84, 216
MABON ng as ye te 59-62
Tagetes . 391, 392
Talinum . 386, 388, 412
RINGS sb ie 123,436
A sd Sy 8 a te, 28 457
Pawodinm 56.0 5 AMO 413
Tesenid 4o.3. ote 386
to a 103, 108
Telephoromyia .... . 74
Soming cS xy 62, 418, 429
Testudinids : 101
CMOS. Gh) a Ge 101
SGN teak iyié 195
Tetraodontide . 344
Thalossoma. . 343
Thalia! .: ia
Thalictrum. .. a) “403
Thanmass «i... 268, 270
Turyothoras 3027. 2 ).°% 217
BB BOR as. . SSG 12
oe a ce hr eG
Tomelasmus 271, 276
$0 eS as 283
TOrmGUnh «sic <. . 418
Tonicella 287
(Te cs 139
Toxifera . 190
Preacher. 0% i Se 269
Trachinide . 346
Trachinus 346
Traenere: sss cys Sb 341
Trachydermon 287, 290
Tradescantia .. . 393, 402
Ji ee en 143, 144
Triceratium ...... 423
Trichechus. ... . 196, 197
‘Prichotropia . 25 G'6 462
Trifolium 24, 299, 380, 403, 404
Bgl! ee a ree 347
Triglide ‘ee ee 347

[1898
TEMPOWIA > és <P 462, 464
Trigoniarca, . .<. sone 462
Perea! 5. We oes 44, 313
Tree! 5a) 139
Tiithemis:..)c.-.. Ge eee 146
Trochilus.. 5. ses. 81, 211
Troglodytes . 86, 139, 354
Tropidurds::).. 259s 102
Trypatas.s. < ae 163
Trypetids.. «ge 163
Pula: cen 4 ks . . 462, 464
Tupinambis. .. . 103, 104, 106
Paro: s 5/4: con lo 267
Turbonilla .. .. + 445058
Turdus «+ «. » 0.
| Turritella . . . 419, 462, 463
Tylonycteria' . >; = <2e8 321
|) PyTaNNUs: 2) Seas 81, 211
| Umbellifere . . 390, 398, 405
Umbrina 5... 5 .. e 342
Cot ee ese 129, 140
Urinator. .. . =) .i.)ee 126
Urinatores.. . .... 2m 495
| Urinatoridss, .... a: ae 126
Urocoptids. . ... am 476
Urocoptis 267, 270, 273,
281, 282
Urophycis. 4...) |e 347
Vrosalpins: 4) 417, 418
Urostrophus 102, 104
Urticacese ; ») ae
Vaccinium . . 36, 307
Veleda; 4. os. «1%, Gea 462
Vendrysia . 280
Veniolla..a7 +. Jasco 462
VWoonus 0) >. f a5' 8 418
Veratrum 44, 313
Verbenaceze . . 890, 411
Vespertilio. . : . 27 321
Veaperus .) 6 .(4.. 5) ae 321
| Viburnum . 482-484
Viola ..a +. oe 405.
Violseew ji 6. 5 eee 405
VaRees sce pepwe « 84, 85, 216
Volutacea® » s<'s+ Ae 191
Volutide...... +.4 .. +98 192
Volutomitra . . . . 191, 192
Fae on Le » » 402

Weldenia

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 543

jp Ct a ar as aio: |. Zeoxmenia. 290) 6. tg 392
PRONE) i 2, saad, cao | Bindla ou fe as 392
NE 68! Pe ag, oh UY 132 | Zizania ...... 46, 314
seononiens 2°) is. a Set Zomabes: 9s 5-515. es Oe 67
Xerophyllum. . . . 44, 313 | Zonochroa. ...... 178
Pees See Sh A Te 419 | Zonotrichia. ... . 139, 214
Mamelodia . <°.+. 9... Oa ee 388, 393
a?) ah i eae he 413 | Zygadenus.... . 45, 313

Zenaidura . . . 79, 208, 354 | yo a aa Rae 146

544 PROCEEDINGS OF

THE ACADEMY OF

(1898.

GENERAL INDEX.

Allen, Harrison M. D. and
George H. Horn, M. D., pro-
ceedings of a meeting held in
commemoration of, 11.

Arnold, Crawford,
ment of death of, 11.

Barber, C. M. and T. D. A. Cock- |

from | 9;
_ Conchological Section, report of

erell. A new weasel
New Mexico, 89, 188.

Barr, Martin W., M.D. Idiocy,
educationally, 89.

Bascom, Florence. Petrographic
methods of rock determination,
488.

Biological and Microscopical Sec-
tion, report of the, 512.

Botanical Section, report of the |

515.
Boyer, C.S. Some new species
of diatoms (Plate XXIV),

262, 468. Report of the Bio- |
logical and Microscopical] Sec-

tion, 512.

Brinton, Daniel G., M.D. The |

ethnology of the Philippines,
467. Report of Professor of
Ethnology, 519.
Brown, Stewardson.
the Botanical Section, 515.
Calvert, Philip P. Odonata

(Dragonflies) from the Indian |

Ocean and from Kashmir, col-

lected by Dr. W. L. Abbott, |

141. The radula in the squid,
202.
Chapman, Henry ©. M. D.

Notes on the squid, 202. Re-
port of Curators, 509.

announce- |

Report of

1898.

Cockerell, T. D. A. New and
little-known bees from Wash-
ington State, 50.

Committee on Hayden Memorial
Award, appointment of, 205.
Report of, 338.

ree a Standing, for 1898,

the, 513.

Conklin, E. G. Environmental
and sexual dimorphism in
Crepidula(Plates X XI, XXII,

| XXITT), 262, 435.

Cope, Francis R. The summer

_ birds of Susquehanna Co.,

Penna., 9, 76.

_ Corresponding Secretary, report

of, 504.

Coues, Elliott, M.D. Notes on
Mr. Meehan’s paper on the
plants of Lewis and Clark’s
Expedition across the conti-
nent, 1804-06, 262, 291.

Council and Standing Commit-
tees for 1899, 520.

Crosse, J. C. H., announcement
of death of, 429.

Curators, report of, 509.

Dall, William H. Synopsis of
recent and tertiary Psammobi-
idee of North America, 57. On
the genus Halia of Risso, 89,
190.

DeCamp, Wm. H., announce-

ment of death of, 429.

_ Elections during 1898, 521.

=.

on i eee as

1898.]

Entomological Section, report of
the, 514.

Fox, William, J. Contributions
to a knowledge of the Hymen-
optera of Brazil, No.4. Thyn-
nine and additions, 9, 72.
Contributions to a knowledge
of the Hymeneptera of Brazil,
No. 5. Vespide, 429, 445.
Synopsis of the United States
species of the hymenopterous
genus Centris Fabr., 488.

Frazer, Dr. Persifor. Glimpses of
Russia in Europe, Asia and
Asia Minor, 11.

General Index, 544.

Goldsmith, E. Volcanic rocks
of Mesozoic age in Pennsyl-
vania, (Plates II, III, 1V, V),
90. The petrifaction of fossil
bones, 98.

Hall, James, announcement of
death of, 357.

Hamilton, S. Harbert. The
occurrence of Marcasite in the
Raritan formation of N. J.,
479, 485.

Harshberger, J. W., M. D, Bo-
tanical observations on the
Mexican flora a on
the flora of the Valley of Mex-
ico, 263, 372.

Heilprin, Angelo. Geology and
physical geography of the
Klondike Gold Mining Region,
488.

Hough, Garry de N.,M. D. The
Muscide collected by Dr.
Donaldson Smith in Somali-
land, 155, 165.

Index to Genera, etc., 531.
James, J. Wharton.
Enchanted Mesa, 467.

Jefferis, Wm. W., a
as Curator of the \
Vaux collections, 205. Report
on William 8. Vaux collee-
tions, 512.

The

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

—— —

545

Johnson, Charles W. Diptera
collected by Dr. A. Donald-
son Smith in Somaliland, East-
ern Africa, 157. New cretace-
ous fossils from an artesian
well-boring at Mount Laurel,
N. J., 429, 461.

Jordan, David Starr and James
Alexander Gunn, Jr. List of
fishes collected at the Canary
Islands by Mr. O. F. Cook,
with descriptions of four new
species, 338, 339.

Judson, Oliver A., M. D., an-
nouncement of death of, 202.
Keller, Ida A. Notes on the
growth of Viburnum lantan-
oides (Plate X XV), 479, 482.
Letson, E. J. Description of a
new Tethys (Aplesia), (Plate
VIII), 89, 193.
Libbey, William, Jr. The En-

chanted Mesa, 467.

Librarian, report of, 505.

McKean, Thomas, announcement
of death of, 155. ‘

Marcou, Jules, announcement of
death of, 338.

Meehan, Thomas. The plants of
Lewis and Clark’s expedition
across the continent, 1804—
1806,12. Report of the Botan-
ical Section, 515.

Mercer, Henry C. The bone cave
at Port Kennedy and its par-
tial examination in 1894, 1895
and 1896, 479.

Merriam, C. Hart. Description
of three new rodents from the
Olympic Mountains, Washing-
ton, 351, 352.

| Miller, Gerrit S., Jr. List of bats

intment |
“illlam 8. |

collected by Dr. W.S. Abbott
in Siam, 262,316. Descriptions
of five new Phyllostome bats
262, 326. A new Chipmunk
from Northeastern China, 338,
348. Descriptions of a new

546 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

genus and species of Microtine |

rodent from Siberia, 357, 368.
Notes on the Arctic Red-
backed mice, 357, 358.

Mills, Chas. K., M. D.
physiologically, 89.

Mineralogical and Geological
Section, report of the, 517.

Moore, Clarence B. Certain ab-
original mounds of the South
Carolina coast, 262, 263. Cer-
tain aborignal mounds of the
Savannah River, 262, 268.
Certain aboriginal mounds of
the Altamaha River, 262, 263.
Recent acquisitions, 262, 263.

Moore, J. Perey. Hyalodendron
navalium, a new genus and
species of Euplectillid sponge
(Plate XIX, XX), 338, 430.

Morris, Charles. On the antiquity
of man from the standpoint of
evolution, 263.

Nolan, Edw. J., M.D. A memo-
rial of Dr. Joseph Leidy, 465.
Report of RecordingSecretary,
500. Report of Librarian, 505.

Officers, Councillors and Finance
Committee for 1899, 520.

Ornithological Section, report of
the, 518.

Palmer, T. Chalkley. Errant
frustules of Eunotia major,
(Plates VI, VII), 89, 110.

Perot, Charles P., announcement
of death of, and memorial min-
ute, 479.

Pilsbry, Henry A. The function
of the radula, 202. Chitons
collected by Dr. Harold Heath
at Pacific Grove, near Mon-
terey, Cal., 262, 287. A new
land snail from Clarion Island,
351, 354. New species of Odon-
tostomus from Brazil and
Argentina, 429, 471. Margar-
ita Sharpii, a new Alaskan
gastropod, 479, 486. Report

Idiocy,

[1898.

of the Conchological Section,
513. Report of Professor in
Department of Mollusea, 519.

Pilsbry, H. A. andE. G. Vanatta.
Anatomical notes on certain
West American Helices,
(Plate I), 67. Revision of the
North American slugs: Bin-
neya, Hemphillia, Hespera-
rion, Prophysaon and Anaden-
ulus. (Plates IX, X, XI,
XI1, XIII, XIV, XV, XVI),
156, 219. Material toward a
natural classification of the
Cylindrelloid snails (Plates
XVII, XVIII), 203, 264.
Some Cuban species of Cerion,
465, 475.

Rand, Theodore D. The Birds-
boro trap quarries, 10. Report
of the Mineralogical and Geo-
logical Section, 517.

Recording Secretary, report of,
500.

Report of Biological and Micro-
scopical Section, 512.

Report of the Botanical Section,
515.

Report of the Conchological Sec-
tion, 513.

Report of Corresponding Secre-
tary, 504

Report of Curators, 509.

Report of the Entomological See-
tion, 514.

Report of Librarian, 505.

Report of the Mineralogical and
Geological Section, 517.

Report of the Ornithological Sec- .

tion, 518.
Report of Recording Secretary,
500.

| Report on William S. Vaux

Collections, 512.
Reports of the Professors, 519.
Rhoads, Samuel N. On a small
collection of mammals from

Northeastern China, 11, 120.

1898.]

A new grasshopper mouse from
New Mexico, 155, 194. Notes
on the fossil walrus of Eastern
North America, 155, 196.

Sandberger, Fridolin, announce-

ment of death of, 338.

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 547

Southern New Jersey, 480.
Report of the Ornithological
Section, 518.

Torell, Otto Martin, reception of
Hayden Memorial Award, 338.
Biographical notice of, 355.

Seale, Alvin. Notes on Alaskan | Valentine, John K., announce-

Water Birds, 11, 126.

Shallcross, John, announcement
of death of, 479.

Sharp, Benjamin, M. D. Rock
inscriptions in Kauai, Hawai- |
ian Islands, 203. Report of
Corresponding Secretary, 504.

Shufeldt, R. W., M. D. Some
observations on the classifica-
tion of birds, 480, 489.

Singerly, Wm. M., announcement
of death of, 155.

Skinner, Henry, M.D. Report
of the Entomological Section, |
514. Report of Professor in
Department of Insecta, 519.

Spiller, Wm. G., M. D. Idiocy,
anatomically, 89.

Stone, Witmer. On the breeding |
habits of birds of Eastern
Pennsylvania, 155. A study of
the type specimens of birds in
the collection of the Academy |
of Natural Sciences of Phila-
delphia, with a brief history of |
the collection, 480. Occur-
rence of Oryzomys palustris in

ment of death of, 11.

Van Denburgh, John. The Ger-
rhonotus of the San Lucan
fauna, Lower California, with
diagnosis of other West Amer-
ican species, 63. Birds ob-
served in Central California in
the summer of 1893, 156, 206.

Vaux, J. Waln, announcement
of death of, 262.

Von Ihering, Dr. H. Contribu-
tions to the herpetology of Sao
Paulo, Brazil.—I, 101.

Warner, Redwood F., announce-
ment of death of, 488.

_ Wernwag, Theodore, announce-

ment of death of, 262.

| William S. Vaux Collections,

report on, 512.

Witmer, Lightner.
physiologically, 89.

Woolman, Lewis and Charles S.
Boyer. Fossil mollusks and
diatoms beneath the Dismal
Swamp, Virginia and North
Carolina. With notes on the
diatoms, 11, 414.

Idiocy,

**

”

PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1898. PLATE I.

PILSBRY AND VANATTA. ANATOMY OF HELICIDA.

we
Thy a
SEAS Ff

4
tw,
»

og

PALMER

Ss

MOVEMENTS

OF

PLATE VI.

rm

PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1898. PLATE Vil.

<2; = +

4

PALMER. MOVEMENTS OF EUNOTIA

PLATE VIII

PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1898.

ne 2

TETHYS PILSBRYI terson.

nm

e
«

\ Les

VG Z-

PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1895. PLATE IX.

+

Sia Seo
stn fis Ws © loss

Ps

Pilsbry and Vanatta del.

PILSBRY AND VANATTA. NORTH AMERICAN SLUGS,

Pilshbry and Vanatta del.

PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1898. PLATE

SSE ;

Mu paw eT TD

<a PP ist etd-
re tahoe
err hc alae

PILSBRY AND VANATTA. NORTH AMERICAN SLUGS.

re

PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1898 PLATE XI.

Pilsbry and Vanatta del .

PILSBRY AND VANATTA. NORTH AMERICAN SLUGS.

—————————

PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1898. PLATE XII.

Pilsbry and Vanatta del.

PILSBRY AND VANATTA. NORTH AMERICAN SLUGS.

ee

7 oe

PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1898 PLATE XIII.

Pilsbry and Vanatta del.

PILSBRY AND VANATTA. NORTH AMERICAN SLUGS.

PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1898. PLATE XIV.

P=

eagbeer:

3 Ish
Vis
a

“bl

a Bee A, 4

a
4

64

Pilsbry and Vanatta del,

PILSBRY AND VANATTA. NORTH AMERICAN SLUGS.

PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1898 PLATE XV

iis wesirs .
cena es

Pilsbry and Vanatta del

PILSBRY AND VANATTA. NORTH AMERICAN SLUGS

RAR REM ot

TERS |
wo (Ey
» Pw

Vilsbry and Vanatta del. .
PILSBRY AND VANATTA. NORTH AMERICAN SLUGS.

=

PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1898.

Tome

5
§
i
ig

HYALODENDRON NAVALIUM MooRE

PLATE XX.

eo @eceae eee
DOSPFEDDEDHS re

A sé
t- ~. ns 3 Heh 4 y
a SS " “ ‘
“g = t ra 7 > °
~ i a) .
mi

“*

PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1898. PLATE XXIV.

BOYER ON DIATOMS

PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1898. PLATE XXV.

KELLER ON VIBURNUM LANTANOIDES.

QH Aeademy of Natural Sciences

1 of Philadelphia
A2 Proceedings
v.50

Biological

& Medical

Serials

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY

HOPNONQOH ARNO NAAN
AAAS SAS RAN
OAD DIMNY